JP7409656B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, for example.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been known in which symbols are displayed variably when a predetermined condition is met, and when a special result is derived, the game machine is controlled to a special gaming state advantageous to the player.

As this type of gaming machine, in addition to the special gaming state that is controlled when a special result is derived, a variable display of a specified number of times is performed in the high probability time reduction state even if no special result is derived. A gaming machine has been disclosed that allows the game to enter a high-probability non-time saving state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-174800

The gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a new gaming feature of shifting from a high probability time reduction state to a high probability non-time reduction state to create a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In recent years, there has been a desire for gaming machines with even newer gameplay features.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine with new gaming properties.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Main control means (for example, main control circuit 200) that controls the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (for example, a sub control circuit 300) that performs control related to the performance,
The main control means is
A starting information acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S392) that acquires the starting information when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
When the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, a lottery means (for example, in S104) that can draw any one of a plurality of results including a special result (for example, a jackpot) and a specific result (for example, a time-saving win) using the start information. A main CPU 201) that performs processing,
A symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S93 and S94) that can execute variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the variation start condition;
A gaming state control means that controls the gaming state (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S282),
Prior to the lottery by the lottery means, advance determination means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S396) capable of determining the result of the lottery in advance;
an information transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S322) that transmits information related to the progress of the game to the production control means;
has
The gaming state control means includes:
Normal gaming state and
a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is a gaming state that can be transitioned to when the special result is derived;
A gaming state that can be transitioned to when the specific result is derived, and a specific game in which the probability that the special result is derived is the same as the normal gaming state, but the degree of advantage for the player is different from the normal gaming state. state (for example, a time-saving gaming state);
The specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state) to which the special gaming state is controlled based on the special result being derived, and a first specific gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state) in which the specific result is derived. a second specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state) different from the first specific gaming state that is transferred to the special gaming state without being controlled based on the above,
The performance control means is
Having a preceding effect control means for controlling such that a preceding effect is performed prior to the variable display of the symbol when information indicating a result of the preceding judgment by the preceding determining means is received from the information transmitting means,
The advance performance includes a first advance performance (for example, a jackpot type look-ahead performance format) that can be executed when the information indicating the result of the advance determination by the advance determination means is the special result, and a advance determination by the advance determination means. includes at least a second advance performance that can be executed when the result is the specific result and has a different performance form from the first advance performance (for example, a time-saving look-ahead performance form),
The preceding performance control means is
The earlier starting information among the starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means is determined to be the identification result by the preceding determining means, and the earlier starting information among the starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means In the case where the starting information acquired after the starting information is determined to be the special result by the preceding determining means,
When the second advance effect is executed based on the determination result of the earlier start information, control is possible such that the first advance effect is not executed based on the determination result of the later start information;
When the second preceding performance is not performed based on the determination result of the previous starting information, control is possible such that the first preceding performance can be performed based on the determination result of the subsequent starting information,
Regarding the preceding performance executed by the preceding performance control means, the rate at which the first preceding performance is executed and the rate at which the second preceding performance is executed are configured to be different,
The first specific gaming state is characterized in that it is a gaming state in which the fluctuation start condition is relatively more likely to be satisfied than the second specific gaming state.

(2) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Main control means (for example, main control circuit 200) that controls the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (for example, a sub control circuit 300) that performs control related to the performance,
The main control means is
A starting information acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S392) that acquires the starting information when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
When the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, a lottery means (for example, in S104) that can draw any one of a plurality of results including a special result (for example, a jackpot) and a specific result (for example, a time-saving win) using the start information. A main CPU 201) that performs processing,
A symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S93 and S94) that can execute variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the variation start condition;
A gaming state control means that controls the gaming state (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S282),
Prior to the lottery by the lottery means, advance determination means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S396) capable of determining the result of the lottery in advance;
an information transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S322) that transmits information related to the progress of the game to the production control means;
has
The gaming state control means includes:
Normal gaming state and
a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is a gaming state that can be transitioned to when the special result is derived;
A gaming state that can be transitioned to when the specific result is derived, and a specific game in which the probability that the special result is derived is the same as the normal gaming state, but the degree of advantage for the player is different from the normal gaming state. state (for example, a time-saving gaming state);
The specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state) to which the special gaming state is controlled based on the special result being derived, and a first specific gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state) in which the specific result is derived. a second specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state) different from the first specific gaming state that is transferred to the special gaming state without being controlled based on the above,
The performance control means is
Having a preceding effect control means for controlling such that a preceding effect is performed prior to the variable display of the symbol when information indicating a result of the preceding judgment by the preceding determining means is received from the information transmitting means,
The advance performance includes a first advance performance (for example, a jackpot type look-ahead performance format) that can be executed when the information indicating the result of the advance determination by the advance determination means is the special result, and a advance determination by the advance determination means. includes at least a second advance performance that can be executed when the result is the specific result and has a different performance form from the first advance performance (for example, a time-saving look-ahead performance form),
The preceding performance control means is
The earlier starting information among the starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means is determined to be the special result by the preceding determining means, and the earlier starting information among the starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means When the starting information obtained after the starting information is determined to be the specific result by the preceding determining means,
When the first advance effect is executed based on the determination result of the earlier start information, control is possible so as not to execute the second advance effect based on the determination result of the later start information;
When the first advance effect is not executed based on the determination result of the earlier start information, control is possible such that the second advance effect can be executed based on the determination result of the later start information;
Regarding the preceding performance executed by the preceding performance control means, the rate at which the first preceding performance is executed and the rate at which the second preceding performance is executed are configured to be different,
The first specific gaming state is characterized in that it is a gaming state in which the fluctuation start condition is relatively more likely to be satisfied than the second specific gaming state.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability.

FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the game flow of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of a general game state. This is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximately) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is a modification of the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 13. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start of special symbols of the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start of special symbols of the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols of the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol determination table of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol type determination table of the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 3) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 4) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of initial setting processing at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of power cutoff processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of time saving management processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of counter update processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time-saving counter update process of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of ceiling counter update processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of counter determination processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition determination process of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition process of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of time saving setting processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing a modification of the time saving counter update process of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the 1st modification of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time-saving transition process in the 2nd modification of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition determination process in the 3rd modification of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time-saving transition process in the 3rd modification of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition process in the 4th modification of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition process in the 5th modification of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition process in the 6th modification of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of a big prize opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of setting confirmation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of a starting opening winning detection process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a sub-variable performance pattern determination table for low start in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a look-ahead performance type pattern number determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a look-ahead production type pattern determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a win look-ahead performance pattern table in the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a look-ahead performance pattern table for loss in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a flowchart showing a look-ahead performance pattern determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the look-ahead performance pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which the jackpot type look-ahead performance form changes. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which the time-saving winning type look-ahead effect form changes. It is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a common win look-ahead performance form to a jackpot type look-ahead performance form in the first pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a dedicated common win look-ahead performance form to a jackpot type look-ahead performance form in the first pachinko game machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a dedicated common win look-ahead performance form to a time-saving win look-ahead performance form in the first pachinko gaming machine; It is a table showing an example of output conditions of a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a timing chart of a signal of "prize ball information 1" among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a table showing an example of output conditions of a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the second pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the second pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a third pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the third pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the third pachinko game machine. An example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big prize opening and the opening timing of a specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, (A) Opening mode of the specific area FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a case where (B) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in an extended example. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in an expanded example. This is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, FIG. 3B is a diagram showing a case where the opening mode is the first opening mode and (B) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 4010 included in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a fourth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the fourth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a winning type determination table in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol type determination table in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a look-ahead performance pattern in the fourth pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a common win look-ahead performance form to a jackpot type look-ahead performance form, and then a jackpot type reach is performed. This is an image showing that the variation performance pattern corresponding to the variation in the fourth pachinko game machine has developed into a jackpot type reach. It is an example of a look-ahead performance pattern in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a common win look-ahead performance format to a time-saving win type look-ahead performance format, and then a time-saving win type performance is performed. . This is an image showing that the variable production pattern corresponding to the variation in the fourth pachinko game machine has developed into a time-saving winning production. FIG. 7 is an example of a look-ahead performance pattern in the fourth pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a mode in which an image of an egg hatching is displayed approximately in the center of the display area. This is an example of a random number determination table per normal symbol of the fifth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table of the fifth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the fifth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a random number determination table per normal symbol of the fifth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of the fifth pachinko game machine. (a) is a diagram showing the transition transition of the performance mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. (b) is a table summarizing the transition conditions of the production mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing the first performance stage preview content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing pseudo 3 variable main notice content lottery processing related to the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing pseudo 2 variable main notice content lottery processing related to the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing pseudo 1 variable main notice content lottery processing related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. (a) is a diagram showing the flow of the first preview performance. (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the first preview performance. It is a figure which shows the flow of a 2nd preview performance. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the 2nd preview performance. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the 2nd notice performance and the variation pattern of a decorative pattern. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 3rd preview performance. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the 3rd preview performance. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the 3rd notice performance and the variation pattern of a decorative pattern. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 4th preview performance. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the 4th preview performance. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the 4th notice performance and the variation pattern of a decorative pattern. It is a figure which shows the presentation content of a notice after an icon stops. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the notice after an icon stops and the fluctuation pattern of a decorative pattern. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the notice after an icon stops and the fluctuation pattern of a decorative pattern. It is a diagram showing a specific aspect of the first preview performance. It is a diagram showing a specific aspect of the first preview performance. It is a diagram showing a specific aspect of the first preview performance. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the 2nd preview production. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the 2nd preview production. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the 2nd preview production. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the 3rd preview production. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the 3rd preview production. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the 3rd notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the 3rd preview production. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the 4th preview performance. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the 4th preview performance. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the 4th preview performance. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific aspect of a notice after an icon is stopped. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific aspect of a notice after an icon is stopped. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of an icon. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern of the decorative pattern in a 1st production stage. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern of the decorative pattern in the 2nd production stage. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern of the decorative pattern in the 3rd performance stage. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 6th preview performance. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the 6th preview performance. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the 6th notice performance and the variation pattern of a decorative pattern. (a) is a diagram showing the flow of the seventh preview performance. (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the seventh preview performance. (a) is a diagram showing a flow of a stage change notice performance. (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of a stage change preview performance. (c) is a diagram showing the state of the character lamp before and after a stage change occurs. It is a figure for demonstrating the stage change area reservation ball. It is a figure for demonstrating the stage change area reservation ball. It is a figure for demonstrating the stage change area reservation ball. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st starting opening winning process regarding the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows stage change section judgment processing concerning a 5th pachinko game machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a look-ahead effect. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a look-ahead effect. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a 1st special symbol fluctuation concerning the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process of determining whether a stage change occurs or not according to the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the stage count process concerning the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the stage change occurrence lottery process concerning the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure showing a sub fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a figure showing a sub fluctuation pattern replacement table. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on a liquid crystal display device on the first production stage. (b) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device on the second presentation stage. (c) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device at the third presentation stage. (a) is a diagram showing the flow of the eighth preview performance. (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the eighth preview performance. (c) is a diagram showing the relationship between the eighth preview performance and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. (a) is a diagram showing a flow of a logo lamp preview performance. (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of a logo lamp preview performance. (c) is a diagram showing a time chart of a logo lamp preview performance. It is a flowchart showing the first performance stage logo lamp preview content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing the pseudo 3 logo lamp preview content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing the pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process concerning the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing the second performance stage logo lamp preview content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing the third performance stage logo lamp preview content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing the pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo 1 logo lamp preview content lottery process concerning the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in variable probability mode. It is a flowchart showing a drum variation effect determination process related to the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start of a drum variation effect concerning the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing the variation time of the normal symbol variation currently being performed and the normal symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of drum fluctuation production. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of drum fluctuation production. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of drum fluctuation production. It is a diagram showing an example of a normal symbol loss length variation remaining time suggestion performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a normal symbol loss length variation remaining time suggestion performance. It is a flowchart showing the process at the time of jackpot during the first bonus mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing the process at the end of the second bonus mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing processing at the end of the first bonus mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows prize ball number counter addition processing concerning the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the result display process in bonus mode concerning the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing the effect processing at the end of the second bonus mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing processing during the first bonus mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing processing (I) during the first bonus mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing the process (II) during the first bonus mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing the process (III) during the first bonus mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the remaining ST number adjustment process concerning the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the display remaining ST count update process concerning the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the normal pattern pre-reading effect processing in the variable probability mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing the special symbol pre-reading performance processing in the variable probability mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on a liquid crystal display device on the first production stage. (b) is a diagram showing a pattern of an icon stop suggestion preview performance. It is a flowchart which shows icon stop suggestion notice content lottery processing concerning the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing the holding change effect lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing the holding change effect lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the content of the production block in the 6th specific super reach. It is a flowchart which shows the 6th specific super reach content lottery process concerning the 5th pachinko game machine. (a) is a diagram showing a flow of a logo effect preview production for the first production stage. (b) is a diagram showing the flow of the logo effect preview performance for the second stage. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the logo effect preview production for a 2nd production stage. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the logo effect preview production for a 2nd production stage. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the logo effect preview production for a 2nd production stage. In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, a time chart showing performance control in a normal pattern related to transition to B time-saving gaming state, (A) a time chart showing an example of performance control performed in the first normal pattern; (B) A time chart showing an example of performance control performed in the second normal pattern. This is an example of a display performance of the first normal pattern displayed in the display area of the display device in the fifth pachinko game machine. In the fifth pachinko game machine, it is a time chart showing performance control in an irregular pattern related to transition to B time-saving gaming state, the time chart showing an example of performance control performed in the first irregular pattern (A) (B) a time chart showing an example of performance control performed in the second irregular pattern; and (C) a time chart showing an example of performance control performed in the third irregular pattern. This is a modification of the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 136.

Examples of gaming machines according to embodiments of the present invention include a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, a third pachinko gaming machine, a fourth pachinko gaming machine, and a fifth pachinko gaming machine. I will list and explain.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko game machine is the front direction, the back side of the pachinko game machine is the rear direction, and the left side when the pachinko game machine is viewed from the front is the left direction. The right side when looking at the machine from the front is the right direction, the top of the pachinko machine is up, the bottom of the pachinko machine is down, and the clockwise direction when looking at the pachinko machine from the front is the clockwise direction. , conversely, the counterclockwise direction is defined as the counterclockwise direction.

Both the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine are so-called type 1 pachinko game machines called digipachi. Among these, the first pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine that can variably display a first special symbol and a second special symbol in parallel. Further, the second pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, but only one of them is variably displayed.

In addition, the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine, which is a mixture of a so-called 1 type game machine called DigiPachi and a 2 type game machine called Feather Mono. It is a gaming machine. The third pachinko game machine described in this specification also has a first special symbol and a second special symbol, but in this specification, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed in parallel. An example will be explained in which only one of the two is variably displayed. However, this does not mean to exclude pachinko gaming machines that are 1 type and 2 type mixed machines in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel.

In addition, in this specification, when it is simply referred to as a "special symbol", it means both the first special symbol and the second special symbol unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, the term "variable display" as used herein is a concept that includes both "fluctuating display" in which the symbols are displayed while fluctuating, and "stopping display" in which the symbols are displayed while being stopped. The operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is referred to as one "variable display." When the fluctuating symbols are stopped and displayed (hereinafter also referred to as "derivation"), the results of the special symbol hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "special symbol lottery"), which will be described later, and the hit determination of normal symbols are displayed. The result of the process (hereinafter also referred to as "normal symbol lottery") is determined. Although the symbol appears to be stopped, the symbol may be displayed in a manner in which the results of the hit determination process for special symbols and the hit determination process for normal symbols are not determined (for example, in a temporarily stopped manner). However, such aspects are included in the above-mentioned variable display. Note that even if the symbols are, for example, temporarily stopped, the results of the special symbol hit determination process and the normal symbol hit determination process are not determined at this point, so the symbols can be variably displayed again.

In addition, in this specification, when describing the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, all of them have two special symbols (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, This will be explained using the case of (design) as an example. However, for the second pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, the number of special symbols may be one.

[1. First pachinko game machine]
First, the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained.

[1-1. Exterior configuration]
FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. FIG. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko game machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a tray unit 5, a firing device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), and a payout unit. 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2), and the like. Furthermore, an LED unit 160 (see FIG. 2) is provided at the lower right portion of the game board unit 10. Here, the outer frame 2, base door 3, glass door 4, tray unit 5, firing device 6, display device 7, payout unit 8, and board unit 9 will be briefly explained, and the game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be explained briefly. Details will be described later. Note that the above parentheses indicate reference drawings for configurations not shown in FIG. 1.

(outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a generally rectangular frame when viewed from the front, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. This outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to the island equipment of the game hall. A hinge (no reference numeral) is provided on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2, for example, and the base door 3 is pivotally supported on this hinge. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward with respect to the outer frame 2 about the hinge.

Note that the outer frame 2 supports a number of members such as a payout unit 8, a board unit 9, a display device 7, a game board unit 10, a glass door 4, and a tray unit 5, which will be described later, through the base door 3. High strength is required. On the other hand, for the purpose of enhancing the presentation effect, for example, the display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and the game board unit 10 are required to be made larger. Therefore, by constructing the outer frame 2 from, for example, a thin metal plate, it is possible to increase the size of the display device 7 and the game board unit 10 while maintaining high strength. In particular, if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum, it is possible to reduce the weight.

(base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a dispensing unit 8, a board unit 9, etc. attached to the back side thereof, and supports them.

A game board unit 10 is fitted into the front side of the base door 3. In addition, on the front side of the left end of the base door 3, for example, hinges (no reference numerals) are provided at the upper end, at the midway point below the approximately central part in the vertical direction, and at the lower end. A glass door 4 is pivotally supported on the hinges at the middle part and the lower end part, and a pan unit 5 is pivotally supported on the hinges at the middle part and the lower end part. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the glass door 4 and the pan unit 5 forward relative to the base door 3, either together or individually, about the hinge.

Further, a firing device 6 is fixedly attached to the surface side of the base door 3, for example, on the lower right side, and speakers 32 (see FIG. 2) are fixedly attached, for example, to each of the left and right sides of the upper side. There is. The speaker 32 outputs, for example, audio effects such as characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, audio announcements, error notifications, and other effects.

Further, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the opposite side of the base door 3 from the hinge (ie, the right end portion). This locking device has a function of locking the base door 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 with respect to the base door 3.

(glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member in which an opening 41 is formed. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear side. When the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, a game area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later) formed in the game board unit 10 faces the protective glass 43. In this way, the game area 105 can be viewed from the front with the glass door 4 closed with respect to the base door 3, and the game balls flowing down the game area 105 are prevented from jumping out forward. be able to.

Note that the protective glass 43 may be one in which a plurality of glasses (for example, two glasses) are attached with a gap between them, or a unit made of a plurality of glasses with a gap between them. You can. Furthermore, in the case of a unitized structure, a light guide plate may be provided between the glasses. The above-mentioned protective glass 43 is not limited to glass, and may be made of transparent resin, for example.

Further, at the bottom of the glass door 4, there is provided an operation section 66 that can be operated by, for example, a player in order to receive a game information providing service (for example, "UniMemo (registered trademark)"). This operation section 66 can also function as an operation section that can be operated by a game hall manager or the like on the hall menu screen.

Furthermore, a speaker cover 45 is provided at the top of the glass door 4 to be placed in front of the speaker 32 described above. Further, a large number of LED groups 46 used for lighting effects etc. are arranged around the periphery of the opening 41 of the glass door 4, and an LED cover is provided in front of these LED groups 46. Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 46 illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for convenience, it will be described as an LED group 46. The LED group 46 is, for example, a light-emitting means for making announcements with light and producing various variations of light-emitting effects, but is not limited to LEDs as long as it can perform such light-emitting effects, for example, liquid crystals, lamps, etc. It may be.

(Plate unit)
The plate unit 5 is a unit made up of an upper plate 51 and a lower plate 52. The pan unit 5 is disposed at the front lower part of the base door 3 and below the glass door 4. The tray unit 5 is configured so that it can be rotated relative to the base door 3 to open and close, as described above, so that, for example, when a ball jam occurs, an employee at the game parlor or the like can clear the ball jam. Note that the plate unit 5 does not necessarily need to be provided with an upper plate 51 and a lower plate 52, and may be configured as an integrated plate.

The upper tray 51 is provided to be able to store game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 are fired from the firing device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later). The upper tray 51 is provided with a payout opening 53, a presentation button 54, and the like. Game balls to be lent out and game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout opening 53 onto the upper tray 51. The effect button 54 is a so-called "CHANCE button", a "push button", or the like. The performance button 54 may have a predetermined performance function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined performance function includes, for example, a function that vibrates or protrudes upward based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. Further, the function of the operation section 66 may also be used.

The lower tray 52 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51. The lower tray 52 is provided with a payout port 55 communicating with the upper tray 51, and game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51 are paid out from the payout port 55 to the lower tray 52.

An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the bottom of the lower tray 52, which can be opened and closed by the player's operation. When the opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 52 is opened, the game balls stored in the lower tray 52 can be transferred to the ball box placed below the lower tray 52. In addition, if each machine is equipped with a so-called individual counting system, not only is there no need for a ball box, but the game balls counted by each machine counting system can be stored and the stored game balls can be recycled again. It can also be used for games.

(launching device)
The firing device 6 is for firing the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later). The firing device 6 is disposed at the front lower right of the base door 3 and at the lower right of the dish unit 5. The firing device 6 includes a panel body 61, a drive device (not shown), and a firing handle 62.

The panel body 61 is provided so that the pan unit 5 and the firing device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 are integrated in appearance when the pan unit 5 is closed with respect to the base door 3.

The firing handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is arranged on the front side of the panel body 61. The above drive device is arranged on the back side of the panel body 61, and is constituted by, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). When the player operates the firing handle 62, the game ball is fired by the operation of the drive device. Note that when operating the firing handle 62, the greater the amount of clockwise rotation (operation amount), the stronger the firing strength of the game ball becomes.

A game ball fired from a firing device 6 placed at the lower right side of the dish unit 5 passes through a firing rail (not shown) and rolls in an arc along a guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described later) to play the game. It is launched into area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later). Note that the placement position of the firing device 6 is not limited to the lower right side of the dish unit 5, but may be at the lower left side of the dish unit 5. In this case, the above-mentioned launch rail becomes unnecessary, the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively utilized, and versatility can be increased.

(display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various performance images related to the game, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100. The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device configured with electroluminescence, or one that projects images using a projection device such as a projector. It may be. In the display area of the display device 7, for example, presentation identification patterns (for example, decorative patterns) may be variably displayed to display the result of the special pattern hit determination process, or the result of the special pattern hit determination process may be displayed. A performance image, a performance image during a jackpot game state, a demonstration performance image, a performance image showing a pending status of variable display of special symbols, etc. are displayed. In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10, but if the display area of the display device 7 is arranged to face the opening of the game panel 100, the display device 7 can be attached to the base door 3. It may also be possible to attach it.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided for displaying the above-mentioned various effect images, but a plurality of (for example, two) display devices are provided and the effects can be performed using these plurality of display devices. An image may also be displayed.

(Payout unit)
The dispensing unit 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3, and is composed of a ball passage 81, a dispensing device 82, and the like. Game balls are supplied to the ball passage 81 from a storage tank 80 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). Note that game balls are supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). When the payout condition is satisfied, the payout device 82 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from among the game balls supplied from the storage tank 80 to the ball passage 81, onto the upper tray 51, for example. Furthermore, a power switch 95 is provided on the back side of the payout unit 8, as shown in FIG.

(board unit)
The board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3. The board unit 9 is provided with various control boards and the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control board 91 on which a main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted, and a sub-control board 91 on which a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted. A board 92, a payout/launch control board 93 on which a payout/launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described below) for controlling the payout/launch of game balls is mounted, and a power supply circuit 450 for supplying power (see FIG. 6 described later). The board unit 9 is provided with a power supply board, etc., on which a power supply board (see 6) is mounted.

In addition, in FIG. 3, for convenience, the main control board 91, the sub-control board 92, the payout/launch control board 93, and the power supply board 94 are shown as reference numerals, but these boards are all housed in the board case. ing.

Further, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (one board provided with one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, all or part of a display control circuit 304, an audio control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, and an accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later), etc., which will be described later, may be mounted on a separate board. In this way, the sub-control board 92 may be composed of a plurality of boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
FIG. 4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10 included in the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail 110, and approximately the center of the game area 105. The center accessory 115 arranged in the section, the first starting opening 120, the general winning opening 122, the passage gate unit 125, the special electric accessory unit 130, the second starting opening 140A, 140B, and the ordinary electric winning opening It includes an object unit 145, a small winning unit 150, an LED unit 160, an out port 178, and a back unit (not shown) arranged at the rear of the game board unit 10. Note that, as described above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the game panel 100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 7. Further, on the front side of the game panel 100, a guide rail 110 is provided and game nails (no reference numerals) etc. are planted. The game ball fired from the launcher 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 110 toward the game area 105, collides with a game nail, etc., and changes its traveling direction while heading downwards in the game area 105. It flows down.

Further, behind the game panel 100, a back unit (not shown) provided with decorations to enhance the performance effect is arranged. The game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the decoration provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Further, the game panel 100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent part, and a transparent member may be provided in a part to enhance the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the back unit can be viewed from the front, but the game panel 100 may be entirely transparent or only a portion thereof may be transparent. .

(guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of an arcuate outer rail and an inner rail (neither reference numerals are given). The game area 105 is divided (defined) by guide rails 110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 6 to the upper part of the game area 105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 115 is configured to be fitted into the opening of the game panel 100, and is provided with an arcuate center rail 116 above. The game balls launched towards the game area 105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116.

In this first pachinko game machine, in the game area 105, an area to the left of the center accessory 115 is referred to as a left area 106, and an area to the right of the center accessory 115 is referred to as a right area 107. The definitions of the left area and the right area are the same for a second pachinko game machine and a third pachinko game machine, which will be described later.

The game ball fired toward the game area 105 by the firing device 6 flows down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107. The game balls flowing down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107 flow downward while changing the direction of travel due to collisions with game nails etc. planted in the game panel 100. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 is small, the fired game ball flows down the left side area 106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 is large, the fired game ball flows down the right side area 107.

In addition, in this specification, as an operation mode (hitting method) of the firing handle 62, a hitting method in which the game ball is fired so as to flow down the left side area 106 is referred to as "left hitting", and a hitting method in which the game ball is fired so as to flow down the right side area 107 is referred to as "left hitting". The hitting method that causes the game ball to launch is called "right-handed hitting." In this way, the game ball can be selectively hit toward the left area 106 or the right area 107 depending on the player.

In addition, the center accessory 115 has a warp entrance 117 formed at its left outer peripheral edge into which a game ball flowing down the left area 106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 117 is configured to be guided to a stage 118 formed on the center accessory 115. The stage 118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left and right direction below and in front of the display area of the display device 7. Note that the stage 118 may be formed in multiple stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 119 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 118 at the center in the left-right direction. It is composed of Therefore, a game ball that entered the chance entrance 119 has a higher probability of starting the first start compared to a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 117 but did not enter the chance entrance 119. It is designed to win (pass) at 120 points.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). Note that the game ball hit to the right may be able to win a prize in the first starting opening 120. Further, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 120 described above, a first starting hole may be provided in which a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). good.

When the winning (passing) of a game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol Random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for the first special symbol, random numbers for reach determination for the first special symbol, random values for performance selection for the first special symbol, etc.) are extracted. A predetermined number (for example, a maximum of four) of the various types of data are stored. The stored various data are used in the first special symbol hit determination process when a starting condition (also referred to as a "variation starting condition" in this specification) is established. When game balls enter the first starting port 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the first starting port 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the winning of a game ball into the first starting opening 120 is referred to as the starting winning of the first special symbol, and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the random number value for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the Various random values such as the random number value of the first special symbol, the random number value for reach determination of the first special symbol, the random number value for performance selection of the first special symbol, etc.) are referred to as starting information of the first special symbol. Further, storing the starting information of the first special symbol until the starting condition is satisfied is called "holding", and the starting information of the first special symbol being held is also called "the reserved ball of the first special symbol". The same applies to the second special symbol.

(General prize opening)
A plurality of general winning holes 122 are arranged at the lower left of the gaming area 105, and are arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). . When a game ball enters the general winning hole 122, it is detected by the general winning hole switch 123 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later).

When the general winning hole switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects that a game ball enters (passes) the general winning hole 122, for example, four prize balls are paid out. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but this is not necessarily the case, and instead of the general winning hole 122 described above, Alternatively, in addition, a general winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can win.

(passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 125 is arranged in the right side area 107 and includes a passage gate 126 configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126. 127 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later).

When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected by the passage gate switch 127, various data related to the normal symbol (for example, random numbers for determining the hit of the ordinary symbol, etc.) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored in a predetermined manner. Up to a number (for example, up to 4) can be stored. The stored various data are used for normal symbol hit determination processing. Note that even if passage of the game ball to the passage gate unit 125 is detected by the passage gate switch 127, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 125 may be arranged in the left region 106 instead of or in addition to the right region 107.

Further, the passage gate 126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous activation device. That is, the condition for transitioning from a non-jackpot gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) to a jackpot gaming state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device operate, but the stop display mode that indicates a jackpot When (symbol combination) is derived, it is possible to operate the condition device but not to operate the accessory continuous operation device. Then, on the premise that the condition device is operating, the accessory continuous actuation device is activated when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126, that is, when the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 127 (see FIG. 6 described later). It may be activated to shift to a jackpot game state.

In this specification, the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is referred to as starting passage, and various data related to the normal symbols extracted by the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 (for example, the random number value for determining the hit of the normal symbols) etc.) is called normal symbol starting information. Further, storing the starting information of the normal symbol until the starting condition is satisfied is called suspension, and the starting information of the suspended normal symbol is also referred to as "the reserved ball of the normal symbol".

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 130 includes a jackpot jackpot 131 and a jackpot jackpot count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described below) that detects winning (passage) of a game ball to the jackpot jackpot 131. , and a special electric accessory 133 are integrated. The special electric accessory unit 130 is located approximately at the lower right part of the game area 105 and below the passage gate unit 125.

The jackpot jackpot prize opening 131 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131 described above, a jackpot jackpot jackpot that can win a game ball hit to the left may be arranged, or the center accessory 115 A jackpot prize opening for a jackpot in which a game ball can be won may be arranged in the upper part of the game machine.

In addition, the jackpot jackpot opening 131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass through) when the jackpot gaming state is controlled to be an advantageous gaming state for the player. This is the winning opening. When the jackpot jackpot count switch 132 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later) detects that a game ball has entered the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131, for example, ten prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 135 that operates the special electric shutter 134 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). The special electric accessory 133, that is, the special electric shutter 134 is in an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131, and in an open state that allows the game ball to enter (pass through) the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131. ) is impossible or difficult, and the state is configured to be transitionable. Note that the state transition of the jackpot jackpot prize opening 131 from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the jackpot game state, a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by playing a round game over multiple rounds in which the jackpot jackpot opening 131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time. It is in a gaming state.

(Second starting port)
In this embodiment, as second starting ports, a second starting port 140A and a second starting port 140B are arranged in the gaming area 105, and both of these second starting ports 140A and 140B are used for right-handed players. The game ball cannot win (it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to win a prize). However, the invention is not limited to this, and a game ball hit to the left may be able to win a prize in the second starting hole 140A and/or the second starting hole 140B.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 140A, it is detected by the second starting port switch 141A (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 140B, it is detected by the second starting port switch 141B (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). Even if the game ball lands in either of the second starting ports 140A and 140B, it becomes a trigger for the second special symbol hit determination process.

When the second starting port switches 141A, 141B (see FIG. 6 described later) detect winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting ports 140A, 140B, starting information of the second special symbol is extracted. A predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces) of start information that has been set is retained. The suspended starting information is provided to the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second starting port 140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on winning of game balls into the second starting ports 140A, 140B is not limited to this.

By the way, in this embodiment, on the downstream side as the flowing direction of the game ball that was hit to the right but did not enter the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131, there are two vertically flowing paths 107a and 107b as the flowing path of the game ball. is formed. A game ball that is hit to the right and flows further downstream without entering the jackpot jackpot 131 is sent to the upper flow path 107a or the lower flow path 107b by the branch nail 108 shown in FIG. 4, for example. Can be sorted.

The second starting port 140A is arranged so that game balls distributed to the upper flow path 107a can win prizes, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a can win prizes. However, it is not essential that most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a land in the second starting port 140A. Alternatively, it may be configured such that a prize can be won with a predetermined expected value (for example, approximately 1/3 to 1/5) of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a. In addition, the game ball that has flowed down the upper flow path 107a but has not entered the second starting port 140A is configured to be discharged from the machine through the out port 178.

The second starting port 140B is arranged so that game balls distributed to the downward flow path 107b can be won, but details thereof will be described later in the description of the normal electric accessory unit 145.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 145 is arranged on the downward flow path 107b side, and has a prize opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball wins (passes through), and a prize mouth to this prize mouth. It is a unit body that integrates a switch that detects winning of game balls and a normal electric accessory 146. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 140B, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 141B. However, it is not essential that the above winning opening be the second starting opening 140B, and for example, the first starting opening may be the above winning opening.

The normal electric accessory 146 includes a normal electricity shutter 147 that can move forward and backward, and a normal electricity solenoid 148 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later) that operates the normal electricity shutter 147. The ordinary electric accessory 146, that is, the shutter 147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting port 140B, and an open state in which it is impossible to enter a game ball into the second starting port 140B. or a difficult closed state, and is configured to be able to transition to a state. Note that instead of the normal power shutter 147 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, a movable member, for example, a pair of blade members, called a so-called electric tulip, may be employed. Moreover, the movable member is not limited to a pair, and includes a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, and the like.

(Small winning unit)
The small winning unit 150 includes a small winning large winning opening 151 and a small winning large winning opening count switch 152 that detects winning (passage) of a game ball to the small winning large winning opening 151 (see FIG. 6 described later). It is a unit body that integrates a small hit shutter 153 that can move forward and backward in the front and back direction, and a small hit solenoid 154 that can operate this small hit shutter 153.

By moving forward and backward in the front and back direction, the small winning shutter 153 can be brought into an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the small winning large winning opening 151, and a game ball can be easily entered into the small winning large winning opening 151. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the ball to enter a prize.

When a game ball wins when the small winning large winning opening 151 is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the small winning large winning opening count switch 152 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). When a game ball is detected by the small winning big prize opening count switch 152, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the small winning jackpot 151 is not limited to ten.

Further, the small winning unit 150 is arranged on the downstream side of the normal electric accessories unit 145 in the lower flow path 107b. Therefore, when the second starting port 140B is opened by the operation of the normal electric accessory 146, even if the small winning large prize opening 151 is opened, the game ball flowing down the downward flow path 107b is small. Before reaching the large winning opening 151, the player enters the second starting opening 140B provided on the upstream side, making it difficult (or impossible) to win the small winning opening 151.

In addition, in this embodiment, the large winning opening 131 for the jackpot and the large winning opening 151 for the small winning are provided separately, but the invention is not limited to this, and the large winning opening that is opened when the jackpot game control process is executed, The big winning hole opened at the time of execution of the small winning game control process may be the same big winning hole.

(Out port)
The out port 178 is any one of the various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 120, the second starting port 140A, 140B, the jackpot jackpot 131, the general winning port 122, etc.) that are fired toward the gaming area 105. This is to eject out of the machine any game balls that did not win. This out port 178 is provided at the most downstream side of the gaming area 105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between the plurality of general winning openings 122 or between the ordinary electric accessory unit 145 and the small winning unit 150, etc. The game balls flowing down the area 105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 100, as described above. This back unit includes a group of production accessories 58 such as movable accessories that are controlled by a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). The presentation accessory group 58 is arranged around the display area of the display device 7. At least one or more of the performance accessory groups 58 or the performance accessory constituent members constituting the accessory function as performance accessories that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is arranged at the lower right part of the game board unit 10 and outside the game area 105 (see FIGS. 4 and 5). The LED unit 160 is a unit body that integrates various display sections.

FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display section 161, a normal symbol reserve display section 162, a first special symbol display section 163, a second special symbol display section 164, and a first special symbol reserve display section. section 165, and a second special symbol reservation display section 166.

(Normal symbol display section)
The normal symbol display section 161 displays the result of the normal symbol hit determination process, and includes normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the conditions for starting the variable display of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "starting conditions for normal symbols") are met, the variable display of normal symbols starts, in which the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b alternately turn on and off. Ru. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the normal symbols, the variable display of the normal symbols is stopped, and the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is derived.

When the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b becomes a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a lights up and the normal symbol display LED 161b goes out. On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a goes out and the normal symbol display LED 161b lights up. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b indicating the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is not limited to this. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is decided to operate the normal electric accessory 146, the normal electric shutter 147 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port 140B is opened and closed. This makes it easier for game balls to win (pass).

(Regular symbol reservation display section)
The normal symbol pending display section 162 is for displaying the number of pending variable displays of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "the number of pending normal symbols") when the variable display of normal symbols is pending. In addition, it is provided with normal symbol reservation display LEDs 162a and 162b. The above-mentioned "variable display of normal symbols is on hold" means that passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected and various data related to the normal symbols (for example, random numbers for determining hits of the normal symbols, etc.) are It refers to the state from the time it is extracted until the starting conditions for the normal symbol are met. Note that the normal symbol starting condition is satisfied when at least all of the following conditions are satisfied: the normal symbol is not being displayed variably, and the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended.

The normal symbol holding display section 162 displays the number of holdings of the variable display of normal symbols by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol holding display LEDs 162a and 162b. For example, when the number of normal symbols being held is one, the normal symbol holding display LED 162a lights up and the normal symbol holding display LED 162b goes out. Further, when the number of normal symbols on hold is two, both the normal symbol holding display LEDs 162a and 162b are lit. Further, when the number of normal symbols on hold is 3, the normal symbol holding display LED 162a blinks and the normal symbol holding display LED 162b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of normal symbols on hold is four, both the normal symbol holding display LEDs 162a and 162b blink. However, the display mode of the normal symbol reservation display LEDs 162a and 162b indicating the number of normal symbols reserved is not limited to this.

(Special pattern display section)
The special symbol display section displays the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and includes a first special symbol display section 163 and a second special symbol display section 164. The first special symbol display section 163 includes a first special symbol display LED group 163a including, for example, eight LEDs. Similarly, the second special symbol display section 164 also includes a second special symbol display LED group 164a consisting of, for example, eight LEDs.

When the conditions for starting variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting conditions for the first special symbol") are satisfied, the first special symbol display LED group 163a repeats lighting and extinguishing alternately or mutually. Variable display of the first special symbol is started. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol display LED group 163a (for example, 8 LEDs) constituting the first special symbol display section 163 is It becomes a stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display section 163 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

When the conditions for starting variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "second special symbol starting conditions") are met, the second special symbol display LED group 164a alternately or mutually repeats lighting and extinguishing. Variable display of the second special symbol is started. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is derived.

When the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the second special symbol display LED group 164a (for example, eight LEDs) that constitutes the second special symbol display section 164 is determined to be a jackpot. It becomes a stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display section 164 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

(Special design reservation display section)
The special symbol reservation display section is for displaying the number of reserved variable displays of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as the "number of reserved special symbols") when variable displays of special symbols are reserved. A first special symbol reservation display section 165 and a second special symbol reservation display section 166 are provided.

The first special symbol reservation display section 165 displays the number of reservations for the first special symbol when the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, and the first special symbol reservation display LED 165a, 165b Equipped with. "The variable display of the first special symbol is on hold" means that the winning (passage) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol Random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for the first special symbol, random values for reach determination for the first special symbol, and random values for effect selection used when determining the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, etc. This refers to the state from when a value (such as a numerical value, etc.) is extracted until the starting condition for the first special symbol is satisfied. Note that the starting conditions for the first special symbol will be described later.

The first special symbol reservation display section 165 displays the number of reservations of the variable display of the first special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b. For example, when the number of reservations for the first special symbol is one, the reservation display LED 165a for the first special symbol lights up and the reservation display LED 165b for the first special symbol goes out. Moreover, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is two, both of the reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol are lit. Moreover, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is three, the reservation display LED 165a for the first special symbol blinks and the reservation display LED 165b for the first special symbol lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is four, both of the reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol blink. However, the display mode of the first special symbol reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b indicating the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not limited to this.

The second special symbol reservation display section 166 displays the number of reservations for the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, and the second special symbol reservation display LED 166a, 166b Equipped with. "The variable display of the second special symbol is on hold" means that the winning (passage) of the game ball to the second starting ports 140A, 140B is detected and various data related to the second special symbol (for example, the second A random number value for jackpot determination of the special symbol, a symbol random number value for the second special symbol, a random number value for reach determination of the second special symbol, a random value for performance selection used when determining the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, etc. This refers to the state from when various random numbers, etc.) are extracted until the starting conditions for the second special symbol are satisfied. Note that the starting conditions for the second special symbol will be described later.

The second special symbol reservation display section 166 displays the number of reservations of the variable display of the second special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the second special symbol reservation display LEDs 166a and 166b. For example, when the number of reservations for the second special symbol is one, the reservation display LED 166a for the second special symbol lights up and the reservation display LED 166b for the second special symbol goes out. Further, when the number of second special symbols reserved is two, both of the second special symbol reservation display LEDs 166a and 166b are lit. Further, when the number of second special symbols on hold is three, the second special symbol hold display LED 166a blinks and the second special symbol hold display LED 166b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of second special symbols on hold is four, both of the second special symbol hold display LEDs 166a and 166b blink. However, the display mode of the second special symbol reservation display LEDs 166a and 166b indicating the number of second special symbols reserved is not limited to this.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained. FIG. 6 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game, and a payout/launch. It is composed of a control circuit 400 and a power supply circuit 450.

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, processing executed when the power is turned on, processing related to gaming operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (readable/writable memory), and an initial reset. It includes a circuit 204, a backup capacitor 207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

A main ROM 202, a main RAM 203, an initial reset circuit 204, etc. are connected to the main CPU 201. The main CPU 201 has a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the first pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 202.

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for playing the game. The main RAM 203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201 and has the function of storing various flags and variable values. Note that in this embodiment, a RAM is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 207 has a function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 203 from being lost in the event of a power outage or the like.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 200 includes an I/O port 205 that is communicably connected to various devices, and a command output port 206 that is connected so that various commands can be output to the sub-control circuit 300. Also equipped.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200. For example, the main control circuit 200 includes the above-mentioned normal symbol display section 161, normal symbol reservation display section 162, first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164, and first special symbol reservation display section 165. , a second special symbol reservation display section 166, a general electric solenoid 148, a special electric solenoid 135, a small hit solenoid 154, etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 200 is also connected to a performance display monitor 170, an error notification monitor 172, and the like. Main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 205.

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data, setting values, etc., which will be described later, under the control of the main CPU 201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state with respect to the firing of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 game balls), and is also called a base value.

The error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 172. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 172 also displays, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function described later, a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting change process is in progress, and a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress. It is also possible to display a setting confirmation code, etc. As the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 200 includes a first starting port switch 121, a second starting port switch 141A, 141B, a passing gate switch 127, a big winning port count switch 132 for jackpots, a general winning port switch 123, and a large winning port switch for small winnings. A mouth count switch 152 and the like are also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to main control circuit 200 via I/O port 205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and a calling device (not shown) used to send data to a hall computer 186 that manages pachinko machines in the entire hall. An external terminal board 184, a setting key 174 that is operated to change or confirm setting values if the pachinko game machine has a setting function (described later), and backup data stored in the main RAM 203 are transmitted to the gaming hall administrator. A backup clear switch 176, etc., which can be cleared in response to an operation, is connected. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing setting values, which will be described later, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing setting values may be provided.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 be housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the administrator of the gaming hall cannot easily touch them. ``Inside a specified case'' includes not only those configured such that the setting key 174 and backup clear switch 176 cannot be accessed without opening the case, but also those that are configured to have only the corresponding locations of the setting key 174 and backup clear switch 176 in the case. When the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the game hall manager to expose the back side, the game hall manager can use the setting key 174 or/and the backup key. It also includes one configured to be able to contact the clear switch 176.

In this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but are not limited to this, and may be connected to the payout/emission control circuit 400 or the power supply circuit 450, for example. It may be configured like this. In this case as well, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the game parlor administrator from easily accessing the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176.

[1-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, an audio control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, an accessory control circuit 307, a command input port 308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to commands from the main control circuit 200. Although not shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores programs for controlling the game performance of the first pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 302. In particular, the sub CPU 301 performs control related to game performance according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

The work RAM 303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 301.

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for controlling the display in the display device 7. The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and an image data processor. It is equipped with a D/A converter etc. that converts the image signal into an image signal.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub CPU 301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 7 includes various types of image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data indicating decorative patterns, background image data, performance image data, and the like.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 7, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7. In this way, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 32. The audio control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) that amplifies audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 32. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command from the sub CPU 301. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP is for amplifying signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 32.

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory objects in the performance accessory group 58). The accessory control circuit 307 includes a drive circuit for supplying drive signals to each accessory, an accessory data ROM in which movement patterns are stored, and the like.

Further, the accessory control circuit 307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory operation command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the mechanical motion of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands sent from the main control circuit 200.

The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/launch control circuit 400 includes a payout device 82 that can pay out game balls, and a payout device 82 that can shoot game balls. A firing device 6 capable of controlling the player, a card unit 180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

When the payout/launch control circuit 400 receives the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 and controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls. .

A ball lending operation panel 182 is connected to the card unit 180. The ball rental operation panel 182 is provided with a ball rental button for renting balls and a rental return button (both not shown) for returning the ball rental card in which cache data is stored. For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180. The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 180. Note that although the operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

Further, based on the fact that the firing handle 62 is rotated clockwise, the dispensing/firing control circuit 400 applies electric power to a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Controls the supply and firing of game balls.

The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit created in order to supply the power supply voltage necessary for playing the game to the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout/shooting control circuit 400, etc.

A power switch 95 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 450. The power switch 95 is turned on to supply the necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, the game flow of the first pachinko game machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 7 is an example of a game flow of the first pachinko game machine. FIG. 8 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing a general game state transition. Note that the game flow shown in FIG. 7 is not a control flow, but a flow that can be understood from the appearance.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is fired by a user operation such as a player, and when the game ball enters various winning holes (for example, the first starting hole 120 etc.), the game ball is released. Payout control processing is performed. Pachinko games include special symbol games using special symbols and normal symbol games using normal symbols. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a special symbol hit determination process is executed based on the winning of game balls in the starting holes 120, 140A, and 140B, and it is determined whether or not to shift to a jackpot game state. . In addition, the normal symbol game means, for example, that the normal symbol hit determination process is executed based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126, and the normal electric accessory 146 is activated to win the prize opening (in this embodiment, the second This is a game in which it is decided whether or not to open the starting port 140B). In addition, in this specification, "special symbol games" are sometimes referred to as "games," but "games" is a term used with a broad concept. For example, games that use games (see FIG. 1) are also included in "games."

In addition, in this specification, from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the end of the variable display and the final display (derivation) of the result of the special symbol hit determination process (more specifically, the special symbol is confirmed (until the time elapses) is regarded as one special symbol game. However, if the jackpot game state or small win game state is controlled after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived, the period up to the end of the jackpot game state or small win game state is considered to be one special symbol game. do.

When the stop display mode indicating a jackpot in the special symbol game is led out to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164, a jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot game state, a round game is executed in which the jackpot jackpot 131 is kept open for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30,000 msec maximum) by the operation of the special electric accessory 133, and the possibility of winning the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131 is increased. Relatively enhanced.

In addition, when the stop display mode indicating a normal symbol win in the normal symbol game is derived to the normal symbol display section 161, the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140B in this embodiment) is opened by the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 146. It becomes an open state, and for example, the possibility of winning a prize in the second starting port 140B is relatively increased.

Note that the games that can be executed in the pachinko game are not limited to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, and a new game other than these may be executable.

Hereinafter, an overview of the game flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be explained.

[1-3-1. Special design game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the special symbol game mainly includes a special symbol starting winning process that is performed when there is a winning (passage) to the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 140A, 140B, and This includes special symbol control processing that is performed based on the establishment of special symbol starting conditions.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 140A, 140B, a special symbol starting winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data related to the special symbol (for example, random value for jackpot determination, random symbol value, reach determination) are transferred from various counters for special symbols (for example, jackpot determination counter, symbol determination counter, etc.). random values, various random values such as random values for performance selection, etc.) are extracted (obtained). Each extracted random value is retained as starting information. This special symbol starting winning process is performed even during execution of the special symbol control process.

In addition, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the starting conditions for the special symbol are satisfied. When the special symbol starting condition is established, special symbol hit determination processing is performed to determine whether or not it is a "jackpot" by referring to the random number value for jackpot determination extracted from the special symbol jackpot determination counter. After that, a stop symbol determination process is performed to determine a stop symbol. In the stop symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the random number value for symbol determination extracted from the special symbol symbol determination counter and the result of the special symbol hit determination process.

In this embodiment, if the probability variation flag is on, probability variation control is executed. In the above special symbol hit determination process, if the variable probability flag is off, it is determined that it is a "jackpot" with a relatively low probability, and if the variable probability flag is on, it is determined that it is a "jackpot" with a relatively high probability. It is determined that Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "jackpot" will be referred to as "jackpot probability."

Note that the probability variation flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not probability variation control is executed. When the probability change flag is on, the game progresses in a gaming state in which probability change control is executed (for example, in this embodiment, a high probability time-saving gaming state or a high probability non-time-saving gaming state). On the other hand, when the probability change flag is off, the game progresses in a gaming state in which probability change control is not executed (for example, a normal gaming state or a low probability time-saving gaming state).

Next, a special symbol variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the counter for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value, the result of the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination processing, and the above-mentioned special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is (variable display pattern) is determined. Then, a special symbol variable display control process is performed based on the result of the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

Once the special symbol variation pattern is determined, a performance pattern determination process is then performed to determine the performance pattern. Based on the result of the performance pattern determination process, display effects such as decorative patterns and character effects are displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and sound effects such as voices and sound effects are output from the speaker 32. The production control process is performed. Note that the production control process is performed by the sub CPU 301.

Then, the special symbol variable display control process and performance control process are completed, and if it is a jackpot, a jackpot game control process is performed. The jackpot game control process is a process executed in the jackpot game state. When the jackpot gaming state ends, the special symbol game ends, and a gaming state transition control process to a non-jackpot gaming state where there is no jackpot is performed. In this case, the gaming state changes depending on the type of jackpot. For example, in the case of a jackpot type in which both the probability change flag and the time-saving flag are set to ON, after the jackpot game state ends, the state shifts to the high-probability time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if it is not a jackpot, that is, if it is a loss, the special symbol game ends. Although not shown in FIG. 7, in the case of a small win, a small win game control process is performed. Also, although not shown in FIG. 7, if there is a time-saving win, which will be described later, the game shifts to a time-saving game state.

Then, each time the special symbol starting condition is satisfied, various processes of the special symbol control process described above are repeated.

In addition, when there is a winning of a game ball to the starting hole 120, 140A, 140B during the special symbol control process, the special symbol starting winning process is executed. In addition, special symbol starting information extracted when a game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140A, 140B (for example, random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol design, random number for reach determination, and effect selection) (various data such as various random numbers such as random numbers) are held until the special symbol starting conditions are satisfied.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, it is possible to hold up to a total of eight pieces of special symbol starting information, including four pieces of starting information of the first special symbol and four pieces of starting information of the second special symbol. , The number of starting information of special symbols that can be held is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to hold more starting information for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol, or it may be possible to hold more starting information for the second special symbol than for the first special symbol. You may also do so.

Although not shown in FIG. 7, when a game ball enters (passes) the starting hole 120, 140A, 140B between the time when the special symbol starts winning and the time when the special symbol's starting conditions are met, Based on the extracted starting information, a pre-reading judgment (for example, see S396 in FIG. 63 described later) is performed to determine the winning/losing (the presence or absence of a "jackpot" win) and fluctuation pattern prior to the special symbol winning judgment process, and this pre-reading It may be provided with a pre-read performance function that performs a predetermined performance based on the result of the determination. In addition, the above-mentioned pre-reading determination may be performed before the starting information extracted by winning a game ball to the starting opening 120, 140A, 140B is held, or may be performed after being held.

[1-3-2. Normal symbol game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the normal symbol game mainly includes a normal symbol start passing process that is performed when a game ball passes through the passage gate 126, and a normal symbol start passing process that is performed when the normal symbol starting condition is satisfied. This includes normal symbol control processing that is performed based on this.

When a game ball passes through the passage gate 126, a normal symbol start passage process is executed. In this normal symbol starting passing process, the starting information of the normal symbol (for example, the random number value for determining the winning of the normal symbol, etc.) is extracted (obtained) from the counter for determining the winning of the normal symbol, and the extracted starting information is held.

In addition, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the starting condition for the normal symbol is satisfied. When starting the variable display of normal symbols, the main CPU 201 refers to the random number value for normal symbol hit determination extracted from the normal symbol hit determination counter, and determines whether or not it is a "normal symbol hit". A symbol hit determination process is executed, and then a variation pattern determination process is executed. In this process, the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the result of the normal symbol hit determination process and the determined normal symbol fluctuation pattern, and performs a variable display control process that controls the variable display of the normal symbol, and performs a predetermined effect. Execute production control processing. Note that the performance control process may not be executed.

Then, when the normal symbol variable display control processing and production control processing are completed, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a normal winning symbol indicating "normal symbol winning" has been derived to the normal symbol display section 161 (see FIG. 6). do. When determining that the stop display mode indicating a normal win has been derived, the main CPU 201 executes a normal symbol win game control process. In this normal symbol per game control process, the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIGS. 4 and 6) operates, and a game is sent to the winning opening (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting opening 140B (see FIG. 4)). It becomes an open state where it is possible or easy for the ball to enter the prize (pass). On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display mode indicating a normal win has not been derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol win game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In addition, in a gaming state in which time saving control is not executed (for example, a normal gaming state), the probability that a stop display mode indicating a normal win is derived may be set to 0. The time saving control includes a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of the special symbol compared to when the time saving control is not executed, and a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of the special symbol, and a winning opening (in this embodiment, for example, This corresponds to control that performs at least one of the electric support control that increases the frequency of opening the second starting port 140B). This time saving control may be a control that performs both the special figure shortening control and the electric support control, or may be control that performs only one of the special figure shortening control and the electric support control.

The electric support control improves the time-saving performance of at least one of the winning probability of "per normal symbol", the variable display time of the normal symbol, and the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the ordinary electric accessory 146. This is a control that allows The time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to a winning opening (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting opening 140B (see FIG. 4)), and is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to a winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140B (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment), and the winning probability of "normal symbol". , the variable display time of the normal symbol, or/and the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the normal electric accessory 146, etc. In addition, improving the time-saving performance means, for example, making it easier to enter the game ball into the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140B (see FIG. 4)). In other words, when the electric support control is executed, compared to the case where the electric support control is not executed, the probability of winning "per normal symbol" increases, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol is shortened, and/or the ordinary electric accessory 146 makes winning easier (increasing the number of openings, extending opening time, shortening wait time, etc.).

Then, each time the normal symbol starting condition is satisfied, the various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

In addition, when a game ball passes through the passage gate 126 during the normal symbol control process, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. In addition, the starting information of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (for example, the random number value for determining the hit of the normal symbol, etc.) is held until the starting condition of the normal symbol is satisfied.

In addition, the start of the variable display of the normal symbols is performed in the order in which they are put on hold, and when the starting conditions for the normal symbols are met, the variable display of the starting information that was held first among the starting information of the normal symbols that are on hold will be started. Execute.

In addition, various random numbers (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, random numbers for the first special symbol, random values for reach determination of the first special symbol, random values for jackpot determination of the second special symbol, The extraction method of the second special symbol random number, the second special symbol random number for reach determination, the normal symbol random number for hit determination, etc.) is performed by executing a program by the main CPU 201 to extract a predetermined range ( A soft random number method may be used that generates a random number within a certain range (range), or a hard random number method may be used that extracts a random number from a counter in a random number generator in which the random number is updated at a predetermined period.

[1-3-3. Game state transition]
As shown in FIG. 8, the gaming state can be roughly divided into a non-jackpot gaming state and a jackpot gaming state. In the non-jackpot gaming state, the special symbol game is executed as described above, and when a jackpot is derived as a result of the special symbol winning determination process, the non-jackpot gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state. In the jackpot game state, the round game is executed as described above, and the variable display of special symbols is not executed. However, the variable display of normal symbols can be executed even in the jackpot game state. It should be noted that a description of the small winning game state will be omitted.

The non-jackpot gaming state is divided into a low probability state where the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively low, and a high probability gaming state where the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively high. It can be broadly classified.

The high probability gaming state includes a high probability non-time saving gaming state (high probability low base state) in which time saving control is not executed and a high probability time saving gaming state (high probability high base) in which time saving control is executed.

The low probability state includes a normal gaming state (low probability low base) in which time saving control is not executed and a time saving gaming state (low probability high base) in which time saving control is executed.

Furthermore, the time-saving gaming state includes an A-time-saving gaming state, a B-time-saving gaming state, and a C-time-saving gaming state.

A time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that can be transitioned to after a specific jackpot gaming state ends, and when a specified number of special symbol games are executed or transitioning to the jackpot gaming state, the A time-saving gaming state is switched to. finish. When the A time-saving game state ends by executing the special symbol game a specified number of times, the game mode shifts to the normal game state in principle.

The B time-saving gaming state is, for example, when the special symbol is displayed starting from when the jackpot gaming state ends and the variable display of the special symbol starts in the non-high probability gaming state (that is, the gaming state where the probability change flag is off). It is a time-saving game state that can be transitioned to when the variable display number (e.g., ceiling counter) reaches a ceiling value (e.g., 1000 times), and when a specified number of special symbol games are executed or a transition is made to the jackpot game state. , B The time-saving game state ends. When the B time-saving game state ends by executing the special symbol game a specified number of times, in principle, the game state shifts to the normal game state.

The C time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that can be transitioned to when the result of the special symbol hit determination processing performed in the low probability state is "time-saving winning" and the display mode of the time-saving winning is derived, and the stipulated When the special symbol game is executed a certain number of times or when the state shifts to the jackpot game state, the C time-saving game state ends. When the C time-saving game state ends by executing the special symbol game a specified number of times, the game mode shifts to the normal game state in principle.

In addition, the reason why we decided to shift to the normal gaming state after the end of the time-saving gaming state is that, for example, if the time-saving gaming state overlaps, such as when you win a "time-saving win" in the B-time-saving gaming state, , this takes into account cases where multiple time-saving gaming states overlap. However, the A time saving gaming state and the B working time saving gaming state do not overlap.

In this specification, regardless of whether multiple time-saving gaming states are executed overlappingly or not, the conditions for transition to the time-saving gaming state are satisfied in the time-saving gaming state, or the conditions for transitioning to multiple time-saving gaming states are satisfied simultaneously. This is called "overlapping" of time-saving gaming states. When a plurality of time-saving gaming states overlap, activating any of the plurality of overlapping time-saving gaming states is referred to as "superimposed execution."

Next, the transition of the gaming state will be explained.

When controlled in the normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state (A working-time saving gaming state, B working-time saving gaming state, C working-time saving gaming state), and high-precision gaming state (high-precision working-time-saving gaming state, high-precision non-time-saving gaming state) Even if there is, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the game shifts to a jackpot game state.

When the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the game specifications, it can be shifted to any of the normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, and high-precision gaming state (high-precision time-saving gaming state, high-precision non-time-saving gaming state). . However, the time-saving gaming state that can be transitioned to when the jackpot gaming state ends is limited to the A-time-saving gaming state.

When controlled to be in a high-precision gaming state, except for some pachinko gaming machines such as so-called ST machines and loop machines, there is no transition from the high-precision gaming state to a time-saving gaming state or a normal gaming state. Similarly, from the time-saving gaming state or the normal gaming state, there is no transition to the high-precision gaming state unless the game goes through the jackpot gaming state.

When controlled in the normal gaming state, it is possible to shift to the B time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, but it cannot shift to the A time saving gaming state unless it goes through the jackpot gaming state. However, when the special symbol game is executed a specified number of times in the A time-saving game state, the state shifts to the normal game state, so it is possible to shift from the A time-saving game state to the normal game state. In addition, even if the control is in either the B time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, once the special symbol game is executed the specified number of times, the normal gaming state will be entered. It is also possible to shift from the gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Next, the transition between time-saving game states will be explained.

When the A time saving gaming state is controlled, the number of times that can be executed in the A time saving gaming state is set to be less than the ceiling value which is the condition for transitioning to the B time saving gaming state. There is no transition to the time-saving gaming state. Further, since the A time saving gaming state is controlled via the jackpot gaming state, there is no transition from the B working time saving gaming state to the A time saving gaming state. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the A time-saving gaming state is "time-saving hit", the conditions for transition to the C-time-saving gaming state are met, so the A-time-saving gaming state and the C-time-saving gaming state may overlap. . However, there is no transition from the C time-saving game state to the A time-saving game state.

When controlled in the B time saving gaming state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the condition for transition to the C time saving gaming state is satisfied, so the B time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state are may overlap. Also, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state may overlap.

When controlled in the C time-saving gaming state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the condition for transition to the C-time-saving gaming state is satisfied, so the C-time-saving gaming state and the C-time saving gaming state are may overlap.

In addition, details regarding the duplication of time-saving game states will be described later.

[1-4. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 9 to 15.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, there is a normal gaming state in which neither probability variable control nor time saving control is executed, a high precision time saving gaming state in which both probability variable control and time saving control are executed, and a time saving control in which probability variable control is executed. There are a high probability non-time saving gaming state in which the game is not executed, and a low probability time saving gaming state in which the probability changing control is not executed but the time saving control is executed, and the main CPU 201 selects one of these gaming states. It is possible to proceed with the game. However, the gaming state progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this, and any gaming state among the normal gaming state, high probability time saving gaming state, high probability non time saving gaming state, and low probability time saving gaming state can be progressed. You may choose not to do so. For example, the game may be made to proceed in any one of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the game may be prevented from proceeding in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state. good. In addition, although a plurality of time-saving game states are prepared in the time-saving game state, the plural time-saving game states will be described later.

In this embodiment, among the plurality of game modes (for example, firing mode), the game mode that is least disadvantageous to the player (advantageous to the player) (hereinafter referred to as "regular game mode") is the one that is not in the normal game state. Left-handed playing is the normal gaming mode, and right-handed playing is the normal gaming mode in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. The sub CPU 301 executes control to display a normal game mode (for example, whether to play right or left) in the display area of the display device 7, for example.

[1-4-1. Jackpot probability for each setting value]
FIG. 9 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximately) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first pachinko game machine, a plurality of setting values such as settings 1 to 6 can be changed using the above-mentioned setting key 174, backup clear switch 176 (both shown in FIG. 6), etc. It can be set to one of these settings. In the case of such a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, and the main CPU 201 executes special symbol hit determination processing based on the set value.

Specifically, the jackpot probability in a gaming state where the probability variation flag is off (in this example, the normal gaming state and the low probability time-saving gaming state) in which probability variation control is not executed is determined by the first special symbol hit determination process and the second special Regardless of which symbol hit determination process is executed, for example, setting 1 is approximately 1/319, setting 2 is approximately 1/314, setting 3 is approximately 1/309, and setting 4 is approximately 1/319. The value is 1/304, approximately 1/299 with setting 5, and approximately 1/294 with setting 6. In addition, the jackpot probability in the gaming state where the probability change flag is on (in this example, the high probability time-saving gaming state and the high probability non-time saving gaming state) in which probability variation control is executed is approximately 1/77 at setting 1, and about 1/77 at setting 2. setting is approximately 1/76, setting 3 is approximately 1/75, setting 4 is approximately 1/74, setting 5 is approximately 1/73, and setting 6 is approximately 1/72.

Note that, unlike the jackpot probability, the short-time winning probability is a common probability for all setting values. For example, when the first special symbol hit determination process is executed, the time-saving hit probability is 1/160, and when the second special symbol hit determination process is executed, the time-saving hit probability is 1/240. There is. The time-saving hit probability may be different depending on whether the first special symbol hit determination process is executed or the second special symbol hit determination process is executed, or may be the same.

However, even if the time saving probability is a common probability for all setting values, the time saving continuation rate (for example, the number of set time saving times) may be varied depending on the setting value. For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", for example, in the case of setting 1, 50 times will be set as the number of time saving times, and in the case of setting 6, 100 times will be set as the number of time saving times. You can also do this.

In addition, the small hit probability is the same probability for all settings when the second special symbol's hit determination process is executed, but the small hit is included in the lottery target in the first special symbol's hit determination process. Not yet. However, modes in which small wins are not included in the lottery include modes in which the judgment itself is not made as to whether or not a small win has been won, or a mode in which a judgment is made as to whether or not a small win has been won even though the probability of a small win is 0. It may be an aspect.

Although the above-mentioned short time winning probability and small winning probability are the same probabilities for all setting values as described above, they are not limited to this, and may be different probabilities depending on the setting values.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot probabilities are different for all setting values, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot probability is common between setting 1 and setting 2, and the jackpot probability is common between setting 3 and setting 4. The jackpot probability may be the same for a plurality of setting values, such as a jackpot probability or a common jackpot probability between settings 5 and 6.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability varies depending on the set value, but if the degree of advantage for the player varies depending on the set value, the target that differs depending on the set value is not necessarily limited to the jackpot probability. For example, in the case of a pachinko game machine that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state when a game ball enters a specific winning opening, the probability of winning a prize in a specific winning opening may be varied depending on a set value. Note that it is not essential that the pachinko game machine be a pachinko game machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 10 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 10 is shown for example in the case of setting 1 shown in FIG. 9.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29 described later), that is, when a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 140A, 140B. This is a table that is referred to when determining a "time saving win", "small hit", "big hit", or "loss" by lottery based on the random number value for jackpot determination obtained at the time of the lottery. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the first special symbol hit determination process are "time saving win", "big hit", and "loss", and "small win" is not included in the lottery targets. On the other hand, the lottery targets in the second special symbol hit determination process are "time saving win", "small win", "big hit", and "loss". However, a "small hit" may be included in the lottery targets in the first special symbol hit determination process.

The random number value for jackpot determination is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process, as described above. In this embodiment, the random number value for jackpot determination is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "loss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination in the hit determination process for the first special symbol. The hit determination table of the first special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value for each value of the probability variable flag (0 or 1). Relationship with data, relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and range of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as a "loss" (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this specification, when the value of the probability variation flag is "0", the probability variation flag is off, and when the value of the probability variation flag is "1", the probability variation flag is on.

In addition, in the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines "time saving hit", "small hit", "big hit", or "loss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination. The hit determination table of the second special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1). Relationship with the data, relationship between the range (width) of the random value for jackpot determination determined as a “small hit” and the corresponding small hit determination value data, and the relationship between the random value for jackpot determination determined as a “jackpot” The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot judgment that is determined to be a "loss" and the corresponding loss judgment value data are defined. Ru.

In this embodiment, for example, when the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted random value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 409, the main CPU 201 executes the "time-saving hit". ”, and the winning/losing judgment value data is determined as “time-saving winning judging value data”. In addition, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 410 to 614, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and The judgment value data is determined as "jackpot judgment value data." Further, when the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 615 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that the game is a "lose" and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data."

For example, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 409, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit". Then, the judgment value data is determined to be "time saving judgment value data". In addition, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 410 to 1260, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines The value data is determined as "jackpot determination value data". Further, when the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 1261 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that the game is a "lose" and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data."

Similarly, for example, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 272, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit". The judgment value data is determined as "time saving judgment value data". In addition, when the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "small hit", The judgment value data is determined as "small hit judgment value data." In addition, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 22118 to 22322, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines The value data is determined as "jackpot determination value data". Furthermore, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 22323 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "loss" and determines The value data is determined as "loss determination value data."

For example, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 272, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit". Then, the judgment value data is determined to be "time saving judgment value data". In addition, if the variable probability flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "small hit", The judgment value data is determined as "small hit judgment value data." In addition, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 22118 to 22968, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines The value data is determined as "jackpot determination value data". Furthermore, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 22969 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "loss" and determines The value data is determined as "loss determination value data."

As described above, in this embodiment, a predetermined range from 0 (for example, 0 to 409 in the case of the first special symbol hit determination process) among the random numbers for jackpot determination that occur in the range of 0 to 65535, It is assigned to other determination value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data) other than the jackpot determination value data and the loss determination value data. In addition, the end of the predetermined value (for example, 615 to 65535 if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to the loss determination value data. Furthermore, the jackpot determination value data and the loss determination value data are allocated adjacently. By doing this, for example, when the probability change flag changes from OFF to ON (or from ON to OFF), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced ( It becomes possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the width of other judgment value data (for example, time-saving hit judgment value data) by simply increasing the width of the judgment value data (for example, time-saving hit judgment value data).

In addition, in this example, the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, and the "time-saving win" winning probability when the second special symbol hit determination process is performed. By making the probabilities different, it is possible to give variation to the game and suppress a drop in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 10, the probability of winning a "time-saving win" when the first special symbol's hit determination process is performed is compared to the "time-saving win" chance when the second special symbol's hit determination process is performed. By making the winning probability higher than the winning probability of ``, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the normal game state, which tends to become a monotonous game.

However, the probability of winning a "time-saving win" when the second special symbol's hit determination process is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time-saving win" when the first special symbol's hit determination process is performed. You can. In this case, for example, if you win a "time-saving win" in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is overlapped, so that if you win the "time-saving win" just before the end of the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state will actually change. This will make it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 can determine that the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving win" regardless of whether the probability change flag is on or off. . However, when the probability variation flag is off (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state), the main CPU 201 controls to the time-saving gaming state if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving winning", but the probability variation flag is on. In this case, even if the result of the winning determination process is a "time saving win", the control is not made to the time saving gaming state.

[1-4-3. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 11 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table determines the stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol obtained when a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 140A, 140B and the winning/losing judgment value data mentioned above. This table is referred to when selecting the "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" that determine the symbol (that is, when executing the special symbol determination process of S105 in FIG. 29, which will be described later). The "selected symbol command" is a command for specifying a symbol determined according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for specifying the symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. This is a command for specifying. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201, for example, sends the selection symbol command and symbol designation command as follows. Select as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 70 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects a selection symbol command and a symbol designation command, for example, as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 2 to 9, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 10 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, for example, regardless of the symbol random number value of the first special symbol from 0 to 99, the main CPU 201 "z7" is selected as the command, and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, regardless of the symbol random number value of the special symbol being between 0 and 99, the main CPU 201 executes the selected symbol command ``z10'' is selected as the symbol designation command, and ``zA8'' is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 executes the small hit game control process. In the small winning game control process, for example, the small winning shutter 153 (see FIG. 6) is operated to allow the game ball to enter (pass through) the small winning large winning opening 151 (see FIG. 4) or to open it easily. A prize ball can be paid out by executing control to set the state.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 29, the main CPU 201 selects "z11" as the selection symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 30 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z12" as the selection symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z13" as the selection symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is between 0 and 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z14" as the selection symbol command and "zA11" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, in this embodiment, the win/loss judgment value data is determined based on the extracted random value for jackpot judgment with reference to the special symbol hit judgment table (see Fig. 10), and then the special symbol judgment table (see Fig. 10) is determined. 11), a so-called two-stage lottery is performed in which a selection symbol command and a symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a so-called one-stage lottery may be performed in which the winning or losing of the special symbol, the selection symbol command, and the symbol designation command are determined based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination and the symbol random number value of the special symbol.

[1-4-4. Special symbol stop mode determination table]
FIG. 12 is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol that is led out to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 5) when the variable display of the special symbol stops. It is referred to when making a decision according to the symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 12, the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 5) is, for example, 1 consisting of an area of 0 to 7. Consists of byte control signals. Each of the areas 0 to 7 of the first special symbol corresponds one-to-one to any of the eight LEDs that constitute the first special symbol display section 163. Similarly, each of the areas 0 to 7 of the second special symbol corresponds one-to-one to any of the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display section 164.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the display mode of the LEDs (display mode of time-saving win) led to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 is determined as follows. be done. For example, when the selection symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 selects the LED corresponding to area 0 of the first special symbol and the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163. The first special symbol is determined to be stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED corresponding to the area 7 is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 selects the LED corresponding to area 0 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163. It is determined to stop display the first special symbol in such a manner that the LED corresponding to 1 and the LED corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 selects the LED corresponding to area 0 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs that constitute the first special symbol display section 163. It is determined to stop display the first special symbol in such a manner that the LED corresponding to 2 and the LED corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z8", the main CPU 201 selects the LED corresponding to area 0 of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the second special symbol display section 164, and the LED corresponding to the area 0 of the second special symbol. The second special symbol is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED corresponding to region 1 of the second special symbol and the LED corresponding to region 7 of the second special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z9", the main CPU 201 selects the LED corresponding to area 0 of the second special symbol and the area of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the second special symbol display section 164. It is determined to stop display the second special symbol in such a manner that the LED corresponding to 2 and the LED corresponding to the area 7 of the second special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small win", the display mode of the LED (small win display mode) derived to the second special symbol display section 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 selects the LED corresponding to area 1 of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs that constitute the second special symbol display section 164, and the LED that corresponds to area 1 of the second special symbol. It is determined that the second special symbol display section 164 is to be displayed in a stopped state in such a manner that the LED corresponding to the area 7 is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the display mode of the LEDs (jackpot display mode) derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 201 selects the LED corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs that make up the first special symbol display section 163, and the LED that corresponds to the area 3 of the first special symbol. It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 should be stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED corresponding to the region 4 of the first special symbol and the LED corresponding to the first special symbol region 5 are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 selects the LED corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163. 4 and the LED corresponding to the area 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the first special symbol display section 163 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 selects the LED corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163. It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 should be stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED corresponding to 5 and the LED corresponding to the area 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 201 selects the LED corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display section 163. 4, the LED corresponding to the area 5 of the first special symbol, and the LED corresponding to the area 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the first special symbol is displayed. It is determined that the section 163 is to be displayed in a stopped state. When the selected symbol command is "z11", the main CPU 201 selects the LED corresponding to the area 3 of the second special symbol and the area of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the second special symbol display section 164. It is determined that the second special symbol display section 164 is to be displayed in a stopped state in such a manner that the LED corresponding to the area 5 of the second special symbol and the LED corresponding to the area 5 of the second special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z12", the main CPU 201 selects the LED corresponding to the area 3 of the second special symbol and the area of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the second special symbol display section 164. 4 and the LED corresponding to the second special symbol area 6 are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, so that the second special symbol display section 164 is stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z13", the main CPU 201 selects the LED corresponding to the area 3 of the second special symbol and the area of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the second special symbol display section 164. It is determined that the second special symbol display section 164 is to be displayed in a stopped state in such a manner that the LED corresponding to number 5 is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose", the display manner of the LEDs (the display manner of loss) derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z7", the main CPU 201 lights only the LED corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs that make up the first special symbol display section 163, and lights up the other LEDs. It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED is turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z14", the main CPU 201 lights only the LED corresponding to the area 7 of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the second special symbol display section 164, and lights up the other LEDs. It is determined that the second special symbol display section 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the light is turned off.

When the main CPU 201 determines the stopping mode of the special symbol based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 sends a control signal corresponding to the determined mode to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. It outputs to each LED constituting and controls the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164.

In addition, in FIG. 12, the display mode of the LED led to the first special symbol display section 163 and the display mode of the LED guided to the second special symbol display section 164 are shown in the same table for convenience. However, it is preferable that the control signals are transmitted separately to the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164.

[1-4-5. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table is used when determining the winning gaming state and/or the subsequent gaming state (in other words, the following This is referred to when executing the winning type determination process in S106 of FIG. 29). The form of the winning game state shown in FIG. 13 indicates the form of the jackpot gaming state or the form of the small winning gaming state. Further, the mode of the subsequent gaming state indicates the mode of the gaming state after the end of the winning gaming state. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the C time-saving gaming state is controlled without being controlled to the winning gaming state, so the subsequent gaming state will be the C-time saving gaming state. Indicates the mode.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the aspect of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON, and decides to set the number of time saving times to 10 times. When the selected symbol command is "z1" and "z8", the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time saving flag to ON, and sets the number of time saving times to 50. Determine. When the selected symbol command is "z2" and "z9", the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time saving flag to ON, and sets the number of time saving times to 100. Determine. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving win", the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned time-saving win display mode to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164, and then Without controlling to the jackpot game state, the time saving flag is set on and the determined number of time saving times is set, thereby making it possible to control to the C time saving gaming state. In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving win", the win game state is not controlled, so the mode of the win game state is not determined. In addition, in this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time saving win", the set time saving number is the same regardless of the gaming state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. It is said that However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set time saving number may be varied depending on the gaming state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the number of time-saving times to be set is determined according to the selection symbol command determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. are different. By doing this, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", it is possible to have variations in the subsequent progress of the game, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. It becomes possible.

By the way, as described above, when the probability change flag is on, the main CPU 201 does not control to the time-saving gaming state even if the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". For example, even if the probability change flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 201 performs a "time-saving winning" lottery as shown in FIG. 10, and the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". In some cases, although the display mode of the time-saving win indicating that the "time-saving win" has been won is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, it is not controlled to the C time-saving game state. In addition, the main CPU 201 performs a "time-saving win" lottery even if the probability change flag is on, and if the result of the win determination process is "time-saving win", the main CPU 201 forcibly changes the display mode of the loss to a special symbol. The information may be displayed on the display sections 163 and 164. Furthermore, when the probability variable flag is on, the time-saving hit judgment value data may not be assigned to the random value for jackpot judgment, that is, the winning judgment process may be performed in which the "time-saving win" is not included in the lottery result. .

In addition, in this embodiment, when the probability change flag is on, it is configured not to shift to the C time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, in a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state where the time-saving flag is off even if the probability change flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving win", the system shifts to the high-probability time-saving gaming state. You can do it like this.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small win", the form of the winning game state and the form of the subsequent game state are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 determines the number of openings of the small winning large winning opening 151 (see FIG. 4) to be one time as the mode of the small winning gaming state. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small win", the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned small win display mode to the second special symbol display section 164, and then displays the determined small win big win. By setting the number of openings of the mouth 151, it is possible to control the small winning game state. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small win", after the end of the small win game state, the main CPU 201 does not change either the probability change flag or the time saving flag, and is controlled to the small win game state. Return to the previous gaming state.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the form of the winning game state and the form of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" or "z11", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds as 10 rounds as the jackpot gaming state, and sets the probability variable flag and time saving as the subsequent gaming state. Among the flags, it is decided to set only the probability variation flag to ON, and it is decided to set the probability variation number to 10,000 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 can control the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 and then switch to the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. becomes.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z4", "z5", and "z12", the main CPU 201 sets the number of rounds to 10 rounds, 4 rounds, and 10 rounds, respectively, as the mode of the jackpot game state. decided on. In addition, as for the subsequent gaming state, in any case, it is decided to set both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to ON, and it is decided to set both the probability variation number and the time saving number to 10,000. . In these cases, the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164, and then controls the jackpot gaming state, and after the end of this jackpot gaming state, It becomes possible to control to a highly accurate time-saving gaming state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z13", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds and 10, respectively, as the jackpot game state. In addition, as for the mode of the subsequent gaming state, in either case, it is decided to set only the time-saving flag of the probability change flag and the time-saving flag to ON. Further, the number of times to save time is determined to be set to, for example, 200 times when the selected symbol command is "z6", and to 300 times when the selected symbol command is "z13". In these cases, the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164, and then controls the jackpot gaming state, and after the end of this jackpot gaming state, It becomes possible to control the time-saving gaming state. The time-saving gaming state controlled here is the A-time-saving gaming state. It should be noted that the mode of time saving control in the high accuracy time saving gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as "time saving performance") is preferably the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state, but may be different from the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state. .

Further, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" or "z14"), the main CPU 201 determines the winning game state and None of the subsequent gaming state aspects are set. That is, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 201 continues to control the previous gaming state without changing the gaming state.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" or "z14"), the aspect of the winning game state and the subsequent Since none of the game state aspects are set, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. 13. However, in this example, in order to clearly indicate that neither the winning game state nor the subsequent game state will be determined if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "loss", the figure is shown for convenience. 13.

In this way, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table in FIG. Win/loss determination value data is determined based on the random number value for jackpot determination (performing win/loss determination), and a win/loss (“time-saving win,” “small win,” “big hit,” or “loss”) is determined. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol determination table in FIG. The selected symbol command is determined based on the winning/losing judgment value data, and the type of display mode (for example, time saving type, jackpot type) derived to the special symbol display parts 163, 164 is determined. Note that the above-mentioned winning/losing determination and determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, but it is excluded that it is performed from the time the variable display of the special symbol begins until the final display. That's not the purpose.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, the number of time saving times in the A time saving gaming state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z6") or 300 times. times (when the selected symbol command is "z13"). On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the number of time saving times in the C time saving game state that is controlled is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times. times (when the selected symbol command is "z1") or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2"). That is, the expected value of the number of time savings in the A time saving gaming state is higher than the expected value of the number of time saving times in the C time saving gaming state. In this way, by making the time-saving gaming state A more advantageous to the player than the time-saving gaming state C, it is possible to increase the position of the "jackpot". For example, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest that may occur due to winning a "jackpot" but being at a disadvantage compared to not winning a "jackpot" (winning a "time saving"). becomes.

In addition, instead of setting the expected value of the number of time savings in the A time saving game state to be higher than the expected value of the number of time savings in the C time saving game state, for example, as shown in FIG. 14, the expected value of the number of time savings in the C time saving game state may be set higher than the expected value of the number of time saving times in the A time saving gaming state. FIG. 14 is a modification of the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 13. In this FIG. 14, the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z6" or "z13"). On the other hand, the number of time savings in the C time saving gaming state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1"), or 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1"). In the case of "z2"). In this way, by making the time-saving game state C more advantageous for the player than the time-saving game state A, it is possible to increase the positioning of the "time-saving win". For example, even if the state continues for a long period of time without winning a "jackpot", if a "time-saving win" is won, the game is controlled to the relatively advantageous C-time-saving gaming state, thereby suppressing a decline in interest. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, in this specification, similarly to the case of the variable probability flag, when the value of the time saving flag is "0", the time saving flag is off, and when the value of the time saving flag is "1", the time saving flag is on.

The time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203 like the probability variable flag, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute time saving control.

Moreover, the number of times of time saving is a variable number of display times of special symbols that can be continuously executed for time saving control. That is, for example, if the number of time-saving games is determined to be "50," and the special symbol is variablely displayed 50 times without winning a jackpot in this time-saving game state, this time-saving game state ends and the non-time-saving game ends. state (for example, normal gaming state).

Note that the number of probability variations and the number of time reductions of "10000" shown in FIG. 13 is intended to allow the probability variation control to be executed continuously after the end of the jackpot game state until it is determined that it is a jackpot (that is, the next jackpot).

[1-4-6. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 15 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start of special symbols of the first pachinko gaming machine. Further, FIG. 16 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start of special symbols of the first pachinko gaming machine. All of these tables are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that the "Remarks" column in FIGS. 15 and 16 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand. The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120, and determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140A, 140B. Determine the fluctuation pattern of the symbol. The special symbol variation pattern table in FIGS. 15 and 16 is a table that is referred to when executing the special symbol variation pattern determination process in S107 in FIG. 29, which will be described later.

In a normal game state in which left-handed hitting is a normal game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start shown in FIG. 15, for example.

As shown in the variation pattern table of special symbols for low start in FIG. If so, set the read-ahead flag. The sub CPU 301 that has received the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201 performs a prefetch effect if the prefetch flag is set.

Note that in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not to perform the prefetch effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 301 may also make the determination.

On the other hand, in a gaming state in which right-handed hitting is a regular gaming mode, that is, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, or a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a special symbol for a high start shown in FIG. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 does not set the prefetch flag when determining the special symbol variation pattern with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start, but the present invention is not limited to this.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the variation pattern of the special symbol is based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol's hit determination process (win or loss), the random value for reach determination, and the random value for effect selection. Determined by However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be determined based on other values in place of or in addition to any of the above.

Note that the random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start in Figure 16, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start in Figure 15. The expected value of the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed per unit time is larger than in the case where it is determined. In particular, when determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start, the second special symbol is variable over an extremely long period of time, for example approximately 600000 msec (for example, long fluctuation A to C). Display is performed. On the other hand, when determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start, the second special symbol is variablely displayed only for a very short time, for example, 1000 msec (for example, super fast fluctuation). .

The main CPU 201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 301. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 201.

Although not shown in FIG. 15, for example, the range of the random number value for performance selection may be changed for each set value, so that the fluctuation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbols to be determined may be different.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, in the normal game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start, and for example, in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and In the low-accuracy time-saving game state, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start, a plurality of variation pattern tables with different expected values of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time may be provided, and the special symbol It is also possible to use different tables to refer to when determining the variation pattern of .

In addition, for the time-saving hits A and B shown in the "Notes" column in Figure 15 and the "Notes" column in Figure 16, there is a possibility that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit (not a jackpot). This is a reach performance that shows that there is no possibility. Similarly, jackpot type reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that there is a possibility of a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, the common reach A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be either a time-saving hit or a jackpot.

[1-4-7. Time-saving gaming state]
As described above, in this embodiment, the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, and the C working time saving gaming state are prepared as the time saving gaming state. These time-saving gaming states will be explained below.

A time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that is controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the selected symbol command is, for example, "z6" or "z13". It is. That is, the condition for transition to the A time-saving gaming state is to win a jackpot (a jackpot where the selected symbol command is "z6" or "z13"). However, even if the conditions for transitioning to the A time-saving gaming state are met, the transition to the A-time saving gaming state does not always occur, but if a condition that prevents the transition to the A-time saving gaming state is satisfied (for example, if the backup is cleared) etc.), the A time-saving game state is not entered.

In addition, the conditions for ending the A time-saving gaming state are determined in accordance with the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state based on the "jackpot" is started, and in response to the selection symbol command. When the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the number of times saved (hereinafter referred to as "A prescribed number of times saved") is executed (see the "Number of hours saved" column in Figure 13) This is the case when any of the following conditions are met.

In the B time-saving gaming state, for example, the ceiling counter is updated (increased by 1) starting from when the jackpot gaming state ends and the variable display of special symbols in the non-high-probability gaming state starts. This is a time-saving gaming state that is controlled when the ceiling value is reached. That is, the condition for transition to the B time-saving gaming state is that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. B The transition to the time-saving gaming state may be performed when the variable display of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "ceiling final variation") starts when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, or when the ceiling final variation ends. Alternatively, it may be set when the variable display of the special symbol next to the final ceiling change is started. That is, the transition timing to the B time-saving game state may be any time between the start of the final ceiling fluctuation and the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the final ceiling variation is "lose", the display mode of "lose" is derived on the special symbol display sections 163, 164, but the transition to the B time-saving gaming state is made. Become. Note that even if the conditions for transition to the B time-saving gaming state are met, the transition to the B time-saving gaming state does not always occur, but when conditions that prevent the transition to the B time-saving gaming state are met (for example, a special situation in the final ceiling fluctuation) If the result of the symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, etc.), the system does not shift to the A time-saving game state.

The ceiling counter is not updated when the probability variation flag is on, and is always counted when the probability variation flag is off, regardless of whether the time saving flag is on or off. When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the B time-saving game state is controlled unless the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot". If the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "small win," B time-saving game is executed when the display mode of the small win is derived to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164. The B time-saving game state may be started after the small winning game state ends. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is "jackpot", the jackpot game state is controlled without being controlled to the B time-saving game state.

In addition, the ceiling counter is activated by the backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on, when the jackpot game state is controlled, and when the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clear process). If a switch other than the normal symbol winning probability (for example, the setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, or if the high probability of the normal symbol winning probability ends in a gaming machine that can change the normal symbol winning probability, a predetermined It is reset when the following conditions are met. When updating of the ceiling counter is permitted, the ceiling counter is updated each time the special symbol is displayed variably. For example, if the probability change flag is on, updating of the ceiling counter is not allowed.

After clearing the ceiling counter, the main CPU 201 starts counting the ceiling counter from the variable display of the next special symbol. Note that the ceiling value may be set by the main CPU 201 each time the ceiling counter is cleared, or may be predetermined unique to the pachinko gaming machine instead of being set each time.

When the ceiling counter is cleared by being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, if the variable probability flag is not turned on after the jackpot gaming state ends, the main CPU 201 Update the ceiling counter (+1). In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state, if the variable probability flag is on, the ceiling counter will not be updated even if a special symbol is displayed variablely, but for example, if it is a ST machine or a specification that performs a variable fall lottery, the variable probability flag will not be updated. The ceiling counter is updated at the start or end of the first variable display of special symbols after turning off.

In addition, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a specification in which the main CPU 201 performs a high probability rolling lottery, when the sub CPU 301 receives the command sent from the main CPU 201, the sub CPU 301 produces an effect that suggests winning the high probability rolling lottery or a high probability game. It is preferable not to perform a performance that suggests a transition from a state to a low-probability gaming state. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the starting point of counting by the ceiling counter, that is, the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state based on the display effect displayed on the display device 7, and it becomes more interesting. It becomes possible to provide a certain level of gameplay. If it is difficult to grasp the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state, for example, by displaying a countdown effect or a fake countdown effect that suggests the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state on the display device 7 under the control of the sub CPU 301. , it becomes possible to further increase interest.

Additionally, when the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clear process), the main CPU 201 starts the first variable display of special symbols after the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared. The ceiling counter is updated (+1) at the time or end of the process.

Furthermore, when a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, the setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, the main CPU 201 controls the variable display of the special symbol for the first time after the other switch is operated. The ceiling counter is updated (+1) at the start or end of the process.

In addition, the conditions for ending the B time-saving gaming state are the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state based on the "jackpot" is started, and the case where a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot") is started based on the "jackpot". This is a case where either condition is satisfied among a case where variable display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) for a number of times (referred to as "B time saving specified number of times") is executed. One of the conditions for ending the B time saving game state, ``When the variable display of the special symbol for the prescribed number of B time saving is executed'', the variable display of the special symbol for the prescribed number of B time saving (hereinafter referred to as ``B time saving final variation'') '') is started, or when the B time saving final variation ends. That is, the end timing of the B time saving game state may be any time between the start of the B time saving final variation and the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to this B time saving final variation.

C time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that is controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving winning". In other words, the conditions for transitioning to the C time-saving gaming state are that a time-saving win is won (a time-saving win where the selected symbol command is "z0" to "z2", "z8", or "z9"), and the display mode of the time-saving win is a special symbol. It is to be derived (determined and displayed) on the display sections 163 and 164. Furthermore, even if the conditions for transitioning to the C time-saving gaming state are met, the transition to the C-time saving gaming state does not always occur, but if a condition that prevents the transition to the C time-saving gaming state is satisfied (for example, the B time-saving gaming state and In the case where the C time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state are not executed at the same time (details will be described later), and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the B time-saving game state is "time-saving hit"), the C time-saving game do not move to the state. In addition, if the condition that prevents the transition to the C time-saving gaming state is satisfied even though the transition condition to the C-time saving gaming state is satisfied, the main CPU 201 will not make the transition to the C time-saving gaming state. Control is executed to derive the display mode of to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164.

In addition, the conditions for ending the C time-saving gaming state are determined in response to the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state based on the "jackpot" is started, and in response to the selection symbol command. When the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the number of times saved (hereinafter referred to as "C specified number of times saved") is executed (see the "Number of hours saved" column in Figure 13) This is the case when any of the following conditions are met. The prescribed number of C time savings, which is one of the conditions for ending the C time saving gaming state, starts variable display of the special symbol for the number of time saving times determined in response to the selection symbol command (hereinafter referred to as "C time saving final variation"). It may be set when the C time saving final variation is completed. That is, the end timing of the C time saving game state may be any time between the start of the C time saving final variation and the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to this C time saving final variation.

Note that the time saving performance may be different between the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state. In addition, the time-saving performance of two time-saving gaming states is the same among the A-time saving gaming state, B-time-saving gaming state, and C-time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving performance of these two time-saving gaming states and the other one time-saving gaming state are The time saving performance may be different. Furthermore, the time saving performance of the A time saving gaming state, the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state, and the time saving performance of the C time saving gaming state may be made to be the same.

In addition to the above, the conditions for ending the A time saving gaming state, the ending conditions for the B time saving gaming state, and the ending conditions for the C time saving gaming state include, for example, the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol has reached the specified number of times. Or, the number of small wins has reached a predetermined number of times, the normal electric accessory 146 has been opened a predetermined number of times, a specific opening mode has been selected as the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146, etc. good.

[1-4-8. Normal symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 17 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, the type of time saving and the normal symbol hit obtained when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4). This table is referred to when determining a "normal symbol win" or "loss" by lottery based on the random number value for determination (that is, when executing the normal symbol game determination process of S295, which will be described later).

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random number value for determining a hit of a normal symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines a "normal symbol win" or "loss" based on the extracted random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol. The normal symbol hit determination table contains the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination determined for "normal symbol hit" and the corresponding normal symbol hit determination value data for each time saving type. The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol determined to be a "loss" and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this embodiment, in the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state, high-precision non-time-saving gaming state), the main CPU 201 executes " It is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol hit, and the win/loss determination value data is determined to be the normal symbol winning determination value data. In addition, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 80 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". ” is decided.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol has won a normal symbol if the random number value for hit determination is between 0 and 98, and changes the winning/losing determination value data to "normal". "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the winning determination random number value of the extracted normal symbol is 99, and determines it as a "loss", and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data".

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the hit determination random value of the extracted normal symbol is one of 0 to 79 as a “normal symbol hit”, and changes the win/loss determination value data to “normal symbol hit”. "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the B time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 80 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". ” is decided.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the hit determination random value of the extracted normal symbol is one of 0 to 79 as a “normal symbol hit”, and changes the win/loss determination value data to “normal symbol hit”. "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 80 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". ” is decided.

In this way, in this example, among the non-time saving gaming state, A working time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state, and C working time saving gaming state, the winning probability per normal symbol in the A working time saving gaming state (shown in FIG. 17) Selectivity (approximate)) is the highest. Therefore, the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the non-time saving gaming state, B time saving gaming state, or C time saving gaming state is a "jackpot", and after the jackpot gaming state based on this "jackpot" ends, the A time saving gaming state (for example, selected symbol commands “z6” and “z13”), the winning probability of the normal symbol will be changed to a higher probability.

Further, the winning probability per normal symbol in the B time-saving gaming state (selection rate (approximate) shown in FIG. 17) is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state. Similarly, the winning probability per normal symbol in the C time-saving gaming state (selection rate (approximate) shown in FIG. 17) is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, even if the gaming state shifts between the non-time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and the C-time-saving gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol will not change.

Note that the winning probability per normal symbol may be the same in the non-time-saving gaming state, the A-time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and the C-time-saving gaming state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is only necessary to vary the proportion of types of normal symbols, which will be described later, for each state without changing the probability of winning per normal symbol.

[1-4-9. Normal symbol judgment table]
FIG. 18 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table is based on the type of time saving, the aforementioned win/loss determination value data, and the symbol random number value of the regular symbol obtained when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4). This is a table that is referred to when selecting the "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" that determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol. "Select symbol command when normal symbol hits" is a command to specify the winning symbol of the normal symbol determined according to the type of normal symbol when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit. be. The symbol random number value of the normal symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is selected as follows. Ru.

For example, in a non-time-saving gaming state, if normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 will , "fz0" is selected as the selection symbol command when the symbol hits normally.

In addition, in the A time-saving gaming state, if normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 29, it is normal. Select "fz1" as the selection symbol command when a symbol hits, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is between 30 and 69, select "fz2" as the selection symbol command when the symbol hits, and select the symbol random number of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is between 70 and 99, "fz3" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, when normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit judgment process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 29, it is normal. Select "fz4" as the selection symbol command when a symbol hits, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is between 30 and 69, select "fz5" as the selection symbol command when the normal symbol hits, and select the symbol randomness of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is between 70 and 99, "fz6" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, when normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit judgment process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 29, it is normal. Select "fz7" as the selected symbol command when a symbol hits, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is between 30 and 69, select "fz8" as the selected symbol command when the normal symbol hits, and select the symbol random number of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is between 70 and 99, "fz9" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 17) and determines the win/loss determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value. , After that, a so-called two-stage lottery is performed in which the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 18) is referred to and the symbol command to be selected when a normal symbol hits is determined based on the symbol random value of the normal symbol. Not limited to. For example, a so-called one-stage lottery is performed to determine whether a normal symbol wins or not, and the symbol command to select when a normal symbol is won, based on the extracted random value for determining the hit of the normal symbol and the random symbol number of the normal symbol. You can.

[1-4-10. Normal symbol type determination table]
FIG. 19 is an example of a normal symbol type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol per type determination table determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), in response to the normal symbol per selection symbol command that is determined in accordance with the symbol random value of the normal symbol. It is referred to when determining (that is, when executing the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 146 executed in the normal symbol variable display start process of S293 in FIG. 54, which will be described later).

In this embodiment, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz0", the main CPU 201 selects the opening pattern that is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) with a first opening time of 1000 msec, no wait time, It has been decided that there will be no second opening. That is, an opening pattern is determined in which the normal electric accessory 146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz1", the main CPU 201 selects the opening pattern which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) with a first opening time of 2000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a wait time of 200 msec. The second opening time is determined to be 2000 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz2", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) with a first opening time of 2500 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, The second opening time is determined to be 2500 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz3", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern that is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) with a first opening time of 3000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a waiting time of 200 msec. The second opening time is determined to be 3000 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz4" and "fz7", the main CPU 201 changes the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time. It is decided to be 2500 msec, no wait time, and no second opening.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz5" and "fz8", the main CPU 201 changes the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time. 2000 msec, wait time 600 msec, and second release time 2000 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz6" and "fz9", the main CPU 201 changes the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time. 2500 msec, wait time 600 msec, and second release time 2500 msec.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is Among the opening patterns of the normal electric accessories 146 in the time-saving game state, A-time-saving game state, B-time-saving game state, and C-time-saving game state, the most advantageous mode is the most disadvantageous mode.

In addition, the degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 is the degree of ease of winning the game ball to the second starting opening 140B when the ordinary electric accessory 146 is opened.

If the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the A time-saving gaming state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is non-time-saving gaming state, A time-saving gaming state, B time-saving This mode has the most advantageous degree among the opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 146 in the game state and the time-saving game state C.

In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the B time-saving game state is "normal symbol hit" is the normal symbol hit determination process in the C time-saving game state. Although the degree of advantage is the same as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the processing result is "normal symbol hit", it is not limited to this.

[1-4-11. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 20 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table is used to determine the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (that is, to execute the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process that is executed in the normal symbol variable display start process of S293 in FIG. 54, which will be described later). referenced in the following). The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table, and selects the normal symbol effect based on the gaming state and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect obtained when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4). Determine the fluctuation pattern of the symbol. The random number value for normal symbol production selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the variable display time of the normal symbols is determined to be, for example, 300,000 msec, regardless of the random number value for normal symbol performance selection from 0 to 99. The variable display time of the normal symbols in the non-time-saving gaming state is the longest among the non-time-saving gaming state, the A-time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and the C-time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in the A time saving game state, if the random number value for normal symbol production selection is between 0 and 89, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 500 msec, for example, and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is 90 to 99. In either case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 800 msec.

In addition, in the B time saving game state, if the random number value for normal symbol production selection is between 0 and 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 500 msec, for example, and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is 40 to 79. If either of these is the case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec. Ru.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, if the random number value for normal symbol production selection is between 0 and 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is 40 to 79. If either of these is the case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec. Ru.

In this way, the variable display time of the normal symbol per variable display is the variable display time of the normal symbol in the non-time saving gaming state, the A time saving gaming state, the B time saving gaming state, and the C time saving gaming state. The expected value of the variable display time of normal symbols in the time-saving game state is the shortest. Therefore, in the A time-saving game state, the time required for the normal electric accessory 146 to be released is the shortest among the non-time-saving game state, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state.

Further, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the B time-saving game state is the same as the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the C time-saving game state, but is not limited to this.

[1-5. Details of processing related to time-saving gaming state]
[1-5-1. Number of time reductions set when time reduction is applied]
In the above explanation, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time saving win", the set time saving number is the same regardless of the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of time reductions set when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time saver win" is determined according to the gaming state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. You can do it like this.

Further, even in a high probability gaming state where the probability change flag is set to ON, "time saving win" may be included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process. In this case, the main CPU derives the display mode of the time-saving game on the special symbol display section, but does not execute the control to shift to the time-saving gaming state, and continues to control the high-precision gaming state. By the way, there is known a game machine, such as a pachinko game machine called a so-called ST machine, which turns a probability change flag from on to off when a variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times. In such an ST machine, if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process performed in the final game as a high-probability gaming state is "time-saving hit", the time-saving win is displayed rather than the process of turning off the probability change flag. When the process of deriving the mode is carried out later, the main CPU may control the time saving game state C after deriving the display mode per time saving.

[1-5-2. Duplication of time-saving gaming states]
When a plurality of time-saving gaming states are provided, the time-saving gaming states may overlap. For example, in the A time saving gaming state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving winning", the A time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state will overlap. Further, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state overlap. When the time-saving gaming states overlap in this way, the time-saving gaming states may be executed overlappingly, or the time-saving gaming states may not overlap (that is, the overlap of the time-saving gaming states may be ignored). In addition, so that the A time saving gaming state and the B working time saving gaming state do not overlap, the prescribed number of A time saving gaming states, which is the end condition for the A working time saving gaming state, is set to be smaller than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time saving gaming state. stipulated.

When the time-saving gaming states overlap, a case where the time-saving gaming states are executed overlappingly and a case where the time-saving gaming states do not overlap will be explained below.

[1-5-2-1. When executing multiple time-saving gaming states]
When the time-saving gaming states overlap, when the time-saving gaming states are executed overlappingly, if the winning time-saving game state is won in any one of the time-saving gaming states A, B, and C. Sometimes, the C time-saving game state is executed in an overlapping manner, and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state is executed in an overlapping manner.

[1-5-2-1-1. When executing the C time saving gaming state overlapping the first time saving gaming state]
If you win a "time-saving win" in any one of the time-saving game states A, B, and C, the main CPU 201 displays the time-saving win on the special symbol display sections 163 and 164. Derive the display mode. In this case, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of one time-saving game state and adopts as the time-saving number the number of variable displays of special symbols that can be executed until the end condition of the time-saving game state is satisfied.

For example, if you win a "time saving win" in the A time saving game state, and the remaining number of time savings in the A time saving game state is greater than the number of time savings that can be executed based on this "time saving win", the main CPU 201 executes the A time saving win. While maintaining the time-saving performance of the game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived, the time-saving game state is controlled until the remaining number of time-savings in the time-saving game state A is exhausted. To explain with specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of time savers in the A time saver game state is 200, the "time saver win" is won, and the number of time savers that can be executed based on this "time saver win" is 50. In the case of the number of times, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived on the special symbol display sections 163, 164, but while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, the number of time-savings from here on is as long as a "jackpot" is not derived. 200 times. Therefore, even if you win a "time saving win" in any one of the time saving gaming states A, B, and C, the appearance of the number of working hours and the time saving performance will be This is the same as the case where the A time-saving game state is continued without winning the "time-saving win".

On the other hand, for example, if a "time saving win" is won in the A time saving gaming state, and the number of times that can be executed based on this "time saving winning" is less than the remaining number of time saving times in the A time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 executes the A While maintaining the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is controlled until the number of time-savings set based on the "time-saving win" is exhausted unless a "jackpot" is derived. To explain with specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of time savers in the A time saver game state is 20, the "time saver win" is won, and the number of times that can be executed based on this "time saver win" is 50. In the case that the time saving performance of the time saving game state A is maintained, the number of time saving times from this point on is 50 times unless a "jackpot" is derived. In other words, even if the variable display of the special symbol is performed for 20 times, which is the remaining number of times in the A time-saving gaming state, after that, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving gaming state, the special symbol is displayed 30 times, which is the difference between the two. A variable display of is further executed.

[1-5-2-1-2. When executing B time saving gaming state over C time saving gaming state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 controls the display mode according to the display mode (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process) derived to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation. Execute control.

First, a case will be described in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit" or a "loss" in the final ceiling fluctuation.

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving gaming state, if the remaining number of time saving in the C time saving gaming state is greater than the prescribed number of B time saving gaming states, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance of the C time saving gaming state. , unless a "jackpot" is derived, the time-saving game state is controlled until the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state C is exhausted. To explain with specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of time savings in C time saving game state is 300, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the B prescribed number of time savings is 200, then in C time saving game state. While maintaining the time-saving performance, the number of time-savings from this point on is 300 unless a "jackpot" is derived. Therefore, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the appearance of the number of time-savings and the time-saving performance is the same as when the C time-saving game state continues without the ceiling counter reaching the ceiling value. It is.

On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving specified number of times is greater than the remaining time-saving number in the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state. However, unless a "jackpot" is derived, the time-saving game state is controlled until the B time-saving specified number of times is exhausted. To explain with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time savings in C time saving gaming state is 20, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the number of time saving times that can be executed as B time saving gaming state is 300. , C While maintaining the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state, the number of time-savings from this point on is 300 unless a "jackpot" is derived. In other words, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed 20 times, which is the remaining number of times in the C time-saving gaming state, the special symbol will be displayed 280 times, which is the difference between the two, while maintaining the time-saving performance in the C time-saving gaming state. A variable display of is further executed.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed in the final ceiling fluctuation, the main CPU 201 derives a display mode according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164. That is, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit", a small win display mode is derived, and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "loss", a loss display format is derived. . When the small win display mode is derived, the small win game state is controlled, but the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving flag on even during the small win game state.

Next, in the ceiling final variation, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", that is, in the ceiling final variation, the transition condition to the B time saving gaming state and the transition condition to the C time saving gaming state are different. A case where this holds true will be explained. In this case, the main CPU 201 starts controlling the B time-saving gaming state before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, and when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is Different control can be executed depending on the case where control of the B time saving gaming state is started after being drawn to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164.

First, if control of the B time-saving game state is started before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164. At the time when this is done, the control is already in the B time saving gaming state. Therefore, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state, and as long as a "jackpot" is not derived, the greater of the prescribed number of time saving times of B and the number of time saving times of the C time saving gaming state is used up. Control to a time-saving gaming state.

Next, when control of the B time-saving gaming state is started after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164. At the time when the B time-saving game state is not yet controlled. Therefore, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance of the C time saving gaming state, and as long as a "jackpot" is not derived, the greater of the prescribed number of B time saving times and the number of time saving times of the C time saving gaming state is used up. Control to a time-saving gaming state.

In addition, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the ceiling final fluctuation is "jackpot", the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving game state and returns to the B time-saving game state. Control to a jackpot game state without any control.

[1-5-3. When not executing multiple time-saving game states]
In the case where the time-saving game states are not executed repeatedly even though the time-saving game states overlap, the time-saving game state is executed per time-saving game state in any one of the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C. Even if you win, you ignore this and do not repeat the C time-saving gaming state, and even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving gaming state, you ignore this and do not repeat the B time-saving gaming state. There is.

[1-5-3-1. When not executing the C time saving game state over the first time saving game state]
If you win a "time saving win" in any one of the A time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state and C working time saving gaming state, as described above, the main CPU 201 displays the special symbol display parts 163 and 164. , derive the display mode per time saving. However, the main CPU 201 does not control to the C time saving gaming state based on the "time saving winning" unless the last special symbol in the first time saving gaming state is variablely displayed (hereinafter referred to as "time saving final variation"). Control is performed to one time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state is exhausted. In this case, being controlled to one time-saving gaming state (excluding the final time-saving variation) is a condition that prevents the transition to the C-time saving gaming state.

On the other hand, if a "time saving win" is won in the time saving final variation in the first time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the first time saving gaming state is Different controls can be executed depending on the case where one time-saving game state ends and the case where one time-saving game state ends when the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164.

First, if one time-saving game state ends before the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, the main CPU 201, after deriving the display mode of the time-saving hit, changes the time-saving game state C. Start control.

Next, when one time-saving gaming state ends when the display mode per time-saving is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, that is, when the display mode per time-saving is derived and the one time-saving gaming state ends. When performed within the same interrupt process, the main CPU 201 may or may not start controlling the C time-saving gaming state depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the process of deriving the display mode per time saving (determined display) is performed before the end processing of the first time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 executes the first time saving gaming state without controlling to the C time saving gaming state. End the time saving gaming state. In this case, performing the process of deriving the display mode per time saver before the end process of one time saver game state becomes a condition that prevents the transition to the C time saver game state.

On the other hand, if the process of deriving the display mode per time saving (determined display) is performed after the end processing of the first time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 ends the first time saving gaming state and controls the time saving gaming state C. do. In this case, the main CPU 201 does not maintain the time-saving performance of the first time-saving game state, but maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state. That is, the main CPU 201 ends the first time-saving game state without controlling to the C-time-saving game state, if the end processing of the first time-saving game state has not been processed at the time when the display mode per time-saving game is derived, If the end processing of the first time-saving game state has already been performed, control is performed to the time-saving game state C.

[1-5-3-2. When not executing B time saving gaming state over C time saving gaming state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 controls the display mode according to the display mode (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process) derived to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation. Execute control.

First, a case will be described in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", "small hit", or "loss" in the final ceiling fluctuation.

In the C time-saving gaming state, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is "time-saving hit", "small hit", or "loss", the main CPU 201 determines that the remaining number of time-saving games in the C-time saving gaming state is exhausted. The time saving game state C is controlled until the game is completed.

However, when the remaining time saving number of the C time saving gaming state is 0 in the final ceiling fluctuation, the main CPU 201 may or may not start controlling the B time saving gaming state depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the end processing of the C time-saving game state is performed before the start processing of the B time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving game state and controls to the B time-saving game state. On the other hand, when the end processing of the C time saving gaming state is performed after the start processing of the B working time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 ends the C working time saving gaming state without controlling to the B time saving gaming state. That is, at the time when the main CPU 201 is about to start the B time saving gaming state, if the end processing of the C working time saving gaming state has not been processed, the main CPU 201 ends the C working time saving gaming state without controlling to the B working time saving gaming state, and ends the C working time saving gaming state. If the game state termination process has already been performed, control is made to the B time-saving game state. In this case, performing the end processing of the C time saving gaming state after the start processing of the B working time saving gaming state becomes a condition that prevents the transition to the B working time saving gaming state.

In addition, in the ceiling final variation, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving gaming state and starts controlling the jackpot gaming state.

[1-6. Main control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 21 to 63.
[1-6-1. Main control main processing]
Next, the main processing (main control main processing) executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24. 21 to 24 are flowcharts showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the power interruption signal is at High level (S11). Although not shown, it goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the interrupt vector table prior to S11.

If it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is not at the High level (NO determination in S11), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process in S11.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is at High level (YES in S11), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing for the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 (S12). In this process, the on/off state of the backup clear switch 176 and the on/off state of the setting key 174 are saved. That is, the on/off states of the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 are stored in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. Also, in this process, the game permission flag is set to OFF. After executing the process in S12, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs wait processing. In this process, the sub control circuit 300 side waits for activation. The activation waiting time (wait period) in this case is, for example, 12000.07 msec. After executing the process in S13, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S14.

Note that while the sub-control circuit 300 side is waiting for startup, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, processing for checking the interrupt request signal, processing for outputting the WDT when the interrupt request signal is generated, and initializing various sensors at predetermined timings. It is also possible to perform processing for outputting the converted signal.

In S14, the main CPU 201 determines whether the power outage before startup (previous time) was a normal power outage. In this process, it is determined whether the power outage is a normal power outage or an abnormal power outage based on the value stored in the power outage detection flag area in the main RAM 203 .

If it is determined in S14 that the power outage was not normal (NO determination in S14), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S18.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S14 that there was a normal power outage (YES in S14), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15), and then Verification processing of the checksum value of the area is performed (S16). After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the verification result is abnormal.

If it is determined in S17 that the verification result is not abnormal, that is, normal (NO determination in S17), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S22. Note that the processing after S22 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S17 that the verification result is abnormal, that is, not normal (YES in S17), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off. That is, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the determination will be NO; if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, and if either the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176 is If either one is off, the determination is YES.

If it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not off, that is, both are on (NO in S18), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S21. Note that the process of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off (YES in S18), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 turns on the security signal of the external terminal. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs error display processing on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). This process sets error display data to the output port of the I/O port 205, which outputs a signal to the performance display monitor 170. As a result, a predetermined LED in the performance display monitor 170 lights up, and an error is displayed. After executing the process of S20, the main CPU 201 enters into an eternal loop.

In this way, if the previous power outage was not a normal power outage or if the verification result of the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 was not normal, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the first pachinko game machine cannot play the game.

Next, the process of S21 will be explained. In S21, the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating a setting change in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. This process is performed at the time of abnormal startup, and a value indicating a setting change is stored again. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S22.

In S22, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the XINT detection flag area and the power failure detection flag area in the main RAM 203 (S22). After executing the process of S22, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs activation state determination processing. In this process, the current startup state (recovery from power failure/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear) is determined based on the value of the startup control flag stored in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S23, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs RAM setting processing at startup. In this process, a process for clearing a work area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags and the like (eg, construction of a work area, address setting, etc.) is performed. Note that this process is performed both at the time of recovery from power failure and at the time of initialization, and the backup area is not cleared. After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S25.

In S25, the main CPU 201 performs startup initialization processing. In this processing, initial setting processing is performed according to the current startup state (recovery from power failure/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear). Note that details of the startup initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25. After executing the process of S25, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt prohibition processing. After executing the process of S26, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs power cutoff processing. After executing the process of S27, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S28. Note that details of the power cutoff process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

In S28, the main CPU 201 performs an initial value random number update process. In this process, initial value random numbers of various random number counters (for example, special symbol jackpot determination random number counters, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S29.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. This determination process is performed based on the value of the game permission flag.

If it is determined in S29 that the game is not permitted (NO determination in S29), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S30.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S29 that the game is allowed (YES in S29), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

In S31, the main CPU 201 performs register saving processing. After executing the process of S31, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor aggregation calculation processing. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. Further, this processing is performed using an area (outside the area) that is different from the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S32, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 performs restoration processing for the registers saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the process of S34, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether the system cycle time has elapsed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 msec, which is three times the interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec).

If it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO in S35), the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (YES in S35), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process. After executing the process of S36, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S37.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the main control main process, before executing various processes related to game control (for example, processes in S37 to S44) to be described later, an interrupt prohibition period of, for example, 6 msec (processing period in S26 to S35) is set. will be provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed, for example, every 6 msec (every system cycle). In this embodiment, an example in which the interrupt prohibition period is three times the interrupt period has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 performs a system timer update process. The system timer is a timer that manages the system cycle (for example, 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in the system cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission/reception processing. In this process, command transmission/reception processing for payout control is mainly performed. After executing the process of S38, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the special symbol game is performed. Details of this special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. After executing the process of S39, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the normal symbol game is performed. Details of this normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 54. After executing the process of S40, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs game operation display unit control processing. In this process, setting processing of display data to be output to each display section of the LED unit 160 (for example, the first special symbol display section 163, the second special symbol display section 164, etc.) is performed. After executing the process of S41, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S42.

In S42, the main CPU 201 performs game information data generation processing. In this process, external terminal plate pulse signal control processing, output data setting processing, sight firing test signal generation processing, etc. are performed. Note that the process of generating the sight test signal is performed using an area (outside the area) that is different from the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs status monitoring processing. In this process, firing position determination processing, game abnormality detection determination processing, payout abnormality detection determination processing, etc. are performed. In the firing position determination process, if there is a change in the firing position (for example, right-handed or left-handed), a firing position command is reserved for transmission. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection and determination process, if there is an abnormality, a payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

[1-6-2. Initial setting processing at startup]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the startup initial setting process performed in S25 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of initial setting processing at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of loading an activation control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S52.

In S52, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure.

If it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating recovery from power failure (NO determination in S52), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S54.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure (YES in S52), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs second normal game pre-processing. Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 61. When the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play. After executing the process of S53, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation state flag is not a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation, that is, a value indicating RAM clearing (NO in S54), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S56.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation state flag is a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation (YES in S54), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the setting operation command. Note that the setting operation command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

In S56, the main CPU 201 performs the first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 60. When the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is in a game permission state. After executing the process of S56, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

[1-6-3. Power outage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the power cutoff process performed at S27 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the power cutoff process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the XINT detection flag is on (S61).

If it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not on (if NO in S61), the main CPU 201 ends the power outage process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is on (YES in S61), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs checksum value calculation processing. After executing the process of S62, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the value of the power failure detection flag in corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203. In this case, it is stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the XINT detection flag. After executing the process of S64, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM access prohibition value setting process (S65). After executing the process of S65, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset wait process until the power is cut off.

[1-6-4. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 will be explained. 27 and 28 are flowcharts showing an example of the special symbol control process performed in S39 of the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 27, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S71. The control state number of the special symbol is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process regarding the variable display of each special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S71, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S72.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of each special symbol in the main RAM 203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S71. .

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held when executing the special symbol control process. Then, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process for the first special symbol, and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more. If the value is "0" for all of the above, the demo display command transmission reservation process for the second special symbol is performed. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56, which will be described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 300 receives a demo display command, if the demo display command is a demo display command for the main special symbol, the sub CPU 301 performs a demo display effect. The main special symbol will be explained later in the sub control process.

In S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S71.

If it is determined in S72 that the second special symbol is not at the timing to start variable display (NO determination in S72), that is, if any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 executes the process. is moved to S73. For example, during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination process, a NO determination is made in S72.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S72 that it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol (YES in S72), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S74.

In S73, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. After executing the process of S73, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S74.

In S74, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S74, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S75.

In S75, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S74.

If it is determined in S75 that the first special symbol is not the timing to start the variable display (NO determination in S75), that is, if any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 executes the process. is moved to S76. For example, during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the first special symbol hit determination process, a NO determination is made in S75.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S75 that it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol (YES in S75), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S77.

In S76, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. After executing the process of S76, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S77.

In S77, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S77, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S78.

In S78, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S77.

If it is determined in S78 that it is not the timing to start the variable display of the second special symbol (NO determination in S78), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S80.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S78 that it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol (YES in S78), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is being executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S79.

In S79, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. After executing the process of S79, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S80.

In S80, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S80, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S81.

In S81, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S80.

If it is determined in S81 that the first special symbol is not at the timing to start variable display (NO determination in S81), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and transfers the process to the main control main process (FIGS. 21 to 21). (see Figure 24).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S81 that it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol (YES determination in S81), that is, no process related to the first special symbol is being executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S71 to S82) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

In this way, in this embodiment, if any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, if any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the process related to the second special symbol is executed. is not executed at all and variable display can be started, and when no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and variable display can be started, special symbol management processing described below is performed in priority order. is executed.

[1-6-5. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S73, S76, S79, and S82 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

For example, if the special symbol management process is called and executed in S73 or S79 during the special symbol control process, the second special symbol will be the processing target, and the special symbol management process will be executed in S76 or S79 during the special symbol control process. When called and executed in S82, the first special symbol becomes the processing target.

Further, the numerical values ("0" to "5") written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 28 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S91).

If it is determined in S91 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S91), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 27). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S91 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S91), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S93. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S93 onwards based on the control state number read out in the process of S92.

In S93, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S93 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S94.

In S94, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S94 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S95 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This process of S96 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S97.

In S97, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S97 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 52. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S98.

In S98, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot termination processing. This process of S98 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot termination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 53.

After completing the processing of S93 to S98, the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 27). In addition, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S74 if the special symbol management process is called in S73 during the special symbol control process, returns the process to S77 if it is called in S76, and calls it in S79. If it has been called, the process returns to S80, and if it has been called in S82, the special symbol control process also ends.

[1-6-6. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S93 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S93 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S93 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 29, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S101).

If it is determined in S101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO in S101), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 28).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S101), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S102.

In S102, the main CPU 201 determines whether the special symbol suspension flag is off. The special symbol suspension flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S102, even if S101 is determined as YES (that is, even if the special symbol starting condition is satisfied), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (S102 is determined as NO). ), the special symbol variable display start process ends without proceeding.

If it is determined in S102 that the special symbol suspension flag is not off, that is, it is ON (NO determination in S102), the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed as described above, and the main CPU 201 stops the special symbol variable display. Finish the start process. After that, the main CPU 201 returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S102 that the special symbol suspension flag is off (YES in S102), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S103.

In S103, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. After executing the process in S103, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S104.

In S104, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, special symbol hit determination processing is performed by referring to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 6) and using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value. In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is a time saving hit, a small hit, a jackpot, or a loss. In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving hit flag to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, and turns on the small hit flag when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit. , and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is set to on. After executing the process in S104, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S105. The time-saving winning flag is turned off at the time of transition to the C-time-saving gaming state, the small winning flag is turned off at the start of the small winning gaming state, and the jackpot flag is turned off at the start of the jackpot gaming state.

In the special symbol hit determination process (see S104), first, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot in this process, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a small hit. If it is determined in this process that it is not a small win, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a time saving win, and if it is determined in this process that it is not a time saving win, it is determined that it is a loss.

In S105, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process for determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S104) (for example, time saving hit, small hit, jackpot, or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11) and using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, since there is only one type of loss, there is no need to determine the stop symbol if the special symbol hit determination process is a loss. After executing the process in S105, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S106.

In S106, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit (time-saving hit, small hit, or jackpot). In this process, the winning type is determined in accordance with the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determining process (S105) with reference to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 13). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of winnings, but there may be only one type of jackpot, and there may be one type of time-saving winning. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing multiple types of wins, multiple types of other wins (for example, small wins) may be provided, or multiple types of losses may be provided. good. After executing the process in S106, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S107.

In S107, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referred to, and for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S104), the random value for reach determination and/or the random value for effect selection, etc. Accordingly, a special symbol variation pattern is determined. In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal game state where left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 15(A)). In game states where right-handed hitting is the normal gaming mode (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the variation pattern table of special symbols for high starts ( The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to FIG. 15(B)). After executing the process in S107, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S108.

In S108, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S107) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process in S108, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S109.

In S109, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process is completed, the special symbol variable display end process (FIG. 28) (see S94) will be performed. After executing the process of S109, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S110.

In S110, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are updated. After executing the process of S110, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S111.

In S111, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S111, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol presentation start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section, and prohibits the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management processing (S111) and the special symbol production start command transmission reservation processing (S112)). It is preferable to do this within the interval.

[1-6-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S94 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28) will be described. 30 and 31 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S94 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S94 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target. In addition, in the special symbol variable display end processing described below, the special symbol that is the target of processing is simply referred to as the "special symbol", and the special symbol that is not the target of processing is referred to as "the other special symbol".

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S121).

If it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S121), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. (see 28).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S121), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S122.

In S122, the main CPU 201 loads the special symbol suspension flag value. After executing the process of S122, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 201 determines whether the special symbol suspension flag is off based on the special symbol suspension flag value loaded in S122.

If it is determined in S123 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is ON (NO determination in S123), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 28).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S123 that the special symbol suspension flag is off (YES in S123), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S124.

In S124, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display end process, the special symbol game determination process (S95 in FIG. 28) ) will be carried out. After executing the process of S124, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S125.

In S125, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S125, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S126.

In S126, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. The confirmed symbol number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of guaranteed variations or the remaining number of time savings. You can also manage the numbers. After executing the process of S126, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S127.

In S127, the main CPU 201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29) is a small hit.

In S127, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29) is not a small hit (NO determination in S127), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S129.

On the other hand, in S127, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29) is a small hit (YES determination in S127), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S128.

In S128, the main CPU 201 sets a special symbol suspension flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting or stopping during execution of the small winning game control process. After executing the process of S128, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S129.

In S129, the main CPU 201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29) is a jackpot.

In S129, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29) is not a jackpot (NO determination in S129), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, in S129, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29) is determined to be a jackpot (YES determination in S129), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S130.

In S130, the main CPU 201 sets a special symbol suspension flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting during execution of the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S130, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S131.

In S131, the main CPU 201 determines whether the other special symbol is being variably displayed (S131).

If it is determined in S131 that the other special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (NO determination in S131), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and replaces the process with the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S131 that the other special symbol is being displayed variably (YES in S131), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S133.

In S133, the main CPU 201 sets a variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the sight test signal is output to the outside. This test firing test signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped due to a loss. After executing the process of S133, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S134.

In S134, the main CPU 201 forcibly changes the hit flag of the other special symbol to a loss and sets it. By performing this process, if the result of the hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29) for the special symbol to be processed is a jackpot, the other special symbol is being displayed variably, and the other special symbol is a hit. Even if the result of the determination process is a jackpot, the other special symbol will be forced to stop as a loss. After executing the process of S134, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S135.

In S135, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S135, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S136.

In S136, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting a predetermined fixed waiting time in the timer of the other special symbol. In this process, a fixed waiting time is set so that when a special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a jackpot, the other special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a loss. After executing the process of S136, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S137.

In S137, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the other special symbol to "2". After executing the process in S137, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S138.

In S138, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S138, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S139.

In S139, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the other special symbol production stop command. The other special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later). Ru. After executing the process of S139, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28).

In this way, in the special symbol variable display end process of this embodiment, the special symbol suspension flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the hit determination process for this special symbol (see S104 in FIG. 29) If the result is a jackpot and the other special symbol is being variably displayed, a process is performed to force the variable display of the other special symbol to be a loss.

[1-6-8. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S95 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28) will be described. FIGS. 32 and 33 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is called in S95 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S95 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S141).

If it is determined in S141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO in S141), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 28). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S141), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S142, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (NO in S142), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S143. On the other hand, if it is determined in S142 that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S142), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S145.

In S143, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a small hit, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a small hit.

In S143, if it is determined that it is not a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S143), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S144.

In S144, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. In addition, when the main CPU 201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, in S143, if it is determined that there is a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a small hit (YES in S143), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S145.

In S145, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process of the jackpot game control process or the small win game control process. In this process, signals output to, for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) and the island computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 184 are generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After performing the process in S145, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S146. Note that signals output to, for example, the hall computer 186 and the island computer via the external terminal board 184 will be described later.

In addition, in the jackpot game control process of S145, the main CPU 201 also performs processing to clear various flags and various counters such as a probability change flag, a probability change counter, a time saving flag, and a time saving counter.

In S146, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set round display LED data. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening for jackpot 131 or the big winning opening for small winning 151) to be opened (S147), and the external terminal board 184 jackpot signal setting process (S148), process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S149), game state designation parameter setting process (S150), and transmission reservation process for jackpot start display command (S151) ) etc. In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S149) and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see FIG. 28) is performed. (see S96) will be performed. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S141 to S151) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[1-6-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S144 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 32 and 33) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game ending processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs time saving management processing (S161). Details of this time saving management process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42. After executing the process of S161, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S162.

In S162, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, when the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S162, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S163.

In S163, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S164). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S164, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process, ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28).

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29) is a loss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the probability change flag or the time saving flag. Therefore, even if the losing display mode is derived, the gaming state will not change.

[1-6-10. Time-saving management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S161 during the special symbol game ending process (see FIG. 34) in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs counter update processing (S171). Details of this counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. After executing the process of S171, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S172.

In S172, the main CPU 201 performs counter determination processing (S172). Details of this counter determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving management process and returns the process to the special symbol game ending process (see FIG. 34).

[1-6-11. Counter update processing]
Next, counter update processing executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the counter updating process executed by the main CPU 201 in S171 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 35) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time saving counter update process (S181). Details of this time-saving counter updating process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. After executing the process in S181, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S182.

In S182, the main CPU 201 performs a ceiling counter update process (S182). Details of this ceiling counter updating process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 ends the counter update process and returns the process to the special management process (see FIG. 51).

[1-6-12. Time-saving counter update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the time-saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S181 during the counter update process (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, the time-saving counter update process shown in FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a process when a plurality of time-saving gaming states are executed in an overlapped manner when a plurality of time-saving gaming states overlap.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S191). In this process, a YES determination is made when both the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0, and a NO determination is made when either one is not satisfied.

The time saving flag is set to ON when transitioning to the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C working time saving gaming state. Incidentally, when shifting to the high probability gaming state, the probability change flag is set to ON.

The time saving counter indicates the number of time saving times executed in each of the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C time saving gaming state.

When the transition conditions to the A time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and/or the C-time-saving gaming state are satisfied, a time-saving counter is set for the time-saving gaming state in which the transition condition is satisfied.

In addition, in this embodiment, a subtraction method is adopted in which the time-saving counter is subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol ends, and the time-saving gaming state is ended when the time-saving counter reaches 0. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, an addition method may be adopted in which a time-saving counter is incremented when the variable display of special symbols is finished, and the time-saving game state is ended when the time-saving counter reaches a set number of time-savings.

In S191, if it is determined that both the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (NO in S191), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter updating process, and executes the process as follows. Return to counter update processing (FIG. 36).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S191 that the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is larger than 0 (YES in S191), the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time-saving counter (S192). After executing the process of S192, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving mode is 3 and the C time saving counter is greater than 0. In this process, if the time saving mode=3 and the C time saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made. If the determination in S193 is YES, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S194.

The time-saving mode is a flag that is set when a plurality of time-saving gaming states are executed overlappingly. In this embodiment, the time-saving mode is configured with 2 bits, for example, and when the C-time-saving gaming state is executed overlappingly with the time-saving gaming state that is being executed first, it is set to "time-saving mode = 3". Furthermore, when the B time saving game state is executed over the time saving game state which is being executed first, "time saving mode=2" is set.

In S193, if the time saving mode is not 3 (NO determination in S193), that is, if the C time saving game state is not being executed overlappingly, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S195.

In S194, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the C time saving counter. This process may also adopt an addition method instead of a subtraction method. After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S195.

In S195, if the time-saving mode is not 2 (NO determination in S195), that is, if the B-time-saving gaming state is not being executed repeatedly, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving counter update process and converts the process to the counter update process. (See Figure 36).

In S196, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the B time saving counter. This process may also adopt an addition method instead of a subtraction method. After executing the process of S196, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 36).

Although not shown, if the C time saving counter = 0 as a result of performing the process in S194, or if the B time saving counter = 0 as a result of performing the process in S196, the main CPU 201 executes the time saving counter. Set the mode to off (=0).

By the way, when executing a plurality of time-saving gaming states in a stacked manner, it is not limited to just stacking two time-saving gaming states, but may execute three or more time-saving gaming states in a stacking manner. In this case, as mentioned above, the A time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state do not overlap, so the case where three or more time saving gaming states overlap means that the A working time saving gaming state or the B working time saving gaming state and two This corresponds to the case where three or more C time-saving gaming states overlap, and the case where three or more C time-saving gaming states overlap.

[1-6-13. Ceiling counter update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the ceiling counter updating process executed by the main CPU 201 in S182 during the counter updating process (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (S201). The ceiling count prohibition flag is a flag that is set on when the probability change flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is, when the probability variation flag is off and the ceiling counter has not reached the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is off. The value of the ceiling counter is stored in the main RAM 203.

Note that the ceiling value is predetermined as a value unique to the pachinko gaming machine as a condition for transition to the B time-saving gaming state. However, instead of this, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling value when the jackpot gaming state ends, when the backup clear process is performed, when a special operating means for resetting the value of the ceiling counter is operated, etc. Processing may also be performed.

In S201, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (NO in S201), that is, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process, and changes the process to the counter update process ( (see Figure 36). Note that when the ceiling counter update process ends, the counter update process also ends, so the main CPU 201 returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 35).

In S201, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (YES in S201), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S202.

In S202, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S202, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 36) and further to the time saving management process (see FIG. 35).

[1-6-14. Counter judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S172 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 35) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs time saving transition determination processing (S211). Details of this time-saving transition determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. After executing the process of S211, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S212.

In S212, the main CPU 201 performs time saving transition processing (S212). Details of this time-saving transition processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. After executing the process of S212, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving counter is smaller than 1.

In S213, if it is determined that the time saving counter is not smaller than 1 (NO determination in S213), that is, if the time saving counter is greater than or equal to 1, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S215.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S213 that the time saving counter is smaller than 1 (YES determination in S213), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S214.

In S214, the main CPU 201 turns off the time saving flag. After executing the process of S214, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S215.

In S215, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing (S216) for the time saving shift command. Note that the time saving transition command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S216, the main CPU 201 ends the counter determination process and returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 35). Note that when the counter determination process ends, the time saving management process also ends, so the main CPU 201 returns the process to the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 34).

[1-6-15. Time-saving transition determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the time saving transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. In this process, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, a determination process is performed to shift to the B time saving gaming state. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S211 during the counter determination process (see FIG. 39) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the probability change flag is off (S221).

In S221, if it is determined that the variable probability flag is not off (NO in S221), that is, if the variable probability flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition determination process and transfers the process to the counter determination process ( (see Figure 39). That is, when the probability change flag is on, it is possible to prevent the transition to the B time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S221 that the probability change flag is off (YES in S221), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S222.

In S222, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling counter is at the ceiling value.

If it is determined in S222 that the ceiling counter is not at the ceiling value (NO in S222), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 39).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S222 that the ceiling counter is at the ceiling value (YES in S222), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S223.

In S223, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON. After executing the process of S223, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S224.

In S224, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling flag on. The ceiling flag is a flag indicating that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. After executing the process of S224, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S226.

In S226, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S226, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 39).

[1-6-16. Time-saving migration process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the time saving migration process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 in S212 during the counter determination process (see FIG. 39) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the probability change flag is off (S232).

In S232, if it is determined that the probability variation flag is not off (NO in S232), that is, if the probability variation flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process and converts the process to the counter determination process (Fig. (see 39). By doing so, when the probability change flag is on, it is possible to prevent either the B time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state from being started.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S232 that the probability variation flag is off (YES determination in S232), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S233.

In S233, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON.

If it is determined in S233 that the ceiling flag is not on (NO in S233), that is, if the ceiling flag is off, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S236.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S233 that the ceiling flag is on (YES determination in S233), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S235.

In S235, the main CPU 201 executes a B time saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the B time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of times of time saving to be set in the B time saving counter, setting of the time saving mode to 2, time saving performance, etc. are determined. After executing the process of S235, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S238.

Note that the number of time saving times set in the B time saving counter is a predetermined number of times. In addition, among the time-saving performance, the winning probability of "normal symbol win" is as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 17). In addition, among the time-saving performance, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric accessory 146 is shown in the normal symbol determination table (see Figure 18) and the normal symbol per type determination table (see Figure 19). It is as it appears. Furthermore, among the time-saving performance, the variable display time of the normal symbols is as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table (FIG. 20).

In S236, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving flag is on.

In S236, if it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (NO in S236), that is, if the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process and transfers the process to the counter determination process. (See Figure 39).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S236 that the time saving flag is on (YES in S236), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S237.

In S237, the main CPU 201 executes a C time saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the C time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of time saving times to be set in the C time saving counter, setting of the time saving mode to 3, time saving performance, etc. are determined. After executing the process of S237, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S238.

In addition, the number of time saving times set in the C time saving counter is determined according to the selected symbol command with reference to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 14). In addition, among the time-saving performance, the winning probability of "normal symbol win" is as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 17). In addition, among the time-saving performance, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric accessory 146 is shown in the normal symbol determination table (see Figure 18) and the normal symbol per type determination table (see Figure 19). It is as it appears. Furthermore, among the time-saving performance, the variable display time of the normal symbols is as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table (FIG. 20).

In S238, the main CPU 201 performs time saving setting processing. Details of this time saving setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S238, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 39).

[1-6-17. Time-saving setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 in S238 during the time saving transition process (see FIG. 41) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the time saving flag is on (S241).

In S241, if it is determined that the time saving flag is on (YES in S241), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S242.

When S241 is YES, the probability change flag is off and, for example, when B time-saving game state is executed in a state where C time-saving game state is executed first (ceiling counter = ceiling value) ), or when executing the C time saving gaming state in a state where the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C time saving gaming state has been executed first (if you win the "time saving winning"). do.

Although not shown, when executing the B time saving gaming state in a state where the C time saving gaming state has been executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time saving mode = 2" and also sets the time saving gaming state determined in S235. B Set the time saving counter. In addition, when executing the C time saving gaming state in a state in which the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C working time saving gaming state is executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time saving mode = 3". At the same time, the C time saving counter determined in S237 is set.

If it is determined in S241 that the time saving flag is not on (NO determination in S241), that is, if the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S244.

In S242, the main CPU 201 compares the current time-saving counter (the remaining number of time-savings in the previously executed time-saving gaming state) with the new time-saving number (the number of time-savings determined in S235 or S237), and It is determined whether the time saving counter is smaller than the new number of time saving times.

If it is determined in S242 that the current time saving counter is not smaller than the new number of time reductions (if NO in S242), that is, if the current time saving counter is greater than the new number of time reductions, the main CPU 201 The setting process is ended and the process returns to the time saving transition process (see FIG. 41).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S242 that the current time saving counter is larger than the new number of time saving times (YES in S242), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S243.

In S243, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving counter resetting process. In this process, the B time saving gaming state may be executed in a state where the C time saving gaming state is executed first, or the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C time saving gaming state is executed first. If the C time saving game state is executed repeatedly in the current state, the current time saving counter value (i.e. remaining time saving number) and the new time saving number, whichever is greater, will be reset as the new time saving counter. . However, even if the time saving counter resetting process (S243) is performed, the main CPU 201 does not reset the B time saving counter and the C time saving count.

In addition, when the B time saving gaming state is executed in a state where the C time saving gaming state is executed first, or when the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C time saving gaming state is being executed first. When executing the C time-saving gaming state over and over again, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving gaming state. In other words, changing the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving game state to the time-saving performance of a new time-saving game state, or performing a time-saving game corresponding to the greater number of time-savings between the current time-saving counter and the new number of time-savings. The time-saving performance of the state will not be changed.

As mentioned above, the time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease with which the game ball enters the winning opening (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting opening 140B (see FIG. 4)). It refers to the winning probability of "per symbol", variable display time of normal symbols, and/or opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the ordinary electric accessory 146.

In S244, the main CPU 201 performs time saving mode setting processing. This process is executed when S241 is NO, that is, when the non-time-saving gaming state is transferred to the B-time-saving gaming state (ceiling counter = ceiling value), or from the non-time-saving gaming state to the C-time-saving gaming state. This is the process that is performed when the game is moved to and executed (when the "time saving win" is won). In this process, the number of time saving times and time saving performance determined in the B time saving control mode determination process (S235) or the C time saving control mode determining process (S237) are set. After executing the process of S244, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S245.

In S245, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag to ON. After executing the process of S245, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 41).

In this way, in the above-mentioned time-saving management processing explained with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42, the main CPU 201 executes the transition processing to the B-time-saving gaming state when the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation is completed. I'm going to In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the case of a pachinko game machine where the result of the hit determination process includes a small hit, the first special symbol in the final fluctuation of the ceiling does not include a small hit. A case may occur in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is a small hit, the main CPU 201 executes the process of transitioning to the B time-saving gaming state based on the completion of the small winning gaming state. It's good to do.

In addition, in the above-mentioned time-saving management processing explained with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42, the main CPU 201 performs the transition processing to the B-time-saving gaming state when the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transition process to the B time-saving game state may be performed based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the final fluctuation of the ceiling. In particular, in the first pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, B time-saving game It is preferable to perform transition processing to the state. This is because when the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation ends, the transition to the B time saving gaming state is made, and while the variable display of one of the special symbols as the final ceiling variation, the other special symbol is variable. This is because when the display is started, the variable display of the other special symbol will no longer be able to benefit from the B time-saving game state, and there is a risk that interest will decrease. By performing the transition process to the B time-saving gaming state based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation, the variable display of the special symbol that is the final ceiling variation in particular becomes a long variation (for example, as shown in FIG. 15). Even in the case of long fluctuations A to C) as shown, it is possible to avoid delay in starting the B time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in the above-mentioned time-saving management processing explained with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42, when the ceiling flag is on, the transition is made to the B-time-saving gaming state, and when the time-saving hit flag is on, the transition is made to the C-time-saving gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a common flag may be used to determine the transition to the time-saving gaming state in the case of transitioning to the B-time-saving gaming state and the case of transitioning to the C-time-saving gaming state. Good too.

In addition, in the above-mentioned time-saving management process explained with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42, the B-time-saving control mode determination process (S235) as a process related to transition to the B-time-saving gaming state is replaced with the process related to the transition to the C-time-saving gaming state. Although the process is performed with priority over the C time saving control mode determination process (S237) as the process related to this (see S233 to S237 in FIG. 41), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the C time saving control mode determination process (S237), which is a process related to the transition to the C time saving gaming state, is given priority over the B time saving control mode determining process (S235), which is a process related to the transition to the B time saving gaming state. It may also be done by

Furthermore, in the ceiling counter update process described above with reference to FIG. 38, the ceiling counter is not updated if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (NO determination in S201 of FIG. 38). I can't do it. For example, in an ST machine or a pachinko game machine that performs a variable probability falling lottery, even if the variable probability flag is on, the ceiling counter may be updated when a special symbol is variably displayed. In this case, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the transition to the B time saving game state may not be made, but the transition to the B time saving gaming state may be made when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability change counter reaches the ceiling value. . In this case, the main CPU 201 does not shift to the B time saving gaming state just when the "ceiling counter = ceiling value", but shifts to the B time saving gaming state when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability variable counter reaches the ceiling value. Processing will be carried out.

Further, it is preferable that the ceiling value, which is a transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state, be within a predetermined range (for example, 2.5 to 3.0 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10, for example, the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off is 1/319 (in the case of setting value 1), so the ceiling value is 319×2.5 to 319 It is preferably within the range of ×3.0 (times).

Further, it is preferable that the upper limit of the specified number of times of B time saving, which is a condition for ending the B time saving gaming state, be up to a specified multiple (for example, 3.8 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability change flag is off. Similarly, the upper limit of the prescribed number of C time-savings, which is the condition for ending the C-time-saving gaming state, is up to the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off by the specified number (for example, 3. (up to 8 times) is preferred. In this example, since the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off is 1/319 (in the case of setting value 1), the prescribed number of times B and C are both approximately 1212 (319× It is preferable to set the upper limit to 3.8). Note that it is not essential that the upper limit of the specified number of times of B-time reduction and the upper limit of the specified number of times of C-time reduction be the same value.

By the way, in the case of a pachinko game machine such as the first pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values with different jackpot probabilities, such as setting 1 to setting 6, as described above, , the time saving probability is a common probability for all setting values. In such a case, the ceiling value, which is the condition for transitioning to the B time-saving gaming state, is set to the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the probability variable flag is off) by a specified number (for example, 3.0), regardless of the setting value. In this case, the ceiling value will differ depending on the set value, and there is a risk that the set value may be overlooked by the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, no matter what setting value is set, the ceiling value is not determined by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the variable probability flag is off) by a specified number, but by It is preferable to use the same value regardless of the setting value.

[1-6-18. Variations related to time-saving management processing]
In the above-mentioned time-saving management process (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving management process of this embodiment") described for the first pachinko game machine with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42, the ceiling counter updating process (see FIG. 38) is It is executed in the special symbol game end process (that is, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished). Further, the process related to the transition to the B time-saving gaming state is given priority over the process related to the transition to the C time-saving gaming state. However, the time saving management process is not limited to these, and can be performed in various variations. Modifications related to the time saving management process will be described below.

In the modified example described below, the execution timing of the ceiling counter update process, the processing at the time of transition such as the priority order of transition to the B time saving gaming state and the transition to the C time saving gaming state, and the transition to the B time saving gaming state Variations will be explained as to whether or not the transition flag of C and the transition flag of C time-saving gaming state are commonly used common flags. Note that the execution timing of the ceiling counter update process in the time saving management process of this embodiment described above is as follows.
・Execution timing of ceiling counter update processing: When fluctuation stops ・Processing at transition: B time saving gaming state priority ・Transition flag to B time saving gaming state and C time saving gaming state transition flag: Separate

In addition, typical examples of various modifications related to the time-saving management process will be described below, and the time-saving management process will be explained in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42 and in the following. It is not limited to the modified examples.

[1-6-18-1. 1st modification]
The first modification is as follows. Below, processing different from the time saving management processing of this embodiment will be explained.
・Execution timing of ceiling counter update processing: At the start of fluctuation ・Processing at the time of transition: B time saving gaming state priority ・Transition flag to B time saving gaming state and transition flag of C time saving gaming state: Separate

In the first modification, the ceiling counter update process is executed in the special symbol variable display start process (that is, when the variable display of special symbols is started), and the B time saving control mode is determined, which is the process related to transition to the B time saving gaming state. This is an example in which the process (see S235 in FIG. 41) is given priority over the C time saving control mode determination process (S237 in FIG. 41) which is the process related to transition to the C time saving gaming state. The other processes in the first modification are the same as the time saving management process of the present embodiment, so the explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first modification. In addition, in FIG. 44, the same step number is given to the same process as the time saving management process of this embodiment even if the processing timing is different from the time saving management process of this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 44, in this first modification, the main CPU 201 performs ceiling counter updating processing (S182), for example, special symbol variable display time setting processing (S108), and special symbol control state number processing. This is performed between the process of setting the value to 1 (S109).

The ceiling counter process in S182 performed between S108 and S109 is the same as the ceiling counter process described above with reference to FIG. 38, so the explanation will be omitted.

Furthermore, after the ceiling counter update process (S182) is finished, the main CPU 201 also performs a time saving transition determination process (S211).

The time saving transition determination process (S211) performed after the ceiling counter update process (S182) is completed is the same as the ceiling counter process described above with reference to FIG. 40, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in this first modification, the B time saving control mode determination process (see S235 in FIG. 41), which is the process related to the transition to the B time saving gaming state, is replaced by the C time saving control mode determination process (see S235 in FIG. 41), which is the process related to the transition to the C time saving gaming state. This process is performed with priority over the control mode determination process (S237 in FIG. 41), but since the process is the same as that in FIG. 41, a description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, among the time saving management processes of this embodiment, other processes excluding the ceiling counter process (S182) and the time saving transition determination process (S211) can be executed in the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 34). . In this case, of the time saving transition process (see FIG. 41), the process related to the transition to the B time saving gaming state (for example, S235 and accompanying S238) is limited to the special symbol variable display start process (for example, the process shown in FIG. 44). After the end of the time saving transition determination process (S211)), the process related to the transition to the C time saving gaming state (for example, S236 and accompanying S238) is executed in the special symbol game ending process (FIG. 34). You can.

In addition, in this first modification, the ceiling counter updating process (S182) is performed between the special symbol variable display time setting process (S108) and the process of setting the special symbol control state number to 1 (S109). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed at any timing as long as the special symbol variable display start process is in progress. However, as shown in FIG. 44, the ceiling counter update process (S182) may be executed prior to the special symbol hit determination process (S104), or the special symbol hit determination process (S104) may be executed first. ) may be executed after.

In addition, in this first modification, when the conditions for transition to the B time-saving gaming state are satisfied (when S222 in FIG. 46 is YES) and when the conditions for transitioning to the C time-saving gaming state are satisfied (when the special symbol is When the result of the hit determination process (for example, see S104 in FIG. 44) is a time-saving win), the main CPU 201 performs the same process in both the case of transitioning to the B-time-saving gaming state and the case of transitioning to the C-time-saving gaming state. Set the time-saving transition flag used for

[1-6-18-2. Second modification]
The second modification is as follows.
・Execution timing of ceiling counter update processing: At the start of fluctuation ・Processing at the time of transition: C time saving gaming state priority ・Transition flag to B time saving gaming state and transition flag of C time saving gaming state: Separate

The second modification, like the first modification, executes the ceiling counter updating process in the special symbol variable display start processing (that is, when the variable display of the special symbol is started). However, in this second modification, the C time-saving control mode determination process (S237 in FIG. 41), which is the process related to the transition to the C time-saving gaming state, is replaced with the B-time saving control, which is the process related to the transition to the B time-saving gaming state. This differs from the first modification in that it is performed with priority over the aspect determination process (see S235 in FIG. 41). The other processes in the second modification are the same as the time saving management process of the present embodiment, so the explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of time saving transition processing in the second modification. In addition, in FIG. 45, the same step number is given to the same process as the time saving management process of this embodiment even if the processing timing is different from the time saving management process of this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 45, in the time saving transition process of the second modification, when the determination in S232 is YES, the main CPU 201 performs the processes in S236 and S237 with priority over the processes in S233 and S235. By doing this, of course, when only the condition for transition to the C time saving gaming state is satisfied among the transition conditions to the B time saving gaming state and the transition condition to the C time saving gaming state, the B time saving gaming state To give priority to the transition to the C time-saving gaming state over the transition to the B time-saving gaming state even if both the transition conditions to the C time-saving gaming state and the transition conditions to the C-time-saving gaming state are satisfied. becomes possible.

[1-6-18-3. Third modification]
The third modification is as follows.
・Execution timing of ceiling counter update process: At the start of fluctuation ・Processing at transition: B time saving gaming state priority ・Transition flag to B time saving gaming state and C time saving gaming state transition flag: Common

In the third modification, like the first modification, the ceiling counter update process is executed in the special symbol variable display start processing (that is, when the variable display of the special symbol is started). However, the third modification differs from the first modification in that the time-saving transition process is performed using a common flag when transitioning to the B-time-saving gaming state and when transitioning to the C-time-saving gaming state. different. In addition, in this third modification, the B time saving control mode determination process (S235 in FIG. 41), which is the process related to the transition to the B time saving gaming state, is replaced with the C time saving control, which is the process related to the transition to the C time saving gaming state. This is performed with priority over the aspect determination process (see S237 in FIG. 41), and this point is similar to the first modification. The other processes in the third modification are the same as the time saving management process of the present embodiment, so the explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of time saving transition determination processing in the third modification. Further, FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating an example of time saving transition processing in the third modification. In addition, in FIG. 46 and FIG. 47, the same step number is given to the same process as the time saving management process of this embodiment even if the processing timing is different from the time saving management process of this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 46, in the time saving shift determination process of the third modification, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving shift flag to ON after performing the process of S224 (S225). As mentioned above, this time-saving transition flag is a flag that is used in common in the case of transitioning to the B-time-saving gaming state and the case of transitioning to the C-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, in this third modification, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving transition flag to ON even when the result of the special symbol hit determination process (for example, see S104 in FIG. 44) is a time-saving hit.

After executing the process of S225, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S226.

Note that the processing in S224 and the processing in S226 are both the same as the processing in S224 and the processing in S226 described above with reference to FIG. 40, so the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 47, in the time saving transition process of the third modification, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the time saving transition flag is on (S231).

In S231, if it is determined that the time saving shift flag is not on (NO in S231), that is, if the time saving shift flag is off, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving shift process and converts the process to the counter determination process. (See Figure 39).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S231 that the time saving shift flag is on (YES in S231), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S232.

In S232, the main CPU 201 determines whether the probability change flag is off.

In S232, if it is determined that the probability variation flag is not off (NO in S232), that is, if the probability variation flag is on, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S239.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S232 that the probability variation flag is off (YES determination in S232), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S233.

In S233, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON.

If it is determined in S233 that the ceiling flag is not on (NO in S233), that is, if the ceiling flag is off, the main CPU 201 executes the process without going through the process in S236 shown in FIG. , move to S237. There is no need to go through the process of S236 shown in FIG. 41 if the time-saving shift flag is on (YES in S231) and the ceiling flag is not on (NO in S233). This is to show that the condition is met (that is, the time saving flag is on).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S233 that the ceiling flag is on (YES in S233), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S235, as in FIG. 41.

B time saving control mode determination process (S235) and C time saving control mode determining process (S237) are both similar to B time saving control mode determining process (S235) and C time saving control mode determining process (S237) in FIG. , the explanation is omitted.

After executing the process of S235, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S238. Similarly, after executing the process in S237, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S238.

Note that the time saving setting process in S238 is the same as the time saving setting process in S238 of FIG. 41, so the explanation will be omitted. After executing the process of S238, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S239.

In S239, the main CPU 201 turns off the time saving shift flag. After executing the process of S239, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process and returns the process to the counter determination process (FIG. 39).

In this way, in the third modification, when the condition for transition to the B time-saving gaming state is satisfied (when S222 in FIG. 46 is YES) and when the transition condition to the C time-saving gaming state is satisfied (the special symbol (If the result of the hit determination process (for example, see S104 in FIG. 44) is a time-saving win), it is commonly used in the case of transitioning to the B-time-saving gaming state and the case of transitioning to the C-time-saving gaming state. The time saving transition flag is set on. Therefore, the main CPU 201 can execute the C time saving control mode determination process (S237), which is the process related to transition to the C time saving gaming state, without executing the process of S236 shown in FIG.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47, in the time saving transition process of the third modification, when the determination is YES in S232, the main CPU 201 performs the process in S235 with priority over the process in S237. By doing this, of course, when only the condition for transition to the B time-saving gaming state is satisfied among the conditions for transitioning to the B time-saving gaming state and the transition conditions to the C-time saving gaming state, the B time-saving gaming state To give priority to the transition to the B time-saving gaming state over the transition to the C time-saving gaming state even if both the transition conditions to the C time-saving gaming state and the transition conditions to the C time-saving gaming state are satisfied. becomes possible.

[1-6-18-4. Fourth modification]
The fourth modification is as follows.
・Execution timing of ceiling counter update processing: At the start of fluctuation ・Processing at the time of transition: C time saving gaming state priority ・Transition flag to B time saving gaming state and transition flag of C time saving gaming state: Common

The fourth modification is that the ceiling counter update process is executed in the special symbol variable display start process (that is, when the variable display of special symbols is started), and that when transitioning to B time-saving gaming state and C time-saving gaming state This is similar to the third modification in that the time-saving transition process is performed using the same flag as in the case of transition to . However, in this fourth modification, the C time saving control mode determination process (S237 in FIG. 41), which is the process related to the transition to the C time saving gaming state, is replaced with the B time saving control mode, which is the process related to the transition to the B time saving gaming state. This differs from the third modification in that it is performed with priority over the aspect determination process (see S235 in FIG. 41). The other processes in the fourth modification are the same as the time saving management process of the present embodiment, so the explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating an example of time saving transition processing in the fourth modification. In FIG. 48, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as the time saving management process of this embodiment even if the processing timing is different from the time saving management process of this embodiment. Further, below, points different from FIG. 47 will be mainly explained.

Furthermore, since the time saving transition determination process is the same as that in FIG. 46, the explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the time saving transition process of the fourth modification, if it is determined in S232 that the variable probability flag is off (YES determination in S232), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S236.

In S236, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving flag is ON. As mentioned above, this time-saving hit flag is set to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29) executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol is a time-saving hit. Ru.

In S236, if it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (NO in S236), that is, if the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S235.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S236 that the time saving flag is on (YES in S236), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S237.

In this manner, in the time saving transition process of the fourth modification, when the determination in S232 is YES, the main CPU 201 performs the process in S237 with priority over the process in S235. By doing this, of course, when only the condition for transition to the C time saving gaming state is satisfied among the transition conditions to the B time saving gaming state and the transition condition to the C time saving gaming state, the B time saving gaming state To give priority to the transition to the C time-saving gaming state over the transition to the B time-saving gaming state even if both the transition conditions to the C time-saving gaming state and the transition conditions to the C-time-saving gaming state are satisfied. becomes possible.

[1-6-18-5. Fifth modification]
The fifth modification is as follows.
・Execution timing of ceiling counter update processing: When fluctuation stops ・Processing at transition: C time saving gaming state priority ・Transition flag to B time saving gaming state and transition flag of C time saving gaming state: Separate

The fifth modification is similar to the time saving management process of this embodiment in that the ceiling counter update process is executed in the special symbol game end process (that is, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished). However, in this fifth modification, the C time saving control mode determination process (S237 in FIG. 41), which is the process related to the transition to the C time saving gaming state, is replaced with the B time saving control mode, which is the process related to the transition to the B time saving gaming state. This differs from the time saving management process of this embodiment in that it is performed with priority over the mode determination process (see S235 in FIG. 41). The other processes in the fifth modification are the same as the time saving management process in this embodiment, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of time saving transition processing in the fifth modification. In FIG. 49, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as the time saving management process of this embodiment even if the processing timing is different from the time saving management process of this embodiment. Further, in the following, the points different from those in FIG. 41 will be explained, and the explanation of the others will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 49, in the time saving transition process of the fifth modification, if it is determined in S232 that the variable probability flag is off (YES determination in S232), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S236.

In S236, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving flag is ON. As mentioned above, this time-saving hit flag is set to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29) executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol is a time-saving hit. Ru.

In S236, if it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (NO in S236), that is, if the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S233.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S236 that the time saving flag is on (YES in S236), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S237.

As described above, in the time saving transition process of the fifth modification, the ceiling counter update process is executed in the special symbol variable display start process (that is, when the variable display of special symbols is started), and if S232 is YES, the main CPU 201 The processing in S236 and S237 is given priority over the processing in S233 and S235. By doing this, of course, when only the condition for transition to the C time saving gaming state is satisfied among the transition conditions to the B time saving gaming state and the transition condition to the C time saving gaming state, the B time saving gaming state To give priority to the transition to the C time-saving gaming state over the transition to the B time-saving gaming state even if both the transition conditions to the C time-saving gaming state and the transition conditions to the C-time-saving gaming state are satisfied. becomes possible.

[1-6-18-6. Sixth variation]
The sixth modification is as follows. Below, processing different from the time saving management processing of this embodiment will be explained.
・Execution timing of ceiling counter update process: When the fluctuation stops ・Processing at the time of transition: After confirming that the “time saving hit” has not been won, move to the B time saving gaming state

The sixth modification is similar to the time saving management process of this embodiment in that the ceiling counter update process is executed in the special symbol game end process (that is, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished). However, in this sixth modification, when the conditions for transition to the B time-saving game state are met, the main CPU 201 confirms that the conditions for transition to the C time-saving game state are not satisfied, and then starts the B time-saving game. It differs from the time saving management process of this embodiment in that it executes the B time saving control mode determination process (see 235 in FIG. 41), which is a process related to transition to the state. In the following, the differences from FIG. 41 will be mainly explained, and since the others are the same as the time saving management process of this embodiment, the explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating an example of time saving transition processing in the sixth modification. In FIG. 50, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as the time-saving management process of this embodiment, even if the processing timing is different from the time-saving management process of this embodiment. Further, below, points different from FIG. 41 will be mainly explained.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the time-saving transition process of the sixth modification, if it is determined in S232 that the variable probability flag is off (YES determination in S232), the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition process, The process returns to the counter determination process (see FIG. 39).

In S233, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON.

In S233, if it is determined that the ceiling flag is on (YES in S233), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S234.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S233 that the ceiling flag is not on (NO in S233), that is, if the ceiling flag is off, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S236.

In S234, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving flag is off. As mentioned above, this time-saving hit flag is set to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29) executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol is a time-saving hit. Ru.

In S234, if the time saving flag is off (YES in S234), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S235.

In S236, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving flag is on.

If it is determined in S236 that the time saving flag is not on (NO in S236), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process and returns the process to the counter determination process (FIG. 39).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S236 that the time saving flag is on (YES in S236), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S237.

In this way, in the time saving transition process of the sixth modification, the ceiling counter update process is executed in the special symbol variable display start process (that is, when the variable display of special symbols is started), and the main CPU 201 shifts to the B time saving gaming state. Even if the transition condition is satisfied (even if S233 is a YES determination), after confirming that the transition condition to the C time-saving gaming state is not satisfied (S234 is a YES determination). , B time-saving control mode determination processing (S235) is executed.

[1-6-18-7. Seventh modification]
Note that in the time-saving counter update process described above with reference to FIG. 37 and in the first to sixth modifications described above, when the time-saving gaming states overlap, a plurality of time-saving gaming states are executed in parallel. We have explained the processing. However, when the time-saving gaming states overlap, it is not necessarily essential to execute the plurality of time-saving gaming states overlappingly. If a plurality of time-saving game states are not executed in parallel, the main CPU 201 may execute the process shown in FIG. 43.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a modification of the time-saving counter updating process executed by the main CPU 201 in S181 during the counter updating process (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine. In addition, in FIG. 43, the same step number is given to the same process as the time saving counter update process of FIG. 53.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S191). In this process, a YES determination is made when both the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0, and a NO determination is made when either one is not satisfied.

In S191, if it is determined that both the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (NO in S191), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter updating process, and executes the process as follows. Return to counter update processing (FIG. 36).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S191 that the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (YES in S191), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time saving counter (S192). After executing the process of S192, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (FIG. 36).

[1-7. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the big winning opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S96 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big prize opening preparation process is called in S96 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the big winning opening preparation process is called in S96 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S251).

If it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO in S251), the main CPU 201 ends the grand prize opening preparation process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. (see 28).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (YES in S251), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S252.

In S252, the main CPU 201 loads the grand prize opening number counter value. The big winning opening number counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state when the jackpot game control process is executed, and when the small win game control process is executed. , corresponds to a counter that counts the number of executions of the small winning game control process. The count value of the big winning opening number counter (big winning opening opening number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S252, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of openings of the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening for jackpot 131 or the big winning opening for small winning 151) is the upper limit value. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of times the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131 is opened in the jackpot game state, is, for example, 4 rounds or 4 rounds as shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 13). There are 10 rounds. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of openings of the small winning large prize opening 151 that is opened in the small winning gaming state is, for example, once.

If it is determined in S253 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit value (YES in S253), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S254.

In S254, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S254) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning opening preparation process, the jackpot end process (see FIG. 28) is performed. (see S98) will be performed. After executing the process of S254, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S255.

In S255, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command (S256). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S256, the main CPU 201 ends the grand prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28).

Returning to S253, if it is determined that the number of openings of the big prize opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S253), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S257.

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the grand prize opening number counter value. After executing the process of S257, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S258.

In S258, the main CPU 201 performs selection processing of the big winning hole to be opened. In this process, the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131 (see FIG. 4) is selected as the jackpot jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed, and the small jack jackpot jackpot 131 (see FIG. 4) is selected as the jackpot jackpot to be opened when the jackpot game control process is executed. The grand prize opening 151 (see FIG. 4) is selected. After executing the process of S258, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S259.

In S259, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the big winning opening (big winning opening 131 for jackpot, big winning opening 151 for small winning), the maximum opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of prizes to be won in the big winning opening, the winning opening of the big winning opening, etc. The number of prize balls, etc. at the time is set. The number of openings of the big winning opening corresponds to the number of rounds when executing the jackpot game control process, and corresponds to the number of openings of the small winning big winning opening 151 when executing the small winning game control process. It should be noted that this is not intended to exclude cases in which the big prize opening is opened multiple times in one round or in the small winning game control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the grand prize opening as separate processes. After executing the process of S259, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S260.

In addition, in this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 30,000 msec when executing the jackpot game control process, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 1,800 msec when executing the small win game control process. Ru. The maximum number of prizes to be entered into the big prize opening is set to, for example, 10 at the maximum when the jackpot game control process is executed, and is set to, for example, 5 at the maximum when the small win game control process is executed. The number of prize balls at the time of winning the big winning hole is set to 10, for example, for both the big winning hole 131 for the jackpot and the big winning hole 151 for the small win. However, the values set in various setting processes related to the big winning opening are not limited to the above.

In S260, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, the opening/closing control data for the big winning opening (big winning opening 131 for jackpot, big winning opening 151 for small winning) is generated. After executing the process of S260, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S261.

In S261, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S261) and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (See S97 in FIG. 28) will be performed. After executing the process of S261, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S262.

In S262, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S263.

In S263, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S263, the main CPU 201 ends the big prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28).

[1-7-1. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S97 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big winning opening control process is called in S97 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the big winning opening control process is called in S97 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S271).

If it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO determination in S271), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 28).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S271), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S272.

In S272, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening (big winning opening 131 for jackpot, big winning opening 151 for small winning) is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, a big winning hole winning counter that counts the number of winning game balls into the big winning hole (for example, big winning hole count switch 132 for jackpot, big winning hole counting switch 152 for small winning (see FIG. 6 for both) etc.), it is determined whether the counted value is greater than or equal to the maximum number of winning prizes. It should be noted that the big winning opening winning counter value counted by the big winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S272, if it is determined that the number of game balls won in the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 131, big winning opening for small winning 151) is not the maximum winning number (if S272 is NO), the main CPU 201 , the process moves to S273.

On the other hand, in S272, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 131, big winning opening for small winning 151) is greater than or equal to the maximum winning number (when S272 is determined as YES) ), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S274.

In S273, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 131 for jackpot, big winning opening 151 for small winning) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S259 in FIG. 51) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 131, big winning opening for small winning 151) has not elapsed (if S273 is NO), the main CPU 201 controls the opening of the big winning opening. The mouth opening control process is ended and the process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 131 for jackpot, big winning opening 151 for small winning) has elapsed (when S273 is YES), the main CPU 201 The process moves to S274.

In S274, the main CPU 201 performs closing processing of the big winning opening (big winning opening 131 for jackpot, big winning opening 151 for small winning). After executing the process of S274, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S275.

In S275, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S275) and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, preparations for opening the big winning hole are made again. Processing (see S96 in FIG. 28) will be performed. After executing the process of S275, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S276.

In S276, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process of S276, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S277.

In S277, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S277, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28).

[1-7-2. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S98 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28) will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this jackpot end process is called in S98 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the jackpot end process is called in S98 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S281).

If it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO in S281), the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot termination process and also terminates the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28). , the process returns to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 27). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (YES in S281), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S282.

In S282, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, you can set or reset the values of various flags (e.g., probability change flag, time saving flag, ceiling count prohibition flag, etc.), and various counters (e.g., probability change counter, time saving counter, symbol confirmed number counter, number of times the big winning hole is opened). A process is performed to set or reset the values of counters, large winning opening winning counters, ceiling counters, etc.). In addition, both the special symbol suspension flag and the ceiling counter are reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S282). Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is set on, the ceiling count prohibition flag is also set on. As a result, the ceiling counter will not be updated in the high probability gaming state where the probability change flag is on. After executing the process of S282, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S283.

In S283, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 34 is performed. After executing the process of S283, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 27). In this case, as described above, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[1-7-3. Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S40 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24) will be described.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that the numerical values ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 54 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (S291).

If it is determined in S291 that the waiting time of the normal symbol is not 0 (NO in S291), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 24).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S291 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (YES in S291), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S292.

In S292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol (S292). After executing the process of S292, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S293. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S293 onwards based on the control state number read out in the process of S292.

In S293, the main CPU 201 performs variable display start processing for normal symbols. This process of S293 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". In this normal symbol variable display start processing, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit determination processing, normal symbol variation pattern determination processing, and normal symbol hit determination processing when the result of the normal symbol hit determination processing is a normal symbol hit. 146 opening patterns (number of openings, opening time, wait time) setting processing is performed. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S294 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In this process, the main CPU 201 performs various processes when ending the variable display of normal symbols. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S295.

In S295, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S295 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal symbol game determination process, a determination process is performed on the derivation result of the normal symbol (for example, a normal symbol hit or a loss). If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S296.

In S296, the main CPU 201 performs normal electric accessory release processing. This process of S296 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the normal electric accessory 146 is opened in a predetermined manner. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S297.

In S297, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit termination processing. This process of S297 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 finishes this normal symbol per end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

In this embodiment, random numbers for normal symbol hit determination are generated in a range (width) of, for example, 0 to 255, and 0 to 255 are used as normal symbol hit determination value data, for example. The normal symbol winning probability is determined by the number of normal symbol winning determination value data relative to the total random number of the normal symbol winning determination random numbers, so for example, the normal symbol winning probability is 255/256 in this embodiment. This normal symbol winning probability is the same or almost the same when the time saving control is executed and when the time saving control is not executed. However, the variable display of normal symbols is executed for a relatively long time, for example 600 seconds, in a game state where time saving control is not executed, whereas it is executed for a relatively short time, for example 1 second, in a gaming state where time saving control is executed. only is executed. In this way, when the time saving control is executed, the frequency of execution of the normal electric accessory opening process, that is, the frequency of winning of game balls to the second starting ports 140A and 140B is increased.

[1-7-4. External maskable interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the external maskable interrupt processing executed under the control of the main CPU 201 will be described. This process is an interrupt process performed in response to an external interrupt request that occurs, for example, during a power outage. Note that FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs protection register saving processing (S301). After executing the process in S301, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S302.

In S302, the main CPU 201 reads the status of a predetermined input port of the I/O port 205. The above predetermined input ports set the status of, for example, the power failure detection line, backup clear switch line, sensor abnormality detection line, radio wave sensor line, open detection line, magnetic sensor line, vibration sensor line, solenoid monitoring sensor line, etc. This is the input port that will be used. After executing the process of S302, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S303.

In S303, the main CPU 201 determines whether a power outage has been detected.

If it is determined in S303 that a power outage is not detected (NO determination in S303), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S305. On the other hand, if it is determined in S303 that a power outage has been detected (YES in S303), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S304.

In S304, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag indicating that power is cut off, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S304, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S305.

In S305, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the protection register saved in S301. After executing the process of S305, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S306.

In S306, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the external maskable interrupt process.

[1-7-5. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt cycle of, for example, 2 msec will be described. Note that FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs protection register saving processing (S311).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off (S312). If it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, a power outage is detected) (NO determination in S312), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S326. On the other hand, if it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, no power interruption is detected) (YES in S312), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reading the state of the input port of the I/O port 205 (S314), and moves the process to S315.

In S315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted, based on, for example, the value of the activation control flag. The startup control flag is a flag for determining which state the startup state is when the power is turned on, such as recovery from power failure, setting change, setting confirmation, and RAM clearing. For example, in the case of power failure recovery, it is determined that the game is allowed, and in the case of setting changes, setting confirmation, RAM clearing, etc., it is determined that the game is not allowed.

Note that the startup control flag is composed of a combination of on/off information of the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 are off, the power is restored; if both the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 are on, the setting is changed, and when the backup clear switch 176 is off and If the setting key 174 is on, it is determined that the setting is confirmed, and if the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, it is determined that the RAM is to be cleared.

If it is determined in S315 that the game is not permitted (NO determination in S315), the main CPU 201 performs a setting control process (S316). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed within the system timer interrupt process, which is performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example, and are performed when the game is not permitted, that is, when the game is not permitted. Note that details of the setting control process (S316) will be described later with reference to FIG. 57. After executing the setting control process (S316), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S326.

Note that if the game is not permitted (NO determination in S315), the main CPU 201 prohibits the firing of game balls from the firing device 6 (see FIG. 6), and controls specific switches (for example, the setting key 174, the backup clear switch 176). It is preferable to disable various switches other than those (such as the above) and to prohibit the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S315 that the game is allowed (YES in S315), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S317.

In S317, the main CPU 201 executes a process of adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) interrupt-disabled sections during main control main processing (see FIGS. 21 to 24), and the count value of the interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) interrupt-prohibited sections during main control main processing (see FIGS. 21 to 24). Stored in the counter area. After executing the process in S317, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S318.

In S318, the main CPU 201 performs update processing of the interrupt cycle timer. After executing the process of S318, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S319. Note that the interrupt cycle timer is a timer for managing interrupt cycles (for example, 2 msec), and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203.

In S319, the main CPU 201 performs random number update processing. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, random number counters for determining jackpots for special symbols, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined period (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are important elements related to ball output. After executing the process of S319, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S320.

In S320, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. Details of this switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 62. After executing the process of S320, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S321.

In S321, the main CPU 201 performs winning information command setting processing. In this process, a winning information command (payout information) setting process is performed. After executing the process of S321, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S322.

In S322, the main CPU 201 performs production control command transmission processing. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process of S322, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S323.

In S323, the main CPU 201 performs register saving processing. After executing the process of S323, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S324.

In S324, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor control processing. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170, etc. are performed. The data stored in this process is in an area (outside the area) that is different from the work area where data necessary for playing the game is stored, that is, in an area that is backed up, and for example, when the RAM is cleared. data is also stored in an area that is never cleared. After executing the process of S324, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S325.

In S325, the main CPU 201 performs restoration processing for the registers saved in S323. After executing the process of S325, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S326.

In S326, the main CPU 201 performs a process to restore the protection register saved in S311, and ends the system timer interrupt process.

[1-7-6. Setting control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the setting control process performed in S316 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56) will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 57, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating a setting change (S331).

If it is determined in S331 that the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating a setting change (YES in S331), the main CPU 201 performs a setting change process (S332). Details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 58. After executing the setting change process (S332), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S331 that the value of the activation control flag is not a value indicating a setting change (NO determination in S331), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S333.

In S333, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating confirmation of setting.

If it is determined in S333 that the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation (YES in S333), the main CPU 201 performs a setting confirmation process (S334). Details of this setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59. After executing the setting confirmation process (S334), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S333 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating setting confirmation, that is, if it is determined that the RAM is cleared (NO determination in S333), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S337. .

In S335, the main CPU 201 performs setting operation display processing. In this process, currently set setting values are displayed. After executing the process of S335, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S336.

In S336, the main CPU 201 performs production control command transmission processing. In this process, commands (initialization commands, power failure recovery commands, or setting operation commands) reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S332), setting confirmation process (S334), or startup initial setting process (S25) are It is transmitted to the control circuit 300. After executing the process in S336, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S337.

In S337, the main CPU 201 performs output processing of a WDT (watchdog timer). In this process (WDT output process), a WDT clear register address read process, a WDT clear process, and a WDT restart process are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is performed as appropriate. After the process of S337, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control process and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56).

[1-7-7. Setting change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the setting change process performed at S332 in the setting control process (see FIG. 57) will be described. Note that FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (S341). This process is performed by reading out information set in the input port of the I/O port 205.

If it is determined in S341 that the backup clear switch 176 is not pressed (NO determination in S341), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S343. On the other hand, if it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (YES in S341), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S342.

In S342, the main CPU 201 performs a setting value within-range update process. After executing the process of S342, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S343.

In this embodiment, in the setting change process, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, a setting switch may be provided, and this setting switch can be changed. It may also be possible to change the set value by operating it.

In S343, the main CPU 201 determines whether the setting key 174 is turned off (S343).

If it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO in S343), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 57). On the other hand, if it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 is turned off (YES in S343), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S344.

In S344, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 60. As described above, when the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play. After executing the first normal game pre-process (S344), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 57).

[1-7-8. Settings confirmation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the setting confirmation process performed in S333 in the setting control process (see FIG. 57) will be described. Note that FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the setting key 174 is turned off (S351). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S343 in the setting change process (see FIG. 58) described above.

If it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO in S351), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 57).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is turned off (YES in S351), the main CPU 201 performs the second normal game pre-processing (S352). Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 61. As described above, when the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play. After executing the second normal game pre-process (S352), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 57).

[1-7-9. 1st normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the first normal game pre-processing performed in S344 during the setting change process (see FIG. 58) will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko game machine. In addition, this first normal game pre-processing is also performed in the initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 25) when none of power failure recovery, setting change, and setting confirmation is performed, that is, the initial setting process when clearing the RAM. .

The main CPU 201 first performs RAM setting processing during initialization (S361). In this process, an area in the main RAM 203 where backup data is stored in the event of a power outage (hereinafter referred to as a "backup area") is cleared (eg, construction of a work area, address setting, etc.). Note that the area where data is stored is not cleared in the performance display monitor control process (see S324 in FIG. 56). Further, in this process, initial data is generated, and each of the generated initial data is stored in the constructed work area in the main RAM 203. That is, data backed up at the time of power outage is erased, and the gaming state can be returned to the initialized state. Although not shown, in this process, the gaming state is returned to the initialized state, making it possible to start the game, and the gaming permission flag is set to ON, resulting in the gaming permission state. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S361), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S362.

In S362, the main CPU 201 performs an initialization command transmission reservation process. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 57). After executing the process of S362, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal game pre-process. When this first normal game pre-processing is completed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play.

[1-7-10. 2nd normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the second normal game pre-processing performed in S352 during the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 59) will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed in the initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 25) and as the initial setting process at the time of power failure recovery.

The main CPU 201 first performs a RAM setting process upon power recovery (S371). In this process, for example, data stored in a backup area within the main RAM 203 is read out, and each of the read data is stored in a constructed work area within the main RAM 203. The above-mentioned data is, for example, various information necessary to proceed with the game, such as game status information, on/off status of winning flags of special symbols and normal symbols, and information on the number of reservations. That is, by restoring the data backed up at the time of power outage to the work area in the main RAM 203, it is possible to return to the same gaming state as before the power outage. Although not shown, in this process, the game can be started by returning to the same gaming state as before the power outage, and the game permission flag is set to ON, resulting in a game permission state. The main CPU 201 moves the process to S372 after executing the RAM setting process at the time of power failure recovery (S371).

In S372, the main CPU 201 determines whether the probability change flag is on. This processing is performed by reading data stored in a work area in the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S372 that the probability change flag is not on (NO determination in S372), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S374.

on the other hand. If it is determined in S372 that the probability variation flag is on (YES in S372), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S373.

In S373, the main CPU 201 sets the probability change notification flag to ON. This is done to notify the state of the probability change flag at the time of recovery from power failure. When the probability change notification flag is on, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, a probability change notification LED (not shown) to be lit. This makes it possible to visually determine whether the probability change flag is on or not when the power is restored from a power failure. After executing the process in S373, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S374.

In S374, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for a power failure recovery command. The power failure recovery command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 57). After executing the process of S374, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal game pre-processing.

[1-7-11. Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating an example of switch input detection processing by the main CPU 201. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 201 executes the starting opening winning detection process (step S381). After executing the process in S373, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S374. The starting opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (step S382). In the general winning hole passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of pieces to be paid out at the time of winning to the general winning hole 122 is set. After executing the process of S382, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S383.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (step S383). In the large winning hole passage detection process, payout information indicating the number of pieces to be paid out, etc. is set when a winning is made to the large winning hole 131 for a jackpot or the large winning hole 151 for a small win, for example. After executing the process in S383, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S384.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a ball passage detection process (step S384). In the ball passage detection process, various random values for normal symbols (random values for determining hit of normal symbols, etc.) are extracted based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126 being detected by the passing gate switch 127. . After completing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process.

[1-7-12. Starting opening winning detection processing]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the starting opening winning detection process by the main CPU 201. The starting opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the switch input detection process described above.

As shown in FIG. 63, the main CPU 201 first determines whether a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (step S391).

If it is determined that no game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (NO determination in step S391), the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S398.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (YES in step S391), the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S392.

In S392, the main CPU 201 generates various random numbers (for example, a random number for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, a symbol random number for the first special symbol, a random number for reach determination of the first special symbol, and a random number for determining the reach of the first special symbol). Various random numerical values, such as random numerical values for performance selection, etc.) are extracted, and processing is performed to set payout information according to the first starting slot winning. After executing the process of S392, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S393.

In S393, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved first special symbols acquired based on winnings in the first starting port 120 is less than four. The main RAM 203 includes a first special symbol starting storage area (1) to a first special symbol starting memory that holds various random numbers obtained based on winning of a game ball to the first starting port 120 until a starting condition is satisfied. In this process, it is determined whether there is a free space in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). The main RAM 203 also has a first special symbol starting storage area (0) in addition to the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), which will be described later.

If the number of reserved first special symbols is not less than 4, that is, the upper limit of 4 (NO in step S393), the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S398.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved first special symbols is less than four (YES in step S393), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S394.

In S394, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved first special symbols. After executing the process in S394, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S395.

In S395, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 120 in the main RAM 203 until the first special symbol variation start condition is satisfied. As a result, the variable display of the first special symbol regarding the extracted random number is suspended until the variable start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S395, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S396.

In S396, the main CPU 201 performs a prefetch determination process. This process is a process in which, prior to the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29), the random number value obtained in S392 is used to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol, and perform hit determination processing, etc. It is also determined whether the prefetch flag is set.

Note that the pre-reading determination process may be performed at any timing after the random value is obtained in S392 until the special symbol hit determination process is executed, but the prefetch determination process may be performed at any timing after the random number value is acquired in S392 until the special symbol hit determination process is executed. In view of the fact that the sub-control circuit 300 performs the look-ahead effect, it is preferable to perform it, for example, around the time before and after the process of S395. After executing the process of S396, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S397.

In S397, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the winning command for the first special symbol (Step S397). The winning command for the first special symbol is a command that includes information for increasing the pending number of the first special symbol by 1, fluctuation pattern information for the first special symbol, etc. The winning command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S397, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S398.

In step S398, the main CPU 201 determines whether a game ball is detected by the second starting port switches 141A, 141B (step S398).

If it is determined that a game ball is not detected by the second starting port switches 141A, 141B (NO in step S398), the main CPU 201 ends the starting port winning detection process, and switches the process to switch input detection. Return to processing (see FIG. 62).

On the other hand, if it is determined that a game ball is detected by the second starting port switches 141A, 141B (YES in step S398), the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S399.

In S399, the main CPU 201 generates various random numbers (for example, a random number for jackpot determination of the second special symbol, a symbol random number for the second special symbol, a random number for reach determination of the second special symbol, and a random number for determining the reach of the second special symbol). Various random numbers, such as a random number for performance selection, etc.) are extracted, and processing is performed to set payout information according to the second starting slot winning. After executing the process of S399, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S400.

In S400, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved second special symbols obtained based on winnings in the second starting ports 140A and 140B is less than four.

The main RAM 203 stores various random numbers obtained based on winning of game balls into the second starting ports 140A and 140B into second special symbol starting storage areas (1) to 2nd special symbol starting storage areas (1) to 2nd, which hold various random numbers obtained based on winning of game balls to the second starting openings 140A and 140B until starting conditions are satisfied. It has a special symbol starting storage area (4), and in this process, it is determined whether there is a free space in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4). Ru. In addition, the main RAM 203 has a first special symbol starting storage area (0) in addition to the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), which will be described later.

If the number of reserved second special symbols is not less than 4, that is, the upper limit of 4 (if NO in step S400), the main CPU 201 ends the starting opening winning detection process and continues the process with the switch input detection. Return to processing (see FIG. 62).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols is less than four (YES in step S400), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S401.

In S401, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the pending number of second special symbols. After executing the process in S401, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S402.

In S402, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random numbers extracted based on the winning of game balls in the second starting ports 140A and 140B in the main RAM 203 until the second special symbol variation start condition is satisfied. As a result, the variable display of the second special symbol regarding the extracted random number is suspended until the variable start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S402, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S403.

In S403, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the winning command for the second special symbol (Step S403). The winning command for the second special symbol is a command that includes information for increasing the pending number of the second special symbol by 1, fluctuation pattern information for the second special symbol, etc. The winning command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S403, the main CPU 201 ends the starting opening winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 62).

[1-8. Sub control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 64, the sub CPU 301 first performs initialization processing (S501). In this initialization process, for example, initialization processes such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S502.

Note that the above-mentioned initialization process (S501) is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when a backup is cleared, and after the power is turned on, the processes of S502 to S508, which will be described later, are repeatedly executed.

In S502, the sub CPU 301 performs reading processing of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). In this process, a command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) set in the command input port 308 is read out. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S503.

In S503, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S502 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S504.

In S504, the sub CPU 301 executes production mode determination processing. In this process, for example, based on the winning command sent from the main CPU 201, the performance mode of the pre-reading effect (hereinafter referred to as the "pre-reading effect mode") is determined, and the current special symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as the "variation in question") A sub-variable performance pattern (a performance mode carried out in step 301 in conjunction with the variable display of special symbols) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is determined.

The prefetch effect is performed using, for example, a pending image displayed on the display device 7. The pending image is an image showing the current pending status. The look-ahead presentation mode includes a jackpot look-ahead mode that shows that there is a possibility of winning a jackpot, a time-saving look-ahead mode that shows that there is a possibility of winning a time-saving hit, and a look-ahead mode that shows that there is a possibility of winning a jackpot and a time-saving hit. This includes a common look-ahead performance mode in which there is a possibility that one of them has won, but the winning type (big hit or time-saving win) is not specified. A specific example of the look-ahead performance will be described later.

The performance mode of the fluctuation is determined based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. Processing for determining the suggested presentation mode, etc. is performed. Furthermore, the process of determining the presentation mode of a countdown effect that suggests that the ceiling counter is approaching the ceiling value, or the presentation mode of the B time-saving game state transition effect that suggests that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value, etc. Performs processing to determine various performance aspects related to progress.

In the production mode determination process (S504), the sub CPU 301 generates an animation request that includes specification information of production content, and based on the generated animation request, various requests (for example, drawing requests) for operating various production devices. , sound requests, lamp requests, accessory requests, etc.). After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S505.

In S505, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 sends a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control to display an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) sent from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S506.

In S506, the sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305. The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to cause the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S507.

In S507, the sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306. The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to turn on or blink all or some of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S508.

In S508, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an accessory request to the accessory control circuit 307. The accessory control circuit 307 controls all or some of the accessories forming the performance accessory group 58 (see FIGS. 1, 2, and 6) based on the message (accessory request) sent from the sub CPU 301. The controller performs drive control to operate a production drive motor (not shown) related to the performance. When this process is finished, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit main process.

Although the first pachinko gaming machine can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the sub CPU 301 can display only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The special symbol is used as the main special symbol, and the other is used as the secondary special symbol, and the performance control for the main special symbol is mainly performed. In this embodiment, the first special symbol is the main special symbol in the normal game state where left-handed hitting is the regular gaming mode, and the gaming state where right-handed hitting is the regular gaming mode (high accuracy time-saving gaming state, high In the non-probable time-saving game state and the low-probability time-saving game state), the second special symbol is the main special symbol. Then, the sub CPU 301 performs variable display of decorative symbols and display effects of characters, etc. for the main special symbols, and audio effects for the main special symbols. For example, if the result of the hit determination process for the sub special symbol is a jackpot, for example, the sub special symbol may be produced while the main special symbol is produced. In addition, among the game states where right-handed hitting is the regular game mode, in the low-accuracy time-saving game state, other effects are used instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the main special symbol. An image (for example, a countdown effect of the remaining number of time savers until the end of the time saver game state) may be displayed.

[1-9. Specific example of production mode determination processing by sub-control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 (more specifically, the sub CPU 301) performs production mode determination processing (see S504 in FIG. 64) based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

The sub CPU 301 performs one of the various processes performed in the performance mode determination process, such as a performance pattern of display performance accompanying variable display of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "sub variable performance pattern"), and a look-ahead performance pattern. etc. to be determined.

The sub-variable performance pattern is a performance that shows that the level of expectation for the result of the special symbol hit determination process is maintained or increased as time passes from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the special symbol stops. The pattern includes, for example, a variation pattern of decorative designs, a character presentation, and the like.

In the look-ahead performance pattern, after winning a prize in the starting hole 120, starting information such as various random numbers acquired based on this winning is provided to the special symbol hit determination process (that is, the variable display of the special symbol is started). This is a performance pattern that maintains or changes a look-ahead performance mode, which is represented, for example, in the form of a pending image indicating that starting information is pending.

[1-9-1. Sub-variation performance pattern determination process]
First, the sub-variation effect pattern determination process will be explained with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is an example of a sub variable performance pattern determination table for low start stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that the program ROM 302 also stores a sub-variable performance pattern determination table for high start, but its explanation will be omitted here.

As shown in the sub-variation performance pattern determination table for low start in FIG. , determines a sub-fluctuation effect pattern (indicated as "fluctuation pattern" in FIG. 65) to be displayed on the display device 7.

In addition, in this embodiment, a time-saving hit type reach, a jackpot type reach, and a common reach are prepared as sub-variable performance patterns.

The time-saving hit type reach is a reach effect that indicates that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit as a result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29), and from the appearance, there is a possibility of a time-saving hit. This is a reach production mode that allows you to understand. For example, the time-saving reach system includes a time-saving reach system A, a time-saving system reach B, and a time-saving system reach C. Time-saving hit system reach A is a time-saving hit guaranteed reach that is not displayed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss or a jackpot, but is displayed only when it is a "time-saving hit" (see Figure 15). ). Although this time-saving hit type reach A is not a sub-variation performance pattern for pre-reading, it is not limited to this, and may be a sub-variation performance pattern for pre-reading mode. The time-saving winning type reach B and the time-saving winning type reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance appearance. However, while the time-saving hit type reach B is not a sub-fluctuating effect pattern targeted for pre-reading, the time-saving hit-type reach C is a sub-fluctuating effect pattern targeted for pre-reading (see the "pre-reading flag" column in FIG. 15).

The jackpot-based reach is a reach performance that shows that there is a possibility of a jackpot as a result of a special symbol hit determination process, and is a reach performance mode that allows the user to understand that there is a possibility of a jackpot from its appearance. For example, the jackpot type reach A, the jackpot type reach B, and the jackpot type reach C are prepared. Jackpot type reach A is a jackpot confirmed reach that is not displayed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss or a "time-saving hit", but is displayed only when it is a "time-saving hit" (Figure 15 reference). Although this jackpot type reach A is not a sub-variation performance pattern to be read ahead, it is not limited to this, and may be a sub-variation performance pattern in a look-ahead manner. The jackpot type reach B and the jackpot type reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance appearance. However, while the jackpot type reach B is not a sub-variation performance pattern to be read ahead, the jackpot type reach C is a sub-variation performance pattern to be read ahead (see the column of “preread flag” in FIG. 15).

The common reach is a reach effect that indicates that there is a possibility of either a jackpot or a time-saving hit as a result of the special symbol hit determination process. This is a reach performance mode that is difficult to grasp. Common reaches include, for example, common reach A, common reach B, common reach C, common reach D, and common reach E. The common reach B and the common reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance appearance. Moreover, the common reach D is a performance that develops from the common reach C to the time-saving hit type reach C. Furthermore, the common reach E is a performance that develops from the common reach C to the jackpot type reach C. Note that common reach A and common reach B are not sub-variation performance patterns that are subject to pre-reading, whereas common reach C, common reach D, and common reach E are sub-variation performance patterns that are subject to pre-reading (see Figure 15). (see section ``Flags'').

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the sub variation effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 65) and determines the sub variation effect pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201. Then, the sub CPU 301 controls the determined sub variation effect pattern to be displayed on the display device 7.

[1-9-2. Ahead production pattern determination process]
Next, a look-ahead effect pattern determination process will be explained.

The work RAM 303 (see FIG. 6) includes the first special symbol start storage area (0), the first special symbol start storage area (1), the first special symbol start storage area (2), and the first special symbol start storage area (2) provided in the main RAM 203. The areas corresponding to the 1st special symbol starting storage area (3) and the 1st special symbol starting storage area (4) are the 1st sub-reservation area (0), the 1st sub-reservation area (1), and the 1st sub-reservation area (0). A reservation area (2), a first sub-reservation area (3), and a first sub-reservation area (4) are provided. The first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), and the first sub-holding area (1) to the first sub-holding area (4) contain various information related to the acquired random number value. Hold information is stored. Further, information corresponding to the fluctuation is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the first sub-reservation area (0). By receiving the winning command of the first starting slot winning, the sub CPU 301 stores information corresponding to these pieces of information in the first sub reservation area corresponding to the current first starting slot winning.

In addition, the work RAM 303 includes a second special symbol starting storage area (0), a second special symbol starting storage area (1), a second special symbol starting storage area (2), and a second special symbol starting memory area (2) provided in the main RAM 203. The areas corresponding to the starting storage area (3) and the second special symbol starting storage area (4) are a second sub-reservation area (0), a second sub-reservation area (1), and a second sub-reservation area ( 2), a second sub-reservation area (3), and a second sub-reservation area (4).

In this embodiment, it is assumed that the look-ahead effect is performed in the normal gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other gaming states (for example, a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, etc.) ).

The pre-read effect is performed using a pending image displayed in the display area of the display device 7. The display area of the display device 7 includes a 0th area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (0), a first holding area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (1), and a first holding area as areas for displaying held images. A second reservation area corresponding to the sub-reservation area (2), a third reservation area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (3), and a fourth reservation area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (4) are provided. There is.

The formats of the pending image in which the look-ahead effect is executed include a jackpot type look-ahead effect form indicating that there is a possibility of a jackpot, a time-saving look-ahead effect form indicating that there is a possibility of a time -saving hit, and a jackpot and time-saving effect form. It includes a common win look-ahead presentation form that indicates that there is a possibility of winning.

In addition, the look-ahead effect pattern includes a look-ahead effect type pattern that changes the expected value for the result type (time-saving hit or jackpot) of the special symbol hit judgment process, and a look-ahead effect type pattern that changes the expected value for the result type of the special symbol hit judgment process (time-saving hit or jackpot), and a look-ahead effect type pattern that changes the expected value for the result type of the special symbol hit judgment process (whether it is a short-time hit or a jackpot). (a jackpot or a time-saving hit) is included.

The look-ahead performance type pattern is a performance pattern that changes the form of the reserved image, for example, from a common win look-ahead performance form to a jackpot type look-ahead performance form.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect pattern is a effect pattern that changes the form of the reserved image from a form with a relatively low expected value to a form with a relatively high expected value.

[1-9-2-1. Various tables used in look-ahead performance pattern determination process]
First, various tables used in the pre-read effect pattern determination process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 66 to 69. 66 to 69 are all examples of tables stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that the pre-read performance pattern determination process is a process executed by the sub CPU 301 as one of various processes performed in the performance mode determination process.

FIG. 66 is an example of a prefetch effect type pattern number determination table. Further, FIG. 67 is an example of a look-ahead performance type pattern determination table for low start.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the look-ahead effect is performed only in the normal game state where left-handed play is a regular game mode, the look-ahead effect type pattern number determination table of FIG. 66 and the look-ahead effect type pattern determination table of FIG. are not stored in the program ROM 302. However, when performing a look-ahead effect in a gaming state where right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, the look-ahead effect type pattern number determination table for high starts and the look-ahead effect type determination table for high starts are also stored in the program ROM 302. be remembered.

As shown in the prefetch performance type pattern number determination table of FIG. Determined by The number of reservations here includes start information of the prefetch target. That is, when the starting information acquired based on the winning to the first starting opening 120 is held, the number of holdings after the holding corresponds to the number of holdings shown in FIG. 66.

For example, if the fluctuation pattern is "03H" and the number of reservations is "3", the look-ahead performance type pattern number is determined to be "3"; for example, if the fluctuation pattern is "0EH" and the number of reservations is "2", In this case, "22" is determined.

Once the sub variable effect pattern number is determined, the prefetch effect type pattern number is determined with reference to the prefetch effect type pattern number determination table of FIG.

Next, the look-ahead effect type pattern is determined based on, for example, the look-ahead effect type pattern number and the random value 1 for effect selection, as shown in the look-ahead effect type pattern determination table for low start in FIG. . In addition, in FIG. 67, the prefetch effect type pattern number is illustrated as a "table number" for convenience. The random number value 1 for performance selection is a random number value obtained by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined opportunity, such as when receiving a variable pattern command, for example.

For example, if the prefetch effect type pattern number is "3" and the acquired random value 1 for effect selection is "77", the prefetch effect type pattern is determined to be ``08H''; ” and the obtained random number value 1 for effect selection is “77”, “16H” is determined.

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the column of remarks (holding correspondence) in FIG. 67 indicate the first holding area to the fourth holding area, respectively.

In addition, "A" shown in each column of notes (holding support) in Fig. 67 is a time-saving win system look-ahead presentation form that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a time-saving hit, and the appearance The above is also a presentation form that allows you to understand that there is a possibility of a time saving hit.

In addition, "B" shown in each column of notes (reservation support) in Fig. 67 is a jackpot-type look-ahead production form that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a jackpot, and it also looks good in appearance. , is a form of performance that allows you to understand that there is a possibility of winning the jackpot.

In addition, "C" shown in each column of notes (reservation support) in Fig. 67 is a common system look-ahead presentation form that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be either a time-saving hit or a jackpot. From the appearance, it is difficult to grasp whether there is a possibility of a time-saving hit or a jackpot.

For example, if the look-ahead effect type pattern is determined to be "07H", the common look-ahead look effect form is displayed in the third holding area, the common look-ahead effect form is displayed in the second hold area, and from the second hold area When shifting to the first holding area, the common type look-ahead performance form changes to the time-saving winning type look-ahead performance form, and the time-saving winning type look-ahead performance form is displayed in the first holding area.

In addition, if the look-ahead effect type pattern is determined to be "16H", for example, the common system look-ahead effect form is displayed in the third holding area, and when shifting from the third hold area to the second hold area, the common system look-ahead effect form is displayed. The game changes to a jackpot-based look-ahead performance format, and the jackpot-based look-ahead performance format is displayed in the first holding area.

That is, as shown in FIG. 67, the prefetch effect type patterns include the following patterns A) to D). Note that the pattern of changing from the jackpot type look-ahead performance form to the time-saving win type look-ahead performance form, and the pattern changing from the time-saving win type look-ahead performance form to the long-range win type look-ahead performance form are not included in the look-ahead performance type patterns.
B) At the time of suspension, the time-saving winning look-ahead presentation form is displayed, and the time-saving winning look-ahead presentation form continues without changing the presentation form after that. ”).
B) A jackpot-type look-ahead performance pattern in which a jackpot-type look-ahead performance form is displayed at the time of suspension, and the jackpot-type look-ahead performance form continues without changing the performance form thereafter (for example, look-ahead performance type pattern “17H”) .
c) A common winning look-ahead performance pattern (for example, look-ahead performance type pattern "24H") that displays a common look-ahead performance form at the time of suspension and then changes to a time-saving win look-ahead performance form.
d) A common winning look-ahead performance pattern (for example, look-ahead performance type pattern “12H”) that is displayed in a common look-ahead performance form at the time of suspension and then changes to a jackpot look-ahead performance form.

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the prefetch effect type pattern number determination table (for example, see FIG. 66) and determines the prefetch effect type pattern number based on the fluctuation pattern and the number of reservations. Then, the sub CPU 301 determines a pre-read effect type pattern based on the determined pre-read effect type pattern number and the random value 1 for effect selection.

Further, FIG. 68 is an example of a hit look-ahead performance pattern table when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit." Further, FIG. 69 is an example of a loss look-ahead performance pattern table when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss.

By the way, the look-ahead performance form, which is expressed in the form of a pending image, for example, differs depending on the expected value for the result of the special symbol hit determination process.

For example, regarding "Time saving hit", for example, the expected value can be changed by changing the shape of the pending image, which is usually represented by a triangle, such as "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star". can be expressed. In this case, the expected value is the lowest when the retained image is a square, and the highest when the retained image is a star.

In addition, regarding jackpots, for example, changes in the expected value can be expressed by changing the color of the pending image, which is normally represented in white, such as "blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow." . In this case, when the pending image is blue, the expected value is the lowest, and when the pending image is a rainbow, the expected value is the highest.

Although the details will be described later, regarding the common win look-ahead production form that indicates the possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving hit, the reserved image may be changed to a color that indicates the expected value level for the jackpot and a time-saving hit. It may be expressed both with a shape indicating the expected value level, or it may be expressed in a dedicated common win look-ahead presentation form.

The reserved image as a look-ahead presentation form can change from a presentation form with a relatively low expected value to a presentation form with a relatively high expected value, but it is possible to change from a presentation form with a relatively high expected value to a presentation form with a relatively high expected value. It is preferable not to change to a low performance form. Also, when changing the presentation form of the held image, it is not necessarily necessary to change it one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star" or "blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow." , for example, it may be changed to "pentagon → circle" or "yellow → rainbow". Further, the shape of the pending image does not necessarily have to start from the square or blue, which has the lowest expected value, but may start from a circle or red, for example.

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the column of remarks (holding correspondence) in FIG. 68 indicate the first holding area to the fourth holding area, respectively, similarly to FIG. 66.

“0” to “5” shown as data in the Remarks (Holding Support) column in Figure 68 and/or the Remarks (Holding Support) column in Figure 69 indicates the high expected value for the result of the special symbol hit determination process. It shows that. For example, the above-mentioned "triangle" and "white" correspond to "0", the above-mentioned "square" and "blue" correspond to "1", and the above-mentioned "pentagon" and "yellow" correspond to "2". The above "hexagon" and "green" correspond to "3", the above "circle" and "red" correspond to "4", and the above "star" and "rainbow" correspond to "5". ”.

Hereinafter, "1" to "5" shown as data in the Remarks (Holding Support) column in Figure 68 and/or the Remarks (Holding Handling) column in Figure 69 will be referred to as expected value levels "1" to "5" to be called.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit," the look-ahead performance pattern is, as shown in the hit look-ahead performance pattern table in FIG. 68, for example, the number of reservations and the performance selection It is determined based on the random number value 2. Similarly, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the pre-read effect pattern is, for example, the number of reservations and the random number value 2 for effect selection, as shown in the pre-read effect pattern table for loss in FIG. Determined based on. The random number value 2 for effect selection is a random number obtained by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined opportunity, such as when receiving a variable pattern command, for example. In addition, in FIG. 68 and FIG. 69, the prefetch effect pattern is illustrated as a "prefetch effect pattern command" for convenience. Further, in FIGS. 68 and 69, only the cases where the number of reservations is "1" to "3" are illustrated, and the illustration of the case where the number of reservations is "4" is omitted for convenience.

For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the number of reservations is "3", and the random value 2 for sub performance selection is "750", the pre-read performance pattern is determined to be "43H". For example, if the look-ahead effect pattern is determined to be "43H", the expected value level will be "2" in the third holding area, and the expected value level will change from "2" to "2" when shifting from the third holding area to the second holding area. The expected value level changes from "3" to "5" when shifting from the second reservation area to the first reservation area.

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the number of reservations is "3", and the random number value 2 for sub performance selection is "680", the pre-read performance pattern is determined to be "3FH". . For example, if the look-ahead effect pattern is determined to be "3FH", the expected value level is "2" in the third holding area, the expected value level is "2" in the second holding area, and the expected value level is "2" from the second holding area to the first holding area. When shifting, the expected value level changes from "2" to "4".

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the hit look-ahead effect pattern table (see FIG. 68) or the loss look-ahead effect pattern table (see FIG. 69) based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and calculates the pending number and look ahead effect pattern table (see FIG. 69). A look-ahead performance pattern is determined based on the performance pattern. Then, the sub CPU 301 determines a pre-read effect type pattern based on the determined pre-read effect type pattern number and the random value 1 for effect selection.

Note that the pre-read performance type pattern shown in FIG. 67 is a pattern in which the winning type can change due to a change in the form of the reserved image when the reserved image shifts (when the variable display of the special symbol of the variation ends). Note that the timing at which the form of the pending image changes is not limited to when the pending image shifts, but may be during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

In this way, depending on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the look-ahead effect is divided into a jackpot look-ahead effect that shows the expected value for a jackpot, a time-saving look-ahead effect that shows the expected value for a time-saving hit, and a hit (jackpot or time-saving hit). ) is configured to be able to execute any one of the common look-ahead effects that indicate the expected value for. When the common win look-ahead performance form is executed, it is possible to give the player an interesting feeling of whether the performance will change to a jackpot type look-ahead performance form or a time-saving win type look-ahead performance form, which will increase the interest. It is possible to increase it.

In addition, the look-ahead effect pattern shown in FIGS. 68 and 69 is such that when the hold is shifted (when the variable display of the special symbol of the change ends), a hit (big hit or time-saving hit) is caused by a change in the form of the hold image. This is a pattern in which the expected value level can change. However, the timing at which the pre-read presentation form changes is not limited to when the hold is shifted, but may be during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

In addition, regarding the form of the held image performed as a pre-reading effect (that is, the form of the held image displayed within the range of the second sub-holding area (4) to the second sub-holding area (1)), the starting port 410, 140A , 140B, and the form of the pending image in the variable display of the special symbol may be determined at the start of the variable display of the special symbol.

By the way, the probability of being determined to be a variable pattern in which a time-saving look-ahead effect is executed (see, for example, "03H" and "0EH" in FIG. 65) and a variable pattern in which a jackpot-type look-ahead effect is executed (for example, in FIG. 65), When compared with the probability of being determined in the variable pattern in which the time-saving look-ahead performance is executed (see, for example, FIG. 15), the probability of being determined in the variation pattern in which the time-saving look-ahead effect is executed is higher (see, for example, FIG. 15). That is, the execution rate of the look-ahead effect is higher than the execution rate of the jackpot-type look-ahead effect. Therefore, compared to conventional pachinko gaming machines in which only the jackpot type look-ahead effect is performed between the time-saving look-ahead effect and the jackpot type look-ahead effect, it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of the look-ahead effect and increase interest. It becomes possible.

In addition, instead of making the execution rate of the time-saving look-ahead effect higher than the execution rate of the jackpot-type look-ahead effect, the execution rate of the jackpot-type look-ahead effect is higher than the execution rate of the time-saving look-ahead effect. You may. When the look-ahead effect is executed, the expected value for a jackpot is higher than the expected value for a time-saving hit, so even in such a case, it is possible to increase interest.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in both the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state, it is possible to win a "time-saving hit" in the special symbol hit determination process (see FIG. 10). However, although the look-ahead performance is performed in the normal game state, the look-ahead performance is not performed in the low-accuracy time-saving game state. Even if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state is "time-saving hit", when executing the C-time-saving gaming state over the A-time-saving gaming state, and for the A-time-saving gaming state. In any case where the C time saving game state is not executed repeatedly, the possibility that the number of time saving times will increase is low. Therefore, by making sure that the player does not know that he or she may have won a "time-saving win" in the A-time-saving gaming state, the disappointment caused to the player by winning the "time-saving win" is reduced. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest.

However, it is not essential to prevent the look-ahead effect from being performed in the low-accuracy time-saving game state, and the look-ahead effect may be performed not only in the normal game state but also in the low-accuracy time-saving game state.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, a time-saving hit type reach, a jackpot type reach, or a common reach can be executed as the sub-variable performance pattern. In this embodiment, as can be seen from FIGS. 15 and 65 to 67, when the sub-CPU 301 executes the time-saving winning type look-ahead performance pattern, the sub-CPU 301 executes the time-saving winning type reach as a sub variable performance pattern, Do not perform jackpot reach. In addition, when the sub CPU 301 executes the jackpot type look-ahead performance pattern, it executes the jackpot type reach as a sub variable performance pattern and does not execute the time saving hit type reach.

Further, in this embodiment, when the sub CPU 301 executes the time-saving winning look-ahead performance pattern or the common winning look-ahead performance pattern, it is possible to execute the time-saving winning type reach as a sub variable performance pattern. However, when the sub CPU 301 executes the jackpot type look-ahead performance pattern, it does not execute the time-saving hit type reach as the sub variable performance pattern.

In addition, there is a jackpot type look-ahead performance pattern (for example, look-ahead performance type pattern “37H”), a time-saving hit type look-ahead performance pattern (for example, look-ahead performance type pattern “29H”), and a common winning look-ahead performance pattern (for example, look-ahead performance pattern “29H”). Regardless of whether pattern "27H") is executed, the sub CPU 301 executes the common reach (for example, sub variable effect patterns "0AH", "0BH") as the sub variable effect pattern. Good too.

Further, a production pattern may be provided in which a short-time winning type reach is executed, and after a loss is clearly indicated in the time-saving winning type reaching, a jackpot type reaching is executed. In this case, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation until the end as to whether or not a jackpot-type reach with a high profit rate will be executed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15, when the common reach E, which is a common effect, is executed in the variable display of special symbols for the start information for which the look-ahead effect has been executed (hereinafter referred to as "target variation"), the common reach E is executed. After the same effect as reach C is displayed, it is possible to shift to the same effect as jackpot type reach C. On the other hand, if no common performance is executed, the transition to jackpot type reach C does not occur. Similarly, when the common reach E, which is a common effect, is executed in target variation, after the same effect as the common reach C is displayed, it is possible to shift to the same effect as the time-saving reach type reach C. On the other hand, if no common performance is executed, the time-saving hit type reach C does not occur.

Next, the prefetch effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 with reference to the tables of FIGS. 65 to 69 will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is an example of a flowchart showing the prefetch effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301. Note that, as described above, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance pattern determination process only in the normal gaming state in which left-handed hitting is the normal gaming mode, but the invention is not limited to this.

First, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not it has received the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201 (S3001).

If the winning command has not been received (NO determination in S3001), the sub CPU 301 ends the pre-read effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has been received (YES in S3001), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3002.

In S3002, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the pending target for pre-reading is not present, that is, whether or not a pre-reading effect is being executed for the current pending. If there are a plurality of pending images, the pre-reading effect may be performed on a plurality of pending images, but in this embodiment, the pre-reading effect is performed only on one pending image.

If the pre-read effect is being executed for the current hold (NO in S3002), the sub CPU 301 ends the pre-read effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the prefetch effect is not executed for the current hold (YES in S3002), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3003.

In S3003, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the variation pattern information received in the winning command is subject to pre-reading.

If the variation pattern information received in the winning command is not a prefetch target (NO determination in S3003), the sub CPU 301 ends the prefetch performance pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern information received in the winning command is to be prefetched (YES in S3003), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3004.

In S3004, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is greater than, for example, the upper limit number that can be reserved (for example, 4 or 8). This process is to avoid shifting to the B time-saving game state before the variable display of special symbols is executed for the reservation for which the pre-read effect has been performed, even though the pre-read effect has been performed. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is determined whether the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is larger than the upper limit number that can be reserved, but the present invention is not limited to this. In some cases (YES in S3003), it may be determined whether or not the number of reservations is greater than the number of reservations including prefetch targets. Further, the ceiling value and the ceiling counter may receive information from the main CPU 201 as a command, or may be managed by the sub CPU 301 separately from the main CPU 201.

In S3005, the sub CPU 301 performs prefetch effect type pattern number determination processing. In this process, the prefetch effect type pattern number is determined with reference to the prefetch effect type pattern number determination table (see FIG. 66). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3006.

In S3006, the sub CPU 301 performs prefetch effect pattern determination processing. In this process, a prefetch effect type pattern is determined with reference to the prefetch effect type pattern determination table (FIG. 67). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3007.

In S3007, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit." In this process, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined based on the fluctuation pattern information received in the winning command sent from the main CPU 201, and a YES determination is made if the result is a "time-saving hit" or "jackpot". be done. However, the invention is not limited to this, and a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit" may be determined by transmitting winning/losing information of special symbols from the main CPU 201 to the sub CPU 301.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit" (YES determination in S3007), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3008.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is neither a "time-saving hit" nor a "big hit" (NO determination in S3007), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3009.

In S3008, the sub CPU 301 performs a win look-ahead performance pattern determination process. In this process, a look-ahead performance pattern is determined by referring to the win look-ahead performance pattern table (FIG. 68).

Further, in S3009, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead performance pattern determination process in case of loss. In this process, a look-ahead performance pattern is determined by referring to the loss look-ahead performance pattern table (FIG. 69).

By the way, in this embodiment, the prefetch effect is performed only for one pending image (see S3002). Therefore, even if a look-ahead presentation mode (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot look-ahead effect") indicating that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol may be a jackpot has already been executed, the sub CPU 301 will Do not perform look-ahead effects. Note that even if the machine is a pachinko game machine in which a look-ahead effect is performed in a plurality of pending images, if a jackpot look-ahead effect has already been executed, it is preferable not to perform a new look-ahead effect.

For example, there is a plurality of holds including a first hold and a second hold in which variable display of special symbols starts after the first hold, and in the first hold, a jackpot-type look-ahead performance pattern ( For example, if the look-ahead effect type pattern "17H" in Fig. 67 is executed, even if the look-ahead effect is executed in the second hold, the look-ahead effect in this second hold will be meaningless. there is a possibility. In particular, when a jackpot is derived for the first hold and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, and after this jackpot gaming state ends, it is controlled to the A time-saving gaming state, for example, a "time-saving hit" is derived for the second hold. Even so, there is a possibility that the player will not be able to benefit from this "time saving", and in this case, the player's interest will be significantly reduced. Therefore, when the jackpot look-ahead effect has already been executed, it is preferable not to execute the look-ahead effect for a hold that will be expired later than the hold for which the jackpot look-ahead effect is being executed.

Furthermore, even if the first hold is a jackpot hold (a hold from which a jackpot is derived), if the look-ahead effect has not been executed for the first hold, the look-ahead effect will not be executed for the second hold. You may or may not need to do so.

Further, even if a fake jackpot look-ahead effect (for example, look-ahead effect type pattern "53H" in FIG. 67) is being executed in the first hold, it is preferable not to execute the look-ahead effect in the second hold.

However, if the time-saving look-ahead effect (for example, the look-ahead effect type pattern "05H" in Fig. 67) is being executed in the first hold, the jackpot look-ahead effect or the time-saving look-ahead effect is executed in the second hold. Good too. This is because even if a time-saving win is derived for the first reservation, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot with a higher degree of profit than that.

In addition, in a pachinko game machine that includes a small hit in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, even if a small hit look-ahead effect is executed in the first hold, a jackpot look-ahead effect or a time-saving hit look-ahead effect is executed in the second hold. You may also perform a performance. This is because even if a small win is derived for the first reservation, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot that is more profitable than that.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small hit, there is a look-ahead performance mode (hereinafter referred to as "small hit look-ahead performance") that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a small hit. ) is being executed in the first hold, a jackpot look-ahead effect or a time-saving hit look-ahead effect may be executed in the second hold. This is because even if a small win is derived for the first reservation, it is possible to make the player expect a small win with a higher degree of profit than that.

Further, when a prize is won in the first starting opening 120 and the starting information is suspended during execution of a jackpot type reach as a sub variable performance pattern, the sub CPU 301 does not perform a pre-reading performance regarding this suspension.

Further, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the prefetch effect only in the normal gaming state. Therefore, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the jackpot display mode is derived, if the starting information determined to be a "time-saving hit" by the pre-read determination performed by the main CPU 201 is pending (this In this paragraph, this suspension is referred to as "specific suspension"), and regardless of whether a pre-reading effect is executed or a pre-reading effect is not executed for this specific pending, the sub CPU 301 will execute the system after the end of the jackpot gaming state. , If the game is not in the normal gaming state, the prefetch effect is not executed for the specific hold. However, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to perform the pre-read performance for the specific hold even if the game is in the normal game state after the end of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, even if it is a pachinko gaming machine that executes a look-ahead effect in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the jackpot display mode If there is a specific pending when the is derived, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to perform a pre-reading performance for the specific pending after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the jackpot display mode is derived, if the starting information determined to be a "time-saving hit" by the pre-read determination performed by the main CPU 201 is pending (this In this paragraph, this hold is referred to as a "specific hold"), and even if this specific hold is a hold for a "time-saving hit", after the jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 201 executes the C time-saving game based on the "time-saving hit". It may not be controlled by the state. For example, if the specification is such that multiple time-saving gaming states are not executed in duplicate when the time-saving gaming states overlap, and if the control is made to the A-time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the specific hold is set to "time-saving winning". ”, the main CPU 201 will not execute the C time-saving game state based on the “time-saving win”.

[1-10. Specific example of look-ahead production]
Specific examples of the look-ahead effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 71 to 75. In this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 is capable of executing a prefetch effect using a pending image based on a command sent from the main CPU 201.

[1-10-1. Specific examples of jackpot-based look-ahead performances]
FIGS. 71(a) to 71(f) are examples of look-ahead effect patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, in which the jackpot-type look-ahead effect pattern that indicates that there is a possibility of a jackpot changes. It is a diagram showing a process. Note that in FIGS. 71(a) to 71(f), the prefetch effect type patterns correspond to "1CH", "3CH", "58H", or "78H" in FIG. 67. The pre-read effect pattern is not shown in FIG. 68.

As shown in FIGS. 71(a) to 71(f), a first reservation area 411 to a fourth reservation area 414 are displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7. As described above, the first reservation area 411 to the fourth reservation area 414 are areas that indicate whether or not reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (4), respectively. be. Further, the 0th area 410 is an area indicating that information corresponding to the change is stored in the first sub-reservation area (0).

In this embodiment, when the hold information is stored in any of the first sub-hold areas (1) to (4), the sub CPU 301 stores the hold information corresponding to the first sub-hold area in which the hold information is stored. Areas 411 to 414 are displayed as pending images (hereinafter simply referred to as "pending images") indicated by triangles. Further, when no reservation information is stored in the sub-reservation area, the sub CPU 301 does not display the reservation image, but displays only the frame of the reservation area.

In FIG. 71(a), the first holding area 411 to the third holding area 413 display normal holding images in which no prefetch effect is executed, and the fourth holding area 414 displays a holding image. Only the frame is displayed. This indicates that reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation areas (1) to (3) and that no reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area (4).

In FIG. 71(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the fourth pending area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 71(a). This indicates that reservation information has been newly stored in the first sub-reservation area (4) from the state shown in FIG. 71(a).

As described above, the sub CPU 301 displays the formats (for example, colors) of the pending images shown in the first pending area 411 to the fourth pending area 414 differently depending on the expected value for the jackpot. In this embodiment, except for rainbows, differences in colors are illustrated by shading of colors.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 71(b), the color of the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is white, and the color of the reserved image shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is blue ( Expected value level is "1").

FIG. 71(c) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 71(b), and the color of the pending image displayed in the fourth pending area 414 in FIG. 71(b) is This is an image showing that the color changes from blue to yellow (expected value level "2") when shifted to the third reservation area 413.

FIG. 71(d) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 71(c), and the color of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in FIG. 71(c) is , is an image showing that the color changes from yellow to green (expected value level "3") when shifted to the second reservation area 412.

FIG. 71(e) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 71(d), and the color of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 71(d) is , is an image showing that the color changes from green to red (expected value level "4") when shifted to the first reservation area 411.

FIG. 71(f) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 71(e), and the color of the pending image displayed in the first pending area 411 in FIG. 71(e) is , is an image showing that the color changes from red to rainbow (expected value level "5") when shifted to the 0th area 410.

In addition, the color of the pending image (expected value level) indicating the expected value for the jackpot does not necessarily need to change when the pending is shifted (when the variable display of the special symbol of the change ends). It may be changed during the variable display of the variable special symbol.

[1-10-2. Specific examples of time-saving look-ahead production formats]
FIGS. 72(a) to 72(f) are examples of look-ahead performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, in which a time-saving win type look-ahead performance pattern indicating that there is a possibility of a time-saving win is shown. It is a figure showing the process of change. Note that in FIGS. 72(a) to 72(f), the prefetch effect type patterns correspond to "0EH", "2EH", "4AH", or "6AH" in FIG. 67. The pre-read effect pattern is not shown in FIG. 68.

In FIG. 72(a), the first holding area 411 to the third holding area 413 display normal holding images in which no prefetch effect is executed, and the fourth holding area 414 displays a holding image. Only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 72(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the fourth pending area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 72(a). As described above, the sub CPU 301 displays the formats (for example, shapes) of the pending images shown in the first pending area 411 to the fourth pending area 414 differently depending on the expected value for time saving.

As described above, in this embodiment, the expected value for a jackpot is represented by the color of the reserved image, and the expected value for a time-saving hit is represented by the shape of the reserved image.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 72(b), the colors of the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 are triangular, and the colors of the reserved images shown in the fourth reserved area 414 are square ( Expected value level is "1").

FIG. 72(c) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 72(b), and the shape of the pending image displayed in the fourth pending area 414 in FIG. 72(b) is , is an image showing that the shape changes from a quadrangle to a pentagon (expected value level "2") when shifted to the third reservation area 413.

FIG. 72(d) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 72(c), and the shape of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in FIG. 72(c) is , is an image showing that the shape changes from a pentagon to a hexagon (expected value level "3") when shifted to the second reservation area 412.

FIG. 72(e) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 72(d), and the shape of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 72(d) is , is an image showing that the shape changes from a hexagon to a circle (expected value level "4") when shifted to the first reservation area 411.

FIG. 72(f) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 72(e), and the shape of the pending image displayed in the first pending area 411 in FIG. 72(e) is , is an image showing that when shifted to the 0th area 410, the circle changes to a star (expected value level "5").

Note that the shape of the pending image indicating the expected value for time saving does not necessarily need to be changed one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star"; for example, it may be changed from "pentagon → circle". You may let them.

In addition, the shape of the pending image (expected value level) indicating the expected value for the time saving hit does not necessarily need to be changed when the pending is shifted (when the variable display of the special symbol of the change ends), for example, It may be changed during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

[1-10-3. Specific examples of common look-ahead production forms]
FIGS. 73(a) to 73(f) are examples of look-ahead performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and show that there is a possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving hit. It is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a look-ahead performance form to a jackpot-type look-ahead performance form. Changes in the common win look-ahead performance format include changes in the expected value of a win and changes in which it is clear whether the type of win is a jackpot or a time-saving win. In addition, in FIGS. 73(a) to 73(f), the pre-read effect type pattern corresponds to "15H", "35H", "51H", or "71H" in FIG. 67, and the pre-read effect pattern corresponds to "15H", "35H", "51H", or "71H" in FIG. Corresponds to "43H".

In this example, as a common hit look-ahead effect showing that there is a possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving hit, both the color indicating the expected value level for the jackpot and the shape indicating the expected value level for the time-saving hit are used. It is showing.

In FIG. 73(a), the first holding area 411 and the second holding area 412 display a normal holding image in which no prefetch effect is executed, and the third holding area 413 and the fourth holding area 414 display a normal holding image. The held image is not displayed, only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 73(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 73(a). The sub CPU 301 displays the formats (for example, colors and shapes) of the pending images shown in the first pending area 411 to the fourth pending area 414 differently depending on the expected value for a hit (big hit or time-saving hit). . In this embodiment, when the look-ahead effect is not executed or when the expected value for a hit is the lowest, the pending image is displayed as a white triangle, and the image is displayed as a white triangle. The expected value for a short hit increases in the order of ``star''.

In this example, in FIG. 73(b), the form of the held image shown in the first held area 412 and the second held area 412 is a white triangle, and the form of the held image shown in the third held area 413. is a yellow pentagon (expectation level “2”).

FIG. 73(c) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 73(b), and the form of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in FIG. 73(b) is , is an image showing that the yellow pentagon has changed to the green hexagon (expected value level "3") when being shifted to the second reservation area 412.

FIG. 73(d) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 73(c), and the form of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 73(c) is , when shifted to the first holding area 411, the green hexagon (common look-ahead effect form with expected value level ``3'') changes to a rainbow triangle (the jackpot type look-ahead effect form with expected value level ``5''). This is an image showing what has changed.

In other words, the look-ahead effect shown in FIGS. 73(b) and 3(c) determines whether the format of the pending image is a format that indicates an expected value for a jackpot or a format that indicates an expected value for a time-saving hit. This is a performance that is difficult to grasp from its form. On the other hand, in the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 73(d), the format of the pending image indicates the expected value for a jackpot, and the expected value is extremely high (for example, expected value level "5"). It is possible to grasp something.

In this way, in this embodiment, depending on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the look-ahead effect is divided into a jackpot look-ahead effect that shows the expected value for a jackpot, a time-saving look-ahead effect that shows the expected value for a time-saving hit, and a hit look-ahead effect that shows the expected value for a time-saving hit. It is configured to be able to execute any one of the common look-ahead effects that indicate the expected value for (big hit or time-saving win). When the common win look-ahead performance form is executed, it is possible to give the player an interesting feeling of whether the performance will change to a jackpot type look-ahead performance form or a time-saving win type look-ahead performance form, which will increase the interest. It is possible to increase it.

Note that the format of the pending image that shows the expected value for time savings does not necessarily need to be changed one by one in the order of "blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow star." Instead, for example, it may be changed to "yellow pentagon (common winning look-ahead presentation form) → red triangle (jackpot-based look-ahead presentation form)", or "green hexagon (common hit look-ahead presentation form) → triangle". You may change it to ``Hoshi (time-saving look-ahead performance form)''. Further, the form of the pending image indicating the expected value for winning does not necessarily have to start from the blue rectangle with the lowest expected value, but may start from the red circle, for example.

In addition, the form of the pending image that indicates the expected value for a hit does not necessarily need to change when the pending is shifted (when the variable display of the special symbol of the variation ends); It may be changed during variable display.

[1-10-4. Modified example of common look-ahead performance form]
In addition, the common win look-ahead performance form that indicates the possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving hit is not necessarily a form that expresses both the color indicating the expected value for the jackpot and the shape indicating the expected value for the time-saving hit. Not limited. Instead of this, for example, a dedicated common win look-ahead presentation form may be provided. When creating a dedicated common win look-ahead production format, it becomes possible to have expectations for both the jackpot and the time-saving win, and since the expected value of each is unknown, it is possible to look forward to future changes in the production format. This allows players to play games with a sense of feeling, and improves their interest in the game.

FIGS. 74(a) to 74(f) are examples of look-ahead performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, in which the pending image is changed from the dedicated common hit look-ahead performance mode to the jackpot-based look-ahead performance mode. It is a figure showing the process of change. In addition, in FIGS. 74(a) to 74(f), the pre-read effect type pattern corresponds to "15H", "35H", "51H", or "71H" in FIG. 67, and the pre-read effect pattern corresponds to "15H", "35H", "51H", or "71H" in FIG. Corresponds to "31H".

Further, FIGS. 75(a) to 75(f) are examples of look-ahead performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, from a dedicated common win look-ahead performance form to a time-saving winning look-ahead performance form. It is a figure which shows the process by which a pending image changes. In addition, in FIGS. 75(a) to 75(f), the pre-read effect type pattern corresponds to "07H", "27H", "43H", or "63H" in FIG. 67, and the pre-read effect pattern corresponds to FIG. 68 or This corresponds to "31H" in FIG. 69.

In FIG. 74(a) and FIG. 75(a), a normal pending image in which no prefetch effect is performed is displayed in the first pending area 411 and the second pending area 412, and the third pending area 413 and the second pending area 412 are displayed. No pending image is displayed in the 4 pending area 414, and only a frame is displayed.

In FIG. 74(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 74(a).

Similarly, in FIG. 75(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 75(a).

In both FIG. 74(b) and FIG. 75(b), the form of the pending image shown in the third holding area 413 is a dedicated common system look-ahead presentation form, and is, for example, a shining form. By changing the degree of brightness of the light, the expected value level can be changed.

FIG. 74(c) is an image in which the reservation is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 74(b), and the dedicated common system pre-reading that was displayed in the third reservation area 413 in FIG. 74(b) This is an image showing that the presentation form has been shifted to the second reservation area 412 without changing it.

Similarly, FIG. 75(c) is an image in which the pending state is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 75(b), and the dedicated This is an image showing that the common system prefetch effect form is shifted to the second reservation area 412 without changing the form.

FIG. 74(d) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 74(c), and the form of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 74(c) is , is an image showing that when shifted to the first holding area 411, the dedicated common system look-ahead presentation form changes to a red triangle (expected jackpot value level "4").

On the other hand, FIG. 75(d) is an image in which the pending status is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 75(c), and the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 75(c) is This is an image showing that when the form is shifted to the first reservation area 411, the form changes from the dedicated common system look-ahead effect form to a white circle (expected value level "4" per time saving).

In this way, even if the look-ahead performance form is expressed as a dedicated common win look-ahead performance form, it is possible to change from the dedicated common win look-ahead performance form to either the jackpot-type look-ahead performance form or the time-saving winning look-ahead performance form. It is possible to give the player an interesting sense of how things are changing, and it is possible to increase interest.

[1-11. Small hit rush]
In the first pachinko game machine described above, it is possible to realize a so-called small winning rush. The small hit rush will be explained below.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, as described above, a normal gaming state, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state are prepared, and the main CPU 201 selects one of these gaming states. Control to any gaming state. As described above, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, so the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 120 is mainly executed. In addition, in other gaming states (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), right-handed hitting is considered a regular gaming mode, so the game to the second starting ports 140A, 140B is A second special symbol game based on winning balls is mainly executed. In addition, when the winning hole included in the normal electric accessory unit 145 is the first starting hole, the first special symbol is used in any one of the normal game state, high-accuracy time-saving game state, and low-accuracy time-saving game state. The game is mainly executed, and the second special symbol game is mainly executed in the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the winning frequency of game balls to the small winning big prize opening 151 is higher than that in other gaming states (for example, the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state). ), the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time becomes a small winning rush that can exceed 1.

Here, an example of the small win rush mechanism will be explained. First, the game ball hit to the right almost passes through the passage gate 126. In the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the electric support control that increases the frequency of operating the normal electric accessory 146 to open the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140B in this embodiment) is not executed. In addition, unless the jackpot game control process is executed, the jackpot jackpot opening 131 will not be open, so the frequency at which the second starting opening 140B will be open in the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state is different from that of the game in which the time-saving control is executed. low compared to the state. Therefore, if the small winning big prize opening 151 is open, the game ball hit right and distributed to the downward flow path 107b can win in the small winning big winning opening 151. When a game ball enters the small winning jackpot 151, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out as described above. In addition, the game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper downward flow path 107a can win a prize in the second starting opening 140A. When a game ball enters the second starting port 140A, 140B, the game ball stops showing a small hit with a relatively high probability of 1 in 3 (approximately) as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10). Not only is the display mode derived, but super-fast fluctuations (for example, variable display time of 1000 msec) are executed as shown in the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start (see Figure 15(B)), so small The winning frequency of game balls into the winning big prize opening 151 is increased compared to other game states (for example, normal game state, high probability time saving game state, low probability time saving game state). In this way, it is possible to realize a small win rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1.

On the other hand, in a gaming state where time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the second starting port 140B is in an open state by executing the electric support control, and when the player is hit right and Most of the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 107b end up winning in the second starting port 140B. Therefore, even if the small winning large winning opening 151 is open, the expected value of a game ball winning into the small winning large winning opening 151 is low. Furthermore, as described above, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 140B, only one prize ball is paid out, for example. When a game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flowing path 107a enters the second starting port 140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out, but the game balls that are hit to the right and distributed to the upward flowing path 107a are paid out. Of the game balls distributed to the route 107a, only approximately one-third to one-fifth of the game balls win prizes. In this way, in a gaming state where time saving control is executed, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time is set not to exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is considered a regular game mode, but if right-handed hitting is performed, the right-hit game ball passes through the passage gate 126 and the stop display mode indicating a normal symbol hit is changed. When drawn out, the normal electric accessory 146 is activated, and the game ball enters the second starting opening 140B, thereby potentially opening the small winning large prize opening 151. However, in the normal gaming state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 15(A)), so if the second starting opening 140A, 140B is Even if the ball wins, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in any of the long variations A to C, which have an extremely long variation time, and the frequency with which the small winning jackpot 151 is opened is extremely small. Therefore, there is no practical benefit for the player to play right-handed in the normal gaming state. In addition, when the winning hole included in the normal electric accessory unit 145 is the first starting hole, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is set to 0, for example, so that the actual profit of hitting right is not generated. Good too. In the normal game state, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time does not exceed 1, and is smaller than in the game state in which time saving control is executed. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that there is a small win rush in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a small hit rush may occur in a highly accurate time-saving game state in which special symbol shortening control is executed to shorten the variable display time of special symbols without executing electrical support control.

[1-12. Signal output outside the aircraft]
Next, the signal is output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko game machine (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), the island computer (not shown) provided on each island). Explain about signals. In this embodiment, a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be explained, but it may be possible to input a signal from outside the first pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. The signals output from each channel of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the first pachinko game machine include, for example, "prize ball information 1", "door/frame open", "external information 1" to "external information 8". ”, “Prize Ball Information 2” and “Security”. However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko game machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals. The configuration may be such that one of the signals is not output.

FIG. 76 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. As shown in FIG. 76, CN1 outputs a signal of "prize ball information 1", CH2 outputs a signal of "door/frame open", and CH3 to CH10 output "external information 1" to Each signal of "external information 8" is output, the signal of "prize ball information 2" is output from CH11, and the signal of "security" is output from CH12. Note that the conditions for outputting the signal from the first pachinko game machine to the outside of the machine are as shown in FIG.

Next, an example of a timing chart of signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be explained using a signal of "prize ball information 1" as an example. In addition, as shown in FIG. 76, in this embodiment, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output for 120 msec every 10 prize balls paid out.

FIG. 77 is an example of a timing chart of the "prize ball information 1" signal among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 77, the payout detection switch (not shown) is turned from off to on every time one prize ball is paid out. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, if a game ball enters the big winning hole (the big winning hole 131 for jackpot or the big winning hole 151 for small winning (see FIG. 4)), for example, 10 prizes will be awarded. When a ball is paid out and a game ball wins in the starting hole (first starting hole 120 or second starting hole 140A (both see FIG. 4)), for example, three prize balls are paid out and the game ball enters the general winning hole. 122 (see FIG. 4), when a game ball wins, for example, four prize balls are paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs a signal of "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko game machine for, for example, 120 msec every time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 outputs the "prize ball information 1" signal for a period of 120 msec, for example, at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on starting from the previous output of the "prize ball information 1" signal. Outputs a signal of "Information 1". Note that outputting the "prize ball information 1" signal at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on is just an example; for example, when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on. Any time between turning on and turning off is sufficient. In addition, outputting the signal of "prize ball information 1" every time 10 prize balls are paid out or outputting for 120 msec is only an example, and the output timing and output time of the signal of "prize ball information 1" can be set as appropriate.

Next, an example of a "security" signal, which is one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine, will be explained. The "security" signal is a signal that is output mainly when an error occurs.

FIG. 78 is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. More specifically, for each error name, the occurrence trigger in the main control circuit 200, the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) 78 is a table showing the release trigger, the output time of the "security" signal (indicated as "security signal" in FIG. 78), and notes.

Note that the outline of errors shown in FIG. 78 is just an example, and only some of them may be determined to be errors, or, for example, those not shown in FIG. 78 may be determined to be errors. You can do it like this. Things that are not shown in FIG. 78 but are determined to be errors include, for example, a solenoid monitoring sensor error when a solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is on or off for a predetermined period of time or more, When there is an unejected game ball inside the winning opening 131 or the small winning opening 151 (see Figure 4), or when there is a prize in the opening when the opening is not open, the opening of the opening will occur. This includes an abnormal discharge error, a vibration sensor error when the vibration sensor is on for a predetermined period of time, and the like. Further, for example, a specific area is provided in the jackpot jackpot prize opening 131, and based on the game ball passing through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control, probability change control is executed after the jackpot game control ends. In some cases, it is determined that it is an error if there is an abnormality in passing to a specific area, or if a game ball passes through a specific area even though there are no unejected game balls inside the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131. It is preferable to configure it so that.

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, it sends a fraud detection related command to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6). The sub CPU 301 that has received the information related to fraud detection executes notification control according to the content of the error.

The control by the main CPU 201 and the sub CPU 301 (both shown in FIG. 6) will be briefly described below, taking as an example a case where a jackpot abnormal prize winning error occurs.

As shown in FIG. 78, for example, if one winning is detected after the initial power is turned on and before the first jackpot jackpot jackpot 131 (see FIG. 4) is opened, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) ) determines that an abnormal winning error has occurred in the jackpot jackpot and outputs a "security" signal for 12 seconds. Further, a fraud detection related command indicating that a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error has occurred is transmitted to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds regardless of the error, so the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so that the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so that the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so that the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds. (Reference) and the island computer (not shown)) can detect the occurrence of an error by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot grasp the details of the error. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, by changing the output time of the "security" signal depending on the content of the error, a device outside the aircraft that receives the "security" signal can grasp the content of the error. Good too.

For example, when the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) receives a fraud detection related command indicating a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error, it executes all or part of the notification control shown below, and receives the fraud detection related command. When, for example, 30 seconds have passed since then, the notification control described below is ended.
- Notification control for displaying, for example, characters such as "Big winning opening abnormal winning error" on the display device 7 (see FIG. 6, for example) via the display control circuit 304.
- Notification control that outputs a voice saying, for example, "Big winning opening abnormal winning error" from a speaker (see FIG. 6, for example) via the audio control circuit 305.
- Notification control that outputs, for example, a beep sound from a speaker via the audio control circuit 305.
- Notification control in which the LED group 46 (see FIG. 6, for example) is all lit up in red, for example, via the LED control circuit 306.

Note that if there is a power outage before, for example, 30 seconds have passed since receiving the fraud detection related command, the sub CPU 301 ends the above-mentioned notification control.

Further, for example, when the sub CPU 301 receives a fraud detection related command indicating an abnormal winning hole error for a jackpot while executing the above-mentioned notification control indicating the occurrence of an abnormal winning hole error for a jackpot, the sub CPU 301 performs the above-mentioned Execute notification control again.

Next, signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine according to the gaming state will be explained with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a table showing an example of signals output according to the gaming state in the first pachinko gaming machine. In FIG. 79, signals that are output are indicated by ◯, and signals that are not output are indicated by ×.

As shown in FIG. 79, in this embodiment, the output signals differ depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201. For example, during the normal gaming state (other than jackpot/small winning, other than variable probability/time saving), no signal is output, and during the low probability time saving gaming state (other than jackpot, other than small winning), "External information 3" is output. ” and “external information 7” are output, and during high-accuracy time-saving gaming states (other than jackpots and small wins), “external information 3,” “external information 5,” and “external information 7” signals are output. During the high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state (other than during a jackpot or a small win), signals of "external information 3" and "external information 6" are output.

In this way, by varying the output signal depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201, it is possible to transmit signals to devices outside the machine that can receive the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (see FIG. 6). (not shown)) can grasp the gaming status at the pachinko gaming machine to which the external information is transmitted.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, the signal output during the small win game control process (during the normal game state) is It is the same as the signal output to the Similarly, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the low probability time saving gaming state) is the same as the signal output during the low probability time saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot, other than the small winning), The signal that is output during the small winning game control process (during the high accuracy time saving game state) is the same as the signal that is output during the high accuracy time saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot, other than during the small winning), The signal output during the control process (during the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state) is the same as the signal output during the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot or small win). That is, a device outside the machine that can receive the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (not shown)) executes the small winning game control process in the pachinko machine to which the external information is transmitted. It is not possible to determine whether the However, instead of this, by making the signal output during the small win game control process different from the signal output when the small win game control process is not in progress, the small win can be achieved at the pachinko machine to which the external information is transmitted. It may be possible to determine whether or not the game control process is being executed by an external device that can receive the signal.

In addition, during the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. (during the time-saving game state) and during the small hit game control process (during the high-accuracy time-saving game state) are signals that are output during the execution of the time-saving control. In this case, time saving control may be in progress when both electric support control and special figure reduction control are being executed, or it may be the case that only electric support control is being executed among electric support control and special figure reduction control. The time saving control may be in progress when the time saving control is executed, or the time saving control may be in progress when only the special figure shortening control among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control is being executed.

[2. Second pachinko game machine]
Next, the second pachinko game machine will be explained. As mentioned above, the second pachinko game machine is a so-called type 1 pachinko game machine called DigiPachi. However, the second pachinko game machine differs from the first pachinko game machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, but only one of them is variably displayed. . Therefore, the game board unit and the electrical configuration are also different from the first pachinko game machine.

In the following, in explaining the second pachinko game machine, for example, the basic structure of the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal board 1184 (see FIG. 81) to the outside of the second pachinko game machine (for example, , signals output to the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 81) and island computers (not shown) provided on each island, which have the same functions, shapes, layout positions, etc. as the first pachinko machine. We will omit the explanation as much as possible.

In explaining the second pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as in the first pachinko game machine will be used for the configurations explained with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the second pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration is similar in function etc. to the first pachinko gaming machine, The description will be made using symbols and step numbers different from those of the gaming machine.

By the way, as a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed. A pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variable machine") in which, for example, the starting condition for a second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition for the first special symbol when the variable display of is suspended; There is a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "sequentially variable machine") in which a starting condition is established in the order of winnings, including a first starting opening and a second starting opening.

In the priority variable machine, the starting conditions for the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that the machine is not in a jackpot game state, and that the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended. The condition for starting the second special symbol is that the first special symbol and the second special symbol This is true when certain requirements are satisfied, such as none of the above being displayed in a variable manner, not in a jackpot game state, and variable display of the second special symbol being suspended.

In addition, in the sequential variable machine, the starting conditions for the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, and , the earliest suspension is the suspension of the variable display of the first special symbol, is established when at least all of the conditions are satisfied, and the starting condition for the second special symbol is that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are This is established when at least all of the following conditions are satisfied: that the variable display is not in progress, that the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, and that the earliest suspension is the suspension of the variable display of the second special symbol.

In the following, the priority variable machine will be explained as an example.

[2-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 80, the game board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko game machine will be described. This game board unit 1010 is also arranged behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) and in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 80 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko game machine. A game area 1105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 1010, in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down.

Note that various members arranged in the gaming area 1105 of the second pachinko gaming machine (for example, the first starting port 1120, etc.) may be common to various members arranged in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. Yes, but I'll explain it again.

As shown in FIG. 80, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail 1110, and approximately the center of the game area 1105. A center accessory 1115 arranged in the section, a first starting opening 1120, a general prize opening 1122, a passage gate unit 1125, a special electric accessory unit 1130, a second starting opening 1140, and a normal electric accessory unit. 1145, an LED unit 1160, an outlet 1178, and a back unit (not shown). Note that the LED unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and the explanation will be omitted for this second pachinko game machine.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the game panel 1100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007. Further, on the front side of the game panel 1100, a guide rail 1110 is provided and game nails (no reference numerals) etc. are planted. The game ball fired from the firing device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 1110 toward the game area 1105, collides with a game nail, etc., and changes its direction of travel while heading downwards in the game area 1105. It flows down.

Further, behind the game panel 1100, a back unit (not shown) provided with decorations to enhance the performance effect is arranged. The game panel 1100 is made of transparent resin so that the decoration provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 1100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Furthermore, the game panel 1100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be provided in a portion to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither reference numerals are provided), similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine. The game area 1105 is divided (defined) by guide rails 1110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 1006 (see FIG. 81 described later) to the upper part of the game area 1105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 1115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 1100, and is provided with an arcuate center rail 1116 above. The game balls launched towards the game area 1105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116.

The game ball fired toward the game area 1105 by the firing device 1006 flows down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107. The game balls flowing down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107 collide with game nails etc. planted in the game panel 1100, and flow downward while changing the direction of travel. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the fired game ball flows down the left side area 1106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIG. 1) is large, the fired game ball flows down the right area 1107.

In addition, the center accessory 1115 has a warp entrance 1117 formed at the outer peripheral edge on the left side into which a game ball flowing down the left side area 1106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 is configured to be guided to a stage 1118 formed on the center accessory 1115. The stage 1118 is formed so that a game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 1007. Note that the stage 1118 may be formed in multiple stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 1119 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 1118 at approximately the center in the left-right direction. It is composed of Therefore, a game ball that entered the chance entrance 1119 has a higher probability of first starting than a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 1117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 1117 but did not enter the chance entrance 1119. It is designed to win (pass) in the opening 1120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 1120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 1007, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 1120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 81, which will be described later). Note that the game ball hit right may be able to win a prize in the first starting opening 1120. Further, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 1120 described above, a first starting hole may be provided in which a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). good.

When the winning (passage) of a game ball to the first starting port 1120 is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 81 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided to the first special symbol hit determination process when the starting condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the first starting port 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the first starting port 1120 is not limited to this.

(General prize winnings)
A plurality of general winning holes 1122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 1007, and are arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). has been done. When a game ball wins in any one of the plurality of general winning holes 1122, it is detected by the general winning hole switch 1123 (see FIG. 81 described later).

When the general winning hole switch 1123 (see FIG. 81 described later) detects that a game ball enters (passes) the general winning hole 1122, for example, four prize balls are paid out. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 1122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of the general winning hole 1122 described above, Alternatively, in addition, a general winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can win.

(passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 1125 is arranged in the right area 1107, and includes a passage gate 1126 that is configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126. 1127 (see FIG. 81 described later), it is arranged in the right side area 1107, and is configured so that a game ball hit to the right almost passes through it. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126 is detected, the starting information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces). The various types of data that have been put on hold are used in the normal symbol hit determination process. Note that even if the passage of the game ball to the passage gate unit 1125 is detected by the passage gate switch 1127, the prize sphere is not paid out. Furthermore, the passage gate unit 1125 may be arranged in the left region 1106 instead of or in addition to the right region 1107.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 1130 integrates a grand prize opening 1131, a count switch 1132 that detects winning (passage) of a game ball to the grand prize opening 1131 (see FIG. 81 described later), and a special electric accessory 1133. It is a unified unit body. The special electric accessory unit 1130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 1125 in the right side area 1107.

The big prize opening 1131 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned grand prize opening 1131, a grand prize opening in which a game ball hit to the left can win may be arranged, or a game ball can be placed above the center accessory 1115. A grand prize opening in which a ball can be won may be arranged.

The big winning hole 1131 is a winning hole that is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass through) when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. It is. When the count switch 1132 (see FIG. 81, which will be described later) detects that a game ball has entered the big prize opening 1131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on winning of game balls into the big winning hole 1131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 1135 that operates the special electric shutter 1134 (see FIG. 81 described later). The special electric accessory 1133, that is, the special electric shutter 1134, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass) the grand prize opening 1131, and an open state in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter (pass) the grand prize opening 1131. or a difficult closed state, and is configured to be able to transition to a state. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the jackpot game state is a game in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by playing a round game over multiple rounds in which the jackpot 1131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time. state.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 1140 is arranged in the left side region 1106 (more specifically, below the left side of the first starting port 1120). However, the second starting port 1140 is designed such that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to win a prize, and a game ball hit to the right can win a prize. It is configured to be guided to the vicinity of. However, it is not essential that the second starting port 1140 has such a configuration, and it may be provided in the right side area 1107 so that, for example, a game ball hit to the right can win a prize. Further, the second starting port 1140 may be configured so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141 (see FIG. 81, which will be described later). When the winning (passage) of a game ball to the second starting port 1140 is detected by the second starting port switch 1141 (see FIG. 81 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided to the second special symbol hit determination process when the starting condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the second starting port 1140 is not limited to this.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 1145 is arranged in the left side area 1106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first starting port 1120), and when a game ball wins (passes), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. It is a unit body that integrates a winning hole, a switch that detects winning of a game ball into the winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 1146. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 1140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 1141.

The ordinary electric accessory 1146 includes a general electric movable member 1147 called a so-called electric chew, and a general electric solenoid 1148 (see FIG. 81 described later) that operates the ordinary electric movable member 1147. The normal electric accessory 1146, that is, the movable member 1147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting port 1140, and an open state in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 1140. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state that is possible or difficult. Note that instead of the general electric movable member 1147 called a so-called electric chew, a shutter that can move forward and backward, for example, may be employed.

(Out port)
The out port 1178 is used to enter any of the various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 1120, the second starting port 1140, the large winning port 1131, the general winning port 1122, etc.) that are fired toward the gaming area 1105. This is to eject missing game balls from the machine. This out port 1178 is provided at the most downstream side of the gaming area 1105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 1178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between the plurality of general winning holes 1122, and the game ball flowing down the game area 1105 is discharged to the outside of the machine. You can also do this.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 1010 similarly to the first pachinko game machine, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1100. This back unit includes a group of production accessories 1058 such as movable accessories that are arranged around the display area of the display device 1007 and controlled by the sub-control circuit 1300. At least one or more of the performance accessory groups 1058 or the performance accessory constituent members that constitute the accessory function as performance accessories that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[2-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine will be explained. FIG. 81 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine. Although some of the control circuits of the second pachinko game machine are common to the control circuits of the first pachinko game machine, they will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 81, the second pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly has a main control circuit 1200 that controls the game, and a main control circuit 1200 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 1300, a payout/emission control circuit 1400, and a power supply circuit 1450.

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 includes a main CPU 1201, a main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 1203 (read/write memory), an initial reset circuit 1204, a backup capacitor 1207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

A main ROM 1202, a main RAM 1203, an initial reset circuit 1204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 1201. The main CPU 1201 has a built-in WDT for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 1202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the second pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 1201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 1202.

The main RAM 1203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and this main RAM 1203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201. . Note that in this embodiment, a RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 1201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 1207 has a function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 1203 from being lost in the event of a power outage or the like.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 1200 includes an I/O port 1205 that is connected to enable communication with various devices, and a command output port 1206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 1300 so as to output various commands. Also equipped.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200. For example, the main control circuit 1200 includes a normal symbol display section 1161, a normal symbol reserve display section 1162, a first special symbol display section 1163, a second special symbol display section 1164, a first special symbol reserve display section 1165, and a first special symbol display section 1165. 2 special symbol reservation display section 1166, general electric solenoid 1148, special electric solenoid 1135, etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 1200 is also connected to a performance display monitor 1170, an error notification monitor 1172, and the like. Main control circuit 1200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 1205.

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data, set values, etc. under the control of the main CPU 1201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state with respect to the firing of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 game balls), and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 1172. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 1172 also displays, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting change process is in progress, and a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress. You can also display a code while checking settings. As the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Also connected to the main control circuit 1200 are a first starting port switch 1121, a second starting port switch 1141, a passage gate switch 1127, a count switch 1132, and a general winning port switch 1123. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to main control circuit 1200 via I/O port 1205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 1200 includes a calling device (not shown) that has a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and is used when transmitting data to a hall computer 1186 that manages pachinko machines in the entire hall. The external terminal board 1184, if the pachinko game machine has a setting function, the setting key 1174 that is operated when changing or confirming the setting values, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 1203 can be accessed by the game hall administrator. A backup clear switch 1176, etc., which can be cleared according to an operation, is connected. In addition, if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 1176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided. Good too.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 be housed in a predetermined case so that they cannot be easily touched by a third party (for example, a player) other than the administrator of the gaming hall. ``Inside a specified case'' includes not only those configured such that the setting key 1174 and backup clear switch 1176 cannot be accessed without opening the case, but also those that have a configuration that makes it impossible to access the setting key 1174 and backup clear switch 1176 in the case. When a pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key controlled by the game hall manager to expose the back side, the game hall manager can use the setting key 1174 or/and the backup key. It also includes one configured to be able to contact the clear switch 1176.

Note that in this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but are not limited to this; It may be configured like this. In this case as well, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the game parlor from easily accessing the setting key 1174 or the backup clear switch 1176.

[2-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 1300 includes a sub CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work RAM 1303, a display control circuit 1304, an audio control circuit 1305, an LED control circuit 1306, an accessory control circuit 1307, a command input port 1308, and the like. The sub control circuit 1300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in accordance with commands from the main control circuit 1200. Although not shown in FIG. 81, similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub-control circuit 1300 is also connected to the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 1302 stores programs for controlling the game performance of the second pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 1301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 1301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 1302. In particular, the sub CPU 1301 performs control related to game performance according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

The work RAM 1303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 1301.

The display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for controlling the display in the display device 1007. The display control circuit 1304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A that converts image data into an image signal. Equipped with converter etc.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub CPU 1301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data indicating decorative patterns, background image data, performance image data, and the like.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. In this way, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 1032. The audio control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) that amplifies audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 1032. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 1301. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP is for amplifying signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 1032.

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory objects in the performance accessory group 1058). The accessory control circuit 1307 includes a drive circuit for supplying drive signals to each accessory, a lighting circuit for supplying lighting control signals, and an accessory data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. Equipped with etc.

Furthermore, the accessory control circuit 1307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory operation command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the mechanical motion of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 1308 is connected to command output port 1206 and receives various commands sent from main control circuit 1200.

The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko game machine, and the payout/launch control circuit 1400 includes a payout device 1082 for paying out game balls, and a game ball. A firing device 1006 for firing balls, a card unit 1180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

When the payout/launch control circuit 1400 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 1200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082 and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 1182 is connected to the card unit 1180. The ball rental operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball rental button for renting balls and a rental return button (both not shown) for returning the ball rental card in which cache data is stored. For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180. The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180. Note that although the operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

Further, based on the fact that the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, the dispensing/firing control circuit 1400 controls the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). (not shown) to control the firing of game balls.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit created in order to supply the power supply voltage necessary for gaming to the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.

A power switch 1095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 1450. The power switch 1095 is turned on to supply the necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200, the sub-control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the second pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85. Note that the second pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

The second pachinko gaming machine has a normal gaming state in which neither probability variable control nor time saving control is executed, a high precision time saving gaming state in which both probability variable control and time saving control are executed, and a high probability playing state in which probability variable control is not executed but time saving control is executed. Low-probability time-saving game states to be executed are prepared, and the main CPU 1201 is able to proceed with the game in any one of these game states.

In this embodiment, left-handed playing is the normal game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed playing is the normal game mode in the high-accuracy time-saving game state and the low-accuracy time-saving game state. The sub CPU 1301 executes control to display, for example, a playing style that is considered to be a normal game mode in the display area of the display device 1007.

[2-3-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 82 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the special symbol hit determination process, that is, a "time-saving hit" based on the random numerical value for jackpot determination obtained when a game ball enters the starting opening 1120, 1140. , is a table that is referred to when determining a "jackpot" or "loss" by lottery. In this embodiment, the lottery targets are "time saving win", "big hit", and "loss", and other lottery targets (for example, small win) are not included, but the first starting port 1120 or/and When a game ball enters the second starting hole 1140, it may be determined as another lottery target.

The random number value for jackpot determination is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process, as described above. In this embodiment, the random number value for jackpot determination is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201 determines "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "loss" based on the extracted random number for jackpot determination. In the special symbol hit determination table, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the range of random numerical values for jackpot determination determined as a "time-saving hit" for each probability change flag value (0 or 1) is shown. (width) and the corresponding time-saving hit judgment value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot judgment determined as a “jackpot” and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and “ The relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as "loss" and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this embodiment, for example, when the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is "time saving" and determines the judgment value data to be "time saving judgment value data". Furthermore, when the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot". It is determined that the determination value data is "jackpot determination value data." Furthermore, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that the It is determined that the determination value data is "loss determination value data."

Further, for example, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 409, the main CPU 1201 The judgment value data is determined to be the "time saving judgment value data". In addition, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 410 to 1259, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot". It is determined that the determination value data is "jackpot determination value data." Furthermore, if the variable probability flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that the It is determined that the determination value data is "loss determination value data."

[2-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 83 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selection symbol command" that determines a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol obtained when a game ball enters the starting hole 1120, 1140 and the aforementioned determination value data. This is a table that is referred to when selecting a "symbol designation command". The "select symbol command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot. This is a command to specify the pattern to be displayed when the variable display stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 83, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201, for example, sends the selection symbol command and symbol designation command as follows. Select as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 1201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 70 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 0 to 9, the main CPU 1201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 10 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 1201 sends the selection symbol command as Select "z6" and select "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and "zA8" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z10" as the selection symbol command and "zA8" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the second special symbol, regardless of whether the symbol random number value for the second special symbol is between 0 and 99, the main CPU 1201 issues a selection symbol command as a selection symbol command. Select "z11" and select "zA9" as the symbol designation command.

Although the description is omitted for the second pachinko game machine, similar to the first pachinko game machine, a special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12) is stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200. . The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol that is derived to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164 (see FIG. 81) when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. This is a table that is referred to when making decisions according to symbol commands. In addition, similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 display a time-saving win display mode, a jackpot display mode, or a loss display mode based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. derived.

[2-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 84 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. The hit type determination table determines the aspect of the jackpot gaming state (more specifically, the number of rounds, for example) and/or the aspect of the subsequent gaming state, according to the selection symbol command determined in accordance with the symbol random value of the special symbol. Referenced when making decisions. The mode of the gaming state after that indicates the mode of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the C-time-saving gaming state is controlled without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, so the subsequent gaming state will be the C-time-saving gaming state. Indicates the mode.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the aspect of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time saving flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag, and decides to set the number of time saving times to 10 times. When the selected symbol command is "z1" and "z7", the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time saving flag to ON, and sets the number of time saving times to 50. Determine. When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8", the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time saving flag to ON, and sets the number of time saving times to 100. Determine. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned time-saving hit display mode to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164, and then Without controlling to the jackpot game state, the time saving flag is set on and the determined number of time saving times is set, thereby making it possible to control to the C time saving gaming state. Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the jackpot gaming state is not controlled, so the mode of the jackpot gaming state is not determined.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the number of time-saving times to be set is determined according to the selection symbol command determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. are different. By doing this, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", it is possible to have variations in the subsequent progress of the game, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. It becomes possible.

By the way, as described above, when the probability change flag is on, the main CPU 1201 does not control to the time-saving gaming state even if the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". For example, even if the probability change flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 1201 performs a "time-saving win" lottery as shown in FIG. 82, and the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving win". In some cases, although the time-saving winning display mode indicating that the "time-saving winning" has been won is derived to the special symbol display sections 1163 and 1164, the high-precision gaming state is continued without being controlled to the C-time-saving gaming state. You can do it like this. In addition, the main CPU 1201 performs a "time-saving win" lottery even if the probability change flag is on, and if the result of the win determination process is "time-saving win", the main CPU 1201 forcibly changes the display mode of the loss to a special symbol. The information may be displayed on the display sections 1163 and 1164. Furthermore, when the probability variable flag is on, the time-saving hit judgment value data may not be assigned to the random value for jackpot judgment, that is, the winning judgment process may be performed in which the "time-saving win" is not included in the lottery result. .

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the form of the winning game state and the form of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" or "z9", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds as 10 rounds as the jackpot gaming state, and sets the probability variable flag and time saving as the subsequent gaming state. It is decided to set both the flag and the flag on, and it is decided to set the number of probability variations to 10,000. In this case, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the special symbol display sections 1163, 1164, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, it becomes possible to control the high accuracy time-saving gaming state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to ON, and it is decided to set both the probability variation number and the time saving number to 10,000. In these cases, the main CPU 1201 can control the jackpot game state after deriving the above-described jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 1163, and after the jackpot game state ends, control the jackpot game state to a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state. becomes.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state. Moreover, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set only the time saving flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON. Also, it is decided to set the number of time saving times to, for example, 200 times. In this case, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 1163, then controls the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control to the time-saving game state. The time-saving gaming state controlled here is the A-time-saving gaming state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state. Moreover, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set only the time saving flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON. Also, it is decided to set the number of time saving times to, for example, 300 times. In this case, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display section 1164, and then controls the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control to the time-saving game state. The time-saving gaming state controlled here is also the A-time-saving gaming state.

Although it is preferable that the time-saving performance in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state be the same as the time-saving performance in the A-time-saving gaming state, it may be different from the time-saving performance in the A time-saving gaming state.

Furthermore, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), the main CPU 1201 determines the state of the jackpot game state and None of the subsequent gaming state aspects are set. That is, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 1201 continues to control the previous gaming state without changing the gaming state.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" or "z11"), the state of the jackpot game state and the subsequent Since none of the game state aspects are set, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. 84. However, in this embodiment, in order to clearly indicate that neither the jackpot gaming state nor the subsequent gaming state will be determined if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "loss", the figure is shown for convenience. 84.

As described above, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table in FIG. The winning/losing judgment value data is determined based on the random number value (the winning/losing judgment is performed), and the winning/losing (“time saving win”, “big hit” or “loss”) is determined. Thereafter, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. The selection symbol command is determined based on the value data, and the type of display mode (time saving type or jackpot type) to be derived to the special symbol display sections 1163, 1164 is determined. Note that the above-mentioned winning/losing determination and determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, but it is excluded that it is performed from the time the variable display of the special symbol begins until the final display. That's not the purpose.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 84, in this embodiment, the number of time saving times in the A time saving gaming state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5"), or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z10"). On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the number of time saving times in the C time saving game state that is controlled is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times. times (when the selected symbol commands are "z1" and "z7"), or 100 times (when the selected symbol commands are "z2" and "z8"). That is, the expected value of the number of time savings in the A time saving gaming state is higher than the expected value of the number of time saving times in the C time saving gaming state. In this way, by making the time-saving gaming state A more advantageous to the player than the time-saving gaming state C, the position of a "jackpot" can be increased. For example, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest that may occur due to winning a "big hit" but being at a disadvantage compared to not winning the "jackpot" (winning the "time saving"). becomes.

In addition, instead of setting the expected value of the number of working hours in the A time saving game state to be higher than the expected value of the number of working hours in the C working time saving game state, the expected value of the number of working hours in the C working time saving gaming state is set as the expected value of the number of working hours in the A working time saving gaming state. The value may be set higher than the expected value. In this way, by making the time-saving game state C more advantageous for the player than the time-saving game state A, it is possible to increase the positioning of the "time-saving win". For example, even if the state continues for a long period of time without winning a "jackpot", if a "time-saving win" is won, the game is controlled to the relatively advantageous C-time-saving gaming state, thereby suppressing a decline in interest. It becomes possible to do so.

[2-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 85 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the second pachinko gaming machine. Note that the "Remarks" column in FIG. 85 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand. The main CPU 1201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting hole 1120, and determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting hole 1140. Determine the fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 85, the variation pattern of the special symbol is based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol's hit determination process (win or loss), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the random number value for reach determination, or / And, although it is determined based on a random value for performance selection, etc., it is not limited to this, and it may be determined based on other values, etc. instead of or in addition to any of the above.

Note that the random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of changes per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The determined variation pattern information is transmitted from the main CPU 1201 to the command input port 1308 of the sub CPU 1301 via the command output port 1206. The sub CPU 1301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 1032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201.

In addition, the time-saving hits A and B shown in the "Remarks" column in Figure 85 are reaches that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a jackpot). It's a performance. Similarly, jackpot-related reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that there is a possibility of a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, common reach A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be either a short-time hit or a jackpot.

In addition, although the description is omitted in the second pachinko gaming machine, similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 includes a normal symbol hit determination table (see Figure 012-3), a normal symbol A determination table (see FIG. 18), a normal symbol type determination table (see FIG. 19), and a normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 20) are stored. Then, the main CPU 1201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 1146 (see FIG. 81) in the same manner as the first pachinko game machine, and controls the operating mode of the ordinary electric accessory 1146 based on this.

[2-4. Main control processing]
In the second pachinko gaming machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 include the special symbol control process executed in S39 of the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control process will be explained, and the explanation of other processes executed by the main CPU 1201 will be omitted. Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (FIGS. 53 and 94), etc.) ), below, the same processes as those performed in the first pachinko game machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol control process performed in the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24) in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 86, the main CPU 1201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S1001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). After executing the process in S1001, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1002.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 1201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 1203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S1001.

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process of checking the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held when executing the special symbol control process. Then, the main CPU 1201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process when both the number of reservations of the first special symbol and the number of reservations of the second special symbol are "0" for a certain period of time or more. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 1300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub CPU 1301 performs a demonstration display effect. In addition, since the second pachinko gaming machine is not a pachinko gaming machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the concept of the main special symbol as explained in the first pachinko gaming machine There is no.

In S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S1001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S1002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S1002), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (YES in S1002), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1003.

In S1003, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is a variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S1003 that the second special symbol is not a variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not held (NO determination in S1003), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S1004 that the first special symbol has not started variable display, that is, the start information of the first special symbol has not been withheld (NO determination in S1004), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process. , the process returns to the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1004 that the first special symbol is a variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is pending (YES in S1004), the main CPU 1201 executes the process in S1005. Move to.

Returning to S1003, if it is determined that the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is pending (YES determination in S1003), the main CPU 1201 performs the processing as follows. The process moves to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87. After executing the process of S1003, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S1001 to S1005) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is withheld as the second pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S1005) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variable machine has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the starting information of the first special symbol is pending, it may be a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S1005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first starting port 1120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variation machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winnings to the second starting opening 1140.

[2-4-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 86) will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, the processing target of the special symbol management process is the second special symbol when S1003 of the special symbol control process is a YES determination, and the first special symbol is the processing target when S1004 of the special symbol control process is a YES determination. It is subject to processing.

Further, the numerical values ("0" to "5") written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 87 are the control state numbers of the special symbols. The main CPU 1201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S1011).

If it is determined in S1011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S1011), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 86). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S1011), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1012.

In S1012, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process in S1012, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1013. Note that the main CPU 1201 performs the processing from S1013 onwards based on the control state number read out in the processing of S1012.

In S1013, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S1013 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 88. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1014.

In S1014, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S1014 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 89. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1015.

In S1015, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S1015 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 90. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1016.

In S1016, the main CPU 1201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This process of S1016 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1017.

In S1017, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S1017 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1018.

In S1018, the main CPU 1201 performs jackpot end processing. This process of S1018 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot termination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94.

After completing the processing of S1013 to S1018, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management processing and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 86).

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87) will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 88, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S1021).

If it is determined in S1021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S1021), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 87).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S1021), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1022.

In S1022, the main CPU 1201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. After executing the process in S1022, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1023.

In S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 82) is referred to, and the special symbol hit determination is performed using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value. In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is a jackpot or a loss. In addition, in the special symbol hit determination process, first, a determination process is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot in this process, it is determined that it is a loss. After executing the process in S1023, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1024.

In S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result (for example, jackpot or loss) of the special symbol hit determination process (S1023). In this process, the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 83) and using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. After executing the process in S1024, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1025.

In S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit (time-saving hit, jackpot). In this process, the winning type is determined in accordance with the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determining process (S1024) with reference to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 84). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of winnings, but there may be only one type of jackpot, and there may be one type of time-saving winning. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of wins, a plurality of types of losses may be provided. In addition, in this embodiment, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small hit, but the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include a small hit, and multiple types of such small hits may be provided. good. After executing the process in S1025, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1026.

In S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 85) is referred to, and for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1023), the random value for reach determination and/or the random value for effect selection, etc. Accordingly, a special symbol variation pattern is determined. Note that the variation pattern table referred to when performing the special symbol variation pattern determination process may be different depending on the gaming state or the like. After executing the process in S1026, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1027.

In S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 85), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S1026) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process in S1027, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1028.

In S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process is completed, the special symbol variable display end process (FIG. 87) (see S1014) will be performed. After executing the process in S1028, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1029.

In S1029, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 (for example, probability change remaining number of times, time saving number of times remaining, etc.) are updated. After executing the process in S1029, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1030.

In S1030, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S1030, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1031.

In S1031, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol presentation start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, game state management processing (S1030), special symbol production start command transmission reservation processing (S1031)) within the interrupt-prohibited section. It is preferable to do so.

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87) will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1041).

If it is determined in S1041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S1041), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 87).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S1041), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1042.

In S1042, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S1015 in FIG. 87 ) will be carried out. After executing the process in S1042, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1043.

In S1043, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S1043, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1044.

In S1044, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. As mentioned above in the description of the first pachinko game machine, the symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). The number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of games may be managed. After executing the process of S1044, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87).

[2-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87) will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1051).

If it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO in S1051), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 87). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S1051), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1052.

In S1052, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S1052, if it is determined that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S1052), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1053.

In S1053, the main CPU 1201 performs a start setting process for the jackpot game control process. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 80) via the external terminal board 1184 is generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process in S1053, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1054.

In S1054, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to set round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening 1131 (S1055), sets the jackpot signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S1056), and sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". (S1057), a gaming state designation parameter setting process (S1058), and a transmission reservation process for a jackpot start display command (S1059). In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1057) and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see FIG. 87) is performed. (see S1016) will be performed. After that, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87).

Returning to S1052, if it is determined in S1052 that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (if NO in S1052), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1060.

In S1060, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91. In addition, when the main CPU 1201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S1051 to S1060) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1060 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 90) will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game ending processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first performs time saving management processing (S1061). The details of this time-saving management process are the same as the process described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42 in the first pachinko game machine, so the explanation will be omitted. After executing the process in S1061, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1062.

In S1062, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. After executing the process in S1062, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1063.

In S1063, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S1064). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1063, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87) as described above.

[2-4-7. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the grand prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1016 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87) will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1071).

If it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO in S1071), the main CPU 1201 ends the big prize opening preparation process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 87).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (YES in S1071), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1072.

In S1072, the main CPU 1201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area within the main RAM 1203. After executing the process in S1072, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1073.

In S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the number of openings of the grand prize opening is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S1073 that the number of openings of the big prize opening is the upper limit value (YES in S1073), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1074. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1073 that the number of openings of the big prize opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S1073), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1077.

In S1074, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S1074) and switching the control state number, the jackpot end process (see FIG. 87) is performed after the big winning opening preparation process is completed. (see S1018) will be performed. After executing the process in S1074, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1075.

In S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command (S1076). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1076, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87).

In S1077, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process in S1077, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1078.

In S1078, the main CPU 1201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the grand prize opening 1131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 1131, the maximum number of prizes to be won in the grand prize opening 1131, the number of prize balls when winning in the grand prize opening 1131, etc. are set. . The number of openings of the big prize opening 1131 corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that this does not mean to exclude cases where the big prize opening is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the grand prize opening as separate processes. After executing the process in S1078, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1079.

In S1079, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big prize opening 1131 is performed. After executing the process in S1079, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1080.

In S1080, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S1080) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (See S1017 in FIG. 87) will be performed. After executing the process in S1080, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1081.

In S1081, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S1081, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1082.

In S1082, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1082, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87).

[2-4-8. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1091).

If it is determined in S1091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO in S1091), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 87).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S1091), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1092.

In S1092, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the number of game balls that have won in the big winning hole 1131 is equal to or greater than the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the count switch 1132 (see FIG. 80) that counts the number of winning game balls into the big winning opening 1131 is greater than or equal to the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the big winning opening winning counter counted by the count switch 1132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203.

In S1092, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 1131 is not equal to or greater than the maximum number of prizes (NO determination in S1092), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1093.

On the other hand, in S1092, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 1131 is greater than or equal to the maximum number of winnings (YES in S1092), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1094.

In S1093, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 1131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S1078 in FIG. 92) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S1093 that the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 1131 has not elapsed (NO in S1093), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning hole opening control process and replaces the process with the special symbol management process. (See Figure 87).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1093 that the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 1131 has elapsed (YES in S1093), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1094.

In S1094, the main CPU 1201 performs closing setting processing for the big prize opening 1131. After executing the process in S1094, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1095.

In S1095, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1095) and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, preparations for opening the big winning hole are made again. Processing (see S1016 in FIG. 87) will be performed. After executing the process in S1095, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1096.

In S1096, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S1096, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1097.

In S1097, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1097, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87).

[2-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1018 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1101).

If it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO in S1101), the main CPU 1201 terminates the jackpot termination process and also terminates the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87). , the process returns to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 86).

When it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (YES in S1101), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1102.

In S1102, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (e.g. probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) are set, and values of various counters (e.g. probability change counter, time saving counter, symbol confirmed number counter, round counter, big winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Or a reset process is performed. After executing the process in S1102, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1103.

In S1103, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 91 is performed. After executing the process of S1103, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end process, also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87), and returns to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 86). In this case, as described above, the jackpot end process returns to the called process.

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[3. Third pachinko machine]
Next, a third pachinko game machine will be explained. As mentioned above, the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine, and has the first route and the second route as the route until it is controlled to the jackpot game state. There is. The first route is a case where a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" is derived. In the second route, the V attacker releases the V attacker by deriving the stop display mode that indicates that the result of the special symbol determination is "accessory object release hit", and the game ball that enters the released V attacker This is a case where a prize is won in the V winning hole in the attacker.

Note that the third pachinko game machine is a sequentially variable machine that does not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, but variably displays the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the winning order. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned priority variable machine may be used.

Hereinafter, in explaining the third pachinko game machine, for example, the basic structure of the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal board 2184 (see FIG. 96) to the outside of the third pachinko game machine (for example, , signals output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 96) and the island computers (not shown) provided on each island, which have the same functions, shapes, layout positions, etc. as the first pachinko gaming machine. We will omit the explanation as much as possible.

In explaining the third pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as in the first pachinko game machine will be used for the configurations explained with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration is similar in function etc. to the first pachinko gaming machine, The description will be made using symbols and step numbers different from those of the gaming machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 95, the game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko game machine will be described. Similar to the first pachinko game machine, this game board unit 2010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2).

FIG. 95 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko game machine. A game area 2105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 2010, in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down.

Note that various members arranged in the gaming area 2105 of the third pachinko gaming machine (for example, the first starting port 2120, etc.) may be common to various members arranged in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. Yes, but I'll explain it again.

As shown in FIG. 95, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 in which a game area 2105 in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail 2110, and approximately the center of the game area 2105. A center accessory 2115 arranged in the section, a first starting port 2120, a second starting port 2140, a general prize opening 2122, a passage gate unit 2125, a special electric accessory unit 2130, and a normal electric accessory unit. 2145, an LED unit 2149, a V winning device 2150, an outlet 2178, and a back unit (not shown). Note that the LED unit 2149 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and a description thereof will be omitted for this third pachinko game machine.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the game panel 2100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007. Further, on the front side of the game panel 2100, a guide rail 2110 is provided and game nails (no reference numerals) etc. are planted. The game ball fired from the launch device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 2110 toward the game area 2105, collides with a game nail, etc., and changes the direction of travel while heading downwards in the game area 2105. It flows down.

Further, behind the game panel 2100, a back unit (not shown) provided with decorations to enhance the performance effect is arranged. The game panel 2100 is made of transparent resin so that the decoration provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 2100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front may be made of a transparent member. Further, the game panel 2100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent part, and a transparent member may be provided in a part to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither reference numerals are provided), similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine. The game area 2105 is divided (defined) by guide rails 2110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 2006 (see FIG. 96 described later) to the upper part of the game area 2105.

(center role)
The center accessory 2115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 2100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 2116 above. The game balls launched towards the game area 2105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116.

The game ball fired toward the game area 2105 by the firing device 2006 flows down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107. The game balls flowing down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107 flow downward while changing the direction of travel due to collisions with game nails etc. planted in the game panel 2100. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the fired game ball flows down the left side area 2106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 is large, the fired game ball flows down the right side area 2107.

In addition, the center accessory 2115 has a warp entrance 2117 formed at the outer peripheral edge on the left side into which a game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 is configured to be guided to a stage 2118 formed on the center accessory 2115. The stage 2118 is formed so that a game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 2007. Note that the stage 2118 may be formed in multiple stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 2119 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 2118 at approximately the center in the left-right direction. It is composed of Therefore, a game ball that entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability of first starting than a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 2117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 2117 but did not enter the chance entrance 2119. It is designed to win (pass) the entrance 2120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 2120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 2007, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 96, which will be described later). Note that the game ball hit to the right may be able to win a prize in the first starting opening 2120. Further, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 2120, a first starting hole may be provided in which a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). good.

When winning (passage) of a game ball to the first starting port 2120 is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 96 described later), starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided to the first special symbol hit determination process when the starting condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the first starting port 2120 is not limited to three.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 2140 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball hit to the left may be able to win a prize in the second starting slot 2140.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 2140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 2141. When the winning (passage) of a game ball to the second starting port 2140 is detected by the second starting port switch 2141 (see FIG. 96 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided for the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the second starting port 2140 is not limited to this.

(General prize winnings)
A plurality of general winning holes 2122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 2007, and are arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). has been done. When a game ball wins in any one of the plurality of general winning holes 2122, it is detected by the general winning hole switch 2123 (see FIG. 96 described later).

When the general winning hole switch 2123 (see FIG. 96 described later) detects winning (passing) of game balls to the general winning hole 2122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game ball to the general winning hole 2122 is paid out. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 2122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of the general winning hole 2122 described above, Alternatively, in addition, a general winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can win.

(passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 2125 is disposed in the right side area 2107, and includes a passage gate 2126 configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126. 2127 (see FIG. 96 described later), it is arranged in the right side area 2107, and is configured so that a game ball hit to the right almost passes through it. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126 is detected, the starting information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces). The various types of data that have been put on hold are used for normal symbol hit determination processing. Note that even if passage of the game ball to the passage gate unit 2125 is detected by the passage gate switch 2127, the prize sphere is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 2125 may be arranged in the left region 2106 instead of or in addition to the right region 2107.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 includes a big winning hole 2131, a big winning hole count switch 2132 that detects winning (passage) of a game ball to the big winning hole 2131 (see FIG. 96 described later), and a special electric accessory 2133. It is a unit body that integrates the The special electric accessory unit 2130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 2125 in the right area 2107.

The big prize opening 2131 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned grand prize opening 2131, a grand prize opening in which a game ball hit to the left can win may be arranged, or a game ball can be placed above the center accessory 2115. A grand prize opening in which a ball can be won may be arranged.

The big winning hole 2131 is a winning hole that is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass through) when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. It is. When the winning of game balls into the big winning hole 2131 is detected by the big winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 96 described later), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the grand prize opening 2131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 2135 that operates the special electric shutter 2134 (see FIG. 96 described later). The special electric accessory 2133, that is, the special electric shutter 2134, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the grand prize opening 2131, and an open state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the grand prize opening 2131. and a closed state. The big prize opening 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the jackpot game state is reached through the above-described first route. When the jackpot game state is reached through the above-described first route, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, in the jackpot game state through the first route, a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls by playing a round game over multiple rounds in which the big prize opening 2131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time. This is the gaming state that made it possible.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 2145 includes a prize opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters (passes through) a prize, a switch that detects winning of a game ball to this prize opening, and a normal electric accessory unit 2145. It is a unit body that is integrated with the accessory 2146, and is arranged in the right area 2107. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 2140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 2141.

The normal electric accessory 2146 includes a normal electricity shutter 2147 that can move forward and backward, and a general electricity solenoid 2148 (see FIG. 96 described below) that operates the normal electricity shutter 2147. The normal electric accessory 2146, that is, the shutter 2147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting port 2140, and an open state in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 2140. or a difficult closed state, and is configured to be able to transition to a state. Note that instead of the general power shutter 2147 that can be moved back and forth in the front and rear directions, a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be employed.

(V prize winning device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided downstream of the passage gate 2126 in the right area 2107. The V winning device 2150 includes an opening/closing winning opening 2151 that is opened to allow a game ball to enter the inside of the V winning device 2150, a V attacker 2152 that can open and closing the opening/closing winning opening 2151, and this V attacker 2152. A V attacker solenoid 2154 that is activated to open and close the opening and closing prize opening 2151, and a V that detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing prize opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152. The attacker count switch 2153, the V winning hole 2155 through which the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 from the open/close winning hole 2151 can pass, and the V winning hole 2155 through which the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 from the open/close winning hole 2151 can pass through. A V winning port switch 2156 detects that a game ball has entered (passed through) the winning port 2155, and a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening/closing winning port 2151 does not enter the V winning port 2155. A loss opening 2157 into which game balls can enter (pass through), a V shutter 2158 that opens and closes the V winning opening 2155, a V shutter solenoid 2159 that operates this V shutter 2158 to open and close the V winning opening 2155, and a V winning opening. A locking member 2160 that can hold only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the device 2150 is provided. Note that the V winning device 2150 may be provided upstream of the passage gate 2126, or may be provided in the left region 2106.

The V attacker 2152 is made of an arcuate member and is always in a closed state that closes the opening/closing prize opening 2151. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and a stop display mode indicating that the "accessory object is released" which will be described later is derived, almost at the same time as the variable display of the special symbol ends, the V attacker solenoid 2154 ( (See FIG. 96, which will be described later), the V attacker 2152 is activated, for example, once. When the V attacker 2152 is activated once, the opening/closing prize opening 2151 becomes open for 1800 msec, for example. While the opening/closing prize opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 is, for example, 10 per opening.

Note that the manner in which the V attacker 2152 is opened when the stop display manner indicating that the "accessory object has been opened" is derived is not limited to the above, and for example, the release may be performed twice for 900 msec, It may be closed based on the fact that a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls have entered the inside of the V winning prize device 2150.

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of a game ball into the inside of the V prize winning device 2150. When the entry of game balls into the V winning device 2150 is detected by the V attacker count switch 2153, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and the main CPU 2201 functions. The value of the V attacker winning prize counter is added. When the V-attacker winning counter reaches the specified value, the V-attacker 2152 is activated by the V-attacker solenoid 2154 to open and close the winning slot even if the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec) in which the opening/closing winning slot 2151 can be opened has not elapsed. Port 2151 is closed.

The opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued on the condition that the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 2155. That is, the V winning hole 2155 is a winning hole that becomes an opportunity to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state through the second route described above.

The V winning hole switch 2156 is for detecting passage of a game ball to the V winning hole 2155. The main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 96) continues the opening control of the V attacker 2152 when detecting passage of a game ball to the V winning hole 2155 within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the V attacker 2152 is opened. That is, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state via the second route. When the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, a round game in which the V attacker 2152 shifts from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled through the first route, a round game is executed in which the big winning opening 2131 is moved from the closed state to the open state, whereas the second route When the jackpot game state is controlled through the route, a round game is executed in which the V attacker 2152 is moved from the closed state to the open state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, the V attacker 2152 is moved from the closed state to the open state in the first round, but from the middle of the round game, for example, when the jackpot game state is controlled, A round game in which 2131 is moved from a closed state to an open state may be executed.

In addition, for example, by providing a V winning hole inside the special electric accessory 2133 (that is, an area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is opened), the V winning hole and the jackpot game can be created. The number of attackers released in each state may be one at a time. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating that the "accessory object has been opened" is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and the game ball is inserted into the V winning opening 2155 provided inside the special electric accessory 2133. When enters, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state (jackpot gaming state via the second route).

The losing hole 2157 is configured so that game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but have not passed through the V winning hole 2155 enter (pass through). The game balls that have passed through the loss port 2157 are discharged to the outside of the machine. In addition, if all of the game balls that entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the loss port 2157 and no game balls pass through the V winning port 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is not continued and ends. do.

The V shutter 2158 has a closed mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 2155 and a game ball entering the V winning hole 2155 due to the operation of the V shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 96 described later). A constant movement is always performed between the open mode and the open mode where the ball can pass through (or easily). In this embodiment, for example, the V-shutter 2158 always performs a constant operation in a 7000 msec cycle (period) in which the operation of "6000 msec closed ⇒ 1000 msec open ⇒ 6000 msec closed" is repeated.

The locking member 2160 is provided above the V winning a prize opening 2155, and is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning a prize device 2150. Game balls that enter the V winning device 2150 but are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged from the losing port 2157 to the outside of the machine. Even if a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all the game balls that are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged from the losing port 2157 to the outside of the machine.

In addition, the locking member 2160 releases the locking of the game ball by the operation of a locking solenoid (not shown) after a certain period of time (for example, 3000 msec) has elapsed since the V-attacker 2152 was activated. The game ball released from the locking member 2160 falls toward the V winning hole 2155, and if the V winning hole 2155 is opened at this timing, it will win (pass) the V winning hole 2155, and this If the V winning opening 2155 is closed at the timing, it will pass through the losing opening 2157. Note that without providing the locking member 2160, the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning opening 2155 or the losing opening 2157.

(Out port)
The out port 2178 is for various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 2120, the second starting port 2140, the large winning port 2131, the V winning device 2150, the general winning port 2122, etc.) of the objects fired toward the gaming area 2105. This is for ejecting game balls that have not won or entered any prizes out of the machine. This out port 2178 is provided at the most downstream side of the gaming area 2105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 2178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between the plurality of general winning openings 2122 or between the special electric accessory unit 2130 and the second starting opening 2140, The game balls flowing down the game area 2105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 2010 similarly to the first pachinko game machine, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 2100. This back unit includes a group of production accessories 2058 such as movable accessories that are arranged around the display area of the display device 2007 and controlled by the sub-control circuit 2300. At least one or more of the performance accessory groups 2058 or the performance accessory constituent members that constitute the accessory function as performance accessories that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[3-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine will be described. FIG. 96 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine. Although some of the control circuits of the third pachinko game machine are common to the control circuits of the first pachinko game machine, they will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 96, like the first pachinko game machine, the third pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 2200 that controls the game, and a main control circuit 2200 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 2300, a payout/emission control circuit 2400, and a power supply circuit 2450.

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (read/write memory), an initial reset circuit 2204, a backup capacitor 2207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

A main ROM 2202, a main RAM 2203, an initial reset circuit 2204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 2201. The main CPU 2201 has a built-in WDT for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 2202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the third pachinko game machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 2201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 2202.

The main RAM 2203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and this main RAM 2203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201. . Note that in this embodiment, a RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 2201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 2207 has a function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 2203 from being lost in the event of a power outage or the like.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 2200 includes an I/O port 2205 that is connected to be able to communicate with various devices, etc., and a command output port 2206 that is connected to be able to output various commands to the sub control circuit 2300. Also equipped.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200. For example, the main control circuit 2200 includes a normal symbol display section 2161, a normal symbol reserve display section 2162, a first special symbol display section 2163, a second special symbol display section 2164, a first special symbol reserve display section 2165, and a first special symbol display section 2165. 2 special symbol reservation display section 2166, general electric solenoid 2148, special electric solenoid 2135, V attacker solenoid 2154, V shutter solenoid 2159, etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 2200 is also connected to a performance display monitor 2170, an error notification monitor 2172, and the like. Main control circuit 2200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 2205.

The performance display monitor 2170 displays performance display data, set values, etc. under the control of the main CPU 2201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state with respect to the firing of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 game balls), and is also called a base value.

The error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 2172. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 2172 also displays, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting change process is in progress, and a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress. You can also display a code while checking settings. As the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 2200 includes a first starting port switch 2121, a second starting port switch 2141, a passage gate switch 2127, a big winning port count switch 2132, a V attacker count switch 2153, a V winning port switch 2156, and a general A prize opening switch 2123 is also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to main control circuit 2200 via I/O port 2205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 2200 includes a calling device (not shown) that has a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and a calling device (not shown) that is used when transmitting data to a hall computer 2186 that manages pachinko machines in the entire hall. The external terminal board 2184, if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the setting key 2174 that is operated to change or confirm the setting value, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 2203 can be accessed by the game hall administrator. A backup clear switch 2176, etc., which can be cleared according to an operation, is connected. In addition, if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 2176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided. Good too.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 be housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the administrator of the gaming hall cannot easily touch them. ``Inside a specified case'' includes not only those configured such that the setting key 2174 and backup clear switch 2176 cannot be accessed without opening the case, but also those that are configured to have only the corresponding locations of the setting key 2174 and backup clear switch 2176 in the case. When a pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key controlled by the game hall manager to expose the back side, the game hall manager can use the setting key 2174 or/and the backup key. It also includes one configured to be able to contact the clear switch 2176.

Note that in this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but are not limited to this; It may be configured like this. In this case as well, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the game parlor from easily accessing the setting key 2174 or the backup clear switch 2176.

[3-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 2300 includes a sub CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work RAM 2303, a display control circuit 2304, an audio control circuit 2305, an LED control circuit 2306, an accessory control circuit 2307, a command input port 2308, and the like. The sub control circuit 2300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in accordance with commands from the main control circuit 2200. Although not shown in FIG. 96, similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub-control circuit 2300 is also connected to the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 2302 stores programs for controlling the game performance of the third pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 2301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 2301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 2302. In particular, the sub CPU 2301 performs control related to game performance according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 2200.

The work RAM 2303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 2301.

The display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for controlling the display in the display device 2007. The display control circuit 2304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A that converts image data into an image signal. Equipped with converter etc.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub CPU 2301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various types of image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data indicating decorative patterns, background image data, performance image data, and the like.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. In this way, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 2032. The audio control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) that amplifies audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 2032. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 2301. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 2032.

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory objects in the performance accessory group 2058). The accessory control circuit 2307 includes a drive circuit for supplying drive signals to each accessory, a lighting circuit for supplying lighting control signals, and an accessory data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. Equipped with etc.

Further, the accessory control circuit 2307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory activation command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the mechanical motion of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 2308 is connected to command output port 2206 and receives commands sent from main control circuit 2200.

The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko game machine, and the payout/launch control circuit 2400 includes a payout device 2082 for paying out game balls, a game ball A firing device 2006 for firing balls, a card unit 2180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

When the payout/launch control circuit 2400 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082 and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180. The ball rental operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball rental button for renting balls and a rental return button (both not shown) for returning the ball rental card in which cache data is stored. For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180. The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180. Note that although the operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

Furthermore, based on the fact that the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, the dispensing/firing control circuit 2400 controls the firing solenoid in accordance with the rotation angle (rotation amount). (not shown) to control the firing of game balls.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for playing the game to the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout/shooting control circuit 2400, etc.

A power switch 2095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 2450. The power switch 2095 is turned on to supply the necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 2300, the payout/shooting control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the third pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 97 to 100. Note that the third pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

Note that probability change control is not executed in the third pachinko game machine. Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed and a time-saving gaming state in which time-saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 2201 advances the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. It is now possible.

In this embodiment, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the time-saving game state. The sub CPU 2301 executes control to display, for example, a playing style that is a normal game mode in the display area of the display device 2007.

[3-3-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 97 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 97, when a game ball enters (passes) the first starting port 2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a hit determination process based on the first special symbol hit determination process using the first special symbol jackpot determination random value. Then, the lottery result is determined as ``time saving win'', ``big hit'' or ``lose''. Further, when a game ball enters (passes) the second starting port 2140, the main CPU 2201 determines the lottery result based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol using the random number for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol. , it is determined as a "time saving hit", "jackpot hit" or "accessory release win".

It should be noted that it is not essential to prevent "accessory object release hit" from being determined when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, but even if it is determined as "accessory object release hit". It is preferable that the second special symbol be determined with an extremely low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than a "jackpot") than when the second special symbol hit determination process is performed. In addition, it is not essential to prevent the second special symbol from being determined as a "lose" when the hit determination process is performed, but if it is determined as a "lose", the "accessory object opening hit" The probability may be higher than the probability determined based on "accessory object being released", or may be lower than the probability determined based on "accessory object being released".

The special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 includes data used for the first special symbol hit determination process that is executed based on winning in the first starting port 2120, such as "time-saving hit" and "jackpot". ” or the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot judgment determined as “loss” and the corresponding judgment value data (“time-saving hit judgment value data”, “jackpot judgment value data”, “loss judgment value data”) The relationship with In addition, as data used in the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the winning in the second starting opening 2140, a jackpot determined as a "time saving hit", "big hit", or "accessories opening hit" The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for judgment and the corresponding judgment value data ("time saving hit judgment value data", "jackpot judgment value data", "accessories release hit judgment value data") is specified. There is.

Note that this third pachinko gaming machine does not have a function to change the jackpot probability determined as a "jackpot", but this is not essential; for example, the probability variable flag may be turned on depending on the type of jackpot, etc. The jackpot probability may be increased by setting the number.

In addition, in this third pachinko game machine, the total random number of jackpot determination random numbers for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 65,536. That is, the above-mentioned random number value for jackpot determination is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

In addition, when the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the opening of the accessory are set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. In this case, for example, both the probability of hitting the jackpot and the probability of hitting the accessory object may be set to be higher at a high setting than at a low setting, or the probability of hitting the accessory object may be set constant regardless of the setting value, and the probability of hitting the jackpot You may set the probability to be higher at high settings than at low settings, or you may set the jackpot probability to be constant regardless of the setting value, and set the probability of opening a role item to be higher at high settings than at low settings. You can. However, even if the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, it is preferable that the time-saving winning probability be set to be a common probability for all settings, for example.

Also, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot probability or the probability of opening a role object according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 may be changed for each set value to change the winning rate of the V winning device 2150. Alternatively, the opening frequency and opening time of the V winning opening 2155 may be changed for each setting value to change the passage rate to the V winning opening 2155, or the number of time saving continuations may be changed for each setting value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the probability of opening the accessory, the frequency of opening the V winning hole 2155 (that is, the operating frequency of the V attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times the time saving continues. By employing one or more of these, it may be configured such that the expected value controlled in the jackpot gaming state is higher at the high setting than at the low setting.

[3-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 98 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selection symbol command" that determines a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol obtained when a game ball enters the starting hole 2120, 2140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. This is a table that is referred to when selecting a "symbol designation command". The "select symbol command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot. This is a command to specify the pattern to be displayed when the variable display stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 98, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 0 to 99. Even so, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 2201 selects a selection symbol command and a symbol designation command, for example, as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 0 to 3, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 4 to 60, the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 61 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Furthermore, if loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 will issue a selection symbol command as Select "z4" and select "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Furthermore, when the accessory opening hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows, for example. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is between 0 and 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command.

[3-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 99 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table determines the jackpot gaming state (in more detail, number of rounds) and the subsequent gaming state (in more detail, (time saving flag and time saving end conditions). The mode of the gaming state after that indicates the mode of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the C time-saving game state is controlled without being controlled to the jackpot game state. "L" shown in the time saving end condition column of FIG. 99 indicates the sum of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol. Similarly, "M" indicates the variable number of times the second special symbol is displayed, and "N" indicates the number of times the accessory is released. Note that the remarks column in FIG. 99 is provided for convenience and to make it easier to understand.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the aspect of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time saving flag on, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=30, M=6, N=3. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time saving flag on, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=30, M=3, N=3. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the number of rounds as an aspect of the jackpot game state is not determined.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the number of rounds as a mode of the jackpot gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state (A time-saving gaming state) are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, decides to set the time saving flag on, and sets the time saving end conditions as L=50, M= 5. Determine N=2. In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, decides to set the time saving flag on, and sets the time saving end conditions as L=50, M= 5. Determine N=1. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, and determines not to set the time saving flag on. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, decides to set the time saving flag on, and sets the time saving end conditions as L=50, M= 5. Determine N=2.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory release" (for example, the selected symbol command is "z7") and the control is made to the jackpot game state via the second route, the main CPU 2201 , the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds, it is determined to set the time saving flag to ON, and the time saving end conditions are determined to be L=50, M=5, and N=2. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory object released", if the control is not made to the jackpot gaming state via the second route, the main CPU 2201 executes the jackpot gaming state. Not only that, but also the time saving flag is not set on, and after executing control based on the opening of the accessory, the game state is returned to the state immediately before the opening of the accessory.

Furthermore, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), the main CPU 2201 determines the jackpot gaming state and the subsequent gaming state. Do not set either. That is, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 2201 continues to control the previous gaming state without changing the gaming state.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), both the jackpot gaming state aspect and the subsequent gaming state aspect as described above. Since it is not set, there is no need to show it in the hit type determination table of FIG. 99. However, in this embodiment, in order to clearly indicate that neither the jackpot gaming state nor the subsequent gaming state will be determined if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "loss", the figure is shown for convenience. 99.

In addition, "L", "M", and "N" shown in the column of time saving end conditions in FIG. 99 are all the same conditions regardless of the gaming state, but are not limited to this, It is also possible to use different conditions. For example, all of the ending conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different for the A time saving gaming state, the B time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state, or the A time saving gaming state and the B time saving gaming state may be different. Only one of the time-saving gaming states, the time-saving gaming state and the C-time-saving gaming state, may be different. Also, only one of the ending conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, and the C time saving gaming state. , only one of the time saving gaming states A, B, and C may be different. That is, the ending condition of at least one of the ending conditions "L", "M", and "N" is changed to the ending condition of at least one of the A time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state, and C working time saving gaming state. It may be made different depending on the game state.

[3-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 100 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the third pachinko game machine. Note that the "Remarks" column in FIG. 100 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand. The main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting hole 2120, and determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting hole 2140. Determine the fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 100, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, and determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when a gaming ball enters the second starting port 2140. 2. Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 100, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the main CPU 2201 controls the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol so that the game ball enters the first starting hole 2120 and enters the prize. It is determined based on the random number value for effect selection obtained when (passing).

Furthermore, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 acquires the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball enters (passes) the first starting port 2120. It is determined based on the random number value for effect selection.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "lose", the main CPU 2201 changes the variation pattern of the first special symbol to the value of the time saving flag, and the game ball enters the first starting port 2120 (passes through). ) is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for production selection obtained when In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, right-handed hitting is considered to be a regular gaming mode, so it is thought that the game ball will hardly ever land in the first starting opening 2120.

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is “time-saving hit”, the main CPU 2201 changes the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol to the second special symbol when the game ball enters (passes) the second starting port 2140. The decision is made based on the obtained random number value for performance selection.

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 converts the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol into a performance obtained when the game ball enters (passes) the second starting port 2140. Determined based on random number for selection.

When the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "accessory object opening hit" and the value of the time saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 changes the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to the second start opening. A fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for performance selection obtained when the game ball wins at 2140.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "accessory object opening hit" and the value of the time saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 changes the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to the fluctuation time However, it is decided to have an extremely long variation performance of, for example, 600,000 msec. If the value of the time saving flag is "0", basically the game ball will not enter (pass through) the second starting port 2140, but if an unexpected situation occurs and the game ball enters the second starting port 2140, This is done in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous player even if the game ball wins, but this is not necessarily essential.

Note that the random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of changes per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 2301. The sub CPU 2301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effects output from the speaker 2032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201.

In addition, the time-saving hits A and B shown in the "Remarks" column of Figure 100 are reaches that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a jackpot). It's a performance. Similarly, jackpot-related reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that there is a possibility of a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, common reach A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be either a short-time hit or a jackpot.

Further, in the third pachinko game machine, although the explanation is omitted, similar to the first pachinko game machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 includes a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 17), a normal symbol determination table (See FIG. 18), a normal symbol type determination table (see FIG. 19), and a normal symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 20). Then, the main CPU 2201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 95) in the same manner as the first pachinko game machine, and controls the operating mode of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 based on this.

[3-4. Main control processing]
In the third pachinko gaming machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 include the special symbol control process executed in S39 of the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control process will be explained, and the explanation of other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will be omitted. Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (FIGS. 53 and 111), etc.) ), below, the same processes as those performed in the first pachinko game machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing performed in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 21 to 24) in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 101, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). After executing the process in S2001, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2002.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 2203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S2001.

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of checking the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held when executing the special symbol control process. Then, the main CPU 2201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process when both the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held are "0" for a certain period of time or more. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 2300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub CPU 2301 performs a demonstration display effect. In addition, since the second pachinko gaming machine is not a pachinko gaming machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the concept of the main special symbol as explained in the first pachinko gaming machine There is no.

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S2002), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (YES in S2002), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is a variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol is not a variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not pending (NO determination in S2003), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is a variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol has not started variable display, that is, the start information of the first special symbol has not been withheld (NO determination in S2004), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process. , the process returns to the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol is a variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is pending (YES in S2004), the main CPU 2201 executes the process in S2005. Move to.

Returning to S2003, if it is determined that the second special symbol is a variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is pending (YES in S2003), the main CPU 2201 executes the process as follows. Move to S2005.

In S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102. After executing the process of S2003, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S2001 to S2005) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is pending as the third pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variable machine has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the starting information of the first special symbol is pending, it may be a priority changing machine in which the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first starting port 2120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variation machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winnings to the second starting opening 2140.

[3-4-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2005 in the special symbol control process (see FIG. 101) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, the processing target of the special symbol management process is the second special symbol if S2003 of the special symbol control process is a YES determination, and the first special symbol is the processing target if S2004 of the special symbol control process is a YES determination. It is subject to processing.

Further, the numerical values ("0" to "7") written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 102 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 2201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S2011).

If it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S2011), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 101). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S2011), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2012.

In S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process in S2012, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2013. Note that the main CPU 2201 performs the processes from S2013 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S2012.

In S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S2013 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 103. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2014.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S2014 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 104. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2015.

In S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S2015 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 105. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening preparation processing. This process of S2016 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2017.

In S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening control processing. This process of S2017 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this V winning device release control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 108. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2018.

In S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs grand prize opening preparation processing. This process of S2018 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 109. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S2019 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 110. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot end processing. This process of S2020 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 111.

After completing the processes of S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 101). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2013 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 103, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

If it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO in S2021), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 102).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S2021), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. After executing the process in S2022, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 97) is referred to, and the special symbol hit determination is performed using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is to be processed, it is determined whether it is a jackpot or a loss. Further, if the second special symbol is to be processed, it is determined whether it is a jackpot or an opening hit. In the hit determination process for the first special symbol, first, a determination process is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined in this process that it is not a jackpot, it is determined that it is a loss. Similarly, in the second special symbol hit determination process, first, a determination process is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined in this process that it is not a jackpot, it is determined that it is an accessory release hit. After executing the process of S2023, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S2024.

In S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process for determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) (for example, jackpot, accessory opening hit, or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "select symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 98) and using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. After executing the process in S2024, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (time saving hit, jackpot, accessory opening hit). In this process, with reference to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 99), the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S2024). In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit when an accessory is released, the type of win determined is determined by the game ball passing through the V winning hole 2155 opened based on the release of the accessory. This is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, there are multiple types of time-saving hits, jackpots, and accessory release hits, but there may be only one type of time-saving hits, jackpots, and/or accessory release hits. . Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of time-saving hits, jackpots, and/or accessory release hits, a plurality of types of losses may be provided. After executing the process in S2025, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2026.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 100) is referred to, and for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023), the value of the time-saving flag, the random number value for reach determination, or/and the production selection A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random number value and the like. After executing the process in S2026, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 100), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S2026) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process in S2027, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2028.

In S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 102) is performed. It happens. After executing the process in S2028, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2029.

In S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 (for example, probability change remaining number of times, time saving number of times remaining, etc.) are updated. After executing the process in S2029, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2030.

In S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S2030, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2031.

In S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol presentation start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management process (S2030), special symbol production start command transmission reservation processing (S2031)) within the interrupt-prohibited section. It is preferable to do so.

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2014 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is a process called in S2014 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

If it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S2041), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 102).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S2041), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2042.

In S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 102) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process in S2042, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2043.

In S2043, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S2043, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2044.

In S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. As mentioned above in the description of the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, the symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol is confirmed (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). For example, the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of probability variations or the remaining number of time savings may be managed. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

[3-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, if this special symbol game determination process is a process called in S2015 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

If it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO in S2051), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 102). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S2051), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2052.

In S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S2052, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (NO in S2052), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2060. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2052 that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S2052), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2053. In addition, when the special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating that the accessory has been released, and when the special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a loss, a NO determination is made in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing of the jackpot game control processing. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 96) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. Note that the signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process in S2053, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2054.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening 2131 (S2055), sets the jackpot signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), and sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". (S2057), a gaming state designation parameter setting process (S2058), and a transmission reservation process for a jackpot start display command (S2059). Furthermore, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2057), after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 102) is performed. It happens. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

In S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the accessory has been released, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating that the accessory has been released.

In S2060, if it is determined that the special symbol has not been released, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S2060), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2061. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2060 that the accessory has been released, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stopped display mode indicating that the accessory has been released (YES in S2060), the main CPU 2201 executes the process in S2061. Move to.

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for game control per accessory release. In this process, a signal (for example, a signal per accessory item opening, etc.) outputted to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 96 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process in S2061, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2062.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 2150. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 2150 set in this process is, for example, one time. After executing the process in S2062, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2063.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set a signal per role release to the external terminal board 2184 (S2063), processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), and processing to set a game state specification parameter (S2065). ), and a transmission reservation process (S2066) of the start display command per accessory release. In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 in FIG. 102) is performed. It happens. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

In S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 106. In addition, when the main CPU 2201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 105) will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game ending processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first performs time saving management processing (S2071). Since the third pachinko game machine, which is called a 1-type 2-type mixed machine, is not controlled to a high-accuracy gaming state, the processing is not exactly the same as that described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42 in the first pachinko game machine. . Specifically, in the first pachinko game machine, it was explained that the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on when the probability change flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. In the pachinko game machine No. 3, the game is not controlled to a high-precision gaming state. Therefore, instead of setting the ceiling count prohibition flag to on when the probability change flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it is set to on only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. It's different. Furthermore, in the first pachinko gaming machine, in the time saving transition determination process (see FIG. 40), the process of S221 is performed after determining whether the variable probability flag is off (see S221). The pachinko game machine of No. 3 differs in that it performs the process of S222 without performing the process of S221 because it is not controlled to a high-precision gaming state as described above. Other processes in the time saving management process are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42 in the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process in S2071, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S2072.

In S2072, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends, and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. Become. After executing the process in S2072, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2073.

In S2073, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S2074). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S2073, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102) as described above.

[3-4-7. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2016 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

If it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO in S2081), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 102).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (YES in S2081), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of openings as the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operation pattern of the V attacker 2152). In this embodiment, an opening pattern is set in which opening is performed only once for a maximum of 1800 msec, but the opening pattern is not limited to this, and for example, opening for a maximum of 900 msec may be performed twice at most each time. , the first time may be opened for a maximum of 600 msec, and the second time may be opened for a maximum of 1200 msec, for example. Furthermore, a plurality of opening patterns are provided within a range that does not exceed a specified time (for example, 1800 msec) in total per opening of the accessory, and which one of these opening patterns is selected based on the symbol random number of the special symbol, for example. It may be set to one of the following opening patterns. After executing the process in S2082, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2083.

In S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening/closing control processing. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the V winning opening 2155 is performed. After executing the process in S2083, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2084.

In S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S2084), after the completion of this V winning device opening preparation process, the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 102) will be held. After executing the process in S2084, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2085.

In S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S2085, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

[3-4-8. V winning device opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2017 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

If it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO determination in S2091), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device release control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 102).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S2091), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening/closing prize opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is greater than or equal to the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 96), which counts the number of winning game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150, is greater than or equal to the maximum number of winning balls. be done. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the V-attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2092, if it is determined that the number of winning game balls in the V winning device 2150 is not equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (NO determination in S2092), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2093.

On the other hand, in S2092, if it is determined that the number of winning game balls in the V winning device 2150 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (YES in S2092), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2094.

In S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the V prize winning device 2150 (that is, the maximum opening time of the opening/closing prize opening 2151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum open time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 107) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO determination in S2093), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process. (See Figure 102).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V prize winning device 2150 has elapsed (YES in S2093), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2094.

In S2094, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of closing the V winning device 2150 (ie, the opening/closing winning opening 2151). After executing the process in S2094, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2095.

In S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a V winning prize is detected. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed to the V winning a prize opening 2155 within a specified time (that is, whether there has been detection by the V winning a prize opening switch 2156). In addition, the above-mentioned specified time may be the time related to the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 2150, for example, the game ball is stopped by the locking member 2160 within the specified time after the operation of the V attacker 2152 starts. The above-mentioned specified time can be set to be within a specified period of time after the lock is released.

If it is determined in S2095 that a V winning prize has been detected (YES in S2095), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for the per-V game control. In this process, a signal (for example, a per-V signal, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 96) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. Note that the signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V winning game control is executed, a round game of, for example, 15 rounds is executed as shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 99). As in the case, a large amount of prize balls can be won. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V winning game control and the jackpot game control process are distinguished and called, but the V winning game control can also be called the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S2096, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2097.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this processing, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operation of the V attacker 2152) that is first executed based on the opening of the accessory object is processed as a round game of the first round. That is, the V winning game control that is executed when it is determined that a V winning prize has been detected (YES in S2095) is started from the second round of the round game. After executing the process in S2097, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set round display LED data. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the number of times the V attacker 2152 operates) (S2099), and sets the V winning signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2100). , a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), a game state designation parameter setting process (S2102), a transmission reservation process of a V winning start display command (S2103), etc. are performed. In addition, by performing the process (S2101) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 102) is performed. It happens. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

Returning to S2095, if it is determined in S2095 that there is no V win detection (NO determination in S2095), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2104.

In S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 106 is performed. After executing the process of S2104, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

[3-4-9. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the big winning opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2018 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

If it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO determination in S2111), the main CPU 2201 ends the big prize opening preparation process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 102).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (YES in S2111), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2112.

In S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area within the main RAM 2203. After executing the process in S2112, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2113.

In S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of openings of the grand prize opening is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S2113 that the number of openings of the big prize opening is the upper limit value (YES in S2113), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2114.

In S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" (S2114), the jackpot end process (see S2020 in FIG. 102) is performed after the big winning hole opening preparation process is completed. It happens. After executing the process in S2114, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2115.

In S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command (S2116). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S2116, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

Returning to S2113, if it is determined that the number of openings of the big prize opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S2113), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process in S2117, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2118.

In S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs selection processing of the big winning opening to be opened. This process is started when the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 103) is a jackpot, and a stop display mode indicating the jackpot is derived (YES is determined in S2052 in FIG. 105). In the case of the jackpot game control process, the big winning hole 2131 is selected as the big winning hole to be opened. On the other hand, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that the accessory is released, a stop display mode indicating the release of the accessory is derived (YES is determined in S2060 in FIG. 105), and a V winning is detected (in FIG. 108 (YES in S2095), the V winning device 2150 (that is, the opening/closing winning hole 2151) is selected as the big winning hole to be opened. After executing the process in S2118, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2119.

In S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of prizes to be won in the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of prizes to be won in the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, and the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150. The number of prize balls etc. at the time of winning into the mouth 2131 or the V winning device 2150 are set. The number of times the big winning hole 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that this is not intended to exclude cases in which the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the big prize opening 2131 or the V prize winning device 2150 as separate processes. After executing the process in S2119, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2120.

In addition, the above-mentioned "big winning hole 2131 or V winning device 2150" corresponds to the big winning hole selected in S2118 as the big winning hole to be opened among the big winning hole 2131 and the V winning device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

In S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big prize opening 2131 or the V prize winning device 2150 is performed. After executing the process in S2120, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2121.

In S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" (S2121), after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 102) will be held. After executing the process in S2121, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2122.

In S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S2122, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2123.

In S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

[3-4-10. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2019 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

If it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (NO in S2131), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 102).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (YES in S2131), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of game balls won in the big winning hole 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, a big winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 96) that counts the number of winning game balls into the big winning hole 2131 or a V attacker count switch that counts the number of game balls that enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 is used. At step 2153 (see FIG. 96), it is determined whether the counted value is the maximum number of winning prizes. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the big winning opening count switch 2132 or the V attacker counting switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2132, if it is determined that the number of game balls won in the big winning hole 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (NO in S2132), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2133.

On the other hand, in S2132, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum number of winnings (YES in S2132), the main CPU 2201 returns the process to S2134. Move.

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S2119 in FIG. 109) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO in S2133), the main CPU 2201 ends the grand prize opening control process and continues the process. , returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (YES in S2133), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2134.

In S2134, the main CPU 2201 performs closing processing of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150. After executing the process in S2134, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2135.

In S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2135), after the completion of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation process (S2018 in FIG. 102) is performed again. ) will be carried out. After executing the process in S2135, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2136.

In S2136, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S2136, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

[3-4-11. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

If it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (NO in S2141), the main CPU 2201 terminates the jackpot termination process and also terminates the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102). , the process returns to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 101). In this case, the jackpot end process returns to the called process.

When it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (YES in S2141), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2142.

In S2142, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (e.g. probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) are set, and values of various counters (e.g. probability change counter, time saving counter, symbol confirmed number counter, round counter, big winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Or a reset process is performed. After executing the process in S2142, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2143.

In S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 106 is performed. After executing the process of S2143, the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 101). In this case, as described above, the jackpot end process returns to the called process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[4. Fourth pachinko machine]
Next, an example of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described below. This fourth pachinko game machine is a game machine equipped with a small win rush, and like the first pachinko game machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel. It is. However, the fourth pachinko gaming machine is a so-called ST machine that shifts to a normal gaming state even if it is not controlled to a jackpot gaming state when it is controlled to a high probability gaming state for a specified number of times (for example, 120 times). be.

Hereinafter, in explaining the fourth pachinko game machine, descriptions of points common to the first pachinko game machine will be omitted as much as possible. Therefore, the points not mentioned in the explanation of this fourth pachinko game machine are the same as those of the first pachinko game machine.

Further, the configuration explained with reference to the drawings used in the explanation of the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained using the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko gaming machine. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration is similar in function etc. to the first pachinko gaming machine, The description will be made using symbols and step numbers different from those of the gaming machine.

[4-1. Game board unit configuration]
FIG. 116 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 4010 included in the fourth pachinko game machine. FIG. 117 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. In addition, in FIGS. 116 and 117, not only the description but also the illustration of the symbols for the configurations common to the first pachinko gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 6 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 116, the first starting port 4120 is different from the first pachinko game machine and has a first starting port 4120A and a first starting port 4120B.

The fourth pachinko game machine includes a first starting port switch 4121A (see FIG. 117) that detects passage of a game ball to a first starting port 4120A, and a first starting port switch 4121A (see FIG. 117) that detects passage of a game ball to a first starting port 4120B. 1 starting port switch 4121B (see FIG. 117).

When the game balls pass through the first starting port 4120A, for example, three game balls are paid out. When a game ball passes through the first starting port 4120B, for example, one game ball is paid out.

The first starting port 4120A is arranged below the display area of the display device 4007, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). ing.

The first starting port 4120B is arranged, for example, below the first starting port 4120A, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). ing.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the normal electric accessory 4146 is arranged, for example, below the first starting opening 4120A. The normal electric accessory 4146 is in an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the first starting port 4120B by operating a movable member 4147 called a so-called electric chew. The game ball is configured to be able to transition to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a prize, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a prize. The ordinary electric accessory 4146 in the fourth pachinko game machine is arranged below the first starting port 4120A, and the winning port whose ease of winning is changed by state transition is the first starting port 4120B. Although it differs from the first pachinko game machine in certain respects, the other configurations and functions are similar to the first pachinko game machine, so a description thereof will be omitted here. Note that in FIG. 116, the open state of the movable member 4147 is shown by a dashed line, and the closed state of the movable member 4147 is shown by a solid line.

The passage gate 4126 of the passage gate unit 4125 is not arranged in the right area 4107, but is arranged in the left area 4106 so that a game ball hit to the left can pass through.

Note that the passage gate 4126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous actuation device in the same manner as the first pachinko game machine, but apart from the passage gate 4126, the accessory continuous activation device may be activated. A gate that is a trigger for activating may be placed in the right area 4107.

The special electric accessory unit 4130 is arranged below the normal electric accessory 4146, and it is possible to win a game ball regardless of whether the ball is hit left-handed or right-handed. The special electric accessory unit 4130 has a jackpot jackpot 4131 and an opening/closing member 4134 that can be opened and closed in the front-back direction, and when the opening/closing member 4134 is operated and the jackpot jackpot jackpot 4131 is opened. , the game ball hit to the right can win a prize in the jackpot jackpot jackpot 4131.

In the right side area 4107, two downward flow paths 4107a and 4107b are formed, for example, vertically, as downward paths for a game ball hit to the right. In this embodiment, a game ball hit to the right is configured to be distributed to the upper downward flow path 4107a with a probability of approximately 1/3, and to be distributed to the downward downward flow path 4107b with an approximately 2/3 probability. has been done.

The second starting port 4140 is arranged so that game balls distributed to the upper flow path 4107a can win prizes, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 4107a can win prizes. Passage of the game ball to the second starting port 4140 is detected by the second starting port switch 4141 (see FIG. 117). In addition, it is not essential to configure so that most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 4107a enter the second starting port 4140.

In the small winning unit 4150, a small winning large prize opening 4151 is arranged in the right side area 4107, similar to the first pachinko gaming machine. This large winning opening 4151 for small winnings is arranged so that game balls distributed to the downward flow path 4107b can win, and similarly to the first pachinko game machine, for example, the shutter 4153 for small winnings is arranged in the front and rear direction. The ease of winning a prize can be changed by operating the system. Note that the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the small winning big prize opening 4151 is, for example, 10, but is not limited to this.

In addition, in this embodiment, the large winning opening for jackpot 4131 and the large winning opening for small winning 4151 are provided separately, but the invention is not limited to this, and the large winning opening that is opened when the jackpot game control process is executed, The big winning hole opened at the time of execution of the small winning game control process may be the same big winning hole.

Further, as shown in FIG. 117, the fourth pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, includes a main control circuit 4200 that controls the game, and a sub-control circuit that controls the performance according to the progress of the game. It includes a circuit 4300 and the like.

[4-2. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 118 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, various random numbers obtained based on the winning of the first starting openings 4120A and 4120B are used until the variable display of the first special symbol starts (that is, the first special Up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4 symbols) can be held until the symbols are subjected to hit determination processing. Similarly, various random numbers obtained based on the winning of the second starting hole 4140 are used until the variable display of the second special symbol starts (that is, the random numbers are used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol). up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4).

The special symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the special symbol hit determination process, that is, a jackpot determination table that is obtained when a game ball enters the first starting hole 4120A, 4120B or the second starting hole 4140. This is a table that is referred to when determining a "time saving win," "small win," "big win," or "loss" by lottery based on numerical values. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the first special symbol hit determination process are "time saving win", "big hit", and "loss", and "small win" is not included in the lottery targets. On the other hand, the lottery targets in the second special symbol hit determination process are "small hit", "big hit", and "loss". However, a "small win" may be included in the lottery targets in the first special symbol's hit determination process, and a "time-saving win" may be included in the lottery format in the second special symbol's hit determination process. .

The random number value for jackpot determination is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process, similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine. In this embodiment, the random number value for jackpot determination is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 4201 determines "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "loss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination in the first special symbol hit determination process. The hit determination table of the first special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value for each value of the probability variable flag (0 or 1). Relationship with data, relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and range of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as a "loss" (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In addition, in the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 4201 determines a "small hit", "big hit", or "loss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination. The hit determination table for the second special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "small hit" and the corresponding small hit determination value for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1). Relationship with data, relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and range of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as a "loss" (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this embodiment, in both the first special symbol hit determination process and the second special symbol hit determination process, the probability that jackpot determination value data is extracted when the probability change flag is off (jackpot probability) is 201. The jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is on is 1/200.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 4201 can determine the "time saving win" even if the probability variable flag is on, but instead, if the value of the probability variable flag is on, the main CPU 4201 determines the "time saving win". may be excluded from the lottery to prevent it from being determined as a "time saving win".

In addition, in this embodiment, when the probability change flag is on, it is configured not to shift to the C time-saving gaming state, but for example, if the "time-saving win" is won in the high probability low base state, the high probability If the specification is to transition to the base state, by not providing a "time-saving hit" in the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process, it will essentially become a "time-saving hit" in the high-accuracy, low-base state. You can choose not to win.

[4-3. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 119 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 (see FIG. 117) included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table determines the stopping symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol obtained when a game ball enters the first starting hole 4120A, 4120B or the second starting hole 4140 and the above-mentioned winning/losing judgment value data. This is a table that is referred to when selecting the "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" that determine the symbol. The "selected symbol command" is a command for specifying a symbol determined according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for specifying the symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. This is a command for specifying. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 119, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the first special symbol is a random symbol or not. , select one of "z0", "z1" and "z2" as the selected symbol command, and select "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 4201 issues a selection symbol command such as "z3" or "z4" according to the symbol random number value of the first special symbol. ” and select “zA2” or “zA3” as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 4201 issues a selection symbol command such as "z5" regardless of the symbol random value of the first special symbol. ” and select “zA4” as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 4201 issues a selection symbol command such as " z6" and select "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 4201 selects, for example, "z7" or "z8" as a selection symbol command according to the symbol random value of the second special symbol. ” and select “zA6” or “zA7” as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 4201 issues a selection symbol command such as "z9" regardless of the symbol random value of the second special symbol. ” and select “zA8” as the symbol designation command.

Although the description of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is omitted, similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 stores the first special symbol display when the variable display of special symbols stops. Special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12) that is referred to when determining the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the section 4163 or the second special symbol display section 4164 (see FIG. 117) according to the selection symbol command. is memorized.

[4-4. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 120 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the gaming states include a low-probability low base state (normal gaming state), a low-probability high base state (low-probability time-saving gaming state), a high-probability high base state (high-precision time-saving gaming state), and It is controlled to either a high-accuracy low base state (high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state). Among these game states, in the low-accuracy low base state, the low-accuracy high base state, and the high-accuracy high base state, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, and the game ball cannot enter the first starting opening 4120A, 4120B to win. The game progresses based on this. In the high-accuracy-low base state, right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, and the game progresses based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 4140.

The winning type determination table determines the winning game state mode or / according to the selection symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the special symbol and the gaming state when the special symbol winning determination process is performed. and the aspect of the subsequent gaming state. The aspect of the winning game state shown in FIG. 120 indicates the aspect of the jackpot gaming state (more specifically, the number of rounds) or the aspect of the small winning gaming state (more specifically, the number of openings). Further, the mode of the subsequent gaming state indicates the mode of the gaming state after the end of the winning gaming state. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the C time-saving gaming state is controlled without being controlled to the winning gaming state, so the subsequent gaming state will be the C-time saving gaming state. Indicates the mode.

(In case of time saving)
When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving win", the mode of the C time saving game state is determined as follows.

In the low-probability low base state or the low-probability high base state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", for example, the main CPU 4201 turns on only the time-saving flag out of the probability change flag and the time-saving flag. Decide to set it to . Also, set the time saving number to 1 time (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 6 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1"), or 12 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2") decide to. When the display mode per time saving is derived on the first special symbol display section 4163, it becomes possible to shift to the C time saving game state.

In addition, in the high accuracy high base state or the high accuracy low base state, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving win", it is not controlled to the C time saving game state. Therefore, in the high-accuracy, low-base state or the high-accuracy, low-base state, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit," the main CPU 4201 does not shift to the C-time-saving gaming state, Continuing to be in a certain low base state. In addition, in the high accuracy high base state or the high accuracy low base state, "time saving hit" may not be included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process.

(If the result of the first special symbol's hit determination process is a jackpot)
When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the form of the winning game state and the form of the A time-saving game state are determined as follows.

In the low probability low base state or the high probability low base state, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "jackpot" and the selected symbol command is "z3" (high probability jackpot), the main CPU 4201 , As the mode of the winning game state, the number of rounds is determined to be 4 rounds, and as the mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set only the probability variable flag of the probability variable flag and the time saving flag to ON, and the number of probability variables is set to 120. Decided to set it at the time. In this case, the main CPU 4201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 4163, and then controls the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, it is possible to control the jackpot gaming state to a high-accuracy, low-base state. Become.

In addition, in the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state, if the result of the hit judgment process of the first special symbol is "jackpot" and the selected symbol command is "z3" (high probability jackpot), the main The CPU 4201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the winning gaming state, and determines to set both the probability change flag and the time saving flag on as the subsequent gaming state. In this case, it is decided to set the probability variation number to 120 times and the time saving number to 50 times. After the main CPU 4201 derives the above-described jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 4163, the main CPU 4201 controls the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control the jackpot game state to a high-accuracy, high-base state.

In addition, in the low probability low base state, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "jackpot" and the selected symbol command is "z4" (low probability jackpot), the main CPU 4201 As a mode, the number of rounds is determined to be four rounds, and as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided that neither the probability change flag nor the time saving flag is set on. In this case, the main CPU 4201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 4163, and then controls the jackpot game state, and after the end of this jackpot game state, it can be controlled to a low probability low base state. Become.

In addition, in the low probability high base state, high probability high base state, or high probability low base state, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "jackpot" and the selected symbol command is "z4" (low probability In the case of a jackpot), the main CPU 4201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 as the winning gaming state, and sets only the time saving flag of the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON as the subsequent gaming state. Determine. In this case, the main CPU 4201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 4163, controls the jackpot game state, and after the end of this jackpot game state, can be controlled to a low probability high base state. Become.

(If the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a jackpot)
In the low probability low base state or the high probability low base state, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "jackpot" and the selected symbol command is "z7" (high probability jackpot), the main CPU 4201 , As the mode of the winning game state, the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds, and as the mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set only the probability variable flag of the probability variable flag and the time saving flag to ON, and the number of probability variables is set to 120. Decided to set it at the time. In this case, the main CPU 4201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display section 4164, and then controls the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, it is possible to control the jackpot gaming state to a high-accuracy, low-base state. Become.

In addition, in the low-probability high base state or the high-probability high base state, if the result of the second special symbol's hit judgment process is "jackpot" and the selected symbol command is "z7" (high probability jackpot), the main The CPU 4201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the winning gaming state, and determines to set both the probability change flag and the time saving flag on as the subsequent gaming state. In this case, it is decided to set the probability variation number to 120 times and the time saving number to 50 times. After the main CPU 4201 derives the above-described jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display section 4164, the main CPU 4201 controls the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control the jackpot game state to a high-accuracy, high-base state.

In addition, in the low probability low base state, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "jackpot" and the selected symbol command is "z8" (low probability jackpot), the main CPU 4201 As an aspect, the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds, and as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, it is determined that neither the probability change flag nor the time saving flag is set on. In this case, the main CPU 4201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display section 4164, and then controls the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, it can be controlled to a low probability low base state. Become.

In addition, in the low-probability high base state, high-probability high base state, or high-probability low base state, the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "jackpot", and the selected symbol command is "z8" (low-probability In the case of a jackpot), the main CPU 4201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the winning gaming state, and sets only the time saving flag of the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON as the subsequent gaming state. Determine. In this case, the main CPU 4201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display section 4164, controls the jackpot game state, and after the end of this jackpot game state, can be controlled to a low probability high base state. Become.

(In case of small hit)
If the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is "Small hit" (selected symbol command is "z6"), the following conditions are selected: low-probability low base state, low-probability high base state, high-probability high base state, and high-probability low Regardless of the base state, the main CPU 4201 determines the number of openings of the small winning large prize opening 4151 (see FIG. 116) to be one time as the mode of the small winning game state. In this case, the main CPU 4201 derives the above-mentioned small win display mode to the second special symbol display section 4164, then controls the small win game state, and after the small win game state ends, is controlled to the small win game state. Return to the previous gaming state.

(In case of loss)
If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z5" or "z9"), the main CPU 4201 determines the winning game state and the subsequent game state. Do not set any of the following aspects. That is, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 4201 continues to control the previous gaming state without changing the gaming state. It should be noted that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose", there is no need to show it in the hit type determination table of FIG. 120. However, in this example, in order to clearly indicate that neither the winning game state nor the subsequent game state will be determined if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "loss", the figure is shown for convenience. 120.

[4-5. Special symbol variation pattern table]
In the fourth pachinko game machine, the main CPU 4201 determines a special symbol variation pattern by referring to a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start or a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start. The special symbol variation pattern table for low start is the same as the table shown in FIG. 15, so its explanation will be omitted. Similarly, the special symbol variation pattern table for high start is the same as the table shown in FIG. 16, so its explanation will be omitted.

In addition, in the low-probability low base state, low-probability high base state, and high-probability high base state in which left-handed hitting is a regular game mode, the main CPU 4201 refers to the variation pattern table of special symbols for low start. Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. On the other hand, in the high-accuracy/low-base state where right-handed play is a regular game mode, the main CPU 4201 determines the special symbol variation pattern by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start.

That is, in the low-accuracy/high-base state and the high-accuracy/high-base state, the frequency of operation of the normal electric accessory 4146 is increased, and the frequency of winning of game balls into the first starting port 4120B is increased. However, even if it is a low probability high base state or a high probability high base state, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start. Therefore, even if the game ball lands in the second starting port 4140 by hitting right in the low-accuracy, high-base state or the high-accuracy, high-base state, the fluctuation pattern table of special symbols for low start (see FIG. 15) ), the second special symbol is variably displayed for an extremely long time of approximately 600,000 msec. In this regard, in the low-accuracy, high-base state and the high-accuracy, high-base state, the frequency of winning of game balls to the second starting hole 140B is increased, and the variation pattern table of special symbols for high start (see FIG. 16) As shown in FIG.

[4-6. Normal symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 121 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, the random number value for normal symbol hit determination obtained when the game ball passes through the passage gate 4126 (see FIG. 116). This is a table that is referred to when determining a "normal symbol hit" or "loss" based on the lottery.

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 4201 extracts the random number value for determining the hit of the normal symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 4201 determines "normal symbol win" or "loss" based on the extracted random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol. The normal symbol hit determination table contains the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination determined as "normal symbol hit" and the corresponding normal symbol for each state (on/off) of the time-saving flag. The relationship with the hit determination value data and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol determined to be a "loss" and the corresponding loss determination value data are defined.

For example, in a low base state (low probability low base state, high probability low base state) where the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 4201 determines that the random number for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is one of 0 to 94. If so, it is determined that it is a "normal symbol win" and the win/loss determination value data is determined to be "normal symbol win determination value data". Further, the main CPU 4201 determines that it is a "lose" when the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is one of 95 to 98, and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data".

Also, for example, in a high base state (low probability high base state, high probability high base state) where the time saving flag is on, the main CPU 4201 selects whether the random number for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 0 and 98. If so, it is determined that it is a "normal symbol win", and the win/loss determination value data is determined as "normal symbol win determination value data". Further, if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is 99, the main CPU 4201 determines that it is a "loss", and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data".

[4-7. Normal symbol judgment table]
FIG. 122 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table determines the stopping symbol of the normal symbol based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol obtained when the game ball passes through the passage gate 4126 (see FIG. 4) and the winning/losing determination value data mentioned above. This is a table that is referred to when selecting the "Normal symbol hit selection symbol command" to be attached. "Select symbol command when normal symbol hits" is a command to specify the winning symbol of the normal symbol determined according to the type of normal symbol when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit. be. The symbol random number value of the normal symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). In this embodiment, there is normally one type per symbol, but a plurality of types may be provided.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 122, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the normal symbol hit select symbol command is selected as follows. Ru.

For example, in the low base state, if normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 99, the main CPU 4201 Normally, when a symbol hits, "fz0" is selected as the selection symbol command.

In addition, in the high base state, if normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit judgment process, no matter if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 99, the main CPU 4201 Normally, when a symbol hits, "fz1" is selected as the selection symbol command.

[4-8. Normal symbol type determination table]
FIG. 123 is an example of a normal symbol type determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol per type determination table determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 4146 (see FIG. 116), in response to the normal symbol per selection symbol command determined in accordance with the symbol random value of the normal symbol. Referenced when making decisions.

In this embodiment, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz0", the main CPU 4201 selects the opening pattern that is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 4146 (see FIG. 116) with a first opening time of 1000 msec, no wait time, It has been decided that there will be no second opening. That is, an opening pattern is determined in which the normal electric accessory 4146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz1", the main CPU 4201 selects the opening pattern that is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 4146 (see FIG. 116) with a first opening time of 2000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, The second opening time is determined to be 2000 msec.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 4146 is two, but it is not limited to this. For example, more opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 4146 may be provided, and the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 4146 may be determined depending on the type of time-saving game state, for example. Further, a plurality of types of selection symbol commands may be provided when a normal symbol hits, and the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 4146 may be determined depending on the type of the selection symbol command when a normal symbol hits, for example. Furthermore, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 4146 may be determined depending on the type of time-saving game state and the type of the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

[4-9. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 124 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The main CPU 4201 changes the normal symbol based on the state of the time saving flag (on/off) and the random value for normal symbol production selection obtained when the game ball passes through the passage gate 4126 (see FIG. 116). Decide on a pattern. The random number value for normal symbol production selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 124, in the low base state, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 500,000 msec, for example, regardless of the random number value for normal symbol production selection from 0 to 99.

In addition, in the high base state, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 1000 msec, for example, regardless of the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect from 0 to 99.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display time of the normal symbol is two patterns, but is not limited to this. For example, more patterns of variable display times of normal symbols may be provided, and the pattern of variable display times of normal symbols may be determined depending on the type of time-saving gaming state, for example. Further, a plurality of types of selection symbol commands may be provided when a normal symbol hits, and the pattern of the variable display time of the normal symbol may be determined depending on the type of the selection symbol command when a normal symbol hits, for example. Furthermore, the pattern of the variable display time of the normal symbols may be determined depending on the type of time-saving game state and the type of the selection symbol command when a normal symbol is hit.
[4-10. Flow of the game]
FIG. 125 is an example of a game state transition diagram in the fourth pachinko game machine.

First, the initial state at the time of shipment or after the RAM is cleared is a low probability low base state. The flow of the game will be explained assuming that the game is started in this low-probability, low-base state.

[4-10-1. Playing in a low-accuracy, low-base state]
As described above, in the low probability low base state, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode. Therefore, in the low probability low base state, the game is played so that the game balls fired toward the game area 4105 mainly win the first starting ports 4120A and 4120B. Since electric support control is not executed in the low probability low base state, most games are based on winnings in the first starting opening 4120A. When a game ball enters the first starting opening 4120A, 4120B, the main CPU 4201 performs a hit determination process for the first special symbol.

If the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving win", the main CPU 4201 derives the display mode of "time-saving win" to the first special symbol display section 4163, and then ends the low-probability low-base state. and transitions to the low certainty high base state. The winning probability of "time saving win" is approximately 1/6 as shown in FIG. 118, and the variable display number of special symbols that can be executed in the low probability/high base state (i.e. the number of time saving times) is shown in FIG. 120. 1, 6, or 12 times.

Furthermore, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "Jackpot", as shown in FIG. It is a jackpot (selected symbol command is "z4").

If the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot is a high-probability jackpot, the main CPU 201 controls the jackpot gaming state for four rounds, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, Shift to high-certain low base state.

Further, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot is a low-probability jackpot, the main CPU 201 controls the jackpot game state over four rounds, and ends the jackpot game state. After that, control to a low-accuracy low base again.

In this way, in the low-accuracy, low-base state, it is configured not to shift to the high-accuracy, high-base state based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process.

[4-10-2. Playing in a low-accuracy, high-base state]
As mentioned above, in the low-probability-high base state, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode. Therefore, in the low probability high base state, the game is played so that the game balls launched toward the game area 4105 mainly win the first starting ports 4120A and 4120B. Particularly in the low-accuracy/high-base state, since electric support control is executed, most games are based on winnings in the first starting port 4120B. When a game ball enters the first starting opening 4120A, 4120B, the main CPU 4201 performs a hit determination process for the first special symbol.

If the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving win", the main CPU 4201 derives the display mode of "time-saving win" to the first special symbol display section 4163, and then continues the low-probability high base state. do. The type of time-saving game state in this low-probability-high base state is C time-saving game state. Furthermore, the probability of winning the "time saving win" is approximately 1/6, as shown in FIG. 118. In addition, if you win the "time saving win" in the low probability high base state, the time saving game state will overlap unless it is a time saving final variation. In this case, the concept of the variable display number of special symbols that can be executed in the low-probability-high base state (namely, the time-saving number of times) is as described above in the column of "duplication of time-saving game states". For example, if the time-saving game state is to be executed in a superimposed manner, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the remaining number of time-saving games in the low-probability-high base state or the number of time-saving games set based on the "time-saving hit" is greater. The low-accuracy/high-base state continues until the number of time-savings on the other side is exhausted. On the other hand, if the time-saving gaming states are not superimposed, the main CPU 4201 continues the low-probability-high base state until the remaining number of time-savings in the low-probability-high base state is exhausted.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "jackpot", as shown in Figure 119, 87% are high-probability jackpots (selected symbol command is "z3"), and 13% are low-probability jackpots. It is a jackpot (selected symbol command is "z4").

If the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot is a high-probability jackpot, the main CPU 201 controls the jackpot gaming state for four rounds, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, Shift to a high-accuracy, high-base state.

Further, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot is a low-probability jackpot, the main CPU 201 controls the jackpot game state over four rounds, and ends the jackpot game state. After that, control the low-accuracy high base again. The type of time-saving game state in this low probability high base state is A time-saving game state.

Incidentally, when the set number of time saving times is exhausted without winning the jackpot, the main CPU 4201 ends the low probability high base state and shifts to the low probability low base state.

Obtained based on the probability of winning the "time saving win" in the first special symbol's hit determination process, the number of time savings set when winning the "time saving win", and the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 4120A, 4120B. Considering the number of random values that can be held, the stay rate in the low probability high base state is the highest among the low probability low base state, the low probability high base state, the high probability high base state, and the high probability low base state. It gets expensive.

[4-10-3. Game with high accuracy and high base condition]
As mentioned above, the high probability high base state is a game mode in which left-handed hitting is the normal game mode. Therefore, in the high-accuracy, high-base state, the game is played so that the game balls launched toward the game area 4105 mainly win the first starting ports 4120A and 4120B. Particularly in the high-accuracy, high-base state, since electric support control is executed, most games are based on winnings in the first starting port 4120B. When a game ball enters the first starting opening 4120A, 4120B, the main CPU 4201 performs a hit determination process for the first special symbol.

In the high-accuracy-high base state, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving win", the main CPU 4201 derives the display mode of "time-saving win" to the first special symbol display section 4163; The current high-accuracy, high-base state is continued without activating the new C time-saving game state. Therefore, time-saving game states will not overlap. In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving win", the main CPU 4201 forcibly changes "time-saving win" to a loss, and the display mode of the loss is derived to the first special symbol display section 4163. It is also possible to do so.

When the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "Jackpot", as shown in FIG. The selected symbol command is "z4").

If the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot is a high-probability jackpot, the main CPU 4201 controls the jackpot gaming state for four rounds, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, Control to a high-accuracy, high-base state again. In addition, the type of time-saving game state in this high probability high base state is A time-saving game state.

Furthermore, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot is a low-probability jackpot, the main CPU 4201 controls the jackpot game state over four rounds, and ends the jackpot game state. After that, shift to low certainty high base state. The type of time-saving game state in this low probability high base state is A time-saving game state.

Incidentally, when the set number of time saving times is exhausted without winning a jackpot, the main CPU 4201 ends the high probability high base state and shifts to the high probability low base state. In this embodiment, when a high probability jackpot is won in the low probability high base state and when a high probability jackpot is won in the high probability high base state, the control is performed to the high probability high base state. In this case, the number of time saving times set is 50 times. On the other hand, the number of probability variables to be set is 120. Therefore, the number of probability variations remaining after the time saving number is exhausted (for example, 70 in this embodiment) is controlled to be in the high probability/low base state.

[4-10-4. Game with high accuracy and low base condition]
As mentioned above, the high-probability-low base state is a game mode in which right-handed hitting is normal. Therefore, in the high-accuracy/low-base state, the game is played so that the game balls fired toward the game area 4105 mainly enter the second starting opening 4140. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 4140, the main CPU 4201 performs a hit determination process for the second special symbol.

In the second special symbol hit determination process, as shown in FIG. 118, there is no chance of winning a "time saving win". Also, suppose that the first special symbol hit determination process is performed when a game ball enters the first starting opening 4120A, 4120B, and the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit". Although the main CPU 4201 derives the display mode of "time saving win" to the first special symbol display section 4163, it continues the previous high accuracy low base state without operating the C time saving game state. In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving win", the main CPU 4201 forcibly changes "time-saving win" to a loss, and the display mode of the loss is derived to the first special symbol display section 4163. It is also possible to do so.

Furthermore, when the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is "jackpot", as shown in Figure 119, 87% are high-probability jackpots (selected symbol command is "z7"), and 13% are low-probability jackpots. It is a jackpot (selected symbol command is "z8").

If the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot is a high-probability jackpot, the main CPU 4201 controls the jackpot gaming state for 10 rounds, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, Control is performed again to a high-accuracy low base state. That is, it loops through the high-certain low base states.

In addition, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot is a low-probability jackpot, the main CPU 4201 controls the jackpot game state for 10 rounds, and ends the jackpot game state. After that, shift to low-accuracy-high base.

By the way, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is "small win", as shown in FIG. 119, the small win large winning opening 4151 (see FIG. 116) is opened once. As shown in FIG. 118, the probability of winning a "small win" is approximately 1/1.1, for example. Although not shown, the opening time of the small winning large prize opening 4151 in this case is, for example, 1800 msec.

In addition, in the high accuracy low base state, as described above, the main CPU 4201 determines the special symbol fluctuation pattern by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start. Therefore, when considering the probability of being distributed to the upper flow path 4107a (see Figure 116) and the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the small winning large prize opening 4151 (see Figure 116), the If the ball is hit to the right in a low-probability base state, there will be a small-hit rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time may exceed 1. That is, in the high-accuracy/low-base state, the number of balls held by the player may increase as the game progresses. In addition, as mentioned above, if the specification is such that when a "time-saving hit" is won in the high-accuracy, low-base state, the system shifts to the high-accuracy, high-base state, the "time-saving win" will be added to the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process. By not providing ", it is possible to substantially prevent winning of the "time saving win" in a high probability/low base state.

On the other hand, in the low-accuracy low base state, low-accuracy high base state, and high-accuracy high base state in which left-handed hitting is a regular game mode, the game value paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time (for example, the prize The expected value of pitch count, etc.) is less than 1. That is, in these game states (low probability low base state, low probability high base state, high probability high base state), the so-called balls held by the player decrease as the game progresses. In addition, in these gaming states, even if a game is played in an irregular gaming mode (for example, right-handed play) and a game ball enters the second starting hole 4140, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low starting is referred to. Since the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined by the game, there is no real benefit to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, the so-called ST machine which shifts to the normal gaming state after being controlled to the high-precision gaming state for a specified number of times (for example, 120 times) has been explained as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol By controlling the game to be in a high-precision gaming state until the result of the hit determination process becomes a jackpot, it may be possible to further increase the number of balls put out during a rush for a small win.

[4-11. Control by sub control circuit]
The sub CPU 4301 included in the sub control circuit 4300 controls the effect image displayed in the display area of the display device 4007 via the display control circuit 4304. In this fourth pachinko gaming machine, the sub CPU 4301 displays the same or almost the same effect image in the display area of the display device 4007 in the low accuracy low base state, the low accuracy high base state, and the high accuracy high base state. control so that By doing so, it is displayed in the display area of the display device 4007 whether the main CPU 4201 is controlling the low-accuracy low base state, the low-accuracy high base state, or the high-accuracy high base state. It becomes possible to make it difficult to understand by appearance from the performance image.

In particular, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is on (for example, 1/200) and the probability of a jackpot when the variable probability flag is off (for example, 201 parts) are approximately the same probability. Therefore, it is difficult for players to realize the difference in the probability of winning a jackpot.

According to the fourth pachinko game machine, the low-accuracy low base state, the low-accuracy high base state, and the high-accuracy high base state are relatively disadvantageous gaming states for the player, and the high-accuracy low base state is It is possible to create a gaming state that is relatively advantageous for the player. In particular, in a high-accuracy, low-base state, it is possible to realize a game feature in which the player increases the so-called balls held by the player due to the rush of small wins.

Furthermore, in the case of a conventional pachinko gaming machine, the stay rate of the most disadvantageous gaming state among the plurality of gaming states is the highest. On the other hand, in the fourth pachinko game machine, among the low-accuracy low base state, low-accuracy high base state, high-accuracy high base state, and high-accuracy low base state, the probability change flag is OFF and the electric support control is Although the low-probability, low-base state in which the player is not executed is the most disadvantageous for the player, the stay rate is the highest in the low-probability, high-base state, making it possible to realize new game characteristics never seen before.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot in the low probability low base state, and the type of jackpot is a high probability jackpot, the low probability low base state, low probability high base state, high probability high base state , and the high-certainty low base state, the transition is always to the most advantageous high-certainty low base state. Moreover, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the probability that the type of jackpot will be a high-probability jackpot is approximately 87%, so it will not be possible if the jackpot is controlled to a low-probability, low-base state. However, it is possible to increase interest.

Furthermore, in the low probability low base state, there is approximately a 1 in 6 chance of winning the "time saving win", and in that case, the number of time savings set is in the range of 1 to 12, so the low probability low base state and the low probability The main focus is on the gameplay of going back and forth between a high base state and a high base state. Therefore, if the type of jackpot is a high-probability jackpot, it is possible to proceed with the game with the expectation that the game will be shifted to the low-probability low-base state, which is always a high-probability low-base state, and it is possible to increase interest. Become.

In addition, also in the above-mentioned fourth pachinko gaming machine, it is preferable that the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead effect. An example of the look-ahead performance performed in the fourth pachinko game machine will be described later in association with a variable performance pattern corresponding to the variation.

Note that, like the first pachinko game machine, the above-mentioned fourth pachinko game machine has been described using as an example a pachinko game machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel. Not limited to. For example, similar to the second pachinko machine, it may be applied to a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, but only one of them is variably displayed. , similar to the third pachinko game machine, it may be applied to a pachinko game machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine.

[4-12. Example of look-ahead performance and variable pattern performance]
Next, in the fourth pachinko game machine, an example of a look-ahead effect performed in the display area 7a of the display device 7 will be described in relation to a variable effect pattern corresponding to the variation. Note that the look-ahead effect performed in the display area 7a and the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation are controlled by the sub CPU 301 via the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6).

FIG. 126 is an example of a look-ahead performance pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, ranging from a common hit look-ahead performance form showing that there is a possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving hit, to a jackpot-based look-ahead performance form. It is a diagram showing a process in which the pending image changes and then a jackpot type reach is performed as a sub-variation performance pattern. In addition, in FIGS. 126(a) to 126(f), the look-ahead effect type pattern corresponds to "15H", "35H", "51H", or "71H" in FIG. 67, and the look-ahead effect pattern corresponds to FIG. This corresponds to "48H" in FIG. 69. In addition, as can be seen from the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start (see Figure 12), the look-ahead performance type pattern number determination table (see Figure 66), and the look-ahead performance type pattern determination table (see Figure 67), The pre-read performance type patterns in the case of a jackpot are "15H" and "35H", and the pre-read performance type patterns in the case of a loss are "51H" and "71H".

In FIG. 126(a), the first holding area 411 and the second holding area 412 display a normal holding image in which no prefetch effect is performed, and the third holding area 413 and the fourth holding area 414 display a normal holding image. The held image is not displayed, only the frame is displayed.

In addition, in this fourth pachinko gaming machine, the reserved image is represented by an egg image that resembles an egg in order to be associated with the fluctuation performance pattern corresponding to the fluctuation. Then, the color of the egg image is changed according to the expected value of a jackpot, and the density of the pattern of the egg image is changed according to the expected value of a time-saving hit.

In FIG. 126(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 126(a). The pending image newly displayed in the third pending area 413 is in the common win look-ahead presentation form and has an expected value level of "2".

FIG. 126(c) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 126(b), and the form of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in FIG. 126(b) is , when shifted to the second reservation area 412, the expected value level is changed to a form of "3" while keeping the common system prefetch effect form.

FIG. 126(d) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 126(c), and the form of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 126(c) is , is an image showing that when shifted to the first holding area 411, the common type look-ahead performance form with an expected value level "3" changes to the jackpot type look-ahead performance form with an expected value level "4".

FIG. 126(e) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 126(d), and the form of the pending image displayed in the first pending area 411 in FIG. 126(d) is This image shows that the image has been shifted to the 0th area 410 without being changed.

FIG. 126(f) is an image showing that the egg image displayed in the 0th area 410 has hatched. As shown in FIG. 126(f), when the egg image displayed in the 0th area 410 hatches, the variation performance pattern corresponding to the variation develops into a jackpot type reach. On the other hand, if the egg image displayed in the 0th area 410 does not hatch, the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation does not develop into a reach, and a losing image is displayed.

127(a) to (e) show that when the egg image displayed in the 0th area 410 of FIG. 126(f) hatches, the fluctuation performance pattern corresponding to the fluctuation has developed into a jackpot type reach. This is an image shown.

FIG. 127(a) is an image showing that the decorative pattern corresponding to the main special pattern (here, the first special pattern) is variably displayed. FIG. 127(b) is an image showing that the decorative pattern has stopped at the reach pattern. FIG. 127(c) is a reach effect displayed as an image showing a bird hatched from an egg in the 0th area 410 of FIG. 126(f) growing up and flapping its wings in the sky. In this embodiment, the reach effect shown in FIG. 126(c) is a reach effect with a relatively high expected value for a jackpot among the plurality of reach effects. Therefore, when the reach effect shown in FIG. 126(c) is performed, the player's interest is increased. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126(d), when a jackpot image indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot is displayed, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 126(e), when a loss image indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss is displayed as a confirmation, the current special symbol game ends.

FIG. 128 is an example of a look-ahead performance pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, from a common win look-ahead performance form showing that there is a possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving hit, to a time-saving win type look-ahead performance. It is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes in form and then a time-saving winning effect is performed as a sub-variation effect pattern. In addition, in FIGS. 128(a) to 128(f), the look-ahead effect type pattern corresponds to "07H", "27H", "43H", or "63H" in FIG. 67, and the look-ahead effect pattern corresponds to FIG. This corresponds to "42H" in FIG. 69. In addition, as can be seen from the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start (see Figure 12), the look-ahead performance type pattern number determination table (see Figure 66), and the look-ahead performance type pattern determination table (see Figure 67), The look-ahead performance type patterns in the case of a short time win are "07H" and "27H", and the look-ahead performance type patterns in the case of a loss are "43H" and "63H".

In FIG. 128(a), the first holding area 411 and the second holding area 412 display a normal holding image in which the prefetch effect is not executed, and the third holding area 413 and the fourth holding area 414 display a normal holding image. The held image is not displayed, only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 128(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 128(a). The pending image newly displayed in the third pending area 413 is in the common win look-ahead presentation form and has an expected value level of "2".

FIG. 128(c) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 128(b), and the form of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in FIG. 128(b) is , when shifted to the second reservation area 412, the expected value level is changed to a form of "3" while keeping the common system prefetch effect form.

FIG. 128(d) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 128(c), and the form of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 128(c) is , is an image showing that when shifted to the first holding area 411, the common type look-ahead performance form with an expected value level "3" changes to the time-saving per-type look ahead performance form with an expected value level "4". Note that the egg image shown in FIG. 128(d) is a crocodile egg image.

FIG. 128(e) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 128(d), and the form of the pending image displayed in the first pending area 411 in FIG. 128(d) is This image shows that the image has been shifted to the 0th area 410 without being changed.

FIG. 128(f) is an image showing that the crocodile egg image displayed in the 0th area 410 has hatched. As shown in FIG. 128(f), when the crocodile egg image displayed in the 0th area 410 hatches, the variation performance pattern corresponding to the variation develops into a time-saving winning performance. On the other hand, if the crocodile egg image displayed in the 0th area 410 does not hatch, the variation performance pattern corresponding to the variation does not develop into a time-saving winning performance, and a losing image is displayed.

In addition, in the explanation with reference to the variation pattern table of special symbols for low start (Figure 12), it was explained that when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, a time-saving hit type reach is performed. In this fourth pachinko game machine, instead of the time-saving winning type reach, a time-saving winning performance is performed in which the expected value of the time-saving winning is high although the reach is not displayed so as to be easily distinguished from the jackpot.

129(a) to (e) show that when the crocodile egg image displayed in the 0th area 410 of FIG. 128(f) hatches, the fluctuation performance pattern corresponding to the fluctuation develops into a time-saving winning performance. This is an image showing what happened.

FIG. 129(a) is an image showing that the decorative pattern corresponding to the main special pattern (here, the first special pattern) is variably displayed, and shows an image of three crocodiles walking. FIG. 129(b) is an image showing that the left decorative pattern has stopped at "5". In this example, normally (other than time-saving winning effects) the decorative patterns stop in the order of left, right, and middle, but when the time-saving winning effect develops, the decorative patterns stop in the order of left, center, and right. It shall be. FIG. 129(c) is a diagram showing that the decorative pattern inside has stopped at "0". Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 129(d), when the right decorative symbol stops at "G", it is clearly indicated that the game will shift to the C time-saving gaming state of 50 games. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 129(e), when the right decorative symbol stops at "X", it is confirmed that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, and the current special symbol game ends. do.

Note that the images of eggs hatching in FIGS. 126(f) and 128(f) are both displayed in the 0th area 410, but instead of this, for example, as shown in FIG. If the image in which the hatching is displayed at approximately the center of the display area 7a of the display device 7, the fluctuation performance pattern corresponding to the fluctuation may develop into a jackpot type reach or a time-saving hit type performance. It is possible to clearly inform the players and increase their interest.

[5. Fifth pachinko machine]
The fifth pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, is a pachinko game machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel. Therefore, in this fifth pachinko game machine, the time saving management process of S161 (see FIGS. 34 to 42) described in the first pachinko game machine is also performed. Note that descriptions of the same configuration, functions, etc. as the first pachinko machine will be omitted. However, in explaining the fifth pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals as those of the first pachinko game machine will be used.

Furthermore, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the fifth pachinko gaming machine is controlled to a high probability gaming state until the variable display of special symbols is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times), and the result of the special lottery is determined to be a "jackpot". This is a pachinko gaming machine called a so-called ST machine that is controlled to a low probability gaming state after the special symbol is displayed in a predetermined number of times (50 times) without becoming erroneous. In addition, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the probability change flag is set to ON until the jackpot gaming state is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times) after the so-called first hit, and the jackpot gaming state is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times). This is a so-called pachinko game machine with a limiter, in which the probability change flag is set to OFF when the game is played.

The fifth pachinko game machine includes the same game board unit 10 (see FIG. 4) as the first pachinko game machine. As a result, if the game ball is in the open state where it is possible (or easy) to enter the jackpot jackpot 131 by opening the special electric accessory 133 (special electric shutter 134), the ball flows down the right side area 107. Almost all of the game balls enter the jackpot jackpot 131. If the game ball is in a closed state where it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the jackpot jackpot 131, the gaming ball flowing down the right area 107 will not enter the jackpot jackpot 131 and will be further downstream. It flows down toward the normal electric accessory 146 on the side and further toward the second starting port 140B.

If it is in a closed state where it is impossible (or difficult) to enter the game ball into the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131, and in an open state where it is possible (or easy) to enter the game ball into the second starting port 140B, Almost all of the game balls flowing down the right side area 107 enter the second starting port 140B. When both the big winning opening 131 for jackpot and the second starting opening 140B are in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the right side area 107 will be the big winning opening for small winning if the big winning opening 151 for small winning is in the open state. Win a prize of 151. If the big winning opening 131 for jackpot, the second starting opening 140B, and the big winning opening 151 for small winning are all closed, most of the game balls flowing down the right side area 107 (at least half or more) are in the second starting opening 140B. It is configured so that a prize is won in the starting opening 140A.

Furthermore, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126, the main CPU 201 reserves up to four normal symbol start information (random numbers for determining whether a normal symbol hits or random numbers for determining a normal symbol fluctuation pattern). In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 120, the main CPU 201 can of course hold up to four pieces of starting information (random value for jackpot determination and random pattern number) for the first special symbol, and also hold the starting information for the second Even when a game ball enters the starting hole 140A or the second starting hole 140B, the starting information of the second special symbol (random value for jackpot determination and random symbol value) is held for up to four pieces.

[5-1. Basic specifications of pachinko gaming machines related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine will be explained using FIGS. 131 to 136. Note that each table shown in FIGS. 131 to 136 is stored in the main ROM 202.

[5-1-1. Hit random number determination table]
FIG. 131 is an example of a winning random number determination table for a pachinko game machine related to the fifth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 131, when the first special lottery is held, it is determined to be a "jackpot" or a "lose". Further, when a second special lottery is held, it is determined as a "big hit", "small hit", or "loss". In the winning random number determination table stored in the main ROM 202, the value of the variable probability flag (“0 (=off)” or The range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination that are determined as "jackpot" or "loss" for each "1 (=on)") and the corresponding determination value data ("jackpot determination value data", "loss determination ``value data'') is specified. In addition, the value of the probability variable flag (“0 (=off)” or “1 (=on)” is used as data for the second special lottery executed based on winnings in the second starting port 140A or the second starting port 140B. )"), the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as "big hit", "small hit" or "loss" and the corresponding determination value data ("jackpot determination value data", "small hit"). ``judgment value data'' and ``loss determination value data'') are defined.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, the total random number of the jackpot determination random numbers for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 65,536. That is, the above-mentioned random numbers for jackpot determination are generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The jackpot probability is determined by the number of jackpot determination value data relative to the total random number of jackpot determination random numbers, and the small hit probability is determined by the number of small hit determination value data relative to the total random number of jackpot determination random numbers. Note that the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination may be changed as appropriate. The jackpot probability and the small win probability are shown as selection rates in FIG. 131.

Although not shown in FIG. 131, the jackpot probability and the small win probability may be different for each set value so that the high setting is higher than the low setting.

[5-1-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 132 is an example of a special symbol determination table for a pachinko game machine related to the fifth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 132, the special symbol determination table (first special symbol, second special symbol) is a symbol obtained when a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 140A, 140B. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine the "hit selection symbol command" and "symbol designation command" that determine the stop symbol based on the random number value and the above-mentioned judgment value data. For example, if a game ball enters the second starting port 140A, the judgment value data is "jackpot judgment value data", and the symbol random number is "77", the winning selection symbol command is "z2", The "symbol designation command" is determined to be "zA4".

[5-1-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 133 is an example of a jackpot type determination table for a pachinko game machine related to the fifth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 133, the jackpot type determination table is a table that is referred to to determine the jackpot type (number of rounds, probability variable flag) based on the above-mentioned winning selection symbol command. For example, when the winning selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is determined to be "10" and the probability change flag is determined to be ON.

Regardless of whether the selected symbol command at the time of winning is "z0" to "z2", if the jackpot gaming state is not continuously executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), the guaranteed change will occur after the jackpot gaming state ends. The flag is set ON. However, after the first jackpot game state ends, the second special lottery is held because the game is played with right-handed players, but in this second special lottery, when you win the jackpot, there is a 10% probability of 10 rounds. 2 rounds will be decided with a 90% probability.

Further, even if the selected symbol command at the time of winning is any of "z0" to "z2", electric support control is not executed (the electric support number is 0 times). That is, the pachinko game machine according to the fifth pachinko game machine is a game machine in which electric support control is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Note that the electric support control is a control that enables (or facilitates) the winning of game balls into the second starting port 140B. At least one of the following: the time when the game ball is in an open state where it is possible (or easy) to enter the second starting port 140B), the number of times the normal electric accessory 146 is opened, the variation time of the normal symbol, and the probability of winning a normal symbol. This is a control that changes one or more of the above so that it becomes possible (or easy) to win a prize to the second starting port 140B. Therefore, when the electric support control is executed, the frequency of making it possible (or easy) to enter the game ball into the second starting port 140B is increased.

[5-1-4. Special pattern variation pattern table]
FIG. 134 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the pachinko game machine related to the fifth pachinko game machine. The main CPU 201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when a game ball enters the first starting port 120, and determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol when a gaming ball enters the second starting port 140A, 140B. Determine.

As shown in FIG. 134, when the result of the first special lottery is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol depends on the status of the variable probability flag (ON or OFF) and the first starting port 120. It is determined based on the random number for effect selection extracted when the game ball wins. In addition, if the result of the first special lottery is a loss, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is the status of the variable probability flag, the random number for reach determination extracted when the game ball enters the first starting hole 120, and the effect. Determined based on random numbers for selection.

In addition, if the result of the second special lottery is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol depends on the status of the variable probability flag (ON or OFF) and the game ball in the second starting opening 140A, 140B. It is determined based on the random number for performance selection extracted when winning a prize. In particular, if the probability variation flag is OFF, the variation time is determined to be one of the long variations A to C in which the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating for a long period of time, approximately 600,000 msec, and if the probability variation flag is ON, the probability variation medium reach is determined. One of performances D to F is determined.

Even if the result of the second special lottery is a small hit, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol will depend on the status of the variable flag (ON or OFF) and the winning of game balls in the second starting openings 140A and 140B. It is determined based on the random number for effect selection extracted when In particular, if the probability variation flag is OFF, the variation time is determined to be one of the long variations A to C in which the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating for a long time, such as approximately 600000 msec, and if the probability variation flag is ON, the variation time is A super-fast variation is determined in which the second special symbol is displayed in variation for an extremely short period of 1000 msec.

If the result of the second special lottery is a loss, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol will depend on the status of the variable flag (ON or OFF) and when the game ball enters the second starting opening 140A, 140B. It is determined based on the random number for reach determination (only when the probability variable flag is ON) and the random number for production selection extracted. In particular, if the probability variation flag is OFF, the variation time is determined to be one of the long variations A to C in which the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating for a long time such as approximately 600,000 msec, and if the probability variation flag is ON, the probability variation is in progress. Although it is sometimes determined to be a reach effect, in most cases it is determined to be a super-fast variation in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for an extremely short period of time such as 1000 msec.

In addition, since the special symbol variation time corresponds to the special symbol variation pattern, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation time and the special symbol variation pattern at the same time. Further, the variation pattern of the special symbol also corresponds to the performance content (for example, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the display device 7 (for example, a liquid crystal display device) by the sub control circuit 300 (sub CPU 301).

In addition, the "effect contents" column in FIG. 134 is shown for convenience to make it easy to understand, and the effect image displayed on the display device 7 by the sub CPU 301 via the display control circuit 304 (for example, a decorative pattern) The content of the sound outputted from the speaker 32 by the sub CPU 301 via the sound control circuit 305 (for example, the sound of a decorative pattern fluctuating) is shown.

Although not shown in FIG. 134, the random number range for effect selection may be changed for each set value so that the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol to be determined may be different.

The variation time of the special symbol shown in FIG. 134 is an example, and any variation time can be appropriately set as the variation time of the special symbol according to the result of the special lottery. For example, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the first special lottery is a loss and the probability variation flag is ON, and the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is a loss and the probability variation flag is ON. The configuration may be such that the fluctuation time is the same (for example, 4500 ms). Further, it may be configured such that the variation time of the special symbol is the longest (for example, 299500 ms) when the result of the second special lottery is a jackpot and the probability variation flag is OFF. Further, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the first special lottery is a jackpot and the probability variation flag is ON may be configured to be short (for example, 2000 ms). In addition, the variation time of the special symbol (for example, 4500ms) when the result of the second special lottery is a 2R jackpot and the probability variation flag is ON, and the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is a 10R jackpot and the probability variation flag is ON. The special symbol fluctuation time (for example, 29500ms) in a certain case is configured to be longer than the special symbol fluctuation time (for example, 2000ms) when the result of the first special lottery is a jackpot and the probability change flag is ON. You may. Further, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit and the probability variation flag is ON may be configured to be the shortest (for example, 500 ms).

[5-1-5. Random number determination table per normal symbol]
FIG. 135 is an example of a random number determination table per normal symbol of a pachinko game machine related to the fifth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 135, when the normal lottery is held, it is determined that the winning symbol is normal or a loss. In the normal symbol hit random number determination table stored in the main ROM 202, as data used in the normal lottery that is executed based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126, there are data determined as "normal symbol win" or "loss". The relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for normal symbol hit determination and the corresponding determination value data ("normal symbol hit determination value data", "loss determination value data") is defined.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, the total random number of the random numbers for normal symbol hit determination is 1024. That is, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination are generated in the range (width) of 0 to 1023. This range is set as a fixed value. The normal symbol hit probability is determined by the number of normal symbol hit determination value data for the range of normal symbol hit determination random numbers. Note that the range (width) of the random number for normal symbol hit determination may be changed as appropriate. The probability of winning a normal symbol is shown as a selection rate in FIG. 135. That is, in this fifth pachinko game machine, the result of the normal lottery is a "lose" approximately once every 43 times. Of course, the selection rate shown in FIG. 135 is not limited to this, but it is preferable that the normal lottery results are "losing" about 30 to 50 times.

[5-1-6. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 136 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of a pachinko game machine related to the fifth pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 determines the normal symbol variation pattern based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 126, using the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 136, for example.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal symbol, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined to be a variation pattern (01H) with a variation time of 500 msec.

In addition, if the result of the normal lottery is a "lose", the normal symbol fluctuation pattern will have a different variation time based on the random number for determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126. One of a plurality of variation patterns (02H to 05H) is determined. In particular, when the result of the normal lottery is a "lose" and the random number for determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern is a specific random number (98, 99), a specific random number in which the normal symbol fluctuation display is performed for an extremely long time of 600,000 msec, for example. determined by the pattern.

Although not shown in FIG. 136, by changing the random number range for determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern for each set value, the probability of determining the above-mentioned specific pattern is higher with a high setting than with a low setting. The variation patterns of the normal symbols determined for each set value may be different.

[5-2. Game flow]
The subsequent flow of the game when the game is started in the normal game state where the probability change flag is OFF will be explained. In addition, in the normal gaming state, as shown in the special symbol fluctuation pattern table (see Figure 134), the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is different from the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and has a very long fluctuation time. It is determined to be one of variations A to C. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, a typical player plays the game by hitting left-handed. When a game is played with left-handed hitting, the game ball launched toward the game area 105 can enter the first starting hole 120 instead of the second starting holes 140A, 140B.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 performs a first special lottery. The probability that the result of the first special lottery will be a "jackpot" in the normal gaming state is approximately 1/319, as shown in the hit random number determination table (see FIG. 131).

Furthermore, even if the player hits right in the normal game state, if the game ball hit right passes through the passage gate 126 and a result of the normal symbol is obtained, the normal electric accessory 146 is activated. Although there is a possibility that a game ball may enter a prize in the second starting port 140B when the game ball is opened, only one prize ball will be paid out when the game ball enters the second starting port 140B. Further, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 140A without the normal electric accessory 146 being opened, only one prize ball will be paid out when the game ball enters the second starting port 140A. Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 140A, 140B, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed in any of the long variations A to C, which have an extremely long variation time, so the small winning large winning opening 151 is The frequency with which it is opened is extremely low. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the first starting port 120, more prize balls (for example, four balls) are paid out than when a game ball enters the second starting port 140A, B. Further, the variation time of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first starting hole 120 is approximately 10,000 msec. Therefore, there is no practical benefit for the player to play right-handed in the normal gaming state.

In addition, in the normal game state, the probability that the result of the normal lottery will be a normal symbol (the probability of opening the normal electric accessory 146) is high (see Figure 135), and when the result of the normal lottery is a normal symbol, Since the variation time of the symbols is relatively short (see FIG. 136), when the player hits right, the electric accessory 146 is normally opened to a considerable extent. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 126 has a high possibility of winning the second starting port 140B, and even if the result of the second special lottery is a small win, it will be distributed downstream from the second starting port 140B. A situation in which game balls flow into the small winning jackpot 151 that is provided is less likely to occur. In addition, even if in the normal gaming state, the result of the normal lottery is a loss and the normal electric accessory 146 is not released, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit. Since the time is extremely long, it is difficult to get a small hit.

It should be noted that the big winning hole that is opened when a jackpot is won and the big winning hole that is opened when a small hit is won may be different big winning holes or may be the same big winning hole. Further, the arrangement positions of the large winning opening that opens when a jackpot occurs and the large winning opening that opens when a small winning occurs can be designed as appropriate. For example, a large winning opening that opens when a small win is achieved may be provided downstream of the normal electric accessory 146, and a large winning opening that opens when a jackpot occurs may be provided upstream of the normal electric accessory 146. Further, both the large winning opening that opens when a jackpot occurs and the large winning opening that opens when a small winning occurs may be provided downstream of the normal electric accessory 146. Further, a large winning opening (also used as a large winning opening) that is opened when a jackpot or small winning occurs may be provided downstream of the normal electric accessories 146. In addition, in this embodiment, game balls that did not enter the large winning hole that opens when a small hit, game balls that did not enter the large winning hole that opens when a jackpot hit, and game balls that entered the second starting hole 140B. A second starting port 140A (starting port for the special figure 2, which is not provided with an ordinary electric accessory) is provided in which game balls etc. that were not present can be won. The second starting opening 140A can be placed downstream (downward) of the large winning opening that opens when there is a small hit and is downstream of the normal electric accessory 146, or when it opens when the normal electric accessory 146 and a small hit occur. It is possible to imagine the difference between the big winning opening and the like. Even when such a second starting opening 140A is provided, it may serve as both the big winning opening that opens when a jackpot occurs and the big winning opening that opens when a small winning occurs. In addition, in an embodiment where the big winning hole that opens when a jackpot is won is provided downstream from the big winning hole that opens when a small hit occurs, the big winning hole that opens when a small hit and the big winning hole that opens when a jackpot win It is possible to envisage a case where the second starting port 140A is arranged between the big winning hole that is opened when a jackpot is won, or a case where the second starting port 140A is arranged downstream of the big winning hole that is opened when a jackpot is won. It is. In addition, in this embodiment, an example in which a starting port for special map 2 (second starting port 140B) is provided as a starting port provided with a normal electric accessory is explained, but a normal electric accessory As the starting port provided with this, a starting port for special map 1 may be provided. For example, separately from the first starting port 120A (starting port for special map 1 in which a normal electric accessory is not provided), the first starting port 120B (starting port for special map 1 in which a normal electric accessory is provided) It is also possible to arrange a

When the result of the first special lottery conducted in the normal gaming state is a "jackpot", the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 132) and determines a winning selection symbol command. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 133), determines the jackpot type (number of rounds) based on the determined win selection symbol command, and controls the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 4, since the jackpot jackpot opening 131 is arranged in the right side area 107, in the jackpot game state, the game is played by hitting right.

Next, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state based on the so-called first win ends will be explained.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, the electric support control is not executed and the probability variation flag is always set to ON when the jackpot gaming state based on the so-called first win ends, so the jackpot gaming state based on the first win ends. After that, the main CPU 201 controls the high accuracy low base state. In this high-accuracy-low base state, when the result of the second special lottery is a "small hit", the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined to be a super-fast fluctuation in which the fluctuation time is extremely short, for example, 1000 msec. (See FIG. 134), the game is played by hitting right.

In the high-accuracy, low-base state after the jackpot game state based on the first hit ends, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined to be a super-fast fluctuation with a high probability, and a small win is derived, so the big win for the small hit is generated. The mouth 151 is repeatedly opened at a much higher frequency than in the normal gaming state. However, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal symbol, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined to be a variation pattern with a variation time of 500 msec. In addition, since most of the game balls hit right pass through the passage gate 126 and hit the normal symbols continuously, the normal electric accessory 146 and the normal electric shutter 147 are almost fully open. Therefore, when the result of the normal lottery in the high-accuracy/low-base state is a normal symbol win, all or almost all of the game balls hit to the right will enter the second starting opening 140B, so even if it is a large winning opening for a small hit, Even if 151 is opened with high frequency, winning to the large winning opening 151 for small winnings is inhibited. As described above, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the second starting hole 140B is one.

On the other hand, in the high-accuracy/low-base state, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be one of 10,000 msec, 20,000 msec, 30,000 msec, and 600,000 msec. The main CPU 201 stops the fluctuating display of the normal symbols, and performs the opening operation of the regular electric accessory 146 and the shutter 147 for general electricity based on the derivation of the mode indicating the normal symbol hit, so that the normal symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner. The normal electric accessory 146 is not released while the normal symbol winning is not derived even if the fluctuating display of the normal symbol stops. Therefore, while the normal electric accessory 146 is closed, winning into the small winning large winning opening 151 is not inhibited, and most of the game balls hit right will enter into the small winning large winning opening 151. Become. The number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the small winning jackpot 151 is 10 as described above. Therefore, in a high-probability-low base state in which the result of the normal lottery is usually determined to be a loss, the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1.

In addition, in the high-accuracy/low-base state, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss, as the variation time of the normal symbols becomes longer, the speed of increase in the number of balls produced increases.

In this way, the fifth pachinko gaming machine is capable of distributing regular symbols whose normal lottery result is usually a loss and whose fluctuation time is longer until a predetermined number of jackpot game states (for example, 5 times) are performed. The game is about being able to draw a pattern of fluctuations.

In such a fifth pachinko gaming machine, during one high-accuracy/low-base state, there is a pattern in which the result of the normal lottery is never a normal loss, or a pattern in which the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss only once. Even if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 10,000 msec, or the result of the regular lottery is a loss twice and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec both times, there are various patterns. may occur.

Therefore, according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss, the simple configuration is such that a plurality of variation patterns with different variation times of the normal symbols are provided, and it is different from the jackpot game state. To provide an unprecedented new game property that makes it possible to realize an advantageous gaming state (high-probability, low-base state) with various patterns of increase in balls as a high-probability, low-base state that is advantageous to players. This makes it possible to increase interest.

Further, when the result of the normal lottery in the high probability/low base state is a normal loss, it is preferable that the sub CPU 301 that receives the normal symbol variation pattern command executes an effect based on the variation time of the normal symbols. In other words, the expected value of the amount of prize balls that can be won is different when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10,000 msec, when it is 20,000 msec, when it is 30,000 msec, and when it is 600,000 msec. Then, an effect may be executed that allows the user to grasp the degree of advantage (for example, the degree of the amount of prize balls that can be acquired). For example, when the variation time of a normal symbol is 10,000 msec, an effect such as "Per round!" is executed, and when the variation time of a normal symbol is 20,000 msec, an effect such as "Per 2 rounds!" is executed. When the fluctuation time of the symbol is 30,000 msec, it is preferable to perform a performance such as "3 rounds won!", and when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 600,000 msec, a performance such as "super win" may be performed. In this way, when an advantageous gaming state is executed in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of balls fired per unit time may exceed 1, an effect indicating the degree of advantage is executed. , it becomes possible to increase interest.

Note that the effects executed by the sub CPU 301 include a display effect displayed on the display device 7 via the display control circuit 304, a sound effect output from the speaker 32 via the audio control circuit 305, and an LED control circuit 306. This corresponds to at least one or more of the light emission effect of the LED group 46 executed via the LED group 46 and the operation effect of the effect accessory group 58 executed via the accessory control circuit 307.

By the way, in the high-accuracy/low-base state, if the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss and the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is determined to be 600,000 msec, for example, the second special lottery will be held before the fluctuation of the normal symbols ends. The result may be a "jackpot" and the game may be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, since the time required for the jackpot game state to be controlled is approximately 180,000 to 300,000 msec, even after the jackpot game state ends, the fluctuating display of normal symbols with a fluctuating time of 600,000 msec continues without ending. It can occur. As mentioned above, since the normal electric accessory 146 is not released while the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 146 does not prevent the winning to the small winning large prize opening 151, and the player is hit right. Most of the game balls won will be won in the small winning jackpot 151. In this way, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is determined to be 600000 msec, even if the jackpot gaming state is controlled before the fluctuation display of the normal symbols ends, when the jackpot gaming state ends, the normal If the fluctuating display of symbols continues without stopping, even if the result of the normal lottery does not become a "normal loss" in the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends, the advantageous gaming state immediately occurs after the jackpot gaming state ends. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game even while the game is controlled in a jackpot game state. For example, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec, and a jackpot game state of 300,000 msec is started after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, approximately 300,000 msec after the end of the jackpot game state is for the small hit. You can enter as many prizes as you like into the grand prize opening 151, making it possible to increase your interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is explained that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is consumed even during the jackpot game state and the small win game state, but during the jackpot game state and the small win game state, It may be configured such that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is not consumed (the passage of the fluctuation time is stopped). For example, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is determined to be 600,000 msec, and the jackpot gaming state starts when 300,000 msec has elapsed after the normal symbol fluctuations start, the jackpot gaming state will continue for 300,000 msec after the jackpot gaming state ends. It is also possible to continue the fluctuation of the normal symbols (during the jackpot game state, the remaining time of the normal symbol fluctuations does not decrease).

Although the electric support control is not executed in the fifth pachinko game machine, the present invention is also applied to a pachinko game machine in which the electric support control is executed in the gaming state after the jackpot game state ends. be able to. In particular, if the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss and the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is determined to be 600,000 msec, even though the electric support control is executed in the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends, It is possible to cause most of the game balls hit to the right to win a prize in the small winning large prize opening 151.

<Production mode transition flow>
FIG. 137(a) is a diagram showing the transition transition of the production mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 137(b) is a table summarizing the transition conditions of the production mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In this embodiment, the production mode (sub game state) as shown in FIG. 137(a) is managed by the sub control circuit 300. The performance modes include a normal mode, a first hit mode, a variable probability mode, and a bonus mode.

To explain specifically with reference to FIGS. 137(a) and 137(b), when the jackpot game state starts in the normal mode, the sub control circuit 300 shifts the production mode from the normal mode to the first winning mode. (See transition condition (1)).

When the jackpot game state ends in the first win mode, the sub control circuit 300 shifts the performance mode from the first win mode to the variable probability mode (see transition condition (2)). When the special symbol fluctuation display (special symbol fluctuation) is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the probability variation mode, the sub control circuit 300 shifts the production mode from the probability variation mode to the normal mode (see transition condition (3)) .

When the jackpot game state starts in the variable probability mode, the sub control circuit 300 shifts the production mode from the variable probability mode to the bonus mode (see transition condition (4)). In addition, in the variable probability mode, when the variable display of normal symbols (normal symbol loss length variation) with the variation pattern "05H" (see FIG. 136) starts, the sub control circuit 300 shifts the production mode from the variable probability mode to the bonus mode. (See transition condition (4)).

When the normal symbol loss length variation ends in the bonus mode, the sub-control circuit 300 shifts the production mode from the bonus mode to the probability variation mode (see transition condition (5)). Further, when the jackpot gaming state ends in the bonus mode, if the number of jackpot gaming states executed from the first winning is less than the predetermined number (5 times) (unless the limiter has been reached), the sub control circuit 300 , the production mode is shifted from the bonus mode to the variable probability mode (see transition condition (5)). In addition, if the normal symbol loss length variation is in progress when the jackpot gaming state ends in the bonus mode, the bonus mode will be maintained, and if the normal symbol loss length variation ends in the bonus mode, the jackpot gaming state If so, the bonus mode may be maintained.

When the jackpot game state ends in the bonus mode, if the number of jackpot game states executed from the first win is a predetermined number (5 times) (if the limiter has been reached), the sub control circuit 300 starts the bonus mode. to the normal mode (see transition condition (6)).

Note that the normal mode is an effect mode that is controlled in the normal gaming state. In the normal mode, the production stage is managed by the sub control circuit 300. The production stages include a first production stage, a second production stage, and a third production stage. Each production stage will be explained in detail later.

Further, although not shown, a special performance mode may be provided as the normal mode (performance mode controlled in the normal gaming state). The special performance mode can be a performance mode that is controlled from the end of the bonus mode until the variable display of special symbols (special symbol variation) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

<First production stage preview content lottery process>
FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the first performance stage preview content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In the first performance stage preview content lottery process shown in FIG. 138, in the first performance stage (see FIG. 137(a)), after a game ball enters the first starting hole 120, a special symbol change related to the starting prize is This is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 300 in the presentation mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76) when starting. In addition, the sub-control circuit 300 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol production start command transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

In the first production stage preview content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 executes a pseudo continuous stage performance summary lottery process (step S9001). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the outline of the performance to be performed during the special symbol variation related to the first starting slot winning based on the sub variation pattern by performing a lottery based on random numbers. Although the details will be described later, before the first performance stage preview content lottery process shown in FIG. It has been decided. The sub-variation pattern includes information regarding pseudo-continuous performance.

Pseudo-continuous display is a display in which decorative symbols are displayed as if they are stopped (temporary stop display) from when the special symbol is displayed variably based on one starting memory until it is finally displayed as a fixed display. . The state of temporary stop display is a state where the decorative pattern is vibrating or the like, and it cannot be said that it is completely stopped and displayed. In this specification, a pseudo-connection performance may be simply referred to as a "pseudo-connection", and a performance in which a pseudo-connection does not occur may be referred to as "no pseudo-connection". The pseudo continuous effect in this embodiment includes a pseudo continuous effect in which a temporary stop display occurs once, and a pseudo continuous effect in which a temporary stop display occurs twice. A pseudo-continuous performance in which a temporary stop display occurs once is referred to as "pseudo 2", and a pseudo-continuous performance in which a temporary stop display occurs twice is referred to as "pseudo 3".

In "Pseudo 2", after the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern occurs once, the variable display of the decorative pattern is resumed from the temporary stop display state (the second pseudo variable display is performed), and then the decoration The symbol is finally stopped and displayed. In "Pseudo 3", the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern occurs once, and after the variable display of the decorative pattern is resumed from the temporary stop display state (the second pseudo variable display is performed), the second temporary stop display occurs. A temporary stop display occurs, and after the variable display of the decorative pattern is restarted from the temporary stop display state (the third pseudo variable display is performed), the decorative pattern is finally stopped and displayed. The stage from when the first temporary stop display occurs is called "Pseudo 1", and the stage from when the second pseudo fluctuation display starts to when the second temporary stop display occurs is called "Pseudo 1". 2", and the stage after the third pseudo fluctuation display starts is sometimes called "pseudo 3". Moreover, in the performance of "no pseudo", the period from when the variable display of decorative symbols starts to when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is sometimes referred to as "pseudo 1".

The sub-fluctuation pattern includes, as information regarding the pseudo-continuous effect, information indicating whether the pseudo-continuous effect has occurred, information indicating the number of occurrences of the temporary stop display state of the decorative pattern (to which stage the pseudo-continuous effect progresses), and , contains information indicating the outline of the performance performed at each stage in the pseudo-continuous performance. For example, "Pseudo 1" is a 20-second performance, "Pseudo 2" is a 16-second performance, and a sub-variation pattern that includes information that "Pseudo 3" develops after reach is established and leads to the second half of super reach. has been determined, in the process of step S9001, the sub CPU 301 performs what kind of effect in "pseudo 1" (while the decorative pattern is fluctuating for 20 seconds) to display a "bell" which will be described later. An overview of the effects, such as whether to stop the icon or what kind of effects to use in "Pseudo 2" (while the decorative pattern changes for 16 seconds) to stop the "Watermelon" icon, which will be described later. decide. As a result, the outline of the performance at each stage and final variation in the pseudo-run is determined.

As a general outline of the performances performed at each stage in the pseudo-continuous performance, for example, [24] 10 seconds reach (bonus) pattern, [24] 6 seconds performance (bonus) pattern, etc. are provided. [24] In the 10 second reach (bonus) pattern, after reaching tenpai after 10 seconds have elapsed from the start (resume) of the decorative pattern variation, 24 seconds have elapsed from the time 22 seconds have elapsed from the start (resume) of the decorative pattern variation. The icon is displayed for a period of time, and then a preview is generated after the icon stops for 4 seconds (for example, see performance numbers "14", "18", "23", and "27" shown in FIG. 144). [24] In the 6-second performance (bonus) pattern, the performance starts 6 seconds after the start (resume) of the decorative pattern fluctuation, and then 22 seconds after the successful performance and the start (resumption) of the decorative design fluctuation. The icon is displayed for 24 seconds after the elapsed time, and a preview is generated after the icon stops for 4 seconds thereafter (for example, see performance number "76" shown in FIG. 150).

Next, the sub CPU 301 executes a performance strength lottery process (step S9002). In this process, the sub-CPU 301 determines the performance strength at each stage of the pseudo series based on the sub-variation pattern by performing a lottery based on random numbers. Specifically, when the sub-variation pattern corresponding to "no pseudo" has been determined, the sub-CPU 301 determines the performance strength for pseudo-1, and determines the sub-variation pattern corresponding to "pseudo-2". If the sub-variation pattern corresponding to "Pseudo 3" has been determined, the performance strength for Pseudo 1 and the Pseudo 2 are determined. The effect strength for 2 and the effect intensity for pseudo 3 are determined. The performance strength is an index indicating the degree of expectation of the performance performed at each stage of the pseudo-sequence. Levels 1 to 7 are provided as the performance strength, and the higher the level, the easier it is to perform a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot. The presentation strength (level) for pseudo-2 is set to be higher than the presentation intensity (level) for pseudo-1, and the presentation intensity (level) for pseudo-3 is set to be higher than the presentation intensity (level) for pseudo-2. is set to .

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether a pseudo continuous effect occurs based on the information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9003). If it is determined that a pseudo continuous effect will occur, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the pseudo continuous effect will progress to "pseudo 3" based on the information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9004). If it is determined that the pseudo continuous performance will progress to "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 301 executes a preview content lottery process for pseudo 3 (step S9005). The preview content lottery process for pseudo 3 will be explained later using FIG. 139.

If it is determined in step S9004 that the pseudo continuous performance will not progress to "pseudo 3", or after executing the process in step S9005, the sub CPU 301 executes a preview content lottery process for pseudo 2 (step S9006). The preview content lottery process for pseudo 2 will be explained later using FIG. 140.

If it is determined in step S9003 that a pseudo continuous effect does not occur, or after executing the process in step S9006, the sub CPU 301 executes a pseudo 1 preview content lottery process (step S9007). The preview content lottery process for pseudo-1 will be explained later using FIG. 141. After executing the process in step S9007, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Pseudo 3 variable main notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the pseudo 3 variable main notice content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The pseudo 3 variable main notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 139 is a process performed in the pseudo 3 notice content lottery process (see step S9005 in FIG. 138).

In the pseudo 3 variable main notice content lottery process, the sub CPU 301 determines the pseudo 3 variable main notice content based on the pseudo 3 effect strength (performance strength for pseudo 3) determined in step S9002 of FIG. 138 (step S9011 ). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the type of jackpot preview performance to be performed at the "pseudo 3" stage in the pseudo continuous performance and the contents of the jackpot preview performance by performing a lottery based on random numbers. In this embodiment, multiple types of jackpot preview performances (first preview performance, second preview performance, third preview performance, fourth preview performance, etc.) are used as jackpot preview performances that can be performed at the "pseudo 3" stage. ) is provided. Furthermore, a plurality of performance contents are provided as the contents of each jackpot preview performance. For example, as the contents of the first preview performance, first preview performance content A, first preview performance content B, first preview performance content C, first preview performance content D, etc. are provided. The first preview performance, the second preview performance, the third preview performance, and the fourth preview performance will be described in detail later.

In the process of step S9011, the sub CPU 301 determines one jackpot preview performance (for example, the first preview performance) from among the plurality of types of jackpot preview performances as the pseudo three variable main preview content, and also One performance content (for example, first preview performance content A) is determined as the content. Thereafter, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

In addition, in the pseudo 3 notice content lottery process (see step S9005 in FIG. 138), prior to performing the pseudo 3 variable main notice content lottery process shown in FIG. Good too. In the reach effect, decorative symbols are displayed in a reach mode (decorative symbols located on the left side (left decorative symbol), decorative symbols located on the right side (right decorative symbol), and decorative symbols located in the center (middle decorative symbol). ), two decorative patterns are statically displayed as the same pattern, and the remaining one decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. In this case, in the process of step S9011, the sub CPU 301 may determine the performance content whose performance time is shorter than the time from when the variable display of decorative symbols is started (resumed) until the reach is established. For example, in a case where there is a production content that can be completed within 10 seconds and a production content that requires more than 10 seconds to complete, from the time the fluctuating display of decorative symbols starts (resumes) until reaching is established. It may be configured such that when a reach performance is determined such that the duration of is 10 seconds, it is possible to determine the content of the performance that can be completed within 10 seconds as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content. .

<Pseudo 2 variable main notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the pseudo 2-variable main notice content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The pseudo 2 variable main notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 140 is a process performed in the pseudo 2 notice content lottery process (see step S9006 in FIG. 138).

In the pseudo 2 variable main notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 selects the pseudo 2 variable main notice contents (tentative) based on the pseudo 2 effect strength (performance strength for pseudo 2) determined in step S9002 of FIG. Select (step S9021). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the type of jackpot preview performance that can be performed at the "pseudo 2" stage in the pseudo continuous performance and the contents of the jackpot preview performance by performing a lottery based on random numbers. In this embodiment, the jackpot preview performance that can be performed in the "pseudo 2" stage is the same kind of jackpot preview performance as the jackpot preview performance that can be performed in the "pseudo 3" stage (first preview performance, second preview performance, A third preview performance, a fourth preview performance, etc.) are provided. Furthermore, the contents of each jackpot preview performance are the same as the contents of the jackpot preview performance that can be performed at the "pseudo 3" stage.

In the process of step S9021, the sub CPU 301 selects one jackpot preview performance (for example, the first preview performance) from among the plurality of types of jackpot preview performances as the pseudo two-variable main preview content (tentative), and One performance content (for example, first preview performance content B) is selected as the content of the preview performance. Note that the pseudo 2-variable main notice content (tentative) selected here is provisional, and the pseudo 2-variable main notice content may be replaced with another performance content (see step S9024).

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the type of jackpot preview performance selected as the pseudo two-variable main preview content (tentative) is a specific jackpot preview performance (step S9022). A specific jackpot preview performance is a jackpot preview performance in which the performance performed at each stage of the pseudo-series has a story, and a predetermined story unfolds as the stages of the pseudo-series progress. be. For example, the first preview performance, which is one of the specific jackpot preview performances, is a performance in which characters have a conversation, and the characters' lines uttered at each stage in the pseudo series are associated with each other. For example, the content of the conversation in "Pseudo 3" is based on the content of the conversation in "Pseudo 2", and as a result, the dialogue progresses as the stages of the pseudo series progress. ing. Note that the content of the conversation is set as an index indicating the degree of expectation of a jackpot. In this embodiment, in addition to the first preview performance, a fifth preview performance is provided as a specific jackpot preview performance. On the other hand, the second preview performance, the third preview performance, and the fourth preview performance do not correspond to the specific jackpot preview performance.

When it is determined that the type of jackpot preview performance selected as the pseudo 2-variable main notice content (tentative) is a specific jackpot notice performance, the sub CPU 301 executes the jackpot notice selected as the pseudo 2-variable main notice content (tentative). It is determined whether the type of performance is the same as the type of jackpot preview performance determined as the pseudo 3-variable main preview content (see step S9011 in FIG. 139) (step S9023). In this process, for example, the type of jackpot preview effect selected as the pseudo 2-variable main notice content (tentative) and the type of jackpot preview effect determined as the pseudo 3-variable main notice content are both the first preview effect. If so, the sub CPU 301 considers that these types are the same. On the other hand, among the type of jackpot preview performance selected as the pseudo 2-variable main notice content (tentative) and the type of jackpot preview performance determined as the pseudo 3-variable main notice content, one is the first preview performance. If the other one is the fifth preview effect, the sub CPU 301 considers that these types are different. In addition, if the pseudo continuous performance does not progress to "pseudo 3" (when the process of step S9005 in FIG. 138 is not executed), the sub CPU 301 executes the jackpot preview performance selected as the pseudo 2 variation main notice content (tentative). It is determined that the type of is not the same as the type of the jackpot preview performance determined as the pseudo three-variable main preview content.

If it is determined that the type of the jackpot preview effect selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (tentative) is the same as the type of the jackpot preview effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content, the sub CPU 301 executes the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (tentative). The variable main notice content (tentative) is replaced with another performance content, and the replaced performance content is determined as the official pseudo 2 variable main notice content (step S9024).

In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the performance content after replacement by referring to the main preview content replacement table. As the main notice content replacement table, for example, a conversation content replacement table is provided. Although not shown, in the conversation content replacement table, for each performance content (conversation content) before replacement, the performance content after replacement (already (conversation contents that can be selected for the determined pseudo-three variable main notice contents) are defined. As a result, for example, in a situation where the first preview effect is determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content, if the first preview effect is selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (tentative), the "pseudo 2" The content of the conversation should be similar to the content of the conversation in "Pseudo 3" (for example, the expectation level of the conversation content in "Pseudo 2" will be higher than the expectation level of the conversation content in "Pseudo 3"). It is possible to adjust it so that it does not occur. In addition, in the process of step S9024, the sub CPU 301 maintains the type of jackpot preview performance that was selected as the pseudo 2-variable main notice content (tentative), and displays only the content of the jackpot preview performance. Replace.

If it is determined that the type of jackpot preview effect selected as the pseudo 2-variable main notice content (tentative) in step S9022 is not a specific jackpot preview effect, or if it is selected as the pseudo 2-variable main notice content (tentative) in step S9023 If it is determined that the type of jackpot preview performance that has been performed is not the same as the type of jackpot preview performance determined as the pseudo 3-variable main notice content, the sub CPU 301 selects the pseudo 2-variable main notice content (tentative) selected in step S9021. ) is determined as the formal pseudo-two-variable main notice content (step S9025).

After executing the process of step S9024 or step S9025, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Pseudo 1 variable main notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the pseudo 1 variable main notice content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The pseudo 1 variable main notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 141 is a process performed in the pseudo 1 notice content lottery process (see step S9007 in FIG. 138).

In the pseudo 1 variable main notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 selects the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative) based on the pseudo 1 effect strength (performance strength for pseudo 1) determined in step S9002 of FIG. Select (step S9031). In this process, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery based on random numbers to determine the type of jackpot preview performance that can be performed at the "pseudo 1" stage in the pseudo continuous performance or "no pseudo" performance, and the jackpot preview performance. Decide on the content of the performance. In this embodiment, as jackpot preview performances that can be performed at the "pseudo 1" stage, jackpot preview performances of the same type as the jackpot preview performances that can be performed at the "pseudo 3" stage (first preview performance, second preview performance, A third preview performance, a fourth preview performance, etc.) are provided. Furthermore, the contents of each jackpot preview performance are the same as the contents of the jackpot preview performance that can be performed at the "pseudo 3" stage.

In the process of step S9031, the sub CPU 301 selects one jackpot preview performance (for example, the first preview performance) from among the plurality of types of jackpot preview performances as the pseudo 1-variable main preview content (tentative), and One performance content (for example, first preview performance content C) is selected as the content of the preview performance. Note that the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative) selected here is provisional, and the pseudo 1 variable main notice content may be replaced with another production content (see step S9034 and step S9036). ).

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the type of jackpot preview performance selected as the pseudo 1-variable main preview content (tentative) is a specific jackpot preview performance (step S9032). As described above, in this embodiment, the first preview performance and the fifth preview performance are provided as specific jackpot preview performances.

When it is determined that the type of jackpot preview performance selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative) is a specific jackpot notice performance, the sub CPU 301 executes the jackpot notice selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative). It is determined whether the type of performance is the same as the type of jackpot preview performance determined as the pseudo 2-variable main preview content (see steps S9024 and S9025 in FIG. 140) (step S9033). In this process, if a pseudo continuous effect does not occur (if the process of step S9006 in FIG. 138 is not executed), the sub CPU 301 determines that the type of jackpot preview effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative) is , it is determined that the type is not the same as the type of jackpot preview effect determined as the pseudo 2-variable main preview content.

If it is determined that the type of the jackpot preview effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative) is the same as the type of the jackpot preview effect determined as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content, the sub CPU 301 executes the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative). The variable main notice content (tentative) is replaced with another performance content, and the replaced performance content is determined as the official pseudo 1 variable main notice content (step S9034). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the performance content after replacement by referring to the main preview content replacement table. As described above, as the main preview content replacement table, for example, a conversation content replacement table is provided. Here, the content of the conversation that has already been determined becomes the content of the pseudo two-variable main notice. In addition, in the process of step S9034, the sub CPU 301 maintains the type of jackpot preview performance that was selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative), and displays only the content of the jackpot preview performance. Replace.

If it is determined in step S9033 that the type of jackpot preview effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative) is not the same as the type of jackpot preview effect determined as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content, the sub CPU 301: Whether or not the type of jackpot preview effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative) is the same as the type of jackpot preview effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content (see step S9011 in FIG. 139). is determined (step S9035). In this process, if the pseudo continuous effect does not occur or if the pseudo continuous effect does not progress to "pseudo 3" (if the process of step S9005 in FIG. 138 is not executed), the sub CPU 301 controls the pseudo 1 variable main notice content. It is determined that the type of jackpot preview performance selected as (tentative) is not the same as the type of jackpot preview performance determined as the pseudo three-variable main preview content.

If it is determined that the type of the jackpot preview effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative) is the same as the type of the jackpot preview effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content, the sub CPU 301 executes the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative). The variable main notice content (tentative) is replaced with another performance content, and the replaced performance content is determined as the official pseudo 1 variable main notice content (step S9036). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the performance content after replacement by referring to the main preview content replacement table. As described above, as the main preview content replacement table, for example, a conversation content replacement table is provided. Here, the content of the conversation that has already been determined becomes the pseudo three-variable main notice content. In addition, in the process of step S9036, the sub CPU 301 maintains the type of jackpot preview performance that was selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative), and displays only the content of the jackpot preview performance. Replace.

If it is determined that the type of jackpot preview effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative) in step S9032 is not a specific jackpot preview effect, or if it is selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative) in step S9035 If it is determined that the type of the jackpot preview performance that has been performed is not the same as the type of the jackpot preview performance that has been determined as the pseudo 3-variable main notice content, the sub CPU 301 selects the pseudo 1-variable main notice content (tentative) selected in step S9031. ) is determined as the formal pseudo-two-variable main notice content (step S9037).

After executing the processing in step S9034, step S9036, or step S9037, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Jackpot preview performance (first performance stage only)>
As explained using FIGS. 138 to 141, the first preview performance, the second preview performance, the third preview performance, and the fourth preview performance are each stage of "Pseudo 1" to "Pseudo 3". It can occur in For example, the first preview effect occurs at all stages from "Pseudo 1" to "Pseudo 3," the second preview effect occurs at all stages from "Pseudo 1" to "Pseudo 3," and the second preview effect occurs at all stages from "Pseudo 1" to "Pseudo 3." The third preview effect occurs in all stages from "Pseudo 1" to "Pseudo 3", the fourth preview effect occurs in all stages from "Pseudo 1" to "Pseudo 3", and "Pseudo 1" and " The first preview effect occurs in "Pseudo 2" and the second preview effect occurs in "Pseudo 3", the second preview effect occurs in "Pseudo 1" and "Pseudo 2", and the third preview effect occurs in "Pseudo 3". The first preview performance occurs in "Pseudo 1", the third preview performance occurs in "Pseudo 2" and "Pseudo 3", the first preview performance occurs in "Pseudo 1" and " A second preview effect occurs in "Pseudo 2", and a third preview effect occurs in "Pseudo 3".

In this way, the type of jackpot preview performances performed in each stage of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3" is determined independently of the types of jackpot preview performances performed in other stages. However, if the first preview performance is carried out over multiple stages, the conversation content that occurs during these first preview performances should be made so that there is no sense of discomfort (as the stage of the pseudo-series progresses, the level of expectation will decrease). (see step S9024 in FIG. 140 and steps S9034 and S9036 in FIG. 141).

Here, in this embodiment, an icon may be displayed as the stage in the pseudo-continuous performance progresses. For example, when a "bell" icon is displayed in "Pseudo 1", the mode shifts to "Pseudo 2"; when a "Watermelon" icon is displayed on "Pseudo 2", the mode shifts to "Pseudo 3"; When the "cherry" icon is displayed in "3", the game moves to super reach (reach with relatively high expectation of jackpot). Based on the above, the first preview performance, the second preview performance, the third preview performance, and the fourth preview performance will be described below.

<First preview performance>
FIG. 142(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the first preview effect. FIG. 142(b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the first preview performance.

The first preview performance shown in FIGS. 142(a) and 142(b) is a performance that can occur when a special symbol variation is performed on the first performance stage (see FIG. 137(a)).

In the production corresponding to production number "1", from 3 seconds to 6.5 seconds after the decorative pattern starts changing (resuming), a predetermined character's line is displayed on the display as a first stage conversation. 7, and then fades out. In the production corresponding to production number "2", from the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern to the time when 6.5 seconds have passed, the predetermined character's lines are displayed on the display device as the first stage conversation. 7, and the lines of a predetermined character are displayed on the display device 7 as a conversation for the second row from 6.5 seconds to 10 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern, and then , it is a performance that fades out. In the production corresponding to production number "3", the predetermined character's lines are displayed on the display as a first stage conversation from 3 seconds after the start (resume) of the decorative pattern to 6.5 seconds. 7, and from 6.5 seconds to 10 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern, the lines of a predetermined character are displayed on the display device 7 as dialogue for the second stage, and the decoration A predetermined character's dialogue is displayed on the display device 7 as a conversation for the third stage from 10 seconds after the start (resumption) of symbol fluctuation to 13.5 seconds, and then it fades out. be.

In the production corresponding to production number "4", from 3 seconds to 7.5 seconds after the decorative pattern starts changing (resuming), a predetermined character's line is displayed on the display as a first stage conversation. 7, the button image is displayed on the display device 7, and after that, from the time when 10 seconds have elapsed to the time when 13.5 seconds have elapsed since the start (resume) of the variation of the decorative pattern, the button image is displayed on the display device 7, and the second stage conversation or The lines of a predetermined character are displayed on the display device 7 as a third stage conversation, and are faded out. The button image is an image imitating the effect button 54. The button valid time is set from 8 seconds to 10 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. If the production button 54 is operated during the button valid time, a predetermined character will be displayed as a second-stage conversation or a third-stage conversation for 3.5 seconds from the time the production button 54 is operated. The lines may be displayed on the display device 7. Furthermore, if the effect button 54 is not operated during the button validity period, the lines of a predetermined character may not be displayed on the display device 7.

In the production corresponding to production number "5", the predetermined character's lines are displayed on the display as a first stage conversation from 3 seconds to 7.5 seconds after the decorative pattern starts changing (resuming). 7, the button image is displayed on the display device 7, and thereafter, the icon is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when 10 seconds have elapsed to the time when 13 seconds have elapsed from the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. It's a performance. The button valid time is set from 8 seconds to 10 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. If the effect button 54 is operated during the button validity period, the icon may be displayed on the display device 7 from the time the effect button 54 is operated. At this time, the icon may be displayed on the display device 7 until 12 seconds have elapsed from the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern, regardless of the timing at which the production button 54 is operated. Further, even if the production button 54 is not operated during the button validity period, the icon is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when 10 seconds have elapsed to the time when 12 seconds have elapsed from the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. You can do it like this. If the icon is displayed, the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops. The notice after the icon stops will be described later.

A plurality of conversation contents (lines) are provided for each of the first stage conversation, second stage conversation, and third stage conversation, and one conversation content is selected. Each conversation content is associated with a predetermined font color, and is displayed on the display device 7 in the corresponding font color. The color of the text is associated with the expected level of jackpot. For example, when a pseudo-association occurs, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when a pseudo-association does not occur, and the fact that the conversation content is displayed in purple suggests that a pseudo-association will occur. . Also, when Super Reach (SP) occurs, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when Super Reach does not occur, and the conversation content is displayed in red, indicating that Super Reach occurs (purple). This also suggests that expectations are high. Also, the fact that the conversation content is displayed in gold suggests that there is a very high probability of winning the jackpot (higher expectations than in red). Furthermore, the fact that the conversation content is displayed in rainbow colors suggests that a jackpot (premium SP will occur) has been confirmed (higher expectations than gold). In addition, for the first stage conversation, the conversation content is displayed in one of the default colors, purple, red, and gold, and for the second stage conversation, the conversation content is displayed in the default color, purple, red. The conversation content is displayed in any color among , gold, and gold, and the conversation content for the third row is displayed in any color among red, gold, and rainbow color.

Icons that can be displayed in the first preview presentation include a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, a "cherry" icon, a first specific icon ("premium" icon), and a second specific icon. In this embodiment, the "bell" icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "pseudo 1", and when the "bell" icon is displayed in "pseudo 1", the icon shifts to "pseudo 2". The "watermelon" icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "pseudo 2", and when the "watermelon" icon is displayed in "pseudo 2", the mode shifts to "pseudo 3". The "cherry" icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "pseudo 3", and when the "cherry" icon is displayed in "pseudo 3", the game shifts to a predetermined super reach. The first specific icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "Pseudo 3", and when the first specific icon is displayed, the game shifts to the first specific super reach (premier SP). The second specific icon is an icon that can be displayed at any stage from "Pseudo 1" to "Pseudo 3", and when the second specific icon is displayed, the process shifts to the second specific super reach.

<Second preview performance>
FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the flow of the second preview performance. FIG. 144 is a diagram showing a time chart of the second preview performance. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing the relationship between the second preview performance and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern.

The second preview performance shown in FIGS. 143 and 144 is a performance that can occur when a special symbol variation is performed on the first performance stage (see FIG. 137(a)).

The performance corresponding to the performance number "11" is such that after a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 for 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern, This is a performance that fades out. In the performance corresponding to the performance number "12", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after the start (resumption) of the decorative pattern variation, and the decorative pattern The screen of the display device 7 is displayed as if it is rotating to the left for 4.5 seconds after 3 seconds have passed since the start (resume) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and 4.5 seconds have passed since the start (resume) of the variation of the decorative pattern This is an effect in which items are displayed on the display device 7 from the time when .5 seconds have elapsed to the time when 7.5 seconds have elapsed. Items that can be displayed here include items that suggest at least a reach will occur, items that suggest at least a super reach will occur, items that suggest at least a specific super reach will occur, fake items, etc. can be mentioned.

In the performance corresponding to the performance number "13", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after the start (resumption) of the decorative pattern variation, and the decorative pattern The screen of the display device 7 is displayed in a manner as if it is rotating to the left from the time when 3 seconds have elapsed since the start (resume) of variation of the decorative pattern to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed, and 6 seconds have elapsed since the start (resume) of variation of the decorative pattern. An image related to the start of a predetermined mission is displayed on the display device 7 for 8 seconds after the start of the mission. An image related to the execution is displayed on the display device 7, and an image corresponding to the failure of the mission is displayed from 19 seconds to 22 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. This is an effect in which the screen is displayed on the device 7, and then the display device 7 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "14" is such that a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after the start (resumption) of the decorative pattern variation, and the decorative pattern The screen of the display device 7 is displayed in a manner as if it is rotating to the left from the time when 3 seconds have elapsed since the start (resume) of variation of the decorative pattern to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed, and 6 seconds have elapsed since the start (resume) of variation of the decorative pattern. An image related to the start of a predetermined mission is displayed on the display device 7 for 8 seconds after the start of the mission. An image related to the execution is displayed on the display device 7, and an image corresponding to the mission result being a success is displayed from the time when 19 seconds have passed to the time when 22 seconds have passed since the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. This is an effect in which an icon is displayed on the display device 7, and thereafter, from 22 seconds to 24 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. If the icon is displayed, the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops. The notice after the icon stops will be described later. Note that while a mission is being executed, a reward (icon) that will be given upon a successful mission is suggested, and the icon will definitely be displayed if the mission is successful.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "15" is such that a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern, and The screen of the display device 7 is displayed in a clockwise manner for a period of 4.5 seconds from 3 seconds after the start (resume) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and 4.5 seconds after the start (resume) of the variation of the decorative pattern This is an effect in which reliability-related items are displayed on the display device 7 as a result of a roulette effect in which a plurality of items are displayed variably from the time when 5 seconds have elapsed to the time when 10 seconds have elapsed. Reliability items include multiple items with different jackpot expectations (for example, a first item with a low jackpot expectation, a second item with a medium jackpot expectation, and a third item with a high jackpot expectation). etc.) are provided. For example, in the case of a loss, the first item is more likely to be selected, and in the case of a jackpot, the third item is more likely to be selected. By displaying one of these items, the expectation level of a jackpot is suggested.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "16" is such that a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 for 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after the decorative pattern starts changing (resumed), and the decorative pattern The screen of the display device 7 is displayed in a clockwise manner for a period of 4.5 seconds from 3 seconds after the start (resume) of the variation of the decorative pattern. .Icon-suggesting items are displayed on the display device 7 as a result of a roulette effect in which a plurality of items are displayed in a changing manner from the time when 5 seconds have elapsed to the time when 10 seconds have elapsed, and after that, from the start (resumption) of the change of decorative patterns This is an effect in which an icon is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when 10 seconds have passed to the time when 12 seconds have passed. If the icon is displayed, the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops. The notice after the icon stops will be described later.

The icon suggestion items include a "bell" icon stop suggestion item, a "watermelon" icon stop suggestion item, a "cherry" icon stop suggestion item, a first specific icon stop suggestion item, and a second specific icon stop suggestion item. It is being When the "bell" icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the "bell" icon is displayed immediately after. When the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the "watermelon" icon is displayed immediately after. When the "cherry" icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the "cherry" icon is displayed immediately after. When the first specific icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the first specific icon is displayed immediately after. When the second specific icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the second specific icon is displayed immediately after.

Note that the icons that may be displayed in the second preview performance include a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, a "cherry" icon, a first specific icon, a second specific icon, and a third specific icon. . The "bell" icon, "watermelon" icon, "cherry" icon, the first specific icon, and the second specific icon are icons that can also be displayed in the first preview performance, and these icons are as described above. It is. In the second preview performance, in addition to these icons, a third specific icon may be displayed. The third specific icon is an icon that can be displayed at any stage from "Pseudo 1" to "Pseudo 3", and when the third specific icon is displayed, the process shifts to the third specific super reach.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "17" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 7 is rotated clockwise from the time when 3 seconds have elapsed to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed from the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. This is the same performance as the performance corresponding to performance number "13", except that this is the same performance as the performance corresponding to performance number "13". The performance corresponding to the performance number "18" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 7 is rotated clockwise from the time when 3 seconds have elapsed to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed from the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. This is the same performance as the performance corresponding to performance number "14", except that this is the same performance as the performance corresponding to performance number "14".

The performance corresponding to the performance number "19" is such that a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 for 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. The screen of the display device 7 is displayed in an upwardly rotating manner from the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start (resume) of the variation of the decorative pattern to the time when 4.5 seconds have elapsed since the start (resume) of the variation of the decorative pattern. From the time when 5 seconds have elapsed to the time when 10 seconds have elapsed, an image related to a battle production in which an ally character and an enemy character fight is displayed on the display device 7, and from the time when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern to 12 seconds. This is a performance in which an image corresponding to the failure of the battle performance is displayed on the display device 7 over a period of time when seconds have elapsed.

In the performance corresponding to the performance number "20", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after the start (resumption) of the decorative pattern variation, and the decorative pattern The screen of the display device 7 is displayed in an upwardly rotating manner for 4.5 seconds after 3 seconds have passed since the start (resume) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and From the time when 5 seconds have elapsed to the time when 10 seconds have elapsed, an image related to a battle production in which an ally character and an enemy character fight is displayed on the display device 7, and from the time when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern to 12 seconds. An image corresponding to the success of the battle performance is displayed on the display device 7 for a period of seconds, and then from the time when 12 seconds have passed since the start (resumption) of the variation of the decorative pattern to the time when 14 seconds have passed since This is an effect in which the reliability-related items described above are displayed on the display device 7.

In the performance corresponding to the performance number "21", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after the start (resumption) of the decorative pattern variation, and the decorative pattern The screen of the display device 7 is displayed in an upwardly rotating manner for 4.5 seconds after 3 seconds have passed since the start (resume) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and From the time when 5 seconds have elapsed to the time when 10 seconds have elapsed, an image related to a battle production in which an ally character and an enemy character fight is displayed on the display device 7, and from the time when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern to 12 seconds. An image corresponding to the successful result of the battle performance is displayed on the display device 7 for a period of seconds, and from the time 12 seconds have passed since the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern to the time 14 seconds have elapsed. , the above-mentioned icon suggestion type item is displayed on the display device 7, and thereafter, the icon corresponding to the icon suggestion type item is displayed on the display device from 14 seconds to 16 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. This is the effect displayed in 7. If the icon is displayed, the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops. The notice after the icon stops will be described later.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "22" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 7 is rotated upward from the time when 3 seconds have elapsed to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed from the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. This is the same performance as the performance corresponding to performance number "13", except that this is the same performance. The performance corresponding to the performance number "23" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 7 is rotated upward from the time when 3 seconds have elapsed to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed from the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. This is the same performance as the performance corresponding to performance number "14", except that the performance is different.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "24" is such that a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after the start (resumption) of the decorative pattern variation, and the decorative pattern The screen of the display device 7 is displayed in a downward rotating manner for 4.5 seconds from the time when 3 seconds have elapsed since the start (resumption) of the variation of the decorative pattern. An image related to the start of the continuous hit effect is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when 5 seconds have elapsed to the time when 9 seconds have elapsed. 54), the button image is displayed on the display device 7, and from the time when 15 seconds have elapsed to the time when 18 seconds have elapsed from the start (resume) of the variation of the decorative pattern, the result of the repeat hit effect is determined to be a failure. An image corresponding to the change is displayed on the display device 7, and then the display device 7 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "25" is such that a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from 1.5 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern to 3 seconds after the decorative pattern starts changing. The screen of the display device 7 is displayed in a downward rotating manner for 4.5 seconds from the time when 3 seconds have elapsed since the start (resumption) of the variation of the decorative pattern. An image related to the start of the continuous hit effect is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when 5 seconds have elapsed to the time when 9 seconds have elapsed. 54), the button image is displayed on the display device 7, and from the time when 15 seconds have elapsed to the time when 18 seconds have elapsed since the start (resume) of the variation of the decorative pattern, the result of the repeat hit effect is determined to be successful. An image corresponding to the change is displayed on the display device 7, and then an icon is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when 18 seconds have elapsed to the time when 20 seconds have elapsed since the start (resumption) of the variation of the decorative pattern. be. If the icon is displayed, the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops. The notification after the icon stops will be described later. It should be noted that during the execution of the continuous hit effect, a reward (icon) that will be given when the continuous hit effect is successful is suggested, and the icon will definitely be displayed if the continuous hit effect is successful.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "26" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 7 is rotated downward from the time when 3 seconds have elapsed to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed from the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. This is the same performance as the performance corresponding to performance number "13", except that this is the same performance as the performance corresponding to performance number "13". The performance corresponding to the performance number "27" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 7 is rotated downward from the time when 3 seconds have elapsed to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed from the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. This is the same performance as the performance corresponding to performance number "14", except that this is the same performance as the performance corresponding to performance number "14".

FIG. 145(a) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "24" and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The performance corresponding to the performance number "24" may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern is 20 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 145(a), the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern exhibit the same behavior, and fluctuate at high speed until 18 seconds have passed from the start (resumption) of fluctuation, and then 2 seconds after that. It stops and the pattern is confirmed. As a result, from the player's perspective, each decorative pattern appears to have stopped when the second preview effect ends and the normal background returns. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when the production corresponding to production number "24" is performed.

FIG. 145(b) shows the relationship between the performance corresponding to the performance number "25" and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The performance corresponding to the performance number "25" may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern is 20 seconds is determined. Figure 145
In the example shown in (b), the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern each exhibit the same behavior and maintain a state of high-speed fluctuation until 20 seconds have elapsed from the start (resumption) of fluctuation. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when the production corresponding to production number "25" is performed.

FIG. 145(c) shows the relationship between the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "13", "17", "22", and "26" and the variation patterns of the decorative symbols. The performances corresponding to the performance numbers "13", "17", "22", and "26" may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern is 24 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 145(c), the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern exhibit the same behavior, and fluctuate at high speed until 22 seconds have passed from the start (resumption) of fluctuation, and then 2 seconds after that. It stops and the pattern is confirmed. As a result, from the player's perspective, each decorative pattern appears to have stopped when the second preview performance ends and the normal background returns. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when performances corresponding to performance numbers "13", "17", "22", and "26" are performed.

FIG. 145(d) shows the relationship between the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "14", "18", "23", and "27" and the variation patterns of the decorative symbols. The performances corresponding to the performance numbers "14", "18", "23", and "27" may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern is 24 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 145(d), the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern each exhibit the same behavior and maintain a state of high-speed fluctuation until 24 seconds have passed from the start (resumption) of fluctuation. . Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when performances corresponding to performance numbers "14", "18", "23", and "27" are performed.

<3rd preview performance>
FIG. 146 is a diagram showing the flow of the third preview effect. FIG. 147 is a diagram showing a time chart of the third preview performance. FIG. 148 is a diagram showing the relationship between the third preview performance and the variation pattern of decorative symbols.

The third preview performance shown in FIGS. 146 and 147 is a performance that can occur when a special symbol variation is performed on the first performance stage (see FIG. 137(a)).

The performances corresponding to the performance numbers "41" and "42" can occur only in "pseudo 1". The performances corresponding to the performance numbers "43" to "48" can occur only in "Pseudo 2". The performances corresponding to the performance numbers "49" to "52" can occur only in "pseudo 3". Icons that can be displayed in the third preview performance include a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, and a "cherry" icon. The icon displayed in "Pseudo 1" is determined to be the "bell" icon, and the icon displayed in "Pseudo 2" is determined to be the "Watermelon" icon, which is displayed in "Pseudo 3". The icon is determined to be a "cherry" icon, and when the "cherry" icon is displayed in "pseudo 3", it develops into a predetermined super reach. Note that in the third preview performance, the first specific icon, the second specific icon, and the third specific icon are not displayed.

In "pseudo 2" and "pseudo 3", enemy attack effects are performed. In the enemy attack performance, the three numerical symbols are repeatedly changed and stopped, and each time the continuous number is stopped and displayed, the ally character attacks the enemy character. Continuous numbers (combinations of three numbers) include "1, 2, 2", "2, 3, 3", "3, 4, 4", "4, 5, 5", "5, 6".・6'', ``6.7.7'', and ``7.1.1'' are provided. When an ally character attacks an enemy character, the enemy character's health gauge decreases. The health gauge indicates the possibility of obtaining the icon. If an enemy character falls in conjunction with the instigation as to whether or not the icon will stop (icon stop instigation), situations such as icon acquisition and tenpai (deployment to SP) will be given to the player. . Note that predetermined characters may be displayed upon defeating an enemy character, and the expected degree of jackpot is suggested by the color of the characters.

Specifically, the performance corresponding to the performance number "41" is a performance that fades out after the image related to the title completion excitement of the third preview performance is displayed on the display device 7. The performance corresponding to the performance number "42" is such that after the image related to the title completion promotion of the third preview performance is displayed on the display device 7, an image corresponding to the success of the title completion promotion is displayed on the display device 7. After that, the "bell" icon is definitely displayed (stopped) on the display device 7. When the "bell" icon is displayed (the "bell" icon has been acquired), the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops.

There are four timings at which title completion prompting may occur. Specifically, when the image related to the title completion promotion is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when 1 second has elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (timing 1), and when the image related to the title completion promotion is displayed from the time when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern. (timing 2), and when an image related to title completion incitement is displayed on the display device 7 from the time 9 seconds have elapsed since the start of variation of the decorative pattern (timing 3). There is a case (timing 4) in which an image related to title completion prompting is displayed on the display device 7 from the point in time when 13 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern. Title completion prompting occurs at one of these four timings.

In the performance corresponding to the performance number "43", after the enemy attack performance is performed, an image related to the icon stop instigation (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and after that, the "watermelon" icon is confirmed on the display device 7. This is a performance that is displayed (stops). If the "watermelon" icon is displayed (the "watermelon" icon has been acquired), then the icon is stopped and the preview is displayed. In the performance corresponding to the performance number "44", after the enemy attack performance is performed, an image related to the icon stop instigation (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and further, the continuous roll is displayed in a stopped state on the display device 7. After that, an image related to the icon stop prompting (second time) is displayed on the display device 7, an image corresponding to the failed icon stop prompting is displayed on the display device 7, and then the display device 7 displays a wipe display. This is a performance that returns to the normal background.

In the performance corresponding to the performance number "45", after the enemy attack performance is performed, an image related to the icon stop instigation (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and further, the continuous roll is displayed in a stopped state on the display device 7. After that, an image related to the icon stop prompting (second time) is displayed on the display device 7, and then the "watermelon" icon is definitely displayed (stopped) on the display device 7. If the "watermelon" icon is displayed (the "watermelon" icon has been acquired), then the icon is stopped and the preview is displayed. In the performance corresponding to the performance number "46", after the enemy attack performance is performed, an image related to the icon stop incitement (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and furthermore, the continuous roll is displayed in a stopped state on the display device 7. After that, an image related to the icon stop prompting (second time) is displayed on the display device 7, and further, after the continuation number is stopped and displayed on the display device 7, an image related to the icon stop prompting (third time) is displayed. This is an effect in which an image is displayed on the device 7, which corresponds to the failure of the icon stop prompting, and then the display device 7 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

In the performance corresponding to the performance number "47", after the enemy attack performance is performed, an image related to the icon stop instigation (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and further, the continuous roll is displayed in a stopped state on the display device 7. After that, an image related to the icon stop prompting (second time) is displayed on the display device 7, and further, after the continuation number is stopped and displayed on the display device 7, an image related to the icon stop prompting (third time) is displayed. This is an effect in which the "watermelon" icon is displayed on the device 7, and then the "watermelon" icon is definitely displayed (stopped) on the display device 7. If the "watermelon" icon is displayed (the "watermelon" icon has been acquired), then the icon is stopped and the preview is displayed. In the performance corresponding to the performance number "48", after the enemy attack performance is performed, an image related to the icon stop instigation (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and further, the continuous roll is displayed in a stopped state on the display device 7. After that, an image related to the icon stop prompting (second time) is displayed on the display device 7, and further, after the continuation number is stopped and displayed on the display device 7, an image related to the icon stop prompting (third time) is displayed. This is a performance that is displayed on the device 7, and then a number pattern is displayed on the display device 7 in a Tenpai mode, and that progresses to the third specific super reach (first half) through a predetermined connecting performance.

In the performance corresponding to the performance number "49", after the enemy attack performance is performed, an image related to the icon stop incitement (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and after that, the "cherry" icon is confirmed on the display device 7. This is a performance that is displayed (stops). When the "cherry" icon is displayed (the "cherry" icon is acquired), the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops. In the performance corresponding to the performance number "50", after the enemy attack performance is performed, an image related to the icon stop incitement (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and further, the continuous roll is displayed in a stopped state on the display device 7. After that, an image related to the icon stop prompting (second time) is displayed on the display device 7, and thereafter, the “cherry” icon is definitely displayed (stopped) on the display device 7. When the "cherry" icon is displayed (the "cherry" icon is acquired), the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops.

In the performance corresponding to the performance number "51", after the enemy attack performance is performed, an image related to the icon stop instigation (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and further, the continuous roll is displayed in a stopped state on the display device 7. After that, an image related to the icon stop prompting (second time) is displayed on the display device 7, and further, after the continuation number is stopped and displayed on the display device 7, an image related to the icon stop prompting (third time) is displayed. This is an effect in which the "cherry" icon is displayed on the device 7 and then the "cherry" icon is definitely displayed (stopped) on the display device 7. When the "cherry" icon is displayed (the "cherry" icon is acquired), the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops. In the performance corresponding to the performance number "52", after the enemy attack performance is performed, an image related to the icon stop instigation (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and further, the continuous roll is displayed in a stopped state on the display device 7. After that, an image related to the icon stop prompting (second time) is displayed on the display device 7, and further, after the continuation number is stopped and displayed on the display device 7, an image related to the icon stop prompting (third time) is displayed. This is a performance that is displayed on the device 7, and then a number pattern is displayed on the display device 7 in a Tenpai mode, and after a predetermined connecting performance, the third specific super reach (second half) is developed.

In addition, in the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "49" to "52", the images related to the icon stop inciting (first time), the icon stop inciting (second time), or the icon stop inciting (third time) are displayed on the display device 7. , the button image is also displayed on the display device 7. This allows the operation of the production button 54 to be accepted. When a button image is displayed, a predetermined button valid time is set (for example, 2 seconds for displaying an image related to stopping the icon...see FIG. 147). If the effect button 54 is operated during the button valid time, the display following the icon stop prompting will be displayed at the time the effect button 54 is operated (immediately after the operation even if the button valid time has not expired). (Display of a "cherry" icon, display of a continuation number, or display of a ten-pai number pattern) is performed. On the other hand, if the production button 54 is not operated during the button valid time, at the end of the button valid time (at the moment the button valid time ends), the display following the icon stop prompting (icon display, continuation) Display of rolled numbers or ten-pai display of numerical symbols). Such a button image is not displayed in the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "43" to "48". That is, in the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "43" to "48", even if the performance button 54 is operated while the image related to the icon stop instigation is displayed, this operation will trigger the (icon (Before the 2 seconds in which the image related to the stop motion is displayed), the display following the icon stop motion (the display of the "cherry" icon, the display of the continuation number, or the display of the number symbol) must be performed. There isn't. Further, when the enemy attack performance starts, a predetermined movable accessory moves to indicate the expectation of a jackpot. The relationship between the operating mode of the movable accessory and the jackpot expectation level is the same as the notice after the icon stops, which will be described later.

FIG. 148(a) shows the relationship between the performance corresponding to the performance number "42" (timing 1) and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The performance corresponding to the performance number "42" (timing 1) may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern in "pseudo 1" is 12 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 148(a), the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern each exhibit the same behavior, fluctuating at high speed until 2 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation, and then decelerating over 1 second. Then, after stopping for 1 second, it fluctuates again at high speed. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when the production corresponding to production number "42" (timing 1) is performed.

FIG. 148(b) shows the relationship between the performance corresponding to the performance number "42" (timing 2) and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The performance corresponding to the performance number "42" (timing 2) may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern in "Pseudo 1" is 16 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 148(b), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of the fluctuation until 3.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and continues for 2.5 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates again at high speed. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 6 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and then fluctuates at high speed again. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, sways for 2 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed again. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when the production corresponding to production number "42" (timing 2) is performed.

FIG. 148(c) shows the relationship between the performance corresponding to the performance number "42" (timing 3) and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The performance corresponding to the performance number "42" (timing 3) may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern in "Pseudo 1" is 20 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 148(c), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of the fluctuation until 7 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 2.5 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates again at high speed. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 10.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed again. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 8.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, sways for 1 second, and then fluctuates at high speed again. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when the production corresponding to production number "42" (timing 3) is performed.

FIG. 148(d) shows the relationship between the performance corresponding to the performance number "42" (timing 4) and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The performance corresponding to the performance number "42" (timing 4) may occur when a sub-fluctuation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern in "Pseudo 1" is 24 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 148(d), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of the fluctuation until 11 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 2.5 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates again at high speed. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 14.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed again. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 12.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, sways for 1 second, and then fluctuates at high speed again. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when the production corresponding to production number "42" (timing 4) is performed.

Note that "stop" in the decorative pattern in FIG. 148 means a temporary stop display. As described above, the state of temporary stop display is a state where the decorative pattern is vibrating or the like, and it cannot be said that it is completely stopped and displayed.

<4th preview performance>
FIG. 149 is a diagram showing the flow of the fourth preview performance. FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a time chart of the fourth preview performance. FIG. 151 is a diagram showing the relationship between the fourth preview performance and the variation pattern of decorative symbols.

The fourth preview performance shown in FIGS. 149 and 150 is a performance that can occur when a special symbol variation is performed on the first performance stage (see FIG. 137(a)).

The performances corresponding to the performance numbers "71" and "72" can occur only in "pseudo 1". The performances corresponding to the performance numbers "73" to "77" may occur in "Pseudo 2" or "Pseudo 3". Icons that may be displayed in the fourth preview performance include a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, and a "cherry" icon. The icon displayed in "Pseudo 1" is determined to be the "bell" icon, and the icon displayed in "Pseudo 2" is determined to be the "Watermelon" icon, which is displayed in "Pseudo 3". The icon is determined to be a "cherry" icon, and when the "cherry" icon is displayed in "pseudo 3", it develops into a predetermined super reach. Note that in the fourth preview performance, the first specific icon, the second specific icon, and the third specific icon are not displayed.

Specifically, in the production corresponding to the production number "71", the "4" symbol stops as the left decorative symbol, and the image related to the incitement as to whether or not the "4" symbol becomes tenpai (4 symbol tenpai incitement) is displayed. After being displayed on the display device 7, an image corresponding to the failure of the four-symbol tenpai incitement is displayed on the display device 7, and the display device 7 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background. In the performance corresponding to the performance number "72", the "4" symbol stops as the left decorative symbol, and an image related to inciting whether or not the "4" symbol becomes tenpai (4 symbol tenpai incitement) is displayed on the display device 7. After being displayed, an image corresponding to the successful 4-symbol tenpai incitement is displayed on the display device 7, an image that becomes normal reach in the special background state after success is displayed on the display device 7, and then the icon is displayed on the display device This is the effect displayed in 7. If the icon is displayed, the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops.

Two timings are provided as timings at which the 4-symbol tenpai incitement can occur. Specifically, when the image related to the 4-symbol tenpai incitement is displayed on the display device 7 from the time when 3.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative patterns (timing 1), and from the time when 7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative patterns. There is a case (timing 2) in which an image related to the 4-symbol tenpai incitement is displayed on the display device 7. The 4-symbol tenpai incitement occurs at one of these two timings.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "73" is an image related to inciting whether or not the "4" symbol will become tenpai after entering the special background state (4 symbol tenpai incitement) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides. is displayed on the display device 7, and then an icon is displayed on the display device 7. If the icon is displayed, the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops. The performance corresponding to the performance number "74" is an image related to inciting whether or not the "4" symbol will become tenpai after entering the special background state (4 symbol tenpai incitement) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides. is displayed on the display device 7, and an image related to inciting whether or not the "7" symbol becomes tenpai (7 symbol tenpai incitement) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 7, and then the icon is the effect displayed on the display device 7. If the icon is displayed, the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "75" is an image related to inciting whether or not the "4" symbol becomes Tenpai after entering the special background state (4 symbol Tenpai incitement) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides. is displayed on the display device 7, and an image related to inciting whether or not the "7" symbol becomes tenpai (7 symbol tenpai incitement) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 7, and "4" is displayed on the display device 7. An image related to inciting whether or not the symbol will become tenpai (4 symbol tenpai inciting) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 7, and an image related to inciting whether or not the "7" symbol will become tenpai (4 symbol tenpai inciting) is displayed on the display device 7. This is an effect in which an image related to the 7-symbol ten-pai instigation) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 7, and then an icon is displayed on the display device 7. If the icon is displayed, the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "76" is an image related to inciting whether or not the "4" symbol becomes tenpai (4 symbol tenpai incitement) after entering the special background state, and an image in which the "4" symbol slides. is displayed on the display device 7, and an image related to inciting whether or not the "7" symbol becomes tenpai (7 symbol tenpai incitement) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 7, and "4" is displayed on the display device 7. An image related to inciting whether or not the symbol will become tenpai (4 symbol tenpai inciting) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 7, and an image related to inciting whether or not the "7" symbol will become tenpai (4 symbol tenpai inciting) is displayed on the display device 7. An image related to a 7-symbol Tenpai incitement) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 7, and an image related to an instigation as to which of the "4" symbol and the "7" symbol will become a Tenpai. is displayed on the display device 7, and then an icon is displayed on the display device 7. If the icon is displayed, the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "77" is an image related to inciting whether or not the "4" symbol becomes Tenpai after entering the special background state (4 symbol Tenpai incitement) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides. is displayed on the display device 7, and an image related to inciting whether or not the "7" symbol becomes tenpai (7 symbol tenpai incitement) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 7, and "4" is displayed on the display device 7. An image related to inciting whether or not the symbol becomes tenpai (4 symbol tenpai inciting) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 7, and an image related to inciting whether or not the "7" symbol becomes tenpai (4 symbol tenpai inciting) is displayed on the display device 7. An image related to a 7-symbol ten-pai incitement) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 7, and an image related to the instigation of which of the "4" symbol and the "7" symbol will become a ten-pai. is displayed on the display device 7, and then either the “4” symbol or the “7” symbol is displayed on the display device 7 in Tenpai mode, and after a predetermined connecting effect, it develops into the third specific super reach. It is a performance that

In addition, after the preview is given after the icon stops via the performance corresponding to the performance number "72" in "Pseudo 1", the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "73" to "77" are performed in "Pseudo 2". In the case of "Pseudo 2", in the production corresponding to production numbers "73" to "77", the "4" symbol becomes Tenpai as a result of the production in "Pseudo 1" before entering the dedicated background state. The next background will be displayed. In addition, in "Pseudo 2", after a preview is given after the icon stops via any of the productions corresponding to production numbers "73" to "76", in "Pseudo 3", production number "73" is given. ” to “77”, when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers “73” to “77” in “Pseudo 3” are performed, the effects of the effects in “Pseudo 2” are performed before entering the dedicated background state. As a result, the background after the "4" symbol becomes tenpai is displayed.

FIG. 151(a) shows the relationship between the performance corresponding to the performance number "71" (timing 1) and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The performance corresponding to the performance number "71" (timing 1) may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern is 20 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 151(a), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 3.5 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 9 seconds. After shaking, it further fluctuates at high speed for 0.5 seconds, decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and after shaking for 2.5 seconds, the pattern is confirmed. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of the fluctuation until 18 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and becomes finalized. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 8 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 3 seconds, slides for 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then, It fluctuates at high speed for 1 second, decelerates for 1 second, stops for 1 second, and after shaking for 2 seconds, the pattern is finalized. As a result, players can request that after the fourth preview effect ends and the background returns to the normal background, a sub-variation pattern similar to the default variation when a sub-variation pattern is determined in which the variation time of decorative symbols is 8 seconds. Each decorative pattern appears to change depending on the mode. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when the production corresponding to production number "71" (timing 1) is performed. Note that the default fluctuation will be described later.

FIG. 151(b) shows the relationship between the performance corresponding to the performance number "71" (timing 2) and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The performance corresponding to the performance number "71" (timing 2) may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern is 24 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 151(b), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 7 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 2 seconds, stops for 1 second, and sways for 9 seconds. , furthermore, it fluctuates at high speed for 0.5 seconds, decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and after shaking for 2.5 seconds, the pattern is determined. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 22 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and becomes finalized. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 11.5 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, sways for 0.5 seconds, decelerates for 3 seconds, slides for 1 second, stops for 1 second, After shaking for 2 seconds, it further fluctuates at high speed for 1 second, decelerates for 1 second, stops for 1 second, and after shaking for 2 seconds, the pattern is finalized. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when the production corresponding to production number "71" (timing 2) is performed.

FIG. 151(c) shows the relationship between the performance corresponding to the performance number "72" (timing 1) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. The performance corresponding to the performance number "72" (timing 1) may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern in "Pseudo 1" is 20 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 151(c), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 3.5 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 12 seconds. After shaking, it continues to fluctuate at high speed for 2 seconds. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 14 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then moves at a speed of 1 frame advance every 0.5 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed for another 2 seconds. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 3 seconds, sways for 7 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed for another 2 seconds. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when the production corresponding to production number "72" (timing 1) is performed.

FIG. 151(d) shows the relationship between the performance corresponding to the performance number "72" (timing 2) and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The performance corresponding to the performance number "72" (timing 2) may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern in "Pseudo 1" is 24 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 151(d), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of the fluctuation until 11 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 8.5 seconds. After shaking, it continues to fluctuate at high speed for 2 seconds. The medium decorative pattern changes at a high speed until 18 seconds have elapsed from the start of the movement, then moves at a speed of 1 frame advance every 0.5 seconds, and then changes at a high speed for another 2 seconds. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 12 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 3 seconds, sways for 7 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed for another 2 seconds. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when the production corresponding to production number "72" (timing 2) is performed.

<Notice after icon stops>
FIG. 152 is a diagram showing the content of the presentation of the notice after the icon stops. 153 and 154 are diagrams showing the relationship between the post-icon stop notice and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern.

The post-icon stop notice corresponding to the performance number "91" is a performance performed after the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon stops (is definitely displayed). In the post-icon stop notice corresponding to the performance number "91", after the first transition performance is performed, the predetermined movable accessory moves in the first manner. The post-icon stop notice corresponding to the performance number "92" is a performance performed after the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon stops (is definitely displayed). In the post-icon stop notice corresponding to the performance number "92", after the first transition performance is performed, the predetermined movable accessory moves in the second mode.

The post-icon stop notice corresponding to the performance number "93" is a performance performed after the "cherry" icon has stopped (definitely displayed). In the preview after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "93", a second transition performance is performed. The post-icon stop notice corresponding to the performance number "94" is a performance performed after the first specific icon has stopped (definitely displayed). In the preview after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "94", a third transition performance is performed. The post-icon stop notice corresponding to the performance number "95" is a performance performed after the second specific icon has stopped (definitely displayed). In the preview after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "95", a fourth transition performance is performed. The post-icon stop notice corresponding to the performance number "96" is a performance performed after the third specific icon has stopped (definitely displayed). In the preview after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "96", a fifth transition performance is performed. In the notice after icon stop corresponding to performance numbers "93" to "96", predetermined movable accessories do not operate.

Note that "the icon has stopped (definitely displayed)" means that the icon is stopped and displayed separately from the decorative pattern. As described in detail in this embodiment, the icon serves as a mark indicating the development to the next stage in pseudo-reach or super reach. Therefore, at the time when the icon is stopped and displayed, the jackpot determination result has not yet been derived, and at that time, at least one of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol changes. It is now displayed. In addition, when an icon is stopped and displayed, it is assumed that the icon will be displayed provisionally before the display is finalized, so in the above, the expression "definitely displayed" is used to refer to the icon. It is made clear that this is not a temporary indication. "Temporary display" means that an icon is displayed in a manner that suggests that there is a possibility that the icon will be displayed permanently (such as a display that encourages the icon to be stopped and displayed). is carried out).

FIG. 153(a) shows the relationship between the post-stop notice of the icon corresponding to the performance number "91" and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. In the preview after the icon stops corresponding to the production number "91", the first transitional production is performed for 4 seconds, then the lights are turned on for 1 second, and the predetermined movement is performed for 1 second. The accessory operates in the first manner, and then the movable accessory is stored. The first connection effect is a effect in which a predetermined background image (first background image) is displayed on the display device 7. On the other hand, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern continue to fluctuate at high speed. If the "bell" icon is displayed in "Pseudo 1" and a notice after the icon stops corresponding to the production number "91" occurs, "Pseudo 2" will be displayed 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon stops. Become. In addition, if the "Watermelon" icon is displayed in "Pseudo 2" and a notice after the icon stops corresponding to the production number "91" occurs, 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon stops, "Pseudo 3" ”. That is, the movement of the predetermined movable accessory is performed at the next stage in the pseudo series.

FIG. 153(b) shows the relationship between the icon post-stop notice corresponding to the performance number "92" and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. In the preview after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "92", after the first transition performance is performed for 4 seconds, the lights are turned on for 1 second, and the predetermined display is performed for 2.5 seconds. The movable accessory operates in the second manner, and then the movable accessory is stored. On the other hand, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern continue to fluctuate at high speed. If the "bell" icon is displayed in "Pseudo 1" and a notice after the icon stops corresponding to the production number "92" occurs, "Pseudo 2" will be displayed 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon stops. Become. In addition, if the "Watermelon" icon is displayed in "Pseudo 2" and a notice after the icon stops corresponding to the production number "92" occurs, 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon stops, "Pseudo 3" ”. That is, the movement of the predetermined movable accessory is performed at the next stage in the pseudo series.

The predetermined movable accessory is configured to be able to be displaced between a first state, a second state, and a third state. Specifically, when the predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the third state, the predetermined movable accessory passes through the second state. That is, the predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the third state by being displaced from the first state to the second state and then from the second state to the third state. Is possible. In the notice after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "91", a predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the second state (one stage displacement). On the other hand, in the post-icon stop notice corresponding to the performance number "92", a predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the third state (two-stage displacement). In the first state, the predetermined movable accessory is stored in a predetermined position, and when the preview ends after the icon stops, the predetermined movable accessory returns to the first state.

In addition, the time when the predetermined movable accessory is operating in the preview after the icon stops corresponding to the production number "92" is the time when the predetermined movable accessory is operating in the preview after the icon stops corresponding to the production number "91". It's been longer than the time I was there. The time period during which the predetermined movable accessory is in operation corresponds to the jackpot expectation level, and the longer the time period, the higher the jackpot expectation level. The jackpot expectation level is the probability that the result of the jackpot judgment related to the current special symbol change is a jackpot, and is an index showing how much a jackpot can be expected when the relevant performance occurs. As a result, when a notice after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "92" occurs, the player is given a greater chance of hitting the jackpot compared to when a notice after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "91" occurs. It can create a great sense of expectation.

FIG. 154(a) shows the relationship between the icon post-stop notice corresponding to the performance number "93" and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. In the preview after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "93", a second transition performance is performed for 4 seconds. The second connection effect is an effect in which a predetermined background image (second background image) is displayed on the display device 7. On the other hand, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern continue to fluctuate at high speed. If the "Cherry" icon is displayed in "Pseudo 3" and a notice after the icon stops corresponding to the production number "93" occurs, the predetermined super reach will be reached 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon stops. .

FIG. 154(b) shows the relationship between the icon post-stop notice corresponding to the performance number "94" and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. In the preview after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "94", a third transition performance is performed for 4 seconds. The third connecting effect is a effect in which a predetermined background image (third background image) is displayed on the display device 7. On the other hand, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern continue to fluctuate at high speed. When the first specific icon is displayed and a post-icon stop notice corresponding to the performance number "94" is generated, the first specific super reach occurs 4 seconds after the start of the post-icon stop notice.

FIG. 154(c) shows the relationship between the icon post-stop notice corresponding to the performance number "95" and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. In the preview after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "95", a fourth transition performance is performed for 4 seconds. The fourth connecting effect is an effect in which a predetermined background image (fourth background image) is displayed on the display device 7. On the other hand, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern continue to fluctuate at high speed. When the second specific icon is displayed and a post-icon stop notice corresponding to the performance number "95" is generated, the second specific super reach occurs 4 seconds after the start of the post-icon stop notice.

FIG. 154(d) shows the relationship between the post-icon stop notice corresponding to the performance number "96" and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. In the preview after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "96", a fifth transitional performance is performed for 4 seconds. The fifth connection effect is an effect in which a predetermined background image (fifth background image) is displayed on the display device 7. On the other hand, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern continue to fluctuate at high speed. When a post-icon stop notice corresponding to the performance number "96" is generated by displaying the third specific icon, the third specific super reach occurs 4 seconds after the start of the post-icon stop notice.

In the first connecting effect, the second connecting effect, the third connecting effect, the fourth connecting effect, and the fifth connecting effect, different background images (first background image to fifth background image) are used. ) is displayed on the display device 7. Basically, the same transition effect (first transition effect) is performed when the "bell" icon is displayed and when the "watermelon" icon is displayed. A connecting effect (common) and a first connecting effect (exclusive) are provided. In the notice after the icon stops, which is generated by displaying the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon in the jackpot notice performance other than the third notice performance, the first connecting performance (common) is performed. On the other hand, in the post-icon-stop preview that occurs when the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon is displayed in the third preview performance, the first transition performance (dedicated) is performed. The background image displayed in the first connection effect (dedicated) is slightly different from the background image displayed in the first connection effect (common). In the third preview performance, a different background image than usual is displayed as the background image for the third preview performance, and the background image dedicated to the third preview performance is also used as the background image displayed in the preview after the icon stops. are doing. This makes it possible to eliminate the sense of discomfort caused by the normal background image being displayed in the post-icon-stop preview that occurs following the third preview performance.

Similarly, as the second transition performance, a second transition performance (common) and a second transition performance (dedicated) are provided. In the post-icon-stop preview that occurs when the "cherry" icon is displayed in jackpot preview performances other than the third preview performance, a second connecting performance (common) is performed. On the other hand, in the post-icon-stop preview that occurs when the "cherry" icon is displayed in the third preview performance, a second transition performance (dedicated) is performed. The background image displayed in the second connection effect (dedicated) is slightly different from the background image displayed in the second connection effect (common). As mentioned above, in the third preview performance, the first specific icon, the second specific icon, and the third specific icon are not displayed. Concerning the 5th transition performance, there is no special performance for the 3rd preview performance.

Note that in this specification, a "connection effect" refers to an effect in which a background image is displayed to fill the gap between the end of one effect and the start of another effect. The first connecting effect is a connecting effect exclusively used when a "bell" icon or a "watermelon" icon is displayed. Further, the second connecting effect is a special connecting effect when the "cherry" icon is displayed, the third connecting effect is a special connecting effect when the first specific icon is displayed, and the fourth connecting effect is a special connecting effect when the "cherry" icon is displayed. The connecting effect is a connecting effect exclusively used when the second specific icon is displayed, and the fifth connecting effect is a connecting effect exclusively used when the third specific icon is displayed.

Further, the "bell" icon may be displayed during the third specific super reach (first half), and the "cherry" icon may be displayed during the third specific super reach (second half). If the "bell" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach, the first transition effect will be performed as a preview after the icon stops, but the background image displayed at that time will be different from the first transition effect ( The background image displayed is slightly different from the background image displayed in (common). Similarly, if the "cherry" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach, a second transitional effect will be performed as a preview after the icon stops, but the background image displayed at that time will be the same as the second one. It is slightly different from the background image displayed in the joint effect (common). In the third specific super reach, a battle is held between an ally character (first ally character) and an enemy character. When the "bell" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach (first half), the process shifts to the third specific super reach (second half). When the "cherry" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach (second half), the game shifts to a predetermined super reach.

The third specific super reach is a super reach that can only occur in the first production stage (see FIG. 137(a)). On the other hand, the predetermined super reach is a super reach that can occur in any of the first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage. When the "cherry" icon is displayed in the jackpot preview performance, the game moves to the same super reach (predetermined super reach) regardless of the type of the jackpot preview performance. In a predetermined super reach, other ally characters participate in the battle against one ally character. Main ally characters (ally characters that appear frequently) are associated with the first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage, respectively. One ally character appears, a second ally character basically appears in the second production stage, and a third ally character basically appears in the third production stage. For example, the predetermined characters (ally characters) that appear in the first preview performance, the second preview performance, and the third preview performance described above are all first ally characters. When a predetermined super reach occurs in the first production stage, a second ally character participates in the battle against the first ally character. Also, if a predetermined super reach occurs in the second production stage, the third ally character will participate in the battle against the second ally character, and if a predetermined super reach occurs in the third production stage, the third ally character will participate in the battle against the second ally character. A first ally character participates in the battle against three ally characters.

As explained above, when the icon is displayed in the jackpot preview performance, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern continue to fluctuate at high speed. In this embodiment, when the pseudo-continuous presentation progresses from one stage to the next, the decorative symbols may or may not be displayed temporarily. If the decorative pattern is not temporarily stopped and displayed when progressing from one stage to the next stage in the pseudo-continuous performance, displaying an icon is a condition for progressing to the next stage.

<Specific aspects of jackpot preview performance>
155 to 157 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the first preview performance. FIGS. 158 to 160 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the second preview performance. FIGS. 161 to 164 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the third preview performance. FIGS. 165 to 167 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the fourth preview performance. FIGS. 168 and 169 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the notice after the icon is stopped. FIG. 170 is a diagram for explaining an example of an icon.

FIG. 155 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 in the performance corresponding to the performance number "3" (see FIG. 142(a)). In the production shown in FIG. 155, first, the decorative pattern 9001 starts to change on the display device 7 (see FIG. 155(a)), and then the first ally character 9002 appears (see FIG. 155(b)). , Subsequently, the first ally character 9002's line (``Isn't it hot?'') is displayed on the display device 7 as a conversation for the first stage (see FIG. 155(c)), and then a conversation for the second stage is displayed. The first ally character 9002's line (``It's hot!'') is displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 155(d)), and then the first ally character 9002's line (``It's hot!'') is displayed as the third stage conversation. It's too hot!'') is displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 155(e)), and then the decorative pattern 9001 becomes a reach mode (see FIG. 155(f)).

FIG. 156 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 in the performance corresponding to the performance number "5" (see FIG. 142(a)). In the production shown in FIG. 156, first, as a production in "pseudo 1", the decorative pattern 9001 starts to change on the display device 7 (see FIG. 156(a)), and then the first ally character 9002 appears. At the same time, the first ally character 9002's line (“Press the button”) is displayed on the display device 7 as a conversation for the first stage (see FIG. 156(b)), and then the button image 9003 is displayed on the display device 7. (see FIG. 156(c)), then a "bell" icon confirmed image 9011 is displayed in a large size on the display device 7 (see FIG. 156(d)), and then a pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021 is displayed. On the display device 7, the "bell" icon is displayed smaller than the finalized image 9011 (see FIG. 156(e)), and then shifts to "pseudo 2" (see FIG. 156(f)). The “bell” icon confirmed image 9011 is an image corresponding to the “bell” icon being displayed definitively. The pseudo-continuation stage notification bell image 9021 is an image corresponding to the pseudo-continuation stage being "pseudo 2", and is continuously displayed at a predetermined position on the display device 7 during "pseudo 2".

In FIG. 157, after the effect shown in FIG. 156 is performed in "Pseudo 1", the effect corresponding to the effect number "5" (see FIG. 142(a)) is performed in "Pseudo 2" and "Pseudo 3". An example of an image displayed on the display device 7 in the case shown in FIG. In the production shown in FIG. 157, after transitioning to "pseudo 2" as shown in FIG. The icon confirmed image 9012 is displayed in a large size on the display device 7 (see FIG. 157(a)), the watermelon image 9022 for pseudo-linked stage notification is displayed on the display device 7, and the state shifts to "pseudo 3" (see FIG. 157(b)). )reference). The “watermelon” icon confirmed image 9012 is an image corresponding to the “watermelon” icon being definitely displayed. The pseudo-continuation stage notification watermelon image 9022 is an image corresponding to the pseudo-continuation stage being "pseudo 3", and is continuously displayed at a predetermined position on the display device 7 during "pseudo 3".

Thereafter, after the first ally character 9002 has a conversation and the button image 9003 is displayed (not shown), the "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013 is displayed in a large size on the display device 7 (see FIG. 157(c)), and the pseudo-relationship stage A notification cherry image 9023 is displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 157(d)), and a transition is made to a predetermined super reach (not shown). The “cherry” icon confirmed image 9013 is an image corresponding to the “cherry” icon being displayed definitively. The pseudo continuous stage notification cherry image 9023 is an image corresponding to the development to super reach in "pseudo 3", and is continuously displayed at a predetermined position on the display device 7 during super reach. Thereafter, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the decorative pattern 9001 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the jackpot (see FIG. 157(e)), resulting in a jackpot (see FIG. 157(f)).

FIG. 158 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 in the performance corresponding to the performance number "13" (see FIG. 143). In the production shown in FIG. 158, first, the decorative pattern 9001 starts to change on the display device 7 (see FIG. 158(a)), and then a cut of the first ally character 9002 is displayed in a large size on the display device 7 (see FIG. 158(a)). (see FIG. 158(b)), then the display of the first ally character 9002 is reduced (see FIG. 158(c)), and then the first ally character 9002 is displayed in a manner as if it is rotating to the left. (See FIG. 158(d)), and then an image related to the explanation and start of the mission is displayed on the display device 7 (see FIGS. 158(e) and (f)), and after that, the mission result becomes failure. Correspondingly, the decorative pattern 9001 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the loss (see FIG. 158(g)).

159 and 160 show an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 in the effect corresponding to the effect number "16" (see FIG. 143). In the effects shown in FIGS. 159 and 160, first, the decorative pattern 9001 starts to change on the display device 7 (see FIG. 159(a)), and then the cut of the first ally character 9002 appears on the display device 7. (see FIG. 159(b)), then the display of the first ally character 9002 is reduced (see FIG. 159(c)), and then the first ally character 9002 is rotated clockwise. (see Figure 159(d)), followed by multiple items (here, "chance", "chance", "chansu", "gekiatsu", "fierce heat", "teppanyaki", "next"). '', and the "bell" icon stop suggestion item 9031), a roulette effect is performed (see FIGS. 159(e) to 160(a)), and then, as a result of the roulette effect, The “bell” icon stop suggestion item 9031 is selected (see FIGS. 160(b) and (c)), and then the “bell” icon confirmed image 9011 is displayed in a large size on the display device 7 (see FIG. 160(d)). , Subsequently, the pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021 is displayed smaller than the "bell" icon finalized image 9011 on the display device 7 (see FIG. 160(e)), and then shifts to "pseudo 2" (see FIG. 160 (see (f)).

FIG. 161 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 in the performance corresponding to the performance number "41" (see FIG. 146). In the production shown in FIG. 161, first, the decorative pattern 9001 starts to change on the display device 7 (see FIG. 161(a)), and then the title completion inciting image 9004 is displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 161(a)). b) Subsequently, in response to a failure in title completion inciting, the title completion inciting image 9004 disappears, and the decorative pattern 9001 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the failure (FIGS. 161(c) and 161(c)). (see (d)).

FIG. 162 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 in the performance corresponding to the performance number "42" (see FIG. 146). In the production shown in FIG. 162, first, as a production in "pseudo 1", the decorative pattern 9001 starts to fluctuate on the display device 7 (see FIG. 162(a)), and then the title completion inciting image 9004 starts to change on the display device 7. 7 (see FIG. 162(b)), and then, in response to the successful title completion prompting, a title completion prompting success image 9005 is displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 162(c). ), the decorative pattern 9001 becomes a reach mode (see FIG. 162(d)), then the “bell” icon confirmed image 9011 is displayed in a large size on the display device 7 (see FIG. 162(e)), and then, The pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021 is displayed smaller than the "bell" icon confirmed image 9011 on the display device 7 (see FIG. 162(f)), and then shifts to "pseudo 2" (see FIG. 162(g)) ).

In FIG. 163, after the effect shown in FIG. 162 is performed in "Pseudo 1", the effect that is displayed on the display device 7 is shown when the effect corresponding to the effect number "43" (see FIG. 146) is performed in "Pseudo 2". An example of an image is shown. In the production shown in FIG. 163, after transitioning to "pseudo 2" as shown in FIG. 162(g), an enemy character 9006 appears on the display device 7 (see FIG. 163(a)), and then continues to appear. Every time the eyes (for example, "2, 3, 3") are stopped and displayed, a production (enemy attack production) in which the first ally character 9002 attacks the enemy character 9006 is performed (FIGS. 163(b) to 163(d)). ), then icon stop agitation is performed in which the display of the agitation watermelon image 9007 on the display device 7 becomes larger and larger (see FIGS. 163(e) and (f)), and then the icon stop agitation is successful. In response to this, the enemy character 9006 falls down, and a "watermelon" icon confirmed image 9012 is displayed in a large size on the display device 7 (see FIG. 163(g)), and then a watermelon image 9022 for pseudo continuous stage notification is displayed on the display device 7. In step 7, the "watermelon" icon is displayed smaller than the confirmed image 9012 (see FIG. 163(h)), and then shifts to "pseudo 3".

In FIG. 164, after the effect shown in FIG. 163 is performed in "Pseudo 2", the effect that is displayed on the display device 7 is shown when the effect corresponding to the effect number "49" (see FIG. 146) is performed in "Pseudo 3". An example of an image is shown. In the production shown in FIG. 164, after shifting to "pseudo 3", an enemy character 9008 appears on the display device 7 (see FIG. 164(a)), and then a continuation roll (for example, "3, 4, 4'') is stopped and displayed, a production (enemy attack production) in which the first ally character 9002 attacks the enemy character 9008 is performed (see FIGS. 164(b) to 164(d)), and then the display device 7 An icon stop incitement is performed in which the display of the incitement cherry image 9009 becomes larger and larger (see FIGS. 164(e) and (f)), and then, in response to the successful icon stop incitement, the enemy character 9008 As it falls, the "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013 is displayed in a large size on the display device 7 (see FIG. 164(g)), and then the pseudo-linked stage notification cherry image 9023 is displayed as the "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013 on the display device 7. (see FIG. 164(h)), and then shifts to super reach.

Note that if the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon is displayed in the third preview performance, the third preview performance may be performed without fail in the next pseudo-connection stage. In other words, when the "bell" icon is displayed in the productions ("pseudo 1") corresponding to production numbers "41" and "42", the productions corresponding to production numbers "43" to "48" are displayed as "pseudo 2". It is also possible to always perform one of the effects. In addition, when the "watermelon" icon is displayed in the production ("pseudo 2") corresponding to production numbers "43" to "48", it is displayed as "pseudo 3", which corresponds to production numbers "49" to "52". Any one of the performances may be performed without fail.

FIG. 165 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 in the performance corresponding to the performance number "72" (see FIG. 149). In the production shown in FIG. 165, first, as a production in "pseudo 1", the decorative pattern 9001 starts to fluctuate on the display device 7 (see FIG. 165(a)), and then "4" is displayed as the left decorative pattern 9001L. The symbols stop (see FIGS. 165(b) and (c)), and then a 4-symbol Tenpai fanning is performed in which the display of the "4" symbol becomes larger and larger as the right decorative pattern 9001R (see FIG. 165(d)). , Subsequently, in response to the successful 4-symbol tenpai incitement, it becomes the background (background after 4-symbol tenpai success) that is displayed only when the 4-symbol tenpai incitement is successful (not shown), and the left decoration. The "4" symbol is displayed in a large size as the symbol 9001L and the right decorative symbol 9001R (see FIG. 165(e)), and then the middle decorative symbol 9001C becomes a reach in a horizontally rotated state (see FIG. 165).
(see (f)), then the “bell” icon confirmed image 9011 is displayed in a large size on the display device 7 (see FIG. 165 (g)), and then the pseudo-continuation stage notification bell image 9021 is displayed on the display device 7 as “ "Bell" icon is displayed smaller than the finalized image 9011 (see FIG. 165(h)), and then shifts to "Pseudo 2". Note that the normal background is displayed on the display device 7 before it becomes the background after the 4-symbol Tenpai is successful (at the time when the decorative pattern 9001 starts changing).

In FIG. 166, after the effect shown in FIG. 165 is performed in "Pseudo 1", the effect shown on the display device 7 is displayed when the effect corresponding to the effect number "73" (see FIG. 149) is performed in "Pseudo 2". An example of an image is shown. At the start of the effect shown in FIG. 166 (when moving to "pseudo 2"), a specific background is used. The background may be the same background as the background after the 4-symbol Ten-Pai success, or may be a different background from the background after the 4-symbol Ten-Pai success. Subsequent performances are performed in a dedicated background state. The background in the dedicated background state may be the same background as the background after the above-mentioned 4-symbol Tenpai success, or may be a different background from the above-mentioned 4-symbol Tenpai-successful background, or the same background as the above-mentioned specific background. Alternatively, the background may be different from the above-mentioned specific background. In the dedicated background state, a 4-symbol ten-pai stirring is performed in which the "4" pattern changes at high speed as the left decorative pattern 9001L and the right decorative pattern 9001R (see FIGS. 166(a) and (b)), and the "4" pattern is After the display disappears, a “watermelon” icon confirmed image 9012 is displayed in a large size on the display device 7 (see FIG. 166(c)), and then a watermelon image 9022 for pseudo continuous stage notification is displayed as a “watermelon” icon on the display device 7. It is displayed smaller than the final image 9012 (see FIG. 166(d)), and then shifts to "pseudo 3".

In FIG. 167, after the effect shown in FIG. 166 is performed in "Pseudo 2", the effect that is displayed on the display device 7 is shown when the effect corresponding to the effect number "75" (see FIG. 149) is performed in "Pseudo 3". An example of an image is shown. At the start of the effect shown in FIG. 167 (when moving to "pseudo 3"), the above-mentioned specific background is used. Subsequent effects are performed in the dedicated background state. In the dedicated background state, a 4-symbol Tenpai fanning is performed in which the "4" pattern changes at high speed as the left decorative pattern 9001L and the right decorative pattern 9001R (see FIG. 167(a)), and then the left decorative pattern 9001L and the right decorative pattern A 7-symbol Tenpai stirring is performed in which the "7" symbol changes at high speed as the symbol 9001R (see Figure 167(b)), and then the "4" symbol changes at high speed as the left decorative symbol 9001L and the right decorative symbol 9001R. A 4-symbol Tenpai incitement is performed (see FIG. 167(c)), and then a 7-symbol Tenpai incitement is performed in which the "7" symbol changes at high speed as the left decorative pattern 9001L and the right decorative pattern 9001R (FIG. 167(d) ), and after the display of the "7" symbol disappears, the "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013 is displayed in a large size on the display device 7 (see FIG. 167(e)), and then the pseudo-continuous stage notification cherry image is displayed. 9023 is displayed smaller than the "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013 on the display device 7 (see FIG. 167(f)), and then shifts to super reach.

Note that the mode of the 4-symbol Tenpai inciting to 7-symbol Tenpai inciting is not particularly limited, and as explained above, the "4" to "7" symbols may be changed at high speed, or the "4" It is also possible to vibrate the symbols to "7" symbols.

FIGS. 168(a) and 168(b) show an example of the image and movable accessory 9041 displayed on the display device 7 in the notice after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "91" (see FIG. 152). . FIGS. 168(c) and 168(d) show an example of the image and movable accessory 9041 displayed on the display device 7 in the preview after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "92" (see FIG. 152). . In the notice after icon stop shown in FIGS. 168(a) and 168(b), after the "bell" icon confirmed image 9011 (or "watermelon" icon confirmed image 9012) is displayed (see FIG. 168(a)) , the movable accessory 9041 operates in the first manner (see FIG. 168(b)). In the post-icon stop notice shown in FIGS. 168(c) and 168(d), after the "watermelon" icon confirmed image 9012 (or "bell" icon confirmed image 9011) is displayed (see FIG. 168(c)) , the movable accessory 9041 operates in the second manner (see FIG. 168(d)). The movable accessory 9041 is an accessory imitating a predetermined character, and can be in a first state (stored state), a second state (a state in which the character lowers its arms...see FIG. 168(b)), and State 3 (character with arms raised...Figure 168)
(d)).

FIG. 169 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 during the icon-stop notice (see FIG. 152) corresponding to the performance number "93". In the notice after icon stop shown in FIG. 169, after the "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013 is displayed (see FIG.
169(a)), the background image 9042 is displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 169(b)). After that, a predetermined super reach is reached, and a battle is held between an ally character (for example, the first ally character 9002) and an enemy character 9043 (see FIGS. 169(c) to 169(e)), and the result of the jackpot determination is If it is a jackpot, the decorative pattern 9001 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the jackpot (see FIG. 169(f)).

A specific example of the jackpot preview performance has been described above using FIGS. 155 to 169. In this example, a case has been described in which a predetermined pattern is adopted as an icon, such as a "bell" icon confirmed image 9011, a "watermelon" icon confirmed image 9012, a "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013, etc. As the icon in this embodiment, an icon composed of characters, figures, symbols, colors, or a combination thereof can be appropriately employed. For example, in FIG. 170(a), a first specific icon confirmed image 9014 is shown as an example of the first specific icon, which is composed of a pattern including the numbers or letters "7" and "PREMIUM." Alternatively, for example, a character image of "NEXT" may be adopted as an icon, and the display of "NEXT" may be used as an opportunity to advance to the next stage in the pseudo series.

For example, instead of the "bell" icon confirmed image 9011, the "watermelon" icon confirmed image 9012, and the "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013, an "X" icon as shown in FIGS. 170(b) to (d) may be used. A confirmed image 9051, a “Y” icon confirmed image 9052, and a “Z” icon confirmed image 9053 may be adopted. In this way, as the icon in this embodiment, it is possible to appropriately adopt a pattern in which predetermined characters (for example, English words) are surrounded by a square. In this case, instead of the bell image 9021 for pseudo continuous stage notification, the watermelon image 9022 for pseudo continuous stage notification, and the cherry image 9023 for pseudo continuous stage notification, the X image 9061 for pseudo continuous stage notification, the Y image for pseudo continuous stage notification An image 9062 and a Z image 9063 for pseudo-linkage notification may be employed (see FIGS. 170(e) and (f)). In FIG. 170(e), while the pseudo continuous stage notification X image 9061 and the pseudo continuous stage notification Y image 9062 are displayed brightly, the pseudo continuous stage notification Z image 9063 is displayed darkly. It is shown that it is "pseudo 3". By displaying the "Z" icon confirmed image 9053 in this state, in FIG. 170(e), the All images 9063 are displayed brightly. This will later develop into a super reach.

Moreover, in the above, an example in which the decorative pattern 9001 is displayed in a large size (in the center of the display device 7) or in a small size (in the lower right corner of the display device 7) has been described. In this embodiment, while the icon is displayed and before and after the icon is displayed, the larger decorative pattern 9001 is not displayed, the smaller decorative pattern 9001 is not displayed, or both decorations are not displayed. It may be configured such that the symbol 9001 is not displayed. Further, when an icon is displayed, a pattern corresponding to the icon may be displayed as a part of the smaller decorative pattern 9001 (for example, the medium decorative pattern 9001C), or a part of the smaller decorative pattern 9001 may be displayed. The symbol (for example, the middle decorative symbol 9001C) may remain displayed in a variable manner (the left decorative symbol 9001L and the right decorative symbol 9001R are stopped and displayed), or the left decorative symbol 9001L, the middle decorative symbol 9001C, and the right All of the decorative patterns 9001R may be left to be displayed in a variable manner.

<Jackpot preview performance (common to each stage)>
The first preview performance, the second preview performance, the third preview performance, and the fourth preview performance explained above are the first performance stage, the second performance stage, and the third performance stage (see FIG. 137(a) ) can only occur in the first performance stage. On the other hand, the sixth preview performance and the seventh preview performance described below can occur in any of the first performance stage, second performance stage, and third performance stage. In addition, while the first preview performance, second preview performance, third preview performance, and fourth preview performance are performances that can occur during the pseudo-sequential performance, the sixth preview performance to the seventh preview performance occur. In this case, pseudo-coupling does not occur. Below, after explaining the variation pattern of decorative symbols in each production stage, the sixth preview performance and the seventh preview performance will be explained.

<Variation pattern of decorative designs>
FIG. 171 is a diagram showing a variation pattern of decorative symbols on the first presentation stage. FIG. 172 is a diagram showing a variation pattern of decorative symbols on the second presentation stage. FIG. 173 is a diagram showing a variation pattern of decorative symbols in the third production stage.

FIG. 171(a) shows a case where the decorative pattern variation time is 4 seconds in the first performance stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern each exhibit the same behavior, fluctuating at high speed until 2 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerating over 1 second, stopping for 1 second, The design is confirmed.

FIG. 171(b) shows a case where the decorative pattern variation time is 8 seconds in the first performance stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 3.5 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and shakes for 2.5 seconds before confirming the design. Become. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 6 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and becomes finalized. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and swings for 2 seconds before becoming finalized.

FIG. 171(c) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbols is 13 seconds in the first production stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 7 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 3.5 seconds, and then confirms the design. Become. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 10.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and becomes final. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 8.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and swings for 2 seconds before becoming finalized.

FIG. 171(d) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbols is 17 seconds in the first performance stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 11 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 3.5 seconds, and then confirms the design. Become. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 14.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and becomes finalized. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 12.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and swings for 2 seconds before becoming finalized.

FIG. 172(a) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative pattern is 4 seconds in the second presentation stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern each exhibit the same behavior, fluctuating at high speed until 3 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation, and then decelerating over 0.5 seconds to 0.5 seconds. It will stop for a second and the pattern will be confirmed.

FIG. 172(b) shows a case where the decorative pattern variation time is 8 seconds in the second presentation stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern each exhibit the same behavior, fluctuating at high speed until 7 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation, and then decelerating over 0.5 seconds to 0.5 seconds. It will stop for a second and the pattern will be confirmed.

FIG. 172(c) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative pattern is 13 seconds in the second presentation stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern exhibit the same behavior, and fluctuate at high speed until 12 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, and then decelerate over 0.5 seconds, and 0.5 It will stop for a second and the pattern will be confirmed.

FIG. 172(d) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbols is 17 seconds in the second presentation stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern exhibit the same behavior, and fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 16 seconds have elapsed, and then decelerate over 0.5 seconds to 0.5 seconds. It will stop for a second and the pattern will be confirmed.

FIG. 173(a) shows a case where the decorative pattern variation time is 4 seconds in the third production stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern each exhibit the same behavior, fluctuating at high speed until 2.5 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerating over 0.5 seconds, and 1 It will stop for a second and the pattern will be confirmed.

FIG. 173(b) shows a case where the decorative pattern variation time is 8 seconds in the third performance stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 4.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then confirms the design. Become. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 6.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and becomes finalized. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 5.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and after shaking for 1 second, the design is finalized.

FIG. 173(c) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative pattern is 13 seconds in the third production stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 7.5 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 4 seconds, and then confirms the design. Become. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 11.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and becomes finalized. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 9.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and swings for 2 seconds before becoming finalized.

FIG. 173(d) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbols is 17 seconds in the third performance stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 11.5 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 4 seconds, and then confirms the design. Become. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 15.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and becomes finalized. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 13.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and swings for 2 seconds before becoming finalized.

The decorative pattern variation patterns shown in FIGS. 171 to 173 are default variation patterns, and in this embodiment, unless otherwise explained (for example, FIG. 145, FIG. 148, FIG. 151, FIG. 176, etc.), The decorative pattern basically changes according to the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern.

<6th preview performance>
FIG. 174 is a diagram showing the flow of the sixth preview effect. FIG. 175 is a diagram showing a time chart of the sixth preview performance. FIG. 176 is a diagram showing the relationship between the sixth preview performance and the variation pattern of decorative symbols.

The sixth preview performance shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 occurs when a special symbol change is performed on the first performance stage, second performance stage, or third performance stage (see FIG. 137(a)). It's a performance you can get. In the sixth preview performance, a push to enter the first special zone is performed, and if the push is successful, the player enters the first special zone. The first special zone is a special zone at a stage before developing into the fourth specific super reach.

Specifically, the performance corresponding to the performance number "101" is a performance that fades out after the first omen (effect for the first stage) occurs. In the production corresponding to the production number "102", after the first omen (effect for the first stage) occurs, the second omen (effect for the second stage) occurs, and then fades out. It's a spectacular performance. In the production corresponding to production number "103", after the first omen (effect for the first stage) occurs, the second omen (effect for the second stage) occurs, and then the third omen (effect for the second stage) occurs. A foreshadowing of a bullet (effect for the third hit) occurs, and then it fades out.

In the production corresponding to production number "104", after the first omen (effect for the first stage) occurs, the second omen (effect for the second stage) occurs, and then the third omen (effect for the second stage) occurs. A bullet preview (effect for the third stage) occurs, and then an image related to the first special zone entry agitation is displayed on the display device 7, and then it corresponds to the failure of the first special zone entry agitation. This is an effect in which an image is displayed on the display device 7. In the production corresponding to the production number "105", after the first omen (effect for the first stage) occurs, the second omen (effect for the second stage) occurs, and then the third omen (effect for the second stage) occurs. A bullet prediction (effect for the third stage) is generated, and then an image related to the first special zone entry agitation is displayed on the display device 7, and an image corresponding to the successful first special zone entry agitation is displayed. This is an effect in which an image related to the title of the first special zone is displayed on the display device 7, and then the first special zone is entered. When the first special zone ends, the game moves to the fourth special super reach.

In the performance corresponding to the performance number "106", a sign of the third stage (effect for the third stage) occurs, then an image related to the first special zone entry incitement is displayed on the display device 7, and then, This is an effect in which an image corresponding to failure in inciting entry into the first special zone is displayed on the display device 7. In the performance corresponding to the performance number "107", a sign of the third stage (effect for the third stage) occurs, then an image related to the first special zone entry incitement is displayed on the display device 7, and the first An image corresponding to the successful inciting to enter the special zone is displayed on the display device 7, an image related to the title of the first special zone is displayed on the display device 7, and then the effect is to enter the first special zone. When the first special zone ends, the game moves to the fourth special super reach.

In the first special zone, switching is performed between a screen corresponding to the first character and a screen corresponding to the second character, and decorative patterns are displayed on either screen. Thereafter, the display device 7 becomes a wipe display, and a fourth specific super reach is developed, and in the fourth specific super reach, an effect corresponding to the character corresponding to the screen where the tenpai occurs is performed. In addition, in the first omen, the second omen, and the third omen, instead of (or in addition to) generating a predetermined effect, an image related to the incitement to enter the first special zone is used. It may also be displayed on the display device 7. In this case, in the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "106" and "107", the rush to enter the first special zone will suddenly occur without passing through the sign. After a game ball enters the first starting hole 120, if a pre-reading effect is performed before the special symbol variation related to the starting winning starts (in the case where the sixth preview effect occurs via the pre-reading effect), , In the sixth preview performance that occurs at the time of the special symbol change, the foreshadowing may always be passed through. On the other hand, when the sixth preview performance occurs without going through the pre-read performance, the sixth preview performance that occurs when the special symbol changes may or may not go through the sign.

FIG. 176(a) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "104" and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The performance corresponding to the performance number "104" may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern is 17 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 176(a), the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern each exhibit the same behavior, fluctuating at high speed until 15 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation, and then decelerating over 1 second. Then, it stops for 1 second and the pattern is confirmed.

FIG. 176(b) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "105" and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 176(b), the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern each exhibit the same behavior and fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation until at least entering the first special zone.

FIG. 176(c) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "106" and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The performance corresponding to the performance number "106" may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern is 17 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 176(c), the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern each exhibit the same behavior, fluctuating at high speed until 15 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation, and then decelerating over 1 second. Then, it stops for 1 second and the pattern is confirmed.

FIG. 176(d) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "107" and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 176(d), the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern each exhibit the same behavior and fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation until at least entering the first special zone.

Here, in the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "104" and "106", an image related to the first special zone entry incitement is displayed on the display device 7 from the point in time when 11 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern. On the other hand, in the default variation pattern in the first performance stage and the third performance stage (see FIGS. 171(d) and 173(d)), the left decorative pattern is decelerated and stopped at the timing. When the decorative pattern stops, a predetermined stop sound (for example, a sound that confirms a loss) is output from the speaker 32, but if the first special zone rush is being performed. In addition, when the stop sound occurs, there is a possibility that the result of the inciting to enter the first special zone may be grasped by the player during the inciting to enter the first special zone. In view of this, when performances corresponding to performance numbers "104" to "106" are performed,
The decorative pattern is varied using a dedicated variation pattern as shown in (a) to (c) (a variation pattern in which the decorative pattern stops after the end of the first special zone rush). This makes it possible to avoid spoiling the success or failure of inciting the first special zone entry through the stop sound of the decorative pattern. In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the stop sound of the decorative symbol can be a sound specific to a loss (a sound that can be generated only in the case of a loss).

The variation patterns shown in FIGS. 176(a) to 176(c) are adopted when the performances corresponding to the production numbers "104" and "106" are performed on the first production stage or the third production stage, When performances corresponding to performance numbers “104” and “106” are performed in the second performance stage, the default fluctuation pattern (Fig. 172(d)) is used instead of the fluctuation patterns shown in Figs. ), the decorative pattern may be varied. In the variation pattern shown in FIG. 172(d), the timing at which the decorative symbols decelerate and stop is delayed, so when the production corresponding to production numbers "104" and "106" is performed, the variation pattern in question is Even if the decorative pattern is varied, there is no concern about spoilers as described above. However, even when performances corresponding to performance numbers "104" and "106" are performed on the second performance stage, the decorative patterns may be varied in the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 176(a) to (c).

In addition, the variation pattern differs between when the performances corresponding to the production numbers "104" and "106" are performed on the first production stage and when the performances corresponding to the production numbers "104" and "106" are performed on the third production stage. It is also possible to make them different. For example, when the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "104" and "106" are performed on the third performance stage, each decorative pattern changes faster than the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 176(a) to (c). The time may be increased by a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and the deceleration time may be shortened by a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). In addition, the sixth preview performance will not be performed while the look-ahead performance is being executed on one of the first performance stage, second performance stage, and third performance stage (for example, the second performance stage). It may be configured as follows. In this case, in production stages other than the one production stage (for example, the first production stage and the third production stage), it may be configured such that the sixth preview production can be performed even while the pre-read production is being executed. .

<7th preview performance>
FIG. 177(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the seventh preview performance. FIG. 177(b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the seventh preview performance.

The seventh preview performance shown in FIG. 177 is a performance that can occur when a special symbol change is performed on the first performance stage, second performance stage, or third performance stage (see FIG. 137(a)). be. In the seventh preview performance, a push to enter the second special zone is performed, and if the push is successful, the player enters the second special zone. The second special zone is a special zone at a stage before developing into the fifth specific super reach.

Specifically, the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" is such that after the screen becomes dark as if the display device 7 was turned off (the screen freezes), it returns from the freeze and enters the second special zone. An image related to inciting is displayed on the display device 7, a button image is displayed on the display device 7, and the operation of the production button 54 is accepted, and then an image corresponding to failure in inciting to enter the second special zone is displayed on the display device. This is the effect displayed in 7. After that, the display device 7 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "122" is an image related to the instigation of entering the second special zone after the screen becomes dark as if the display device 7 was turned off (the screen freezes), and then returns from the freeze. is displayed on the display device 7, a button image is displayed on the display device 7, the operation of the production button 54 is accepted, and then an image corresponding to the successful inciting of entering the second special zone (an image of inciting the entry into the second special zone) is displayed on the display device 7. Success image) is an effect displayed on the display device 7. When entering the second special zone, after a predetermined ally character appears, a scene of defeating a predetermined enemy character is displayed on the display device 7. After that, the game progresses to the fifth specific super reach, and in the fifth specific super reach, a production corresponding to the final battle with the enemy character is performed. The fifth specific super reach is a reach with the highest jackpot expectation (other than the first specific super reach where a jackpot is determined).

There are two timings at which the screen may freeze. Specifically, there are two cases: a case where the screen freezes after 6 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (timing 1), and a case where the screen freezes after 12 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change of the decorative pattern (timing 2). It is being The screen freezes at one of these two timings. At timing 2, compared to timing 1, all effects following the freeze occur with a delay of 6 seconds.

Further, while the button image is being displayed, a predetermined button valid time is set. If the effect button 54 is operated during the button valid time, the moment the effect button 54 is operated (immediately after the operation even if the button valid time has not expired), the entry into the second special zone is triggered. A performance corresponding to failure or success is performed. On the other hand, if the production button 54 is not operated during the button valid time, at the end of the button valid time (at the moment the button valid time ends), it is determined that the second special zone entry incitement has failed or succeeded. A corresponding performance will be performed.

Although not shown, the production corresponding to the successful promotion of entering the second special zone (successful production of promotion of entry into the second special zone) includes an image of successful promotion of entry into the second special zone (for example, an image related to the title of the second special zone). In addition to displaying images (images and images related to predetermined icons), a predetermined decoration lamp (logo lamp) emits light. The logo lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the logo cover. The logo cover is provided at a predetermined location of the game board unit 10 (eg, above the display device 7), and is made of a translucent material (eg, acrylic resin, etc.). Further, the logo cover is decorated in the shape of characters (for example, characters displayed as icons) representing a logo or the like depending on the model. The logo lamp uses a full-color LED and can emit multiple colors including red, blue, and green, allowing the effect color of the logo cover to be changed.

Note that the second special zone entry success effect (for example, lighting of the logo lamp) is performed for a predetermined period of time (3 seconds) regardless of whether or not the effect button 54 is operated or not. Even if the effect button 54 is operated during the button valid time, the time will not be extended. Since the timing to enter the second special zone (the timing at which a predetermined ally character appears) is fixed (timing 1 above, 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, timing 2 above, when the decorative pattern starts changing), (36 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation), if the production button 54 is operated during the button validity period, there will be a gap between the end of the second special zone entry inciting success production and the timing of entering the second special zone. However, the gap time is compensated for by displaying the predetermined icon in a shaking state.

<Stage change>
FIG. 178(a) is a diagram showing a flow of a stage change notice performance. FIG. 178(b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the stage change preview performance. FIG. 178(c) is a diagram showing the state of the character lamp before and after a stage change occurs.

In this embodiment, basically, each production stage (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) is continuously provided with a special symbol variation while a predetermined number of times (20 times) is performed. Stay. After moving to one production stage, when special symbol fluctuations are performed a predetermined number of times (20 times), it is possible to shift from the one production stage to another production stage. On the other hand, when the 7th preview performance occurs, even if the number of special symbol fluctuations performed after moving to the first performance stage has not reached the predetermined number (20 times), the performance stage will always be activated. A transition occurs.

In this specification, such transition of the production stage will also be referred to as a "stage change." Note that the production stage after the transition is randomly determined by lottery, and the same production stage as the production stage before the transition may be determined as the production stage after the transition. The concept of transition of the production stage (stage change) includes such cases.

When a stage change is to be performed, a stage change preview effect shown in FIG. 178 is performed. In the production corresponding to production number "131" (stage change preview production), after the background transition image corresponding to the production stage after transition is displayed on the display device 7, an image indicating the name of the production stage after transition is displayed. This is an effect that is displayed on the display device 7 and the display content of the counter image on the display device 7 is reset (recovered).

As background transition images, a first background transition image, a second background transition image, and a third background transition image are provided. The first background transition image is an image that suggests the first production stage, and when the production stage after transition is the first production stage, the first background transition image is displayed. The second background transition image is an image that suggests the second production stage, and when the production stage after transition is the second production stage, the second background transition image is displayed. The third background transition image is an image that suggests the third production stage, and when the production stage after transition is the third production stage, the third background transition image is displayed.

The counter image is an image corresponding to the number of special symbol variations performed after the stage change occurs. When a stage change occurs, "0/20" is displayed as the counter image after reset. The denominator number (20) indicates the number of special symbol changes (20 times) related to the stage change generation condition. The number in the numerator indicates the number of special symbol variations performed after the stage change occurs. The counter image is basically always displayed at a predetermined location on the display device 7 while staying at each production stage (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage). displayed (except while it is being performed). As the number of special symbol variations performed after the stage change increases, the counter image changes such as "1/20", "2/20", . . . "19/20".

Here, the counter image (0/20) when a stage change occurs is displayed in various colors (white, blue, green, purple, red, rainbow color, or gold). In this embodiment, as explained in the first pachinko game machine, a plurality of setting values (six levels from "1" to "6") that differ from each other are provided for various data related to the pachinko game. White, blue, green, purple, red, and rainbow colors correspond to the setting values of "1" to "6", respectively, and are the colors of the counter image (0/20) displayed when a stage change occurs. The color corresponds to the setting value. Thereby, the set value is suggested by the counter image (0/20).

Note that the method of suggesting the setting value using a counter image is not limited to this example, and for example, a counter image including numbers (“1” to “6”) corresponding to the setting value may be displayed. For example, if the set value is "6", a counter image of "0/66" may be displayed. In this regard, in this embodiment, the number of special symbol fluctuations related to the stage change generation condition is a specified value (20 times), but the number of special symbol fluctuations may also be determined by lottery. good. In addition, for example, when the set value is "6", it is also possible to configure so that "66" is relatively easily determined as the number of special symbol variations.

Furthermore, if the counter image (0/20) at the time of stage change is displayed in gold, it is confirmed that the vehicle will enter the second special zone. In this regard, as the seventh preview performance, a performance corresponding to performance number "121" and a performance corresponding to performance number "122" are provided. Regardless of which of these performances occurs, a stage change always occurs. On top of that, only when a stage change occurs based on the performance corresponding to the performance number "122", the counter image (0/20) at the time of the stage change occurrence can be displayed in gold. It is configured as follows.

There are two timings for starting the stage change preview performance. Specifically, when the background transition image is displayed from the beginning of the variation of the decorative pattern (timing 1), and when the background transition image is displayed from the time when 6 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (timing 2). and are provided. The stage change preview performance occurs at one of these two timings. At timing 2, compared to timing 1, all effects occur with a delay of 6 seconds.

When a stage change occurs based on the occurrence of the seventh preview performance, the timing at which the performance corresponding to the performance number "131" is performed is the timing at which the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" or "122" is performed. It corresponds to That is, when a stage change occurs based on the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" (timing 1) or the performance corresponding to the performance number "122" (timing 1), the stage change is performed based on the performance number "131". A performance corresponding to (timing 1) is performed. On the other hand, if a stage change occurs based on the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" (timing 2) or the performance corresponding to the performance number "122" (timing 2), the performance number "131" A performance corresponding to (timing 2) is performed.

On the other hand, when a stage change is performed based on the number of special symbol fluctuations reaching a predetermined number (20 times), basically the performance corresponding to the performance number "131" (timing 1) is It will be done. In this case, the stage change preview performance will be performed immediately after the decorative symbols start changing. Exceptionally, when the seventh preview effect occurs in a special symbol variation (game that reaches the specified number) where a stage change is performed based on the number of special symbol variations reaching a predetermined number (20 times). , the performance corresponding to the performance number "131" (timing 2) is performed. In other words, the following conditions (I) and (II) are provided as conditions for the stage change to occur, and if both conditions are satisfied in the same special symbol variation, 6 seconds from the start of the decorative symbol variation. From the point in time, a stage change preview performance will be performed.

Condition (I): The number of special symbol fluctuations counted after moving to the first production stage reaches the predetermined number (20 times) Condition (II): The seventh preview production occurs (production number "121" or "122" is selected)

It is possible for the player to understand through the counter image that the number of special symbol fluctuations has reached the predetermined number (20 times), and when the number of special symbol fluctuations has reached the predetermined number (20 times), It is considered that there is a high probability that the player is aware that a stage change will occur. In this regard, by configuring as described above, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort that the stage change notice performance is not performed immediately after the start of the variation of the decorative symbols in the game in which the number of players reaches the specified number. In this case, the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" or "122" is performed at the timing 2 described above. Thereby, after the stage change preview performance is performed, the player can be made to expect that the seventh preview performance will occur (entering the second special zone).

Furthermore, as described above, the first ally character, the second ally character, and the third ally character are associated with the first production stage, the second production stage, and the third production stage, respectively. . Although not shown, the game board unit 10 is provided with a first character lamp, a second character lamp, and a third character lamp. The first character lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the first character decoration part, and the second character lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the second character decoration part, The third character lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the third character decoration part.

The first character decoration section is provided at a first predetermined location of the game board unit 10 (for example, on the right side of the display device 7), and the second character decoration section is provided at a second predetermined location of the game board unit 10 (for example, on the right side of the display device 7). The third character decoration section is provided at a third predetermined location of the game board unit 10 (for example, the lower left side of the display device 7). The first character decoration part, the second character decoration part, and the third character decoration part are decorated in the shape of a first ally character, a second ally character, and a third ally character, respectively. . Moreover, the first character decoration part, the second character decoration part, and the third character decoration part are each formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin, etc.). The first character lamp, second character lamp, and third character lamp each employ a full-color LED, and can emit multiple types of colors including red, blue, and green. This makes it possible to change the effect colors of the first character decoration part, the second character decoration part, and the third character decoration part.

In this embodiment, while staying at the first production stage, the first character lamp is basically lit, and the second character lamp and third character lamp are turned off. While staying on the second production stage, the second character lamp is basically lit, and the first character lamp and third character lamp are turned off. While staying at the third production stage, the third character lamp is basically lit, and the first character lamp and second character lamp are turned off. Although not shown, in the stage change preview production, one of the first character lamp, second character lamp, and third character lamp (the character lamp corresponding to the production stage after transition) blinks.

Specifically, if the production stage after transition is the first production stage, the first character lamp will blink, and if the production stage after transition is the second production stage, the second character lamp will blink. However, if the performance stage after transition is the third performance stage, the third character lamp blinks. Such blinking of the character lamp is performed for 1.5 seconds, and the blinking period coincides with the display period of the background transition image. That is, while the first background transition image is displayed, the first character lamp blinks for 1.5 seconds, and while the second background transition image is displayed, the second character lamp blinks. The third character lamp blinks for 1.5 seconds, and while the third background transition image is displayed, the third character lamp blinks for 1.5 seconds.

FIG. 178(c) shows the state of each character lamp before and after the transition from the first production stage to the second production stage. In the previous game in which the specified number of characters was reached, the first character lamp was lit, and the second character lamp and third character lamp were extinguished. When the specified number reaching game starts, the first character lamp switches from a lit state to an off state, the second character lamp switches from an off state to a blinking state, and the third character lamp remains in an off state. Thereafter, the second character lamp blinks for 1.5 seconds and then turns on. Thereafter, the second character lamp continues to be lit, and the first and third character lamps continue to be turned off, until the next stage change preview effect occurs.

After the stage change preview performance is performed, a transition is made to the background corresponding to the performance stage after transition (first performance stage, second performance stage, or third performance stage). Note that, as described above, after the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" is performed, the screen returns to the normal background. Furthermore, after the performance in the fifth specific super reach that transitions via the performance corresponding to the performance number "122" is completed, the screen returns to the normal background. The normal background is a background corresponding to the production stage after the transition (not the production stage before the transition).

The above description has been made assuming that conditions (I) and (II) are provided as the conditions for stage change occurrence. Here, regarding the above condition (I), the number of special symbol fluctuations is when the fluctuation display in the first special symbol display section 163 (the fluctuation display corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the first starting hole 120) is performed. However, it is not counted when a variable display is performed in the second special symbol display section 164 (a variable display corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 140A, 140B). Therefore, in the normal gaming state, even if the variable display on the second special symbol display section 164 is repeatedly performed by the player playing the game with right-handed hitting, the counting will not be performed, and in this case, the stage change is never done. Note that this counting is performed when the special symbol variation starts.

Further, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, there is a possibility that a stage change will be performed other than when the above-mentioned condition (I) or (II) is satisfied. Specifically, in a situation where the number of special symbol variations performed after moving to the first production stage has not reached the predetermined number of times (20 times), as a production performed when a special symbol variation is being performed. , when a specific super reach (for example, any super reach other than the fifth specific super reach) occurs, a performance stage transition lottery is held before the specified number is reached. Then, the performance stage transition occurs on condition that the lottery for transition to the performance stage before the specified number is reached is won.

Further, even if the number of special symbol changes performed after moving to the first performance stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times), there is a possibility that the stage change will not be performed. Specifically, when a specific super reach (for example, any super reach other than the fifth specific super reach) occurs in a game in which the specified number is reached, a lottery for suspending the transition to the production stage when the specified number is reached is performed. If you do not win the performance stage transition pending lottery when the specified number is reached, a transition of the performance stage will occur in the game when the specified number is reached. On the other hand, if you win the lottery to suspend production stage transition when the specified number is reached, the production stage will not shift in the specified number reaching game, and the production stage will not shift in the next special symbol change of the specified number reaching game. occurs.

<Stage change section reserved ball>
FIGS. 179 to 181 are diagrams for explaining the stage change section reserved balls.

Although details will be described later, when a game ball enters the first starting port 120, the sub control circuit 300 selects a sub variation pattern by lottery. Here, the result of the said lottery (sub-variation pattern selection lottery) may vary depending on the performance stage stayed during the special symbol fluctuation related to the first starting opening winning, but the first starting opening winning occurs. If a stage change occurs between the time and the special symbol change related to the first starting opening prize, the production stage after the transition will start the special symbol change (stage change game) in which the stage change occurs. It will not be decided until then. Therefore, for such a first starting slot winning, the sub variation pattern cannot be selected at least until the stage change game starts. The lottery related to the look-ahead performance is performed based on the sub-variation pattern, but if the sub-variation pattern is not selected, the lottery related to the look-ahead performance cannot be held.

In view of this point, in this embodiment, a concept of "stage change section reserved ball" is provided. The held balls in the stage change section are the held balls that correspond to the winnings from the first starting opening for the stage changing game, and the special symbol changes related to the stage changing game after the winnings from the first starting opening for the stage changing game occur. It refers to the reserved balls corresponding to the first starting slot winnings that occurred before the start of the game. For such stage change section reserved balls, no look-ahead effect is performed. In addition, among the stage change section reserved balls, the reserved balls corresponding to the first starting opening winnings related to the stage change game are also particularly referred to as the "stage change section relevant reserved balls."

FIG. 179(a) shows a state where the 16th special symbol variation is being performed after moving to the current production stage and a state where there are no reserved balls. FIG. 179(b) shows a state in which, after the state shown in FIG. 179(a), four game balls have entered the first starting hole 120 while the 16th special symbol variation is being performed. ing. In this state, the special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the 1st to 4th reserved balls become the 17th to 20th special symbol fluctuations after moving to the current production stage. In FIG. 179(c), after the state shown in FIG. 179(b), a state is shown in which the 17th special symbol variation is started after moving to the current production stage. In this state, the special symbol variations corresponding to the first to third reserved balls become the 18th to 20th special symbol variations after moving to the current performance stage. Note that the fourth reserved ball does not exist.

In FIG. 179(d), after the state shown in FIG. 179(c), one game ball enters the first starting hole 120 while the 17th special symbol variation is being performed. ing. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball becomes the 21st special symbol variation after moving to the current production stage. In the 21st special symbol variation, a stage change occurs, and the 21st special symbol variation is performed on the production stage after the transition. That is, the special symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball becomes the first special symbol variation after moving to the next production stage. As a result, the fourth held ball is a stage change section held ball (the held ball in the stage change section), and a look-ahead effect cannot be performed for the fourth held ball.

In FIG. 179(e), after the state shown in FIG. 179(d), a state is shown in which the 18th special symbol variation is started after moving to the current production stage. In this state, the special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the 1st and 2nd held balls become the 19th to 20th special symbol fluctuations after moving to the current production stage, and correspond to the 3rd held ball. This special symbol variation is the first special symbol variation after moving to the next production stage. Note that the fourth reserved ball does not exist.

In FIG. 180(a), after the state shown in FIG. 179(e), one game ball enters the first starting hole 120 while the 18th special symbol variation is being performed. ing. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball becomes the second special symbol variation after moving to the next performance stage. The fourth reserved ball is a stage change section reserved ball, and a look-ahead effect cannot be performed for the fourth reserved ball.

In FIG. 180(b), after the state shown in FIG. 180(a), the 18th to 20th special symbol variations are performed, during which two game balls enter the first starting hole 120, and then, This shows a state where a stage change has occurred and the first special symbol variation is being performed after moving to the next performance stage. In this state, the special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the first to third reserved balls become the second to fourth special symbol fluctuations after the stage change occurs. The first to third reserved balls are stage change section reserved balls, and a look-ahead effect cannot be performed for the first to third reserved balls. Note that the fourth reserved ball does not exist.

In FIG. 180(c), after the state shown in FIG. 180(b), one game ball enters the first starting hole 120 while the first special symbol variation is being performed. ing. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball becomes the fifth special symbol variation after the stage change occurs. The fourth held ball is a held ball that corresponds to the first starting opening winning that occurred after the special symbol variation (special symbol variation related to the stage change game) corresponding to the held ball in the stage change section started. Therefore, the fourth reserved ball is not a stage change section reserved ball, and it is possible to perform a look-ahead effect regarding the fourth reserved ball.

In FIG. 180(d), after the state shown in FIG. 180(c), the first to second special symbol variations are performed after the stage change occurs, and during that time two game symbols are placed in the first starting port 120. This shows a state in which the third special symbol change is being performed after a ball enters the prize and a stage change occurs. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball becomes the fourth special symbol variation after the stage change occurs. The first reserved ball is a stage change section reserved ball, and a look-ahead effect cannot be performed for the first reserved ball. On the other hand, the special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the second to fourth reserved balls are the fifth to seventh special symbol fluctuations after the stage change occurs. The second to fourth reserved balls are the reserved balls corresponding to the first starting opening winnings that occurred after the special symbol variation (special symbol variation related to the stage change game) corresponding to the reserved ball in the stage change section started. It's a ball. Therefore, the second to fourth reserved balls are not stage change section reserved balls, and it is possible to perform a pre-reading effect for the second to fourth reserved balls.

In FIG. 181(a), after the 20th special symbol variation is started after transitioning to the current stage with no pending balls, and while the 20th special symbol variation is being performed, , shows a state in which four game balls have entered the first starting port 120. In this state, the special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the 1st to 4th reserved balls become the 21st to 24th special symbol fluctuations after moving to the current performance stage. In the 21st special symbol variation, a stage change occurs, and the 21st to 24th special symbol variations are performed on the production stage after the transition. That is, the special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the first to fourth reserved balls become the first to fourth special symbol fluctuations after moving to the next performance stage. As a result, the first to fourth reserved balls are stage change section reserved balls, and a look-ahead effect cannot be performed for the first to fourth reserved balls.

In FIG. 181(b), after the 20th special symbol variation is started after transitioning to the current production stage with no pending balls, and while the 20th special symbol variation is being performed, , shows a state in which one game ball has entered the first starting port 120. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball becomes the 21st special symbol variation after moving to the current production stage. In the 21st special symbol variation, a stage change occurs, and the 21st special symbol variation is performed on the production stage after the transition. That is, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball becomes the first special symbol variation after moving to the next performance stage. As a result, the first reserved ball is a stage change section reserved ball, and a look-ahead effect cannot be performed for the first reserved ball. Note that the second to fourth reserved balls do not exist.

In FIG. 181(c), after the state shown in FIG. 181(b), the 20th special symbol change is performed, then a stage change occurs, and the first special symbol changes after moving to the next production stage. This shows a state in which four game balls have entered the first starting hole 120 while the symbols are changing. In this state, the special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the first to fourth reserved balls become the second to fifth special symbol fluctuations after the stage change occurs. The 1st to 4th reserved balls are the reserved balls that correspond to the first starting opening winnings that occurred after the special symbol variation (special symbol variation related to the stage change game) corresponding to the reserved ball in the stage change section started. It's a ball. Therefore, the first to fourth reserved balls are not stage change section reserved balls, and it is possible to perform a pre-reading effect for the first to fourth reserved balls.

As explained above, in the example shown in FIG. 181(a), the number of special symbol changes that cannot be performed in advance is 4, while in the examples shown in FIGS. 181(b) and (c) In this case, the number of special symbol variations that cannot be performed in advance is one. In this way, in this embodiment, the number of special symbol changes that cannot be performed in advance is not fixed uniformly, but is determined based on the timing at which the stage change occurs and the timing at which the game ball enters the first starting port 120. The number of times changes depending on the context.

<Processing when winning the first starting slot>
FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the first starting opening winning process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing a stage change section determination process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIGS. 184 and 185 are diagrams for explaining the prefetch effect.

The first starting hole winning process shown in FIG. 182 is a process that is performed by the sub control circuit 300 in the performance mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76) when a game ball wins in the first starting hole 120. It is. The sub-control circuit 300 can recognize that a game ball has won in the first starting hole 120 by receiving the first starting hole winning command transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

In the first starting opening winning process, first, the sub CPU 301 executes a stage change section determination process (step S9001). The stage change section determination process will be described below using FIG. 183.

In the stage change section determination process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the held ball in the stage change section exists among the held balls for the upper limit of four times (step S9151). As explained using FIG. 179 to FIG. 181, the held ball in the stage change section is a held ball corresponding to the first starting hole winning related to the stage change game (special symbol variation in which a stage change is performed). In the process of step S9151, the sub CPU 301 determines whether information indicating the held ball in the stage change section (held ball information in the stage change section) is stored in a predetermined area of the work RAM 303.

Specifically, as described above, the work RAM 303 includes the first sub-reservation area (0), the first sub-reservation area (1), the first sub-reservation area (2), the first sub-reservation area (3), and , a first sub-reservation area (4) is provided. Information corresponding to the current special symbol variation (the variation) is stored in the first sub-reservation area (0), and the information corresponding to the current special symbol variation (the variation) is stored in the first sub-reservation area (1) to first sub-reservation area (4). Information corresponding to four special symbol variations is stored. That is, as described above, the first sub-reservation area (0) and the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (4) are the first special symbol start storage areas provided in the main RAM 203, respectively. (0) corresponds to the first special symbol start storage area (4). The winning command for the first starting opening winning that is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 includes information indicating the result of the jackpot determination and information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol. By receiving the winning command of the first starting slot winning, the sub CPU 301 stores information corresponding to these pieces of information in the first sub reservation area corresponding to the current first starting slot winning.

Further, when a stage change is performed in one special symbol variation, the sub CPU 301 stores the reserved ball information in the stage change section in the first sub reservation area corresponding to the special symbol variation (see step S9155). In the process of step S9151, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the held ball information for the stage change section is stored in any of the first sub holding area (1) to the first sub holding area (3). Note that when one special symbol variation ends and the next special symbol variation starts, the sub CPU 301 stores the information stored in the first sub reservation area (1) to the first sub reservation area (4), They are shifted to the first sub-reservation area (0) and the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (3), respectively. At that time, if the held ball information in the stage change section is stored in the first sub-holding area (1), the sub CPU 301 transfers the information from the first sub-holding area (1) to the first sub-holding area (0). Along with the transfer, the held ball information for the stage change section will be deleted. Therefore, a situation in which the held ball information in the stage change section is stored in the first sub-holding area (0) does not occur.

In step S9151, if it is determined that the stage change period relevant held ball exists among the held balls for the upper limit of 4 times, the sub CPU 301 holds the held ball related to the current first starting gate winning in the stage change period. It is identified as a sphere (step S9152). In this process, the sub CPU 301 stores information indicating that the ball is a stage change section reserved ball (stage change section reserved ball information) in the first sub reservation area corresponding to the current first starting opening winning. As a result, for example, in a situation where the held ball information for the stage change section is stored in the first sub-holding area (3), if the first starting opening prize corresponding to the fourth held ball occurs, Stage change section reserved ball information is stored in the first sub-retention area (4) (see FIG. 180(a)).

In step S9151, if it is determined that the stage change section relevant suspended ball does not exist among the suspended balls for the upper limit of 4 times, the sub CPU 301 controls the special symbol variation that has been counted since moving to the current performance stage. It is determined whether the number of times (the number of fluctuation counts after stage transition) reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times) in the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the current first starting slot winning (step S9153). The post-stage variation count is stored in the work RAM 303, and the value is updated every time a special symbol variation is performed.

If it is determined that the number of fluctuation counts after the stage transition does not reach the predetermined number (20 times) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first starting hole winning, the sub CPU 301 controls the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first starting opening winning. It is determined whether or not a seventh preview performance occurs in the symbol variation (step S9154). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the variation pattern (main variation pattern) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first starting opening winning is the seventh preview production (production corresponding to production number "121" or "122"). It is determined whether the fluctuation pattern corresponds to Since the winning command for the first starting opening winning that is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 includes information indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, by receiving the winning command for the first starting opening winning, the sub CPU 301 can recognize the variation pattern in the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first starting opening winning. Further, the fluctuation pattern includes information corresponding to the performance performed during the special symbol fluctuation. Based on the information, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the seventh preview performance will be performed during the special symbol variation.

In step S9153, if it is determined that the number of fluctuation counts after stage transition reaches the predetermined number (20 times) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first starting hole winning, or if it is determined that the number of fluctuations counted after the stage transition reaches the predetermined number (20 times), or it corresponds to the current first starting opening winning. If it is determined that the seventh preview performance will occur in the special symbol variation, the sub CPU 301 specifies the reserved ball related to the current first starting slot winning as the reserved ball in the stage change section (step S9155). In this process, the sub CPU 301 stores the held ball information in the stage change section in the first sub holding area corresponding to the current first starting slot winning. As a result, for example, if the current special symbol variation corresponding to the first starting slot winning (corresponding to the 4th reserved ball) is the 21st special symbol variation after moving to the current production stage. In this case, the held ball information for the stage change section is stored in the first sub-holding area (4) (see FIG. 179(d)). Although not shown, for example, if the seventh preview effect occurs during the special symbol change corresponding to the first starting hole winning (corresponding to the fourth held ball), the first sub-holding area In (4), the held ball information for the stage change section is stored.

Although not shown, a specific super reach (for example, any super reach other than the 5th specific super reach) will similarly occur during the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to this first starting opening winning, In addition, when winning the production stage transition lottery before reaching the specified number, the reserved ball information for the stage change section may be stored in the first sub-retention area corresponding to the current first starting opening prize. In addition, when the number of fluctuation counts after the stage transition reaches a predetermined number (20 times) in the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first starting opening winning this time, and a specific super reach (for example, the fifth special If a super reach (any super reach other than super reach) occurs and you do not win the production stage transition pending lottery when the specified number is reached, you will be entered into the 1st sub pending area corresponding to this 1st starting entrance prize. , the held ball information for the stage change section may be stored. On the other hand, in the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first starting opening winning this time, the number of fluctuation counts after the stage transition reaches the predetermined number (20 times), and during the special symbol fluctuation, a specific super reach (for example, the fifth special If a super reach (any super reach other than super reach) occurs, and if you win the production stage transfer pending lottery when the specified number is reached, the stage will be placed in the first sub pending area corresponding to the next first starting gate prize. The reserved ball information for the change section may be stored.

After executing the process of step S9152 or step S9155, or if it is determined in step S9153 that the seventh preview effect will not occur in the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first starting slot winning, the sub CPU 301 executes this subroutine. finish.

The stage change section determination process performed in step S9101 in FIG. 182 has been described above with reference to FIG. 183. The explanation returns to FIG. 182.

After executing the process of step S9101, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the reserved ball related to the current first starting gate winning is a stage change section reserved ball (including the stage change section concerned reserved ball) (step S9102). If it is determined that the held ball related to the current first starting gate winning is the stage change section held ball, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the held ball related to the current first starting opening winning is not a stage change section holding ball, the sub CPU 301 sets the fluctuation pattern in the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the current first starting opening winning to a fixed value. It is determined whether they are compatible (step S9103). Although not shown, in this embodiment, as a result of the jackpot determination regarding the first special symbol, the first jackpot that is relatively advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot with a large number of rounds or a jackpot with a time saving) is compared to the first jackpot that is relatively advantageous to the player. A disadvantageous second jackpot (for example, a jackpot with a small number of rounds or a jackpot with no time savings) may be provided. Then, the probability that a predetermined fluctuation pattern (fixed value) will be selected in the case of the first jackpot and the probability that the predetermined fluctuation pattern (fixed value) will be selected in the case of the second jackpot are calculated. are the same, the probability that a predetermined fluctuation pattern (indeterminate jackpot) will be selected in the case of the first jackpot and the probability that the predetermined fluctuation pattern (indeterminate jackpot) will be selected in the case of the second jackpot. The probability may be different from the probability. In this case, the predetermined variation pattern (fixed value) and the predetermined variation pattern (indeterminate jackpot) may perform special symbol variation using the same variation pattern. In the process of step S9103, the sub CPU 301 determines that the variation pattern in the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first starting opening winning is a variation pattern (variation pattern corresponding to a fixed value) other than the predetermined variation pattern (indeterminate jackpot). Determine whether or not. If it is determined that the variation pattern in the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first starting slot winning is not a variation pattern corresponding to a fixed value, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern in the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the current first starting slot win is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a fixed value, the sub CPU 301 determines that the timing at which the current first starting slot winning occurred is It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, a time corresponding to 41 frames) has elapsed since the start of the special symbol variation in which the stage change is performed (step S9104). If it is determined that the timing at which the current first starting slot winning occurs is within a predetermined time after the start of the special symbol variation in which the stage change is performed, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the timing at which the current first starting opening winning occurred is not within the predetermined time after the start of the special symbol variation in which the stage change is performed, the sub CPU 301 executes the sub variation pattern (second half) lottery process. Execute (step S9105). The sub variation pattern is composed of a first half and a second half, and the main variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern) is also composed of a first half and a second half. In the process of step S9105, the sub CPU 301 uses the main variation pattern information (information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol) included in the winning command for the first starting opening winning that is transmitted from the main control circuit 200, and the current performance. The content of the latter half of the sub-variation pattern is determined by performing a lottery based on random numbers based on the stage.

Next, the sub CPU 301 executes the sub variation pattern (first half) lottery process (step S9106). In this process, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery based on random numbers to determine the first half of the sub variation pattern based on the sub variation pattern (second half) determined in step S9105, the main variation pattern, and the current production stage. Decide on the content. Note that information indicating the current performance stage is stored in a performance stage flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 303, and the sub CPU 301 can determine the current performance stage by referring to the performance stage flag storage area. can be recognized.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S9107). If it is determined that the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the result of the second special lottery corresponding to the second special symbol variation is a loss or a small hit (step S9108 ). If it is determined that the result of the second special lottery is not a loss or a small hit (a big hit), the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine. In this embodiment, similarly to the first pachinko game machine, a method (simultaneous variation type) in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be varied simultaneously is adopted. Therefore, it is possible that a situation may occur in which a jackpot related to the second special symbol suddenly occurs, but by executing the processing in steps S9107 and S9108, even in such a situation, unintended gameplay can be prevented. There is no such thing.

If it is determined in step S9107 that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, or if it is determined in step S9108 that the result of the second special lottery is a loss or a small hit (not a jackpot), the sub CPU 301 , executes a pre-read effect lottery process (step S9109). In this process, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery based on random numbers to determine the current first starting opening prize (for the sub variation pattern) based on the sub variation pattern determined in step S9105 and step S9106. ) It is determined whether or not to generate a look-ahead effect, and if a look-ahead effect is to be generated, the content of the look-ahead effect (for example, the look-ahead effect pattern shown in FIG. 191) is determined (step S9109).

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a pre-read effect will occur for the current first starting opening prize based on the result of the pre-read effect lottery process in step S9109 (step S9110). If it is determined that a pre-read effect will occur regarding the current first starting slot winning, the sub CPU 301 sets the pre-read flag to ON (step S9111). The pre-reading flag is a flag indicating that a pre-reading performance will occur for a first starting hole winning, and is set to OFF when a special symbol variation corresponding to the first starting opening winning starts. As a result, the result of the 1st special lottery related to the 1st starting slot winning is suggested between the time when the 1st starting slot winning occurs and the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the 1st starting slot winning begins. A performance (pre-reading performance) will be performed.

If it is determined in step S9110 that the prefetch performance will not occur for the current first starting slot winning, or after executing the process in step S9111, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

Note that the processing in steps S9109 to S9111 may be configured as follows. If it is determined that a look-ahead performance will not occur for this first starting gate winning, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the reserved ball related to the current first starting gate winning is a held ball that can perform a look-ahead performance. do. The reserved ball that can perform the look-ahead effect is a specific sub-variation pattern (for example, the sub-variation patterns "1" to "20" shown in FIG. 190), and is based on the main variation pattern corresponding to the fixed value. This is a reserved ball on which a performance is performed based on the determined sub-fluctuation pattern. If it is determined that the reserved ball related to the current first starting slot winning is a pending ball that can perform a pre-reading effect, the sub CPU 301 adds the pre-reading ball to the first sub-holding area corresponding to the current first starting slot winning. Possible information (information indicating that a look-ahead effect can be performed) is stored. If it is determined that the reserved ball related to the current first starting slot winning is a pending ball for which a pre-reading effect cannot be performed, the sub CPU 301 adds the pre-reading ball to the first sub-holding area corresponding to the current first starting slot winning. Disapproval information (information indicating that the prefetch effect cannot be performed) is stored.

In FIG. 184(a), one game ball enters the first starting hole 120 while one special symbol variation is being performed, and the game ball is read ahead into the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first holding ball. This shows a state in which availability information is stored. In FIG. 184(b), after the state shown in FIG. 184(a), one game ball enters the first starting hole 120 while the one special symbol variation continues, and the second This shows a state in which pre-readable information is stored in the first sub-retention area corresponding to the reserved ball. Figure 185
In (a), one game ball enters the first starting hole 120 while one special symbol change is being performed, and pre-readable information is placed in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first holding ball. shows the stored state. In FIG. 185(b), after the state shown in FIG. 185(a), one game ball enters the first starting hole 120 while the one special symbol variation continues, and the second This shows a state in which pre-reading impossible information is stored in the first sub-retention area corresponding to the reserved ball. In FIG. 185(c), after the state shown in FIG. 185(b), one game ball enters the first starting hole 120 while the one special symbol variation continues, and the third ball enters the first starting hole 120. This shows a state in which pre-readable information is stored in the first sub-retention area corresponding to the reserved ball.

If it is determined that a look-ahead effect will occur regarding the current first start-gate winning, the sub CPU 301 will perform a look-ahead effect regarding the first start-gate win in the first sub holding area corresponding to the current first start-gate win. The information indicating this (pre-read information) is stored. Then, if pre-readable information is stored in all the first sub-holding areas (excluding the first sub-holding area (0)) corresponding to the first starting opening winnings before the current first starting opening winning, then the sub The CPU 301 rewrites the pre-readable information stored in these first sub-reservation areas into pre-reading information. The information during pre-reading is information indicating that the pre-reading effect is performed until the special symbol variation corresponding to the first sub-holding area in which the pre-reading information is stored starts.

In FIG. 184(c), after the state shown in FIG. 184(b), one game ball enters the first starting hole 120 while the one special symbol variation continues, and the third ball enters the first starting hole 120. This shows a state in which the pre-read information is stored in the first sub-retention area corresponding to the reserved ball. At this time, pre-reading information is stored in the first sub-reservation area corresponding to the first and second reserved balls instead of the pre-readable information. As a result, while the special symbol variations corresponding to the first and second reserved balls are being performed, a look-ahead performance that suggests the result of the jackpot determination regarding the third reserved ball is performed. In addition, in FIG. 184(d), after the state shown in FIG. 184(c), one game ball enters the first starting hole 120 while the one special symbol variation continues, and four balls enter the first starting hole 120. This shows a state in which pre-reading impossible information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the eye-holding ball. In this way, when the pre-reading information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to one holding ball, the information that cannot be read ahead is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the next holding ball.

In addition, if it is determined that a look-ahead effect will occur for this first starting opening prize, the first sub-holding area (first sub-holding area (0) corresponding to the first starting opening winning before this first starting opening winning )), if there is a first sub-reservation area in which the non-readable information is stored, the first sub-reservation area (excluding the first sub-reservation area in which the non-readable information is stored) exists. In this case, the pre-readable information stored in the first sub-reservation area with a larger number than the first sub-reservation area with the largest number is rewritten to the pre-reading information. In FIG. 185(d), after the state shown in FIG. 185(c), one game ball enters the first starting hole 120 while the one special symbol variation continues, and the fourth ball enters the first starting hole 120. This shows a state in which the pre-read information is stored in the first sub-retention area corresponding to the reserved ball. At this time, pre-reading information is stored in the first sub-reservation area corresponding to the third reserved ball instead of the pre-readable information. As a result, while the special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the first and second reserved balls are being performed, the look-ahead effect cannot be performed, and the special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the third reserved balls are not performed. During this period, a look-ahead effect will be performed that suggests the result of the jackpot determination regarding the fourth reserved ball.

In addition, if the reserved ball related to the current first starting gate winning is a stage change section reserved ball, the information that cannot be read ahead may be stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the current first starting gate winning. good. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 180(d), if it is determined to generate a look-ahead effect for the fourth held ball, the look-ahead effect stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first held ball It is also possible to rewrite the pre-readable information stored in the first sub-reservation area corresponding to the second and third reserved balls into pre-reading information while leaving the non-permanent information as is. In this case, the look-ahead effect cannot be performed while the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball is being performed, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the second to third reserved balls is While this is being performed, a look-ahead effect will be performed that suggests the result of the jackpot determination regarding the fourth reserved ball.

Alternatively, if the held ball related to the current first starting opening winning is the holding ball in the stage change section, while storing the information that cannot be read ahead in the first sub holding area corresponding to the current first starting opening winning, If the held ball related to the current 1st starting gate winning is a stage change section held ball other than the stage change section relevant held ball, pre-readable information is placed in the 1st sub-holding area corresponding to the current 1st starting gate winning. It is also possible to memorize it. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 180(d), if it is decided to generate a look-ahead effect for the fourth reserved ball, it is stored in the first sub-retention area corresponding to the first to third reserved balls. The currently read ahead information may be rewritten to read ahead information. In this case, while the special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the first to third reserved balls are being performed, a look-ahead effect will be performed that suggests the result of the jackpot determination regarding the fourth reserved ball. Become.

As described above, the first sub-reservation area is provided in the work RAM 303 and corresponds to the first special symbol start storage area provided in the main RAM 203. Information similar to the information stored in the first sub-reservation area of the work RAM 303 can be configured to also be stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203. In this case, the information stored in the first sub reservation area of the work RAM 303 is controlled to be generated by the sub control circuit 300 according to the information stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203. is possible. Further, the main control circuit 200 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform the prefetch effect based on information stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203. Further, regarding the information stored in the first sub-reservation area of the work RAM 303, it may be configured such that a suggestive effect is performed in accordance with the information to such an extent that the player can recognize the information.

<Processing at the start of the first special symbol change>
FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing a stage change occurrence/non-occurrence determination process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing stage count processing related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the stage change occurrence lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 190 is a diagram showing a sub variation pattern selection table. FIG. 191 is a diagram showing a sub fluctuation pattern replacement table.

In the first special symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 186, after a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 in the normal mode (see FIG. 137(a)), the special symbol variation related to the starting prize starts. This is a process that is sometimes performed by the sub-control circuit 300 in the production mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76). In addition, the sub-control circuit 300 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol production start command transmitted from the main control circuit 200. Furthermore, prior to executing the process shown in FIG. 186, the sub CPU 301 transfers the information stored in the first sub reservation area (1) to the first sub reservation area (4) to the first sub reservation area, respectively. (0), and shifted to the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (3).

In the first special symbol variation start time process, first, the sub CPU 301 executes a stage change occurrence determination process (step S9201). The stage change occurrence/non-occurrence determining process will be described below with reference to FIG. 187.

In the stage change occurrence determination process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the current special symbol variation is the first special symbol variation after transitioning to the normal mode (step S9251). If it is determined that the current special symbol variation is the first special symbol variation after transitioning to the normal mode, the sub CPU 301 sets the stage change flag to ON (step S9252). The stage change flag is a flag indicating that a condition for generating a stage change is satisfied, and when the stage change flag is set on, a stage change is performed. After executing the process in step S9252, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9251 that the current special symbol variation is not the first special symbol variation after transitioning to the normal mode, the sub CPU 301 executes stage count processing (step S9253). The stage count process will be explained below using FIG. 188.

In the stage count process, first, the sub CPU 301 adds 1 to the value of the post-stage change variation counter (step S9261). The value of the post-stage variation count counter indicates the number of first special symbol variations counted after the transition to the current production stage (post-stage variation count), and is stored in the work RAM 303. The sub CPU 301 adds the value of the post-stage variation number counter every time the first special symbol variation (variation display in the first special symbol display section 163) is performed, and adds the value of the variation number counter after the stage transition, while adding the value of the variation counter after the stage shift every time the first special symbol variation (variation display in the first special symbol display section 163) is performed. Even if the change display in section 164 is performed, the value of the change number counter after stage shift is not incremented.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the value of the post-stage change variation counter is 20 (step S9262). If it is determined that the value of the post-stage change variation counter is not 20, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 301 determines that the value of the post-stage variation number counter is 20, the sub CPU 301 sets the specified number reaching flag to ON (step S9263). The specified number reaching flag is a flag indicating that the number of fluctuation counts after stage transition has reached the number of special symbol fluctuations (20 times) related to the stage change generation condition. If the specified number reaching flag is set to on when the first special symbol variation starts, basically (unless you win the production stage transition pending lottery when the specified number is reached (see step S9273 in Figure 189)) , a stage change will be performed in the special symbol variation.

After executing the process of step S9263, the sub CPU 301 sets the post-stage change variation counter to "0" (clears the value of the post-stage shift variation counter) (step S9264). Thereafter, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

The stage count process performed in step S9253 in FIG. 187 has been described above using FIG. 188. The explanation returns to FIG. 187.

After executing the process in step S9253, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the prefetch flag (see step S9111 in FIG. 182) is set on (step S9254). If it is determined that the prefetch flag is not set on, the sub CPU 301 executes a stage change occurrence lottery process (step S9255). The stage change occurrence lottery process will be described below with reference to FIG. 189.

In the stage change occurrence lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the change flag at the time of the next change is set on (step S9271). The change flag at the time of the next change indicates that the number of changes after the stage transition in one special symbol change has reached the number of special symbol changes (20 times) related to the stage change occurrence condition, but the occurrence of the stage change is the next special symbol. This is a flag indicating that the change has been carried over to the change (see step S9279). If it is determined that the next change change flag is set on, the sub CPU 301 sets the stage change flag on (step S9272). As a result, a stage change will occur in this special symbol change. After executing the process in step S9272, the sub CPU 301 sets the change flag at the time of the next change to OFF (step S9273), and ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9271 that the next change change flag is not set on, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the specified number reaching flag (see step S9263 in FIG. 188) is set on (step S9274). If it is determined that the specified number reaching flag is set on, the sub CPU 301 determines whether a specific super reach (for example, any super reach other than the 5th specific super reach) will occur during this special symbol variation. It is determined whether or not (step S9275). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the variation pattern in the current special symbol variation is a variation pattern corresponding to a specific super reach. As described above, the winning command for the first starting opening winning that is sent from the main control circuit 200 includes information indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and the sub CPU 301 determines the current special symbol based on the information. It is possible to recognize effects that may occur during fluctuations.

If it is determined that a specific super reach will occur during this special symbol variation, the sub CPU 301 executes a production stage transfer pending lottery when the specified number is reached (step S9276). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on random numbers. Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the lottery with effect stage transition pending when the specified number is reached is won (step S9277).

If it is determined in step S9275 that a specific super reach does not occur during the current special symbol variation, or if it is determined in step S9277 that the lottery with effect stage transition pending upon reaching the specified number has not been won, the sub CPU 301 The stage change flag is set on (step S9278). As a result, a stage change will occur in this special symbol change. After executing the process of step S9278, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9277 that the lottery for suspending production stage transition upon reaching the specified number has been won, the sub CPU 301 sets the next change change flag to ON (step S9279). As a result, a stage change will be performed in the next special symbol change. After executing the process of step S9279, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9274 that the specified number reaching flag is not set on, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a seventh preview performance will occur during the current special symbol variation (step S9280). In this process, the sub CPU 301 refers to the process result of step S9154 in FIG. 183. In the process of step S9154, if the sub CPU 301 determines that the seventh preview effect will occur in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first starting hole winning, the sub CPU 301 displays the first sub reservation area corresponding to the first starting opening winning. Information (seventh preview performance occurrence information) indicating that a seventh preview performance will occur during the special symbol variation corresponding to the first starting slot winning is stored. At the time of executing the process of step S9280, the information stored in the first sub-reservation area has been shifted to the first sub-reservation area (0). In the process of step S9280, the sub CPU 301 determines that the seventh preview performance will occur during the current special symbol variation if the seventh preview performance occurrence information is stored in the first sub reservation area (0).

If it is determined that the seventh preview performance will occur during this special symbol change, the sub CPU 301 sets the stage change flag to ON (step S9281). As a result, a stage change will occur in this special symbol change. After executing the process in step S9281, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the 7th preview performance will not occur during this special symbol variation, the sub CPU 301 will execute a specific super reach (for example, any super reach other than the 5th specific super reach) during this special symbol variation. ) occurs (step S9282). This process is similar to the process in step S9275. If it is determined that a specific super reach will occur during this special symbol variation, the sub CPU 301 executes a performance stage transition lottery before reaching the specified number (step S9283). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on random numbers. At this time, the sub CPU 301 changes the winning probability of the performance stage transition lottery before the specified number is reached, depending on the value of the post-stage variation counter.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the pre-specified number pre-representation stage transition lottery has been won (step S9284). If it is determined that the lottery for moving to the production stage before reaching the specified number has been won, the sub CPU 301 sets the stage change flag to ON (step S9285). As a result, a stage change will occur in this special symbol change. If it is determined in step S9282 that a specific super reach does not occur during this special symbol change, or if it is determined in step S9284 that the lottery to move to the performance stage before reaching the specified number has been won, or the process of step S9285 is After executing, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

The stage change occurrence lottery process performed in step S9255 in FIG. 187 has been described above with reference to FIG. 189. The explanation returns to FIG. 187.

If it is determined in step S9254 that the prefetch flag is set on, or after executing the process in step S9255, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine. In addition, in the case where the seventh preview performance occurs during the current special symbol variation, all the reserved balls that exist at the time the current special symbol variation starts are stage change section reserved balls (see FIG. 183). Since the look-ahead effect is not performed for the stage change section reserved ball (see FIG. 182), if the seventh preview effect occurs during the current special symbol change, the determination result in step S9254 will always be "NO".

The stage change occurrence determination processing performed in step S9201 in FIG. 186 has been described above with reference to FIG. 187. The explanation returns to FIG. 186.

After executing the process in step S9201, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the stage change flag (see steps S9273, S9278, S9281, and S9285 in FIG. 189) is set to ON (step S9202). ).

If it is determined that the stage change flag is set on, the sub CPU 301 executes a stage change destination lottery process (step S9203). In this process, the sub CPU 301 refers to the stage change destination lottery table and performs a lottery based on random numbers to determine the production stage after the transition due to the stage change. Although not shown, in the stage change destination lottery table, each production stage (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage) that can be a production stage after transition is associated with a random value range and defined. has been done. As stage change destination lottery tables, there are provided a stage change destination lottery table for the first production stage, a stage change destination lottery table for the second production stage, and a stage change destination lottery table for the third production stage. In the stage change destination lottery tables, the random number ranges are different from each other. When the current production stage is the first production stage, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery by referring to the stage change destination lottery table for the first production stage, and when the current production stage is the second production stage. performs the lottery by referring to the stage change destination lottery table for the second production stage, and if the current production stage is the third production stage, the lottery is performed by referring to the stage change destination lottery table for the third production stage. I do.

As a result, when the performance stage after transition is determined, the sub CPU 301 performs control to cause the transition to the determined performance stage. Specifically, the sub CPU 301 updates the information stored in the production stage flag storage area to information corresponding to the production stage after the transition. Then, the sub CPU 301 sets the post-stage variation number counter to "0" (clears the value of the post-stage variation number counter) (step S9204).

If it is determined in step S9202 that the stage change flag is not set to on, the sub CPU 301 controls the sub variation pattern (step S9105 in FIG. 182 and (see step S9106) is determined (step S9205). If it is determined that the sub-variation pattern is determined when the first starting hole winning corresponding to this special symbol variation occurs, the sub CPU 301 determines that when the first starting opening winning corresponding to this special symbol variation occurs, It is determined whether the presentation stage (at the time of executing the processing of steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 182) and the current presentation stage are the same (step S9206).

If it is determined in step S9205 that the sub-variation pattern (see step S9105 and step S9106 in FIG. 182) has not been determined when the first starting slot winning corresponding to the current special symbol variation occurs, or in step S9206 It was determined that the production stage at the time when the first starting slot winning corresponding to this special symbol change occurred (at the time of executing the processing of steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 182) and the current production stage were not the same. In this case, the sub CPU 301 executes the sub variation pattern (second half) lottery process (step S9207), and further executes the sub variation pattern (first half) lottery process (step S9208). The processing in step S9207 and step S9208 is similar to the processing in step S9105 and step S9106 in FIG. 182, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

In step S9206, the production stage when the first starting slot winning corresponding to the current special symbol change occurs (at the time of executing the processing of steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 182) is the same as the current production stage. If it is determined that this is the case, or after executing the process in step S9208, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the prefetch flag (see step S9111 in FIG. 182) is set to on (step S9209).

If it is determined that the prefetch flag is set on, the sub CPU 301 executes sub variation pattern replacement processing (step S9210). In this process, the sub CPU 301 performs a process of replacing the already determined sub variation pattern with another sub variation pattern as necessary. A detailed explanation will be given below using FIGS. 190 and 191.

In the sub-variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 190, main variation patterns and sub-variation patterns are defined in association with each other. The main variation patterns include main variation pattern "1", main variation pattern "2", main variation pattern "3", and so on. For example, although not shown, the main variation pattern "10" becomes the main variation pattern (see step S9154 in FIG. 183) corresponding to the seventh preview effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122"). There is. A plurality of sub-variation patterns are associated with one main variation pattern, and when the one main variation pattern is selected, any one of the plurality of sub-variation patterns is selected. It is now selected. For example, in the processing of steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 182, if the sub CPU 301 receives information indicating that the main variation pattern is "1" as a variation pattern command from the main control circuit 200, the sub CPU 301 One sub-variation pattern is selected from "1" to "30" (30 types of sub-variation patterns).

The sub-variation patterns include a sub-variation pattern that can perform a look-ahead effect (a sub-variation pattern that can be read ahead) and a sub-variation pattern that cannot perform a look-ahead effect (a sub-variation pattern that cannot be read ahead). FIG. 190 also shows whether each sub-variation pattern is classified into a sub-variation pattern that can be read ahead or a sub-variation pattern that cannot be read ahead. For example, sub variation patterns "1" to "20" are sub variation patterns that can be read ahead, and sub variation patterns "21" to "30" are sub variation patterns that cannot be read ahead. For example, if it is determined in step S9110 of FIG. 182 that a look-ahead effect will not occur for the current first starting slot winning, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106 is a sub-variation pattern that can be read ahead. For example, pre-reading information (information indicating that a pre-reading performance can be performed) is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the current first starting opening winning. On the other hand, if the sub-variation pattern determined in step S9105 and step S9106 is a sub-variation pattern that cannot be read ahead, information that cannot be read ahead (that cannot perform a look-ahead effect (information indicating that it is not possible) is stored.

After that, when a first starting slot winning occurs and a pre-reading effect occurs for the first starting opening winning (when the pre-reading flag is set to on in step S9111), an explanation will be given using FIGS. 184 and 185. As described above, the sub CPU 301 rewrites the pre-reading information stored in the first sub-reservation area to the pre-reading information. In the process of step S9210 in FIG. 186, if the pre-reading information is stored in the first sub-reservation area (first sub-reservation area (0)) corresponding to the current special symbol change (step S9105 and If the sub-variation pattern determined in step S9106 is a pre-readable sub-variation pattern), the sub-variation pattern is replaced. On the other hand, if the pre-reading impossible information is stored in the first sub-reservation area (first sub-reservation area (0)) corresponding to the current special symbol change (the sub-CPU 301 If the variation pattern is a sub-variation pattern that cannot be read in advance), the sub-variation pattern is not replaced.

In the sub-variation pattern replacement table shown in FIG. 191, for each sub-variation pattern before replacement, a sub-variation pattern after replacement is defined in association with a look-ahead effect pattern. As the sub-variation pattern before replacement, only the pre-readable sub-variation pattern is defined between the pre-readable sub-variation pattern and the non-pre-readable sub-variation pattern. The prefetch effect pattern indicates the type of prefetch effect, and is determined in the prefetch effect lottery process (see step S9109 in FIG. 182). The sub-variation pattern after replacement is a sub-variation pattern (sub-variation pattern for pre-reading) that corresponds to the pre-reading effect. In FIG. 191, as examples of the sub-variation patterns for pre-reading, sub-variation patterns for pre-reading "31" to "50" corresponding to the main variation pattern "1" are shown. The look-ahead sub fluctuation patterns “31” to “35” are associated with the look-ahead sub fluctuation patterns “1” to “5”, and the look-ahead sub fluctuation patterns “36” to “40” are the look-ahead sub fluctuation patterns “36” to “40”. They are associated with variation patterns "6" to "10", and look-ahead sub variation patterns "41" to "45" are associated with look-ahead sub variation patterns "11" to "15", The sub-variation patterns "46" to "50" are associated with the pre-readable sub-variation patterns "16" to "20".

In the process of step S9210 in FIG. 186, the sub CPU 301 creates a new prefetch sub variation pattern in place of the already determined sub variation pattern (prefetchable sub variation pattern) by referring to the sub variation pattern replacement table. This is determined as a sub-fluctuation pattern. For example, the sub variation pattern determined in step S9105 and step S9106 of FIG. 182 is the sub variation pattern "1", and the prefetch effect pattern determined in the prefetch effect lottery process (see step S9109 of FIG. 182) is the prefetch effect pattern. In the case of A, the sub CPU 301 determines the look-ahead sub variation pattern "31" as the sub variation pattern after replacement. Furthermore, the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 182 is the sub-variation pattern "10", and the pre-read effect pattern determined in the pre-read effect lottery process (see step S9109 in FIG. 182) is the pre-read effect pattern. In the case of B, the sub CPU 301 determines the look-ahead sub variation pattern "37" as the sub variation pattern after replacement.

In this way, for example, when the main variation pattern "1" is selected, any one of the sub variation patterns "1" to "50" may be selected, but the sub variation pattern selection table In , pre-reading sub variation patterns "31" to "50" are not defined. As a result, it is possible to select a sub variation pattern using a common method in steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. It is possible to improve the efficiency of processing related to determining a fluctuation pattern. On top of that, when a look-ahead effect is performed, the sub-variation pattern replacement table is referred to, and by replacing it with a sub-variation pattern for look-ahead that corresponds to the look-ahead effect pattern, a sub-variation pattern that matches the look-ahead effect is created. It is now possible to change the decorative design. Note that the sub-variation pattern selection table and the sub-variation pattern replacement table are stored in the program ROM 202.

Although not shown, the sub-variation pattern selection table includes a sub-variation pattern selection table for the first production stage, a sub-variation pattern selection table for the second production stage, and a sub-variation pattern selection table for the third production stage. It is being In these sub-variation pattern selection tables, the random value ranges assigned to each sub-variation pattern are different from each other, and there are sub-variation patterns that can only be selected in the first production stage, and only in the second production stage. A sub-variation pattern that can be selected and a sub-variation pattern that can be selected only in the third performance stage are respectively set. When the current production stage is the first production stage, the sub CPU 301 selects the sub variation pattern by referring to the sub variation pattern selection table for the first production stage, and selects the sub variation pattern when the current production stage is the second production stage. If so, select the sub-variation pattern by referring to the sub-variation pattern selection table for the second production stage, and if the current production stage is the third production stage, select the sub-variation pattern for the third production stage. A sub variation pattern is selected by referring to the pattern selection table.

Similarly, the sub-fluctuation pattern replacement tables include a sub-fluctuation pattern replacement table for the first production stage, a sub-fluctuation pattern replacement table for the second production stage, and a sub-variation pattern replacement table for the third production stage. It is provided. In these sub-fluctuation pattern replacement tables, the correspondence between the sub-fluctuation patterns before replacement and the sub-fluctuation patterns after replacement are different from each other, and some of the types of look-ahead effect patterns are different from each other. When the current production stage is the first production stage, the sub CPU 301 replaces the sub variation pattern by referring to the sub variation pattern replacement table for the first production stage, and changes the current production stage to the second production stage. If so, replace the sub variation pattern by referring to the sub variation pattern replacement table for the second production stage, and if the current production stage is the third production stage, replace the sub variation pattern for the third production stage. The sub variation pattern is replaced by referring to the pattern replacement table.

If it is determined in step S9209 that the look-ahead flag is not set to on, or after executing the process in step S9210, the sub CPU 301 converts the already determined sub fluctuation pattern into a sub fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation scale. A replacement process is performed (step S9211). In this process, if the already determined sub-variation pattern is a normal sub-variation pattern (sub-variation pattern corresponding to the default variation pattern shown in FIGS. 171 to 173), the sub-CPU 301 changes the sub-variation pattern as necessary. Change the time. For example, at the time when the first starting hole winning corresponding to this special symbol variation occurs, the first starting opening winning corresponds to the 4th reserved ball, and the sub-variation corresponding to the 4 second variation When a pattern is selected, but all the pendings are subsequently exhausted and the special symbol variation is reached, a process is performed to replace it with a sub-variation pattern corresponding to the 13-second variation.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the stage change flag (see steps S9273, S9278, S9281, and S9285 in FIG. 189) is set to ON (step S9212). If it is determined that the stage change flag is set on, the sub CPU 301 executes a stage change wipe color lottery process (step S9213). The stage change wipe color lottery process will be described below.

As mentioned above, when a stage change is performed based on the number of special symbol changes (number of changes counted after stage transition) reaching a predetermined number (20 times), the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" (Fig. 178) is performed. After the performance corresponding to the performance number "131" is performed, the display device 7 displays a wipe display, and the stage after transition (first performance stage, second performance stage, or third performance stage) is displayed. Transition to the corresponding background. Furthermore, when a stage change occurs based on the occurrence of the seventh preview performance, the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" or the performance corresponding to the performance number "122" (see FIG. 177) is performed. After the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" is performed, the display device 7 displays a wipe display, and the stage after transition (first performance stage, second performance stage, or third performance stage) is displayed. Transition to the corresponding background. In addition, after the performance in the fifth specific super reach that transitions via the performance corresponding to the performance number "122" is completed, the display device 7 will display a wipe display, and the performance stage after the transition (the first performance stage , the second presentation stage, or the third presentation stage).

In this way, when transitioning to the background corresponding to the stage after transition, a predetermined wipe image is displayed on the display device 7. The wipe image can be displayed in various colors (default color, gold, or special color). Specifically, if the production stage after transition is the first production stage, the wipe image for the first production stage in the default color, the wipe image for the first production stage in gold, or the first production stage in a special color. wipe image is displayed. If the production stage after transition is the second production stage, the wipe image for the second production stage in the default color, the wipe image for the second production stage in gold, or the wipe image for the second production stage in a special color is Is displayed. If the production stage after transition is the third production stage, the wipe image for the third production stage in the default color, the wipe image for the third production stage in gold, or the wipe image for the third production stage in a special color is Is displayed. In the process of step S9213, the sub CPU 301 refers to the stage change wipe color lottery table and determines the color of the wipe image by performing a lottery based on random numbers. Although not shown, in the stage change wipe color lottery table, various colors (default color , gold, and special colors) and random value ranges are defined in association with each other.

In addition, the stage change wipe color lottery tables include the 1st stage change wipe color lottery table, the 2nd stage change wipe color lottery table, the 3rd stage change wipe color lottery table, the 4th stage change wipe color lottery table, and the 5th stage change wipe color lottery table. A change wipe color lottery table and a sixth stage change wipe color lottery table are provided, and the random number ranges of these stage change wipe color lottery tables are different from each other. The 1st stage change wipe color lottery table to the 6th stage change wipe color lottery table correspond to setting values of "1" to "6", respectively, and the sub CPU 301 selects the stage change that corresponds to the current setting value. It is designed to refer to the wipe color lottery table. In each stage change wipe color lottery table, the random value range for the special color is set so that the probability that the special color will be selected increases as the set value increases. For example, the probability that a special color wipe image will be displayed is higher when the setting value is "4" than when the setting value is "2", and when the setting value is "6" than when the setting value is "4". In this case, the probability that a special color wipe image will be displayed is higher. As a result, the setting value is suggested through the appearance frequency of special color wipe images.

In addition, in the above, as an example, when a stage change occurs based on the occurrence of the 7th preview performance (including the case where the 7th preview performance occurs in a game that reaches the specified number), the stage change is set to the performance number "121". It has been explained that the performance corresponding to the performance number "131" is performed before the corresponding performance or the performance corresponding to the performance number "122" is performed. However, in this case, only the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" or the performance corresponding to the performance number "122" may be performed, and the performance corresponding to the performance number "131" may not be performed. In addition, while it is assumed that both the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" or the performance corresponding to the performance number "122" and the performance corresponding to the performance number "131" will be performed, the performance corresponding to the performance number "131" The wipe image may not be displayed after the corresponding effect is performed, but the wipe image may be displayed only after the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" is performed. good. If such a configuration is adopted, the wipe image will be displayed only once during one stage change. Thereby, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the wipe image.

Furthermore, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, if a predetermined look-ahead effect occurs, the stage change wipe color lottery process may be performed during the previous special symbol variation of the stage change game. The predetermined look-ahead performance is a look-ahead performance that can be performed during the previous special symbol variation of the stage change game when a variation pattern corresponding to the seventh preview performance is determined as the main variation pattern in the stage change game. In the pre-reading performance, the game freezes with a predetermined image displayed, and moves to the stage change game in that state. In this case, in the stage change game, the processes of steps S9212 and S9213 may not be performed (the wipe image is ). Furthermore, the predetermined look-ahead performance may be configured to occur only in one performance stage (for example, the second performance stage).

If it is determined in step S9212 that the stage change flag is not set to ON, or after executing the process in step S9213, the sub CPU 301 executes a production lottery process according to the production stage (step S9214). In this process, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery based on random numbers to select the sub variation pattern finally determined (the sub variation pattern determined by executing the process of step S9211) and the current performance stage. Based on this, processing is performed to determine the specific content of the performance. For example, when the current performance stage is the first performance stage, the sub CPU 301 executes the first performance stage preview content lottery process (see FIG. 138). Further, when the current performance stage is the second performance stage, the sub CPU 301 executes the second performance stage preview content lottery process, and when the current performance stage is the third performance stage, the sub CPU 301 executes the second performance stage preview content lottery process. A production stage preview content lottery process is executed. Also in the second performance stage preview content lottery process and the third performance stage preview content lottery process, special symbol fluctuations related to the first starting opening prize are based on the sub-variation pattern, similar to the first performance stage preview content lottery process. The content of the performance to be performed during the event is determined. After executing the process in step S9214, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Basic screen display at each production stage>
FIG. 192(a) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device on the first presentation stage. FIG. 192(b) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device on the second presentation stage. FIG. 192(c) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device at the third presentation stage.

As shown in FIG. 192(a), in the first performance stage, a first performance stage name image 9101 indicating the name of the first performance stage is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, upper left) on the display device 7. As shown in FIG. 192(b), in the second performance stage, a second performance stage name image 9102 indicating the name of the second performance stage is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, upper left) on the display device 7. As shown in FIG. 192(c), in the third performance stage, a third performance stage name image 9103 indicating the name of the third performance stage is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, upper left) on the display device 7. The first performance stage name image 9101, the second performance stage name image 9102, and the third performance stage name image 9103 are each displayed at the same position on the display device 7.

Further, a counter image 9104 is displayed on the display device 7 at each performance stage. As described above, the counter image 9104 is an image corresponding to the number of special symbol variations performed after the stage change occurs (number of variations counted after stage change). The denominator number (20) indicates the number of special symbol changes (20 times) related to the stage change generation condition. The number in the numerator indicates the number of fluctuation counts after the current stage transition.

Further, as shown in FIG. 192(a), in the first production stage, a bell image 9021 for pseudo continuous stage notification, a watermelon image 9022 for pseudo continuous stage notification, and a cherry image 9023 for pseudo continuous stage notification are displayed. ing. As described above, the bell image 9021 for pseudo continuous stage notification, the watermelon image 9022 for pseudo continuous stage notification, and the cherry image 9023 for pseudo continuous stage notification are each in either a dark mode or a bright mode. (See FIG. 170). In addition, the bell image 9021 for pseudo continuous stage notification, the watermelon image 9022 for pseudo continuous stage notification, and the cherry image 9023 for pseudo continuous stage notification are always displayed while staying at the first production stage. It has become.

Specifically, when a pseudo continuous effect has not occurred, and when a pseudo continuous effect has occurred and the pseudo continuous stage is "pseudo 1", the pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021, the pseudo continuous stage notification The watermelon image 9022 and the cherry image 9023 for pseudo-continuation stage notification are displayed darkly. When a pseudo-continuation effect is occurring and the pseudo-continuation stage is "pseudo 2," the bell image 9021 for pseudo-continuation stage notification is displayed brightly, and the watermelon image 9022 for pseudo-continuation stage notification and the bell image 9022 for pseudo-continuation stage notification are displayed brightly. The cherry image 9023 is displayed darkly. When a pseudo continuous effect is occurring and the pseudo continuous stage is "pseudo 3", the pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021 and the pseudo continuous stage notification watermelon image 9022 are brightly displayed, and the pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021 and pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9022 are displayed brightly. The cherry image 9023 is displayed darkly. When a super reach develops through a pseudo continuous effect, during the super reach, a bell image 9021 for pseudo continuous stage notification, a watermelon image 9022 for pseudo continuous stage notification, and a cherry image 9023 for pseudo continuous stage notification are displayed. Displayed brightly.

Further, as shown in FIG. 192(b), a stock timer image 9110 is displayed on the second production stage. Stock timer image 9110 is an image that corresponds to any numerical value ("PLAY TIME") from "00:00" to "99:99". "PLAY TIME" indicates the length of time during which the super reach is performed, and the performance in the super reach will be performed for the time corresponding to the "PLAY TIME" indicated by the stock timer image 9110. Such "PLAY TIME" is added (stocked) according to the performance (time stock preview) performed during the second performance stage.

Although not shown, the time stock notice includes a first time stock notice, a second time stock notice, and a third time stock notice. In the first time stock notice, a predetermined item lamp emits light, a predetermined item decoration part (movable accessory) moves rattling, and at the same time the item decoration part jumps forward and at the same time the value shown as "PLAY TIME" is displayed. increases. The item lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the item decoration section. The item decoration section is provided at a predetermined location of the game board unit 10 (for example, as a part of the second character decoration section), and is made of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin, etc.). Further, the item decoration section is decorated in the shape of a predetermined item. In the second time stock notice, unlike the first time stock notice, the item lamp does not emit light and the item decoration part rattles, and the value indicated as "PLAY TIME" suddenly increases. In the third time stock preview, after a predetermined effect appears on the display device 7, an image is displayed in which the effect is absorbed into the item decoration part, and at the same time, the numerical value indicated as "PLAY TIME" increases.

Furthermore, the display pattern of the stock timer image 9110 corresponds to the display pattern of the background image. When "00:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed in a default pattern. When any numerical value from "05:00" to "30:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed in the effect level 1 pattern. When any value from "35:00" to "60:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed with two patterns of effect levels. When any numerical value from "65:00" to "95:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed in three effect level patterns. When "99:99" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed in an effect level MAX pattern. Note that the stock timer images 9110 include "00:01" to "04:99", "30:01" to "34:99", "60:01" to "64:99", and "95:01" to The numerical value "99:98" is not displayed.

The effect level 1 pattern has a higher jackpot expectation than the default pattern, the effect level 2 pattern has a higher jackpot expectation than the effect level 1 pattern, and the effect level 3 pattern has a higher jackpot expectation than the effect level 2 pattern. In comparison, the expectation of a jackpot is high, and the effect level MAX pattern has the highest expectation of a jackpot. In the effect level 1 pattern to the effect level 3 pattern, a background image based on orange is displayed, and as the effect level becomes higher, the display mode becomes more flashy. In the effect level MAX pattern, a background image based on red is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 192(c), a character appearance meter image 9120 is displayed in the third production stage. The character appearance meter image 9120 includes a left character appearance meter image 9120L and a right character appearance meter image 9120R. The left character appearance meter image 9120L and the right character appearance meter image 9120R are images imitating meters, respectively.

Specifically, the left character appearance meter image 9120L and the right character appearance meter image 9120R have an initial display mode (meter is not accumulated), a level 1 display mode (meter is accumulated at one stage), Level 2 display mode (meter filled to 2 levels), Level 3 display mode (meter filled to 3 levels), and Level MAX display mode (meter filled to capacity) It can be displayed in any format.

The meter indicated by the character appearance meter image 9120 accumulates according to the performance (meter UP notice) performed during the third performance stage. In the meter UP notice, there are cases where the meter accumulates to one stage, two stages, and three stages. When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L becomes the level MAX display mode, the left character 9121L appears on the display device 7 (becomes in a standby state). When the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R becomes the level MAX display mode, the right character 9121R appears on the display device 7 (becomes in a standby state).

When only the left character 9121L among the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R becomes a standby state, it develops into a super reach (super reach for left character) corresponding to the left character 9121L. When only the right character 9121R among the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R enters the standby state, a super reach (super reach for right character) corresponding to the right character 9121R develops. When both the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R enter the standby state, a super reach (super reach for both characters) is developed according to both characters.

In the super reach for the left character, when the right character 9121R appears on the display device 7, the transition shifts to the super reach for both characters, and in the super reach for the right character, when the left character 9121L appears on the display device 7, the super reach for both characters occurs. to move to. Further, in the left character super reach, when the first ally character appears on the display device 7, a predetermined super reach is developed. Similarly, in the super reach for the right character, when the first ally character appears on the display device 7, it develops into a predetermined super reach. In addition, in the super reach for both characters, if the button press effect is successful, it will develop into a predetermined super reach. These predetermined super reaches are the same super reaches as the super reach (see FIG. 154(a)) that transitions when the "cherry" icon is displayed in the first performance stage.

Note that even when the meter indicated by the character appearance meter image 9120 is not full, the silhouettes of the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R are displayed on the display device 7. Specifically, when the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the initial display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L is displayed on the display device 7 in the default state, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R is is the initial display mode, the silhouette of the right character 9121R is displayed on the display device 7 in a default state. When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the level 1 display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L is displayed blinking in blue, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R is the level 1 display mode. In this case, the silhouette of the right character 9121R is displayed blinking in blue.

When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the level 2 display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L is displayed blinking in green, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R is the level 2 display mode. In this case, the silhouette of the right character 9121R is displayed blinking in green. When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the level 3 display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L is displayed lit in red, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R is the level 3 display mode. In this case, the silhouette of the right character 9121R is displayed lit in red. In this way, as the level of the meter indicated by the character appearance meter image 9120 increases, the expectation of a jackpot increases.

Note that even if the meter indicated by the character appearance meter image 9120 is not full, the left character 9121L to right character 9121R may go into a standby state. Specifically, when the decorative pattern is displayed in a ready-to-reach manner, the screen of the display device 7 is displayed in a rotating manner, and after the rotation ends, various icons may be stopped and displayed. Icons that can be stopped and displayed in this manner include a left character icon, a right character icon, a "cherry" icon, and the like. When the left character icon is stopped and displayed, a transition is made to the super reach for the left character. When the right character icon is stopped and displayed, a transition is made to the super reach for the right character. When the "cherry" icon is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to the predetermined super reach.

<8th preview performance>
FIG. 193(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the eighth preview performance. FIG. 193(b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the eighth preview performance. FIG. 193(c) is a diagram showing the relationship between the eighth preview performance and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern.

The eighth preview performance shown in FIG. 193 is a performance that can occur when a special symbol variation is performed on the second performance stage (see FIG. 137(a)). The eighth preview performance can occur only in the second performance stage.

In the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "151" to "155", first, a sign that the decorative pattern is at full strength (becomes a reach mode) occurs. This omen is indicated by the second character lamp (Fig. 178).
(See (c)) blinks, which suggests that a tempo increase will occur. Note that the above description has been made assuming that the corresponding character lamp is always lit while staying at each production stage. However, in games other than games in which the specified number of characters is reached, the corresponding character lamp may be basically turned off. When configured in this way, the lighting of the second character lamp may be used as the above-mentioned sign.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "151" is a performance that fades out after the above-mentioned sign occurs. In the performance corresponding to the performance number "152," after the above-mentioned foreshadowing occurs, a predetermined movable accessory moves, and an image related to agitation to determine whether or not the decorative pattern becomes tenpai (tenpai agitation) is displayed on the display device 7. After that, an image corresponding to the failure of the tenpai agitation (a tenpai agitation failure image) is displayed on the display device 7, and the display device 7 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background. In the performance corresponding to the performance number "153", after the above-mentioned foreshadowing occurs, a predetermined movable accessory moves, and an image related to inciting whether or not the decorative pattern becomes tenpai (tenpai agitation) is displayed on the display device 7. This is an effect in which an image corresponding to a successful tenpai incitement (a successful tenpai incitement image) is displayed on the display device 7. When the tenpai incitement success image is displayed, the process then shifts to a notice after the tenpai success.

In the performance corresponding to the performance number "154", after the above-mentioned foreshadowing occurs, a predetermined movable accessory moves, and an image related to inciting whether or not the decorative pattern becomes tenpai (tenpai agitation) is displayed on the display device 7. After that, an image corresponding to a successful tenpai stirring (a successful tenpai stirring image) is displayed on the display device 7, and "PLAY TIME" is stocked. When the tenpai incitement success image is displayed, the process then shifts to a notice after the tenpai success. In the performance corresponding to the performance number "155", after the above-mentioned foreshadowing occurs, a predetermined movable accessory moves, and an image related to inciting whether or not the decorative pattern becomes tenpai (tenpai agitation) is displayed on the display device 7. This is an effect in which an image corresponding to a successful tenpai incitement (a successful tenpai incitement image) is displayed on the display device 7. When the image of successful tempai incitement is displayed, the scene shifts to a super hot notice.

The predetermined movable accessories that operate in the performances corresponding to the production numbers "152" to "155" are the same movable accessories as the movable accessories that operate in the preview after the icon stops (see FIG. 153). Furthermore, when a tenpai inciting success image is displayed in a performance corresponding to the performance numbers "153" to "155", the decorative pattern is displayed in a ready-to-reach mode. In addition, after the performances corresponding to the production numbers "153" and "154" are performed, the transition to a notice after Tenpai is successful, and when the notice ends after Tenpai is successful, the 6th specific super reach, the 7th specific super reach, and Develops into any super reach among the first specific super reaches. In the preview after the success of Tenpai, a transitional performance corresponding to the development destination Super Reach will be performed.

In particular, when developing into the 6th specific super reach, an image showing the title of the 6th specific super reach is displayed on the display device 7 in a preview after the Tenpai success. In the sixth specific super reach, a predetermined slot game is played. In the slot game, a plurality of types of icons, including the "cherry" icon, are displayed in a variable manner in three columns on the left, middle, and right on the display device 7, and then are stopped and displayed. In a slot game, when "cherry" icons are stopped and displayed in three rows on the left, middle, and right (when all three are aligned), a predetermined super reach develops. The predetermined super reach is the same super reach as the super reach (see FIG. 154(a)) that transitions when the "cherry" icon is displayed in the first performance stage. Therefore, the slot game can be said to be a mission for moving to a predetermined super reach.

When the slot game starts, "PLAY TIME" indicated by the stock timer image 9110 gradually decreases. While "PLAY TIME" remains (a value greater than 0), the slot game is played repeatedly. Then, when "PLAY TIME" becomes 0, the slot game ends. That is, the slot game is played for a period of time corresponding to "PLAY TIME." If you get three "cherry" icons within that time, you will have cleared the mission and will develop into a predetermined super reach. In other words, "PLAY TIME" is the time limit given to clear the mission.

Note that, as described above, in the performance corresponding to the performance number "154", "PLAY TIME" is stocked, but this stock is due to the above-mentioned second time stock preview being performed. In the second performance stage, during one special symbol variation, both a time stock notice and a jackpot notice performance (for example, the 8th notice performance) may occur.

In the intense preview that transitions after the performance corresponding to the performance number "155" is performed, one or more of the first ally character, the second ally character, and the third ally character appear on the display device 7. Appears in. Then, it develops into a super reach depending on the combination of characters that appear. A super hot notice can also occur at the first performance stage and the third performance stage.

There are four timings at which the above-mentioned sign may occur. Specifically, there is a case where the sign occurs after 4.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern (timing 1), and a case where the sign occurs after 8.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change of the decorative pattern (timing 2). In this case, the foreshadowing occurs after 12.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the decorative pattern fluctuation (timing 3), and the foreshadowing occurs after 16.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the decorative design fluctuation (timing 4). is provided. The sign occurs at one of these four timings. At timing 2, all effects following the omen occur with a 4 second delay compared to timing 1, and at timing 3, all effects following the omen occur with a 4 second delay compared to timing 2. However, at timing 4, compared to timing 3, all effects following the omen occur with a delay of 4 seconds. In FIG. 193(b), only timing 1 is illustrated.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 193(c), in the performance (timing 1) corresponding to the performance number "152", each decorative pattern (left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern) changes from the start of variation. It is designed to stop when 11 seconds have elapsed (the time when the display of the tempai failure image ends). With this, it is possible to make it appear to the player that each decorative pattern has stopped when the wipe display returns to the normal background after failing to increase the tenpai. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the result of the excitement during the excitement. Regarding timings 2 to 4, from the same viewpoint, the stop timings of each decorative pattern are respectively 15 seconds after the start of variation, 19 seconds after the start of variation, and 23 seconds after the start of variation.

<Logo lamp preview performance>
FIG. 194(a) is a diagram showing a flow of a logo lamp preview effect. FIGS. 194(b) and 194(c) are diagrams showing time charts of the logo lamp preview performance.

As described above, a logo cover is provided at a predetermined location of the game board unit 10 (for example, above the display device 7), and a logo lamp is provided on the back side of the logo cover. The logo lamp will be explained in more detail below.

The logo cover includes a first logo section, a second logo section, and a third logo section. The first logo part is decorated with a shape representing the first word, the second logo part is decorated with a shape representing the second word, and the third logo part is decorated with a shape representing the second word. The logo section is decorated in the shape of the third word. The first word, the second word, and the third word are each a predetermined word (character string), and in this specification, for convenience, the first word is "X", the second word is "Y", The third word is sometimes called "Z". The first logo portion is provided on the left side of the logo cover, the second logo portion is provided on the center portion of the logo cover, and the third logo portion is provided on the right side of the logo cover. .

The logo lamp includes a first logo lamp, a second logo lamp, and a third logo lamp. The first logo lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the first logo part, and the second logo lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the second logo part, The third logo lamp includes a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the third logo section. As a result, the letter "X" lights up by lighting the first logo lamp, the letter "Y" lights up by lighting the second logo lamp, and the letter "Z" lights up by lighting the third logo lamp. You can create an appearance that looks like it's lit up.

In this embodiment, a logo lamp preview effect is performed using such a logo lamp. The logo lamp preview performance shown in FIG. 194 is a performance that can occur when a special symbol change is performed on the first performance stage, second performance stage, or third performance stage (see FIG. 137(a)). . The logo lamp preview performance is a performance that can occur in combination with other jackpot preview performances during the first special symbol change.

Specifically, the performance corresponding to the performance number "161" is that after the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up for a predetermined period of time (1 second), the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up. This is a performance in which the lights go out. The performance corresponding to the performance number "162" is such that after the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up for a predetermined period of time (one second), the second logo lamp (letter "Y") lights up for a predetermined time (one second). seconds) (during which the first logo lamp (letter "X") continues to be lit), then the first logo lamp (letter "X") and the second logo lamp (letter "Y") This is a performance in which the lights go out.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "163" is that after the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up for a predetermined time (one second), the second logo lamp (letter "Y") lights up for a predetermined time (one second). seconds) (during which time, the first logo lamp (letter "X") continues to be lit), and then the third logo lamp (letter "Z") lights up (the first logo lamp (letter "X") This is an effect in which the lighting of the second logo lamp (letter "Y") and the second logo lamp (letter "Y") continues. The lighting of the first logo lamp (letter "X"), second logo lamp (letter "Y"), and third logo lamp (letter "Z") continues until the end of the special symbol variation.

The performances corresponding to the performance numbers "161" to "163" are performances related to inciting whether or not the decorative pattern becomes tenpai (tenpai agitation). As the letters light up in sequence like "X" → "Y" → "Z", the possibility that the decorative pattern will become Tenpai increases. Then, when all the characters are lit (when the performance corresponding to the performance number "163" is performed), it is determined that the decorative pattern will be Tenpai (it will always be in the reach mode). That is, the logo lamp preview performance is such that the expectation of a jackpot increases as the number of lit logo lamps increases.

FIG. 194(b) shows a time chart when a logo lamp preview performance is performed on the first performance stage or the third performance stage. Here, two timings are provided as lighting timings of the logo lamp. Specifically, when the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up after 5.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (for 10 seconds tenpai), and when 9.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern. There is a case in which the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up from this point on (for 14 seconds tenpai). In the first production stage and the third production stage, when the decorative pattern fluctuates in the default variation pattern, it becomes a ready-to-reach mode 10 seconds after the start of variation (10 seconds tenpai) and a ready-to-reach mode 14 seconds after the start of variation. There are times when (14 seconds tenpai) (see FIGS. 171 and 173).

The two timings in FIG. 194(b) correspond to these two types of tenpai timings. As a result, when the decorative pattern enters the reach mode 10 seconds after the start of variation, the logo lamp can be turned on at the timing indicated by "10 seconds tenpai" in FIG. 194(b). Furthermore, when the decorative pattern becomes a ready mode 14 seconds after the start of variation, the logo lamp can be turned on at the timing shown in "14 seconds for tenpai" in FIG. 194(b).

When a logo lamp preview performance is performed on the second performance stage, four timings are provided as lighting timings of the logo lamp. Specifically, the first logo lamp (the letter "X") lights up from 6 seconds after the decorative pattern starts changing (timing 1), and the first logo lamp (the "X" character) lights up from 10 seconds after the decorative pattern starts changing (timing 1). (timing 2) when the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up (timing 2), when the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up from 14 seconds after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, and when the There is a case (timing 4) in which the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up 18 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. In FIG. 194(c), only timing 1 is illustrated. These four timings respectively correspond to the four timings at which the eighth preview performance described above is performed. This makes it possible to light up the logo lamp at the timing when the Tenpai fanning is being performed in the eighth preview performance.

The logo lamp preview performance described above may also be performed at each stage of the pseudo continuous performance. That is, in each of "Pseudo 1", "Pseudo 2", and "Pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous performance, any of the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "161" to "163" may occur. For example, in "Pseudo 1", the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, and in "Pseudo 2", the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up from the point when the predetermined time has elapsed since the variation of the decorative pattern has resumed. The logo lamp (letter "X") lights up, and the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the variation of the decorative pattern resumed in "Pseudo 3". At this time, for example, if a performance corresponding to the performance number "161" or "162" is performed in "Pseudo 1", it will not shift to "Pseudo 2", but it will correspond to the performance number "163" in "Pseudo 1". If such an effect is performed, the transition may be made to "pseudo 2". In addition, if the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" and "162" are performed in "Pseudo 2", the transition to "Pseudo 3" is not performed, while in "Pseudo 2" the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" is performed. If this occurs, the transition may be made to "pseudo 3". In addition, if the effects corresponding to the effects number "161" and "162" are performed in "Pseudo 3", the transition to Super Reach will not occur, but the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" will be performed in "Pseudo 3". In such a case, it may be possible to shift to super reach.

<First production stage logo lamp preview content lottery process>
FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the first performance stage logo lamp preview content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko game machine. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the pseudo 3 logo lamp preview content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko game machine. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko game machine. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing a pseudo 1 logo lamp preview content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The first presentation stage logo lamp preview content lottery process shown in FIG. 195 is performed in step S9214 of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. This process is performed by the sub-control circuit 300 after the production stage preview content lottery process (see FIG. 138).

In the first production stage logo lamp preview content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether a pseudo continuous production will occur based on information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9301). If it is determined that a pseudo continuous effect will occur, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the pseudo continuous effect will progress to "pseudo 3" based on the information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9302). If it is determined that the pseudo continuous performance will progress to “pseudo 3”, the sub CPU 301 executes a logo lamp preview content lottery process for pseudo 3 (step S9303). The pseudo 3 logo lamp preview content lottery process will be described below with reference to FIG. 196.

In the pseudo 3 logo lamp preview content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether a 10 second tenpai or a 14 second tenpai occurs at the "pseudo 3" stage in the pseudo continuous performance (step S9321). In this process, the sub CPU 301 sets the sub variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation to be a sub variation pattern (10 second tenpai variation pattern) in which the decorative symbol becomes a reach mode 10 seconds after the start of variation in "Pseudo 3". ) and a sub-variation pattern (14-second tenpai variation pattern) in which the decorative pattern becomes a reach mode 14 seconds after the start of variation in "Pseudo 3". do.

If it is determined that a 10-second tenpai or a 14-second tenpai will occur at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo-continuous performance, the sub CPU 301 displays the pseudo 3 logo lamp preview content based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation. is determined (step S9322). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 3" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, one of the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 3".

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither 10-second tenpai nor 14-second tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous performance, the sub CPU 301 determines that the logo lamp preview performance will not be performed in "pseudo 3" (step S9323). . After executing the process of step S9322 or step S9323, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

The pseudo 3 logo lamp preview content lottery process performed in step S9303 of FIG. 195 has been described above with reference to FIG. 196. The explanation returns to FIG. 195.

If it is determined in step S9302 that the pseudo continuous effect will not progress to "pseudo 3", or after executing the process of step S9303, the sub CPU 301 executes a logo lamp preview content lottery process for pseudo 2 (step S9304). The pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content lottery process will be described below with reference to FIG. 197.

In the pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether a 10 second tenpai or a 14 second tenpai occurs at the "pseudo 2" stage in the pseudo continuous performance (step S9341). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the sub variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation is a sub variation pattern (10 second ten pie variation pattern) in which the decorative symbol becomes a ready-to-reach mode 10 seconds after the start of variation in "Pseudo 2". ) and a sub-variation pattern (14-second ten-pai variation pattern) in which the decorative pattern becomes a reach mode 14 seconds after the start of variation in "Pseudo 2". do.

If it is determined that a 10-second tenpai or a 14-second tenpai will occur at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous performance, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the content of the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice has been determined (step S9342). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the preview content of the pseudo 3 logo lamp has been determined if the process of step S9322 in FIG. 196 is being executed; (or when the pseudo continuous effect does not progress to "pseudo 3"), it is determined that the content of the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice has not been determined.

If it is determined that the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 301 determines the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content (step S9343). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 2" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. For example, if the sub-CPU 301 determines the performance corresponding to the performance number "163" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 3", the sub CPU 301 selects the performance number "161" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 2". ~Determine one of the performances corresponding to "163". Furthermore, if the performance corresponding to the performance number "162" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 3", the sub CPU 301 selects the performance number "161" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 2". One of the performances corresponding to "162" is determined. Furthermore, if the performance corresponding to the performance number "161" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 3", the sub CPU 301 selects the performance number "161" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 2". Determine the performance corresponding to.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo 3 logo lamp preview content has not been determined, the sub CPU 301 determines the pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation (step S9344). . In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 2" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, one of the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 2".

If it is determined in step S9341 that neither 10-second tenpai nor 14-second tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous performance, the sub CPU 301 determines that the logo lamp preview performance will not be performed in "pseudo 2" (step S9345 ). After executing the processing in step S9343, step S9344, or step S9345, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

The pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content lottery process performed in step S9304 in FIG. 195 has been described above with reference to FIG. 197. The explanation returns to FIG. 195.

If it is determined in step S9301 that a pseudo continuous effect does not occur, or after executing the process in step S9304, the sub CPU 301 executes a pseudo 1 logo lamp preview content lottery process (step S9305). The pseudo 1 logo lamp preview content lottery process will be described below with reference to FIG. 198.

In the pseudo 1 logo lamp preview content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether a 10 second tenpai or a 14 second tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in a pseudo continuous performance or a "no pseudo" performance. (Step S9361). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the sub variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation is a sub variation pattern (10 seconds ten pie variation pattern) in which the decorative symbol becomes a ready-to-reach mode 10 seconds after the start of variation in "Pseudo 1". ) and a sub-variation pattern (14-second tenpai variation pattern) in which the decorative pattern becomes a reach mode 14 seconds after the start of variation in "Pseudo 1". do.

If it is determined that a 10-second tenpai or a 14-second tenpai will occur at the stage of "pseudo 1" in a pseudo continuous performance or a "no pseudo" performance, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the content of the logo lamp notice for pseudo 2 has been determined. A judgment is made (step S9362). In this process, if the process of step S9343 or step S9344 in FIG. (If the process of step S9345 is being executed, or if the pseudo continuous effect does not occur), it is determined that the content of the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice has not been determined.

If it is determined that the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 301 determines the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content (step S9363). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. For example, if the sub CPU 301 determines the performance corresponding to the performance number "163" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 2", the sub CPU 301 selects the performance number "161" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1". ~Determine one of the performances corresponding to "163". Furthermore, if the performance corresponding to the performance number "162" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 2", the sub CPU 301 selects the performance number "161" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1". One of the performances corresponding to "162" is determined. Furthermore, if the performance corresponding to the performance number "161" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 301 selects the performance number "161" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "pseudo 1". Determine the performance corresponding to.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content has not been determined, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the pseudo 3 logo lamp preview content has been determined (step S9364). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the content of the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice has been determined if the process of step S9322 in FIG. 196 is being executed; (in the case where the process of ``Pseudo 3'' is executed, when the pseudo continuous effect does not progress to ``Pseudo 3'', or when the pseudo continuous effect does not occur), it is determined that the logo lamp notice content for pseudo 3 has not been determined.

If it is determined that the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 301 determines the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content (step S9365). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. For example, if the sub-CPU 301 determines the performance corresponding to the performance number "163" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 3", the sub CPU 301 selects the performance number "161" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1". ~Determine one of the performances corresponding to "163". Furthermore, if the performance corresponding to the performance number "162" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 3", the sub CPU 301 selects the performance number "161" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1". One of the performances corresponding to "162" is determined. Furthermore, if the performance corresponding to the performance number "161" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 3", the sub CPU 301 selects the performance number "161" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1". Determine the performance corresponding to.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo 3 logo lamp preview content has not been determined, the sub CPU 301 determines the pseudo 1 logo lamp preview content based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation (step S9366). . In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, one of the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1".

If it is determined in step S9361 that neither 10-second tenpai nor 14-second tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo continuous production or "no pseudo" production, the sub CPU 301 performs a logo lamp preview production in "pseudo 1". It is determined that there is no such information (step S9367). After executing the processing in step S9363, step S9365, step S9366, or step S9367, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

The pseudo 1 logo lamp preview content lottery process performed in step S9305 in FIG. 195 has been described above with reference to FIG. 198. The explanation returns to FIG. 195.

After executing the process in step S9305, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<2nd production stage logo lamp preview content lottery process>
FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the second performance stage logo lamp preview content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The second production stage logo lamp preview content lottery process shown in FIG. This process is performed by the sub-control circuit 300 after the production stage preview content lottery process.

In the second performance stage logo lamp preview content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the eighth preview performance (see FIG. 193) will occur during the current special symbol variation (step S9401). Prior to executing this process, in the second production stage preview content lottery process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the production to be performed during the special symbol variation based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation. It has been decided. In the process of step S9401, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the eighth preview performance has been determined as the performance to be performed during the current special symbol variation.

If it is determined that the eighth preview performance will occur during the current special symbol variation, the sub CPU 301 determines the logo lamp preview content based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation (step S9402). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp preview performance by performing a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, one of the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the eighth preview performance will not occur during this special symbol change, the sub CPU 301 determines that the logo lamp preview performance will not be performed (step S9403). After executing the process of step S9402 or step S9403, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<3rd production stage logo lamp preview content lottery process>
FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the third performance stage logo lamp preview content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko game machine. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing a pseudo 1 logo lamp preview content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The third production stage logo lamp preview content lottery process shown in FIG. This process is performed by the sub-control circuit 300 after the production stage preview content lottery process.

In the third performance stage logo lamp preview content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether a pseudo continuous performance will occur based on the information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9451). If it is determined that a pseudo continuous effect will occur, the sub CPU 301 executes a pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content lottery process (step S9452). In the third performance stage, the stage in the pseudo-continuous performance is supposed to progress only up to "pseudo 2". The pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content lottery process will be described below with reference to FIG. 201.

In the pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether a 10 second tenpai or a 14 second tenpai occurs at the "pseudo 2" stage in the pseudo continuous performance (step S9461). Prior to executing this process, the sub CPU 301 determines, based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation, what pattern to use for the decorative symbols at the "pseudo 2" stage during the special symbol variation. It is determined whether to stop (decorative pattern stop pattern). In the process of step S9461, the sub CPU 301 sets the decorative symbol stopping pattern to be a decorative symbol stopping pattern (10 second tenpai stopping pattern) in which the decorative symbol becomes a ready-to-win mode 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation in "pseudo 2", In "Pseudo 2", it is determined whether the decorative pattern is in any of the decorative pattern stop patterns (14 second Tenpai stop pattern) in which the decorative pattern becomes a reach mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation. .

If it is determined that a 10-second tenpai or a 14-second tenpai will occur at the "pseudo 2" stage in the pseudo-continuous performance, the sub CPU 301 displays the pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation. is determined (step S9462). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 2" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, one of the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 2".

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither 10-second tenpai nor 14-second tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous performance, the sub CPU 301 determines that the logo lamp preview performance will not be performed in "pseudo 2" (step S9463). . After executing the process of step S9462 or step S9463, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

The pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content lottery process performed in step S9452 of FIG. 200 has been described above with reference to FIG. 201. The explanation returns to FIG. 200.

If it is determined in step S9451 that a pseudo continuous effect does not occur, or after executing the process in step S9452, the sub CPU 301 executes a pseudo 1 logo lamp preview content lottery process (step S9453). The pseudo 1 logo lamp preview content lottery process will be described below with reference to FIG. 202.

In the pseudo 1 logo lamp preview content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether a 10 second tenpai or a 14 second tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in a pseudo continuous performance or a "no pseudo" performance. (Step S9471). Prior to executing this process, the sub CPU 301 determines, based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation, what pattern to use for the decorative symbols at the "pseudo 1" stage during the special symbol variation. It is determined whether to stop (decorative pattern stop pattern). In the process of step S9471, the sub CPU 301 sets the decorative symbol stopping pattern to be a decorative symbol stopping pattern (10-second ten-pai stopping pattern) in which the decorative symbol becomes a ready-to-win mode 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation in "pseudo 1", In "Pseudo 1", it is determined whether the decorative pattern is in any of the decorative pattern stop patterns (14 second Tenpai stop pattern) in which the decorative pattern becomes a reach mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation. .

If it is determined that a 10-second tenpai or a 14-second tenpai will occur at the stage of "pseudo 1" in a pseudo continuous performance or a "no pseudo" performance, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the content of the logo lamp notice for pseudo 2 has been determined. A judgment is made (step S9472). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the preview content of the pseudo 2 logo lamp has been determined if the process of step S9462 in FIG. 201 is being executed; (or when the pseudo continuous effect does not occur), it is determined that the content of the pseudo second logo lamp notice has not been determined.

If it is determined that the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 301 determines the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content (step S9473). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. For example, if the sub CPU 301 determines the performance corresponding to the performance number "163" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 2", the sub CPU 301 selects the performance number "161" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1". ~Determine one of the performances corresponding to "163". Furthermore, if the performance corresponding to the performance number "162" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 2", the sub CPU 301 selects the performance number "161" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1". One of the performances corresponding to "162" is determined. Furthermore, if the performance corresponding to the performance number "161" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 301 selects the performance number "161" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "pseudo 1". Determine the performance corresponding to.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content has not been determined, the sub CPU 301 determines the pseudo 1 logo lamp preview content based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation (step S9474). . In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, one of the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1".

If it is determined in step S9471 that neither 10 seconds tenpai nor 14 seconds tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo continuous production or "no pseudo" production, the sub CPU 301 performs a logo lamp preview production in "pseudo 1". It is determined that there is no such information (step S9475). After executing the processing in step S9473, step S9474, or step S9475, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

The pseudo 1 logo lamp preview content lottery process performed in step S9453 of FIG. 200 has been described above with reference to FIG. 202. The explanation returns to FIG. 200.

After executing the process in step S9453, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Screen display in variable mode>
FIG. 203 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in variable probability mode.

As described above, in the probability change mode, when the normal symbol loss length variation (variable display of the normal symbol such that the variation time is 600000 msec) starts, the mode shifts to the bonus mode (see FIG. 137(a)). In the bonus mode, while the normal symbol fluctuation display (normal symbol fluctuation) is being performed (over 600000 msec), most of the game balls hit to the right enter the small winning jackpot 151, and a large number of game balls are paid out.

Therefore, in the probability variation mode, the player plays the game while expecting that a variation pattern with a variation time of 600000 msec (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 136) will be determined as the normal symbol variation pattern. For this reason, in the probability variation mode, every time a normal symbol variation is performed, a production (drum variation production) corresponding to the pattern of the normal symbol variation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 203, in the variable probability mode, drum images 9201 (left drum image 9201L, middle drum image 9201C, and right drum image 9201R) are displayed on the display device 7. The drum image 9201 is an image imitating a drum (reel). In the area where each drum image 9201 is displayed, it is possible to perform variable display and static display of drum symbols 9202 (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R).

In the example shown in FIG. 203(a), a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a manner that they are each changing. In the example shown in FIG. 203(b), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped as a "bell" symbol, a "watermelon" symbol, and a "cherry" symbol, respectively. It is displayed in this manner. In this way, in the probability variation mode, every time a normal symbol variation is performed, a performance (drum variation performance) imitating the fluctuating display and stop display of the reels (slot game) is performed.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 203, in the probability variable mode, a remaining ST number image 9203 and a prize ball number image 9204 are also displayed on the display device 7. The remaining ST number image 9203 is an image corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol variations (remaining ST number) performed in the variable probability mode. When the probability variation mode starts, "50" is displayed as the remaining ST number image 9203, and thereafter, each time the special symbol variation is performed, the number shown as the remaining ST number image 9203 decreases by 1. When the number shown as the remaining ST number image 9203 becomes "0", the variable probability mode ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode. The prize ball number image 9204 is an image corresponding to the total number of game balls paid out after shifting to the initial winning mode.

Here, in this specification, the bonus mode to which the game shifts upon the start of the normal symbol loss length variation will be referred to as the first bonus mode. In the first bonus mode, the value indicating the number of remaining STs is updated (subtracted by 1) every time the special symbol variation is performed once, as in the probability variation mode. Then, when the value indicating the number of remaining STs becomes 0, the first bonus mode shifts to the normal mode. Therefore, the variable probability mode and the first bonus mode are collectively referred to as the remaining ST count subtraction mode. In addition, when shifting from the probability variable mode to the first bonus mode, the remaining ST number in the probability variable mode is not reset, and the remaining ST number is carried over in the first bonus mode as well. In this specification, the remaining ST count subtraction mode is sometimes referred to as a variable probability mode.

On the other hand, even when the start condition for the jackpot game state is satisfied in the variable probability mode, the game shifts to the bonus mode (see FIG. 137(a)). In this specification, the bonus mode to which the player shifts upon the start of the jackpot gaming state will be referred to as the second bonus mode. When shifting to the second bonus mode, the remaining ST number is reset, and the remaining ST number is not updated (managed) in the second bonus mode. When the second bonus mode ends, if the limiter has not been reached, "50" is set as the remaining ST number.

<Drum variation effect determination process>
FIG. 204 is a flowchart illustrating a drum variation effect determination process related to the fifth pachinko game machine.

The drum fluctuation performance determination process shown in FIG. 204 is a process performed in the performance mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76) by the sub-control circuit 300, triggered by the game ball passing through the passage gate 126 (gate passage). It is. The sub-control circuit 300 can recognize that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 126 by receiving a ball passage detector passage detection command indicating that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 126. The ball passing detector passage detection command is set by the main control circuit 200 in the ball passing detector passage detection process, and is sent to the sub control circuit 300.

In the drum variation performance determination process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the current performance mode is the variable probability mode (see FIG. 137(a)) (step S9501). Information indicating the performance mode is stored in a performance mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 303, and the sub CPU 301 can recognize the current performance mode by referring to the performance mode flag storage area. I can do it.

If the sub CPU 301 determines that the current performance mode is not the variable probability mode, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current performance mode is the variable probability mode, the sub CPU 301 determines that the normal symbol variation pattern determined by passing through the gate this time is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (the variation shown in FIG. 136). pattern "05H") (step S9502). Since the ball passing detector passing detection command includes information indicating the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, by receiving the ball passing detector passing detection command, the sub CPU 301 detects the normal symbol fluctuation pattern corresponding to the current gate passage. can be recognized.

When it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determined by passing through the gate this time is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the remaining ST number is a predetermined number (10 times) or more. (Step S9503). The remaining ST number is the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations performed in the remaining ST number subtraction mode (probability variation mode and first bonus mode). A value indicating the number of remaining STs is stored in the work RAM 303, and is updated every time a special symbol variation is performed.

If it is determined that the remaining number of STs is less than the predetermined number (10 times), the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not ST recovery has been confirmed (it has been decided to shift to the jackpot gaming state) (step S9504). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that ST recovery is confirmed if the result of the jackpot determination regarding at least one of the special symbol variations currently being performed and the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved ball is a jackpot. (it has been decided to move to a jackpot gaming state). As described above, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the variable probability flag is set to ON (see FIG. 133), and the variable probability mode is returned (ST is recovered). However, if the number of jackpot gaming states that have been executed since the first hit reaches a predetermined number (5 times) by executing the jackpot gaming state (reaching the limiter), the mode will not return to the variable probability mode. , transition to normal mode. Therefore, in this case, it may be determined that ST recovery has not been determined.

In step S9502, if it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determined by passing through the gate this time is not a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, or in step S9504, ST recovery has not been determined (jackpot game state If the sub CPU 301 determines that the drum fluctuation effect pattern is a losing pattern (step S9505). As loss patterns, there are provided a total loss pattern and a partial loss pattern. The all lose pattern is a drum fluctuation performance pattern in which all different symbols are stopped and displayed as a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R. In the partial loss pattern, two of the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are the same and are displayed, and the remaining one symbol is a symbol that is different from the two symbols. This is a drum fluctuation effect pattern in which ``is displayed in a stopped state.''

As an all-lose pattern, for example, a "bell" symbol is stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, a "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the middle drum symbol 9202C, and a "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed as the right drum symbol 9202R. A pattern in which a "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, a "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed as the middle drum symbol 9202C, and a "bell" symbol is stopped and displayed as the right drum symbol 9202R. A plurality of patterns are provided. As a partial loss pattern, for example, a "bell" symbol is stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, a "bell" symbol is stopped and displayed as the middle drum symbol 9202C, and a "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the right drum symbol 9202R. For example, a "watermelon" symbol may be stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, a "watermelon" symbol may be stopped and displayed as the middle drum symbol 9202C, and a "cherry" symbol may be stopped and displayed as the right drum symbol 9202R. A plurality of patterns are provided.

In the process of step S9505, the sub CPU 301 selects one losing pattern from among the plurality of loss patterns (the plurality of all loss patterns and the plurality of partial loss patterns) by performing a lottery based on random numbers. This is determined as the pattern of the drum variation effect performed during the normal symbol variation corresponding to the current gate passage. After executing the process in step S9505, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9503 that the number of remaining STs is the predetermined number (10 times) or more, or if it is determined in step S9504 that ST recovery has been determined (it has been determined to transition to a jackpot gaming state) In this case, the sub CPU 301 determines the drum fluctuation effect pattern as the winning pattern (step S9506). The winning pattern is a drum variation effect pattern in which all the same symbols are stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R. Examples of winning patterns include, for example, a pattern in which "bell" symbols are stopped and displayed for the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R, a pattern in which "watermelon" symbols are all stopped and displayed, and all. A plurality of patterns are provided, such as a pattern in which the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed. In the process of step S9506, the sub CPU 301 selects one winning pattern from among the plurality of winning patterns during the normal symbol fluctuation corresponding to the current gate passage by performing a lottery based on random numbers. This is determined as a pattern for the drum variation performance.

Next, the sub CPU 301 executes a loss length variation look-ahead lottery (step S9507). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on random numbers. Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the loss length variable look-ahead lottery has been won (step S9508). If it is determined that the loss length variation look-ahead lottery has been won, the sub CPU 301 sets the loss length change look-ahead flag on (step S9509). As a result, in the subsequent drum variation performance, it is suggested that the normal symbol loss length variation has been determined (the loss length variation look-ahead performance is performed) (see FIG. 205). The loss length variation look-ahead flag is set to OFF when the normal symbol variation (normal symbol loss length variation) corresponding to the current gate passage starts.

If it is determined in step S9508 that the loss length variable look-ahead lottery has not been won, or after executing the process in step S9509, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing at the start of drum fluctuation effect>
FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the process at the start of the drum fluctuation performance according to the fifth pachinko game machine.

The process at the start of the drum fluctuation performance shown in FIG. 205 is performed by the sub-control circuit 300 to determine the performance mode (FIG. 76 This is the process performed in step S205). In addition, the sub-control circuit 300 can recognize that the normal symbol variation starts by receiving the normal symbol variation start command. The normal symbol variation start command is set by the main control circuit 200 and transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 when the normal symbol variation starts, for example, in the normal symbol memory check process (see step S192 in FIG. 64).

In the process at the start of the drum fluctuation performance, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the current performance mode is the variable probability mode (see FIG. 137(a)) (step S9521). Information indicating the performance mode is stored in a performance mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 303, and the sub CPU 301 can recognize the current performance mode by referring to the performance mode flag storage area. I can do it.

If the sub CPU 301 determines that the current performance mode is not the variable probability mode, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current production mode is the fixed variation mode, the sub CPU 301 determines that the drum variation production pattern that was determined when the gate passage corresponding to the current normal symbol variation occurs is a loss pattern (steps in FIG. 204). (see S9505) (step S9522).

If it is determined that the drum fluctuation effect pattern determined when the gate passing corresponding to the current normal symbol fluctuation occurs is not a losing pattern, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the drum fluctuation performance pattern determined when the gate passage corresponding to the current normal symbol fluctuation occurs is a losing pattern, the sub CPU 301 sets the loss length fluctuation pre-reading flag (see step S9509 in FIG. 204). ) is set on (step S9523).

If the sub CPU 301 determines that the loss length variation look-ahead flag is not set on, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the loss length variation look-ahead flag is set on, the sub CPU 301 changes the drum variation effect pattern to the look-ahead pattern (step S9524). The look-ahead pattern is the partial loss pattern described above.

In the process of step S9524, the sub CPU 301 controls the random number value if all the drum fluctuation effect patterns (see step S9505 in FIG. 204) determined when the gate passing corresponding to the current normal symbol fluctuation occurs are loss patterns. By conducting a lottery based on the above, one partial loss pattern is selected from among the plurality of partial loss patterns, and the pattern of the drum fluctuation effect performed during this normal symbol change is applied to the selected partial loss pattern. Replace with pattern. In addition, if the drum fluctuation performance pattern determined when the gate passing corresponding to the current normal symbol fluctuation occurs is a partial losing pattern, the sub CPU 301 does not perform such replacement processing, and replaces the pattern that has already been determined. Maintain the drum fluctuation performance pattern. After executing the process in step S9524, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Specific aspects of drum variation production>
FIG. 206 is a diagram showing the variation time of the normal symbol variation currently being performed and the normal symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball. 207 to 209 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the drum fluctuation effect.

As described above, in this embodiment, up to four pieces of starting information for normal symbols (random numbers for determining whether a normal symbol hits or random numbers for determining a normal symbol variation pattern) are retained. In Figure 206(a), there are three reserved balls in a situation where one normal symbol variation is being performed, 500 ms is determined as the fluctuation time of the current normal symbol variation, and the first reserved ball 500ms is determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation corresponding to the second reserved ball, 500ms is determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation corresponding to the second reserved ball, and 500ms is determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation corresponding to the third reserved ball. This shows a state where 500 ms is determined as the variation time of symbol variation.

In FIG. 206(b), after the state shown in FIG. 206(a), one game ball passes through the passage gate 126 while the normal symbol variation is being performed, and the normal lottery ( This shows a state in which 600000 ms is determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation corresponding to the 4th reserved ball). FIG. 206(c) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206(b) has ended and the next normal symbol variation (500 ms) is being performed. FIG. 206(d) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206(c) has ended and the next normal symbol variation (500 ms) is being performed. FIG. 206(e) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206(d) has ended and the next normal symbol variation (500 ms) is being performed. FIG. 206(f) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206(e) has ended and the next normal symbol variation (600000 ms) is being performed.

FIG. 207(a) shows how a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the states shown in FIGS. 206(a) and (b). FIG. 207(b) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 207(a) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIGS. 206(a) and (b) is 500 ms, in FIG. 207(b), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R However, it is stopped and displayed in a losing pattern.

In FIG. 207(c), a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the state shown in FIG. 206(c). FIG. 207(d) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 207(c) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 206(c) being 500 ms, in FIG. 207(d), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are lose patterns. It is displayed stopped at.

In FIG. 207(e), a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the state shown in FIG. 206(d). FIG. 207(f) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 207(e) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 206(d) being 500 ms, in FIG. 207(f), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are lose patterns. It is displayed stopped at.

In FIG. 207(g), a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the state shown in FIG. 206(e). FIG. 207(h) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 207(g) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 206(e) being 500 ms, in FIG. 207(h), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are lose patterns. It is displayed stopped at.

In FIG. 207(i), a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the state shown in FIG. 206(f). FIG. 207(j) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 207(i) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 206(f) being 600,000 ms, in FIG. 207(j), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R have a winning pattern. It is displayed stopped at. In FIG. 207(k), an image corresponding to the start of "BONUS" (transition to bonus mode) is displayed on the display device 7.

As described above, one drum fluctuation performance includes the variable display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R, and the display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol. It is configured by the stop display of 9202R. The variable display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R starts at the same time as the normal symbol variation starts, continues for 500 ms, and each drum symbol 9202 stops at the same time. Here, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is 500ms, so the stop timing of the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R is as follows. It matches the stop timing of normal symbols.

Further, the stop display of the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R is performed for 1500 ms. Therefore, after 1500 ms has passed since the fluctuations of the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R have stopped in the first drum fluctuation performance, it is possible to start the fluctuation display of the next drum fluctuation performance. be. On the other hand, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal symbol, the time from the end of the normal symbol variation (after the normal symbol stops) to the end of the release of the normal electric accessory 146 is 1500 ms. Therefore, it is possible to start the next normal symbol variation after 1500 ms has passed since the normal symbol stopped in one normal symbol variation. This makes it possible to match the cycle of the drum variation effect with the cycle of normal symbol variation.

FIG. 207 shows an example in which a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation is determined as the normal symbol variation pattern, but the player does not win the loss length variation pre-read lottery. On the other hand, FIG. 208 shows an example in which a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation is determined as the normal symbol variation pattern, and the player wins the loss length variation pre-read lottery.

FIG. 208(a) shows how a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the states shown in FIGS. 206(a) and (b). FIG. 208(b) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 208(a) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIGS. 206(a) and (b) is 500 ms, in FIG. 208(b), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R However, the display is stopped in a losing pattern.

In FIG. 208(c), a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the state shown in FIG. 206(c). FIG. 208(d) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 208(c) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 206(c) is 500 ms and the loss length fluctuation pre-read lottery is won, in FIG. 208(d), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol A part of the symbol 9202C and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in a losing pattern.

In FIG. 208(e), a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the state shown in FIG. 206(d). FIG. 208(f) shows a state where the variable display shown in FIG. 208(e) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 206(d) is 500 ms and the loss length fluctuation pre-read lottery is won, in FIG. 208(f), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol A part of the symbol 9202C and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in a losing pattern.

In FIG. 208(g), a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the state shown in FIG. 206(e). FIG. 208(h) shows a state where the variable display shown in FIG. 208(g) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the variation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206(e) is 500 ms and that the loss length variation look-ahead lottery has been won, in FIG. 208(h), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol A part of the symbol 9202C and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in a losing pattern.

In FIG. 208(i), a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the state shown in FIG. 206(f). FIG. 208(j) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 208(i) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 206(f) being 600,000 ms, in FIG. 208(j), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R have a winning pattern. It is displayed stopped at. In FIG. 208(k), an image corresponding to the start of "BONUS" (transition to bonus mode) is displayed on the display device 7.

In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 208, the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are displayed on the left drum before they are stopped and displayed in the hit pattern (see FIG. 208(j)). The drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are partially stopped and displayed in a losing pattern (see FIG. 208(d), FIG. 208(f), and FIG. 208(h)), This suggests that the normal symbol loss length variation has been determined (the normal symbol loss length variation has been won). In addition, even if the normal symbol loss length variation is not won, there is a possibility that the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R may be stopped and displayed as a partial loss pattern ( (See step S9505 in FIG. 204). If a partial loss pattern appears even though the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, it can be said that the stop display of the partial loss pattern is a fake performance.

In the above, an example has been described in which some losing patterns are stopped and displayed as a loss length variation look-ahead effect. The loss length variation look-ahead effect is not limited to this example, and for example, a loss length change look-ahead effect as shown in FIG. 209 may be adopted.

FIG. 209(a) shows how a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the states shown in FIGS. 206(a) and (b). FIG. 209(b) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 209(a) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIGS. 206(a) and (b) is 500 ms, in FIG. 209(b), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R However, the display is stopped in a losing pattern.

FIG. 209(c) shows how a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the state shown in FIG. 206(c). FIG. 209(d) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 209(c) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 206(c) being 500 ms, in FIG. 209(d), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are lose patterns. It is displayed stopped at.

FIG. 209(e) shows how the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the states shown in FIGS. 206(d) and (e). As described above, the variable display of the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R is normally performed for 500 ms. On the other hand, the variable display shown in FIG. 209(e) is performed for 4500 ms. FIG. 209(f) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 209(e) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIGS. 206(d) and (e) is 500 ms, in FIG. 209(f), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R However, the display is stopped in a losing pattern.

In FIG. 209(g), a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the state shown in FIG. 206(f). FIG. 209(h) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 209(g) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 206(f) being 600,000 ms, in FIG. 209(h), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R have a winning pattern. It is displayed stopped at. In FIG. 209(i), an image corresponding to the start of "BONUS" (transition to bonus mode) is displayed on the display device 7.

In the example shown in FIG. 209, one drum fluctuation effect is performed while the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 206(d) and the normal symbol fluctuation (two normal symbol fluctuations) shown in FIG. 206(e) are performed. It is said that it will be done. This suggests that you have won the normal symbol loss length variation. In this way, the loss length variation look-ahead performance may be configured such that one drum variation performance is performed while a plurality of normal symbol fluctuations are performed. In addition, it is desirable that such a drum fluctuation performance that is longer than usual (long-time drum fluctuation performance) be performed when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has been won, but the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has not been won. It may also be done in some cases. In a form where a long drum variation effect can be performed in both cases where the normal symbol loss length variation is won and when the normal symbol loss length variation is not won, the normal symbol loss length variation is won. It is preferable to configure the system so that when the player is playing, the long-duration drum variation effect can be performed with a higher probability than when the normal symbol loss length variation is not won.

As described above, in FIGS. 207 to 209, a gate passage occurs in a situation where the remaining ST number is a predetermined number (10 times) or more, and the normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the gate passage corresponds to the normal symbol loss length variation. An example in which a pattern has been determined has been explained. In this case, the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in a winning pattern. On the other hand, a gate passage occurs in a situation where the remaining number of STs is less than a predetermined number (10 times), and a pattern corresponding to a normal symbol loss length variation is determined as a normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the gate passage. In this case, the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in a losing pattern (see step S9503 in FIG. 204).

Normal symbol loss length fluctuations are performed over a long period of time (600,000ms), so if the normal symbol loss length fluctuations occur after the remaining number of STs decreases, the normal symbol loss length fluctuations occur while the normal symbol loss length fluctuations are being performed. Then, the probability variable mode (probability variable gaming state) ends. When the variable probability game state ends, if the result of the second special lottery is a small win, the variation time of the second special symbol will be very long (see FIG. 134), so the game ball is placed in the small win big prize opening 151. It becomes almost impossible to win a prize. Therefore, in this case, the significance of winning the normal symbol loss length variation is lost, so we refrain from making the winning pattern appear.

Although the variation time of the normal symbol loss length variation is described as being 600000 ms, it is not limited to this example. For example, multiple fluctuation times such as 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds, 300 seconds, and 600 seconds are set as fluctuation times for normal symbol loss length fluctuations. It may also be possible to do so. In this case, the remaining number of STs for which a winning pattern can appear may be varied depending on the fluctuation time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. For example, if T1 seconds (e.g., 60 seconds) and T2 seconds (e.g., 120 seconds) (T1<T2) are provided as the fluctuation time of normal symbol loss length fluctuation, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation of T1 seconds When it is determined, a winning pattern appears on the condition that the remaining number of STs is N1 times (for example, 10 times) or more, while when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation of T2 seconds is determined, the remaining number of STs is N2 times (for example, 10 times) or more. For example, a winning pattern may be made to appear on condition that the winning pattern is 20 times or more (N1<N2).

Further, the aspect of the winning pattern may be changed depending on the remaining number of STs when the normal symbol loss length variation is determined. For example, if the remaining number of STs is 40 or more when the normal symbol loss length variation is determined, the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed as the drum symbol 9202, and the normal symbol loss length variation is determined. If the number of remaining STs is 20 or more and less than 40, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the drum symbol 9202, and if the number of remaining STs is less than 20 when the normal symbol loss length variation is determined. In this case, a “bell” symbol may be stopped and displayed as the drum symbol 9202.

Further, in the above description, it has been explained that the variable display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R starts at the same time as the normal symbol variation starts. The start timing of the variable display of the drum symbol 9202 is not limited to this example, and the variable display of the drum symbol 9202 may be started during normal symbol variation. For example, the variable display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R may be started from the point in time when 1000 ms has elapsed since the normal symbol variation was started. In this case, for example, the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner from 1000 ms to 1500 ms after the start of one normal symbol variation. , the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R stop from the time when 1500 ms has passed since the start of the normal symbol variation to the time when 1000 ms has passed since the next normal symbol variation has started. It is possible to configure so that the display is performed.

In this way, by performing the variable display and stop display of the drum symbol 9202 so as to span two normal symbol variations, for example, while the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206(e) is being performed ( For example, after 1500ms have passed since the start of the normal symbol variation), the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in a winning pattern (see FIG. 207(j)). becomes possible. As a result, the stop display shown in FIG. 207(j) will be performed before the normal symbol loss length variation shown in FIG. 206(f) starts, and as a result, the normal symbol loss length variation will start. Immediately after that, an image as shown in FIG. 207(k) can be displayed. From this point of view, the stop display shown in FIG. 207(j) may end before the normal symbol loss length variation starts, or at the same time as the start of the normal symbol loss length variation.

In addition, the above description has been made assuming that after the stop display shown in FIG. 207(j) is performed, an image as shown in FIG. 207(k) is displayed, and then or at the same time, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation starts. When the normal symbol loss length variation starts, it may be configured so that either the stop display shown in FIG. 207(j) or the image display as shown in FIG. 207(k) is not performed. However, the configuration may be such that neither display is performed. In addition, instead of (or in addition to) the stop display shown in FIG. 207(j) and the image display shown in FIG. 207(k), small symbols are displayed to reduce the normal symbol loss length. It may be configured to indicate that a fluctuation has started.

<Normal symbol loss length variation remaining time suggestion effect>
210 and 211 are diagrams showing an example of a normal symbol loss length variation remaining time suggestion performance.

As explained above, in the probability change mode (see FIG. 137(a)), when the normal symbol loss length variation (variable display of normal symbols such that the variation time is 600,000 msec) starts, the transition to the first bonus mode occurs. . In the first bonus mode, a normal symbol loss length variation remaining time suggestion effect is performed. In the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time suggestion performance, a normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image is displayed on the display device 7. The normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image is an image that shows the time corresponding to the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation, and the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is suggested through the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image. .

In FIG. 210(a), a normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210a is displayed on the display device 7. The normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210a is displayed after the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in a winning pattern (see FIG. 207(j)). Displayed when the display has finished. The normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210a is an example of an image (see FIG. 207(k)) corresponding to the start of "BONUS" (transition to the first bonus mode). In this example, as the normal symbol loss length variation of 600000 ms has started, the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210a is an image corresponding to the number "600:00".

After the state shown in FIG. 210(a), the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image is changed to normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210b→normal symbol loss length fluctuation, as shown in FIGS. 210(b) to (j). Remaining time image 9210c → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210d → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210e → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210f → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210g → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation The remaining time image 9210h→normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210i→normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210j, it is gradually switched. The normal symbol loss length variation remaining time images 9210a to 9210j are each sequentially displayed for a short time (for example, about 500 ms), and the number indicated by the image decreases over time.

Although not shown in the figure, the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time images 9210a to 9210j have different color densities, and the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210a → normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210b → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210c → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210d → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210e → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210f → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210g→Normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210h→Normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210i→Normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210j As the number indicated by the image changes, the color of the image becomes lighter. It's becoming. The color of the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210j has become considerably lighter, and after the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210j is displayed, the display of the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image disappears. There is.

Above, we have described an example in which the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image is displayed at the start of the first bonus mode, but the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image may be displayed in the middle of the first bonus mode. .

In the first bonus mode, a battle performance may be performed during the first bonus mode as a performance suggesting the possibility that the result of the second special lottery is a jackpot. In the battle performance during the first bonus mode, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character is displayed on the display device 7. When an ally character defeats an enemy character in such a battle performance during the first bonus mode, a normal symbol loss length variable remaining time image may be displayed. That is, the normal symbol loss length variable remaining time image can be displayed in a situation where there is a relatively high expectation that the result of the second special lottery will be a jackpot.

In FIG. 211(a), a normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9211a is displayed on the display device 7. In this example, the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9211a corresponds to the fact that the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation at the time when the friendly character defeats the enemy character in the battle performance during the first bonus mode is approximately 30000 ms. is an image corresponding to the number "30:00".

After the state shown in FIG. 211(a), the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image is changed to normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211b→normal symbol loss length fluctuation, as shown in FIGS. 211(b) to (j). Remaining time image 9211c → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211d → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211e → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211f → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211g → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation The remaining time image 9211h→the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9211i→the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9211j, and are gradually switched. The normal symbol loss length variation remaining time images 9211a to 9211j are each sequentially displayed for a short time (for example, about 500 ms), and the number indicated by the image decreases over time.

Similar to the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time images 9210a-j, although not shown in the figure, the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time images 9211a-j have different color densities, Long variation remaining time image 9211a → Normal symbol loss Long variation remaining time image 9211b → Normal symbol loss Long variation remaining time image 9211c → Normal symbol loss Long variation remaining time image 9211d → Normal symbol loss Long variation remaining time image 9211e → Normal symbol loss Long variation remaining time image 9211f → Normal symbol loss long variation remaining time image 9211g → Normal symbol loss long variation remaining time image 9211h → Normal symbol loss long variation remaining time image 9211i → Normal symbol loss long variation remaining time image 9211j, and the corresponding image As the number indicated by changes, the color of the image becomes lighter. The color of the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9211j has become quite pale, and after the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9211j is displayed, the display of the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image disappears. There is.

Note that the number shown by the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image does not necessarily strictly correspond to the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation. Normal symbol loss length variation remaining time images include multiple remaining times (for example, 10 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds, 300 seconds). , and 600 seconds) are provided. When the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image is displayed, the image corresponding to the remaining time closest to the (actual) remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation at the relevant time is selected, and the selected normal symbol loss length is displayed. A variable remaining time image is displayed. The normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210 shown in FIG. 210 is a normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image corresponding to 600 seconds, and the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9211 shown in FIG. 211 corresponds to 30 seconds. This is a normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image.

In this embodiment, when the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image as explained above is displayed on the display device 7, the drum variation effect is not performed (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and The right drum symbol 9202R is not displayed on the display device 7).

<1st bonus mode jackpot processing>
FIG. 212 is a flowchart illustrating the jackpot processing in the first bonus mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The processing at the time of a jackpot in the first bonus mode shown in FIG. 76)). As described above, the first bonus mode is a bonus mode that is normally transitioned to when the symbol loss length starts to fluctuate. In addition, the sub control circuit 300 can recognize that the jackpot gaming state starts by receiving the jackpot start command.

In the first bonus mode jackpot processing, first, the sub CPU 301 executes prize ball number counter addition processing (step S9601). The prize ball number counter addition process will be explained later using FIG. 215.

Next, the sub CPU 301 shifts the performance mode from the first bonus mode to the second bonus mode (step S9602). The second bonus mode is a bonus mode that is transitioned to when the start condition for the jackpot game state is satisfied in the probability variable mode or the first bonus mode. In the process of step S9602, the sub CPU 301 stores information indicating the second bonus mode in an effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 303. Thereafter, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing at the end of 2nd bonus mode>
FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the process at the end of the second bonus mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The process at the end of the second bonus mode shown in FIG. 213 is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76) when the jackpot gaming state ends in the second bonus mode. . In addition, the sub control circuit 300 can recognize that the jackpot gaming state ends by receiving the jackpot end command. The jackpot end command is set by the main control circuit 200 when the jackpot flag is cleared, for example, and is sent to the sub-control circuit 300.

In the process at the end of the second bonus mode, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the limiter number of times has been reached based on the current jackpot game state (step S9621). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the number of times the jackpot game state has been executed since the first win is a predetermined number (5 times) (the jackpot game state to be ended this time is the fifth jackpot after the first win (including the first win)). (in a gaming state).

If it is determined that the limiter count has not been reached based on the current jackpot game state, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length is being changed (currently, the normal symbol loss length is being changed). A judgment is made (step S9622). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the variation time of the variation pattern related to the normal symbol variation has expired after the normal symbol variation display related to the normal symbol loss length variation has started. The sub CPU 301 can recognize that the normal symbol variation starts by receiving the above-mentioned normal symbol variation start command. In addition, since the normal symbol variation start command includes information indicating the type of the normal symbol variation pattern (see FIG. 136), by receiving the normal symbol variation start command, the sub CPU 301 It is possible to recognize the variation time of patterns. While the normal symbol loss length variation is being performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is managed by the sub control circuit 300. The remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is updated by a timer update process (not shown) performed at a predetermined cycle. In the process of step S9622, the sub CPU 301 determines that the normal symbol loss length is being fluctuated when the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is greater than 0.

If it is determined that the normal symbol loss length is changing, the sub CPU 301 shifts the performance mode from the second bonus mode to the first bonus mode (step S9623). In this process, the sub CPU 301 stores information indicating the first bonus mode in an effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 303.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol loss length is not changing, the sub CPU 301 shifts the production mode from the second bonus mode to the probability variable mode (step S9624). In this process, the sub CPU 301 stores information indicating the variable probability mode in an effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 303.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (step S9625). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the variation pattern of at least one of the pending normal symbol variations is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 136). If so, it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 during the jackpot game state, the normal lottery is held (the normal symbol fluctuation pattern is determined) in the same way as during the non-jackpot play state. It is said that The normal symbol variation corresponding to passing through the gate may be performed during the jackpot gaming state, or may be performed after the jackpot gaming state ends.

If it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9626). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the jackpot has been won if the result of the jackpot determination regarding at least one of the pending special symbol variations is a jackpot.

After executing the process of step S9623, if it is determined in step S9625 that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won, or if it is determined that the jackpot has been won in step S9626, the sub CPU 301 determines the number of prize balls. Counter addition processing is executed (step S9627). The prize ball number counter addition process will be explained later using FIG. 215. After executing the process in step S9627, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9621 that the current jackpot game state has reached the limiter count, the sub CPU 301 shifts the production mode from the second bonus mode to the normal mode (step S9628). In this process, the sub CPU 301 stores information indicating the normal mode in a production mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 303.

If it is determined in step S9626 that the jackpot has not been won, or after executing the process in step S9628, the sub CPU 301 executes a bonus mode result display process (step S9629). The bonus mode result display process will be explained later using FIG. 216. After executing the process in step S9629, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing at the end of the first bonus mode>
FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the process at the end of the first bonus mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The process at the end of the first bonus mode shown in FIG. 214 is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76) when the normal symbol loss length variation ends in the first bonus mode. It is. As mentioned above, while the normal symbol loss length variation is being performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is managed by the sub-control circuit 300, and the sub-control circuit 300 controls the normal symbol loss length variation. By referring to the remaining time, it can be recognized that the normal symbol loss length variation ends.

In the process at the end of the first bonus mode, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (step S9641). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the variation pattern of at least one of the pending normal symbol variations is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 136). If so, it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won.

If it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9642). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the jackpot has been won if the result of the jackpot determination regarding at least one of the pending special symbol variations is a jackpot.

If it is determined in step S9641 that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won, or if it is determined in step S9642 that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the prize ball number counter addition process (step S9643 ). The prize ball number counter addition process will be explained later using FIG. 215.

If it is determined in step S9642 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes a bonus mode result display process (step S9644). The bonus mode result display process will be explained later using FIG. 216.

After executing the process of step S9643 or step S9644, the sub CPU 301 shifts the production mode from the first bonus mode to the variable probability mode (step S9645). In this process, the sub CPU 301 stores information indicating the variable probability mode in an effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 303. Thereafter, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Prize ball number counter addition process>
FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number counter addition process according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The prize ball counter addition process shown in FIG. 215 is a process at the time of a jackpot during the first bonus mode (see step S9601 in FIG. 212), a process at the end of the second bonus mode (see step S9627 in FIG. 213), or a process at the end of the second bonus mode (see step S9627 in FIG. 213). This process is performed in the mode end process (see step S9643 in FIG. 213).

In the prize ball counter addition process, the sub CPU 301 first determines whether the extra game flag is set on (step S9661). The extra game flag is a flag indicating that an extra game has occurred. In this embodiment, when transitioning from the variable rate mode to the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode, and staying in the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode after the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode ends, There is. In this case, it is assumed that the bonus mode continues (consecutive games). Hereinafter, the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode to which the game first shifts from the variable probability mode will be referred to as the initial game. Furthermore, the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode in which the player continues to stay after the end of the initial game will be referred to as an extra game.

If it is determined that the extra game flag is not set on, the sub CPU 301 sets an initial game prize ball counter (step S9662). The value of the initial game prize ball counter indicates the total number of game balls paid out during the current bonus mode (first bonus mode or second bonus mode as the initial game). The total number of game balls paid out during the current bonus mode is managed in the work RAM 303 at any time. In the process of step S9662, the sub CPU 301 stores the total number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 303 as the value of the initial game prize ball number counter. Subsequently, the sub CPU 301 sets the extra game flag on (step S9663).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the extra game flag is set to on, the sub CPU 301 adds the current bonus mode (first bonus mode or second bonus mode as an extra game) to the value of the extra game prize ball counter. The total number of game balls paid out during the game is added (step S9664). The value of the extra game prize ball counter indicates the total number of game balls paid out during the extra game, and is stored in the work RAM 303. In the process of step S9664, the sub CPU 301 adds the game balls paid out during the current extra game (first bonus mode or second bonus mode) to the value of the extra game prize ball counter stored in the work RAM 303. The value obtained by adding the total number of is stored in the work RAM 303 as the value of a new extra game prize ball counter.

After executing the process of step S9663 or step S9664, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Result display processing during bonus mode>
FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing a bonus mode result display process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The bonus mode result display process shown in FIG. 216 is a process performed in the second bonus mode end process (see step S9629 in FIG. 213) or the first bonus mode end process (see step S9644 in FIG. 214). be.

In the bonus mode result display process, the sub CPU 301 first determines whether the extra game flag (see step S9663 in FIG. 215) is set on (step S9681).

If it is determined that the extra game flag is not set to on, the sub CPU 301 calculates the total number of game balls ( The value of the initial game prize pitch counter) is displayed on the display device 7 (step S9682).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the extra game flag is set on, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display the total value of the initial game prize ball number counter and the value of the extra game prize ball number counter ( Step S9683). The total value corresponds to the total number of game balls paid out from the transition from the fixed variable mode to the initial game to the present (bonus mode consecutive game section). Subsequently, the sub CPU 301 sets the extra game flag to OFF (step S9684).

After executing the process of step S9682 or step S9684, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing at the end of the second bonus mode>
FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the performance processing at the end of the second bonus mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

For example, when it is determined in step S9622 of FIG. 213 that the normal symbol loss length is changing, the effect processing at the end of the second bonus mode shown in FIG. This is done by

In the performance process at the end of the second bonus mode, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the remaining time of normal symbol loss length variation is 10 seconds or more (step S9701). As mentioned above, while the normal symbol loss length variation is being performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is managed by the sub control circuit 300, and the sub CPU 301 recognizes the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation. can do.

When it is determined that the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is less than 10 seconds, the sub CPU 301 sets performance data for returning to the probability variation mode (step S9702). The effect data for return to variable probability mode is effect data corresponding to an effect indicating return to variable variable mode (return effect to variable probability mode), and is stored in the program ROM 202. By executing the process of step S9702, a variable probability mode return effect is performed. For example, a variable probability mode return image (an image indicating returning to variable probability mode) is displayed on the display device 7.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is 10 seconds or more, the sub CPU 301 sets performance data for entering the extra game (step S9703). The extra game entry effect data is effect data corresponding to an effect indicating entering an extra game (extra game entry effect), and is stored in the program ROM 202. By executing the process of step S9703, an extra game entry effect is performed. For example, an extra game entry image (an image indicating entry into an extra game) is displayed on the display device 7.

After executing the process of step S9702 or step S9703, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

Note that when the process of step S9702 is executed, the sub CPU 301 may proceed to the process of step S9625 in FIG. 213. In addition, if it is determined in step S9622 of FIG. 213 that the normal symbol loss length is not changing, the sub CPU 301 uses the same production data for returning to the probability variable mode set in step S9702 (for entering the extra game set in step S9703). Performance data (different from the performance data) may be set, or performance data different from the performance data for returning to the fixed variable mode (different from performance data for entering the extra game) may be set.

<Processing during 1st bonus mode>
FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing processing during the first bonus mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The process during the first bonus mode shown in FIG. 218 is a process performed by the sub control circuit 300 at a predetermined timing in the performance mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76) in the first bonus mode. For example, the process during the first bonus mode is performed when the second special symbol variation starts in the first bonus mode.

In the process during the first bonus mode, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is 15 seconds or more (step S9721). As mentioned above, while the normal symbol loss length variation is being performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is managed by the sub control circuit 300, and the sub CPU 301 recognizes the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation. can do.

If it is determined that the remaining time of normal symbol loss length variation is 15 seconds or more, the sub CPU 301 executes the process (I) during the first bonus mode (step S9722). The process (I) during the first bonus mode will be explained later using FIG. 219.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is less than 15 seconds, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (step S9723). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the variation pattern of at least one of the pending normal symbol variations is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 136). If so, it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won.

If it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the first bonus mode process (II) (step S9724). The first bonus mode process (II) will be explained later using FIG. 220.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the first bonus mode process (III) (step S9725). The first bonus mode process (III) will be explained later using FIG. 221.

After executing the processing in step S9722, step S9724, or step S9725, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing during the first bonus mode (I)>
FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the process (I) during the first bonus mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The first bonus mode process (I) shown in FIG. 219 is a process performed in the first bonus mode process (see step S9722 in FIG. 218).

In the first bonus mode process (I), the sub CPU 301 first determines whether the remaining number of STs is 5 or more (step S9741). As described above, the remaining ST number is the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations performed in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. A value indicating the number of remaining STs is stored in the work RAM 303, and is updated every time a special symbol variation is performed.

If it is determined that the remaining number of STs is 5 or more, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9742). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the jackpot has been won if the result of the jackpot determination regarding at least one of the special symbol variations to be performed this time and the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved ball is a jackpot. I judge that.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the first bonus mode performance (A) (step S9743). Performance (A) in the first bonus mode is when the remaining time of normal symbol loss length variation is 15 seconds or more, the remaining number of STs is 5 or more, and the jackpot has been won in the first bonus mode. This is a performance performed on occasion. In the process of step S9743, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image that suggests that the bonus mode will continue for the time being. Alternatively, the sub CPU 301 executes a first bonus mode end promotion lottery, and when the lottery is won, causes the display device 7 to display a first bonus mode end promotion image. The first bonus mode termination promotion image is an image that promotes termination of the first bonus mode. After executing the process in step S9743, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9742 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the first bonus mode performance (B) (step S9744). Performance (B) in the 1st bonus mode is when, in the 1st bonus mode, the remaining time of normal symbol loss length variation is 15 seconds or more, the remaining ST number is 5 or more, and the player has not won a jackpot. This is a performance performed on occasion. In the process of step S9744, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image that suggests that the bonus mode will continue for the time being. The image displayed by the process of step S9744 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effect (A) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process in step S9744, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9741 that the number of remaining STs is less than 5, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9745). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the jackpot has been won if the result of the jackpot determination regarding at least one of the special symbol variations to be performed this time and the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved ball is a jackpot. I judge that.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the first bonus mode performance (C) (step S9746). The first bonus mode performance (C) is when the remaining time of normal symbol loss length variation is 15 seconds or more in the first bonus mode, the remaining number of STs is less than 5, and the player wins the jackpot. This is a performance performed on occasion. In the process of step S9746, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image that suggests that the ST recovery is confirmed although the ST count is running low. The image displayed by the process of step S9746 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in effects (A) to (B) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process in step S9746, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9745 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the first bonus mode performance (D) (step S9747). The first bonus mode performance (D) is when the remaining time of normal symbol loss length variation is 15 seconds or more in the first bonus mode, the remaining number of STs is less than 5, and the player has not won a jackpot. This is a performance performed on occasion. In the process of step S9747, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image indicating that the number of STs remaining is running low and the bonus mode will end soon. The image displayed by the process of step S9747 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in effects (A) to (C) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process in step S9747, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing during the first bonus mode (II)>
FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing the first bonus mode process (II) related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The first bonus mode process (II) shown in FIG. 220 is a process performed in the first bonus mode process (see step S9724 in FIG. 218).

In the first bonus mode process (II), the sub CPU 301 first determines whether the remaining number of STs is 5 or more (step S9761). As described above, the remaining ST number is the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations performed in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. A value indicating the number of remaining STs is stored in the work RAM 303, and is updated every time a special symbol variation is performed.

If it is determined that the remaining number of STs is 5 or more, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9762). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the jackpot has been won if the result of the jackpot determination regarding at least one of the special symbol variations to be performed this time and the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved ball is a jackpot. I judge that.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the first bonus mode performance (E) (step S9763). Performance (E) during the 1st bonus mode means that in the 1st bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, and the remaining number of STs is 5. This is the performance that is performed when the jackpot is won. In the process of step S9763, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image that suggests that the normal symbol loss length variation will end soon. The image displayed by the process of step S9763 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effect (A) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process in step S9763, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9762 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the first bonus mode performance (F) (step S9764). Performance (F) in the 1st bonus mode is when the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is less than 15 seconds in the 1st bonus mode, the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, and the remaining ST number is 5. This is the performance that is performed when the jackpot has not been won. In the process of step S9764, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image that suggests that the normal symbol loss length variation will end soon. The image displayed by the process of step S9764 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effect (E) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. Moreover, the image displayed by the process of step S9767 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the first bonus mode effect (B), or may be a different image. After executing the process in step S9764, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9761 that the remaining number of STs is less than 5, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9765). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the jackpot has been won if the result of the jackpot determination regarding at least one of the special symbol variations to be performed this time and the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved ball is a jackpot. I judge that.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the first bonus mode performance (G) (step S9766). In the first bonus mode performance (G), the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, and the remaining ST number is less than 5, and This is a performance that is performed when a jackpot has been won. In the process of step S9766, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image that suggests that ST recovery is confirmed although the ST count is running low. The image displayed by the process of step S9766 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (E) to (F) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. Moreover, the image displayed by the process of step S9766 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effect (C) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9766, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9765 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the first bonus mode performance (H) (step S9767). The performance (H) in the 1st bonus mode means that in the 1st bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, and the remaining number of STs is 5. This is an effect that is performed when the winning amount is less than 1, and the jackpot has not been won. In the process of step S9767, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image indicating that the number of STs remaining is running low and the bonus mode will end soon. The image displayed by the process of step S9767 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in effects (E) to (G) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. Moreover, the image displayed by the process of step S9767 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the first bonus mode effect (D), or may be a different image. After executing the process in step S9767, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing during the first bonus mode (III)>
FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing the first bonus mode process (III) related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The first bonus mode process (III) shown in FIG. 221 is a process performed in the first bonus mode process (see step S9725 in FIG. 218).

In the first bonus mode process (III), the sub CPU 301 first determines whether the remaining number of STs is 5 or more (step S9781). As described above, the remaining ST number is the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations performed in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. A value indicating the number of remaining STs is stored in the work RAM 303, and is updated every time a special symbol variation is performed.

If it is determined that the remaining number of STs is 5 or more, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9782). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the jackpot has been won if the result of the jackpot determination regarding at least one of the special symbol variations to be performed this time and the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved ball is a jackpot. I judge that.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the first bonus mode performance (I) (step S9783). Performance (I) in the 1st bonus mode means that in the 1st bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length variation is won, and the remaining ST number is 5 or more. This is a performance that is performed when the jackpot is won. In the process of step S9783, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image that suggests that the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is short, but that the normal symbol losing length variation has been won again. The image displayed by the process of step S9783 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in effects (A) to (E) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image.

If it is determined in step S9782 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the first bonus mode performance (J) (step S9784). The performance (J) in the 1st bonus mode means that in the 1st bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length variation is won, and the remaining ST number is 5 or more. This is a performance that is performed when the jackpot has not been won. In the process of step S9784, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image that suggests that the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is short, but that the normal symbol losing length variation has been won again. The image displayed by the process of step S9784 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effect (I) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. Moreover, the image displayed by the process of step S9784 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in effects (B) to (F) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image.

If it is determined in step S9781 that the remaining number of STs is less than 5, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9785). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the jackpot has been won if the result of the jackpot determination regarding at least one of the special symbol variations to be performed this time and the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved ball is a jackpot. I judge that.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the first bonus mode performance (K) (step S9786). In the first bonus mode performance (K), the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length variation is won, the number of remaining STs is less than 5, and it is a jackpot. This is a performance that will be performed if the winner is selected. In the process of step S9786, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image that suggests that ST recovery is confirmed although the number of STs remaining is low. The image displayed by the process of step S9786 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in effects (I) to (J) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. Moreover, the image displayed by the process of step S9786 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (C) to (G) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image.

If it is determined in step S9785 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the first bonus mode performance (L) (step S9787). The performance (L) in the 1st bonus mode is when the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is less than 15 seconds in the 1st bonus mode, the normal symbol loss length variation is won, and the remaining ST number is less than 5. This is a performance that is performed when the jackpot has not been won. In the process of step S9787, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image indicating that the number of STs remaining is running low and the bonus mode will end soon. The image displayed by the process of step S9787 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in effects (I) to (K) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. Moreover, the image displayed by the process of step S9787 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (D) to (H) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image.

After executing the process of step S9783, step S9784, step S9786, or step S9787, the sub CPU 301 extends the remaining time of normal symbol loss length variation (step S9788). In this process, the sub CPU 301 sets the variation time (for example, 600000 ms) of the winning normal symbol variation as the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation. The winning normal symbol variation is the normal symbol variation related to the normal symbol loss length variation among the pending normal symbol variations. In addition, if a plurality of winning ordinary symbol variations are included in the pending ordinary symbol variations, the sub CPU 301 selects the winning ordinary symbol variation that is to start changing first among the plurality of winning ordinary symbol variations. Set the fluctuation time as the remaining time of normal symbol loss length fluctuation. The remaining time of the new normal symbol loss length variation set in this way is not updated by the timer update process until the winning normal symbol variation starts, and is subtracted after the start of the winning normal symbol variation.

After executing the process in step S9788, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine. As a result, from now on, a performance will be performed according to the remaining time of the new normal symbol loss length variation. In other words, when the production content is determined, it is treated as if the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation has been extended. For example, in this second special symbol variation, any of the effects (I) to (L) during the first bonus mode shown in FIG. 221 is On the other hand, in the next second special symbol variation, the process of step S9722 in FIG. 218 is performed, and any of the effects (A) to (D) during the first bonus mode shown in FIG. 219 is performed. It turns out.

The processing during the first bonus mode described above using FIGS. 218 to 221 may be performed in the first bonus mode as the initial game described above, or may be performed in the first bonus mode as an extra game (see FIG. 215). mode, or both of these first bonus modes. As explained above, in the first bonus mode, a plurality of information including the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation, whether or not the normal symbol loss length variation has been won, the number of remaining STs, and whether or not the jackpot has been won. A performance can be performed according to one or more arbitrary elements among the elements.

In addition, in the first bonus mode, the above-mentioned drum fluctuation performance may be performed as a performance according to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation. For example, if the result of the jackpot determination related to one special symbol variation is a jackpot, the drum symbol 9202 is stopped and displayed in a winning pattern as a drum variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation (performed during the special symbol variation). If the result of the jackpot determination regarding one special symbol variation is not a jackpot, the drum symbol 9202 is stopped and displayed in a losing pattern as a drum variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation (performed during the special symbol variation). It may also be done. In addition, if the result of the jackpot determination regarding one special symbol variation is a jackpot, a look-ahead performance (for example, a performance similar to the loss length variation look-ahead performance described above) is performed before the special symbol fluctuation starts. It is also possible to be exposed. As such a look-ahead effect, the same effect may be performed regardless of the number of remaining STs, or may be performed depending on the number of remaining STs (for example, when the number of remaining STs is 5 or more and when it is less than 5). It is also possible that different effects may be performed (in some cases).

Further, when a drum fluctuation performance is performed as a performance corresponding to a special symbol variation, a plurality of drum fluctuation performances may be associated with one special symbol variation. For example, while one special symbol variation is being performed, a drum variation performance may be performed a plurality of times as a performance suggesting the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol variation. Furthermore, before one special symbol variation is started, a drum variation performance may be performed a plurality of times as a performance that suggests the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol variation. One drum fluctuation effect is completed in about 2 seconds as described above, and it is possible to configure the drum fluctuation effect to be repeated a plurality of times.

<Remaining ST number adjustment process>
FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the remaining ST number adjustment process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The above description has been made assuming that the remaining ST number image 9203 is displayed on the display device 7 in the variable probability mode (remaining ST number subtraction mode) (see FIG. 203). The remaining ST number image 9203 may indicate an accurate value of the remaining ST number, or may not necessarily indicate an accurate value of the remaining ST number (suggesting the remaining ST number). In the following description, it is assumed that the remaining ST number image 9203 indicates the remaining ST number.

The remaining ST number adjustment process shown in FIG. 222 is a process that is performed at a predetermined timing in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. For example, the remaining ST number adjustment process is performed when the first bonus mode starts or when the first bonus mode ends.

In the remaining ST number adjustment process, the sub CPU 301 first determines whether there is a difference between the value of the remaining ST number for display and the value of the actual remaining ST number (step S9801). The value of the actual remaining ST number is an accurate value of the remaining ST number, and as explained above, the value is updated (subtracted by 1) every time a special symbol variation is performed. The value of the number of remaining STs for display is an approximate value of the number of remaining STs, and the value is updated (subtracted by 1) every time a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. The number shown as the remaining ST number image 9203 corresponds to the value of the remaining ST number for display. The value of the actual remaining ST number and the value of the remaining ST number for display are respectively stored in the work RAM 303.

If it is determined that there is a difference between the value of the remaining ST count for display and the value of the actual remaining ST count, the sub CPU 301 sets the value of the actual remaining ST count for the value of the remaining ST count for display (step S9802). ). As a result, the value of the remaining ST number for display is changed to the value of the actual remaining ST number, and the remaining ST number image 9203 is corrected to show the correct value of the remaining ST number. For example, when the first bonus mode (normal symbol loss length variation) starts or when the first bonus mode (normal symbol loss length variation) ends, the number shown as the remaining ST number image 9203 increases or decreases. .

If it is determined in step S9801 that there is no difference between the value of the display remaining ST count and the actual remaining ST count, or after executing the process of step S9802, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

Note that the ST number adjustment process is not limited to the process shown in FIG. 222. For example, in normal times, the value of the remaining ST count for display is updated (subtracted by 1) every time a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) passes, but the value of the remaining ST count for display is actually the remaining ST count. If it is larger (smaller) than the number of times, it is possible to configure the update frequency to be increased (decreased) or to increase (decrease) the value to be subtracted in one update. .

<Remaining ST count update process for display>
FIG. 223 is a flowchart illustrating the display remaining ST count updating process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The above description has been made assuming that the value of the number of remaining STs for display is updated (subtracted by 1) every time a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. The timing at which the value of the number of remaining STs for display is updated is not limited to this example. For example, the value of the remaining ST number for display may be updated every time the drum variation effect is performed (when the drum symbol 9202 starts to vary), or the value of the number of STs remaining for display may be updated each time the drum variation effect is performed (the first special symbol variation). The value of the number of remaining STs for display may be updated when the second special symbol variation starts. Below, an example will be described in which the value of the number of remaining STs for display is updated when the second special symbol variation starts.

The remaining ST count update process for display shown in FIG. 223 is performed in the remaining ST count subtraction mode, after a game ball enters the second starting opening 140A, 140B, when a special symbol change related to the starting winning starts, the sub This is a process performed by the control circuit 300 in the presentation mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76). In addition, the sub-control circuit 300 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol production start command transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

In the display remaining ST count update process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination regarding the current special symbol variation is a jackpot (step S9821). When it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination regarding the current special symbol variation is a jackpot, the sub CPU 301 judges whether or not the current jackpot is a 10R jackpot (see FIG. 133) (step S9822). Since the special symbol production start command sent from the main control circuit 200 includes information indicating the jackpot determination result and the type of jackpot, by receiving the special symbol production start command, the sub CPU 301 It is possible to make such judgments.

If it is determined in step S9821 that the result of the jackpot determination regarding the current special symbol change is not a jackpot (it is a loss or a small hit), or if it is determined in step S9822 that the current jackpot is not a 10R jackpot (it is a 2R jackpot) If it is determined that this is the case, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the error in the number of remaining STs for display is a predetermined value (10) (step S9823). The error in the number of remaining STs for display is a value obtained by subtracting the value of the number of remaining STs for display from the value of the actual number of remaining STs. Here, when the remaining ST number subtraction mode starts, 50 is set as the value of the actual remaining ST number, and 40 is set as the value of the remaining ST number for display. Therefore, the initial value of the error in the remaining number of STs for display is 10.

If it is determined that the error in the number of remaining STs for display is a predetermined value (10), the sub CPU 301 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of remaining STs for display stored in the work RAM 303 (step S9824). Thereafter, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the error in the number of remaining STs for display is not the predetermined value (10), it is determined whether the error in the number of remaining STs for display is larger than the predetermined value (10) (step S9825). If it is determined that the error in the number of remaining STs for display is larger than the predetermined value (10), the sub CPU 301 adds 1 to the value of the number of remaining STs for display stored in the work RAM 303 (step S9826). In addition, in this process, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery to determine which process to perform: adding 1 to the value of the remaining ST count for display or maintaining the value of the remaining ST count for display. It is also possible to decide. After executing the process in step S9826, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined that the error in the number of remaining STs for display is smaller than the predetermined value (10), the sub CPU 301 subtracts 2 from the value of the number of remaining STs for display stored in the work RAM 303 (step S9827). Thereafter, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9822 that the current jackpot is a 10R jackpot, the sub CPU 301 subtracts 3 from the value of the remaining ST count for display stored in the work RAM 303 (step S9827). Here, the variation time of the special symbol variation related to the 10R jackpot is 15 seconds. The sub CPU 301 may subtract 1 from the value of the remaining ST number for display stored in the work RAM 303 every 5 seconds while the special symbol variation is being performed (3 subtractions in total). . After executing the process in step S9827, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

In addition, the total time of the variation time of the special symbol variation related to the 2R jackpot (see Figure 133) and the time from the end of the special symbol variation to the end of opening of the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131 is 10 seconds. It has become. In addition, the total time of the variation time of the special symbol variation related to the small hit and the time from the end of the special symbol variation to the end of opening of the small winning large prize opening 151 is 5 seconds. Further, the variation time of the special symbol variation related to a loss is 5 seconds. Furthermore, when a jackpot game state occurs, the value of the remaining ST number for display may or may not be reset, but in the form in which the remaining ST number for display update process shown in FIG. 223 is performed. , it is preferable to configure it so that it is not reset (after the end of the second bonus mode, the value of the number of remaining STs for display before the start of the second bonus mode is inherited).

The above description has been made on the assumption that the remaining ST number is suggested by the number shown as the remaining ST number image 9203. In this embodiment, instead of the remaining ST number image 9203, a rank image (not shown) may be displayed on the display device 7 as an image suggesting the remaining ST number. The rank image is, for example, an image corresponding to a character such as "A", "B", "C", "D", etc., and the remaining ST number is suggested by the character (rank). For example, when the remaining ST count subtraction mode starts, 100 is set as the remaining ST count for display managed in the process of FIG. 223, and if the remaining ST count for display is 60 or more, the rank image is " is displayed, and if the number of remaining STs for display is 40 or more and less than 60, "B" is displayed as the rank image, and if the number of remaining STs for display is 20 or more and less than 40, "B" is displayed as the rank image. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which "C" is displayed and "D" is displayed as the rank image when the number of remaining STs for display is 5 or more and less than 20. When the number of remaining STs for display becomes less than 5, the rank image may be deleted.

In addition, the value of the remaining ST number for display is changed so that when the value of the actual remaining ST number becomes a predetermined value (for example, 5), the value of the remaining ST number for display always becomes a specific value (for example, 0). It is also possible to control the update (subtraction or addition). For example, when the remaining ST count subtraction mode starts, the remaining ST count for display is set to 100, and then each time a special symbol variation is performed (when the special symbol variation ends), the remaining ST count for display is increased by 5. After subtraction and the value of the remaining ST number for display reaches 30, control is performed so that the remaining ST number for display may not be subtracted (added or maintained) by lottery even if a special symbol change is performed. . As a result, when the value of the actual remaining ST number becomes 11 and the value of the remaining ST number for display becomes 30, each time a special symbol variation is performed (when the special symbol variation ends), the remaining number of ST for display is The ST count is subtracted by 5, and when the actual remaining ST count becomes 5, the value of the remaining ST count for display becomes 0. It is possible to adopt such a configuration. Note that if the value of the actual remaining ST count is less than a predetermined value (for example, 5) (if the value of the remaining ST count for display becomes a specific value (for example, 0)), the actual remaining ST count will be It is also possible to shift to a mode in which a different background is displayed than when the value is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 5).

In addition, although it has been explained above that the number of remaining STs for display (rank) is updated based on the result of jackpot determination or the type of jackpot, the number of ST remaining for display (rank) is updated based on the result of normal lottery or the type of normal symbol fluctuation pattern. The remaining ST count (rank) may be configured to be updated. For example, if you have won the normal symbol loss length variation, you can make the value subtracted or added in one update larger (smaller) compared to the case where you have not won the normal symbol loss length variation. good. Similarly, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the value to be subtracted or added in one update may be made larger (smaller) than when the result of the jackpot judgment is not a jackpot. Thereby, it is possible to suggest whether or not a jackpot has been won or whether a normal symbol loss length variation has been won or not through the remaining ST count image 9203 and the rank image.

<Pre-reading effect processing of common map in fixed variable mode>
FIG. 224 is a flowchart illustrating the normal pattern pre-read effect processing in the variable probability mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal pattern pre-reading production process in the variable probability mode shown in FIG. 224 is performed by the sub control circuit when, after a game ball has won a prize in the second starting openings 140A, 140B in the variable probability mode, when a special symbol variation related to the starting prize starts. 300 in the presentation mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76). In addition, the sub-control circuit 300 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol production start command transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

In the normal pattern pre-reading effect processing in the variable probability mode, first, the sub CPU 301 executes the normal pattern pre-reading lottery (step S9841). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on random numbers.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the general symbol pre-read lottery has been won (step S9842). If it is determined that the player has not won the general map pre-read lottery, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the general symbol pre-read lottery has been won, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination regarding the current special symbol variation is a jackpot (step S9843). Since the special symbol production start command sent from the main control circuit 200 includes information indicating the result of the jackpot determination, by receiving the special symbol production start command, the sub CPU 301 can make the determination. is possible.

If it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination regarding the current special symbol variation is a jackpot, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (step S9844). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the variation pattern of at least one of the pending normal symbol variations is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 136). If so, it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won.

If it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the normal symbol pre-read effect (A) (step S9845). The normal pattern look-ahead effect (A) is in the fixed variation mode, when you win the normal pattern look-ahead lottery, the result of the jackpot determination related to this special symbol variation is a jackpot, and you win the normal symbol loss length variation. This is a performance that takes place on In the process of step S9845, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image that suggests that both the jackpot and the normal symbol loss length variation have been won. The sub CPU 301 may cause the display device 7 to display different images depending on the type of jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). After executing the process in step S9845, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9844 that the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the normal symbol pre-read effect (B) (step S9846). The normal pattern look-ahead effect (B) is in the fixed variation mode, when you win the normal pattern look-ahead lottery, the result of the jackpot judgment related to this special symbol change is a jackpot, and you have not won the normal symbol loss length change. This is a performance that takes place on In the process of step S9846, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image that suggests that the player has won the jackpot. The sub CPU 301 may cause the display device 7 to display different images depending on the type of jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). The image displayed by the process of step S9846 may be the same image or a different image from the image that can be displayed in the ordinary symbol pre-reading effect (A). After executing the process in step S9846, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9843 that the result of the jackpot determination related to the current special symbol variation is not a jackpot, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the result of the jackpot determination related to the current special symbol variation is a small hit ( Step S9847). Since the special symbol production start command sent from the main control circuit 200 includes information indicating the result of the jackpot determination, by receiving the special symbol production start command, the sub CPU 301 can make the determination. is possible.

If it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination regarding the current special symbol variation is a small hit, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the regular symbol loss length variation has been won (step S9848). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the variation pattern of at least one of the pending normal symbol variations is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 136). In this case, it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won.

If it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the normal symbol pre-read effect (C) (step S9849). In the normal pattern look-ahead effect (C), in the fixed variation mode, the player wins the normal pattern look-ahead lottery, the result of the jackpot determination regarding this special symbol variation is a small hit, and the player wins the normal symbol loss length variation. This is a performance performed on occasion. In the process of step S9849, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image that suggests that both the small win and the normal symbol loss length variation have been won. The image displayed by the process of step S9849 may be the same image or a different image from the image that can be displayed in the ordinary figure pre-read effects (A) to (B). After executing the process in step S9849, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9848 that the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the normal symbol pre-read effect (D) (step S9850). In the normal pattern look-ahead performance (D), in the fixed variation mode, the player wins the normal pattern look-ahead lottery, the result of the jackpot determination related to this special symbol change is a small hit, and the player does not win the normal symbol loss length change. This is a performance performed on occasion. In the process of step S9850, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image that suggests that the small win has been won. The image displayed by the process of step S9850 may be the same image or a different image from the image that can be displayed in the ordinary symbol pre-read effects (A) to (C). After executing the process of step S9850, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9847 that the result of the jackpot determination regarding the current special symbol variation is not a small hit, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (step S9851). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the variation pattern of at least one of the pending normal symbol variations is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 136). If so, it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won.

If it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the normal symbol pre-read effect (E) (step S9852). The normal pattern look-ahead performance (E) is in the fixed variation mode, when you win the normal pattern look-ahead lottery, the result of the jackpot judgment related to this special symbol change is a loss, and you win the normal symbol loss length change. This is a performance that takes place on In the process of step S9852, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image that suggests that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won. The image displayed by the process of step S9852 may be the same image or a different image from the image that can be displayed in the ordinary symbol pre-read effects (A) to (D). After executing the process in step S9852, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9851 that the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the normal symbol pre-read effect (F) (step S9853). The normal pattern look-ahead effect (F) is in the fixed variation mode, when you win the normal pattern look-ahead lottery, the result of the jackpot judgment related to this special symbol change is a loss, and you have not won the normal pattern loss length change. This is a performance that takes place on In the process of step S9853, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image that suggests that neither a jackpot or small hit nor a normal symbol loss length variation has been won. The image displayed by the process of step S9853 may be the same or different from the image that can be displayed in the ordinary symbol pre-read effects (A) to (E). After executing the process in step S9853, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

In the Fuu-zu pre-reading performance (A), Fu-zu pre-reading performance (C), and Fu-zu pre-reading performance (E), Fu-zu pre-reading performance (B), Fu-zu pre-reading performance (D), and Fu-zu pre-reading performance A specific image (an image that suggests winning the normal symbol loss length variation) is displayed with a higher probability than in (F). As a result, it is suggested that the normal symbol loss length variation was won during the special symbol variation. Images that can be displayed in the normal pattern look-ahead effect (A), the normal pattern look-ahead effect (C), and the normal pattern look-ahead effect (E) include images that cannot be displayed in other effects (normal pattern loss length variation winning). It is also possible to provide an image that confirms what has happened.

In this embodiment, as described above, a plurality of variation times (for example, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds) are used as the variation time of the normal symbol loss length variation. , 300 seconds, and 600 seconds). In this case, different images are displayed depending on the fluctuation time of the winning ordinary symbol loss length variation in the ordinary symbol pre-reading effect (A), the ordinary symbol pre-reading effect (C), and the ordinary symbol pre-reading effect (E). It may also be displayed on the device 7.

In addition, although the explanation has been made above on the assumption that the normal pattern look-ahead effect process in the variable probability mode shown in FIG. It may also be a thing.

<Special figure pre-reading production processing in fixed change mode>
FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing special symbol pre-reading performance processing in variable probability mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In the special symbol pre-read production process in the variable probability mode shown in FIG. 225, after the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 in the variable probability mode, when the normal symbol variation related to passing through the gate starts, the sub control circuit 300 changes the production mode. This is a process performed in the determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76). In addition, the sub control circuit 300 can recognize that the normal symbol variation starts by receiving the normal symbol variation start command. The normal symbol variation start command is set by the main control circuit 200 and transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 when the normal symbol variation starts, for example, in the normal symbol memory check process (see step S192 in FIG. 64).

In the special symbol pre-read performance process in the variable probability mode, first, the sub CPU 301 executes a special symbol pre-read lottery (step S9861). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on random numbers.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the special symbol pre-read lottery has been won (step S9862). If it is determined that the special figure pre-read lottery has not been won, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol pre-read lottery has been won, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the current variation pattern of the normal symbol variation is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 136). It is determined whether or not (step S9863). Since the normal symbol variation start command includes information indicating the type of the normal symbol variation pattern (see FIG. 136), by receiving the normal symbol variation start command, the sub CPU 301 can make the determination. It is possible.

If it is determined that the current variation pattern of the normal symbol variation is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9864). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the jackpot has been won if the result of the jackpot determination regarding at least one of the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved ball is a jackpot.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the special symbol pre-read effect (A) (step S9865). In the special pattern look-ahead effect (A), in the fixed variation mode, the player wins the special pattern look-ahead lottery, the variation pattern of the current normal symbol variation is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation, and the player wins the jackpot. This is a performance performed on occasion. In the process of step S9865, for example, the sub CPU 301 displays an image that suggests winning both the jackpot and the normal symbol loss length variation (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9845 of FIG. 224). Display it on the device 7. The sub CPU 301 may cause the display device 7 to display different images depending on the type of jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). After executing the process in step S9865, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9864 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the special symbol pre-read effect (B) (step S9866). The special pattern look-ahead effect (B) is a player who has won the special pattern look-ahead lottery in the fixed variation mode, and the variation pattern of the current normal symbol variation is a pattern that corresponds to the normal symbol loss length variation, and the player has not won the jackpot. This is a performance performed on occasion. In the process of step S9866, for example, the sub CPU 301 displays an image (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9852 in FIG. 224) that suggests winning the normal symbol loss length variation on the display device 7. let The image displayed by the process of step S9866 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the special figure pre-reading effect (A), or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9866, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9863 that the current variation pattern of normal symbol variation is not a pattern corresponding to normal symbol loss length variation, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a jackpot has been won (step S9867). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the jackpot has been won if the result of the jackpot determination regarding at least one of the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved balls is a jackpot.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the special symbol pre-reading performance (C) (step S9868). In the special pattern look-ahead effect (C), in the fixed variation mode, the player wins the special pattern look-ahead lottery, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol fluctuation this time is not the pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, and he wins the jackpot. This is a performance performed on occasion. In the process of step S9868, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the jackpot has been won (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9846 in FIG. 224). The sub CPU 301 may cause the display device 7 to display different images depending on the type of jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). The image displayed by the process of step S9868 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the special figure pre-read effects (A) to (B), or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9868, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9867 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the special symbol pre-read effect (D) (step S9869). The special pattern look-ahead effect (D) is a player who wins the special pattern look-ahead lottery in the fixed variation mode, and the variation pattern of the current normal symbol variation is not a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation, and the player has not won the jackpot. This is a performance performed on occasion. In the process of step S9869, for example, the sub CPU 301 generates an image that suggests that neither the jackpot nor the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9853 of FIG. 224). is displayed on the display device 7. The image displayed by the process of step S9869 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the special figure pre-read effects (A) to (C), or may be a different image. After executing the process in step S9869, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

In the special figure pre-reading effect (A) and the special figure pre-reading effect (C), compared to the special figure pre-reading effect (B) and the special figure pre-reading effect (D), there is a higher probability that a specific image (that you have won the jackpot) (images that suggest the following) are displayed. This suggests that a jackpot has been won during normal symbol fluctuations. As the image that can be displayed in the special figure pre-reading effect (A) and the special figure pre-reading effect (C), an image that cannot be displayed in other effects (an image that confirms that a jackpot has been won) may be provided. In addition, in special figure pre-reading performances (A) to (D), depending on the number of remaining STs (for example, if the number of remaining STs is 10 or more, if it is 5 or more but less than 10, and 5) It may also be configured such that different images are displayed depending on whether the number is less than or equal to the number of characters. Moreover, the special figure pre-read effects (A) to (D) may be configured so that the above-mentioned drum fluctuation effect is performed.

In this embodiment, as described above, a plurality of variation times (for example, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds) are used as the variation time of the normal symbol loss length variation. , 300 seconds, and 600 seconds). In this case, in the special symbol pre-reading effect (A) and the special symbol pre-reading effect (B), different images may be displayed on the display device 7 depending on the variation time of the winning normal symbol loss length variation.

In addition, although the explanation has been made above on the assumption that the special symbol pre-reading effect process in the variable probability mode shown in FIG. It may also be a thing.

In addition, when the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol fluctuation becomes a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, basically, the effects corresponding to the start of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (Fig. 207 (j) and ( (see k)) will be performed, but if a jackpot has been won (for example, when the process of step S9865 is performed), the effect may not be performed. That is, in this case, shortly after the normal symbol loss length variation (first bonus mode) starts, the jackpot game state (second bonus mode) is entered, and until the start of the jackpot game state, the "BONUS" ” may be suspended from being performed. For example, when the process of step S9865 is performed, the drum symbol 9202 may be stopped and displayed as a losing pattern (despite winning the normal symbol losing length variation), or the drum symbol 9202 may be stopped and displayed as a losing pattern. The winning pattern may be stopped and displayed, but the winning notification performance (see FIG. 207(k)) may not be performed at that time. Thereafter, when transitioning to the jackpot game state, it is possible to perform a performance (win notification performance) to excite the start of "BONUS".

<Icon stop suggestion preview performance>
FIG. 226(a) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device on the first presentation stage. FIG. 226(b) is a diagram showing a pattern of an icon stop suggestion preview effect.

As shown in FIG. 226(a), in the first production stage, a meter image 9301 for suggesting an icon stop (a meter image 9301a for suggesting a "bell" icon stop, a meter image 9301b for suggesting a "watermelon" icon stop, Cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c) is displayed on the display device 7. The "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a, the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b, and the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c are images imitating meters, respectively.

Specifically, the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a, the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b, and the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c each have an initial display mode (meter is accumulated). level 1 display mode (meter is filled to 1 level), level 2 display mode (meter is filled to 2 levels), and level MAX display mode (meter is full) ) can be displayed in any of the following formats.

The meter indicated by the icon stop suggestion meter image 9301 accumulates according to the performance (icon stop suggestion preview performance) performed during the first performance stage. The icon stop suggestion preview performance shown in FIG. 226(b) is a performance that can occur when a special symbol variation is performed in the first performance stage (see FIG. 137(a)). The icon stop suggestion preview performance is a performance that can occur in combination with other jackpot preview performances during one special symbol change. Note that the icon stop suggestion preview performance is a performance that can be performed only on the first performance stage.

Specifically, the performance corresponding to the performance number "171" is a performance in which the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is a level 1 display mode. The performance corresponding to the performance number "172" is a performance in which the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is a level 2 display mode. The performance corresponding to the performance number "173" is a performance in which the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is a level MAX display mode.

The performances corresponding to the performance numbers "171" to "173" are performances that suggest the possibility that the above-mentioned "bell" icon will be (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting the stop of the "bell" icon is the level 1 display mode, the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the initial display mode. The icon is likely to be (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the level 2 display mode, the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the level 1 display mode. ” icon (stopped) is likely to be displayed. When the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting the stop of the "bell" icon is the level MAX display mode, the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting the stop of the "bell" icon is the level 2 display mode. ” icon (stopped) is likely to be displayed. When the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the level MAX display mode, the "bell" icon is always (stopped) displayed. That is, in this case, it is determined that the process will proceed to "pseudo 2".

The performance corresponding to the performance number "174" is a performance in which the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is a level 1 display mode. The performance corresponding to the performance number "175" is a performance in which the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is a level 2 display mode. The performance corresponding to the performance number "176" is a performance in which the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is a level MAX display mode.

The performances corresponding to the performance numbers "174" to "176" are performances that suggest the possibility that the above-mentioned "watermelon" icon will be (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "Watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is the level 1 display mode, the "Watermelon" The icon is likely to be (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "Watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is the level 2 display mode, the "Watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is displayed in a level 1 display mode. ” icon (stopped) is likely to be displayed. When the display mode of the "Watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is the level MAX display mode, the "Watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b has a "Watermelon" ” icon (stopped) is likely to be displayed. When the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is the level MAX display mode, the "watermelon" icon is always (stopped) displayed. That is, in this case, it is determined that the transition to "Pseudo 3" occurs.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "177" is a performance in which the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is a level 1 display mode. The performance corresponding to the performance number "178" is a performance in which the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is a level 2 display mode. The performance corresponding to the performance number "179" is a performance in which the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is a level MAX display mode.

The performances corresponding to the performance numbers "177" to "179" are performances that suggest the possibility that the above-mentioned "cherry" icon will be (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 1 display mode, the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the "cherry" The icon is likely to be (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "Cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 2 display mode, the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 1 display mode. ” icon (stopped) is likely to be displayed. When the display mode of the "Cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level MAX display mode, the display mode of the "Cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 2 display mode. ” icon (stopped) is likely to be displayed. When the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level MAX display mode, the "cherry" icon is always (stopped) displayed. That is, in this case, it is determined that the transition to a predetermined super reach is made.

Basically, the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "171" to "179" are performed after a game ball wins in the first starting hole 120, and when a special symbol change related to the starting prize is performed, the special It is performed as a performance to suggest to which stage the pseudo continuous performance performed during symbol fluctuation will progress. That is, the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a during one special symbol variation suggests the possibility that the "bell" icon will be displayed during the special symbol variation. Similarly, the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b during one special symbol variation suggests the possibility that the "watermelon" icon will be displayed during the special symbol variation. Furthermore, the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c during one special symbol variation suggests the possibility that the "cherry" icon will be displayed during the special symbol variation.

On the other hand, in the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "171" to "173", the pre-reading performance is performed after the game ball enters the first starting hole 120 and before the special symbol change related to the starting winning starts. In some cases, the pre-reading performance may be performed as a performance to suggest to which stage the pseudo-continuous performance performed during the special symbol variation will progress. In this case, the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a during one special symbol variation is based on the possibility that the "bell" icon will be displayed during the next special symbol variation (which is subject to pre-reading). This suggests that Therefore, in the look-ahead performance for the first starting prize, if the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a becomes the level MAX display mode, the pseudo In the continuous performance, it is confirmed that at least up to "Pseudo 2" will be transitioned.

<Icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process>
FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 227 is performed when the current production stage is the first production stage in step S9214 of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 186). This is a process performed by the sub control circuit 300 after the content lottery process (see FIG. 138).

In the icon stop suggestion preview content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a look-ahead effect will occur during the current special symbol variation based on the information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9901). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the sub variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation is a sub variation pattern for pre-reading (see FIG. 191).

If it is determined that a look-ahead effect will occur during the current special symbol variation, the sub CPU 301 determines whether a pseudo continuous effect will occur based on information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9902). If it is determined that a pseudo continuous effect will occur, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the pseudo continuous effect will progress to "pseudo 3" based on the information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9903).

If it is determined that the pseudo continuous performance will progress to "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 301 executes the icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process for pseudo 3 (step S9904). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not to perform an icon stop suggestion preview performance in "pseudo 3" by performing a lottery based on random numbers, and also performs an icon stop suggestion preview performance in "pseudo 3". If so, the content of the performance will be determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 301 determines one of the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "177" to "179" as the icon stop suggestion preview performance performed in "Pseudo 3". As a result, in "pseudo 3", the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c may change.

If it is determined in step S9903 that the pseudo-continuous effect does not progress to "pseudo 3", or after executing the process in step S9904, the sub CPU 301 executes the icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process for pseudo 2 (step S9905). ). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not to perform an icon stop suggestion preview performance in "pseudo 2" by performing a lottery based on random numbers, and also performs an icon stop suggestion preview performance in "pseudo 2". If so, the content of the performance will be determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 301 determines one of the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "174" to "176" as the icon stop suggestion preview performance performed in "Pseudo 2". As a result, in "pseudo 2", the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b may change.

If it is determined in step S9903 that a pseudo continuous effect does not occur, or after executing the process in step S9905, the sub CPU 301 executes a pseudo 1 icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process (step S9906). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not to perform an icon stop suggestion notice performance in "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on random numbers, and also performs an icon stop suggestion notice performance in "pseudo 1". If so, the content of the performance will be determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 301 determines one of the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "171" to "173" as the icon stop suggestion preview performance performed in "Pseudo 1". As a result, in "Pseudo 1", the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a may change.

If it is determined in step S9901 that a prefetch effect will occur during the current special symbol variation, the sub CPU 301 executes a prefetch icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process (step S9907). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not to perform the icon stop suggestion preview performance in the prefetch performance by performing a lottery based on random numbers, and when performing the icon stop suggestion preview performance in the prefetch performance, Determine the content of the performance. Specifically, the sub CPU 301 determines one of the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "171" to "173" as the icon stop suggestion preview performance performed in the prefetch performance. As a result, the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a can be changed in the look-ahead effect.

After executing the process of step S9906 or step S9907, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<The pending change production lottery process>
FIGS. 228 and 229 are flowcharts showing the pending change effect lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 226(a), in the first production stage, the held ball image 9302 is displayed on the display device 7. The held ball image 9302 is an image corresponding to the current (currently being performed) special symbol variation (the held ball). Also, depending on the number of reserved special symbol variations, one or more of the first reserved ball image 9303a, the second reserved ball image 9303b, the third reserved ball image 9303c, and the fourth reserved ball image 9303d. image is displayed. The first held ball image 9303a is an image corresponding to the first held ball, the second held ball image 9303b is an image corresponding to the second held ball, and the third held ball image 9303c is an image corresponding to the first held ball. This is an image corresponding to the third held ball, and the fourth held ball image 9303d is an image corresponding to the fourth held ball.

In this embodiment, an effect that changes the color of the held ball image 9302 (the held change effect) is performed. The result of the jackpot determination regarding the current special symbol variation is suggested through the color of the reserved ball image 9302. The pending change performance is a performance that can occur when a special symbol change is performed on the first performance stage (see FIG. 137(a)). The pending change performance is a performance that can occur in combination with other jackpot preview performances during one special symbol change. Note that the colors of the first held ball image 9303a, the second held ball image 9303b, the third held ball image 9303c, and the fourth held ball image 9303d may change due to the look-ahead effect.

The pending change effect lottery process shown in FIGS. 228 and 229 is performed when the current effect stage is the first effect stage in step S9214 of the first special symbol change start time process (see FIG. 186). This process is performed by the sub-control circuit 300 after the stage preview content lottery process (see FIG. 138). Note that the pending change performance lottery process may be performed even when the current performance stage is the second performance stage or the third performance stage.

In the pending change effect lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 executes a pending change pattern combination lottery process (step S9921). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the pending change performance (at what timing and how to change the color of the pending ball image 9302) by performing a lottery based on random numbers. The content of the pending change performance is defined by a combination of pending change patterns. The pending change patterns include pending change pattern (1), pending change pattern (2), pending change pattern (3), pending change pattern (4), pending change pattern (5), pending change pattern (6), and pending change. A pattern (7), a pending change pattern (8), and a pending change pattern (9) are provided.

Examples of combinations of pending change patterns include pending change pattern (1) and pending change pattern (9), pending change pattern (1), pending change pattern (2), pending change pattern (3), and The combination of change pattern (9), pending change pattern (1), pending change pattern (2), pending change pattern (3), pending change pattern (4), pending change pattern (7), pending change pattern (8), and a combination called pending change pattern (9), pending change pattern (1), pending change pattern (2), pending change pattern (3), pending change pattern (4), pending change pattern (5), pending change pattern ( 6), a pending variation pattern (8), and a pending variation pattern (9). The combination of pending change patterns always includes the pending change pattern (9). Moreover, when a pending variation pattern (7) is included in a combination of pending variation patterns, a pending variation pattern (8) is also necessarily included in the combination. In the process of step S9921, the sub CPU 301 selects one combination from a plurality of combinations of pending change patterns provided in advance.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the pending change pattern (1) is included in the combination of pending change patterns determined in step S9921 (step S9922). The pending change pattern (1) changes the color of the pending ball image 9302 when the "pseudo 1" stage in the pseudo continuous production or "no pseudo" production starts (when the current special symbol variation starts). It is a pattern that makes you

If it is determined that the pending change pattern (1) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the pending change based on the pending change pattern (1) (step S9923). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the held ball image 9302 when the "pseudo 1" stage in the pseudo continuous effect or the "no pseudo" effect starts. For example, the sub CPU 301 selects "no color change", "flashing → blue", "blinking → green", "blue → green,” “blinking → purple,” “blue → purple,” “green → purple,” “flashing → red,” “blue → red,” “green → red,” or “purple → red.” Determine the aspect of As a result, at the start of the "pseudo 1", the color of the held ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner. Note that the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9922 is performed is the same as the color of the first reserved ball image 9303a immediately before the current special symbol variation is started. When the color of the reserved ball image 9303 is changing due to the pre-read effect, the sub CPU 301 determines the color change mode of the reserved ball image 9302 based on the color of the first reserved ball image 9303a.

If it is determined in step S9922 that the pending change pattern (1) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process in step S9923, the sub CPU 301 selects the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. It is determined whether the pending change pattern (2) is included in the combination (step S9924). The holding change pattern (2) is a pattern that changes the color of the holding ball image 9302 when tenpai occurs in the "pseudo 1" stage in the pseudo continuous performance or the "no pseudo" performance. A combination including the pending variation pattern (2) can be selected only when a sub variation pattern in which the decorative pattern is in a ready-to-reach mode has been determined in "Pseudo 1".

If it is determined that the pending change pattern (2) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the pending change based on the pending change pattern (2) (step S9925). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the held ball image 9302 when tenpai occurs in the "pseudo 1" stage of the pseudo continuous presentation or the "no pseudo" presentation. For example, the sub CPU 301 selects "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", "blue → green,” “blinking → purple,” “blue → purple,” “green → purple,” “flashing → red,” “blue → red,” “green → red,” or “purple → red.” Determine the aspect of As a result, the color of the held ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner when the ball becomes tense at the "pseudo 1" stage. Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 that has been determined before the process of step S9924 is performed is the changed color determined by the process of step S9923 when the process of step S9923 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9923 is not performed, it is the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9922 is performed.

If it is determined in step S9924 that the pending change pattern (2) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9925, the sub CPU 301 selects the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. It is determined whether the pending change pattern (3) is included in the combination (step S9926). The holding change pattern (3) is a pattern that changes the color of the holding ball image 9302 when the "pseudo 2" stage in the pseudo continuous effect starts. The combination including the pending change pattern (3) can be selected only when a pseudo-continuous effect occurs.

If it is determined that the pending change pattern (3) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the pending change based on the pending change pattern (3) (step S9927). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the held ball image 9302 when the "pseudo 2" stage in the pseudo continuous effect starts. For example, the sub CPU 301 selects "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", "blue → green,” “blinking → purple,” “blue → purple,” “green → purple,” “flashing → red,” “blue → red,” “green → red,” or “purple → red.” Determine the aspects of As a result, at the start of the "pseudo 2", the color of the held ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner. Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 that has been determined before the process of step S9926 is performed is the changed color determined by the process of step S9925 when the process of step S9925 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9925 is not performed, it is the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9924 is performed.

If it is determined in step S9926 that the pending change pattern (3) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process in step S9927, the sub CPU 301 selects the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. It is determined whether the pending change pattern (4) is included in the combination (step S9928). The holding change pattern (4) is a pattern that changes the color of the holding ball image 9302 when tenpai occurs in the "pseudo 2" stage in the pseudo continuous performance. The combination including the pending change pattern (4) can be selected only when a pseudo-continuous effect occurs and a sub-variation pattern in which the decorative pattern becomes a reach mode in "pseudo 2" is determined. It has become.

If it is determined that the pending change pattern (4) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the pending change based on the pending change pattern (4) (step S9929). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the held ball image 9302 when a tenpai occurs in the "pseudo 2" stage of the pseudo continuous effect. For example, the sub CPU 301 selects "no color change", "flashing → blue", "blinking → green", "blue → green,” “blinking → purple,” “blue → purple,” “green → purple,” “flashing → red,” “blue → red,” “green → red,” or “purple → red.” Determine the aspect of As a result, the color of the held ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner when the ball becomes tense in the "pseudo 2" stage. Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9928 is performed is the changed color determined by the process of step S9927 when the process of step S9927 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9927 is not performed, it is the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9926 is performed.

If it is determined in step S9928 that the pending change pattern (4) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process in step S9929, the sub CPU 301 selects the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. It is determined whether the pending change pattern (5) is included in the combination (step S9930). The holding change pattern (5) is a pattern that changes the color of the holding ball image 9302 when the "pseudo 3" stage in the pseudo continuous effect starts. A combination including the pending change pattern (5) can be selected only when a pseudo-continuous effect occurs and the pseudo-continuous effect progresses to the "pseudo 3" stage.

If it is determined that the pending change pattern (5) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the pending change based on the pending change pattern (5) (step S9931). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the held ball image 9302 when the "pseudo 3" stage in the pseudo continuous effect starts. For example, the sub CPU 301 selects "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", "blue → green,” “blinking → purple,” “blue → purple,” “green → purple,” “flashing → red,” “blue → red,” “green → red,” or “purple → red.” Determine the aspects of As a result, at the start of the "pseudo 3", the color of the held ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner. Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 that has been determined before the process of step S9930 is performed is the changed color determined by the process of step S9929 when the process of step S9929 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9929 is not performed, it is the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9928 is performed.

If it is determined in step S9930 that the pending change pattern (5) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process in step S9931, the sub CPU 301 selects the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. It is determined whether the pending change pattern (6) is included in the combination (step S9932). The holding change pattern (6) is a pattern that changes the color of the holding ball image 9302 when tenpai occurs in the "pseudo 3" stage in the pseudo continuous performance. A combination including the hold change pattern (6) is such that a pseudo continuous effect occurs, the pseudo continuous effect progresses to the stage of "pseudo 3", and the decorative symbol becomes a ready-to-reach mode in "pseudo 3". It can be selected only when a sub-variation pattern has been determined.

If it is determined that the pending change pattern (6) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the pending change based on the pending change pattern (6) (step S9933). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the held ball image 9302 when a tenpai occurs at the "pseudo 3" stage in the pseudo continuous performance. For example, the sub CPU 301 selects "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", "blue → green,” “blinking → purple,” “blue → purple,” “green → purple,” “flashing → red,” “blue → red,” “green → red,” or “purple → red.” Determine the aspects of As a result, the color of the held ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner when the ball becomes tense at the "pseudo 3" stage. Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 that has been determined before the process of step S9932 is performed is the changed color determined by the process of step S9931 when the process of step S9931 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9931 is not performed, it is the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9930 is performed.

If it is determined in step S9932 that the pending change pattern (6) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process in step S9933, the sub CPU 301 selects the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. It is determined whether the pending change pattern (7) is included in the combination (step S9934). The pending change pattern (7) is a pattern that changes the color of the pending ball image 9302 in a situation where two more color changes remain before the pending ball image 9302 reaches its final color. . The timing of the color change based on the pending change pattern (7) can be, for example, the first half of super reach.

If it is determined that the pending change pattern (7) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the pending change based on the pending change pattern (7) (step S9935). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the held ball image 9302 in a situation where two more color changes remain before the held ball image 9302 reaches its final color. decide. For example, the sub CPU 301 selects "no color change", "flashing → blue", "blinking → green", "blue → green,” “blinking → purple,” “blue → purple,” “green → purple,” “flashing → red,” “blue → red,” “green → red,” or “purple → red.” Determine the aspects of As a result, the color of the held ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner in a situation where two more color changes remain. Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 that has been determined before the process of step S9934 is performed is the changed color determined by the process of step S9933 when the process of step S9933 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9933 is not performed, it is the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9932 is performed.

If it is determined in step S9934 that the pending change pattern (7) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process in step S9935, the sub CPU 301 selects the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. It is determined whether the pending change pattern (8) is included in the combination (step S9936). The pending change pattern (8) is a pattern that changes the color of the pending ball image 9302 in a situation where one more color change remains before the pending ball image 9302 reaches its final color. . The timing of the color change based on the pending change pattern (8) may be, for example, the first half or the second half of the super reach.

If it is determined that the pending change pattern (8) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the pending change based on the pending change pattern (8) (step S9937). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the held ball image 9302 in a situation where one more color change remains before the held ball image 9302 reaches its final color. decide. For example, the sub CPU 301 selects "no color change", "flashing → blue", "blinking → green", "blue → green,” “blinking → purple,” “blue → purple,” “green → purple,” “flashing → red,” “blue → red,” “green → red,” or “purple → red.” Determine the aspects of As a result, the color of the held ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner in a situation where one more color change remains. Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 that has been determined before the process of step S9936 is performed is the changed color determined by the process of step S9935 when the process of step S9935 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9935 is not performed, it is the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9934 is performed.

If it is determined in step S9936 that the pending change pattern (8) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process in step S9937, the sub CPU 301 selects the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. It is determined whether the pending change pattern (9) is included in the combination (step S9938). The hold change pattern (9) is a pattern used to change the color of the hold ball image 9302 to the final color. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, before the holding change effect lottery process shown in FIGS. 228 and 229 is performed, the color of the holding ball image 9302 is finally changed to which color by a lottery based on random numbers. (the final color of the held ball image 9302) has been determined. In the process of step S9938, the sub CPU 301 always determines that the pending change pattern (9) is included in the combination of pending change patterns. The timing of the color change based on the pending change pattern (9) is, for example, when tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1", at the start of "pseudo 2", when tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2", and when tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 3". At the beginning of ``, when tenpai occurs in the ``pseudo 3'' stage, and during the first and second half of super reach.

If it is determined that the pending change pattern (9) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the pending change based on the pending change pattern (9) (step S9939). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the held ball image 9302 in order to change the color of the held ball image 9302 to the final color. For example, the sub CPU 301 selects "no color change", "flashing → blue", "blinking → green", "blue → green,” “blinking → purple,” “blue → purple,” “green → purple,” “flashing → red,” “blue → red,” “green → red,” or “purple → red.” Determine the aspects of As a result, the color of the held ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner, and the color of the held ball image 9302 is the same as that of the lottery performed before the held change effect lottery process shown in FIGS. 228 and 229. This will be the final color determined by the (original lottery). Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9938 is performed is the changed color determined by the process of step S9937 when the process of step S9937 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9937 is not performed, this is the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9936 is performed.

If it is determined in step S9938 that the pending change pattern (9) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process in step S9939, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

Note that if the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9938 is already the final color, the sub CPU 301 determines "NO" in the process of step S9938. Good too. In this case, the sub CPU 301 may display the held ball image 9302 in the final color, or may display it in another color (default color). If the color of the held ball image 9302 changes to another color after the color of the held ball image 9302 becomes the final color, it may be determined that the held change effect is a fake effect.

<6th Specific Super Reach Medium Slot Game>
FIG. 230 is a diagram showing the contents of the production block in the sixth specific super reach. FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing the sixth specific super reach content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As mentioned above, the eighth preview performance (see FIG. 193) may be performed on the second stage (see FIG. 137(a)), and when the eighth preview performance is performed, the sixth There is a possibility that it will develop into a specific super reach. During the 6th Special Super Reach, a game (slot game during the 6th Special Super Reach) is played in which multiple types of icons are displayed in a fluctuating manner in three columns on the left, middle, and right on the display device 7, and then are stopped. . In the 6th specific super reach slot game, when the "cherry" icons are stopped and displayed in three columns on the left, middle, and right (when all three are aligned), a predetermined super reach develops. The sixth specific super reach slot game is composed of a plurality of performance blocks. FIG. 230 illustrates the contents of the effect block.

In production block "1", an image corresponding to the explanation of the sixth specific super reach slot game is displayed on the display device 7. In production block "2", an image (for example, an image showing a title of a predetermined super reach) indicating that the slot game was successful in the sixth specific super reach (development into a predetermined super reach) is displayed on the display device 7. will be displayed. In production block "3", an image indicating that the sixth specific super reach slot game has failed (that the sixth specific super reach slot game ends) is displayed on the display device 7.

In production block "4", multiple types of icons are displayed in a variable manner for 8 seconds in three rows on the left, middle, and right on the display device 7, and an image that encourages the "additional" icons to be aligned is displayed. is displayed on the display device 7, the "additional" icons are not stopped and displayed in the three columns on the left, middle, and right (the "additional" icons are not aligned). When the performance corresponding to performance block "4" is performed, the sixth specific super reach slot game ends. In production block "5", multiple types of icons are displayed in a fluctuating manner for 8 seconds in three columns on the left, middle, and right on the display device 7, and an image that encourages the "additional" icons to be aligned is displayed. is displayed on the display device 7, "Additional" icons are stopped and displayed in three columns on the left, middle, and right (three "Additional" icons are aligned). When the performance corresponding to the performance block "5" is performed, the value of the above-mentioned "PLAY TIME" (see FIG. 192(b)) is added by a predetermined number, and the 6th specific super reach slot game continues. .

In production block "6", multiple types of icons are displayed in a fluctuating manner for 8 seconds in three columns on the left, middle, and right on the display device 7, as well as an image that encourages the "mission" icons to line up. is displayed on the display device 7, the "Mission" icons are not stopped and displayed in the three columns on the left, middle, and right (the "Mission" icons are not aligned). When the performance corresponding to performance block "6" is performed, the sixth specific super reach slot game ends. In production blocks "7" and "8", multiple types of icons are displayed in a fluctuating manner for 8 seconds in three columns on the left, middle, and right on the display device 7, and the "mission" icons are displayed in a fluctuating manner for 8 seconds. After such an image is displayed on the display device 7, "Mission" icons are stopped and displayed in three columns on the left, middle, and right (three "Mission" icons are aligned), and the user enters a predetermined mission. Thereafter, in production block "7" the mission fails, and in production block "8" the mission succeeds. If the production corresponding to production block "7" is performed, the slot game continues during the 6th specific super reach, and if the production corresponding to production block "8" is performed, the slot game continues during the specified super reach. develops into

In production block "9", multiple types of icons are displayed in a fluctuating manner for 8 seconds in three rows on the left, middle, and right on the display device 7, as well as an image that encourages the "cherry" icons to line up. is displayed on the display device 7, the "cherry" icons are not stopped and displayed in the three columns on the left, middle, and right (the "cherry" icons are not aligned). When the performance corresponding to the performance block "9" is performed, the sixth specific super reach slot game continues. In production block "10", multiple types of icons are displayed in three rows on the left, middle, and right on the display device 7 in a fluctuating manner for 8 seconds, and an image that encourages the "cherry" icons to line up is displayed. is displayed on the display device 7, the "cherry" icons are stopped and displayed in three columns on the left, middle, and right (three "cherry" icons are aligned). When the performance corresponding to the performance block "10" is performed, a predetermined super reach is developed.

In the sixth specific super reach content lottery process shown in FIG. 231, in step S9214 of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 186), when the current production stage is the second production stage, the production number “153 ” or “154” is performed by the sub-control circuit 300 when it is determined that the effect corresponding to “154” will be performed. By performing the sixth specific super reach content lottery process, the content of each production block will be determined.

In the sixth specific super reach content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the final production block (step S9941). In this process, if the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation is a sub-variation pattern that develops into a predetermined super reach, the sub CPU 301 determines production block "2" as the final production block. . On the other hand, when the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation is such a sub-variation pattern that does not develop into a predetermined super reach, the sub CPU 301 determines performance block "3" as the final performance block.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines the contents of the effect block at the stage immediately before the final effect block (step S9942). In this process, when production block "2" is determined as the final production block, the sub CPU 301 selects the production block as the production block immediately before the final production block by performing a lottery based on random numbers. Determine "8" or "10". On the other hand, when the production block "3" is determined as the final production block, the sub CPU 301 selects production block "4" as the production block immediately before the final production block by performing a lottery based on random numbers. ” or “6”.

Next, the sub CPU 301 subtracts the value of the stock timer (step S9943). In this process, the sub CPU 301 sets a new stock timer value by subtracting a value corresponding to the time corresponding to the effect block determined in step S9942 from the value of the stock timer at the time when the sixth specific super reach starts. is stored in the work RAM 303 as the value. The value of the stock timer at the time when the 6th specific super reach starts corresponds to the value of "PLAY TIME" indicated by the stock timer image 9110 at the time when the slot game during the 6th specific super reach starts during this special symbol change. are doing. The value is determined before the sixth specific super reach content lottery process is started.

Here, the time corresponding to the effect block "4" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "4". The time corresponding to the effect block "6" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "6". The time corresponding to production block "8" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the production (excluding missions) corresponding to production block "8". The time corresponding to the effect block "10" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "10". Note that the value of the stock timer at the time when the sixth specific super reach starts is always a value corresponding to 8 seconds or more.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the value of the stock timer is greater than 0 (step S9944). If it is determined that the value of the stock timer is greater than 0, the sub CPU 301 determines the contents of the last effect block among the undetermined effect blocks (step S9945). In this process, the sub CPU 301 selects one of the production block "5", production block "7", and production block "9" as the last production block by performing a lottery based on random numbers. Decide on the production block.

Next, the sub CPU 301 subtracts the value of the stock timer (step S9946). In this process, the sub CPU 301 subtracts a value corresponding to the time corresponding to the production block determined in step S9945 from the stock timer value stored in the work RAM 303 as a new stock timer value. It is stored in the work RAM 303. Here, the time corresponding to the effect block "5" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "5". The time corresponding to production block "7" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the production (excluding missions) corresponding to production block "7". The time corresponding to the effect block "9" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "9". Note that when the production block "5" is determined in step S9945, the sub CPU 301 subtracts the value of the stock timer and adds the value of the stock timer by a predetermined number (additional time). The value of the stock timer is configured to be N times 8 seconds (N is an integer).

After executing the process in step S9946, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to step S9944. If it is determined in step S9944 that the value of the stock timer is 0, the sub CPU 301 determines the contents of the first effect block (step S9947). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines production block "1" as the first production block. After executing the process in step S9947, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

By executing the sixth specific super reach content lottery process described above, the content of the sixth specific super reach slot game is determined. For example, in the sixth specific super reach content lottery process, production block "2" is determined in step S9941, production block "10" is determined in step S9942, production block "9" is determined in step S9945, and In the case where the production block "5" is determined in step S9945, the production block "7" is further determined in step S9945, and the production block "1" is determined in step S9947, the production block "1" is determined in the sixth specific super reach. Order of block "1" → production block "7" → production block "5" → production block "9" → production block "10" → production block "2" (order determined in the 6th specific super reach content lottery process) (in the reverse order), the effects corresponding to each effect block will be performed.

<Effects and logo lamp on the LCD screen>
FIG. 232(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the logo effect preview presentation for the first presentation stage. FIG. 232(b) is a diagram showing the flow of the logo effect preview presentation for the second presentation stage. 233 to 235 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the logo effect preview presentation for the second presentation stage.

As described above, a logo cover is provided at a predetermined location of the game board unit 10 (for example, above the display device 7), and a logo lamp is provided on the back side of the logo cover. As a performance using such a logo lamp, a logo effect preview performance for the first performance stage and a logo effect preview performance for the second performance stage may be performed.

The logo effect preview performance for the first performance stage shown in FIG. 232(a) is a performance that can occur when a special symbol variation is performed in the first performance stage. The logo effect preview performance for the first production stage can occur only on the first production stage. In addition, the logo effect preview performance for the first performance stage is a performance that can occur in combination with other jackpot preview performances during one special symbol variation.

Although not shown, before the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "181" to "184" are performed, first, the decorative pattern becomes ten-pai 10 seconds after the start of variation. Thereafter, in the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "181" to "184", button images are displayed on the display device 7, and operation of the performance button 54 is accepted. Then, a predetermined effect appears on the display device 7, and the image is displayed such that the effect is absorbed by the logo cover. Thereafter, in the performance corresponding to the performance number "181", nothing special happens and the performance ends. On the other hand, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "182" to "184", the logo lamp emits light in a predetermined manner after a predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed since the absorption of the effect.

Specifically, in the performance corresponding to the performance number "182", the logo lamp emits white light. This creates an appearance in which the letters "X", "Y", and "Z" are lit in white in the first logo section, the second logo section, and the third logo section, respectively. Furthermore, in the performance corresponding to the performance number "183", the logo lamp emits red light. This creates an appearance in which the letters "X", "Y", and "Z" are lit in red in the first logo section, the second logo section, and the third logo section, respectively.

In the performance corresponding to the performance number "184", the logo lamp emits white light. This creates an appearance in which a predetermined word (for example, "CHANCE") lights up in white on the entire logo cover. On the back side of the logo cover, a large number of LEDs are arranged in a matrix (lattice), and by appropriately selecting the LEDs to emit light, any word can be formed.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "182" has a higher jackpot expectation compared to the performance corresponding to the performance number "181", and the performance corresponding to the performance number "183" has a higher probability of hitting the jackpot than the performance corresponding to the performance number "182". The expected level of jackpot is higher than that of ``184'', and the performance corresponding to the performance number "184" has the highest expected level of jackpot.

The logo effect preview performance for the second production stage shown in FIG. 232(b) is a production that can occur when a special symbol variation is performed on the second production stage. The logo effect preview performance for the second production stage can occur only in the second production stage. In addition, the logo effect preview performance for the second performance stage is a performance that can occur in combination with other jackpot preview performances during one special symbol change.

In the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "191" to "193", after the decorative pattern starts to change (see FIG. 233(a)), the screen (monitor) of the display device 7 becomes an image display that shrinks. (See Figure 233(b)). Then, the image is displayed such that the reduced monitor (decorative pattern) moves to the left (see Figure 233(c)), and multiple icons are displayed instead of the decorative pattern, and each icon lights up in turn. The displayed roulette effect is performed (see FIG. 233(d)), the button image is displayed on the display device 7, and the operation of the effect button 54 is accepted (see FIG. 233(e)). Thereafter, one icon is selected as a result of the roulette performance, and an image indicating the title of the performance corresponding to the icon (for example, "CHANCE" shown in FIG. 233(f)) is displayed on the display device 7. "CHANCE" indicates the title of a production in which the effect on the display device 7 is absorbed into the logo cover (for example, the production shown in FIGS. 234 and 235).

Note that while the button image is displayed, a predetermined button valid time is set. If the effect button 54 is operated during the button valid time, the next screen (for example, " CHANCE" is selected). On the other hand, if the effect button 54 is not operated during the button valid time, the next screen (for example, "CHANCE" is selected) at the end of the button valid time (at the moment the button valid time ends) screen).

Thereafter, in the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "191" to "193", a performance in which the effect on the display device 7 is absorbed into the logo cover (effect absorption performance) is performed. In the effect absorption performance, a predetermined effect appears on the display device 7, and the image is displayed such that the effect is absorbed into the logo cover. Thereafter, in the performance corresponding to the performance number "191", the logo lamp does not emit light in a predetermined manner, and an image corresponding to the failure of the effect absorption performance is displayed on the display device 7. becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

On the other hand, in the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "192" and "193", the logo lamp emits light in a predetermined manner. This creates an appearance in which the letters "X", "Y", and "Z" are lit in predetermined colors in the first logo section, the second logo section, and the third logo section, respectively. Note that the predetermined effects may include multiple types of effects with different colors (such as a white effect and a red effect), and the logo lamp may be configured to emit light in the same color as the effect that appears. . After the logo lamp lights up, the decorative pattern becomes Tenpai. At this time, "PLAY TIME" is stocked in the performance corresponding to the performance number "193". After that, the preview will be released after Tenpai is successful. As described above, in the preview after the tenpai is successful, a transitional effect corresponding to the development target super reach is performed (see FIG. 193(b)).

FIG. 234 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 after the start of the effect absorption performance in the performance corresponding to the performance number “192”. As shown in FIG. 234, when the effect absorption effect is started, the first effect image 9402 is displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 234(a)), and then the first effect image 9402 is gradually reduced. The first effect image 9402 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the first logo portion 9401L (see FIG. 234(b)), and when the first effect image 9402 moves to a position where it overlaps with the first logo portion 9401L, the first effect image 9402 disappears. At the same time, the first logo portion 9401L emits light. As a result, the first effect image 9402 appears to be absorbed into the first logo portion 9401L, and the logo lamp is lit so that the letter "X" 9410L is formed (see FIG. 234(c)).

Subsequently, after the second effect image 9403 is displayed on the display device 7, the second effect image 9403 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the second logo portion 9401C while being gradually reduced in size (see FIG. 234(c)). ), when the second effect image 9403 moves to a position where it overlaps the second logo portion 9401C, the second effect image 9403 disappears and the second logo portion 9401C emits light. As a result, the second effect image 9403 appears to be absorbed into the second logo portion 9401C, and the logo lamp is lit so that the letter "Y" 9410C is formed (see FIG. 234(d)).

Subsequently, after the third effect image 9404 is displayed on the display device 7, the third effect image 9404 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the third logo portion 9401R while being gradually reduced in size (see FIG. 234(d)). ), when the third effect image 9404 moves to a position where it overlaps the third logo portion 9401R, the third effect image 9404 disappears and the third logo portion 9401R emits light. As a result, the third effect image 9404 appears to be absorbed into the third logo portion 9401R, and the logo lamp is lit so that the letter "Z" 9410R is formed (see FIG. 234(e)). Thereafter, the image is displayed such that the reduced monitor (decorative pattern) moves to the right (see FIG. 234(e)), and the decorative pattern 9001 becomes in the reach mode (see FIG. 234(f)).

FIG. 235 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 after the start of the effect absorption performance in the performance corresponding to the performance number “191”. As shown in FIG. 235, when the effect absorption effect is started, the first effect image 9402 is displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 235(a)), and then the first effect image 9402 is gradually reduced and The first effect image 9402 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the first logo portion 9401L (see FIG. 235(b)), and when the first effect image 9402 moves to a position where it overlaps with the first logo portion 9401L, the first effect image 9402 disappears. At the same time, the first logo portion 9401L emits light. As a result, the first effect image 9402 appears to be absorbed into the first logo portion 9401L, and the logo lamp is lit so that the letter "X" 9410L is formed (see FIG. 235(c)).

Subsequently, after the second effect image 9403 is displayed on the display device 7, the second effect image 9403 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the second logo portion 9401C while being gradually reduced in size (see FIG. 235(c)). ), when the second effect image 9403 moves to a position where it overlaps the second logo portion 9401C, the second effect image 9403 disappears and the second logo portion 9401C emits light. As a result, the second effect image 9403 appears to be absorbed into the second logo portion 9401C, and the logo lamp is lit so that the letter "Y" 9410C is formed (see FIG. 235(d)).

Subsequently, after the third effect image 9404 is displayed on the display device 7, the third effect image 9404 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the third logo portion 9401R while being gradually reduced in size (see FIG. 235(d)). ), when the third effect image 9404 moves to a position where it overlaps the third logo portion 9401R, the third effect image 9404 disappears, but the third logo portion 9401R does not emit light. As a result, the third effect image 9404 appears to be absorbed into the third logo portion 9401R, but the letter "Z" 9410R is not formed. After that, the logo lamp goes out (the character "X" 9410L and the character "Y" 9410C disappear), and an image is displayed with the reduced monitor (decorative pattern) moving to the right (see Figure 235(e)). , the decorative pattern 9001 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the loss (see FIG. 235(f)).

As described above using FIGS. 234 and 235, in the logo effect preview presentation for the second presentation stage, a presentation is performed in which the effect on the display device 7 is absorbed into the logo cover (effect absorption presentation). Although not shown, a similar effect absorption performance is performed in the logo effect preview performance for the first performance stage. Effect absorption effect is a effect in which the image displayed near the logo cover becomes smaller or disappears, giving the appearance that the image is acting on the logo cover (being absorbed by the logo cover). It is.

In addition, in FIGS. 234 and 235, the first logo section 9401L, the second logo section 9401C, and the third logo section 9401R are divided (adjacent logo sections are not formed continuously, and there is a gap between them). Although the first logo portion 9401L, the second logo portion 9401C, and the third logo portion 9401R may be formed integrally. Particularly, when displaying an arbitrary word on the entire logo cover, such as the effect corresponding to the effect number "184," it is desirable that the entire logo cover be formed integrally.

By the way, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine as well, there is not only a possibility that the machine is controlled to the time-saving gaming state A after the end of the jackpot gaming state, but also shifts to the time-saving gaming state B when the conditions for transition to the time-saving gaming state B are satisfied. However, when the conditions for transition to the C time-saving game state are satisfied, the game shifts to the C time-saving game state.
[5-3. B Performance control related to transition to time-saving gaming state]
In a fifth pachinko gaming machine in which a first special symbol and a second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, in a gaming state where left-handed hitting is a regular gaming mode (for example, a normal gaming state), the sub CPU 301 In the display device 7, the display of the first display effect is started with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, while the display of the second display effect is started even when the variable display of the second special symbol is started. do not have. In addition, in a gaming state in which right-handed hitting is a regular gaming mode (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, or a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the sub CPU 301 displays the second While the display of the second display performance is started with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the display of the first display performance is not performed even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Note that the display device 7 is preferably a liquid crystal display device.

The first display performance that starts displaying in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol is, for example, a display performance that is performed in the display area 7a of the display device 7 in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol (for example, This includes variable display of decorative patterns, display effects using characters, etc.). A symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, which is displayed blinking in one corner of the display device 7 regardless of the game state, is not included in the first display performance.

Similarly, the second display performance that starts displaying along with the variable display of the second special symbol is, for example, a display performance that is performed in the display area 7a of the display device 7 in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. (For example, variable display of decorative patterns, display effects using characters, etc.) A symbol corresponding to the second special symbol, which is displayed blinking in one corner of the display device 7 regardless of the gaming state, is not included in the second display performance.

By the way, in a pachinko game machine in which a first special symbol and a second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, the variable display of either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is caused by the ceiling final variation. If the variable display of the other special symbol is started during the variable display of one special symbol, the display effect may become unnatural and the interest may be reduced.

For example, at any timing from when the variable display of one special symbol starts as the final ceiling fluctuation until the variable display ends (for example, when the variable display of the special symbol starts), the B time-saving game state is activated. In the case of transition, a situation may occur in which the first display effect is performed on the display device 7, while internally transitioning to the B time-saving game state. In particular, if the variable display of one special symbol starts as the final ceiling variation and the variable display of the other special symbol starts before this variable display ends, the first display effect to the second display effect The switch to can be unnatural.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the display performance performed when transitioning to the B time-saving game state in the final ceiling fluctuation is performed in a natural manner as described below, thereby making it possible to suppress the decline in interest. . Below, the effect control related to the transition to the B time-saving game state performed by the sub CPU 301 will be explained.

[5-3-1. B Performance control in normal pattern related to transition to time-saving gaming state]
FIG. 236 is a time chart showing performance control in the normal pattern related to the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, (A) a time chart showing an example of performance control performed in the first normal pattern, (B) a time chart showing an example of performance control performed in the first normal pattern; 2 is a time chart showing an example of performance control performed in a normal pattern.

First, with reference mainly to FIG. 236(A) and supplementary reference to FIG. 237, the effect control in the first normal pattern will be described. FIG. 237 is an example of a display effect of the first normal pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7.

In the first normal pattern shown in FIG. 236(A), the variable display immediately before the final ceiling variation (hereinafter referred to as "pre-ceiling final variation") is the variable display of the first special symbol, and the final ceiling variation is the first variable display. This is a pattern when the variable display of the second special symbol is started during the variable display of the first special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol and the final variation of the ceiling. Note that the "liquid crystal effect" shown in FIG. 236 corresponds to the display effect displayed on the display device 7. In addition, "Special 1_ Loss fluctuation" represents the fluctuation pattern when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a loss, and "Special 1_ Jackpot fluctuation" represents the fluctuation pattern when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a jackpot. It shows the fluctuation pattern in a certain case. Similarly, "Special 2_ Loss fluctuation" represents the fluctuation pattern when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a loss, and "Special 2_ Small hit fluctuation" represents the fluctuation pattern when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a loss. It represents a fluctuation pattern when it is a small hit, and "special 1_jackpot fluctuation" represents a fluctuation pattern when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a jackpot.

When the first special symbol is variably displayed as the final pre-ceiling variation, the sub CPU 301 variably displays the decorative symbol in the display area 7a of the display device 7, as shown in FIG. 237(a). When the variable display of the first special symbol as the final pre-ceiling variation is completed and the display mode of the loss is derived to the 1 special symbol display section 163, as shown in FIG. 237(b), the sub CPU 301 Confirm and display the image showing.

As shown in FIG. 236(A), in the first normal pattern, at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the final variation of the ceiling, the sub CPU 301 performs the first display effect accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol. For example, a shutter closing effect is started. This shutter closing performance functions as a performance indicating that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value, that is, a transition performance to the B time-saving game state.

The shutter closing effect is an image shown in FIG. 237(c). In this shutter closing effect, the sub CPU 301 also performs a right-hand hitting navigation effect that instructs right-hand hitting. In addition, in the shutter closing performance, the sub CPU 301 performs, instead of or in addition to the right-handed navigation performance, for example, a performance that suggests the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, a performance related to the start of the B time-saving game state, etc. , performances related to the progress of the game may be performed. In addition, in this shutter closing effect, the sub CPU 301 also displays an image indicating that the night mode is being prepared. In this embodiment, the night mode is a display effect that suggests that control is being performed to the B time-saving gaming state, and the night mode preparation is a display effect that suggests that the B time-saving gaming state is being prepared. be.

By the way, when a variable display of the first special symbol is performed as the final fluctuation of the ceiling, the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol may be a jackpot or a time-saving hit.

For example, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol whose variable display has started as the final ceiling variation is a jackpot, the sub CPU 301 executes the normal jackpot variation effect without executing the shutter closing effect. .

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol whose variable display has started as the ceiling final variation is a time-saving hit, the sub CPU 301 executes B-time saving game according to the process when a plurality of time-saving game states overlap. When transitioning to state B, it is recommended to perform a transition effect (for example, a shutter closing effect) to the time-saving game state B, and when transitioning to the time-saving game state C, it is recommended to perform a transition effect suggesting the transition to the time-saving game state C. . In this case, the effect of transition to the B time-saving game state and the effect of transition to the time-saving game state C may be the same or almost the same effect in appearance, or may be different effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, a small hit is not included in the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, but if a small hit is included in the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the first When the special symbol is displayed variably, the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol may be a small hit. In this case, the main CPU 201 controls the small winning gaming state and then shifts it to the B time saving gaming state, so the sub CPU 301 performs the small winning winning performance that suggests that the small winning gaming state has been won in the B time saving gaming state. It is preferable to give priority to the transition effect (for example, shutter closing effect). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 301 may give priority to the transition effect to the B time-saving gaming state over the small hit winning effect.

Furthermore, the variable display of the second special symbol is started during the variable display of the first special symbol in the final ceiling variation, and the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol may be a jackpot or a time-saving win.

For example, if the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol whose variable display was started during the variable display of the first special symbol in the ceiling final variation is a jackpot, the sub CPU 301 ends the shutter closing effect and It is preferable to execute a jackpot fluctuation performance. That is, it is preferable that the irregular jackpot fluctuation performance is executed with priority over the transition performance to the B time-saving gaming state.

Also. If the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol whose variable display was started during the variable display of the first special symbol in the ceiling final variation is a small hit, the sub CPU 301 executes a transition effect to the B time-saving gaming state (for example, , shutter closing effect), and then, for example, a night mode display effect is started as a display effect that suggests that the B time-saving gaming state is being controlled, and in this night mode display effect, a small win that suggests a small win is started. It is better to perform a performance that suggests a hit. That is, it is preferable to give priority to the small hit suggestion performance over the transition performance to the B time-saving gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 301 may give priority to the transition performance to the B time-saving gaming state over the small hit suggestion performance.

During the variable display of the first special symbol in the ceiling final variation, when the variable display of the second special symbol (excluding the jackpot variation) is started as the variable display of the first rotation in the B time saving game state, the main special symbol The first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol.

In such a case, when the variable display of the second special symbol (excluding jackpot fluctuations) is started, the sub CPU 301, for example, opens the closed shutter (ends the shutter closing effect) and displays the second special symbol. A night mode display effect is started as a second display effect accompanying the variable display (see FIG. 237(d)). That is, when the main special symbol changes from the first special symbol to the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol in the final ceiling variation, the sub CPU 301 accordingly changes from the first display performance to the second display performance. Switch to Therefore, the night mode display performance functions as a performance indicating that the game has shifted to the B time-saving game state.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 236(A), even if the sub CPU 301 internally shifts to the B time saving game state when the variable display of the first special symbol as the final ceiling variation is started, the sub CPU 301 2. Until the variable display of special symbols starts (until the night mode display effect starts), the shutter closing effect as the first display effect is continuously performed. As a result, it is possible to avoid an unnatural situation in which the display performance associated with the variable display of the special symbol does not start even though the variable display of the first special symbol has started at the final ceiling fluctuation, which reduces interest. It becomes possible to suppress the

When the sub CPU 301 finishes the variable display of the first special symbol which is the final variation of the ceiling, the sub CPU 301 does not perform the first display effect thereafter at least while being controlled to the B time saving game state.

The sub CPU 301 performs night mode display performance (see FIG. 237(d)), game explanation performance ( 237(e)), a bullet landing effect (see FIG. 237(f)), a right hit instruction display effect (see FIG. 237(g)), and a count-up effect, which will be described later.

As described above, the night mode display effect is a display effect indicating that the game has shifted to the B time-saving game state, and is, for example, a display effect in which the background image becomes night. The game explanation (see FIG. 237(e)) corresponds to a display effect in which an explanation related to the game is displayed, such as information indicating that the B time-saving game state is in effect. The landing effect (see FIG. 237(f)) not only displays the words "Count Up" but also shows whether, for example, a ball of light will land toward the 7-segment display 71 provided at the lower right of the display device 7, for example. This corresponds to a display effect like this. Although it is difficult to understand from the illustration in FIG. 237, when the impact effect is performed, the sub CPU 301 starts a high-speed fluctuation in the 7-segment display 71. Thereafter, the sub CPU 301 performs a right-handed hitting instruction display effect that instructs right-handed hitting (see FIG. 237(g)). Although not shown, the count-up effect corresponds to a display effect in which information displayed on the 7-segment display 71 (for example, the number of time-savings in the B-time-saving game state, etc.) appears to be increasing. The sub CPU 301 stops the high-speed fluctuation of the 7-segment display 71 at the stop timing of the variable display of the second special symbol after performing a series of display performances from the night mode display performance to the count-up performance, and starts the B time-saving game. Information indicating the end timing of the state (for example, the number of time reductions) is displayed (see FIG. 237(h)). Thereafter, when the second special symbol is variably displayed, a second display effect accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7.

In this way, in the first normal pattern, the display performance can be switched in a natural manner from the first display performance to the second display performance that is performed in conjunction with the transition to the B time-saving game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 236(B), effect control in the second normal pattern will be described. In the second normal pattern, the final fluctuation before the ceiling is a variable display of the first special symbol, the final fluctuation of the ceiling is a variable display of the first special symbol, the first time in the B time-saving game state is a variable display of the first special symbol, B time-saving game This is a pattern when the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the state.

As shown in FIG. 236(B), in the second normal pattern, the sub CPU 301, at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (loss variation) which is the final ceiling variation, As the display performance, for example, the above-mentioned shutter closing performance is started. In this shutter closing effect, the sub CPU 301 also performs a right-hand hitting navigation effect that instructs right-hand hitting. In addition, in the shutter closing performance, the sub CPU 301 performs, instead of or in addition to the right-handed navigation performance, for example, a performance that suggests the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, a performance related to the start of the B time-saving game state, etc. , performances related to the progress of the game may be performed.

If the variable display of the second special symbol is not started before the variable display of the first special symbol as the final variation of the ceiling ends, the sub CPU 301 displays the variable display of the first special symbol as the final variation of the ceiling. Even if it ends, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol will not be displayed in the shutter performance, which is the first display performance, until the first variable display of the second special symbol starts in the B time-saving game state. The first display effect is continuously displayed. Therefore, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started after the variable display of the first special symbol as the final variation of the ceiling ends and before the variable display of the second special symbol is started, this first A new first display effect accompanying the variable display of special symbols will not be performed.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started for the second time in the B time-saving gaming state (the second special symbol is the first variable display after shifting to the B time-saving gaming state), the sub CPU 301 controls the ceiling final fluctuation. The first display performance started with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol is ended, and the second display performance accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be displayed. Even if the first special symbol is being displayed variably when the variable display of the second special symbol is started for the second time in the B time-saving game state, the sub CPU 301 controls the second Start display production.

After shifting to the B time-saving game state, when the first variable display of the second special symbol is started, the sub CPU 301 starts the night mode display performance, and then the game explanation performance, the landing performance, and the count-up performance. Perform a series of display effects up to. By the way, if the variable display time of the second special symbol performed first after transitioning to the B time-saving game state is short, the above series of display performances may be performed until the variable display of the second special symbol ends. There may be cases where you cannot finish. In such a case, the sub CPU 301 stops the high-speed fluctuation of the 7-segment display 71 at the timing of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol after performing the above series of display effects, performs a count-up effect, B Displays information indicating the end timing of the time saving game state (for example, the number of time saving times). That is, if the second special symbol is being variably displayed when it is time to end the above series of display performances, the sub CPU 301 will display the variable display according to the end timing of the second special symbol. , ends the above series of display effects. However, there are cases where the second special symbol is not being variably displayed when it is time to end the above series of display effects. In such a case, the sub CPU 301 may receive a demo display command from the main CPU 201, for example When received, a count-up effect is performed, information indicating the end timing of the B time saving game state (for example, the number of time saving times) is displayed, and the above series of display effects is ended.

In addition, in the case of a pachinko game machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the number of variable display times of the special symbol that can be executed in the night mode display performance (i.e., the remaining number of times to save time) is displayed. During this period, a variable display using the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be performed and the remaining time saving number may change, so in order to absorb and display the variable display number, the second special symbol is displayed. A count-up effect is performed after waiting for the end of the variable display.

When the first variable display of the special symbol in the B time-saving gaming state is the variable display of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 301 performs the second display performance, and the sub-CPU 301 performs the second display performance when the first variable display of the special symbol in the B time-saving gaming state is variable. When the display is a variable display of the first special symbol, the first display effect is not performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the first variable display of the special symbol in the B time-saving game state is the variable display of the first special symbol, the first display effect may be performed only when a specific condition is satisfied. . However, when the first variable display in the B time-saving game state is a variable display of the first special symbol, the frequency at which the first display effect is performed is that the first variable display in the B time-saving game state is a variable display of the second special symbol. It is preferable that the frequency is less than the frequency at which the second display effect is performed in the case of variable display.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a game state in which left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the first special symbol corresponds to the main special symbol, the second special symbol corresponds to the secondary special symbol, while right-handed hitting is the regular game mode. In a game state that is a game mode, the second special symbol corresponds to the main special symbol, and the first special symbol corresponds to the sub special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the game specification is that when the game is played with left-handed players, the second special symbol is mainly displayed variablely, and when the game is played with right-handed players, the first special symbol is mainly displayed variablely. , in a game state where left-handed hitting is a regular game mode, the second special symbol corresponds to the main special symbol, the first special symbol corresponds to a secondary special symbol, and a game state where right-handed hitting is a regular game mode. In this case, the first special symbol corresponds to the main special symbol, and the first special symbol corresponds to the sub special symbol.

[5-3-2. B Performance control using irregular patterns related to transition to time-saving gaming state]
FIG. 238 is a time chart showing performance control in the irregular pattern related to the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, (A) a time chart showing an example of performance control performed in the first irregular pattern, (B ) A time chart showing an example of performance control performed in the second irregular pattern, and (C) a time chart showing an example of performance control performed in the third irregular pattern.

First, with reference to FIG. 238(A), presentation control using the first irregular pattern will be described. The first irregular pattern is a pattern in which the final pre-ceiling variation is a variable display of the first special symbol, and the final ceiling variation is a variable display (long variation) of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 238(A), when the final pre-ceiling variation is a variable display of the first special symbol and the final ceiling variation is a variable display (long variation) of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 301 At the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the final pre-ceiling variation, for example, the above-mentioned shutter closing effect is started. That is, after the end of the variable display of the first special symbol which is the final pre-ceiling variation, even though the variable display of the first special symbol has not started as the final ceiling variation, the first special symbol is displayed in the above-mentioned normal pattern. A shutter closing effect is displayed that functions as the first display effect accompanying the variable display.

After shifting to the B time-saving game state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the first variable display in the B time-saving game state, the sub CPU 301 ends the shutter closing performance described above and starts the night mode display performance. Start. That is, the sub CPU 301 continues to display the shutter performance that started at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol as the final pre-ceiling variation until the variable display of the second special symbol starts after the B time saving game state. do.

In addition, in FIG. 238(A), the "ceiling final fluctuation (long fluctuation)" illustrated in the columns of "Special 2_Loss fluctuation" and "Special 2_Small winning fluctuation" are both caused by a long period of about 600,000 msec. 2. This is a long variation in which a variation display of special symbols is performed, but for convenience, it is shown in a narrow width. Note that the variable display time of the second special symbol, which is performed over a long variation, is not limited to approximately 600,000 msec, but may be within the range of 360,000 msec to 600,000 msec, for example.

Furthermore, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started while the first special symbol is being variably displayed as the final ceiling variation, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to , performs a right-click small navigation effect (displays right-click instructions in small letters). That is, even if the first special symbol is being variably displayed (for example, during a reach effect), the right hit small navigation effect is performed. As a result, even if the transition to the B time-saving gaming state occurs when the variable display of the second special symbol as the final ceiling variation starts, it is possible to instruct the player to play the game mode (right-handed hitting) at an appropriate timing. It is possible to suppress unnecessary consumption of game balls and, in turn, to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol executed before the variable display of the second special symbol as the first variable display in the B time-saving gaming state (that is, the variable display of the second special symbol as the final ceiling variation) Even if a ready-to-reach presentation is performed as a first display presentation accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol, the above-mentioned right-hit small navigation presentation is performed in this ready-to-reach presentation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 238(B), effect control using the second irregular pattern will be described. The second irregular pattern is a variable display (long variation) of the second special symbol before the final ceiling fluctuation, a variable display of the first special symbol as the final fluctuation of the ceiling, and a variable display of the first special symbol whose final fluctuation is the ceiling fluctuation. , B This is a pattern when variable display of the second special symbol is started as the first variable display after transition to the time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 238(B), when the final pre-ceiling variation is a variable display (long variation) of the second special symbol and the final ceiling variation is a variable display of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 301 At the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the final variation of the ceiling, the above-mentioned shutter closing effect, for example, is started as a first display effect accompanying the start of the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, during the variable display of the first special symbol which is the final ceiling fluctuation, if the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the first variable display after transitioning to the B time saving game state, the sub CPU 301 Even if the variable display of a certain first special symbol has not been completed, the above-mentioned shutter closing performance is ended and the night mode display performance is started. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol as the final ceiling variation ends, the sub CPU 301 ends the night mode display performance and performs a series of display performances including a game explanation performance, a landing performance, and a count-up performance. After that, perform a right-handed hitting instruction display performance.

In addition, after the end of the ceiling final variation, the sub CPU 301 does not perform the first display effect accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol until at least the B time saving game state ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 238(C), effect control using the third irregular pattern will be described. In the third irregular pattern, the final fluctuation before the ceiling is the variable display of the second special symbol (long fluctuation), the final fluctuation of the ceiling is the variable display of the second special symbol, and the first variable display after the transition to the B time-saving game state is the 2 This is a pattern for variable display of special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 238(C), the final fluctuation before the ceiling is the variable display of the second special symbol (long fluctuation), the final fluctuation of the ceiling is the variable display of the second special symbol, and the first fluctuation after transitioning to the B time-saving game state. When the variable display is a variable display of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 301 does not perform the above-mentioned shutter closing effect, and suddenly switches to night mode at the start of the first variable display of the second special symbol after transitioning to the B time-saving game state. Perform display effects. In addition, when the night mode display performance is performed, the sub CPU 301 does not perform the first display performance associated with the variable display of the first special symbol from now on until at least the B time saving game state ends.

Further, after performing the night mode display performance for a predetermined period of time, the sub CPU 301 performs a series of display performances including a game explanation performance, a bullet landing performance, and a count-up performance, and then performs a right hit instruction display performance.

By the way, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, as described above, when the normal symbol loss length variation (variable display of normal symbols such that the variation time is 600000 msec) starts in the fixed variation mode, the game shifts to the bonus mode. (See FIG. 137(a)). In the bonus mode, while the normal symbol fluctuation display (normal symbol fluctuation) is being performed (over 600000 msec), most of the game balls hit right enter the small winning big prize opening 151, and a large number game balls are paid out.

Therefore, in a pachinko gaming machine like the fifth pachinko gaming machine, which shifts from the normal gaming state or C time-saving gaming state to the B time-saving gaming state when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the transition to the B time-saving gaming state The probability of determining the loss length variation as the normal symbol variation pattern may be different between before and after the transition. In this case, before the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, it is possible to win the loss length variation as a normal symbol variation pattern, and after the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, it is not possible to win the loss length variation as a normal symbol variation pattern. It is preferable to make it possible (probability 0).

After the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, the frequency of being controlled to the small winning gaming state will be increased, but after the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, by making it impossible to win the long variation as a normal symbol fluctuation pattern, B After the transition to the time-saving gaming state, it is possible to suppress the winning of game balls to the small winning large prize opening and further suppress the increase in the number of balls put out.

In addition, after the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, instead of making it impossible to win the long fluctuation as a normal symbol fluctuation pattern, the winning probability of the losing length fluctuation is reduced compared to before the transition to the B time-saving gaming state. You may also do so. Even in such a case, after the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, it is possible to achieve the effect of suppressing the entry of game balls into the small winning large prize opening and, by extension, suppressing the increase in the number of balls put out. .

Note that in the fifth pachinko game machine, the passage gate 126 is arranged in the right area 107, but it may be arranged in the left area 106. However, when the passage gate 126 is arranged in the left side area 106, it is preferable to lower the probability of hitting a normal symbol, for example, so that the frequency of operation of the normal electric accessory 146 does not become high.

FIG. 239 is a modification of the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 136. The time saving flag is off before the transition to the B time saving game state, and is on after the transition to the B time saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 239, when the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 determines the loss length variation (normal symbol variation pattern command 90H05) with a higher probability than when the time saving flag is on. By doing so, before the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, compared to after the transition to the B-time saving gaming state, the game ball can be expected to be paid out by winning the small winning large prize opening 151. On the other hand, after shifting to the B time-saving gaming state, compared to before shifting to the B time-saving gaming state, it becomes possible to suppress the payout of game balls by the small winning large prize opening 151.

In addition, when the time saving flag is on, the main CPU 201 may determine the loss length variation (normal symbol variation pattern command 90H05) with a higher probability than when the time saving flag is off. In this case, after the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, compared to before the transition to the B-time saving gaming state, you can expect a payout of the game ball by winning the small winning large prize opening 151, so the B time-saving gaming state is more It becomes possible to create a more interesting gaming state.

By the way, the main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol by referring to the low start special symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 12) before transitioning to the B time-saving gaming state, and After the transition, the decision is made with reference to the high start special symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 16). Therefore, the expected value of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time is higher after the transition to the B time-saving game state than before the transition. That is, the average variable display time after shifting to the B time-saving gaming state is shorter than the average variable display time before shifting to the B time-saving gaming state. In addition, the probability that the result of the hit determination process for special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be a jackpot (jackpot probability), and the probability that the result of the hit determination process for normal symbols will be a normal symbol hit (normal symbol The winning probability) is the same before and after the transition to the B time-saving gaming state.

In addition, the sub CPU 301 displays, for example, on the 7-segment display, the conditions for transition to the B time saving gaming state (for example, the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed before transitioning to the B time saving gaming state). A ceiling counter, etc.) may be displayed, and after the transition to the B time saving gaming state, the conditions for ending the B time saving gaming state (for example, the remaining number of time saving games in the B time saving gaming state, etc.) may be displayed. In this case, when the content of the display effect displayed on the display device 7 changes due to the transition of the gaming state, the sub CPU 301 forcibly changes the display content displayed on the 7-segment display 71 to 0. It is better to make it .

[6. Expansion example]
Below, an example of expansion common to the first pachinko game machine, second pachinko game machine, and third pachinko game machine described above will be explained. In addition, since the symbols given to each component are different depending on the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, in the following explanation, a specific pachinko game machine (especially the third pachinko game machine) Reference numerals are omitted unless the explanation is limited to Pachinko gaming machines.

[6-1. Extended example of variable control]
In the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, it is determined whether or not to set the probability variable flag on according to the type of jackpot. Although the number of probability variations is determined when the probability variation flag is set to ON, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the following embodiment may be used.

For example, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the jackpot, and if it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific area, the jackpot It may be a so-called V probability change machine that sets a probability change flag to ON at the end of the game control process. In addition, the above-mentioned specific area can be set to an open state in which a game ball can pass through or easily, and an open state in which a game ball cannot enter, for example, by operating a movable member in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process. It is possible to displace it into a closed state that is possible or difficult.

In such a V probability changing machine, for example, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 112 to 115, there are cases where the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot and the case where the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the case where the result is a jackpot, we calculate the ease of passage of the game ball to the above-mentioned specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, that is, the probability that the probability change flag is set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process. It may be different.

FIG. 112 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, Diagrams showing cases in which the opening mode of the area is the first opening mode, (B) the case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) the case where the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode It is. Note that the first opening mode and the second opening mode are modes in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area, and the third opening mode is a mode in which it is difficult to pass the game ball into the specific area. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 112, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

Although FIG. 112 shows a mode in which the big winning opening is opened for a short time and then opened for a long time, the opening mode of the big winning opening is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 112(A), in the first opening mode, while the big winning hole is open, the specific area is also open, except for a predetermined time after the long opening of the big winning hole is started. It becomes. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, if no game ball passes through the specific area even though the specific area is in an open state, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 112(B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in the open state from the start of the short opening of the big winning opening until the end of the long opening of the big winning opening. ing. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control process, it is extremely easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is extremely easily set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball passes through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 112(C), in the third opening mode, the big winning hole is opened for a short time and for a predetermined time after the long opening of the big winning hole is started (these two times are both for a short time). ), certain areas are closed. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control, even one game ball among the plurality of game balls that entered the jackpot can pass through a specific area in either the first opening mode or the second opening mode. It is difficult compared to That is, it is difficult for the probability change flag to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through a specific area during execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability change flag will be turned on at the end of the jackpot game control process. Set.

In addition, in FIG. 112, as an example of the opening mode of the specific area in which at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that entered the big winning hole can easily pass through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process. , an example in which two modes, a first open mode and a second open mode, are provided has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which at least one game ball out of the plurality of game balls that entered the big winning hole can easily pass through the specific area is limited to two. There may be only one mode or three or more modes.

In addition, in FIG. 112, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, a specific area is opened in which it is difficult for even one game ball to pass through the specific area among the plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole. As an example, an example in which the third opening mode is provided has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which it is difficult for even one game ball to pass through the specific area among the plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot is 1. The present invention is not limited to the embodiment, and two or more embodiments may be provided.

FIG. 113 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the expanded example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 2 Special symbol selection symbol commands are selected as follows. That is, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the selection symbol command is such that, for example, "z0" is selected with a 40% selection rate, and "z1" is selected with a 10% selection rate. , "z2" is selected with a selection rate of 50%. In addition, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the selection symbol command is such that, for example, "z3" is selected with a 15% selection rate, and "z4" is selected with a 50% selection rate. , "z5" is selected with a selection rate of 35%. In addition, since FIG. 113 is a diagram that only shows an extended example of probability variable control, the "time-saving winning judgment value data" is not included in the winning/losing judgment value data. ” may be included.

FIG. 114 is an example of the jackpot type determination table in the expanded example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 114, the jackpot type (for example, number of rounds, opening mode of a specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the third opening mode jackpot (3R normal jackpot A). Further, when the selected symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot A). Further, when the selected symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot A). Further, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot B). When the selected symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot B). When the selected symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot of the second opening mode (10R probability variable jackpot C). As mentioned above, since the "time saving winning judgment value data" shown in FIG. 113 is not included, the type of "time saving winning" is not shown in FIG. 114, but the winning judgment value When the data includes "time saving determination value data", one of a plurality of types of time saving hits may be determined.

According to FIGS. 112 to 114 above, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined to be 3R normal jackpot A with a selection rate of 40%, and with a selection rate of 10%. With a selection rate of 50%, it is determined to be a 10R normal jackpot A, and with a selection rate of 50%, it is determined to be a 10R probability variable jackpot A. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined to be 10R normal jackpot B with a selection rate of 15%, and 10R probability variable jackpot B with a selection rate of 50%. , 10R probability variable jackpot C is determined with a selection rate of 35. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a jackpot, the probability change flag is set at the end of the jackpot game control process. It is possible to vary the probability of being set to on.

In addition, in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to the mode in which it is opened by time control as shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 115, the opening may be opened in response to the winning of a game ball into the grand prize opening.

FIG. 115 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example (the specific area is the big winning opening timing). An example in which the opening state is controlled based on winning in the mouth), where (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode. It is a figure which shows when it is an open aspect.

As shown in FIG. 115(A), in the first opening mode of another example, after the grand prize opening is opened, the first game ball enters the grand prize opening, and the grand prize opening is counted. When the winning of the first game ball is detected by the switch, the specific area is kept open for a certain period of time based on this detection. Then, when the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole count switch, the big winning hole becomes closed based on this detection. Until then, the specific area will be open. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball passes through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 115(B), in the second opening mode of another example, after the grand prize opening is opened, the first game ball enters the grand prize opening, and the grand prize is won. Only when the winning of the first game ball is detected by the mouth count switch, the specific area is kept open for a certain period of time. Even if the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole count switch, the specific area will be closed until the winning hole is closed. does not become open and remains closed. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control, it is difficult for even one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot to pass through the specific area compared to the first opening mode. That is, it is difficult for the probability change flag to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even in this case, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability will change at the end of the jackpot game control process. Flag is set on.

In addition, in the above, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the probability variation flag is set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process, but the example is not limited to this, for example. , If the game ball passes through a specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process, the time saving flag may be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. Such specifications are particularly effective in the case of a mixed machine of one type and two types, such as the third pachinko game machine.

In addition, in the above, the same opening mode is used as the opening mode of the specific area when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit. Although an example has been described in which the opening mode is provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an opening mode exclusively for the first special symbol or an opening mode exclusively for the second special symbol may be provided.

In addition, in the above, in both cases where the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, the passage of the game ball to the specific area is Although an example has been described in which the difficult third aspect is determined, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the result of the hit determination process for either one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit, at least one It may be configured such that only the mode (first mode or second mode) in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area is determined.

In addition, in the third aspect in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area is set twice during the short opening of the grand prize opening and at a predetermined time after the long opening of the grand prize opening has started. However, if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area may be kept open for a short period of time, but the specific area may be opened only once or multiple times. There may be.

In addition, a specific area may be closed when a predetermined opening time has elapsed, the round in which the specific area is open ends, or when a specified number of big winning openings or a prize is entered in the specific area. It may be controlled to do the following. Furthermore, one or more conditions for closing may be combined.

In addition, the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability variable control is executed (for example, high-probability time-saving gaming state, high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, etc.) have reached a predetermined upper limit number of times (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number of times"). It may also be a so-called limiter machine that is executed alternately and repeatedly until the limit is reached. In such a limiter machine, when the above-mentioned number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as the "loop number") reaches a predetermined limiter number, the gaming state after the jackpot game control process ends becomes a gaming state in which probability variable control is not executed. (for example, normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, etc.). At this time, the loop count is also reset. In addition, in such a gaming machine, the limiter number may be a fixed number of times, or may be determined, for example, according to a symbol random number value of a special symbol, or may be determined by a predetermined lottery. Further, if it is a setting device, the number of limiters may be set differently depending on the setting value.

In addition, although the so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability variable control is executed are alternately and repeatedly executed until the limiter number of times is reached is described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability variable control is executed are described. , and the game state in which the time saving control is executed may be alternately and repeatedly executed until a limiter number of times is reached. This is particularly effective in the case of a machine that mixes one type and two types, such as the third pachinko game machine.

Further, in the case of the above-mentioned V probability changing machine, when the game ball passes through a specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process, the gaming state in which the probability variation control is executed continues. Therefore, in such a V-probability changing machine, if the limiter number is N times, if the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, it is assumed that the predetermined limiter number has been reached. After the jackpot game control process ends, the gaming state is controlled to a gaming state in which probability change control is not executed. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, although the predetermined limiter number of times has not been reached, the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process. Since the ball has not passed, even in such a case, the gaming state after the jackpot game control process is completed will be controlled to a gaming state in which probability change control is not executed. The same applies to gaming machines in which when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the time saving flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

In addition, after the jackpot game control process is completed, the game state is controlled such that the probability change control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are played (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.), and a predetermined It may be a so-called ST machine that shifts to a gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.) in which probability change control is not executed when a special symbol game is played a number of times. In such a gaming machine, the number of special symbol games (hereinafter referred to as "ST number") in which probability variable control is executed may be a fixed number or may be different each time. Further, if it is a setting device, the expected value of the number of STs may be made to differ depending on the setting value. Furthermore, it may be a so-called falling type gaming machine in which, for example, a falling lottery is performed and probability variable control is terminated based on the result of the falling lottery, or for example, when a game ball passes through a specific area during a jackpot gaming state. , it may be a so-called V probability variable type gaming machine in which probability variable control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

[6-2. Expansion example of time-saving control]
In the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", after the jackpot game control process ends, C time-saving Control can be implemented. However, the lottery for the "time saving win" is not limited to being performed in the special symbol hit determination process.

For example, among the random numbers extracted based on the winning of a game ball in the starting hole, a specific random number different from the random number for jackpot determination (for example, random number for special symbol hit determination, special symbol random number etc.) may be used to perform a time-saving win/loss determination process for determining whether or not to execute time-saving control, separately from the special symbol hit determination process. When performing a time-saving win/loss judgment when the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is a small hit or a loss, for example, if the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the starting hole is If it is a numerical value, it can be determined that the time saving control is executed. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, a time-saving win/loss determination process may be performed.

In addition, when performing the time-saving win/loss determination process separately from the special symbol hit determination process, the time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed in the same frame prior to the special symbol hit determination process.

In addition, when performing the above-mentioned time-saving winning/losing judgment process, a random number for time-saving winning/losing judgment that is exclusively used for the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is generated within a predetermined range, and, for example, the time-saving winning/losing judgment is performed based on the winning of a game ball in the starting slot. A random number value may be extracted, and the extracted time-saving win/loss random number may be used to perform the time-saving win/loss determination process.

In addition, it is not essential that the random numerical value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process be extracted based on the fact that a game ball has won in the starting opening, but may be extracted from other areas (for example, general winning opening, small winning opening, etc.). The selection may be made based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize (such as a big prize opening). Furthermore, for example, a dedicated area is provided that triggers the execution of the time-saving win/loss determination process, and a random value to be used in the time-saving win/loss determination process is extracted based on, for example, a game ball passing through this dedicated area. You can do it like this.

By the way, for example, if the time-saving winning/losing judgment process and the special symbol winning/losing judging process are executed at different timings, the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be executed during the variable display of the special symbol, which will derive a stop display mode that indicates a jackpot when it is confirmed to be displayed. The result of this time-saving win/loss determination process may be "time-saving win". In such a case, the main CPU may, for example, forcefully derive a display mode that shows "time saving loss" even though the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win".

In addition, the sub-CPU can visually determine whether the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win" or a "time-saving loss." It is preferable to perform control to display a display effect (such as a display effect) on a display device. In this case, since the results of the time-saving win/loss determination process are displayed on the display device in addition to the results of the special symbol hit determination process, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, instead of displaying an effect image on the display device that makes it possible to visually determine whether the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win" or a "time-saving loss," the time-saving win/loss determination process is possible. The display device is capable of displaying production images that make it impossible or difficult to visually determine whether the processing result is a "time-saving success" or a "time-saving loss" (for example, a fluctuating display of decorative patterns, a display production using characters, etc.) You may also execute controls that are displayed on the screen. In this case, it is possible to maintain interest until the results of the time-saving winning/losing determination process are disclosed.

In addition, in a general pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the sub CPU issues a right-handed instruction, for example, as a game ball firing method that is a normal game mode in the jackpot game state. The effect image shown is controlled to be displayed on a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device). In this regard, in this embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a jackpot, if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving hit", the sub CPU For example, the display device is controlled to display an effect image showing a right-handed instruction as a game ball firing method that is a regular game mode. However, if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the display device will always display an effect image showing the game ball firing method, which is a legal game mode when the time-saving control is executed. However, it may be displayed only when a specific condition is met. For example, if the number of time reductions set based on "per time reduction" is a predetermined number of times or more (for example, two or more times), it will be displayed, but if it is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, less than two times), it will not be displayed. You can do it like this. Note that the above-mentioned specific conditions are not limited to the number of time reductions, but may be any conditions as appropriate.

In addition, if the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed before the special symbol hit determination process is executed, the sub CPU will perform the following operations under the condition of "time-saving win" (i.e., under the situation where the time-saving flag is set to ON) Control may be executed to display on the display device an effect image that can be visually or easily grasped to determine whether or not the special symbol hit determination process is to be executed.

In addition, the type of random number value used in the time-saving win/loss determination process, the extraction timing of the random number value used in the time-saving win/loss determination process, the conditions for determining a time-saving win in the time-saving win/loss determination process, the execution timing of the time-saving win/loss determination process, the time-saving win/loss determination process The game state in which the game can be executed, the mode of the time-saving game state, the number of time-savings set when the time-saving game is won, the start timing of the time-saving game state, the end timing of the time-saving game state, the rewriting timing of the number of time-savings, the probability of winning the time-saving game, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment. Processing related to time saving, such as displaying processing results, is summarized as follows.

(Type of random number used for time-saving win/loss judgment process)
Random values used in the time-saving win/loss determination process include, for example, random values for special symbol hit determination, special symbol determination random values, normal hit determination random values, normal symbol determination random values, special symbol fall determination random values, and The random number may be any one of a plurality of types of random numbers, such as a dedicated random number for time-saving win/loss determination. Further, if the setting machine is used, when changing the settings, the changed setting values may be used to perform the time-saving win/loss determination process.

In addition, the random number value used in the time-saving win/loss determination process is not limited to one type (for example, only the random number value for time-saving win/loss determination), but also multiple types of random numbers (for example, the random number value for special symbol hit determination and the random number value for symbol determination). ) may be used for determination.

(Random value extraction timing used for time-saving win/loss determination process)
The extraction timing of the random number value used for the time-saving win/loss judgment process is when the game ball hits the starting gate, which is the trigger for the special symbol hit determination process, and when the game ball enters the passing gate, which is the trigger for the execution of the normal symbol hit determination process. It may be at any timing, such as when the game ball passes, or when the game ball passes through a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving win/loss determination process. In addition, the extraction of random numbers used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be performed based on winnings in a specific winning hole where prize balls are paid out, or based on winnings in a specific winning hole etc. where prize balls are paid out, or based on winnings in a specific winning gate etc. where prize balls are not paid out. It may also be based on passage to the mouth or the like.

In addition, if the random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment processing is extracted based on the winning (passage) of the game ball to the starting port, the game ball will be able to win regardless of whether the game ball enters the first starting port or the second starting port. Even if there is, the random number value for time-saving win/loss determination may be extracted, or the random number value for time-saving win/loss determination may be extracted only when a game ball enters one of the specific starting slots.

(Conditions for determining a time-saving win in the time-saving win/loss determination process)
When performing time-saving winning/losing judgment processing using the extracted random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment, the extracted random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment is a specific random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment (for example, specific time-saving winning/losing judgment value data). It is preferable to determine that the time is saved at a certain time. In addition, when executing the time-saving win/loss judgment process using the random number value for special symbol hit judgment, the time-saving judgment process is performed when specific loss judgment value data, specific small hit judgment value data, and/or specific jackpot judgment value data It is better to make it so that it is determined as a hit. In addition, when executing the time-saving win/loss determination process using the symbol random number value of the special symbol, it is recommended that a time-saving win is determined when a specific losing symbol, a specific small winning symbol, or a specific jackpot symbol is selected. . In addition, when executing the time-saving win/loss determination process using the special symbol fall determination random value data, it is preferable that the time-saving win is determined when the special symbol fall determination random value data is specific. Furthermore, when executing the time-saving win/loss determination process using the changed setting value, it is preferable that the time-saving win is determined when the setting value is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies to the case where the time-saving win/loss determination process is performed using the random number value for normal hit determination or the random number value for normal symbol determination. Furthermore, the conditions under which it is determined that the time-saving win or loss is achieved in the time-saving win/loss determination process are not limited to the above-mentioned conditions, but can be arbitrarily determined to be various conditions.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win", the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 103) is a hit when the accessory is released. In addition, if the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 21522152 opened it passes through the V winning hole 2155, the execution or non-execution of time saving control and the number of times saving are determined according to the type of opening of the accessory. It is better to do this. Then, even though the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that the accessory has been opened and the V attacker 2152 has opened it, the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control process is executed. If not, the main CPU 2201 may decide whether to execute the time-saving control and the number of times of time-saving based on the "time-saving win" if the result of the time-saving determination process is "time-saving win". However, if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is "time-saving loss" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory release hit", and the game ball enters the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 releases it. does not pass through the V winning hole 2155, time saving control is not executed.

(Execution timing of time-saving win/loss judgment process)
When executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process at the start of the variable display of the special symbol using the random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment obtained based on the winning (passing) of the game ball in the starting hole, the main CPU uses the starting information of the special symbol. Similarly, it is recommended to hold the acquired random number value for time-saving win/loss determination.

Further, the main CPU may execute the time-saving win/loss determination process immediately after extracting the random number value to be used in the time-saving win/loss determination process (for example, before being put on hold), or may suspend the extracted random number value, The time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed before the variable display of the special symbols is started, or the time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols.

(Game state in which time-saving win/loss determination processing can be executed)
The time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed in any of the normal gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and time-saving gaming state, or may be executed in a gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed (for example, normal It may be executed only in a gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, etc.). In addition, conditions for executing the time-saving win/loss determination process, such as executing the time-saving win/loss determination process in any gaming state or executing the time-saving win/loss determination process only in a specific gaming state, may be determined in advance, and the conditions may be set in advance. The time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed when the specified conditions are met.

(Aspects of time-saving control)
The mode of time saving control executed according to the type of jackpot and the mode of time saving control executed according to the result of the time saving win/loss determination process may be the same mode or may be different modes. For example, if a first time-saving flag and a second time-saving flag are prepared, and time-saving control is executed depending on the type of jackpot, the first time-saving flag is set to ON, and based on the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process, the first time-saving flag is set to ON. When the time saving control is executed, the second time saving flag may be set on. In this case, time saving control with different functions may be executed depending on whether the first time saving flag is set to on or the second time saving flag is set to on. For example, when the first time saving flag is set on, both the special figure shortening control and electric support control are performed, and when the second time saving flag is set on, the special figure shortening control and electric support control are performed. It is possible to perform only one of the controls. In addition, when the first time-saving flag is set to on, control is performed to the first time-saving game state in which only the special figure shortening control is performed among the special figure shortening control and electric support control, and the second time-saving flag is turned on. When it is set to , the control may be performed in a second time-saving game state in which only the electric support control among the special figure shortening control and the electric support control is performed. However, which of the multiple time-saving flags to set on is not limited to the above, and may be determined based on the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process, or may be determined based on the time-saving win/loss determination process executed. The decision may be made depending on the gaming state at the time the game is played.

(Number of time reductions set when time reduction is applied)
It is preferable that the number of time reductions set when the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win" is determined according to the gaming state when the time saving win/loss determination process is performed. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, if multiple random numbers for time-saving winning/losing judgment are specified as time-saving winning/losing judgment value data, the number of time saving times to be set may be changed to the gaming state when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed. Alternatively or in addition, the determination may be made in accordance with the extracted random number value for time-saving win/loss determination. For example, if the random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment extracted based on the winning of a game ball in the starting slot is the first time-saving winning judgment value data, the number of time-savings is determined to be "100", and the second time-saving In the case of hit determination value data, this corresponds to determining the number of time saving times to be "50".

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed even in a gaming state where the time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving winning/losing". ”, the main CPU may newly set the number of time savings determined based on the “time saving per unit” in place of the remaining number of time savings (that is, reset the remaining number of time savings). In this case, the degree of profit for the player changes depending on whether the newly set number of time savers is greater or less than the remaining number of time savers, broadening the range of game play, and adding interest to the time saver game state when the time saver flag is on. This makes it possible to increase interest.

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed even in a gaming state where the time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving winning/losing". ”, the main CPU may add the number of time reductions determined based on the “per time reduction” to the remaining number of time reductions. In this case, since the remaining number of time-savings will not become less than the current number of remaining time-savings, the player can play the game with peace of mind in the gaming state where the time-saving control is executed.

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed even in a gaming state where the time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving winning/losing". ”, the main CPU performs the process of newly setting the number of time reductions determined based on the “time reduction per unit” as the remaining number of time reductions, and the process of setting the number of time reductions determined based on the “percentage of time reduction” as the remaining number of time reductions. One of the processes for adding to the number of times may be predetermined, and the number of time saving times may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine in which time-saving control is executed with different functions depending on whether the first time-saving flag is set to on or the second time-saving flag is set to on, the time-saving win/loss determination process If the result is "per time saving", the main CPU controls whether the time saving control being executed and the time saving control executed based on "per time saving" are the same function's time saving control or the time saving control of different functions. The process for setting the number of time reductions may be different depending on whether it is control or not. For example, if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "per-time saving" are time-saving controls with the same function, the number of time-savings determined based on the "per-time saving" is set as the remaining number of time-savings. If the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "per-time saving" are time-saving controls of different functions, the time-saving control being executed is based on the "per-time saving" instead of the remaining number of time-savings being executed. The determined number of time reductions may be newly set (that is, the remaining number of time reductions may be reset). In addition, if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving hit" are time-saving controls of different functions, the time-saving control based on the "time-saving hit" will be applied after the remaining number of running time savings has been exhausted. Control may also be executed.

In addition, when setting the number of time savings based on the fact that the result of the time saving win/fail determination process is "time saving win", the number of time saving times may be set to "0". That is, when the number of time savings to be set is determined to be "0", the time saving flag is set on even though the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win". Furthermore, if the result of the time saving win/fail judgment process performed during the execution of the time saving control is "time saving win" and the number of time saving times is set to "0", the running time saving control ends.

(Start timing of time saving control)
The start timing of the time saving control that is executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is a "time saving win" can be the end of the special symbol game. For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, time saving control can be started based on the elapse of the special symbol determination time in which the special symbol is determined. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small win, time saving control can be started based on the end of the small win game control process. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, time saving control can be started based on the end of the jackpot game control process.

The start timing of the time-saving control that is executed based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process being "time-saving winning" is the end of the special symbol game, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is changed to the special symbol winning/losing judgment process in the same frame. If it is done in advance, even if the result of the time-saving win/loss judgment process is a "time-saving win", if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is a jackpot, the "time-saving win" is invalidated (based on the "time-saving win"). It is preferable to set the time saving flag to on based on the winning selection symbol command (the time saving flag may not be set to on depending on the type of jackpot).

Further, the start timing of the time saving control that is executed based on the result of the time saving win/loss determination process being a "time saving win" is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, if the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed before the special symbol winning/losing judgment process in the same frame, the time-saving control may be started immediately (before the special symbol winning/losing judgment process is performed) based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process. good. In this case, the gaming state (i.e., whether time-saving control is executed or not) may be different between when the random number value used for the time-saving win/loss determination process is extracted and when the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed, which can increase interest. becomes.

Furthermore, the start timing of the time-saving control that is executed based on the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process being a "time-saving win" may be set after a predetermined number of games have been played. In this case, after the result of the time saving win/loss determination process becomes "time saving win", until the time saving control is started, the sub CPU can perform an incitement effect to determine whether or not the time saving control will start. It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, if the jackpot game control is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process being a jackpot (a jackpot in which time-saving control is executed), this jackpot game control is terminated. Based on this, the time saving control based on the jackpot may be started. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory (the opening of the accessory for which time-saving control is executed) and the V attacker 2152 releases the game ball, the passage of the game ball to the V prize opening 2155 is Even when the jackpot game control is executed due to the detection, it is preferable that the time saving control is started based on the end of the jackpot game control. In addition, even if the V attacker 2152 opens based on the fact that the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is "time-saving win" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 103) is that the accessory is released. Regardless, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control is not executed, the main CPU executes the time saving based on the "time saving win" based on the opening/closing winning opening 2151 being closed. It is a good idea to start controlling.

(Timing of end of time-saving gaming state)
The timing at which the time-saving gaming state ends is, for example, ``when the variable display of special symbols is executed for the set number of time-savings in the gaming state where the time-saving control is executed'', or ``when the time-saving control is executed in the gaming state where the special symbol is displayed variably for the set number of times''. , "When the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process" or "When the time-saving number is set to 0 even though the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a time-saving hit", etc. It is.

In addition, in the gaming state where the time saving control is executed, if the small winning game control process is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the time saving control will continue to be executed even after the small winning game control process ends. be done.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, the opening/closing prize opening 2151 is opened because the stop symbol mode indicating that the special symbol hit determination process is a hit of the opening of the accessory object is derived during execution of the time saving control. However, if the passing of the game ball to the V winning hole 2155 is not detected when the V attacker 2152 opens and the jackpot game control process is not started, the main CPU 2201 will continue to operate even after the opening/closing winning hole 2151 is closed. Continuously execute time saving control.

(Time saving number of rewrites)
When the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed in a gaming state where time-saving control is executed (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving win", the main CPU The number of time reductions may be rewritten, or the number of time reductions may not be rewritten (that is, the time reduction control may be executed until the number of time reductions in the currently executed time reduction control is exhausted).

In addition, when rewriting the number of time reductions, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of time reductions determined based on "per time reduction" at the time when the number of time reductions in the time reduction control being executed is exhausted, It may be set when executing the special symbol hit judgment process, it may be set when the variable display of the special symbol starts or stops, it may be set during the time saving win/loss judgment process, or it may be set at various timings. can do. In addition, when setting at the time of time saving win/fail judgment process, the number of time saving times determined based on "time saving win" will be overwritten with the number of time saving times in the time saving control being executed. Alternatively, either one of "rewrite the number of time reductions" and "add to the previous number of time reductions" may be determined in advance, and the number of time reductions may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

(Probability of time saving)
When performing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting opening or the second starting opening, The time-saving win/loss determination process (hereinafter referred to as the "second time-saving win/loss determination process") is performed based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting slot. may be different. For example, the time-saving winning probability when the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed may be higher than the winning-time winning probability when the first time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed, or The probability of winning in time saving when the first time saving winning/losing determination process is performed may be higher than the probability of winning in time saving when the first time saving winning/losing determination process is performed and the second time saving winning/losing determination process The time saving probability may be set to be the same or almost the same in the case where the above is performed.

(Result display of time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
A time-saving win/loss determination result display section that displays the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process (whether the time-saving success or failure), and/or the number of time-saving decisions determined based on the result of the time-saving win/fail determination process (time-saving win). A winning time reduction number display unit may be provided to display the number of shortened winning times. It is preferable that the time-saving winning/losing determination result display section and/or the winning time-saving number display section be provided in an LED display group that includes a special symbol display section, etc., and controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub-CPU may display, on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, the result of the time-saving determination process and/or the number of time-savings determined based on the time-saving win. good.

(interval)
If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss and the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU determines the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game, The interval time may be longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss and the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving loss". In addition, since the variable display of the decorative pattern is synchronized with the variable display of the special pattern, in this case, the sub-CPU displays a performance image indicating "time saving win" until the above-mentioned interval time elapses, for example, on the liquid crystal display. It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit when an accessory is released and the jackpot game control process is not executed based on the hit when the accessory is released, the main CPU 2201 When the result of the judgment process is "Time-saving win", the interval time after the operation for opening the accessory is made longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the time-saving win/loss judgment process is "Time-saving loss". It may be the same or approximately the same time.

[6-3. Expansion example related to management of gaming media]
The first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine described in this specification play games using game media, and receive rewards (for example, prizes) based on the results of the games. The present invention can be applied to all types of gaming machines in which balls, prize balls, prize data, etc.) are awarded. In other words, if the game is played by firing or inserting game media (e.g., game balls, medals, etc.) by the physical actions of the player, and the game media is paid out based on the result of the game, First, the main control circuit itself may electromagnetically manage the game media owned by the player and enable games played by circulating enclosed game balls or games played without medals. Furthermore, the device that electromagnetically manages the game media owned by the player may be a game media management device that is attached to (connected to) the main control circuit and manages the game media.

In the case of a gaming machine that plays games by circulating enclosed gaming balls, the gaming balls as gaming media are configured so that they can be played without being discharged to the outside, so when a prize is won, the prize balls are paid out. Instead, prize ball data as game media is provided. In this specification, the term "payout game value" includes both prize balls and prize ball data. For example, if a prize is entered into a winning slot with a number of prize balls of 15, if the game machine is an enclosed type game machine, prize ball data with a value corresponding to the 15 prize balls will be given. Furthermore, the gaming value is not necessarily limited to the prize ball or prize ball data, but may be anything that corresponds to the prize ball or prize ball data.

When managed by a gaming media management device connected to the main control circuit, the gaming media management device is a device that has ROM and RWM (or RAM) and is installed in the gaming machine, and is connected to an external device (not shown). It is connected to the game media handling device and the two-way communication function via a predetermined interface, and provides the necessary game media when the player performs the game media lending operation (i.e., when the player inserts the game media). or the payout operation of game media in the event that a win is won (the winning combination is established) related to the payout of game media (i.e., payout of game media to the player on the line, and payout of the necessary game media to the player) It may be possible to perform an operation to electromagnetically record game media to be used in a game. In addition, the gaming media management device not only manages the actual number of gaming media, but also displays the number of owned gaming media on the front of the pachinko gaming machine based on the management result of the number of gaming media. A media number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on this owned game media number display device may be managed. In other words, the game media management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that can be used by a player in a game using an electromagnetic method.

In addition, in this case, the game media management device has the ability to allow the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to the external game media handling device, and In addition to being operated directly by a person, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the player and an external game media handling device. In some cases, it is desirable to have the ability to allow a player to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media except through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is equipped with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player, and the gaming media handling device has an input slot for valuables such as banknotes, and a recording medium. (For example, an IC card) insertion slot, a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal, various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the side of the gaming media handling device. (both not shown).

The flow of the game at that time is, for example, when the player deposits valuable value into the gaming media handling device using one of the methods, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of one of the lending operation means described above. Then, the amount of game media corresponding to the value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. The player then plays the game and repeats the above operations if more game media are required. After that, as a result of the game, a predetermined number of game media are acquired, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game media management device to the game media handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game The medium handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. When the game media management device transmits the number of game media, it clears the number of game media stored in itself. The player takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange it for prizes, or moves the game machine to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media are sent to the game media handling device, but the game machine or game media handling device only transmits the number of game media desired by the player, and the game media owned by the player is transmitted. It is also possible to divide and process. Furthermore, instead of just ejecting the recording medium, cash or cash equivalent may be ejected, or it may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game media handling device may be configured to be able to insert a member recording medium of a gaming parlor, and to store the membership recording medium in the member recording medium so that it can be played again at a later date.

Further, in the gaming machine or the gaming media handling device, by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown), a locking operation for locking data communication of gaming media or valuable value can be executed with respect to the gaming media handling device or the gaming media management device. Good too. In this case, information that only the player can know, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be recorded using an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

In addition, although the above describes the case where the game media management device is applied to a pachinko game machine, the game media management device can also be applied to a pachislot machine, a slot machine that uses game balls, and an enclosed game machine. A player's gaming media can also be managed.

In this way, by providing the above-mentioned game media management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced compared to the case where game media are physically used in the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can players be prevented from coming into direct contact with gaming media, the gaming environment can be improved, noise can be reduced, and the power consumption of gaming machines can also be reduced by reducing the number of parts. It also happens. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game media and the game media input and payout ports. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, communication cables are used to transmit data regarding increases and decreases in gaming media due to consumption, lending, and payout of gaming media to enclosed gaming machines that are configured to allow gaming without the gaming media being ejected to the outside. When the present invention is applied to a gaming system having a gaming media management device connected to the gaming media management device so as to be able to transmit and receive optical signals via the gaming media management device, the gaming system may be configured as follows.

Below, an outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be explained. In the enclosed game machine, the firing device is located above the game area and fires game balls as game media from above into the game area. When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit, and the ball feed pestle pushes out the waiting game ball toward the launch pad. This moves the game ball to the launch pad. Further, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects the game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. Since the game ball is thus configured to be launched from above as a game medium into the game area, so-called return balls (foul balls) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. The game balls ejected from the game area after rolling in the game area are polished by a ball polishing device. The game balls polished by the ball polishing device are transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the firing device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, but are configured so that a certain number (for example, 50) of game balls circulate through a series of paths in the game machine. Furthermore, instead of providing a ball polishing device, a discharge mechanism for discharging game balls to the outside of the game machine and a taking-in mechanism for taking the game balls polished outside the game machine into the inside of the game balls are provided. Good too. In this case, the taking-in mechanism may be provided with a gutter exclusively for taking in, or may be configured to take in from a winning opening provided in the gaming area.

In an enclosed type game machine, the game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine, so an upper tray or a lower tray for temporarily holding the game balls is not provided. In an enclosed game machine, the game balls are not discharged to the outside, so the game balls are not actually in the hands of the player, and the number of game balls does not actually increase or decrease as a result of playing a game. In an enclosed game machine, a player starts playing after acquiring balls lent from a game media management device. Here, obtaining a ball means that the player obtains game media in terms of data management. Then, by firing the game balls from the firing device, the balls held are consumed, and the number of balls held decreases. In addition, when the game balls pass through each winning hole provided in the gaming area, the number of balls is paid out in accordance with the conditions set according to the winning hole, and the number of balls held increases. Furthermore, the number of balls held increases by lending from the game media management device. Furthermore, for example, when a game ends, all of the game value (i.e., the balls held) stored in the enclosed gaming machine may be liquidated, or a portion of the balls held may be sent to the gaming media management device. When all or part of the balls held are integrated into the gaming value managed by the gaming media management device, the gaming value stored in the enclosed gaming machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls held decreases. . Furthermore, although there is no concept of foul balls in gaming machines where the game ball is shot from above the playing area, foul balls do occur when the game ball is shot from below like in conventional gaming machines. sell. Therefore, in the case of a game machine in which game balls are shot from below, the number of balls held increases or decreases depending on whether foul balls occur or not. Note that "consumption, lending, and payout of game media" indicates that the balls held are consumed, loaned, and paid out. Further, "increase/decrease in game media" indicates an increase/decrease in the number of balls held due to consumption, lending, and payout. Furthermore, "data regarding increases and decreases in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data regarding the decrease in the number of balls held due to game balls being fired and the increase in the number of balls held due to lending and payout.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect when the game ball passes through each winning hole. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning hole, the number of game balls paid out due to this is added to the number of balls held. Furthermore, when a game ball is fired, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game media management device by the player's operation. Further, the above liquid crystal display device is located at the top of the gaming machine, and accepts requests for converting the gaming value managed by the gaming media management device into balls held (renting balls) and counting balls held (returning). Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game media management device, and the payout control circuit is instructed to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held to the game media management device. Here, "gaming value" refers to money/banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into balls by the gaming media management device. In this second embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. Further, the counted balls can be used for exchanging prizes, etc. at a game hall where the game system is installed.

Furthermore, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power source. As a result, even if the power is turned off at night, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, by using this backup power source, for example, the door opening sensor may continue to detect the opening of the door frame. This can also prevent fraudulent acts at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

Note that enclosed type gaming machines only need to be constructed so that the players cannot touch the game balls; for example, a type that circulates the game balls only in the machine without circulating them in an island facility. , and those in which the game balls circulate through island equipment but the players cannot touch the game balls are also included in the enclosed type game machines.

The gaming media management device has a gaming machine connection board. The game media management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signals) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The transmitted and received data includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine. This is information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when the transmission source transmits a transmission signal with one of the gaming machine and the gaming media management device as the transmission source and the other as the transmission destination, the transmission destination that received the transmission signal receives the same signal as the transmission signal. A confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal and the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, by comparing the confirmation signal sent from the destination with the transmission signal at the transmission source and determining whether they are the same, the signal transmitted from the transmission source can be prevented from being tampered with. You can confirm that the message is being sent to the sender. Thereby, fraudulent acts such as tampering with transmission/reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device can be suppressed.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation section that modulates a signal, and the transmission source transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section. It is also possible to include a demodulation section that performs demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission and reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device were read, it would be difficult to decipher the signals, and the transmission and reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device would be difficult to decipher. Fraudulent acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

In addition, in the gaming system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the transmission destination sends an approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may also be sent to the sender.

By comparing the transmitted signal and the confirmation signal, it is possible to not only confirm that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received, but also to confirm that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received based on the authorization signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent acts. Also, instead of directly communicating and connecting the main control circuit and the gaming media management device, a frame control circuit is provided between the main control circuit and the gaming media management device, and the main control circuit is connected via the frame control circuit. It may also be configured to be communicatively connected to a game media management device. Further, a firing control circuit may be provided separately from the main control circuit, and a frame control circuit may be provided between the firing control circuit and the game medium management device. In this case, error control of the main control circuit and the firing control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU stops at a symbol combination in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol indicate a jackpot symbol. Take steps to ensure that you do not have to worry about it.

To be more specific, while performing both variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol, if one special symbol stops at a symbol combination indicating a jackpot symbol, the main CPU displays the other special symbol. The special symbols are forcibly stopped at a symbol combination indicating a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one special symbol stops at a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol, the state shifts from the general gaming state to the jackpot gaming state as described above, but in this jackpot gaming state, the starting conditions for the first special symbol and the starting condition for the second special symbol are set. None of the conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

In addition, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the general game Based on the transition from the small winning gaming state to the small winning gaming state (stopping at the symbol combination indicating the small winning symbol), the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted, and the transition from the small winning gaming state to the general gaming state ( Based on the termination of the small winning game, the process of restarting the measurement of the variation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a small winning symbol, the state shifts from the general gaming state to the small winning gaming state as described above, but in this small winning gaming state, the starting conditions of the first special symbol and the second special None of the symbol starting conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, when both the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display are performed, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small hit symbol, the main CPU As for the other special symbol, the special symbol consisting of the LED group is displayed in a variable manner in the same manner as during the variable display, but the measurement of the variable time is interrupted as described above.

[6-4. Status display indicating that it is in a time-saving gaming state]
When the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, or the time-saving game state C is controlled, a time-saving state display section may be provided to indicate the time-saving game state. The time-saving state display section is preferably provided in an LED display group that includes a special symbol display section and the like, and is controlled by the main CPU.

In addition, when providing a time-saving state display section indicating that the time-saving gaming state is in effect, a time-saving state display section A indicating that the time-saving gaming state is in effect; A time saving state display section C indicating that the time saving game state is in effect may be provided. In this case, if the main CPU is in the A time-saving gaming state, the main CPU controls the A-time saving state display section so that a specific aspect that allows the user to visually understand that the A-time saving gaming state is in the A-time saving gaming state, and if it is in the B-time saving gaming state, , B controls the time-saving state display section so that a specific aspect that allows the user to visually identify that the person is in the time-saving gaming state is displayed; It is preferable to control the C time saving state display section so that the mode is displayed. Furthermore, when a plurality of time-saving gaming states are being executed in an overlapping manner, the main CPU may display all of the time-saving state display sections that are being executed in an overlapping manner.

Furthermore, without providing the A time saving state display section, the B time saving state display section, and the C time saving state display section, for example, a common time saving state display section may be used for the time saving game states having the same time saving performance. For example, if the time-saving performance of the B-time-saving gaming state and the time-saving performance of the C-time-saving gaming state are the same, and these time-saving performances are different from the time-saving performance of the A-time-saving gaming state, A, which represents the A time-saving gaming state. It is preferable that a time saving state display section and a BC common time saving state display section indicating the B time saving gaming state or the C working time saving gaming state are provided and controlled by the main CPU.

In addition, the sub-CPU displays, for example, on the display area of a liquid crystal display device, the fact that it is in a time-saving gaming state, and if it is in a time-saving gaming state, the type of time-saving gaming state, and/or the number of time-savings (including the remaining number of time-savings). You may also do so.

[6-5. Outer end signal regarding time-saving gaming state]
When the main CPU is controlled to be in the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C time saving gaming state, the main CPU transmits a time saving signal representing the time saving gaming state from the external terminal board 4184 to an external device (for example, an island computer). In this case, a time-saving signal that does not distinguish the type of time-saving gaming state may be transmitted, or a signal indicating which time-saving gaming state is being controlled, that is, a signal indicating which time-saving gaming state is being controlled. It may be transmitted by distinguishing the types. When transmitting a time-saving signal by distinguishing between the types of time-saving gaming states, the main CPU, for example, transmits the A-time-saving signal if it is in the A-time-saving gaming state, and transmits the B-time-saving signal if it is in the B-time-saving gaming state. If the game is in the C time saving game state, a C time saving signal is sent. In addition, when a plurality of time-saving game states are being executed one after the other, the main CPU is preferably configured to transmit a plurality of time-saving signals that are being executed.

Furthermore, for time-saving game states with the same time-saving performance, a common time-saving signal may be transmitted. For example, if the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state and the time saving performance of the C time saving gaming state are the same, and these time saving performances are different from the time saving performance of the A time saving gaming state, the main CPU is in the A time saving gaming state. In this case, it is preferable to transmit the A time-saving signal, and in the case of the B-time-saving gaming state or the C-time-saving gaming state, to transmit the BC common time-saving signal.

[5-6. Interval in case of “time saving”]
If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU will use the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game to determine if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss. The interval time may be longer than the above interval time in some cases. In addition, since the variable display of the decorative symbols is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbols, in this case, the sub CPU displays, for example, an effect image indicating "time saving win" on the LCD until the above-mentioned interval time elapses. It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the main CPU determines the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game. It may be longer than the case where the result of the hit determination process is a hit in the opening of the accessory object and the jackpot game control processing is not executed based on the opening of the accessory object, or it may be the same or approximately the same time.

[7. Additional notes]
[7-1. Appendix 1]
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known in which symbols are displayed variably when a predetermined condition is met, and when a special result is derived, the game machine is controlled to a special gaming state advantageous to the player.

As this type of gaming machine, in addition to the special gaming state that is controlled when a special result is derived, a variable display of a specified number of times is performed in the high probability time reduction state even if no special result is derived. A gaming machine that is configured to shift to a high probability non-time saving state has been disclosed (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-174800).

The gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-174800 has a new gaming feature in which a high probability time reduction state is shifted to a high probability non-time reduction state to create a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. However, in recent years, there has been a desire for gaming machines with even newer gaming features.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine with new gaming properties.

In this regard, the pachinko gaming machine of appendix 1 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A special symbol lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs special symbol variable display start processing (S93)) that performs a special symbol lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Special symbol control means (for example, main CPU 201 that performs special symbol variable display end processing (S94)) that performs variable display of special symbols in a predetermined display area and controls so that the result of the special symbol lottery is derived;
A gaming state control means capable of controlling the gaming state (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs special symbol game end setting processing (S282), etc.);
Equipped with
The gaming state control means includes:
a normal gaming state, which is a period during which the special symbols can be displayed variably;
a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is a period in which the variable display of the special symbols is not performed and is more advantageous than the normal gaming state;
It is a period during which the special symbols can be displayed variably, and can be controlled to any one of a plurality of gaming states including a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state,
The special symbol control means is
a special stop mode (for example, a jackpot display mode) indicating that the special gaming state is to be entered;
a loss stop mode (for example, a loss display mode) indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss;
The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to derive any one of a plurality of stop modes including a specific stop mode (for example, a time saving per display mode) indicating that the specific gaming state is to be entered.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, a specific gaming state is provided separately from the special gaming state as a gaming state advantageous to the player during a period in which a variable display of special symbols can be performed, and a specific stopping mode is derived. It becomes possible to provide new gaming features that have never been seen before, such as shifting to a specific gaming state.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The gaming state control means includes:
When the special stop mode is derived, it is possible to transition to the special gaming state, and after the end of the special gaming state, it is possible to transition to the specific gaming state,
When the specific stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state without shifting to the special gaming state.

According to the gaming machine described in (2) above, when a specific stopping mode is derived, the system shifts to the specific gaming state without shifting to the special gaming state. It becomes possible to provide gameplay.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The gaming state control means includes:
When the loss stop mode is derived, a game state continuation control means that can continue the game state when the loss stop mode was derived (for example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the special symbol A main CPU 201) that does not set or reset either the probability change flag or the time saving flag in the game end process;
Even when the loss stop mode is derived, if a special condition is satisfied (for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value), the game state is not continued by the game state continuation control means. , a specific gaming state transition control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs B time saving control mode determination processing) capable of shifting to the specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine described in (3) above, even if a loss stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to a specific gaming state if a predetermined condition is satisfied, which provides a new and unprecedented gaming feature. becomes possible. Incidentally, even if the loss stop mode is derived, the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied corresponds to, for example, when a specific special game state among a plurality of types of special game states ends.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
The specific stop mode includes:
A first specific stop mode (for example, the mode of the selection symbol command "z0"),
At least a second specific stop mode (for example, a mode of selection symbol command "z1") different from the first specific stop mode is included,
The gaming state control means includes:
It is characterized in that it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state with different degrees of advantage (for example, the number of time savings) depending on when the first specific stopping mode is derived and when the second specific stopping mode is derived. do.

According to the gaming machine described in (4) above, the range of gameplay can be expanded by providing variations, and it is possible to provide interesting gameplay while suppressing gambling elements.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (2) to (4) above,
A specific area provided in the gaming area (for example, the passing gate 126) and a normal symbol lottery means (for example, variable display start processing of normal symbols (S293 ), a main CPU 201) that performs
A normal symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a normal symbol variable display end process (S294)) that performs variable display of the normal symbol in a predetermined display area and controls the result of the normal symbol lottery to be derived; ,
When a normal symbol per stop mode indicating a normal symbol win is derived by the normal symbol control means, a special symbol lottery facilitating means (for example, a normal symbol lottery) that facilitates the establishment of the predetermined condition that triggers the execution of the special symbol lottery A main CPU 201) that performs electric accessories release processing (S296);
A normal symbol probability control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the time saving setting process (S238)) that can change the normal symbol probability from which the normal symbol hit is derived;
Furthermore,
The normal symbol probability control means is
When the specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state) is entered as a result of the specific stopping mode being derived, the normal symbol probability is not changed (for example, the normal symbol probability is changed by referring to the normal symbol hit determination table). Main CPU 201) that performs symbol hit determination processing;
When the special stopping mode is derived and the special gaming state is transferred to the specific gaming state (for example, A time saving gaming state) after the special gaming state ends, the normal symbol probability can be changed (for example, when the normal symbol Main CPU 201 that performs hit determination processing for normal symbols by referring to the hit determination table
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (5) above, the transition is made to the specific gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state) even after the special gaming state ends, and the transition to the specific gaming state is made when the specific stopping mode is derived. If so, the normal symbol probability is not changed, and if the special gaming state is transitioned to a specific gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, the normal symbol probability is changed. In this way, by providing a plurality of specific game states with different transition triggers and making it possible to change the normal symbol probability depending on the transition trigger, it is possible to widen the range of gameplay and provide interesting gameplay. becomes possible.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above,
The gaming state control means includes:
When the special stopping mode is derived, after the special gaming state ends, it is possible to shift to a high-precision gaming state in which the special stopping mode is more likely to be derived compared to the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state,
The special symbol control means is
In the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state (for example, when S221 is YES), at least the special stopping mode and the specific stopping mode can be derived,
In the high certainty gaming state (for example, when the determination is NO in S221), at least the special stopping mode can be derived.

According to the gaming machine described in (6) above, it is possible to derive both the special stopping mode and the specific stopping mode in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state in which the player's interest tends to decrease. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the gaming state.

In addition, in a high-precision gaming state, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a result corresponding to a specific stopping mode (for example, a time-saving win), a mode that derives the specific stopping mode but does not shift to the specific gaming state and a special symbol. A mode in which the specific stop mode is not derived even if the result of the lottery is a result corresponding to a specific stop mode, and a mode in which the special symbol lottery is performed so that the result corresponding to the specific stop mode is not included in the result of the special symbol lottery in the first place. It may be either.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above,
The special symbols include a first special symbol and a second special symbol, and the predetermined conditions include a first condition and a second condition,
The special symbol lottery means is
a first special symbol lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S81 and S82) that performs a first special symbol lottery based on the establishment of the first condition;
and a second special symbol lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S78 and S79) that performs a second special symbol lottery based on the establishment of the second condition,
The special symbol control means is
When the first special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol is variably displayed, and when the second special symbol lottery is performed, the second special symbol is variably displayed;
The invention is characterized in that the derivation ratio of the specific stopping mode can be different depending on whether the first special symbol is variably displayed or when the second special symbol is variably displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (7) above, the derivation ratio of the specific stop mode may be different depending on whether the first special symbol is variably displayed or the second special symbol is variably displayed, so that the gameplay is improved. It is possible to expand the range and provide interesting gameplay.

(8) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (7) above,
The gaming state control means includes:
When the gaming state being controlled is the normal gaming state, when the specific stopping mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state in a mode corresponding to the specific stopping mode (for example, the process of S244 can be executed) On the other hand,
When the gaming state being controlled is the specific gaming state, even if the specific stopping mode is derived, the specific gaming state being controlled is not controlled to the specific gaming state in a mode corresponding to the specific stopping mode. It is characterized in that the mode depending on the state can be continued (for example, the process of S243 can be executed).

According to the gaming machine of (8) above, when a specific stopping mode is derived while being controlled to a specific gaming state, the mode corresponding to the specific gaming state being controlled continues. In other words, even if a specific stopping mode is derived in a specific gaming state, it does not become invalid, but for the player, it can provide the same effect as if the specific gaming state being controlled is extended, increasing the interest. It becomes possible to increase the

(9) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (8) above,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the game machine includes a random number acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S392 or S399) that acquires a plurality of types of random numbers (for example, jackpot determination random numbers and symbol random numbers),
The special symbol lottery means is
The stop mode derived by the special symbol control means uses a specific random number (for example, a random number for jackpot determination) among the plurality of types of random numbers, and the stop mode is different from the special stop mode, the loss stop mode, and the specific stop mode. It is possible to determine which of a plurality of stopping modes including
The type of the special stopping mode or the type of the specific stopping mode can be determined by using a predetermined random number (for example, a symbol random number) different from the specific random number (for example, a jackpot determination random number) among the plurality of types of random numbers. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (9) above, a specific random number (e.g. random number for jackpot determination) is used to determine the derived stop mode, that is, a lottery result, and a predetermined random number different from the specific random number (e.g. pattern random number ) can be used to determine the type of special stop mode or the type of specific stop mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the security compared to the case where not only the derived stop mode but also the types of special stop mode and specific stop mode are determined using only specific random numbers.

(10) In the gaming machine described in any one of (2) to (9) above,
The gaming state control means includes:
When the special stop mode is derived and the state shifts to the specific gaming state (e.g. A time-saving gaming state), the specific stopping mode is derived and the state shifts to the specific gaming state (e.g. C time-saving gaming state). The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to control the expected value of the period during which the specific gaming state is controlled to be smaller than that in the case of transition.

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, compared to the case where the transition to the specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state) is made due to the specific stopping mode being derived, the specific gaming state is It is possible to give an advantage when shifting to a state (for example, A time-saving gaming state). By doing so, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest without unnecessarily increasing the gambling nature in the normal gaming state or the specific gaming state.

(11) In the gaming machine described in any one of (2) to (9) above,
The gaming state control means includes:
When the special stop mode is derived and the state shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, the A time-saving gaming state), the specific stopping mode is derived and the state shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, the C time-saving gaming state). The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to control the expected value of the period during which the specific gaming state is controlled to be larger than that in the case of transition.

According to the gaming machine of (11) above, compared to the case where the transition to the specific gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state) is made due to the derivation of the special stopping aspect, the specific gaming state is It is possible to give an advantage when shifting to a state (for example, C time-saving gaming state). In such a case, it is possible to enhance the gameplay in the normal game state and the specific game state, where interest tends to decrease, and it becomes possible to increase the interest.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of appendix 1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new gameplay.

[7-2. Appendix 2]
The pachinko gaming machine described in Appendix 2 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
When the game ball launched toward the game area passes through the special symbol starting area (for example, the starting port switch 121, 141A, 141B), a random number acquisition means (for example, the process of S392 or S399) that acquires a random number related to the special symbol is activated. A main CPU 201) that performs
A special symbol lottery means (for example, a special symbol variable display start process (S93)) capable of performing a special symbol lottery including a special result and a specific result in the lottery result using the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means main CPU 201) that performs
A symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs special symbol variable display end processing (S94)) that performs variable display of special symbols and controls so that the result of the special symbol lottery is derived;
When the special symbol is variablely displayed and a special stop mode indicating the special result (e.g. jackpot display mode) is derived, a special gaming state (e.g. jackpot game state) in which the special symbol is not variably displayed is derived. ) (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S145),
a gaming state control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs special symbol management processing) capable of controlling a gaming state in which the special symbols are variably displayed;
Equipped with
The gaming state control means includes:
Normal gaming state and
A specific gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state, B time-saving gaming state, C time-saving gaming state) can be controlled to any one of a plurality of gaming states,
When the result of the special symbol lottery is the specific result (for example, the jackpot of the selected symbol commands "0" to "2" in FIG. 120), the result of the special symbol lottery is the special result regarding the control of the specific gaming state. It is characterized in that it is configured to be more advantageous than the result (for example, the jackpot of the selected symbol command "4" in FIG. 120).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific result, it is advantageous in terms of control of the specific gaming state compared to the case where the result of the special symbol lottery is a special result. It is possible to make the game state more interesting, and it is possible to provide new and unprecedented gameplay.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The special symbol lottery means is
When the specific stop mode (for example, the display mode for each time-saver) is derived by the symbol control means and the specific game state (for example, the C-time save game state) is controlled, the end condition of the specific game state is set as described above. It is characterized in that it can be determined based on random numbers obtained by a random number obtaining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the specific stopping mode is derived and the specific gaming state is controlled, the ending condition of the specific gaming state is determined based on the value of the obtained random number. The end timing of a state may differ each time. By doing so, it is possible to provide a wide range of gameplay, and it is possible to provide interesting gameplay.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
A special display effect indicating that the special stopping mode may be derived (e.g., jackpot type reach), and a specific display effect indicating that the specific stopping mode may be derived (e.g., time-saving hit). The present invention is characterized in that it further includes a suggestion effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) capable of performing any one of a plurality of display effects including (system reach).

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, not only a special display effect indicating that a special stop mode may be derived, but also a specific display effect indicating that a specific stop mode may be derived. Since it can be displayed, it becomes possible to provide new gameplay that has never existed before.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
The probability that the special stop mode is derived can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities (for example, setting values in six stages from setting 1 to setting 6), and the probability corresponding to the set setting value. A gaming machine in which the special symbol lottery is performed so that the special stop mode is derived,
The special symbol lottery means is
When the special symbol lottery is set to one of the plurality of setting values (for example, setting 1) and when it is set to another setting value (for example, setting 6), the above-mentioned It is characterized in that the derivation probabilities of the special stop modes are different, while the derivation probabilities of the specific stop modes are the same.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, by varying the derivation probability of the special stop mode depending on the setting value and making the derivation probability of the specific stop mode the same, the case where the set value is low. Even so, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above,
Although the probability of deriving the specific stop mode is the same when it is set to one of the plurality of set values and when it is set to another set value, the specific stop mode is not derived. It is possible to vary the end conditions of the specific gaming state that is controlled when the game is played (for example, the number of time reductions is 50 times in the case of setting 1, and 100 times in the case of setting 6).
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (5) above, the probability of transitioning to a specific gaming state is the same whether it is set to one setting value or another setting value, thereby increasing the interest. It is possible to make it more interesting by varying the ending conditions while suppressing the decline.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above,
The special symbol lottery means is
It is possible to perform the special symbol lottery with either a low probability where the probability that the special stop mode will be derived is relatively low or a high probability where the probability that the special stop mode will be derived is relatively high. In addition,
The probability that the special stop mode is derived when the special symbol lottery is performed with the low probability (for example, 1/201 as shown in FIG. 118) and when the special symbol lottery is performed with the high probability The specific stop mode is derived with a relatively higher probability (for example, 1/6 as shown in FIG. 118) than the probability that the special stop mode is derived (for example, 1/200 as shown in FIG. 118). The present invention is characterized in that the special symbol lottery can be performed so that the mode is derived.

According to the gaming machine described in (6) above, the specific stopping pattern is derived with a higher probability than either the case where the special stopping pattern is derived with a low probability or the case with a high probability, so it is possible to play an unprecedented new game. It is possible to provide sex and suppress a decline in interest.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above,
The random number acquisition means is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S392) that acquires a random number related to the first special symbol;
It has a second random number acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S399) that acquires the random number related to the second special symbol,
The special symbol lottery means is
A first special symbol lottery means (for example, a first special symbol variable display start a main CPU 201) that performs processing (S93);
A second special symbol lottery means that performs a second special symbol lottery including at least the special result in the lottery result using the random numbers acquired by the second random number acquisition means (e.g., second special symbol variable display start process (S93) It has a main CPU 201) that performs
The symbol control means is
A first symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the first special symbol variable display end process (S94)) that performs variable display of the first special symbol and controls so that the result of the first special symbol lottery is derived. and,
A second symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs a second special symbol variable display end process (S94)) that performs variable display of the second special symbol and controls so that the result of the second special symbol lottery is derived. and,
If the result of the second special symbol lottery is the special result (for example, a jackpot of the selected symbol command "z7" or "z8"), the result of the first special symbol lottery is the special result (for example, a jackpot of the selected symbol command "z7" or "z8") This is more advantageous than the case where the result of the first special symbol lottery is the specific result (for example, a short hit of the selected symbol commands "z0" to "z2"). It is characterized by being configured to:

According to the gaming machine of (7) above, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a special result, the result of the first special symbol lottery is a special result, and the result of the first special symbol lottery is a specific result. Since this is more advantageous than any other case, it is possible to increase the player's interest in a game in which the second special symbol lottery is performed.

(8) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above,
The random number acquisition means is
A first random number acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 2201 that processes S392) that acquires a random number related to the first special symbol;
It has a second random number acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 2201 that performs the process of S399) that acquires the random number related to the second special symbol,
The special symbol lottery means is
A first special symbol lottery means (for example, a first special symbol variable display start A main CPU 2201) that performs processing (S2013);
A second special symbol lottery means that performs a second special symbol lottery including at least the special result in the lottery result using the random numbers acquired by the second random number acquisition means (for example, second special symbol variable display start process (S2013)) a main CPU 2201) that performs
The symbol control means is
A first symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 2201 that performs a first special symbol variable display end process (S2014)) that performs variable display of the first special symbol and controls so that the result of the first special symbol lottery is derived. and,
A second symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 2201 that performs a second special symbol variable display end process (S2014)) that performs variable display of the second special symbol and controls so that the result of the second special symbol lottery is derived. and,
The results of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery further include a special result (e.g., a hit in the release of an accessory);
The gaming machine is
When the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and a special stop mode (for example, a display mode for opening a role object) indicating the special result is derived, a predetermined area (for example, , V winning device 2150), an entry control means (for example, the main CPU 2201) that controls the entry of the game ball into the game ball to be possible or easy;
a special area (for example, V prize opening 2155) through which the game ball that has entered the predetermined area can pass;
Furthermore,
The special game state control means includes:
When the game ball passes through the special area, it can be controlled to a special game state (for example, a jackpot game state via a second route) in which a variable display of special symbols is not performed,
The first special symbol lottery means is
The probability (for example, 0) that the first special symbol is displayed variably and the special stop mode is derived, and the probability that the second special symbol is variably displayed and the special stop mode is derived (0). For example, it is possible to perform the first special symbol lottery so that the winning number is different from 1/17).

According to the gaming machine of (8) above, a new gaming feature is provided in which the special symbol lottery result is controlled to a specific gaming state when the result is a specific result, and when the special stop mode is derived, the game is controlled to a predetermined area. It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the predetermined area, and when the game ball enters the special area, it can be applied to a so-called 1 type and 2 type mixing machine that enters a special game state. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide a new type of gaming experience that has never been seen before even in the case of a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine.

(9) In the gaming machine described in (8) above,
The specific gaming state includes:
It includes a first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state, and a third specific gaming state,
The end conditions for each of the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, and the third specific gaming state include:
A first termination condition for terminating the specific gaming state when the sum of the variable number of times the first special symbol is displayed and the number of times the second special symbol is variablely displayed reaches a first predetermined number (for example, the time saving condition shown in FIG. 99). a second termination condition (e.g., time-saving termination condition M in FIG. 99) that terminates the specific gaming state when the number of variable display times of the second special symbol reaches a second predetermined number; , a third termination condition (for example, the time-saving termination condition N in FIG. 99) for terminating the specific gaming state when the number of times the special stop mode is derived reaches a third predetermined number;
At least one of the first ending condition, the second ending condition, and the third ending condition is one of the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, and the third specific gaming state. It is characterized by being different in at least one specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine described in (9) above, by providing variations in the end conditions of specific gaming states, it is possible to provide a range of gameplay and increase interest.

(10) In the gaming machine described in (8) above,
The specific gaming state is
including at least two specific gaming states of a first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state, and a third specific gaming state;
The end conditions for each of the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, and the third specific gaming state include a variable number of times the special symbol is displayed (for example, a time saving number),
The gaming state control means includes:
In any one of the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, and the third specific gaming state (for example, C time saving gaming state), another specific gaming state (for example, B time saving gaming state) If the conditions for transition to state) are met,
The variable number of times the special symbol can be displayed until the end condition for the one specific gaming state is met, and the number of times the special symbol can be displayed until the ending condition for the other specific gaming state is met. Until the variable display of the special symbol is performed for the greater number of variable display times of the special symbol, it can be controlled in the same manner as the one specific game state regardless of the degree of advantage (for example, in S243). processing).

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, by ensuring that the end conditions of a specific gaming state are not disadvantageous to the player, and ensuring that the ending conditions of the specific gaming state are played in the same manner as one specific gaming state, It becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(11) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (9) above,
The gaming state control means includes:
the normal gaming state (for example, low probability low base state);
a high probability non-specific gaming state (for example, a high probability low base state) in which the probability of the special stop mode being derived is higher than the normal gaming state, but the execution frequency of the special symbol lottery is the same as the normal gaming state;
A low probability specific gaming state (for example, a low probability high base state) in which the probability that the special stop mode is derived is the same as the normal gaming state, but the execution frequency of the special symbol lottery is higher than the normal gaming state. ,
Controllable to either a high-precision specific gaming state (for example, a high-precision, high-base state) in which both the probability of deriving the special stop mode and the execution frequency of the special symbol lottery are higher than the normal gaming state. and
The gaming machine is
The present invention is characterized by comprising a display performance control means capable of controlling the display performance in such a manner that it is difficult to grasp the normal gaming state, the low-accuracy specific gaming state, and the high-accuracy specific gaming state from the outside.

According to the gaming machine described in (10) above, display performance is performed in a manner that is difficult to grasp from the appearance in the high-accuracy non-specific gaming state, the low-accuracy specific gaming state, and the high-accuracy specific gaming state, thereby adding interest to the game. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(12) In the gaming machine described in (11) above,
The gaming machine is
A first mode (for example, left-handed hitting) in which a game ball is fired toward a first area (for example, left side area 106) of the game area;
a second mode (for example, right-handed hitting) in which a game ball is fired toward a second area (for example, right side area 107) of the game area;
It is possible to play the game in any of a plurality of modes including the following, and the game is configured to be played in the first mode or the second mode depending on the gaming state,
In the normal gaming state, the low-probability specific gaming state, and the high-probability specific gaming state, the game is played in the first mode,
The present invention is characterized in that the game is configured to be played in the second mode in the high-precision non-specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine of (12) above, the game is played in the first mode in the normal gaming state, the low-probability specific gaming state, and the high-probability specific gaming state, while the game is played in the second mode in the high-probability non-specific gaming state. Since the game is played in , it is possible for the player to understand that the highly accurate non-specific gaming state is a special gaming state that is different from other gaming states.

(13) In the gaming machine described in (11) or (12) above,
Further comprising a payout means (for example, a payout/launch control circuit 400) that pays out a prize ball or prize data based on the game ball fired towards the game area passing through a predetermined winning area,
In the normal gaming state, the low-accuracy specific gaming state, and the high-accuracy specific gaming state, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of balls fired per unit time is less than 1,
In the highly accurate non-specific gaming state, the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time can exceed 1.

According to the gaming machine of (13) above, it is possible to increase interest by making the highly certain non-specific gaming state more advantageous than other gaming states.

(14) In the gaming machine described in any one of (11) to (13) above,
The gaming state control means includes:
When the special stop mode (for example, a jackpot of the selected symbol command "z3") is derived in the normal gaming state (for example, the low probability low base state), after the special gaming state ends, the high probability specific gaming state The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to shift to the high-precision non-specific gaming state without shifting to.

According to the gaming machine of (14) above, when the special stop mode is derived in the normal gaming state, it is possible to shift to the high-precision non-specific gaming state, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the normal gaming state. becomes possible.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of appendix 2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new gameplay.

[7-3. Appendix 3]
The pachinko gaming machine described in Appendix 3 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Main control means (for example, main control circuit 200) that controls the progress of the game;
A performance control means (for example, sub control circuit 300) that performs control related to the performance,
Equipped with
The main control means is
A startup information acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S392 or S399) that acquires startup information (for example, various random numbers) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
When the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means is used to draw a lottery that includes at least a special result (for example, a jackpot), a specific result (for example, a time-saving win), and a loss. A lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the special symbol variable display start process (S93)),
When the variation start condition is satisfied, a symbol control means (for example, a main unit that performs special symbol variable display end processing (S94) CPU201) and
A gaming state control means that controls the gaming state (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs special symbol game end setting processing (S282), etc.);
Prior to the lottery performed by the lottery means, advance determination means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs a pre-read determination process (S396)) is capable of determining the result of the lottery in advance;
an information transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S322) that transmits information related to the progress of the game to the production control means;
has
The gaming state control means includes:
When the special stop mode (for example, jackpot display mode) indicating the special result is derived, a special game state (for example, jackpot game state) in which the variable display of the symbols is not performed;
When a specific stopping mode (for example, a display mode for time saving) indicating the specific result is derived, a specific gaming state (for example, (C time-saving gaming state);
The performance control means is
controllable so that information transmitted from the information transmitting means is received and a performance based on the information is displayed in a predetermined performance display area;
When information indicating the result of the lottery by the lottery means is received, the production control means (for example, the sub CPU 301 )and,
Upon receiving information indicating the result of the advance determination by the advance determination means, advance effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) controls so that advance effect (for example, look-ahead effect) is performed prior to the variable display of the symbols; It is characterized by having the following.

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, when a specific stopping mode indicating a specific result is derived, the corresponding performance and preceding performance are performed in the gaming machine that is controlled to a specific gaming state. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine with excellent gameplay.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The preceding performance control means is
A first advance effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 301 )and,
A second advance effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) that controls to perform a second advance effect (for example, display of a jackpot type look-ahead effect form) capable of suggesting that the special stop mode may be derived. and,
a third precedent effect that controls so that a third precedent effect (for example, a display of a common system look-ahead effect form) that can suggest that either the special stop mode or the specific stop mode may be derived is performed; It is characterized by having a production control means.

According to the gaming machine described in (2) above, as a preceding performance, it is possible to not only perform a performance in which a special stop mode may be derived (second advance performance), but also a performance in which a specific stop mode may be derived. Since the first advance performance that can be suggested is performed, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with unprecedented new gaming properties. Furthermore, if the third advance performance is performed, both the special stop mode and the specific stop mode may be derived, so it is possible to increase the interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
The third advance effect control means is
The third preceding effect (for example, The present invention is characterized in that it can be controlled so that a common system look-ahead presentation form display) is performed.

According to the gaming machine described in (3) above, the third precedent effect is performed in a manner that makes it difficult to distinguish visually whether the special stop mode or the specific stop mode is derived, which is a new effect never seen before. By doing so, you can increase your interest.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (2) or (3) above,
The third advance effect control means is
a first aspect (e.g., a blue square);
a second aspect (for example, a yellow pentagon) that can be changed from the first aspect and has a higher expected value for the lottery result than the first aspect;
a third aspect (for example, a rainbow triangle) that is a mode that can be changed from the first mode or the second mode and has a higher expected value for the lottery result than the second mode;
controllable so that the third advance effect is performed in one or more modes out of a plurality of modes including;
In the first aspect and the second aspect, it is difficult to distinguish visually whether the expected value for the lottery result is the expected value for the special result or the expected value for the specific result,
The third aspect is characterized in that it is easy to distinguish from the appearance that it is an expected value for the special result.

According to the gaming machine described in (4) above, when the third advance performance is performed, in the first aspect or the second aspect, it is indicated by the appearance whether the expected value for the special result or the expected value for the specific result is higher. Although it is difficult to distinguish, it is easy to distinguish that the expected value for the special result is high when changing to the third mode. Therefore, when the third advance performance is performed, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (2) to (4) above,
The first advance effect control means is
A fourth aspect (for example, a dedicated common system look-ahead presentation form);
a fifth aspect (for example, a white circle) that is a mode that can be changed from the fourth mode and has a larger expected value for the specific result than the fourth mode;
controllable so that the first preceding performance is performed in one or more of a plurality of modes including;
The fourth aspect is such that it is difficult to distinguish by appearance whether the expected value is for the special result or the expected value for the specific result,
The fifth aspect is characterized in that it is easy to visually distinguish that it is an expected value for the specific result.

According to the gaming machine of (5) above, in the fourth aspect, it is difficult to distinguish from the appearance whether the expected value for the special result or the expected value for the specific result is higher, but in the fifth aspect, the expected value for the specific result is A high value makes it easier to distinguish. Therefore, in the first advance performance, by performing a performance in which the expected value for a specific result is high while eliminating the expected value for a special result, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest without unnecessarily increasing the gambling quality.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (2) to (5) above,
The present invention is characterized in that the ratio of the first advance performance performed by the first advance performance control means and the ratio of the second advance performance performed by the second advance performance control means are configured to be different.

According to the gaming machine described in (6) above, by making the ratio of the first preceding performance different from the ratio of the second preceding performance, it is possible to give a variety to the performance, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. becomes.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (2) to (6) above,
The symbol control means is
It is possible to derive the specific stopping mode in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state,
The first advance effect control means is
It is characterized in that it is controllable so that the first preceding performance is performed in the normal gaming state, and that it is controllable so that the first preceding performance is not performed in the specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine of (7) above, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest in the normal gaming state. In other words, it is more interesting for the player when a specific result is derived in a normal gaming state than when a specific result is derived in a specific gaming state. Therefore, by allowing the first advance performance to be performed in the normal game state and preventing the first advance performance from being performed in the specific game state, it becomes possible to effectively perform the first advance performance.

(8) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The said performance control means,
A first effect control means (for example, sub CPU301) and
a second effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) that controls to perform a second effect indicating that the specific stopping mode may be derived (for example, jackpot type reach);
A third effect control means (for example, A sub-CPU 301).

(9) In the gaming machine described in any one of (2) to (7) above,
The said performance control means,
A first effect control means (for example, sub CPU301) and
a second effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) that controls to perform a second effect indicating that the specific stopping mode may be derived (for example, jackpot type reach);
A third performance control means (for example, A sub CPU 301).

According to the gaming machines of (8) and (9) above, as the performance. Not only is there a performance that may lead to a special stop mode (the second relevant performance), but also a first performance that can suggest that a specific stop state may be derived. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming features that have never existed before. Moreover, when the third performance is performed, both the special stop mode and the specific stop mode may be derived, so it is possible to increase the interest.

(10) In the gaming machine described in (9) above,
The second effect control means is
When the second preceding performance (e.g., display of a jackpot-type look-ahead effect) or the third advance effect (e.g., display of a common-type look-ahead effect) is performed, the second related effect (e.g., jackpot-type reach) is performed. While it is possible to control the
The present invention is characterized in that when the first advance performance (for example, display of a time-saving win-type look-ahead performance format) is performed, control is possible so that the second relevant performance (for example, a jackpot-type reach) is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, the second performance is performed when the second preceding performance or the third preceding performance is performed, but is not performed when the first preceding performance is performed. . Therefore, at the stage of the preliminary performance, it is possible to perform a performance that increases interest by performing a preliminary performance that has a high expected value for a special result while avoiding giving an expected value for a specific result in vain.

(11) In the gaming machine described in (9) or (10) above,
The first effect control means is
If the first preceding performance (for example, displaying a time-saving winning type look-ahead performance form) or the third preceding performance (for example, displaying a common type looking-ahead performance form) is performed, the first relevant effect (for example, displaying a time-saving winning type look-ahead performance form) is performed. Reach) can be controlled to occur;
The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to control such that the first performance (for example, time-saving hit type reach) is not performed when the second preceding performance (for example, display of a jackpot type pre-reading performance form) is performed.
According to the gaming machine of (11) above, the first performance is performed when the first preceding performance or the third preceding performance is performed, but is not performed when the second preceding performance is performed. . Therefore, at the stage of advance performance, by eliminating the needless provision of expected values for special results and performing advance performances with high expected values for specific results, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest without unnecessarily increasing the gambling quality. becomes possible.

(12) In the gaming machine described in any one of (9) to (11) above,
The third effect control means is
The first preceding performance (e.g., displaying a time-saving win-type look-ahead performance form), the second preceding performance (e.g., displaying a jackpot-type look-ahead performance form), and the third preceding performance (for example, displaying a common type look-ahead performance form) The present invention is characterized in that control is possible so that the third performance (for example, common reach) is performed regardless of whether any of the above is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (12) above, in the third effect, it is difficult to determine whether the expected value is high for the special result or the expected value for the specific result. It becomes possible to attach it.

(13) In the gaming machine described in any one of (9) to (12) above,
The said performance control means,
In the variable display of the specific symbol (for example, target variation) in the case where the preceding performance is performed prior to the variable display of the specific symbol,
When the third effect (for example, common reach C) is started, after the third effect is performed, the first effect (for example, time-saving reach type reach C) or the second effect is started. (For example, it is possible to transfer to jackpot type reach C),
If the third effect (for example, common reach C) is not started, either the first effect (for example, time-saving reach C) or the second effect (for example, jackpot reach C) It is characterized by being configured so that it does not migrate.

According to the gaming machine of (13) above, when a preceding performance is performed prior to the variable display of a specific symbol, the third performance is started in the variable display of the specific symbol on which the preceding performance has been performed. If you do so, you can increase your interest. On the other hand, since neither the first performance nor the second performance will proceed unless the third performance is started, it is possible to prevent players from unnecessarily stirring up their gambling desires.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of appendix 3, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new gameplay.

[7-4. Appendix 4]
The pachinko gaming machine of appendix 4 has the following features.
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
a holding unit (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S395 or S402) capable of acquiring starting information when a predetermined condition is satisfied and holding the acquired starting information (for example, various random numbers) up to a predetermined number;
When the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the start information held by the holding means is used to perform a lottery including a special result (for example, a jackpot), a specific result (for example, a time-saving win), and a loss in the lottery result. A lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs special symbol variable display start processing (S93)),
When the variation start condition is satisfied, a symbol control means (for example, special A main CPU 201) that performs the symbol variable display termination process (S94);
When the variable display of the symbols is performed and a special stop mode (for example, a jackpot display mode) indicating the special result is derived, a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot game state) in which the variable display of the symbols is not performed is derived. special game state control means that can shift to;
When the variable display of the symbols is performed and a specific stop mode (for example, the display mode for time saving) indicating the specific result is derived, the game state in which the variable display of the symbols is performed is higher than the normal gaming state. A specific gaming state control means that can shift to an advantageous specific gaming state (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S145),
A production control means (for example, sub CPU 301) that controls the production to be performed in accordance with the variable display of the symbols in a predetermined production area (for example, the display area 7a of the display device 7);
Prior to the lottery performed by the lottery means, advance determination means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs a pre-read determination process (S396)) is capable of determining the result of the lottery in advance;
Based on the result of the advance determination by the advance determination means, advance performance control means (for example, a sub CPU301) and
Equipped with
The preceding performance control means is
The present invention is characterized in that the preceding effect can be performed when there is a possibility that the special stop mode or the specific stop mode will be derived.

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, when a specific stopping mode indicating a specific result is derived, the corresponding performance and preceding performance are performed in the gaming machine that is controlled to a specific gaming state. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine with excellent gameplay.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The preceding performance control means is
If the starting information held by the holding means includes specific starting information from which the specific stop mode (for example, the display mode for each time saving) can be derived, the specific stop mode (for example, the display mode for each time saver) can be derived. While it is possible to perform a specific advance effect (for example, display of a time-saving look-alike effect type) that suggests that a certain type of effect may be derived,
Even if the specific starting information is included in the starting information held by the holding means, the special stopping mode (for example, jackpot If special start information from which the specific start information can be derived (display mode) is included, it is possible to control so that a preliminary effect (for example, a look-ahead effect) regarding the specific start information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even if the specific start information from which a specific stop mode can be derived is held, if the special start information from which a special stop mode can be derived is first held, Advance performance regarding specific starting information is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a drop in interest by performing effective advance performances while eliminating advance performances that may become unnecessary as much as possible.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The preceding performance control means is
If the starting information held by the holding means includes special starting information from which the special stopping mode can be derived, there is a possibility that the special stopping mode (for example, jackpot display mode) can be derived. It is possible to control so that a special advance effect (for example, a display of a jackpot type advance effect type) is performed that suggests that,
Even if the special start information is not included in the start information held by the hold means, the special advance performance can be controlled to be performed,
When the special advance effect is performed even though the special start information is not included in the start information held by the hold means, the specific stop mode is included in the start information held by the hold means. Even if the specific start information that can be derived is included, it is possible to control so that the advance effect regarding the specific start information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, if a special advance performance is performed even though the special start information is not reserved, even if the specific start information is suspended, the advance performance regarding this specific start information Since this is not done, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. That is, if the special advance performance is performed even though the special start information is not held, the player may be disappointed when the special stop mode is not derived. In such a case, even if the specific starting information is withheld, by not performing a preliminary performance regarding this specific starting information, the specific stopping mode will be derived after the player is once disappointed. It is possible to increase interest.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
The preceding performance control means is
During the variable display of the symbol from which the special stop mode is derived, even if the start information held by the holding means includes specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, the specific start The feature is that it can be controlled so that advance presentation of information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine described in (4) above, even if the specific starting information is withheld, the preceding performance regarding the specific starting information is not performed during the variable display of the symbol from which the special stopping mode is derived. Therefore, it is possible to avoid performing advance performances that may become unnecessary as much as possible. That is, during the variable display of the symbols from which the special stop mode is derived, the player's interest is attracted to the effect being displayed, so even if a preliminary effect regarding the specific start information is performed, it may become a useless effect. Therefore, during the variable display of the symbol from which the special stop mode is derived, the advance effect regarding the specific start information is not performed.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above,
The specific gaming state includes:
A first specific gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state) in which a first specific control (for example, time-saving control with time-saving performance in the A-time-saving gaming state) can be executed;
A second specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state) in which a second specific control different from the first specific control (for example, time-saving control with time-saving performance in C-time-saving gaming state) can be executed. Ori,
The specific game state control means is
When the special stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the first specific gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state) after the special gaming state ends,
When the specific stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state),
When the special stop mode is derived, the start information held by the holding means includes specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, and after the special stop mode ends, the When the state is shifted to the first specific gaming state, even if the specific stop mode is derived due to the fulfillment of the variation start condition regarding the specific start information, the second specific control is not executed and the first It is characterized by the ability to execute specific control.

In the gaming machine of (5) above, even if the specific start information is withheld when the special stop mode is derived, if the specific start information is transferred to the first specific gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, Even if a variable display is performed and a specific stop mode is derived, the first specific control is executed without executing the second specific control. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the loss of the benefits that the player obtains due to the derivation of the special stop mode.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (2) to (4) above,
The specific game state control means is
When the special stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state) after the special gaming state ends,
The preceding performance control means is
When the special stopping mode is derived, the starting information held by the holding means includes specific starting information from which the specific stopping mode can be derived, and after the special gaming state ends, the specific starting information is When the game mode is controlled to be in a gaming state, it is possible to control so that the advance performance regarding the specific starting information is not performed.

In the above gaming machine (6), even if the specific start information is withheld when the special stop mode is derived, if the specific gaming state is controlled after the special gaming state ends, the specific start information will be suspended. This is so that no advance performance is performed. This makes it possible to suppress necessary advance performance from being performed.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above,
The specific game state control means is
When the special stopping mode is derived, even if the starting information held by the holding means includes specific starting information from which the specific stopping mode can be derived, after the special gaming state ends, the It is characterized in that control is possible so as not to shift to the specific gaming state based on specific starting information.

According to the gaming machine of (7) above, when the special stop mode is derived, even if the specific start information is withheld, after the special game state ends, the game is not shifted to the specific game state based on the specific start information. Therefore, for example, when the special gaming state is controlled based on the derivation of the special stop mode, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state based on this.

(8) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (7) above,
The preceding performance control means is
When the special stopping mode is derived, even if the starting information held by the holding means includes specific starting information from which the specific stopping mode can be derived, after the special gaming state ends, the The present invention is characterized in that it can be controlled so that advance performance regarding specific starting information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine described in (8) above, when the special stop mode is derived, even if the specific start information is withheld, it is possible to avoid performing a preliminary performance that may become unnecessary after the special gaming state ends. It can be suppressed.

(9) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (8) above,
The specific game state control means includes:
Even if the starting information held by the holding means includes specific starting information from which the specific stopping mode can be derived when the special stopping mode is derived, after the special gaming state ends, When the special stopping mode is controlled to be in an advantageous gaming state with a high expected value (for example, a high probability gaming state), the specific stopping mode is derived when the fluctuation start condition for the specific starting information is satisfied. The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to control the game so that the game does not shift to the specific gaming state even if the game is played.

According to the gaming machine of (9) above, after the special gaming state ends, an advantageous gaming state (for example, a high probability gaming state) with a high expected value from which a special stop mode is derived is prioritized over a specific gaming state. Since it is controlled, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(10) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (9) above,
further comprising a counting means (for example, a ceiling counter) for counting the variable number of times the symbol is displayed;
The specific game state control means includes:
When the number of variable display times of the symbol counted by the counting means reaches a specified number (e.g. ceiling value), it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state (e.g. C time saving gaming state);
The preceding performance control means is
Even if the starting information held by the holding means includes specific starting information from which the specific stopping mode can be derived, the above-mentioned When the number of variable display times of the symbol counted by the counting means reaches the predetermined number of times, it is possible to control so that the advance performance regarding the specific start information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, even if the specific starting information is withheld, the number of variable display times of the symbol counted by the counting means is determined before the variable start condition for the specific starting information is satisfied. When reaches a specified number of times, a transition is made to a specific gaming state before a specific display mode is derived. In such a case, even if a preliminary performance is performed regarding the specific start information, such preliminary performance may become an unnecessary preliminary performance. Therefore, by not performing such advance performances that may become unnecessary, the decrease in interest is suppressed.

(11) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (10) above,
The lottery results further include special results (for example, a small win), and
A special game in which when the variable display of the symbols is performed and a special stop mode (for example, a small winning display mode) indicating the special result is derived, a transition can be made to a special game state in which the variable display of the symbols is not performed. further comprising state control means;
The preceding performance control means is
The starting information held by the holding means includes specific starting information from which the specific stopping mode can be derived and special starting information from which the special stopping mode can be derived, and the starting information about the specific starting information includes: Even if the variation start condition for the special start information from which the special stop mode can be derived is satisfied before the variation start condition is satisfied, the control is performed so that a preliminary effect regarding the specific start information is performed. It is characterized by being possible.

In the above gaming machine (11), the specific start information and the special start information are held, and the variation start condition for the special start information is satisfied before the variation start condition for the specific start information. This makes it possible to perform a preliminary presentation of specific starting information even when the system is running. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(12) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (11) above,
The lottery results further include special results (for example, a small win), and
A special game state in which when the variable display of the symbols is performed and a special stop mode indicating the special result is derived, a transition can be made to a special game state (for example, a small winning game state) in which the variable display of the symbols is not performed. further comprising a control means (for example, main CPU 201),
The preceding performance control means is
During the variable display of the symbol from which the special stop mode is derived, if the start information held by the holding means includes specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, the specific start information It is characterized in that it can be controlled so that a preliminary performance is performed.

The gaming machine described in (12) above is configured such that, if specific starting information is suspended during the variable display of symbols from which a special stopping mode is derived, a preliminary effect regarding this specific starting information is performed. . This makes it possible to increase interest.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of appendix 4, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new gameplay.

[7-5. Appendix 5]
The pachinko gaming machine of appendix 5 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol lottery (for example, a special symbol variable display start process (S93)) that performs a special symbol lottery based on the game ball passing through a special starting area (for example, the starter switch 121, 141A, 141B) )and,
Special symbol control means (for example, main CPU 201 that performs special symbol variable display end processing (S94)) that performs variable display of special symbols in a predetermined display area and controls so that the result of the special symbol lottery is derived;
When a special stop mode (e.g., jackpot display mode) is derived by the special symbol control means, special game state control is possible to control the special gaming state (e.g., jackpot game state) in which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S145);
A game state in which the special symbol is displayed variably, and a specific game that can be controlled to a specific game state (for example, a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous than a normal game state until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times. A state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs time saving management processing),
A normal symbol lottery means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a variable display start process (S293) for normal symbols) that performs a normal symbol lottery based on the game ball passing through a normal starting area (for example, the passing gate switch 127);
A normal symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a normal symbol variable display end process (S294)) that performs variable display of the normal symbol in a predetermined display area and controls the result of the normal symbol lottery to be derived; ,
When the normal symbol hit stop mode indicating a normal symbol win is derived by the normal symbol control means, the special symbol drawing facilitation means (for example, the normal electric accessory opening) that facilitates the passage of the game ball to the special starting area a main CPU 201) that performs processing (S296);
Equipped with
The specific gaming state is
At least one of the probability that the stop mode per normal symbol is derived, the degree of ease of passage of the game ball to the special starting area, and the time during which the variable display of the normal symbol is performed is determined according to the normal pattern. A gaming state in which specific control different from the gaming state is executed,
A first specific gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state) that is controllable until the first ending condition is satisfied, with transition conditions being that the special stop mode is derived and the special gaming state ends;
The transition condition is that a specific stop mode (for example, the display mode for each time saving) is derived by the symbol control means, and a second specific game state (for example, C time saving game state) that can be controlled until the second end condition is satisfied. )and,
At least two specific games of a third specific gaming state (for example, B time-saving gaming state) in which the transition condition is that the variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times, and the control is possible until the third ending condition is satisfied. It is characterized by including the state.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state where the transition condition is that the specific stopping mode is derived, and the variable display of the special symbol being performed a specified number of times. Since at least two specific gaming states are prepared among the third specific gaming states that serve as transition conditions, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with unprecedented new gaming properties.

Note that the specific control may be the same in the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, and the third specific gaming state, or may be different in the specific control mode. Further, among the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, and the third specific gaming state, the specific control mode in two specific gaming states is the same, and the specific control mode in the remaining one specific gaming state is the same. The mode of specific control in the above two specific gaming states may be different.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The second specific gaming state (for example, C time saving gaming state) and the third specific gaming state (for example, B working time saving gaming state) are:
The present invention is characterized in that the derivation probabilities of the stopping modes per normal symbol are the same or substantially the same.

In the gaming machine (2) above, the probability of deriving the stop mode per normal symbol is the same or approximately the same in the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state. Thereby, it is possible to increase interest regardless of whether the game is controlled in the second specific gaming state or the third specific gaming state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
In the second specific gaming state (e.g., C time-saving gaming state) and the third specific gaming state (e.g., B-time-saving gaming state), there are a plurality of states in which the degree of ease of passage of the game ball to the special starting area is different. Ease of passage patterns (for example, opening patterns for ordinary electric accessories) are prepared,
The second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state are:
At least some of the plurality of passage ease patterns are configured such that the degree of ease of passage of the game ball to the special starting area is the same or substantially the same. .

In the gaming machine of (3) above, the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state are such that the game ball passes through the special starting area in at least some of the passing ease patterns among the plurality of passing ease patterns. are constructed so that the degree of ease is the same or approximately the same. Thereby, it is possible to increase interest regardless of whether the game is controlled in the second specific gaming state or the third specific gaming state.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
In the second specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state) and the third specific gaming state (for example, B-time saving gaming state), there are a plurality of time patterns in which the variable display of the normal symbols is performed at different times. It is prepared and
The second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state are:
The present invention is characterized in that in at least some of the plurality of time patterns, the times during which the variable display of the normal symbols is performed are the same or approximately the same.

In the gaming machine of (4) above, the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state have the same or approximately the same time during which the variable display of the normal symbol is performed in at least some of the plurality of time patterns. They are configured to be the same. Thereby, it is possible to increase interest regardless of whether the game is controlled in the second specific gaming state or the third specific gaming state.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above,
The specific game state control means includes:
Even if the specific stop mode (for example, the display mode per time saving) is derived in the first specific gaming state, the first specific control corresponding to the first specific gaming state (for example, the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state) ) can be maintained.

The gaming machine of (5) above does not change to the second specific control corresponding to the second specific gaming state even if the specific stop mode is derived in the first specific gaming state, but instead corresponds to the first specific gaming state. This makes it possible to maintain the first specific control.

(6) In the gaming machine described in (5) above,
The specific game state control means includes:
If the specific stop mode (for example, display mode per time saver) is derived at a specific timing (for example, time saver final variation) in the first specific gaming state (for example, A time saver game state), after the specific timing (For example, the first specific control can be changed to the second specific control in the next variation after the final time saving variation).

The gaming machine described in (6) above is capable of changing from the first specific control to the second specific control after the specific timing when the specific stop mode is derived at a specific timing in the first specific gaming state. be.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above,
The specific game state control means includes:
When the specific stop mode is derived at a specific timing (for example, the final time saving variation) in the first specific gaming state, the first specific stop mode is derived after the specific timing (for example, the next variation after the final time saving variation). Both the first specific control corresponding to the gaming state (for example, time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state) and the second specific control corresponding to the second specific gaming state (for example, the time saving performance in the C time saving gaming state) are performed. It is characterized by the fact that it can be controlled so that it does not occur.

The gaming machine of (7) above is configured such that when a specific stop mode is derived at a specific timing in the first specific gaming state, neither the first specific control nor the second specific control is performed after the specific timing. This allows for control. Possible to control so that neither the first specific control nor the second specific control is performed corresponds to, for example, control such that the first specific control is ended and the second specific control is not started.

(8) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (7) above,
The specific game state control means includes:
Even if the specific stop mode is derived in the third specific gaming state, the third specific control is not changed to the second specific control corresponding to the second specific gaming state (for example, the time saving performance in the C time saving gaming state). The third specific control corresponding to the specific gaming state (for example, the time saving performance in the B time saving gaming state) can be maintained.

The gaming machine of (8) above does not change to the second specific control corresponding to the second specific gaming state even if the specific stop mode is derived in the third specific gaming state, but instead corresponds to the third specific gaming state. This makes it possible to maintain the third specific control.

(9) In the gaming machine described in (8) above,
The specific game state control means includes:
When the specific stop mode is derived at a specific timing (for example, the final time saving variation) in the third specific gaming state (for example, the B time saving gaming state), when the specific stop mode is derived at a specific timing (for example, the final time saving variation) after the specific timing (for example, the next time saving final variation) variation), the third specific control (for example, the time-saving performance in the B-time-saving gaming state) can be changed to the second specific control (for example, the time-saving performance in the C-time-saving gaming state).

The gaming machine described in (9) above is capable of changing from the third specific control to the second specific control after the specific timing when the specific stop mode is derived at a specific timing in the third specific gaming state. be.

(10) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (7) above,
The mode of the specific control may be different between the second specific gaming state (eg, C time saving gaming state) and the third specific gaming state (eg, B working time saving gaming state).

In the gaming machine (10) above, the mode of specific control is different between the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state. This increases the variety of games and makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(11) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (10) above,
The specific game state control means includes:
When the conditions for transition to the first specific gaming state (for example, A time saving gaming state) and the transition conditions to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time saving gaming state) are satisfied, or the first specific gaming state If the conditions for transition to the second specific gaming state are satisfied in,
The number of variable display times of the special symbol that can be executed until the first termination condition is satisfied and the number of variable display times of the special symbol that can be executed until the second termination condition is satisfied, whichever is greater. It is characterized in that the specific gaming state can be controlled until the special symbol is variably displayed over a period of time.

In the gaming machine of (11) above, when the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state overlap, the variable number of displays of the special symbol that can be executed until the first ending condition is satisfied, and the second ending condition are It is possible to control the specific game state until the special symbol is variably displayed for the greater number of variable display times of the special symbol that can be executed until the special symbol is realized.

(12) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (11) above,
The specific game state control means is
If the conditions for transition to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state) and the transition conditions to the third specific gaming state (for example, B time-saving gaming state) are satisfied, or the third specific gaming state If the conditions for transition to the second specific gaming state are satisfied in,
The number of variable display times of the special symbol that can be executed until the second termination condition is satisfied and the variable display frequency of the special symbol that can be executed until the third termination condition is satisfied, whichever is greater. It is characterized in that the specific gaming state can be controlled until the special symbol is variably displayed over a period of time.

In the gaming machine of (12) above, when the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state overlap, the variable number of times the special symbol can be displayed until the second ending condition is satisfied, and the third ending condition are It is possible to control the specific game state until the special symbol is variably displayed for the greater number of variable display times of the special symbol that can be executed until the special symbol is realized.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), (11), and (12) above,
comprising a counting means capable of counting the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed;
The counting means includes:
If a condition for transition to the other specific gaming state is satisfied in any one of the at least two specific gaming states, or a condition for transitioning to the one specific gaming state and the other specific gaming state. If the transition conditions are met,
a variable number of times the special symbol can be displayed until the end condition of the one specific gaming state is met; a variable number of times the special symbol can be displayed until the end condition of the other specific gaming state is met; It is characterized by being able to count both.

The gaming machine described in (13) above can be used when a transition condition to another specific gaming state is satisfied in any one specific gaming state, or when a transition condition to one specific gaming state and a transition to another specific gaming state are established. If the conditions are met, the number of display times of the special symbol that can be executed until the end condition of one specific gaming state is met, and the variable number of special symbols that can be displayed until the ending condition of the other specific gaming state is met. It is possible to count both the number of times the page is displayed and the number of times it is displayed.

(14) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (13) above,
When the transition condition to the specific gaming state is satisfied, an ending condition setting means (for example, performs the processing of S235, S237, and S238 Equipped with a main CPU 201),
The termination condition setting means includes:
In the case where the transition condition to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state) is satisfied and the case where the transition condition to the third specific gaming state (for example, B time-saving gaming state) is satisfied, the above-mentioned It is characterized in that a different number of times can be set as the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed (for example, the number of time-saving times).

The gaming machine of (14) above sets a different number of times as the variable display number of special symbols depending on whether the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied or the case where the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied. It is configurable.

(15) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (14) above,
In the first specific gaming state,
The derivation probability of the normal symbol per stop mode is higher than either of the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state.

In the gaming machine of (15) above, the probability of deriving the stop mode per normal symbol is higher in the first specific gaming state than in either the second specific gaming state or the third specific gaming state. Thereby, the first specific gaming state can be positioned as a specific gaming state that is more advantageous than the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), and (15) above,
comprising a counting means (for example, a time-saving counter update process) capable of counting the number of times the special symbol is variablely displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is started or stopped;
The specific game state control means includes:
If the conditions for transition to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state) and the transition conditions to the third specific gaming state (for example, B time-saving gaming state) are satisfied, the third specific gaming state It is characterized by being controllable.

The gaming machine of (16) above can be controlled to the third specific gaming state when the transition condition to the second specific gaming state and the transition condition to the third specific gaming state are satisfied.

(17) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), and (15) above,
comprising a counting means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a time-saving counter update process) capable of counting the number of times the special symbol is variablely displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is started or stopped;
The specific game state control means is
If the conditions for transition to the second specific gaming state are met, the transition to the second specific gaming state is possible even if the conditions for shifting to the third specific gaming state are met.

The gaming machine described in (17) above allows transition to the second specific gaming state when the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied, even if the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied. It is something.

(18) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), and (15) above,
comprising a counting means (for example, a time-saving counter update process) capable of counting the number of times the special symbol is variablely displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is started or stopped;
The specific game state control means includes:
In the variable display of the special symbol for which the condition for transition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied (for example, the variable display of the special symbol for the ceiling number), the condition for transition to the second specific gaming state is not satisfied ( For example, if a specific stopping mode has not been derived, the game can transition to the third specific gaming state without confirming that the conditions for transitioning to the second specific gaming state are not satisfied. do.

In the gaming machine of (18) above, when the condition for transition to the second specific gaming state is not satisfied in the variable display of the special symbol in which the condition for transition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied, the gaming machine shifts to the second specific gaming state. It is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state without confirming that the transition condition of is not satisfied.

(19) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), and (15) above,
comprising a counting means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a time-saving counter update process) capable of counting the number of variable display times of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started or stopped;
The specific game state control means includes:
In the variable display of the special symbol for which the condition for transition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied (for example, the variable display of the special symbol for the ceiling number), the condition for transition to the second specific gaming state is not satisfied ( For example, if a specific stopping mode has not been derived, the player can move to the third specific gaming state after confirming that the conditions for moving to the second specific gaming state are not satisfied. do.

The gaming machine of (19) above shifts to the second specific gaming state when the condition for shifting to the second specific gaming state is not satisfied in the variable display of the special symbol in which the condition for shifting to the third specific gaming state is satisfied. After confirming that the transition condition is not satisfied, it is possible to transition to the third specific gaming state.

(20) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), (15), and (16) above,
When a transition condition to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time saving) or a transition condition to the third specific gaming state (for example, B time saving) is satisfied, a transition to establish a transition flag to the specific gaming state Equipped with a flag establishment means,
The specific game state control means is
If the transition flag is established, it is possible to transition to the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine of (20) above shifts to the second specific gaming state when the transition conditions for the second specific gaming state are met, and shifts to the third specific gaming state when the shifting conditions for the third specific gaming state are met. It was designed to be migrated.

(21) In the gaming machine of (20) above,
The transition flag establishing means includes:
If the condition for transition to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time saving) is satisfied, the second transition flag is established, and if the transition condition to the third specific gaming state (for example, B time saving) is satisfied, the second transition flag is established. This establishes the third flag,
The specific game state control means includes:
If the second transition flag is established, it is possible to transition to the second specific gaming state, and when the third transition flag is established, it is possible to transition to the third specific gaming state.

The gaming machine of (21) above establishes the second transition flag when the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied, and sets the third transition flag when the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied. In other words, a separate flag is set to be established.

(22) In the gaming machine of (21) above,
comprising a counting means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S182 in FIG. 44) capable of counting the number of variable display of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started;
The specific game state control means includes:
When both the second transition flag and the third transition flag are established (for example, when S233 in FIG. 41 is determined as YES), it is possible to transition to the third specific gaming state (for example, B time-saving gaming state). It is characterized by certain things.

In the gaming machine (22) above, when both the second transition flag and the third transition flag are established, priority is given to transition to the third specific gaming state.

(23) In the gaming machine of (21) above,
comprising a counting means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S182 in FIG. 44) capable of counting the number of variable display of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started;
The specific game state control means includes:
When both the second transition flag and the third transition flag are established (for example, when S236 in FIG. 45 is determined as YES), it is possible to transition to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state). It is characterized by certain things.

The gaming machine (23) above is configured to give priority to the transition to the second specific gaming state when both the second transition flag and the third transition flag are established.

(24) In the gaming machine of (20) above,
The transition flag establishing means includes:
Used when the conditions for transition to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state) are met and when the transition conditions to the third specific gaming state (for example, B time-saving gaming state) are satisfied. It is characterized in that it establishes a common transition flag (for example, a time-saving transition flag).

The gaming machine of (24) above is configured to establish a common transition flag that is commonly used when the transition condition for the second specific gaming state and the transition condition for the third specific gaming state are satisfied. be.

(25) In the gaming machine of (24) above,
comprising a counting means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S182 in FIG. 44) capable of counting the number of variable display of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started;
The specific game state control means includes:
When the common transition flag is satisfied, if the condition for transition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied, even if the condition for transition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied, the third specific gaming state It is characterized by being able to migrate to

In the gaming machine (25) above, when the common transition flag is established, if the conditions for transition to the third specific gaming state are satisfied, the gaming machine shifts to the third specific gaming state rather than to the second specific gaming state. The system is designed to give priority to the migration of

(26) In the gaming machine of (24) above,
comprising a counting means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S182 in FIG. 44) capable of counting the number of variable display of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started;
The specific game state control means includes:
When the common transition flag is satisfied, if the condition for transition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied, even if the condition for transition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied, the second specific gaming state It is characterized by being able to migrate to

In the gaming machine (26) above, when the common transition flag is established, if the conditions for transition to the second specific gaming state are satisfied, the gaming machine shifts to the second specific gaming state rather than shifting to the third specific gaming state. The system is designed to give priority to the migration of

According to the pachinko gaming machine of appendix 5, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new gameplay.

[7-6. Appendix 6]
The pachinko gaming machine in appendix 6 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs special symbol variable display start processing (S93)) that performs a lottery based on the establishment of predetermined conditions;
A special symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs special symbol variable display end processing (S94)) that performs variable display of special symbols in a predetermined display area and controls so that the result of the lottery is derived;
When the special stop mode is derived by the special symbol control means, a special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S145) capable of controlling to a special game state in which the special symbol is not variably displayed;
a counting means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs ceiling counter updating processing) capable of counting the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed when not in the special gaming state;
a gaming state control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs special symbol management processing) capable of controlling a gaming state in which the special symbols are variably displayed;
A main control means (for example, main control circuit 200) having
The gaming state control means includes:
As a game state in which the special symbols are displayed variably,
Normal gaming state and
A plurality of games including a specific game state (for example, C time-saving game state) which can be controlled with the transition condition being that the number of times counted by the counting means reaches a specified number of times, and which is more advantageous than the normal game state. It is characterized by being controllable to any one of the states.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when it is not in the special gaming state, it is possible to control the specific gaming state by counting the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed and setting the transition condition as the counted number of times reaches a specified number of times. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine with unprecedented new gaming features.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The plurality of game states controlled by the game state control means include:
A game state in which the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed is counted by the counting means (e.g., a game state in which the variable probability flag is off), and a game state in which the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed is not counted by the counting means (e.g., a game state in which the variable probability flag is off). (a gaming state in which the flag is on);

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, there are gaming states that are counted by the counting means and gaming states that are not counted. This expands the range of games and makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The plurality of game states controlled by the game state control means include:
The probability that the normal game state, the specific game state (for example, B time-saving game state), and the special stop mode are derived as the game states in which the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed is counted by the counting means is includes a normal gaming state and a higher advantageous gaming state (for example, a high probability gaming state),
The gaming state control means includes:
If the advantageous gaming state is not controlled, when the number of variable display times of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times, the specific gaming state can be controlled;
When controlled to the advantageous gaming state, even if the number of variable display times of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times, it is possible not to control to the specific gaming state.

In the gaming machine of (3) above, the counting means counts whether the game is in a normal game state, a specific game state, or an advantageous game state. However, if it is not controlled to an advantageous gaming state, it is possible to control to a specific gaming state when the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times, but if it is controlled to the advantageous gaming state, the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times. This makes it possible to not control to a specific gaming state even if the

The above-mentioned "case where control is not performed to the advantageous gaming state" corresponds to, for example, a case where the number of variable display times of the special symbol reaches a specified number without being controlled to the advantageous gaming state even once. Furthermore, the above-mentioned "case where the game is controlled to the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state" refers to, for example, a case where the game is controlled to the normal gaming state after the advantageous gaming state has ended in the case of an ST machine or a specification that performs a probability-variable falling lottery. Equivalent to.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
a storage means (for example, main RAM 203) capable of storing information including information on the number of times counted by the counting means as information related to the progress of the game;
information erasing operation means (for example, backup clear switch 176) used to erase information stored in the storage means;
The number of times counted by the counting means stored in the storage means, separately from when the special gaming state is controlled or when the special gaming state ends, and when the information erasing operation means is operated. Counting initialization operation means that can initialize information (for example, a setting key 174 as a switch different from the backup clear switch 176, a dedicated switch, etc.);
It is characterized by having the following.

The gaming machine of (4) above initializes information on the number of times counted by the counting means, separately from when the special gaming state is controlled or when the special gaming state ends, and when the information erasing operation means is operated. The present invention is equipped with a count initialization operation means that can be used to perform initialization operations.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above,
When the counting initialization operation means (for example, the setting key 1174 for changing settings) is operated, the information erasing means that can delete the information stored in the storage means (for example, the process of S361 is It is characterized by having a CPU 201).

In the gaming machine (5) above, when the count initialization operation means is operated, the information stored in the storage means can be erased.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above,
When a special stop mode (for example, a small winning display mode) is derived by the special symbol control means, a special game state (for example, a special game state in which variable display of the special symbol is not performed) is established as a game state different from the special game state. , a special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S145) that can control
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) that controls the effect to be performed in a predetermined effect area;
Equipped with
The performance control means is
When the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbol that satisfies the conditions for transition to the specific gaming state, the transition to the specific gaming state is performed rather than the special performance that suggests that the special stop mode is derived. The present invention is characterized in that it can be controlled so that a transition effect indicating that the transition condition has been satisfied is given priority.

In the gaming machine of (6) above, when a special stop mode is derived in the variable display of a special symbol that satisfies the transition condition to a specific gaming state, rather than a special effect that suggests that a special stop mode is derived, Control is performed so that a transition performance indicating that a transition condition to a specific gaming state has been satisfied is performed with priority.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above,
When a special stop mode (for example, a small winning display mode) is derived by the special symbol control means, a special game state (for example, a special game state in which variable display of the special symbol is not performed) is established as a game state different from the special game state. , a special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S145) that can control
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) that controls the effect to be performed in a predetermined effect area;
Equipped with
The performance control means is
When the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbol in which the conditions for transition to the specific gaming state are satisfied, the special stop mode is The present invention is characterized in that it can be controlled so that a special effect suggesting that a stopping mode is derived is given priority.

In the above gaming machine (7), when a special stop mode is derived in the variable display of a special symbol in which the conditions for transition to a specific gaming state are satisfied, a transition effect that suggests that the conditions for transition to the specific gaming state are satisfied. Control is performed so that a special effect that suggests that a special stopping mode is derived is performed with priority.

(8) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (7) above,
The counting means is capable of counting the number of variable display times of the special symbol when variable display of the special symbol is started;
The special symbol includes a first special symbol and a second special symbol,
The said lottery means is
A first special symbol lottery means that performs a first special symbol lottery based on the game ball passing through a first special starting area (for example, first starting port switch 121);
a second special symbol lottery means that performs a second special symbol lottery based on the game ball passing through a second special starting area (for example, second starting port switches 141A, 141B);
has
The special symbol control means is
A first special symbol control means that performs variable display of the first special symbol and controls so that the result of the first special symbol lottery is derived (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a first special symbol variable display end process (S94) )and,
A second special symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a second special symbol variable display end process (S94)) that performs variable display of the second special symbol and controls so that the result of the second special symbol lottery is derived; )and,
The first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, and the expected value of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol per unit time and the unit time The expected value of one of the expected values of the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol per hit is configured to be larger than the other expected value,
The gaming state control means includes:
When the number of times counted by the counting means reaches the specified number of times (for example, ceiling value), when the variable display of the special symbol starts when the specified number of times is reached, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state. It is characterized by certain things.

The gaming machine of (8) above is capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, and the expected value of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol per unit time; In a gaming machine configured such that one of the expected values of the number of changes of the second special symbol per unit time is larger than the other, the counted number of times reaches a specified number of times. In this case, when the variable display of special symbols is started when the specified number of times is reached, it is possible to shift to a specific gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the timing of transition to a specific gaming state from being delayed.

(9) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above,
When a special stop mode (for example, a small winning display mode) is derived by the special symbol control means, a special game state (for example, a special game state in which variable display of the special symbol is not performed) is established as a game state different from the special game state. , a small winning game state), a special game state control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs the process of S145),
The gaming state control means includes:
When the number of times counted by the counting means reaches the specified number of times (for example, a ceiling value), from when the variable display of the special symbol starts when the specified number of times is reached until the result of the lottery is derived. While it is possible to transition to the specific gaming state during
Even if the number of times counted by the counting means reaches the specified number of times, if the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbol when reaching the specified number of times, after the special game state ends. It is characterized in that it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine described in (9) above is capable of shifting to a specific gaming state by the time the lottery result is derived when the counted number of times reaches the specified number of times. When a special stop mode is derived in the variable display of special symbols at the time, it is possible to shift to a specific game state after the special game state ends.

(10) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (9) above,
The gaming state control means includes:
The game state in which the special symbol is variably displayed is an advantageous game in which the probability that the special stop mode is derived when the special symbol is variably displayed is higher than in the normal game state and the specific game state. The state (for example, high-precision gaming state) is controllable, and
The gaming machine is
In the advantageous gaming state, it is equipped with a falling lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201) capable of performing a falling lottery to determine whether or not to end the advantageous gaming state,
The counting means includes:
If the advantageous gaming state ends as a result of the falling lottery without counting the number of variable display times of the special symbol in the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to start counting the number of variable display times of the special symbol. It is characterized by

The gaming machine described in (10) above does not count the number of variable display times of special symbols in an advantageous gaming state, but starts counting the number of variable display times of special symbols when the advantageous gaming state ends as a result of a falling lottery. This made it possible.

(11) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (10) above,
The probability of deriving the special stop mode can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values in six stages from setting 1 to setting 6) with different probabilities, and the probability corresponds to the set setting value. A gaming machine in which the lottery is conducted so that the special stop mode is derived at
The specified number of times is a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the probability by a specified value within a predetermined range (for example, within a range of 2.5 to 3.0 times) of the denominator of the probability,
The predetermined value is different depending on the preset value so that the predetermined number of times is the same or substantially the same regardless of which preset value is set among the plurality of preset values. do.

The gaming machine of (11) above can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities for deriving the special stop mode, and the special stop mode is derived with the probability corresponding to the set setting value. This is a gaming machine where a lottery is held. The specified number of times is a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the probability that the special stop mode is derived by a specified value within a predetermined range of the denominator of the probability that the special stop mode is derived. The specified value differs depending on the setting value so that the specified number of times is the same or substantially the same regardless of which setting value is set among the plurality of setting values. By doing this, it becomes difficult to discover the set value based on the specified number of times which is a condition for transition to a specific gaming state.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of appendix 6, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new gameplay.

[7-7. Appendix 7]
The pachinko gaming machine of appendix 7 has the following features.
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A special symbol lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs special symbol variable display start processing (S93)) capable of performing a special symbol lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
A special symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs special symbol variable display end processing (S94)) that performs variable display of special symbols and controls so that the result of the special symbol lottery is derived;
When a special stop mode (e.g., jackpot display mode) is derived by the special symbol control means, special game state control is possible to control the special gaming state (e.g., jackpot game state) in which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S145);
a gaming state control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs special symbol management processing) capable of controlling a gaming state in which the special symbols are variably displayed;
A performance control means (for example, a sub CPU 301 that performs a performance mode determination process (S504)) capable of controlling display performance to be performed in a predetermined display performance area;
Equipped with
The gaming state control means includes:
Normal gaming state and
A plurality of game states including a specific game state (for example, B time-saving game state) which is a game state more advantageous than the normal game state and has a transition condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times. It is possible to control either of the following;
The performance control means is
In the variable display before the variable display of the special symbol for the predetermined number of times (for example, the final change of the ceiling), game progress effects related to the progress of the game (for example, shutter closing effect, right-handed navigation effect, night mode display effect) are displayed. It is characterized by being controllable so that it is started.

The gaming machine described in (1) above has an unprecedented new gameplay feature in which a game progress effect related to the progress of the game is performed in the variable display before the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times. It becomes possible to provide a gaming machine equipped with

In addition, "a game progress effect related to the progress of the game is started in the variable display before the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times" means the variable display before the variable display of the special symbol for the predetermined number of times. This includes not only a game progress performance performed at the time, but also a game progress performance performed thereafter (for example, variable display of special symbols for a specified number of times).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The special symbols include one special symbol (for example, a first special symbol) and another special symbol (for example, a second special symbol),
The special symbol lottery means is
One special symbol lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs a hit determination process (S104) for the first special symbol) that performs a special symbol lottery for the one special symbol, and a special symbol lottery for the other special symbol. and other special symbol lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the second special symbol hit determination process (S104)),
The special symbol control means is
one special symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs special symbol management processing for the first special symbol) that performs variable display of the first special symbol and controls so that the result of the first special symbol lottery is derived; ,
Other special symbol control means (for example, main CPU 201 that performs special symbol management processing for the second special symbol) that performs variable display of the other special symbol and controls so that the result of the other special symbol lottery is derived; ,
and, even if either one of the one special symbol and the other special symbol is being variably displayed, the other can be variably displayed;
The gaming machine is
When another condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied, a normal symbol lottery means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a variable display start process (S293) of the normal symbol) performs a normal symbol lottery;
A normal symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a normal symbol variable display end process (S294)) that performs variable display of the normal symbol and controls so that the result of the normal symbol lottery is derived;
When the normal symbol winning stop mode indicating a normal symbol winning is derived by the normal symbol control means, the special symbol drawing facilitation means (for example, a normal electric winning combination) that makes it possible to increase the execution frequency of the other special symbol drawing a main CPU 201) that performs object release processing (S296);
Furthermore,
The performance control means is
It is possible to perform a first display effect accompanying the variable display of the one special symbol or a second display effect accompanying the variable display of the other special symbol,
Prior to the transition to the specific gaming state, the first display performance is given priority over the second display performance, while
After the transition to the specific gaming state, the first display effect can be performed so as to be performed less frequently than before the transition to the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine described in (2) above is a gaming machine that can variably display one special symbol and another special symbol in parallel, and before transitioning to a specific gaming state, that is, the special symbol is variably displayed a specified number of times. Up until now, the first display performance was displayed along with the variable display of one special symbol, and after the transition to the specific game state, the frequency of display of the first display performance was reduced.

Furthermore, after the transition to the specific gaming state, it is preferable that the second display effect (for example, the night mode display effect) accompanying the variable display of other special symbols is displayed with priority over the first display effect.

Furthermore, "performing the first display effect so that the execution frequency is lower than before the transition to the specific gaming state" means that the execution frequency of the first display effect is lower than before the transition to the specific gaming state. This is intended to include not only a case where the first display performance is low, but also a case where the first display performance is not displayed at all after transitioning to a specific gaming state.

In addition, the special symbol lottery facilitation means makes it possible to increase the frequency of execution of other special symbol lottery, but it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of other special symbol lottery by providing a plurality of opportunities for executing other special symbol lottery (for example, by setting a second starting opening). A plurality of such symbols may be provided), and only one of them may be used to increase the execution frequency of the other special symbol lottery by the special symbol lottery facilitation means.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
The performance control means is
If the first variable display of special symbols after transitioning to the specific gaming state is the variable display of the first special symbol, it is possible to perform the first display effect until the second display effect is started. (For example, second normal pattern)
It is characterized by

The gaming machine of (3) above performs the first display performance until the second display performance starts when the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the specific gaming state is the variable display of one special symbol. This is what made it possible.

An example of a mode in which the first display effect is performed until the second display effect is started is a mode in which the first display effect is displayed in a loop.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The gaming state control means includes:
The specific gaming state can be controlled until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied;
The performance control means is
When the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the specific gaming state is finished, a third display effect related to the predetermined end condition (for example, a count-up effect that displays the number of time savings in the B time saving gaming state) It is possible to do
If the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the specific gaming state ends before the third display effect is performed, the second and subsequent display of the special symbol after transitioning to the specific gaming state It is possible to perform the third display effect when the variable display ends or when the variable display of the special symbol is not performed (for example, the second normal pattern).
It is characterized by

(5) In the gaming machine described in (2) or (3) above,
The gaming state control means includes:
The specific gaming state can be controlled until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied;
The performance control means is
When the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the specific gaming state ends, a third display effect related to the predetermined end condition (for example, a count-up effect that displays the number of time-savings in the B-time-saving game state) It is possible to do
If the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the specific gaming state ends before the third display effect is performed, the second and subsequent display of the special symbol after transitioning to the specific gaming state It is possible to perform the third display effect when the variable display ends or when the variable display of the special symbol is not performed (for example, the second normal pattern).
It is characterized by

The gaming machines described in (4) and (5) above are capable of performing a third display effect related to the end condition of the specific gaming state when the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the specific gaming state is completed. This is what I did. In such a gaming machine, if the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to a specific gaming state ends before the third display effect is performed, the second and subsequent displays after transitioning to the specific gaming state A third display performance is performed when the variable display of the special symbol is completed or when the variable display of the special symbol is not performed.

Note that (4) above can also be rephrased as follows in the gaming machine described in (1) above. Similarly, (5) above can be rephrased as follows in the gaming machine described in (2) or (3) above.
The gaming state control means includes:
The specific gaming state can be controlled until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied;
The performance control means is
When the first variable display of the other special symbols after transitioning to the specific gaming state is completed, a third display effect related to the predetermined ending condition (for example, a count-up displaying the number of time-savings in the B-time-saving gaming state) performance), and
The first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the specific gaming state is the variable display of the one special symbol, and at the end of the variable display of the one special symbol, the other special symbol is being variably displayed. In this case, or when the variable display of the other special symbol is not performed, when the variable display of the other special symbol after the variable display of the other special symbol is completed, or the variable display of the other special symbol is performed. The third display effect may be performed when the third display effect is not displayed.

(6) In the gaming machine described in (2), (3) or (5) above,
The performance control means is
The first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the specific gaming state is the variable display of the other special symbol, and the variable display of the other special symbol is executed before the variable display of the other special symbol. If the variable display of the one special symbol ends during the process, it is possible to perform the first display effect when the variable display of the one special symbol ends (for example, the first irregular pattern).
It is characterized by

In the gaming machine of (6) above, the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to a specific gaming state is the variable display of another special symbol, and the other variable display executed before the variable display of the other special symbol is When the variable display of one special symbol ends during the variable display of the special symbols, the first display performance can be performed when the variable display of one special symbol ends.

(7) In the gaming machine described in (6) above,
The performance control means is
The game progress effect can be displayed at the start of the variable display of the other special symbol that is executed before the variable display of the other special symbol that is the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the specific gaming state. (for example, the first irregular pattern)
It is characterized by

The gaming machine of (7) above, when the variable display of another special symbol that is executed before the variable display of another special symbol that is the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to a specific gaming state, starts the game. It is possible to display progress effects.

(8) In the gaming machine described in (7) above,
The performance control means is
The variable display of the first special symbol is performed during the variable display of the other special symbol that is executed before the variable display of the other special symbol that is the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the specific gaming state. Even if a reach effect is performed as the first display effect accompanying the variable display of the one special symbol, the game progress effect (e.g., right hit small navigation effect) can be displayed (e.g. , first irregular pattern)
It is characterized by

In the gaming machine of (8) above, one special symbol is displayed during the variable display of another special symbol that is executed before the variable display of another special symbol that is the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to a specific gaming state. When a variable display of symbols is performed and a ready-to-reach performance is performed as a first display performance accompanying the variable display of one special symbol, a game progress performance (for example, a right-handed small navigation performance) can be displayed.

Furthermore, "the game progress effect can be displayed" is not limited to displaying all of the game progress effects described in (1) above, but only a part of the game progress effect described in (1) above. Including those that are displayed.

(9) In the gaming machine described in (2) or 3 above,
The performance control means is
The first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the specific gaming state is the variable display of the other special symbol, and the variable display of the other special symbol is executed before the variable display of the other special symbol. If the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed in the game, a part of the game progress performance is not performed (for example, the third irregular pattern).
It is characterized by

In the gaming machine of (9) above, the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to a specific gaming state is the variable display of another special symbol, and the other variable display executed before the variable display of the other special symbol is When the variable display of one special symbol is not performed during the variable display of the special symbols, the second display performance is performed without performing the first display performance.

(10) In the gaming machine described in any one of (2), (3), and (5) to (9) above,
The normal symbol control means is
The variable display of the normal symbol is performed in a short and regular pattern variable display mode in which the expected value of the number of variable display times of the normal symbol performed per unit time is relatively large (for example, the normal symbol variation pattern “02H” in FIG. 239). , a long and short pattern variable display mode in which the expected value of the number of times the normal pattern is displayed per unit time is relatively small (for example, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern "05H" in FIG. 239). It is possible to perform this in any of the diagram variable display modes,
Before the transition to the specific gaming state (for example, the time saving flag = 0 shown in FIG. 239), the variable display of the normal symbol in the long and short pattern variable display mode is changed after the transition to the specific gaming state (for example, , the time saving flag=1) shown in FIG. 239 can be performed at a different frequency.

The gaming machine described in (10) above makes it possible to perform variable display of normal symbols in the long and short symbol variable display mode at a frequency different from that after shifting to the specific gaming state before shifting to the specific gaming state. It is something.

``Frequency different from after transition to a specific gaming state'' may be set to be higher frequency than after transition to a specific gaming state, or lower frequency (probability) than after transition to a specific gaming state. (including 0).

In addition, "before the transition to the specific gaming state, the variable display of normal symbols in the long and short pattern variable display mode is performed at a frequency different from that after the transition to the specific gaming state" means that before the transition to the specific gaming state This also includes a mode in which the variable display of the normal symbol is not performed at all in the variable display mode of the long and common symbol. Here, "not performing at all" may mean either a case where a lottery is conducted but the probability is 0, or a case where a lottery is conducted but the lottery result is discarded.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2), (3), and (5) to (10) above,
The other special symbol control means is
The variable display of the other special symbol is performed in a short special symbol variable display mode in which the expected value of the number of variable displays of the other special symbol performed per unit time is relatively large (for example, variation of the special symbol for a high start). pattern), and a special feature pattern variable display mode in which the expected value of the number of variable display times of the other special symbols performed per unit time is relatively small (for example, a variation pattern of special symbols for a low start). It is possible to perform in any of a plurality of special figure variable display modes including,
Although the probability that the special stop mode (for example, jackpot display mode) is derived is the same before and after the transition to the specific gaming state, It is possible to perform the variable display of the other special symbols in the characteristic feature variable display mode more frequently than after the transition (for example, the second irregular pattern).
It is characterized by

In the gaming machine described in (11) above, although the probability that the special stop mode is derived is the same before and after the transition to the specific gaming state, before the transition to the specific gaming state This makes it possible to display other special symbols in a variable display manner more frequently than before.

(12) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (11) above,
The performance control means is
It is possible to perform a normal performance that can be displayed in the normal gaming state and a specific performance that can be displayed in the specific gaming state, and
It has a count performance control means that can perform a count performance that can grasp the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed before switching from the normal performance to the specific performance,
The count performance control means is
When shifting from the normal game state to the specific game state, it is possible to reset and display the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed before switching from the normal performance to the specific performance.

The game machine of (12) above is capable of resetting and displaying the variable number of times the special symbols are displayed before switching from the normal performance to the specific performance when the normal game state is transferred to the specific game state.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of appendix 7, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new gameplay.

[7-8. Appendix 8]
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, an image is displayed when a predetermined variable display start condition is met, such as when a game ball has passed through a passage area provided in a rolling game area. Control is executed to variably display symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, control is executed to derive and display the variably displayed symbols, and the derived and displayed symbols are combined in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), a player is provided with a system that shifts to a jackpot game state advantageous to the player.

As such a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine configured to perform various effects is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-221523).

The inventor of the present invention, in the process of intensively studying the various performances performed in gaming machines, came up with the idea that the interest of the game could be improved by devising ways to develop the performances.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

In this regard, the fifth pachinko gaming machine has the following features.

(A-1) A performance execution means capable of performing a performance,
an icon display means capable of displaying an icon (a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, a "cherry" icon, etc.) in the performance executed by the performance execution means;
The icon display means is configured to display icons of the same system when the first performance (first preview performance) is being executed by the performance execution means and when the second performance (second preview performance) is being executed by the performance execution means. It is possible to display an icon (the "bell" icon),
The effect execution means may be arranged to perform different operations after the icons are displayed in a case where the icons of the same type are displayed in the first effect and a case where the icons of the same type are displayed in the second effect. It is possible to perform a performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the first performance (first preview performance) is being executed and when the second performance (second preview performance) is being executed, icons of the same type are mutually displayed. (“bell” icon). Then, when an icon of the same type ("bell" icon) is displayed in the first performance (first preview performance), and an icon of the same type ("bell" icon) is displayed in the second performance (second preview performance). ) is displayed, and after the icon (the "bell" icon) is displayed, different effects can be executed. This allows for variation in the effects that occur before and after the icon is displayed, while keeping the icons displayed between these effects the same, making it easier for players to visually understand the development of the effect. can do. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

As explained in connection with the fifth pachinko game machine, as the icon in the present invention, it is possible to appropriately employ an icon composed of characters, figures, symbols, colors, or a combination thereof. "Icons of the same type" refers to one icon and another icon having at least some of the same characters, figures, symbols, and colors. For example, when adopting the "X" icon confirmed image 9051 (see FIG. 170(b)) as an icon, if the first effect (first preview effect) is being executed and the second effect (second preview effect) is ) is being executed, the exact same "X" icon confirmed image 9051 may be displayed, and when the first effect (first preview effect) is being executed, the "X" icon confirmation image 9051 may be displayed. If the "X" icon confirmed image 9051 in which the character "X" is the first color (for example, blue) is displayed, and the second effect (second preview effect) is being executed, the "X" character is the first color (for example, blue). An “X” icon confirmed image 9051 of a second color (for example, red) may be displayed. Further, when the first effect (first preview effect) is being executed, an “X” icon confirmed image 9051 in which the letter “X” is in a predetermined color (for example, yellow) is displayed, and the second When the effect (second preview effect) is being executed, the “Y” icon confirmed image 9052 (FIG. 170 ( c)) may be displayed.

In addition, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the various icons (the "bell" icon, the "watermelon" icon, the "cherry" icon, the first specific icon, the second specific icon, and the third specific icon) are In the jackpot preview performances (the first preview performance, the second preview performance, the third preview performance, and the fourth preview performance), they are displayed as "icons of the same type". For example, various icons (a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, a "cherry" icon, a first specific icon, and a second specific icon) displayed in the first production (first preview production) are as follows: It is "same type" as the various icons ("bell" icon, "watermelon" icon, "cherry" icon, first specific icon, and second specific icon) displayed in the second performance (second preview performance). be.

(A-2) The gaming machine of (A-1) above,
The effect execution means executes a common effect (as shown in FIG. It is possible to execute the mutually different effects after the icon corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown (notice after stopping the icon) is executed.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the same type of icon (the "bell" icon) is displayed in the first performance (first preview performance), the same icon is displayed in the second performance (second preview performance). It is now possible to execute a common effect (notice after the icon corresponding to the effect number ``91'' or ``92'' shown in Figure 152 stops) when the system icon (``bell'' icon) is displayed. It is composed of This makes it easier for players to understand the progress of the performance through a common performance (notice after stopping the icon corresponding to performance number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152). It can be made easier to understand. In addition, data for the first performance (first preview performance) and second performance (second preview performance) are included as data for the performance performed when the same type of icon (the "bell" icon) is displayed. Since it is not necessary to store both of the data for the game, the performance control can be simplified.

(A-3) The gaming machine of (A-1) or (A-2) above,
The effect execution means may display a first icon (a "bell" icon) as an icon of the same type, and a second icon (a "watermelon" icon) different from the first icon. It is possible to execute a common effect (a notice after the icon stops corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152) in both cases.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the first icon (the "bell" icon) is displayed as an icon of the same type, and when the second icon (the "bell" icon) different from the first icon (the "bell" icon) is displayed, ``Watermelon'' icon) is displayed, a common effect (a notice after the icon stops corresponding to the effect number ``91'' or ``92'' shown in FIG. 152) can be executed. There is. This makes it easier for players to understand the progress of the performance through a common performance (notice after stopping the icon corresponding to performance number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152). It can be made easier to understand. In addition, as data for the effect performed when the icon is displayed, both data for the first icon (the "bell" icon) and data for the second icon (the "watermelon" icon) are stored. Since there is no need to keep it in place, production control can be simplified.

Note that "common" is a concept that can also be translated as "same type", similar to the above-mentioned "same system", and one performance does not have to be exactly the same as another performance. If one performance and another performance contain at least some of the same elements, these performances can be said to be a common performance. For example, if the basic scenery is the same in the background image displayed in one effect and the background image displayed in another effect, even if some parts of the scenery are slightly different, these background images may be considered "common".

(A-4) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-3) above,
a movable member;
An advantageous control means capable of performing control advantageous to the player,
The effect executing means (the sub-control circuit 300 that performs the effect shown in FIG. 168) determines the degree of expectation that the advantageous control will be performed throughout the operation time of the movable member when the icon of the same system is displayed. It is possible to suggest that
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when an icon of the same type (the "bell" icon) is displayed, it suggests the level of expectation that the control will be advantageous to the player through the operating time of the movable member. It is configured in such a way that it is possible. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the display of icons of the same type (the "bell" icon), and to change the behavior of the movable member from the display of the icons of the same type (the "bell" icon). It is possible to attract the player's attention to the development of the performance.

(A-5) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-4) above,
a movable member;
An advantageous control means capable of performing control advantageous to the player,
The performance execution means is
The first specific performance (notice after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number “91” or “92” shown in FIG. 152) that is performed when the first icon (“bell” icon) is displayed as the icon of the same type. ), a third icon (a "cherry" icon) different from the first icon can suggest the degree of expectation that the advantageous control will be performed through the operating time of the movable member. In the second specific performance (notice after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "93" shown in FIG. 152) that is performed when is displayed, the movable member is not controlled to operate.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the first specific performance (performance number "91" or " 92), the player is configured to be able to indicate his or her expectation that control will be advantageous to the player through the operating time of the movable member. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the display of icons of the same type (the "bell" icon), and to change the behavior of the movable member from the display of the icons of the same type (the "bell" icon). It is possible to attract the player's attention to the development of the performance. On the other hand, a second specific performance (corresponding to performance number "93" shown in FIG. 152) is performed when a third icon ("cherry" icon) different from the first icon ("bell" icon) is displayed. The system is configured so that the control to operate the movable member is not performed during the icon (post-stop notice). In this way, by varying the presence or absence of the movement of the movable member depending on the type of icon to be displayed, it is possible to associate the type of icon to be displayed with the performance mode after the icon is displayed. The development of the performance after the icon is displayed can be made easier to understand.

Note that the movement of the movable member may be started after the display of the icon of the same system (the "bell" icon) is finished, or while the movement of the movable member is being performed, the icon of the same system (the "bell" icon) may be started. The "bell" icon) may continue to be displayed.

(A-6) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-5) above,
The performance execution means is
When the icon of the same type is displayed in the first performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance (a notice after the icon corresponding to the performance number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152 is stopped). , it is possible to execute the specific performance even when the same type of icon is displayed in the second performance;
In the second effect, before the icon of the same type is displayed, a preliminary effect indicating that the icon of the same type will be displayed (in the effect corresponding to the effect number "16" shown in FIG. 143) displaying icon-suggesting items)
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when an icon of the same type ("bell" icon) is displayed in the first performance (first preview performance), a specific performance (performance number "91" shown in FIG. 152 or While it is possible to execute the icon corresponding to "92" (after the icon stops), it is also possible to specify when the same type of icon ("bell" icon) is displayed in the second effect (second preview effect). It is configured to be able to execute a presentation (a notice after the icon stops corresponding to the presentation number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152). This makes it easier for players to grasp the progress of the performance through a specific performance (notice after the icon corresponding to performance number "91" or "92" shown in Figure 152 has stopped), so the development of the performance can be further improved. It can be made easier to understand. Also, in the second performance (second preview performance), it is suggested that the icon of the same type (the "bell" icon) will be displayed before the icon of the same type (the "bell" icon) is displayed. It is configured such that it is possible to execute a preliminary effect (display of an icon suggestion type item in the effect corresponding to the effect number "16" shown in FIG. 143). As a result, when it is suggested that an icon of the same type (the "bell" icon) will be displayed, the player can be made to predict the development of the performance ahead of time.

(A-7) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-6) above,
Equipped with advantageous control means capable of performing control advantageous to the player,
The performance execution means is
When the icon of the same type is displayed in the first performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance (a notice after the icon corresponding to the performance number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152 is stopped). , it is possible to execute the specific performance even when the same type of icon is displayed in the second performance;
In the second performance, a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance (roulette performance) is provided,
The predetermined performance execution means is
a first suggestion means (a sub-control circuit 300 that performs an effect corresponding to the effect number "16" shown in FIG. 143) capable of suggesting that the icon of the same type is displayed;
a second suggestion means (a sub-control circuit 300 that performs the effect corresponding to the effect number "15" shown in FIG. 143) capable of indicating the degree of expectation that the advantageous control will be performed;
The performance execution means is
When it is suggested by the first suggestion means in the second performance that the icon of the same type is displayed, it is possible to execute the specific performance after the icon of the same type is displayed. On the other hand, when the expectation level is suggested by the second suggestion means in the second performance, the specific performance is not executed;
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when an icon of the same type ("bell" icon) is displayed in the first performance (first preview performance), a specific performance (performance number "91" shown in FIG. 152 or While it is possible to execute a preview after the icon corresponding to "92" stops, it is also possible to execute a specific icon when the same type of icon ("bell" icon) is displayed in the second performance (second preview performance). It is configured to be able to execute a presentation (a notice after the icon stops corresponding to the presentation number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152). This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the performance through a specific performance (notification after the icon corresponding to performance number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152 stops), so the development of the performance can be further improved. It can be made easier to understand. In addition, in the second performance (second preview performance), it is possible to execute a predetermined performance (roulette performance), and in the predetermined performance (roulette performance), the same type of icon ("bell" icon) In some cases, it is suggested that the control will be displayed, and in other cases, it is suggested that the player expects control to be performed that is advantageous to the player. Then, if it is suggested that an icon of the same type ("bell" icon) will be displayed in the second performance (second preview performance), an icon of the same type ("bell" icon) will be displayed. After that, it is possible to execute a specific effect (notice after the icon stops corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152), while in the second effect (second notice effect) the above expectation level If this is suggested, the specific effect (notice after icon stop corresponding to effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152) is not executed. As a result, when it is suggested that an icon of the same type (the "bell" icon) will be displayed, it is possible to let the player predict the development of the performance ahead of time. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned level of expectation is suggested, it is possible to create a sense of expectation among the players even without the development of the relevant performance, so it is possible to improve the appeal of the second performance (second preview performance). I can do it.

(A-8) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-7) above,
The performance execution means is
A common specific performance (first connecting performance (common) ), it is possible to perform the mutually different effects,
When the icon of the same type is displayed in a third performance (third preview performance) different from the first performance and the second performance, a specific performance (third preview performance) different from the common specific performance is displayed. It is possible to perform the 1st connection performance (dedicated)),
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the same type of icon (the "bell" icon) is displayed in the first performance (first preview performance), the same icon is displayed in the second performance (second preview performance). The configuration is such that a common specific performance (first connecting performance (common)) can be executed when a system icon (a "bell" icon) is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to understand the progress of the performance through the common specific performance (first connecting performance (common)), making it easier to understand the development of the performance. In addition, data for the first performance (first preview performance) and second performance (second preview performance) are included as data for the performance performed when the same type of icon (the "bell" icon) is displayed. Since it is not necessary to store both of the data for the game, the performance control can be simplified. Furthermore, if the same type of icon ("bell" icon) is displayed in the third performance (third preview performance), a specific performance different from the above common specific performance (first transition performance (common)) will be displayed. It is configured to be able to execute a performance (first transition performance (dedicated)). Thereby, it is possible to realize an appropriate specific performance according to the content of the third performance (third preview performance) that is different from the first performance (first preview performance) and the second performance (second preview performance). I can do it.

In the present invention, for a specific production that is different from the above-mentioned common specific production (first connecting production (common)), an icon of the same type (a "bell" icon) is displayed in the third production (third preview production). It may be something that can only appear when the same type of icon ("bell" icon) is displayed in a performance other than the third performance (third preview performance). It may be. In addition, in the present invention, even if the same type of icon (the "bell" icon) is displayed in the third performance (third preview performance), the above-mentioned common specific performance (first transition performance (common)) ) may be performed.

(A-9) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-8) above,
Equipped with operation means (performance button 54) that can accept operations by the player,
The icon display means includes:
a first icon display means capable of displaying an icon when the operation means is operated (when the production button 54 is operated in the production corresponding to production numbers "49" to "52" shown in FIG. 146); and,
A second icon capable of displaying an icon when the operation means is not operated (when the production button 54 is not operated in the production corresponding to production numbers “43” to “48” shown in FIG. 146). Display means;
The performance execution means executes a specific performance (continuation performance) in both cases when an icon is displayed by the first icon display means and when an icon is displayed by the second icon display means. is possible,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, there are cases where the icon is displayed when the operating means (presentation button 54) is operated, and cases where the icon is displayed even when the operating means (presentation button 54) is not operated. There is. The configuration is such that a specific effect (continuation effect) can be executed in any situation in which the icon is displayed. As a result, a situation in which a specific effect (connection effect) is executed when the operating means (presentation button 54) is operated, and a situation in which a specific effect (connection effect) is executed even when the operating means (presentation button 54) is not operated. It is possible to create a situation in which the performance is different, and through such a situation, it is possible to create variations in the development of the performance.

Note that there are two types of performance: a specific performance (connection performance) that is executed when the operation means (performance button 54) is operated, and a specific performance (connection performance) that is executed when the operation means (production button 54) is not operated. may be a common effect (a partially different effect) or may be the exact same effect.

(A-10) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-9) above,
The performance execution means is
A symbol production execution means capable of executing a symbol production in which a symbol is displayed;
When a specific symbol display (image display related to the 4-symbol tenpai incitement) is performed in the symbol presentation performed in the first presentation state (normal background display state), the second presentation state is changed from the first presentation state to and a presentation state switching means capable of switching to the presentation state No. 2 (a state in which the background is displayed after the 4-symbol tenpai is successful);
The icon display means includes:
When the specific symbol display is performed in the symbol presentation performed in the first presentation state, it is possible to display a first icon (a “bell” icon) as the icon of the same type;
When the specific symbol is displayed in the symbol presentation after being switched to the second presentation state by the presentation state switching means, a second icon ("watermelon") different from the first icon is displayed. icon).
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a specific symbol display (image display related to 4-symbol tenpai incitement) is performed in the symbol performance performed in the first performance state (normal background display state), , it is possible to switch from the first presentation state (the state in which the background is normally displayed) to the second presentation state (the state in which the background is displayed after the 4-symbol Tenpai is successful), and also the second presentation state as the same type of icon. It is possible to display one icon (the "bell" icon). Then, after switching to the second performance state (the state in which the background is displayed after the 4-symbol tenpai is successful), when a specific symbol display (image display related to the 4-symbol tenpai incitement) is performed in the symbol performance, The configuration is such that it is possible to display a second icon (a "watermelon" icon) that is different from the first icon (a "bell" icon). In this way, the first icon (the "bell" icon) and the second icon (the "watermelon" icon) are displayed in stages, and the specific symbol display (the image display related to the 4-symbol tenpai incitement) and the production state are displayed. By associating the switching, it is possible to create an attractive production development.

Note that the first performance state and the second performance state may be states in which different backgrounds are displayed, or the appearance frequency of a predetermined performance (for example, a performance in which a predetermined character is displayed) is They may be in different states. For example, in the first performance state, the probability that the first performance will be performed is higher than the second performance, while in the second performance state, the probability that the second performance will be performed is higher than the first performance. It may be configured as follows. Furthermore, in the first presentation state, the first character has a higher probability of appearing than the second character, while in the second presentation state, the second character has a higher probability of appearing than the first character. It may be configured as follows.

(A-11) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-10) above,
Equipped with a symbol display means capable of displaying a variable symbol and a static display,
The symbol display means is capable of temporarily stopping and displaying the symbol before the symbol is finally stopped and displayed,
The effect execution means executes a pattern when the icon of the same type is displayed in a first pseudo game ("Pseudo 1") after the start of variable display of the symbols until the symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. It is possible to execute the mutually different performances in a second pseudo game ("pseudo 2") after the variable display of is resumed.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, in the first pseudo game ("pseudo 1") after the variable display of symbols starts until the symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, the icons of the same type ("bell" icon ) is displayed, the above-mentioned mutually different effects can be executed in the second pseudo game ("pseudo 2") after the variable display of symbols is restarted. As a result, it is possible to transition from the first pseudo game ("Pseudo 1") to the second pseudo game ("Pseudo 2") using the display of the same type of icon ("bell" icon) as a landmark. Therefore, the development of the performance can be made easier to understand.

In the present invention, the period from the start of the variable display of symbols until the final stop display of the symbols is constituted as one unit game (special symbol variation game). One unit game (special symbol variation game) corresponds to one special symbol starting winning (one reserved ball), and the number of reserved balls does not decrease even if the symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. It is possible to configure it as follows.

[7-9. Appendix 9]
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, an image is displayed when a predetermined variable display start condition is met, such as when a game ball has passed through a passage area provided in a rolling game area. Control is executed to variably display symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, control is executed to derive and display the variably displayed symbols, and the derived and displayed symbols are combined in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), a player is provided with a system that shifts to a jackpot game state advantageous to the player.

As such a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine configured to perform various effects is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-221523).

The inventor of the present invention, in the process of intensively studying the various performances performed in gaming machines, came up with the idea that the interest of the game could be improved by devising ways to develop the performances.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

In this regard, the fifth pachinko gaming machine has the following features.

(B-1) Equipped with a production mode control means capable of controlling any production mode among a plurality of production modes (a first production stage, a second production stage, and a third production stage),
In the plurality of production modes, the occurrence rate of each production is different from each other,
The production mode control means sets the production mode to the first production mode when a specific condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after moving to the first production stage reaches a predetermined number (20)) It is possible to transition from to other production modes,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, in the plurality of performance modes (first performance stage, second performance stage, and third performance stage), the occurrence rate of each performance is different from each other, and under certain conditions ( When the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after moving to the first production stage reaches the predetermined number (20 times), the transition from the first production mode (production stage) to the other production mode (production stage). As a result, as the game progresses, you can gradually transition between production modes (production stages) with different production trends, so that you can determine which production mode (production stage) you are currently in and which production mode (production stage) you will move to next. It is possible to arouse the player's interest in whether the game will move to the next stage. As a result, it is possible to create an interesting development, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, in each of the plurality of performance modes (first performance stage, second performance stage, and third performance stage), a lottery is performed based on random numbers, and a lottery is performed based on the performance lottery table. , the content of the performance to be generated is determined. In each production mode (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage), different production lottery tables are used. In the production lottery table used in each production mode (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage), at least one of the lottery values (random value range) specified for each production is selected. Some parts are different. As a result, when a predetermined performance that can occur in any production mode (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage) is provided, the production mode (first production stage, third production stage) The probability of occurrence (frequency) of the production may be different for each production mode (for example, the 1st production stage), or the production that can occur in one production mode (for example, the 1st production stage) may be different for each production mode (for example, the 1st production stage). , the second presentation stage, and the third presentation stage). That is, in each production mode (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage), the tendency (system) of production is different from each other. For example, in the first production stage, pseudo-continuous production is more likely to occur compared to the second production stage and the third production stage. Further, the time stock preview can only occur in the second performance stage. Further, the meter UP notice can only occur at the third performance stage.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, when a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is met, the destination performance mode (first performance stage, second performance stage, or third performance stage) is determined by lottery. It was explained as something that would be done. In the present invention, the method of determining the destination production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) is not particularly limited. For example, each time a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is met, the production mode (first production stage , the second production stage, or the third production stage). In addition, there is a mode (random mode) in which the destination production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) is determined by lottery, and a mode in which the production mode (first production stage) is determined in a predetermined order. The player is configured to be able to select one of the modes (order mode) to which the stage, second production stage, or third production stage) moves by operating a button or the like. You may. Furthermore, the player can select to play the game in any one production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) by operating a button, etc. It may be configured as follows. For example, random mode, sequential mode, first production stage fixed mode (mode where the game is played only on the first production stage), second production stage fixed mode (mode where the game is played only on the second production stage), and third production stage. It may be configured such that the player can select one of the fixed modes (a mode in which the game is played only on the third production stage) by operating a button or the like. At this time, even if the first production stage fixed mode, the second production stage fixed mode, or the third production stage fixed mode is selected, each time a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is satisfied, A stage change preview performance may be generated.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is that the number of special symbol changes counted after moving to the first production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times). An example has been described in which the condition that the main variation pattern corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177 is selected is adopted. The specific conditions (conditions for stage change occurrence) in the present invention are not particularly limited, and any conditions can be adopted as appropriate. For example, the predetermined number of times may not be a predetermined numerical value, but may be a numerical value selected by lottery from among a plurality of numerical values (for example, 0 to 99). For example, at the start of a special symbol variation of 1 (for example, after executing the process of step S9203 in FIG. 186), a numerical value of 1 is selected by lottery, and a special symbol variation is performed the number of times corresponding to the selected numerical value. (a specific condition according to the lottery result is satisfied), the production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) may be changed. At this time, if 0 is selected by lottery, after once transitioning the production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) in one special symbol variation, the special symbol In the variation, the production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) may be changed again. Alternatively, when a specific condition is satisfied in response to a predetermined winning (for example, winning of a game ball in the first starting port 120), the performance mode (first performance stage, second performance stage, or third performance stage) is set. It is also possible to change the stage).

In addition, when RAM clearing is executed, it may be made to stay in a predetermined production mode (for example, the first production stage). Furthermore, at this time, the post-stage change variation counter (see step S9261 in FIG. 188) may be set to "0". RAM clearing is a process for clearing the backup area in the main RAM 203, as explained in the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a process for clearing the backup area in the main RAM 203. This process clears the information that exists. When the RAM clear (backup clear process) is executed, information indicating that the RAM clear (backup clear process) has been executed is transmitted as a command from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300. By receiving this command, the sub control circuit 300 can recognize that RAM clear (backup clear processing) has been executed. As explained in the first pachinko gaming machine, when clearing the RAM (backup clearing process), the information stored in the general work area is cleared, but the information stored in the specific work area is, in principle, cleared. Not cleared.

Further, when the power is turned on, the production stage managed by the sub-control circuit 300 may be kept in a predetermined production mode (for example, the first production stage). As a result, regardless of the gaming state managed by the main control circuit 200, the display device 7 displays an image corresponding to the performance mode (for example, the first performance stage). Furthermore, at this time, the post-stage change variation counter may be set to "0".

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state and a variable probability gaming state (high probability gaming state) are provided as gaming states managed by the main control circuit 200, and in the variable probability gaming state, special symbol fluctuations occur a predetermined number of times ( 50 times), the game state shifts from the variable probability game state to the normal game state. Here, when transitioning from the variable probability gaming state to the normal gaming state, it may be possible to pass through another gaming state (intervening gaming state). For example, when special symbol fluctuations occur a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) in the variable probability gaming state, the transition from the variable probability gaming state to the intervening gaming state occurs, and in the intervening gaming state, the special symbol variation occurs a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times). When executed, the intervening gaming state can be configured to transition to the normal gaming state. In the intervening gaming state, a lottery may be performed using a table different from the various tables used in the normal gaming state and the variable probability gaming state (for example, a special symbol variation pattern table).

Further, as the performance mode managed by the sub-control circuit 300, a performance mode (intervention mode) corresponding to the intervening gaming state may be provided. For example, when special symbol fluctuations are performed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 50 times) in the variable probability mode, the transition from the variable probability mode to the intervening mode occurs, and when the special symbol fluctuations are performed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 2 times) in the intervening mode, It may be configured to transition from intervention mode to normal mode. For example, when the fixed variable mode ends, it is possible to display a result screen corresponding to the result during the bonus (for example, an image showing the total number of game balls paid out after entering the first winning mode). It is conceivable that the result screen may continue to be displayed even in the intervention mode.

When transitioning from such an intervention mode to the normal mode, a stage change may always occur (transition to a production stage determined by lottery). In addition, when an irregularity (power outage, etc.) occurs or RAM clear is executed, the gaming state managed by the main control circuit 200 is an intervening gaming state, while the production mode managed by the sub-control circuit 300 It may be configured such that a situation such as that is a predetermined production mode (for example, an image corresponding to the first production stage is displayed) may occur. In this case, it may be possible to stay in the predetermined production mode (for example, the first production stage) until the number of special symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (20 times).

(B-2)
The gaming machine of (B-1) above,
a game control means capable of controlling execution of the game based on one set value among the plurality of set values;
Setting value suggestion means capable of suggesting the setting value,
The plurality of production modes include a first production mode (first production stage) and a second production mode (second production stage),
The production mode control means is capable of transitioning from the first production mode to the second production mode when the specific condition is satisfied,
The setting value suggestion means is capable of suggesting the setting value by a display indicating the specific condition (display of a counter image when a stage change occurs).
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a specific condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after moving to the first presentation stage reaches a predetermined number (20)), the pachinko game machine It is possible to transition from a first production mode (first production stage) to a second production mode (second production stage), and a display indicating the specific condition (display of a counter image when a stage change occurs) The configuration is such that it is possible to suggest setting values by. In this way, since a display indicating the specific condition (display of a counter image when a stage change occurs) is performed, the transition from the first production mode (first production stage) to the second production mode (second production stage) is performed. It is possible to arouse the player's interest in the conditions for transitioning to. At the same time, since it is possible to make the player predict the set value through the display (display of the counter image when a stage change occurs), it is possible to increase the player's interest in the condition.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, while the image indicating the name of the production mode (production stage) after transition is displayed, the content of the display indicating a specific condition (display of the counter image when a stage change occurs) is displayed. This was explained as being reset (recovered). In this way, in the present invention, when a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is met, the transition destination production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) is supported. It is possible to configure so that a display indicating a specific condition (display of a counter image when a stage change occurs) is changed while an image (background, name, etc.) is being displayed.

In the present invention, it is possible to employ the display of a counter image when a stage change occurs as a display indicating a specific condition. The counter image may be a counter image displayed in a stage change game (a special symbol variation in which a stage change is performed), or a counter image displayed in a game before the stage change game (for example, one of the special symbol variations in which a stage change is performed). It may also be a counter image displayed in the previous special symbol variation). For example, it may be configured such that an effect such as changing the color of the counter image to a color corresponding to a set value can be performed in a special symbol variation immediately before a special symbol variation in which a stage change is performed.

(B-3)
The gaming machine of (B-1) or (B-2) above,
Equipped with a performance execution means capable of executing a performance,
The performance execution means is
The first performance mode (the performance mode corresponding to the performance numbers “101” to “103” shown in FIG. 174) and the second performance mode (the performance mode corresponding to the performance numbers “104” and “106” shown in FIG. 174) It is possible to execute a specific performance (sixth preview performance) in any one of a plurality of performance modes including
It is possible to display symbols in mutually different patterns when the specific production is executed in the first production mode and when the specific production is executed in the second production mode. be,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, the first performance mode (performance modes corresponding to performance numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 174) and the second performance mode (performance modes corresponding to performance numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 174) It is possible to execute a specific performance (sixth preview performance) in any one of a plurality of performance modes including the performance modes corresponding to "" and "106". In some cases, a specific performance (the 6th preview performance) is executed in the first performance mode (the performance mode corresponding to the performance numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 174). It is configured such that the symbols can be displayed in different patterns depending on the mode (effect modes corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" shown in FIG. 174). Thereby, it is possible to display the symbols in a pattern according to the production mode, and it is possible to realize a production in which the production mode and the symbol display are appropriately linked.

(B-4)
Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-3) above,
Identification information display means (display device 7) capable of displaying identification information in a fluctuating manner and in a stopped manner;
A performance execution means capable of executing the performance,
The plurality of production modes include a first production mode (first production stage) and a second production mode (second production stage),
Among the plurality of performance modes, first performances (a first preview performance, a second preview performance, a third preview performance, and a fourth preview performance) are provided as performances that can be executed only in the first performance mode. has been
A second performance (eighth preview performance) is provided as a performance that can be executed only in the second performance mode among the plurality of performance modes,
A third performance (sixth preview performance) is provided as a performance that can be executed in both the first performance mode and the second performance mode,
The performance execution means is
The first performance mode (the performance mode corresponding to the performance numbers “101” to “103” shown in FIG. 174) and the second performance mode (the performance mode corresponding to the performance numbers “104” and “106” shown in FIG. 174) It is possible to perform the third performance in any one of a plurality of performance modes including;
In the case where the third effect is executed in the first effect mode and in the case where the third effect is executed in the second effect mode, the identification information is changed after starting the variable display of the identification information. It is possible to display the identification information in mutually different fluctuation patterns as the fluctuation pattern of the identification information until the information is stopped and displayed.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, the first performance mode (performance modes corresponding to performance numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 174) and the second performance mode (performance modes corresponding to performance numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 174) It is possible to execute the third performance (sixth preview performance) in any one of a plurality of performance modes including the performance mode corresponding to "106"), and the third performance (sixth preview performance) In the case where the third performance (sixth preview performance) is executed in the first performance mode (the performance mode corresponding to the performance numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 174), and when the third performance (sixth preview performance) 2 (the performance modes corresponding to the performance numbers "104" and "106" shown in FIG. 174), the identification from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display of the identification information. The configuration is such that the identification information can be displayed in mutually different variation patterns as information variation patterns. Thereby, it is possible to display the identification information in a variable pattern according to the performance mode, and it is possible to realize a performance in which the performance mode and the display of the identification information are appropriately linked. In addition, the first performance (the first preview performance, the second preview performance, the third preview performance, and the fourth preview performance) and the second performance (the eighth preview performance) are respectively in the first performance mode (the first preview performance). The third performance (sixth preview performance) is only possible in the first production mode (first production stage). This is a production that can be executed in both the second production mode (second production stage) and the second production mode (second production stage). Therefore, if a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is satisfied, for example, if a transition is made from the first production mode (first production stage) to the second production mode (second production stage), , while the first performance (first preview performance, second preview performance, third preview performance, and fourth preview performance) will no longer be performed, the second performance (eighth preview performance) will be performed. In addition, it is possible to create a situation in which the third performance (sixth preview performance) continues to be performed. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's interest in each performance mode (performance stage) and specific conditions (stage change occurrence conditions).

In the fifth pachinko game machine, when performances corresponding to performance numbers "104" to "106" are performed, the decorative patterns are varied in a dedicated variation pattern as shown in FIGS. 176(a) to 176(c). This was explained as a way of letting people know. On the other hand, when performances corresponding to performance numbers "101" to "103" are performed, for example, the default variation pattern as shown in FIG. 171(d) (FIGS. 176(a) to (c)) It is possible to vary the decorative pattern using a variation pattern in which the timing of the decorative pattern stopping is earlier than that shown in the variation pattern shown in FIG.

(B-5)
Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-4) above,
The above-mentioned specific condition can be established in response to a variable display of the first symbol (first special symbol variation), but cannot be established in response to a variable display of the second symbol (second special symbol variation). ,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) can be established depending on the variation display of the first symbol (first special symbol variation), while the It is configured such that it cannot be realized depending on the display (second special symbol variation). As a result, in a situation where a variable display of the second symbol (second special symbol variation) is performed, a transition of the production mode (production stage) does not occur, but a variable display of the first symbol (first special symbol variation) In a situation where this is performed, a transition of production mode (production stage) will occur. As a result, the production mode (production stage ) can be characterized as a situation in which a transition occurs, and it is possible to make the situation in which the first symbol variation display (first special symbol variation) is performed more interesting.

(B-6)
Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-5) above,
Identification information display means (first special symbol display section 163) capable of displaying identification information in a fluctuating manner and in a stopped manner;
A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) when a predetermined condition (a game ball enters the first starting port 120) is satisfied;
Display control means capable of causing the identification information display means to display identification information in a variable manner and then to stop displaying the identification information based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means;
Suggestion means capable of making a suggestion (pre-reading performance) regarding the result of the predetermined lottery,
The suggesting means is
In the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied multiple times, the display control is such that the identification information is displayed in a variable manner based on one predetermined condition being met (the held ball in the stage change section) out of the plurality of predetermined conditions being met. When the performance mode is transitioned by the performance mode control means in response to the transition by the performance mode control means, the predetermined condition is satisfied after the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of the one predetermined condition is started. Regarding the predetermined lottery conducted in accordance with the above, while it is possible to give a suggestion regarding the result of the lottery, the predetermined condition is satisfied before the fluctuating display of the identification information based on the establishment of the one predetermined condition is started. Regarding the prescribed lottery held in response to the said lottery, no suggestion can be made regarding the result of said lottery.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the predetermined condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting port 120) is satisfied multiple times, the predetermined condition (the first starting port 120) is satisfied multiple times. When the production mode (production stage) is transitioned in response to the fluctuating display of identification information based on the fulfillment of one of the predetermined conditions (the corresponding held ball in the stage change section) , in response to a predetermined condition (the game ball being placed in the first starting port 120) being met after the variable display of the identification information based on the first predetermined condition being met (the held ball in the stage change section). Regarding the predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) that has been held, it is possible to make suggestions regarding the result of the lottery (pre-reading performance), and to change the identification information based on the fulfillment of the one predetermined condition (the relevant reserved ball in the stage change section). For a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) that is held in response to the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting port 120) before the display starts, suggestions regarding the result of the lottery ( The system is configured in such a way that it is not possible to perform a look-ahead performance. As a result, depending on the relationship between the timing of establishment of each predetermined condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting port 120) and the timing of the variable display at which the transition of the production mode (production stage) will be performed, The number of predetermined lotteries (big hit determinations) in which suggestions regarding the results (pre-read effects) can be made will change. Therefore, compared to the case where the number of predetermined lotteries (jackpot determination) in which no suggestion regarding the result (pre-reading effect) can be made is predetermined, the number of predetermined lotteries in which such suggestion (pre-reading effect) can be made is predetermined. (Jackpot determination) may be increased, and it is possible to provide the player with many opportunities to receive suggestions regarding the results of a predetermined lottery (pre-read performance).

(B-7)
Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-6) above,
A lottery means capable of conducting a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination);
Suggestion means capable of making a suggestion (pre-reading performance) regarding the result of the predetermined lottery;
A transition destination performance mode determining means (sub CPU 301 that executes the process of step S9203 in FIG. 186) capable of determining a transition destination performance mode,
The performance mode control means is capable of transitioning from one performance mode to a transition destination performance mode determined by the transition destination performance mode determination means when the specific condition is satisfied,
The suggesting means is
In the case where the predetermined lottery is held a plurality of times, for the predetermined lottery that is held after the transition destination performance mode is determined by the transition destination performance mode determining means among the plurality of predetermined lottery draws. , while it is possible to make a suggestion regarding the result of the lottery, for the predetermined lottery that was held before the destination performance mode is determined by the transition destination performance mode determining means, it is possible to make a suggestion regarding the result of the lottery. do not have,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) is performed multiple times, the transition destination production mode (production stage) among the plurality of predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) is For a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) that is held after the lottery has been decided, suggestions regarding the result of the lottery (pre-reading performance) can be made. Regarding a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination), it is configured such that no suggestion (pre-reading effect) regarding the result of the lottery can be made. As a result, depending on the context between the timing when each predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) is performed and the timing when the transition destination production mode (production stage) is determined, a predetermined suggestion regarding the result (pre-read production) can be made. The number of drawings (jackpot determination) will change. Therefore, compared to a case where the number of predetermined drawings (jackpot determination) in which a suggestion regarding the result (pre-reading effect) cannot be made is predetermined, the number of predetermined drawings (jackpot determination) in which the suggestion (pre-reading effect) can be made is Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of decisions (judgments), and it is possible to provide players with many opportunities to receive suggestions (pre-read effects) regarding the results of a predetermined lottery.

(B-8)
Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-7) above,
Equipped with a performance execution means capable of executing a performance,
The production mode control means is configured to control the production mode control means when a first condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after moving to the first production stage reaches a predetermined number (20)) is satisfied as the specific condition. In addition, it is possible to transition from one production mode to another production mode,
The performance execution means is
When the performance mode is transitioned by the performance mode control means in response to the first condition being satisfied, a fourth performance (the performance corresponding to performance number "131" shown in FIG. 178) is executed. a first performance execution means capable of
a second performance execution means capable of executing a fifth performance different from the fourth performance (performance corresponding to performance number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177),
The effect mode control means (sub CPU 301 that executes the process of step S9281 in FIG. 189) executes the second condition regarding the fifth effect (the effect shown in FIG. 177) even if the first condition is not satisfied. If the main variation pattern corresponding to the number "121" or "122" is selected), it is possible to transition from one production mode to another production mode.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the first condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after moving to the first production stage reaches a predetermined number (20)), It is possible to transition from one production mode (production stage) to another production mode (production stage), and the first condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after transitioning to the first production stage) is When the transition of the production mode (production stage) is performed in response to reaching a predetermined number of times (20 times), the fourth production (production corresponding to production number "131" shown in FIG. 178) ) is possible. In addition, even if the first condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after moving to the first production stage reaches a predetermined number (20)), the fourth production (figure The second condition (the performance shown in FIG. 177) regarding the fifth performance (the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177) that is different from the performance (the performance corresponding to the performance number "131" shown in FIG. 178) If the main variation pattern corresponding to number "121" or "122" is selected), it is possible to transition from one production mode (production stage) to another production mode (production stage). configured so that it is possible. As a result, the first condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after moving to the first production stage reaches the predetermined number (20)) and the second condition (the production number " 121" or "122"), the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" shown in FIG. 178) and the fifth effect (the effect shown in FIG. 177) Regarding the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" or "122"), it is possible to arouse the player's interest in which conditions are satisfied and which performance occurs. As a result, the development of the production related to the transition of the production mode (production stage) can be made even more interesting.

(B-9)
Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-8) above,
A performance execution means capable of executing the performance,
A performance selection means capable of selecting a performance to be executed by the performance execution means,
The performance mode control means changes from one performance mode to another when a predetermined performance (performance corresponding to performance number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177(a)) is selected by the performance selection means. It is possible to transition to the production mode of
The effect execution means executes the production at any one of a plurality of timings including a first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 177(b)) and a second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 177(b)). , it is possible to execute the predetermined performance,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when a predetermined performance (the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177(a)) is selected, the first performance mode (performance stage) is selected. It is possible to transition from to another production mode (production stage), and the first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 177(b)) and the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 177(b)) The predetermined effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177(a)) can be executed at any one of a plurality of timings including ing. As a result, the predetermined performance related to the conditions for transitioning the performance mode (performance stage) (the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177(a)) is set to the first timing (FIG. 177 Since it occurs at timing 1) shown in (b) or at the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 177(b)), there are many variations in relation to the transition of the production mode (production stage). It is possible to create the development of a performance.

Note that the execution timing of the predetermined performance (the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177(a)) is the first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 177(b)) and the first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 177(b)). In addition to the timing 2 (timing 2 shown in FIG. 177(b)), one or more timings may be provided. For example, while setting the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 177(b)) to be a timing later than the first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 177(b)) by a predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds), At a third timing that is a predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds) later than the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 177(b)), a predetermined effect (effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. It may be configured such that it is possible to execute a performance corresponding to "."

(B-10)
Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-9) above,
A lottery means capable of conducting a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination);
A performance execution means capable of executing the performance,
performance pattern selection means capable of selecting a performance pattern (sub variation pattern) according to the performance executed by the performance execution means;
A performance pattern replacement means (sub CPU 301 that executes the process of step S9210 in FIG. 186) capable of replacing the performance pattern selected by the performance pattern selection means with another performance pattern,
The effect execution means includes a suggestion effect execution means capable of performing a suggestion effect (pre-reading effect) that can suggest the result of the predetermined lottery,
The effect pattern replacing means is configured to select a first effect pattern (sub variation patterns "1" to "20" shown in FIG. 190) by the effect pattern selection means when the suggestive effect is performed by the suggestive effect executing means. is selected, the effect pattern is replaced, while when the second effect pattern (sub variation patterns "21" to "30" shown in FIG. 190) is selected by the effect pattern selection means, does not replace the production pattern,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a suggestive performance (pre-reading performance) that can suggest the result of a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) is performed, the first performance pattern (sub variation pattern "1" shown in FIG. 190) is performed. ” to “20”) is selected, the production pattern (sub variation pattern) is replaced, while the second production pattern (sub variation pattern “21” to “30” shown in FIG. 190) is selected. If so, the production pattern (sub variation pattern) is configured not to be replaced. In this way, as the first step in determining a performance pattern (sub-variation pattern), one performance pattern (sub-variation pattern) is selected without considering whether or not a suggestive performance (pre-reading performance) will be performed. Then, as a second step, when a suggestive performance (pre-reading performance) is performed, an appropriate performance pattern is created according to the suggestive performance (pre-reading performance) by replacing the performance pattern (sub-fluctuation pattern) as necessary. In determining the (sub-variation pattern), it is possible to improve the efficiency of processing.

(B-11)
Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-10) above,
Equipped with a performance execution means capable of executing a performance,
The production mode control means is
If the first condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after moving to the first production stage reaches a predetermined number (20)) is met as the specific condition, the first production mode is changed. A first performance mode control means capable of transitioning to another performance mode;
When the second condition (the main variation pattern corresponding to the performance number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177 is selected) is satisfied as the specific condition, the transition from one performance mode to another performance mode is established. a second production mode control means capable of transitioning to;
The performance execution means is
When the first performance mode control means changes the performance mode in response to the first condition being satisfied, the fourth performance (the performance corresponding to the performance number "131" shown in FIG. 178) is executed. a first performance execution means capable of executing;
When the transition of the performance mode is performed by the second performance mode control means in response to the fulfillment of the second condition, the fifth performance (corresponding to the performance number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177) a second performance execution means capable of executing a performance);
If both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the first effect execution means does not execute the fourth effect, and the second effect execution means executes the fourth effect. It is possible to carry out the performance of 5.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the first condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after moving to the first production stage reaches a predetermined number (20)), It is possible to transition from one production mode (production stage) to another production mode (production stage), and the first condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after transitioning to the first production stage) is When the transition of the production mode (production stage) is performed in response to reaching a predetermined number of times (20 times), the fourth production (production corresponding to production number "131" shown in FIG. 178) ) is possible. In addition, when the second condition (the main variation pattern corresponding to the production number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. mode (production stage), and the second condition (the main variation pattern corresponding to the production number “121” or “122” shown in FIG. 177 is selected) is satisfied. When the production mode (production stage) is changed accordingly, it is possible to execute the fifth production (the production corresponding to production number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177). Then, the first condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after moving to the first production stage reaches a predetermined number (20)) and the second condition (production number "121" shown in FIG. 177) ” or the main variation pattern corresponding to “122” is selected), the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number “131” shown in FIG. 178) is not executed. The configuration is such that the fifth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177) can be performed without the need to perform. In this way, the first condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after moving to the first production stage reaches the predetermined number (20)) and the second condition (the production number shown in FIG. 177) If the main variation pattern corresponding to "121" or "122" is selected), than the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" shown in FIG. 178) By preferentially executing the fifth performance (the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177), the fourth performance (the performance corresponding to the performance number "131" shown in FIG. 178) is executed. ) does not occur, giving the player a sense of surprise, and increasing the player's interest in the fifth performance (the performance corresponding to performance number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177).

In the fifth pachinko game machine, the fifth performance (the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177) is better than the fourth performance (the performance corresponding to the performance number "131" shown in FIG. 178). It was explained that the performance (direction) can be executed preferentially. On the other hand, in a situation where the predetermined effect and the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" shown in FIG. 178) can be performed, the fourth effect (the effect shown in FIG. 178) is more effective than the predetermined effect. The effect corresponding to the number "131") may be configured to be executed preferentially. The predetermined performance includes a performance performed when a special symbol variation starts (for example, a symbol action preview performance). The symbol action preview performance is a performance that generates a predetermined effect on the decorative design at the start of special symbol variation. Even if it is decided to generate a symbol action preview performance at the start of one special symbol variation, the symbol action preview performance is not performed when a stage change is performed in the special symbol variation. It is possible to do so.

(B-12)
Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-11) above,
A symbol display means capable of displaying symbols in a fluctuating manner and in a stopped manner;
a performance execution means capable of executing a performance in one of a plurality of performance patterns (performance patterns corresponding to performance numbers "161" to "163" shown in FIG. 194);
performance pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of performance patterns as a performance pattern to be executed by the performance execution means;
The symbol display means is capable of temporarily stopping and displaying the symbol before the symbol is finally stopped and displayed,
The performance execution means executes one of the performance patterns among the plurality of performance patterns in a first pseudo game ("pseudo 1") after the fluctuating display of the symbols starts until the symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. After performing the performance, in the second pseudo game (``pseudo 2'') after the fluctuating display of symbols is restarted, it is possible to execute the performance with one of the performance patterns among the plurality of performance patterns. can be,
The effect pattern selection means (sub CPU 301 that executes the process of step S9363 in FIG. 198 and the process of step S9473 in FIG. 202) selects the pattern of the effect to be performed in the second pseudo game, and then selects the effect pattern based on the pattern. , it is possible to select a pattern of performance performed in the first pseudo game;
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, in the first pseudo game ("pseudo 1") after the fluctuating display of symbols starts until the symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, a plurality of performance patterns (see FIG. 194) are performed. A second pseudo game (“pseudo 2”) after the fluctuating display of symbols is resumed after the performance is executed with one of the performance patterns (performance patterns corresponding to the performance numbers “161” to “163”) shown in FIG. In this case, it is possible to perform a performance using one of a plurality of performance patterns (performance patterns corresponding to performance numbers "161" to "163" shown in FIG. 194). After selecting the pattern of the performance to be performed in the second pseudo game ("Pseudo 2"), based on the selected pattern, the pattern of the performance to be performed in the first pseudo game ("Pseudo 1") is selected. configured so that it is possible. Thereby, it is possible to easily design the development of the effects performed from the first pseudo game ("pseudo 1") to the second pseudo game ("pseudo 2").

[7-10. Appendix 10]
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, an image is displayed when a predetermined variable display start condition is met, such as when a game ball has passed through a passage area provided in a rolling game area. Control is executed to variably display symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, control is executed to derive and display the variably displayed symbols, and the derived and displayed symbols are combined in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), there is a system that shifts to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-110576).

In the process of intensively studying the above-mentioned gaming machines, the present inventor came up with the idea that it would be possible to improve the interest in gaming by devising a change time for identification information. .

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

In this regard, the fifth pachinko gaming machine has the following features.

(C-1) A first lottery means capable of conducting a first lottery (normal lottery);
a second lottery means capable of conducting a second lottery (second special lottery);
a first display means (normal symbol display section 161) capable of displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then stopping the display based on the result of the first lottery performed by the first lottery means;
a second display means (second special symbol display section 164) capable of displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then stopping the display based on the result of the second lottery performed by the second lottery means; Prepare,
The first display means is capable of variably displaying the identification information over a first time (500 ms) when the first lottery result is a first result (normal symbol win). On the other hand, when the result of the first lottery is a second result (usually a loss), the identification information is displayed in a fluctuating manner over a second time (600,000 ms) that is longer than the first time. is possible,
The second display means variably displays the identification information over a third time (1000 ms) shorter than the second time when the result of the second lottery is a specific result (small win). It is possible to
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the first result (normal symbol winning), the identification information is changed over the first time (500ms). On the other hand, if the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the second result (normal loss), a second time (600000ms) longer than the first time (500ms) is displayed. ) It is possible to display the identification information in a variable manner. In addition, when the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is a specific result (small win), the identification information is stored for a third time (1000ms) shorter than the second time (600000ms). It is configured so that it can be displayed in a variable manner. As a result, while the fluctuating display (first fluctuating display) of the identification information is being performed when the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the second result (normal loss), the second lottery It is possible to complete the variable display (second variable display) of the identification information when the result of the (second special lottery) is a specific result (small win). Therefore, it is possible to create novel gameplay using the time from when the second variable display ends until the first variable display ends, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(C-2) The gaming machine according to (C-1) above,
A first winning means (ordinary electric accessory unit 145) into which game balls can enter;
A second winning means (big winning opening 151 for small winnings) into which game balls can enter;
a first prize-winning means capable of controlling the first prize-winning means so that when the result of the first lottery is the first result, the game ball enters the first prize-winning means more easily; 1 control means;
When the identification information is displayed variably over at least the second time period by the first display means, if the result of the second lottery is the specific result, the second prize winning means a second control means capable of controlling the second winning means so that the game ball enters easily;
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the first result (normal symbol per winning), the first winning means (normal electric accessory unit 145) receives the game. It is possible to control the first winning means (normal electric accessory unit 145) so that the ball enters easily, and at least the first display means (normal symbol display section 161) can control the second winning means (normal symbol display section 161). When the identification information is displayed variably over a period of time (600,000 ms), if the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is a specific result (small win), the second winning means (small win) is displayed. It is configured to be able to control the second winning means (large winning opening 151 for small winnings) so that game balls can easily enter the large winning opening 151). As a result, a second result (normally per symbol) different from the first result (per normal symbol) is triggered to perform control that makes it easier for game balls to enter the first winning means (normally electric accessory unit 145). If a loss (loss) occurs, while the fluctuation display (first fluctuation display) of the identification information based on the second result (normal loss) occurs, the second winning means (large prize opening for small winnings) 151), it is possible to perform control to make it easier for game balls to enter the ball, and by using the time until the first variable display ends, the second winning means (big winning opening 151 for small winnings) It is possible to create a situation where it is easy for game balls to enter the ball.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, while the identification information fluctuation display (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) based on the second result (normal loss) is being performed, the second winning means (large winning opening for small winnings) is displayed. 151) was explained as creating a situation in which it is easy for game balls to enter the ball. The second result in the present invention is not limited to a loss (ordinary loss), but may be a hit (ordinary symbol hit). Note that the second time can be about 10 to 100,000 times (or 100 to 10,000 times, 500 to 5,000 times, 1,000 to 2,000 times, etc.) the first time. The time can be approximately 5 to 10,000 times (or 100 to 5,000 times, 500 to 1,000 times, etc.) the third time. In addition, the time during which control is performed to make it easier for game balls to enter the first winning means (normal electric accessory unit 145) is 0.5 to 50 times (or 1 to 1 times) the first time. 10 times, 2 times to 5 times, etc.). In addition, the time during which control is performed to make it easier for game balls to enter the second winning means (big winning opening 151 for small winnings) is 0.5 to 100 times (or 1 times) the third time. 50 times, 2 times to 10 times, etc.).

(C-3) The gaming machine of (C-1) or (C-2) above,
A pattern display means (display device 7) capable of displaying a pattern;
A symbol performance execution means capable of executing a symbol performance (drum variation performance) in which a plurality of symbols are displayed on the symbol display means;
The symbol production execution means is configured to cause one symbol of the plurality of symbols to be different from at least one of the remaining symbols when the result of the first lottery is the first result. On the other hand, when the result of the first lottery is the second result, the symbol presentation is executed so that the plurality of symbols all have the same symbol. It is possible to
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the first result (normal symbol per winning), one symbol among the plurality of symbols is the same as the remaining symbols. While it is possible to perform a symbol performance (drum variation performance) that is different from at least one of the symbols, if the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the second result (normal loss), is configured to be able to execute a pattern effect (drum variation effect) so that all the plurality of patterns become the same pattern. This allows the player to understand that the identification information is displayed in a variable manner over a relatively long time (second time (600,000 ms)) by displaying all the same symbols as multiple symbols. I can do it.

(C-4) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-3) above,
An image display means (display device 7) capable of displaying an image;
image display control means capable of controlling image display in the image display means;
A state control means capable of controlling to any one of a plurality of states including a first state (normal mode) and a second state (variable variable mode),
When the image display control means is controlled to the second state, the image display control means displays predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and , right drum symbol 9202R) on the image display means, while not displaying the predetermined image on the image display means when controlled in the first state.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the machine is controlled in the second state (variable probability mode), a predetermined image corresponding to the display mode of the identification information on the first display means (normal symbol display section 161) is displayed. (Left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R), while being controlled to the first state (normal mode), the predetermined image ( The left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R) are configured not to be displayed. As a result, compared to the first state (normal mode), the second state (probable variable mode) is changed to an effect (predetermined image It is possible to make the player aware of the state in which (production using the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) is performed.

(C-5) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-4) above,
A performance execution means capable of executing the performance,
A state control means capable of controlling to any one of a plurality of states including a first state (normal mode) and a second state (variable variable mode),
The state control means is capable of ending the second state when a predetermined number of unit games (50 times) are played in the second state,
When the result of the first lottery is the second result, the performance execution means executes a predetermined performance (drum play based on a winning pattern) according to the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state. There are cases in which a variable effect) is executed and cases in which the predetermined effect is not executed.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when a predetermined number of unit games (50 times) are played in the second state (variable probability mode), it is possible to end the second state (variable probability mode). be. In addition, when the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the second result (normal loss), a predetermined performance is performed according to the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (variable probability mode). The system is configured such that there are cases in which the predetermined effect (drum variation effect based on the winning pattern) is executed and cases in which the predetermined effect (drum variation effect based on the winning pattern) is not executed. In this regard, if the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (variable probability mode) is small (for example, the time required to execute the remaining unit games in the second state (variable probability mode) is In a situation where the identification information fluctuation display time is relatively short compared to the second time (600000ms) when the result of the lottery (normal lottery) is the second result (normal loss) In this case, the significance of the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) becoming the second result (normal lottery) may be diminished. According to the invention (5), it is possible to prevent the predetermined performance (drum fluctuation performance based on the winning pattern) from occurring in such a case, so that the performance can be appropriately realized according to the game situation. I can do it.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, when the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (variable probability mode) is a specific number (10 times) or more, the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the first lottery. It has been explained that a predetermined effect (drum variation effect based on the winning pattern) is performed based on the result of 2 (normal symbol loss length variation). Here, as the second result (normal symbol loss length variation), multiple variation times (for example, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds, 300 seconds, , 600 seconds, etc.), the specific number of times may be varied depending on the determined variable time. For example, in a variable probability game state, when the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is a loss, the identification information fluctuation display time is 5 seconds, and the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is 5 seconds. It is assumed that the total time of the variable display time of the identification information in the case of a small win and the opening time of the second winning means (large winning opening 151 for small winning) is 5 seconds. In such a form, if 60 seconds is determined as the variation time corresponding to the second result (normal symbol loss length variation), the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (probability variation mode) is 12. If it is more than twice, the variable display can be almost completed during the second state (variable probability mode). In this case, the specific number of times can be set to 12 times. In this way, the value obtained by dividing the determined normal symbol fluctuation time by the expected value of the special symbol fluctuation time (for small winnings, the total time of the special symbol fluctuation time and the opening time of the small winning winning opening) The number of times corresponding to the above may be determined as the specific number of times.

Furthermore, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the determination as to whether the remaining number of executable unit games (remaining ST number) is equal to or greater than a specific number (10) in the second state (variable probability mode) It has been explained that this is done when the passage through the gate that triggered the 1st lottery (normal lottery) occurs. In the present invention, the determination may be made when the normal symbol fluctuation corresponding to passing through the gate starts. Therefore, even if the remaining number of times (remaining ST number) at the time when the gate passage occurs is more than the specified number (10 times), the remaining number of times (remaining ST number) at the time when the normal symbol fluctuation starts is If it is less than the number of times (10 times), the predetermined performance (drum fluctuation performance based on the winning pattern) may not be performed.

As explained in the fifth pachinko game machine, the predetermined images based on the winning pattern (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) are identification information based on the second result (normal loss). It is possible to configure the display so that it is stopped and displayed before the variable display (normal symbol loss length variation) starts. After the stop display of the predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) ends, a winning notification effect (see FIG. 207(k)) is performed. It is preferable that the winning notification performance ends at the same time as the normal symbol loss length variation starts. As a result, the performance mode can be divided such that while the winning notification performance is being performed, the mode is variable probability mode, while after the winning notification performance is being performed, the mode is the first bonus mode. In the variable probability mode, for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 224 and 225 are performed, and in the first bonus mode, for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 218 to 221 are performed. In addition, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to a jackpot (for example, 10R jackpot) on the second display means (second special symbol display section 164) while the winning notification performance is being performed (jackpot game If the start condition of the state is satisfied), a predetermined jackpot effect is performed. This causes the game to shift to the first bonus mode. The predetermined jackpot performance can be the same performance as the performance that is performed when the start conditions for the jackpot game state are met at other timings during the variable probability mode (when the winning announcement performance is not performed). be. On the other hand, when the start condition for the jackpot game state is satisfied in the first bonus mode, a performance different from the predetermined jackpot performance may be performed.

(C-6) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-5) above,
An image display means (display device 7) capable of displaying an image;
and an image display control means capable of controlling image display in the image display means,
The image display control means displays, in the image display means, a display according to the variation time of the identification information in the first display means, and changes the mode of the display over time so that the display becomes gradually lighter. Is possible,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, the first display means (normal symbol display section 161) displays the identification information in accordance with the variation time, and the mode of the display is changed over time so that the display gradually becomes lighter. It is configured so that it can be changed to Thereby, the fluctuation time of the identification information on the first display means (normal symbol display section 161) can be burned into the player's mind, making the player strongly aware of the time.

(C-7) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-6) above,
An image display means (display device 7) capable of displaying an image;
an image display control means capable of controlling image display in the image display means,
The image display control means includes:
A first image that allows the image display means to display a predetermined image (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) corresponding to the display mode of identification information on the first display means. Display control means;
a second image display control means capable of displaying a time in accordance with the variation time of the identification information on the first display means (displaying a normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image) on the image display means;
The first image display control means does not display the predetermined image on the image display means when the time display is being performed.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) corresponding to the display mode of identification information on the first display means (normal symbol display section 161) are displayed. ), and it is also possible to display the time (display of the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image) according to the variation time of the identification information on the first display means (normal symbol display section 161). It is possible. Then, when the time display (display of normal symbol loss length variable remaining time image) is being performed, the predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) are not displayed. It is configured as follows. Thereby, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the time display (display of the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image), and it is possible to make the player strongly aware of the time.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the second result (normal symbol loss length variation), the time display (display of the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image) is This has been described as being performed (see FIG. 210). The time may be the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation at the time when one normal symbol loss length variation starts (i.e., the variation time itself of the normal symbol variation related to the normal symbol loss length variation). , it may be the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation at a point in time when one normal symbol loss length variation is being performed.

In the present invention, the situation in which the time display (the display of the normal symbol loss length variable remaining time image) is performed is not particularly limited, and the result of the first lottery (regular lottery) is the first result (normal symbol per). In some cases, or when the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is a predetermined result (loss or jackpot), a time display (display of normal symbol loss length variable remaining time image) may be performed. good. For example, in a situation where the remaining time of normal symbol loss length variation is less than a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), all the pending variation patterns of normal symbol variations correspond to the first result (per normal symbol). A configuration in which a time display (display of normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image) is performed when the pattern is a fluctuation pattern, or when the result of jackpot determination regarding all pending special symbol fluctuations is a loss. It is possible to adopt Thereby, the player can be made aware that the remaining time for normal symbol loss length variation is getting shorter.

(C-8) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-7) above,
A performance execution means capable of executing the performance,
A state control means capable of controlling to any one of a plurality of states including a specific state (second bonus mode),
When the specific state ends and part or all of the second time period has elapsed, the performance execution means determines the remaining time of the second time period (normal symbol loss length fluctuation). It is possible to perform performances according to the remaining time).
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when a part or all of the second time (600000ms) has elapsed when the specific state (second bonus mode) ends, the second It is configured so that it is possible to execute a performance according to the remaining time (the remaining time of normal symbol loss length fluctuation). As a result, when the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the second result (normal loss), the fluctuating display of the identification information (first fluctuating display) and the specific state (second bonus mode) are different. In a situation that occurs in a superimposed manner, the content of the performance is varied depending on how much time of the variable display (second time) remains at the end of the specific state (second bonus mode). be able to. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the remaining time of the second period (the remaining time of normal symbol loss length variation), and it is possible to make the player strongly aware of the remaining time.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the first variable display (normal symbol loss length variation) continues at the time when the specific state (second bonus mode) ends, the remaining time of the second time ( It was explained that the performance is performed according to the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation). In the present invention, the first variation display (normal symbol loss length variation) may end at the time when the specific state (second bonus mode) ends. That is, when the specific state (second bonus mode) ends, when the first fluctuation display (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) ends (when the remaining time of the second time is 0); Different effects may be performed depending on when the first variable display (normal symbol loss length variation) continues (when the remaining time of the second time is not 0).

If the first variation display (normal symbol loss length variation) continues at the end of the specific state (second bonus mode), the first lottery display (normal symbol loss length variation) in the second state (probable variation mode) The result of the lottery) becomes the second result (normal loss), the first variable display (normal symbol loss length variation) corresponding to the first lottery (normal lottery) occurs, and the first variable display (normal symbol loss length variation) occurs. While the normal symbol loss length variation) is being performed, it moves to a specific state (second bonus mode), and even when the specific state (second bonus mode) ends, the first variation display (normal If symbol loss length fluctuation) continues, and in certain conditions (second bonus mode), the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) becomes the second result (normal loss), and the result of the first lottery The first variable display (normal symbol loss length variation) corresponding to (normal lottery) occurs, and at the time the specific state (second bonus mode) ends, the first variable display (normal symbol loss length variation) It is possible to assume that the situation continues. Here, in a specific state (second bonus mode), the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) becomes the second result (normal lottery), and the first variation corresponding to the first lottery (normal lottery) If the display (normal symbol loss length variation) occurs, the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) becomes the second result (normal loss) in the second state (variable probability mode), and the result of the first lottery A performance (special performance) different from the performance performed when the first variable display (normal symbol loss length variation) corresponding to (normal lottery) occurs may be performed.

(C-9) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-8) above,
A performance execution means capable of executing the performance,
A state control means capable of controlling to any one of a plurality of states including a first state (normal mode) and a second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode),
The state control means is capable of ending the second state when a predetermined number of unit games (50 times) are played in the second state,
The performance execution means executes a performance according to the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number) when the identification information is displayed in a variable manner over the second time period. It is possible to
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when a predetermined number of unit games (50 times) are performed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode), the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is activated. It is possible to terminate it. In addition, when the identification information is displayed variably over the second time period (600000ms), the number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is changed according to the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number). It is configured such that it is possible to execute a performance. As a result, if the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is large (a situation where the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) continues for the time being) ), or when the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is small (the end of the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is approaching (situations such as this), it is possible to appropriately realize effects according to the gaming situation.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, when the remaining number of executable unit games (remaining ST number) in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times (5 times), ), the content of the performance may differ depending on the case. In the present invention, it is possible to divide the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) into a plurality of periods, and to vary the contents of the effects performed in each period. The plurality of periods include, for example, a period in which the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is equal to or greater than the first predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times). (first period), the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is greater than or equal to the second predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more than the first predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times), the remaining number of unit games that can be performed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) (remaining ST number) is a third predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times). In the period (third period) in which the number of times is less than the second predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is the fourth The remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) during a period (fourth period) that is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times) and less than a third predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) It is possible to set a period (fifth period) in which (remaining number of STs) is a fifth predetermined number of times (for example, one time).

(C-10)
Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-9) above,
Equipped with a performance execution means capable of executing a performance,
The effect executing means is configured to perform a suggestive effect (pre-reading of ordinary symbols) that may suggest that the result of the first lottery has become the second result while the identification information is being displayed in a variable manner on the second display means. It is possible to perform
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, while the identification information is being displayed in a variable manner on the second display means (second special symbol display section 164), the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is changed to the second result. The structure is such that it is possible to execute a suggestive effect (ordinary map pre-reading effect) that can suggest that the game has ended in a loss (ordinary loss). As a result, the first display means (normal symbol display section 161) through the suggestion performance (normal symbol pre-reading performance) performed while the identification information is being displayed in a variable manner on the second display means (second special symbol display section 164). The player can expect that the identification information will be displayed in a variable manner over a relatively long period of time (second period (600,000 ms)).

201, 1201, 2201 Main CPU
301, 1301, 2301 Sub CPU
120, 120A, 120B, 1120, 2120 1st starting port 140A, 140B, 1140, 2140 2nd starting port

Claims (2)

a main control means for controlling the progress of the game;
A gaming machine equipped with a presentation control means for controlling presentations,
The main control means is
a starting information acquisition means for acquiring starting information when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
a lottery means that can draw any one of a plurality of results including a special result and a specific result using the start information when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied;
a symbol control means capable of variably displaying symbols based on the establishment of the variation start condition;
a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state;
Prior to the lottery performed by the lottery means, advance determination means is capable of determining the result of the lottery in advance;
information transmitting means for transmitting information related to the progress of the game to the performance control means;
has
The gaming state control means includes:
Normal gaming state and
a special gaming state that is a gaming state that can be transitioned to when the special result is derived;
A gaming state that can be transitioned to when the specific result is derived, and a specific game in which the probability that the special result is derived is the same as the normal gaming state, but the degree of advantage for the player is different from the normal gaming state. state, and can be controlled to any one of a plurality of game states including
The specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state to which the special gaming state is shifted after being controlled to the special gaming state based on the derivation of the special result, and a first specific gaming state to which the special gaming state is transferred based on the derivation of the specific result. at least a second specific gaming state different from the first specific gaming state that is transferred without being controlled by the state ,
The performance control means is
Having a preceding effect control means for controlling such that a preceding effect is performed prior to the variable display of the symbol when information indicating a result of the preceding judgment by the preceding determining means is received from the information transmitting means,
The advance performance includes a first advance performance that can be executed when the information indicating the result of the advance determination by the advance determination means is the special result, and a first advance performance that can be executed when the result of the advance determination by the advance determination means is the specific result. at least a second preceding performance that can be executed and has a different presentation form from the first preceding performance,
The preceding performance control means is
The earlier starting information among the starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means is determined to be the identification result by the preceding determining means, and the earlier starting information among the starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means In the case where the starting information acquired after the starting information is determined to be the special result by the preceding determining means,
When the second advance effect is executed based on the determination result of the earlier start information, control is possible such that the first advance effect is not executed based on the determination result of the later start information;
When the second advance performance is not executed based on the determination result of the earlier start information, control is possible such that the first advance performance can be executed based on the determination result of the later start information;
Regarding the preceding performance executed by the preceding performance control means, the rate at which the first preceding performance is executed and the rate at which the second preceding performance is executed are configured to be different,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the fluctuation start condition is relatively more likely to be satisfied than the second specific gaming state. a main control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a performance control means for controlling the performance;
Equipped with
The main control means includes:
a starting information acquisition means for acquiring starting information when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
a lottery means that can draw any one of a plurality of results including a special result and a specific result using the start information when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied;
a symbol control means capable of variably displaying symbols based on the establishment of the variation start condition;
a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state;
Prior to the lottery performed by the lottery means, advance determination means is capable of determining the result of the lottery in advance;
information transmitting means for transmitting information related to the progress of the game to the performance control means;
has
The gaming state control means includes:
Normal gaming state and
a special gaming state that is a gaming state that can be transitioned to when the special result is derived;
A gaming state that can be transitioned to when the specific result is derived, and a specific game in which the probability that the special result is derived is the same as the normal gaming state, but the degree of advantage for the player is different from the normal gaming state. state, and can be controlled to any one of a plurality of gaming states, including
The specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state to which the special gaming state is shifted after being controlled to the special gaming state based on the derivation of the special result, and a first specific gaming state to which the special gaming state is transferred based on the derivation of the specific result. at least a second specific gaming state different from the first specific gaming state that is transferred without being controlled by the state ,
The performance control means is
Having a preceding effect control means for controlling such that a preceding effect is performed prior to the variable display of the symbol when information indicating a result of the preceding judgment by the preceding determining means is received from the information transmitting means,
The advance performance includes a first advance performance that can be executed when the information indicating the result of the advance determination by the advance determination means is the special result, and a first advance performance that can be executed when the result of the advance determination by the advance determination means is the specific result. at least a second preceding performance that can be executed and has a different presentation form from the first preceding performance,
The preceding performance control means is
The earlier starting information among the starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means is determined to be the special result by the preceding determining means, and the earlier starting information among the starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means When the starting information obtained after the starting information is determined to be the specific result by the preceding determining means,
When the first advance effect is executed based on the determination result of the earlier start information, control is possible so as not to execute the second advance effect based on the determination result of the later start information;
When the first advance effect is not executed based on the determination result of the earlier start information, control is possible such that the second advance effect can be executed based on the determination result of the later start information;
Regarding the preceding performance executed by the preceding performance control means, the rate at which the first preceding performance is executed and the rate at which the second preceding performance is executed are configured to be different,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the fluctuation start condition is relatively more likely to be satisfied than the second specific gaming state.

Images